Table of Contents
- Cover
- Contents
- Basic Printing Workflow
- Enhanced Printing Options
- Choosing Paper for Printing
- Printing Photos and Office Documents
- Printing CAD Drawings
- Adjusting Images
- Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver
- Fine-Tuning Colors of Photos and Images (Windows)
- Fine-Tuning Colors of Photos and Images (Mac OS)
- Giving Priority to Particular Graphic Elements and Colors for Printing
- Choosing the Document Type and Printing Conditions (Windows)
- Choosing the Document Type and Printing Conditions (Mac OS)
- Printing enlargements or reductions
- Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size
- Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size (Windows)
- Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width
- Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (Windows)
- Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (Mac OS)
- Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value
- Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value (Windows)
- Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value (Mac OS)
- Printing at full size
- Borderless Printing
- Borderless Printing on Paper of Equivalent Size
- Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size (Windows)
- Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width
- Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (Windows)
- Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (Mac OS)
- Printing banners or at other non-standard sizes
- Printing Vertical or Horizontal Banners (Large-Format Printing)
- Printing Vertical or Horizontal Banners (Large-Format Printing; Windows)
- Printing Vertical or Horizontal Banners (Large-Format Printing; Mac OS)
- Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes
- Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes (Windows)
- Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes (Mac OS)
- Tiling and multiple pages per sheet
- Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other
- Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other (Windows)
- Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other (Mac OS)
- Printing Multiple Pages Continuously
- Printing Multiple Pages Continuously (Windows)
- Printing Multiple Pages Continuously (Mac OS)
- Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet
- Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet (Windows)
- Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet (Mac OS)
- Printing Posters in Sections
- Printing Large Posters (Windows)
- Centering originals
- Conserving roll paper
- Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90 Degrees
- Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90 Degrees (Windows)
- Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90 Degrees (Mac OS)
- Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without Top and Bottom Margins
- Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without Top and Bottom Margins (Windows)
- Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without Top and Bottom Margins (Mac OS)
- Checking Images Before Printing
- Other useful settings
- Printing With Watermarks
- Printing with Watermarks—COPY, FILE COPY, and so on (Windows)
- Making the Original Orientation Match the Paper Orientation
- Making the Original Orientation Match the Paper Orientation (Windows)
- Making the Original Orientation Match the Paper Orientation (Mac OS)
- Using Favorites
- Cutting Roll Paper After Printing
- Cutting Roll Paper After Printing (Windows)
- Cutting Roll Paper After Printing (Mac OS)
- Windows Software
- Printer Driver
- Printer Driver Settings
- Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver
- Confirming Print Settings
- Checking the Layout in a Preview Before Printing
- Using Favorites
- Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from Applications
- Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from the Operating System Menu
- Main Sheet
- Paper Information on Printer Dialog Box
- Paper Detailed Settings Dialog Box
- View Settings Dialog Box for the Printing Application
- Color Adjustment Sheet: Color
- Object Adjustment Dialog box: Color
- Matching Sheet
- Color Adjustment Sheet: Monochrome
- Object Adjustment Dialog box: Monochrome
- Page Setup Sheet
- Output Method Dialog box
- Paper Size Options Dialog Box
- Layout Sheet
- Page Options Dialog Box
- Special Settings Dialog Box
- Favorites Sheet
- Utility Sheet
- Support Sheet
- Settings Summaries Dialog Box
- Device Settings Sheet
- Preview
- Free Layout
- The Features of Free Layout
- Starting Free Layout
- Free Layout Main Window
- Detailed Settings
- Preferences Dialog Box
- Page Options Dialog Box
- Zoom Dialog Box
- Format Dialog Box
- Laying out a Multiple-File Document on One Page
- Laying out a Document Created with Multiple Application Programs on One Page
- Selecting an Object
- Changing the Object Size
- Moving an Object
- Rotating an Object
- Laying out Objects Automatically
- Aligning Objects
- Changing the Object Overlapping Order
- Pasting a Copied or Cut Object
- Folded Duplex Window
- Finished Size Settings Dialog Box
- Binding Settings Dialog Box
- Prints using Folded Duplex
- Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy
- The Features of Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy
- Starting Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy
- Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy Dialog Box
- Hot Folder
- Creating a New Hot Folder
- Specifying an Existing Shared Folder as a Hot Folder
- Setting the Print Parameters
- Printing Enlargements of Scanned Originals from a Color imageRUNNER
- Print Plug-In for Office
- Print Plug-In for Officefeatures
- Steps to install
- Steps to uninstall
- When Print Plug-In for Office is not displayed
- To start from Microsoft Word
- Print Matching Roll Width(Word)
- Borderless Printing(Word)
- Multi-Page Printing(Word)
- Register the settings (Word)
- Print Using Registered Settings(Word)
- Portrait Orientation/Landscape Orientation(Word)
- To start from Microsoft PowerPoint
- Print Matching Roll Width(PowerPoint)
- Borderless Printing(PowerPoint)
- Multi-Page Printing(PowerPoint)
- Register the settings (PowerPoint)
- Print Using Registered Settings(PowerPoint)
- Portrait Orientation/Landscape Orientation(PowerPoint)
- To start from Microsoft Excel
- Print Entire Sheet(Excel)
- Print Selected Area(Excel)
- Configuring Binding (Excel)
- Configuring Special Settings
- Printer Driver
- Mac OS Software
- Printer Driver
- Printer Driver Settings
- Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver
- Confirming Print Settings
- Checking the Layout in a Preview Before Printing
- Using Favorites
- Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from Applications
- Main Pane
- Paper Detailed Settings Dialog Box
- View set. Dialog Box for the Printing Application
- Matching pane
- Color Settings Pane: Color
- Object Adjustment dialog box: Color
- Color Settings Pane: Monochrome
- Object Adjustment dialog box: Monochrome
- Page Setup Pane
- Additional Settings Pane
- Preview
- The Features of Preview
- Starting Preview
- Preview Main Window
- Paper Settings Panel
- Easy Settings
- Advanced Settings
- Output Settings Panel
- Color Settings Panel
- Color Adjustment
- Matching
- Driver Matching Mode
- ICC Matching Mode
- ColorSync
- Preferences Dialog Box
- Zoom Dialog Box
- Go to Page Dialog Box
- Print with No Borders
- Print on the Center
- Not Print Spaces at the Top/Bottom
- Print Page Rotated 90 Degrees
- Display with Fitting to the Width of the Paper
- Display with All
- Display with Actual Size
- Moving a Page
- Free Layout
- The Features of Free Layout
- Starting Free Layout
- Free Layout Main Window
- Paper Settings Panel
- Easy Settings
- Advanced Settings
- Color Settings Panel
- Color Adjustment
- Matching
- Driver Matching Mode
- ICC Matching Mode
- ColorSync
- Preferences Dialog Box
- Page Setup Dialog Box
- Zoom Dialog Box
- Format Dialog Box
- Laying out a Multiple-File Document on One Page
- Laying out a Document Created with Multiple Application Programs on One Page
- Selecting an Object
- Changing the Object Size
- Moving an Object
- Rotating an Object
- Laying out Objects Automatically
- Aligning Objects
- Changing the Object Overlapping Order
- Pasting a Copied or Cut Object
- Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy
- The Features of Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy
- Starting Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy
- Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy Dialog Box
- Hot Folder
- Creating a New Hot Folder
- Editing a Hot Folder (Setting Print Conditions)
- Deleting a Hot Folder
- Setting the Print Parameters
- Paper Settings Panel
- Easy Settings
- Advanced Settings
- Output Settings Panel
- Color Settings Panel
- Driver Matching Mode
- ICC Matching Mode
- Printing Enlargements of Scanned Originals from a Color imageRUNNER
- Printer Driver
- Handling and Use of Paper
- Paper
- Handling rolls
- Attaching the Roll Holder to Rolls
- Loading Rolls in the Printer
- Changing the Type of Paper
- Specifying the Paper Length
- Removing the Roll from the Printer
- Removing the Roll Holder from Rolls
- Feeding Roll Paper Manually
- Keeping Track of the Amount of Roll Paper Left
- Specifying the Ink Drying Time for Rolls
- Specifying the Cutting Method for Rolls
- Cutting the Leading Edge of Roll Paper Automatically
- Reducing Dust from Cutting Rolls
- Handling sheets
- Output Stacker
- Media Configuration Tool (Windows)
- The Features of Media Configuration Tool
- Installation Procedures
- Starting Method
- Media Configuration Tool Main Window
- Editing Media Type Information for Genuine Paper and Feed Confirmed Paper
- Adding Media Types
- Changing Media Names
- Deleting Media Types You Have Added
- Switching Media Types Display Show/Hide
- Changing the Display Order of Media Types
- Checking the update
- Media Configuration Tool (Mac OS)
- The Features of Media Configuration Tool
- Procedures for Installing
- Starting Method
- Media Configuration Tool Main Window
- Editing Media Type Information for Genuine Paper and Feed Confirmed Paper
- Adding Media Types
- Changing Media Names
- Deleting Media Types You Have Added
- Switching Media Types Display Show/Hide
- Changing the Display Order of Media Types
- Checking the update
- Control Panel
- Printer Parts
- Network Setting
- Network Environment
- Using RemoteUI
- Initial Settings
- Configuring the IP Address on the Printer
- Configuring the IP Address Using the Printer Control Panel
- Configuring the IP Address Using ARP and PING Commands
- Configuring TCP/IPv6 Network Settings
- Configuring the Printer Driver Destination (Windows)
- Configuring the Printer Driver Destination (Mac OS)
- Configuring the Printer's TCP/IP Network Settings With RemoteUI
- Mac OS Settings
- Other Settings
- Device Setup Utility (Windows)
- Print Job Management
- Status Monitor (Windows)
- Printmonitor (Mac OS)
- Accounting (Windows)
- Accounting Manager
- Launching the Accounting Manager
- Accounting Manager Main Window
- Job List Area
- Accounting Manager Basic Procedures
- Configuring Unit Costs in Accounting Manager
- Setting the Unit Cost for Ink
- Setting the Unit Cost for Paper
- Setting the Unit Cost for Items Other Than Ink and Paper
- Configuring Units and Display Settings in Accounting Manager
- Automatically Acquiring Print Job Logs at Regular Intervals
- Canceling Regular Print Job Log Acquisition
- Switching Between Displaying Jobs on Printer and Regularly Acquired Jobs
- Exporting Print Job Data as a CSV File
- Displaying Job Properties or Period Properties
- Showing, Saving and Loading Selected Unit Cost Data
- Showing the Total Amount of Ink and Paper Consumed
- Basic Print Job Operations
- Advanced Print Job Operations
- Adjustments for Better Print Quality
- Maintenance and Consumables
- Troubleshooting
- Frequently Asked Questions
- Problems Regarding Paper
- Clearing Jammed Roll Paper
- Clearing a Jammed Sheet
- Clearing Jammed Paper (Paper Feed Slot)
- Roll paper cannot be inserted into the Paper Feed Slot
- Cannot load sheets
- Paper is not cut neatly
- Paper is not cut
- Depression on the leading edge is left
- The size of clear film cannot be detected
- Roll Paper is Continuously Ejected
- Printing does not start
- The printer stops during a print job
- Problems with the printing quality
- Printing is faint
- Paper rubs against the Printhead
- The edges of the paper are dirty
- The surface of the paper is dirty
- The back side of the paper is dirty
- Printed colors are inaccurate
- Banding in different colors occurs
- Colors in printed images are uneven
- Image edges are blurred or white banding occurs
- The contrast becomes uneven during printing
- The length of printed images is inaccurate in the feeding direction
- Images are printed crooked
- Documents are printed in monochrome
- Line thickness is not uniform
- Lines are misaligned
- Cannot print over a network
- Installation problems
- HP-GL/2 problems
- With HP-GL/2, printing is misaligned
- Lines or images are missing in printed HP-GL/2 jobs.
- Lines are printed too thick or thin in HP-GL/2 print jobs
- HP-GL/2 jobs are printed in monochrome (or color)
- Printed colors of lines are inaccurate during HP-GL/2 printing
- HP-GL/2 jobs are printed 6 mm larger than specified
- HP-GL/2 jobs are printed at maximum size, even if a standard size is specified
- HP-GL/2 printing takes a long time
- The printer stops when printing a HP-GL/2 job (the carriage stops moving)
- Other problems
- Error Message
- Error Messages
- Messages regarding paper
- Paper mismatch
- MediaType Mismatch
- The paper is too small.
- The paper is too small.
- PaprWidth Mismatch
- Paper size not detected.
- Insufficient paper for job
- This paper cannot be used.
- Roll printing is selected.
- Roll printing is selected, but sheets are loaded.
- The roll is empty.
- Sheet printing is selected.
- Regular printing is selected, but a roll is loaded.
- Paper jam
- Paper is crooked.
- Paper not aligned with right guide.
- Cannot detect papr
- Leading edge detection error.
- Paper cutting failed.
- End of paper feed.
- Rel lever is in wrong position.
- Borderless printng not possible.
- Paper position not suitable for borderless printing.
- Roll paper is not securely in contact with roll holder.
- Messages regarding ink
- Ink insufficient.
- No ink left.
- Remaining level of the ink cannot be correctly detected. Check ink tank.
- Cannot detect ink level correctly. Close tank cover.
- Close Ink Tank Cover
- Ink tank is empty.
- Not much ink is left.
- Check if ink tank is set, and its color and direction.
- The following ink tanks cannot be recognized.
- Wrong ink tank.
- Do not pull out ink tank.
- Messages regarding printing or adjustment
- Messages regarding printheads
- Messages regarding the maintenance cartridge
- Messages regarding the hard disk
- Messages regarding HP-GL/2
- Other Messages
- Specifications
- Appendix
- Index
Canon iPF785 User Manual
Displayed below is the user manual for iPF785 by Canon which is a product in the Large Format Printers category. This manual has pages.
Related Manuals
Large Format Printer
User's Guide Basic Printing Workflow 15
Enhanced Printing Options 31
Printing CAD Drawings..............................................................43
Printing enlargements or reductions..........................................65
Printing at full size..................................................................... 76
Borderless Printing.................................................................... 87
Printing banners or at other non-standard sizes........................97
Tiling and multiple pages per sheet......................................... 110
Centering originals...................................................................126
and so on
Windows Software 157
Printer Driver............................................................................158
Preview....................................................................................191
Free Layout..............................................................................202
Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy............................... 225
Print Plug-In for Office............................................................. 236
and so on
Mac OS Software 277
Printer Driver............................................................................278
Preview....................................................................................296
Free Layout..............................................................................319
Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy............................... 344
and so on
Handling and Use of Paper 361
Control Panel 435
Printer Parts 475
Network Setting 489
Print Job Management 509
Adjustments for Better Print Quality 571
Maintenance and Consumables 587
Troubleshooting 625
Error Message 655
Specifications 679
Appendix 683
Manuals for this printer
Setup Guide
Quick Guide
Basic Guide Electronic manual
User's Guide Electronic manual
Paper Reference Guide Electronic manual
ENG
ver1.00 2014-03-18
Contents
Basic Printing Workow
Basic Printing Workflow 15
Printing procedure 16
Printing Options Using Rolls and Sheets .......................................................................................................................... 16
Turning the Printer On and O ............................................................................................................................................. 17
Loading and Printing on Rolls ............................................................................................................................................... 19
Loading and Printing on Sheets ........................................................................................................................................... 21
Printing in Windows ................................................................................................................................................................... 22
Printing from Mac OS ............................................................................................................................................................... 23
Canceling print jobs 25
Canceling Print Jobs from the Control Panel ................................................................................................................. 25
Canceling Print Jobs from Windows .................................................................................................................................. 26
Canceling Print Jobs from Mac OS .................................................................................................................................... 26
Pausing Printing 29
Pausing Printing .......................................................................................................................................................................... 29
Enhanced Printing Options
Enhanced Printing Options 31
Choosing Paper for Printing 32
Choosing a Paper for Printing .............................................................................................................................................. 32
Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver ............................................................................................................................... 32
Printing Photos and Office Documents 33
Printing Photos and Images ................................................................................................................................................... 33
Printing Photos and Images (Windows) ...................................................................................................................... 33
Printing Photos and Images (Mac OS) ........................................................................................................................ 35
Printing Oce Documents ..................................................................................................................................................... 37
Printing Oce Documents (Windows) ........................................................................................................................ 37
Printing Oce Documents (Mac OS) .......................................................................................................................... 38
Using PosterArtist to Compose Originals ........................................................................................................................ 41
Printing CAD Drawings 43
Printing CAD Drawings ............................................................................................................................................................. 43
Printing Line Drawings and Text .......................................................................................................................................... 43
Printing Line Drawings and Text (Windows) ............................................................................................................. 44
Printing Line Drawings and Text (Mac OS) ............................................................................................................... 45
Printing from AutoCAD ............................................................................................................................................................ 47
Specifying Colors and Printing CAD Drawings .............................................................................................................. 48
Specifying Colors and Printing CAD Drawings (Windows) ................................................................................ 49
HP-GL/2 Printing ......................................................................................................................................................................... 50
Adjusting Images 51
Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver ......................................................................................................................... 51
Fine-Tuning Colors of Photos and Images (Windows) .......................................................................................... 53
Fine-Tuning Colors of Photos and Images (Mac OS) ............................................................................................ 55
Giving Priority to Particular Graphic Elements and Colors for Printing .............................................................. 58
Choosing the Document Type and Printing Conditions (Windows) ............................................................... 60
Choosing the Document Type and Printing Conditions (Mac OS) .................................................................. 62
Printing enlargements or reductions 65
Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size .................................................................................................................... 65
Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size (Windows) ....................................................................................... 65
Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width ............................................................................................................................. 67
2
Enhanced Printing Options
Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (Windows) ............................................................................................... 67
Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (Mac OS) .................................................................................................. 69
Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value .............................................................................................................. 71
Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value (Windows) ................................................................................ 72
Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value (Mac OS) ................................................................................... 73
Printing at full size 76
Printing on Oversize Paper ..................................................................................................................................................... 76
Printing at Full Size (Windows) ....................................................................................................................................... 77
Printing at Full Size (Mac OS) ......................................................................................................................................... 78
Borderless Printing at Actual Size ....................................................................................................................................... 80
Borderless Printing at Actual Size (Windows) ......................................................................................................... 81
Borderless Printing at Actual Size (Mac OS) ............................................................................................................ 83
Borderless Printing 87
Borderless Printing on Paper of Equivalent Size .......................................................................................................... 87
Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size (Windows) ........................................ 88
Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width .............................................................................. 90
Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (Windows) ................................................ 91
Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (Mac OS) .................................................. 93
Printing banners or at other non-standard sizes 97
Printing Vertical or Horizontal Banners (Large-Format Printing) ........................................................................... 97
Printing Vertical or Horizontal Banners (Large-Format Printing; Windows) ............................................... 98
Printing Vertical or Horizontal Banners (Large-Format Printing; Mac OS) ................................................ 101
Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes ............................................................................................................................ 104
Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes (Windows) .............................................................................................. 104
Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes (Mac OS) ................................................................................................ 107
Tiling and multiple pages per sheet 110
Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other ............................................................................................................ 110
Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other (Windows) .............................................................................. 111
Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other (Mac OS) ................................................................................. 113
Printing Multiple Pages Continuously .............................................................................................................................. 114
Printing Multiple Pages Continuously (Windows) ................................................................................................. 114
Printing Multiple Pages Continuously (Mac OS) ................................................................................................... 116
Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet ..................................................................................................................................... 118
Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet (Windows) ....................................................................................................... 118
Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet (Mac OS) ......................................................................................................... 120
Printing Posters in Sections ................................................................................................................................................. 123
Printing Large Posters (Windows) .............................................................................................................................. 123
Centering originals 126
Printing Originals Centered on Rolls ................................................................................................................................ 126
Printing Originals Centered on Rolls (Windows) ................................................................................................... 126
Printing Originals Centered on Rolls (Mac OS) ..................................................................................................... 128
Printing Originals Centered on Sheets ............................................................................................................................ 130
Printing Originals Centered on Sheets (Windows) .............................................................................................. 130
Printing Originals Centered on Sheets (Mac OS) ................................................................................................. 132
Conserving roll paper 135
Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90 Degrees ...................................................................................... 135
Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90 Degrees (Windows) ......................................................... 135
Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90 Degrees (Mac OS) ........................................................... 136
Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without Top and Bottom Margins ........................................... 139
Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without Top and Bottom Margins (Windows) ............. 139
Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without Top and Bottom Margins (Mac OS) ............... 141
Checking Images Before Printing 144
Checking the Layout in a Preview Before Printing .................................................................................................... 144
3
Enhanced Printing Options
Other useful settings 145
Printing With Watermarks .................................................................................................................................................... 145
Printing with Watermarks—COPY, FILE COPY, and so on (Windows) ......................................................... 146
Making the Original Orientation Match the Paper Orientation ............................................................................. 148
Making the Original Orientation Match the Paper Orientation (Windows) ................................................ 148
Making the Original Orientation Match the Paper Orientation (Mac OS) .................................................. 149
Using Favorites .......................................................................................................................................................................... 151
Cutting Roll Paper After Printing ....................................................................................................................................... 152
Cutting Roll Paper After Printing (Windows) ......................................................................................................... 152
Cutting Roll Paper After Printing (Mac OS) ........................................................................................................... 153
Windows Software
Windows Software 157
Printer Driver 158
Printer Driver Settings .......................................................................................................................................................... 158
Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver ........................................................................................................................... 160
Conrming Print Settings .................................................................................................................................................... 161
Checking the Layout in a Preview Before Printing ................................................................................................... 162
Using Favorites ........................................................................................................................................................................ 163
Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from Applications ................................................................................. 164
Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from the Operating System Menu ................................................ 166
Main Sheet ................................................................................................................................................................................. 167
Paper Information on Printer Dialog Box ............................................................................................................... 170
Paper Detailed Settings Dialog Box .......................................................................................................................... 170
View Settings Dialog Box for the Printing Application ..................................................................................... 172
Color Adjustment Sheet: Color ................................................................................................................................... 172
Object Adjustment Dialog box: Color ........................................................................................................................ 174
Matching Sheet ................................................................................................................................................................. 174
Color Adjustment Sheet: Monochrome .................................................................................................................. 176
Object Adjustment Dialog box: Monochrome ....................................................................................................... 177
Page Setup Sheet ................................................................................................................................................................... 178
Output Method Dialog box ............................................................................................................................................ 180
Paper Size Options Dialog Box ................................................................................................................................... 181
Layout Sheet ............................................................................................................................................................................. 182
Page Options Dialog Box ............................................................................................................................................... 184
Special Settings Dialog Box ......................................................................................................................................... 185
Favorites Sheet ........................................................................................................................................................................ 186
Utility Sheet ............................................................................................................................................................................... 187
Support Sheet .......................................................................................................................................................................... 188
Settings Summaries Dialog Box ................................................................................................................................. 189
Device Settings Sheet ........................................................................................................................................................... 189
Preview 191
The Features of Preview ........................................................................................................................................................ 191
Starting Preview ........................................................................................................................................................................ 191
Preview Main Window ............................................................................................................................................................. 193
Dialog Area .................................................................................................................................................................................. 195
Enlarge/Reduce the screen display .................................................................................................................................. 196
Moving a Page ........................................................................................................................................................................... 196
Using the ruler ........................................................................................................................................................................... 196
Priority setting for rotating 90 degrees ......................................................................................................................... 197
Printing with Selecting the Layout .................................................................................................................................... 198
Print on the Center .................................................................................................................................................................. 200
Not Print Spaces at the Top/Bottom ............................................................................................................................... 201
Free Layout 202
The Features of Free Layout ............................................................................................................................................... 202
4
Windows Software
Starting Free Layout ............................................................................................................................................................... 203
Free Layout Main Window .................................................................................................................................................... 204
Detailed Settings ....................................................................................................................................................................... 205
Preferences Dialog Box ......................................................................................................................................................... 206
Page Options Dialog Box ....................................................................................................................................................... 207
Zoom Dialog Box ....................................................................................................................................................................... 208
Format Dialog Box .................................................................................................................................................................... 208
Laying out a Multiple-File Document on One Page .................................................................................................... 210
Laying out a Document Created with Multiple Application Programs on One Page .................................. 212
Selecting an Object ................................................................................................................................................................. 215
Changing the Object Size ..................................................................................................................................................... 215
Moving an Object ..................................................................................................................................................................... 216
Rotating an Object ................................................................................................................................................................... 216
Laying out Objects Automatically ...................................................................................................................................... 217
Aligning Objects ........................................................................................................................................................................ 217
Changing the Object Overlapping Order ........................................................................................................................ 219
Pasting a Copied or Cut Object ......................................................................................................................................... 220
Folded Duplex Window ........................................................................................................................................................... 221
Finished Size Settings Dialog Box ..................................................................................................................................... 222
Binding Settings Dialog Box ................................................................................................................................................. 223
Prints using Folded Duplex ................................................................................................................................................... 224
Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy 225
The Features of Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy ..................................................................................... 225
Starting Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy ..................................................................................................... 225
Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy Dialog Box ................................................................................................ 226
Hot Folder .................................................................................................................................................................................... 227
Creating a New Hot Folder ................................................................................................................................................... 228
Specifying an Existing Shared Folder as a Hot Folder ............................................................................................. 231
Setting the Print Parameters ............................................................................................................................................... 234
Printing Enlargements of Scanned Originals from a Color imageRUNNER .................................................... 234
Print Plug-In for Office 236
Print Plug-In for Ocefeatures .......................................................................................................................................... 236
Steps to install ........................................................................................................................................................................... 237
Steps to uninstall ...................................................................................................................................................................... 239
When Print Plug-In for Oce is not displayed ............................................................................................................. 240
To start from Microsoft Word ............................................................................................................................................ 243
Print Matching Roll Width(Word) ....................................................................................................................................... 245
Borderless Printing(Word) .................................................................................................................................................... 247
Multi-Page Printing(Word) .................................................................................................................................................... 249
Register the settings (Word) ............................................................................................................................................... 251
Print Using Registered Settings(Word) ........................................................................................................................... 252
Portrait Orientation/Landscape Orientation(Word) ................................................................................................... 254
To start from Microsoft PowerPoint ................................................................................................................................ 255
Print Matching Roll Width(PowerPoint) ........................................................................................................................... 257
Borderless Printing(PowerPoint) ........................................................................................................................................ 259
Multi-Page Printing(PowerPoint) ........................................................................................................................................ 262
Register the settings (PowerPoint) ................................................................................................................................... 263
Print Using Registered Settings(PowerPoint) .............................................................................................................. 264
Portrait Orientation/Landscape Orientation(PowerPoint) ....................................................................................... 266
To start from Microsoft Excel ............................................................................................................................................. 267
Print Entire Sheet(Excel) ........................................................................................................................................................ 269
Print Selected Area(Excel) .................................................................................................................................................... 271
Conguring Binding (Excel) .................................................................................................................................................. 274
Conguring Special Settings ............................................................................................................................................... 275
5
Mac OS Software
Mac OS Software 277
Printer Driver 278
Printer Driver Settings .......................................................................................................................................................... 278
Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver ........................................................................................................................... 279
Conrming Print Settings .................................................................................................................................................... 281
Checking the Layout in a Preview Before Printing ................................................................................................... 281
Using Favorites ........................................................................................................................................................................ 282
Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from Applications ................................................................................. 282
Main Pane ................................................................................................................................................................................... 283
Paper Detailed Settings Dialog Box .......................................................................................................................... 286
View set. Dialog Box for the Printing Application ............................................................................................... 288
Matching pane ..................................................................................................................................................................... 288
Color Settings Pane: Color ........................................................................................................................................... 291
Object Adjustment dialog box: Color ........................................................................................................................ 292
Color Settings Pane: Monochrome ........................................................................................................................... 292
Object Adjustment dialog box: Monochrome ........................................................................................................ 293
Page Setup Pane ..................................................................................................................................................................... 294
Additional Settings Pane ...................................................................................................................................................... 295
Preview 296
The Features of Preview ........................................................................................................................................................ 296
Starting Preview ........................................................................................................................................................................ 296
Preview Main Window ............................................................................................................................................................. 298
Paper Settings Panel ............................................................................................................................................................... 300
Easy Settings ....................................................................................................................................................................... 302
Advanced Settings ............................................................................................................................................................ 303
Output Settings Panel ............................................................................................................................................................ 304
Color Settings Panel ................................................................................................................................................................ 306
Color Adjustment ............................................................................................................................................................... 307
Matching ................................................................................................................................................................................ 309
Driver Matching Mode ............................................................................................................................................... 311
ICC Matching Mode .................................................................................................................................................... 312
ColorSync ....................................................................................................................................................................... 313
Preferences Dialog Box ......................................................................................................................................................... 313
Zoom Dialog Box ....................................................................................................................................................................... 313
Go to Page Dialog Box ........................................................................................................................................................... 314
Print with No Borders ............................................................................................................................................................. 314
Print on the Center .................................................................................................................................................................. 315
Not Print Spaces at the Top/Bottom ............................................................................................................................... 315
Print Page Rotated 90 Degrees ......................................................................................................................................... 316
Display with Fitting to the Width of the Paper ............................................................................................................ 316
Display with All ........................................................................................................................................................................... 317
Display with Actual Size ......................................................................................................................................................... 317
Moving a Page ........................................................................................................................................................................... 318
Free Layout 319
The Features of Free Layout ............................................................................................................................................... 319
Starting Free Layout ............................................................................................................................................................... 319
Free Layout Main Window .................................................................................................................................................... 321
Paper Settings Panel ............................................................................................................................................................... 323
Easy Settings ....................................................................................................................................................................... 324
Advanced Settings ............................................................................................................................................................ 326
Color Settings Panel ................................................................................................................................................................ 327
Color Adjustment ............................................................................................................................................................... 328
Matching ................................................................................................................................................................................ 330
Driver Matching Mode ............................................................................................................................................... 332
ICC Matching Mode .................................................................................................................................................... 333
6
Mac OS Software
ColorSync ....................................................................................................................................................................... 334
Preferences Dialog Box ......................................................................................................................................................... 334
Page Setup Dialog Box ........................................................................................................................................................... 335
Zoom Dialog Box ....................................................................................................................................................................... 336
Format Dialog Box .................................................................................................................................................................... 337
Laying out a Multiple-File Document on One Page .................................................................................................... 337
Laying out a Document Created with Multiple Application Programs on One Page .................................. 338
Selecting an Object ................................................................................................................................................................. 338
Changing the Object Size ..................................................................................................................................................... 339
Moving an Object ..................................................................................................................................................................... 339
Rotating an Object ................................................................................................................................................................... 340
Laying out Objects Automatically ...................................................................................................................................... 340
Aligning Objects ........................................................................................................................................................................ 340
Changing the Object Overlapping Order ........................................................................................................................ 342
Pasting a Copied or Cut Object ......................................................................................................................................... 343
Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy 344
The Features of Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy ..................................................................................... 344
Starting Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy ..................................................................................................... 344
Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy Dialog Box ................................................................................................ 345
Hot Folder .................................................................................................................................................................................... 345
Creating a New Hot Folder ................................................................................................................................................... 346
Editing a Hot Folder (Setting Print Conditions) ........................................................................................................... 347
Deleting a Hot Folder .............................................................................................................................................................. 349
Setting the Print Parameters ............................................................................................................................................... 350
Paper Settings Panel ............................................................................................................................................................... 350
Easy Settings ....................................................................................................................................................................... 352
Advanced Settings ............................................................................................................................................................ 353
Output Settings Panel ............................................................................................................................................................ 354
Color Settings Panel ................................................................................................................................................................ 356
Driver Matching Mode ..................................................................................................................................................... 357
ICC Matching Mode .......................................................................................................................................................... 358
Printing Enlargements of Scanned Originals from a Color imageRUNNER .................................................... 358
Handling and Use of Paper
Handling and Use of Paper 361
Paper 362
Types of Paper ........................................................................................................................................................................... 362
Paper Sizes .................................................................................................................................................................................. 362
Using Paper Other Than Genuine Paper and feed conrmed Paper ................................................................. 364
Printing on Paper Other Than Genuine Paper and feed conrmed Paper Using Existing Settings
....................... 365
Displaying the Paper Reference Guide ........................................................................................................................... 366
Updating paper information ................................................................................................................................................ 368
Handling rolls 372
Attaching the Roll Holder to Rolls ..................................................................................................................................... 372
Loading Rolls in the Printer .................................................................................................................................................. 375
Changing the Type of Paper ................................................................................................................................................ 378
Specifying the Paper Length ............................................................................................................................................... 380
Removing the Roll from the Printer ................................................................................................................................. 380
Removing the Roll Holder from Rolls ............................................................................................................................... 383
Feeding Roll Paper Manually ............................................................................................................................................... 384
Keeping Track of the Amount of Roll Paper Left ....................................................................................................... 385
Specifying the Ink Drying Time for Rolls ........................................................................................................................ 385
Specifying the Cutting Method for Rolls ........................................................................................................................ 388
Cutting the Leading Edge of Roll Paper Automatically ............................................................................................ 391
Reducing Dust from Cutting Rolls .................................................................................................................................... 393
7
Handling and Use of Paper
Handling sheets 394
Loading Sheets in the Printer ............................................................................................................................................. 394
Printing From a Desired Starting Point ........................................................................................................................... 396
Removing Sheets ...................................................................................................................................................................... 399
Output Stacker 400
Using the Output Stacker ..................................................................................................................................................... 400
Media Configuration Tool (Windows) 405
The Features of Media Conguration Tool .................................................................................................................... 405
Installation Procedures ........................................................................................................................................................... 405
Starting Method ........................................................................................................................................................................ 407
Media Conguration Tool Main Window ......................................................................................................................... 408
Editing Media Type Information for Genuine Paper and Feed Conrmed Paper ......................................... 408
Adding Media Types ......................................................................................................................................................... 410
Changing Media Names .................................................................................................................................................. 412
Deleting Media Types You Have Added ................................................................................................................... 414
Switching Media Types Display Show/Hide ............................................................................................................ 415
Changing the Display Order of Media Types ......................................................................................................... 417
Checking the update ............................................................................................................................................................... 418
Media Configuration Tool (Mac OS) 419
The Features of Media Conguration Tool .................................................................................................................... 419
Procedures for Installing ....................................................................................................................................................... 419
Starting Method ........................................................................................................................................................................ 421
Media Conguration Tool Main Window ......................................................................................................................... 422
Editing Media Type Information for Genuine Paper and Feed Conrmed Paper ......................................... 423
Adding Media Types ......................................................................................................................................................... 424
Changing Media Names .................................................................................................................................................. 427
Deleting Media Types You Have Added ................................................................................................................... 429
Switching Media Types Display Show/Hide ............................................................................................................ 430
Changing the Display Order of Media Types ......................................................................................................... 432
Checking the update ............................................................................................................................................................... 433
Control Panel
Control Panel 435
Operations and Display Screen 436
Control Panel .............................................................................................................................................................................. 436
Control Panel Display .............................................................................................................................................................. 438
How to View Instructions with Navigate ......................................................................................................................... 443
Checking Instructions During Printer Operations ...................................................................................................... 444
Printer Menu 446
Printer Menu Operations ....................................................................................................................................................... 446
Menu Operations ...................................................................................................................................................................... 447
Menu Structure ......................................................................................................................................................................... 450
Menu Settings ............................................................................................................................................................................ 457
Status Print ................................................................................................................................................................................. 468
Printing Interface Setting Reports .................................................................................................................................... 471
Printer Parts
Printer Parts 475
Printer parts 476
Front ............................................................................................................................................................................................... 476
Side ................................................................................................................................................................................................. 478
Top Cover (Inside) .................................................................................................................................................................... 479
Roll Cover (Inside) .................................................................................................................................................................... 480
8
Printer Parts
Carriage ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 480
Ink Tank Cover (Inside) ........................................................................................................................................................... 481
Stand .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 482
Hard Disk 483
Printer Hard Disk Operations .............................................................................................................................................. 483
Checking the Free Hard Disk Space ................................................................................................................................ 484
Erasing Data on the Printer's Hard Disk ......................................................................................................................... 485
Optional accessories 487
Roll Holder Set ........................................................................................................................................................................... 487
Network Setting
Network Setting 489
Network Environment 490
Network Environment ............................................................................................................................................................. 490
Using RemoteUI 492
Using RemoteUI ........................................................................................................................................................................ 492
Initial Settings 494
Conguring the IP Address on the Printer .................................................................................................................... 494
Conguring the IP Address Using the Printer Control Panel ......................................................................... 494
Conguring the IP Address Using ARP and PING Commands ...................................................................... 495
Conguring TCP/IPv6 Network Settings ........................................................................................................................ 497
Conguring the Printer Driver Destination (Windows) ............................................................................................. 497
Conguring the Printer Driver Destination (Mac OS) ............................................................................................... 498
Conguring the Printer's TCP/IP Network Settings With RemoteUI .................................................................. 498
Mac OS Settings 502
Conguring the Destination in TCP/IP Networks ...................................................................................................... 502
Conguring the Destination for Bonjour Network .................................................................................................... 502
Other Settings 503
Specifying Printer-Related Information ........................................................................................................................... 503
Conguring the Communication Mode Manually ....................................................................................................... 504
Email Notication When Printing is Finished or Errors Occur .............................................................................. 505
Initializing the Network Settings ......................................................................................................................................... 505
Device Setup Utility (Windows) 506
imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility ............................................................................................................................... 506
Installing imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility ........................................................................................................... 506
Conguring the IP Address Using imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility ........................................................ 506
Print Job Management
Print Job Management 509
Status Monitor (Windows) 510
The Features of imagePROGRAF Status Monitor ...................................................................................................... 510
Job Management Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor ...................................................................................... 511
Printmonitor (Mac OS) 513
The Features of imagePROGRAF Printmonitor ........................................................................................................... 513
Job Management Using imagePROGRAF Printmonitor ........................................................................................... 514
Accounting (Windows) 515
Accounting Manager ............................................................................................................................................................... 515
Launching the Accounting Manager ................................................................................................................................ 515
Accounting Manager Main Window .................................................................................................................................. 516
Job List Area ................................................................................................................................................................. 518
9
Print Job Management
Accounting Manager Basic Procedures ......................................................................................................................... 520
Conguring Unit Costs in Accounting Manager ......................................................................................................... 520
Setting the Unit Cost for Ink ......................................................................................................................................... 521
Setting the Unit Cost for Paper ................................................................................................................................... 522
Setting the Unit Cost for Items Other Than Ink and Paper ............................................................................. 523
Conguring Units and Display Settings in Accounting Manager ........................................................................ 524
Automatically Acquiring Print Job Logs at Regular Intervals ................................................................................ 525
Canceling Regular Print Job Log Acquisition ............................................................................................................... 525
Switching Between Displaying Jobs on Printer and Regularly Acquired Jobs ............................................... 525
Exporting Print Job Data as a CSV File ........................................................................................................................... 526
Displaying Job Properties or Period Properties .......................................................................................................... 526
Showing, Saving and Loading Selected Unit Cost Data .......................................................................................... 527
Showing the Total Amount of Ink and Paper Consumed ........................................................................................ 527
Basic Print Job Operations 529
Using the Printer Hard Disk ................................................................................................................................................. 529
Saving Print Jobs on the Printer Hard Disk .................................................................................................................. 531
Managing the Job Queue (Deleting or Preempting Other Jobs) ......................................................................... 534
Managing Pending Jobs (Printing or Deleting Jobs on Hold) ................................................................................ 536
Printing Saved Jobs ................................................................................................................................................................. 538
Deleting Saved Jobs ................................................................................................................................................................ 542
Moving Saved Jobs .................................................................................................................................................................. 546
Advanced Print Job Operations 551
Saving Print Jobs Sent from Sources Other than the Printer Driver ................................................................ 551
Printing Without Saving Jobs in the Common Box .................................................................................................... 552
Setting Passwords for Personal Boxes ........................................................................................................................... 553
Naming Personal Boxes ......................................................................................................................................................... 556
Displaying a List of Saved Jobs ......................................................................................................................................... 559
Printing a List of Saved Jobs .............................................................................................................................................. 562
Displaying Details of Saved Jobs ....................................................................................................................................... 563
Renaming Saved Jobs ............................................................................................................................................................ 566
Adjustments for Better Print Quality
Adjustments for Better Print Quality 571
Adjusting the Printhead 572
Adjusting the Printhead ......................................................................................................................................................... 572
Automatic Adjustment to Straighten Lines and Colors .................................................................................... 572
Manual Adjustment to Straighten Lines and Colors ........................................................................................... 573
Adjusting Line Misalignment ................................................................................................................................................ 575
Troubleshooting Paper Abrasion and Blurry Images ................................................................................................ 578
Adjusting the feed amount 579
Adjusting the Feed Amount ................................................................................................................................................. 579
Selecting a Feed Amount Adjustment Method ..................................................................................................... 579
Automatic Banding Adjustment .................................................................................................................................. 580
Manual Banding Adjustment ......................................................................................................................................... 582
Fine-Tuning the Paper Feed Amount ......................................................................................................................... 583
Adjusting Line Length ...................................................................................................................................................... 584
Adjusting the Vacuum Strength ......................................................................................................................................... 585
10
Maintenance and Consumables
Maintenance and Consumables 587
Ink Tanks 588
Ink Tanks ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 588
Replacing Ink Tanks ................................................................................................................................................................. 588
Checking Ink Tank Levels ...................................................................................................................................................... 594
When to Replace Ink Tanks .................................................................................................................................................. 594
Attach the Ink Tank Cover to the printer ....................................................................................................................... 595
Printheads 597
Printhead ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 597
Checking for Nozzle Clogging ............................................................................................................................................. 597
Cleaning the Printhead ........................................................................................................................................................... 598
Replacing the Printhead ........................................................................................................................................................ 599
Maintenance Cartridge 606
Maintenance Cartridge .......................................................................................................................................................... 606
Replacing the Maintenance Cartridge ............................................................................................................................. 606
Checking the Remaining Maintenance Cartridge Capacity ................................................................................... 610
When to Replace the Maintenance Cartridge .............................................................................................................. 611
Cleaning the Printer 612
Cleaning the Printer Exterior ............................................................................................................................................... 612
Cleaning Inside the Top Cover ............................................................................................................................................ 612
Other Maintenance 616
Preparing to Transfer the Printer ...................................................................................................................................... 616
Reinstalling the Printer ........................................................................................................................................................... 619
Updating the Firmware .......................................................................................................................................................... 622
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting 625
Frequently Asked Questions 626
Frequently Asked Questions ................................................................................................................................................ 626
Problems Regarding Paper 627
Clearing Jammed Roll Paper ................................................................................................................................................ 627
Clearing a Jammed Sheet ..................................................................................................................................................... 630
Clearing Jammed Paper (Paper Feed Slot) ................................................................................................................... 633
Roll paper cannot be inserted into the Paper Feed Slot ......................................................................................... 635
Cannot load sheets .................................................................................................................................................................. 635
Paper is not cut neatly ........................................................................................................................................................... 635
Paper is not cut ......................................................................................................................................................................... 635
Depression on the leading edge is left ........................................................................................................................... 636
The size of clear lm cannot be detected ..................................................................................................................... 636
Roll Paper is Continuously Ejected ................................................................................................................................... 636
Printing does not start 637
The Data lamp on the Control Panel does not light up ........................................................................................... 637
The printer does not respond even if print jobs are sent ...................................................................................... 637
Ink Filling.. is displayed ........................................................................................................................................................... 637
The display screen indicates Agitating... ........................................................................................................................ 637
The printer stops during a print job 638
An error message is shown on the Display Screen ................................................................................................... 638
The printer ejects blank, unprinted paper ..................................................................................................................... 638
11
Troubleshooting
Problems with the printing quality 639
Printing is faint .......................................................................................................................................................................... 639
Paper rubs against the Printhead ..................................................................................................................................... 639
The edges of the paper are dirty ...................................................................................................................................... 640
The surface of the paper is dirty ...................................................................................................................................... 641
The back side of the paper is dirty .................................................................................................................................. 641
Printed colors are inaccurate .............................................................................................................................................. 641
Banding in dierent colors occurs ................................................................................................................................... 642
Colors in printed images are uneven ............................................................................................................................... 642
Image edges are blurred or white banding occurs .................................................................................................... 643
The contrast becomes uneven during printing ........................................................................................................... 643
The length of printed images is inaccurate in the feeding direction ................................................................. 644
Images are printed crooked ................................................................................................................................................. 644
Documents are printed in monochrome ........................................................................................................................ 644
Line thickness is not uniform .............................................................................................................................................. 644
Lines are misaligned ................................................................................................................................................................ 645
Cannot print over a network 646
Cannot connect the printer to the network .................................................................................................................. 646
Cannot print over a TCP/IP network ................................................................................................................................ 646
Cannot print over a Bonjour network .............................................................................................................................. 646
Installation problems 647
The computer does not recognize the printer ............................................................................................................ 647
Removing Installed Printer Drivers .................................................................................................................................... 647
HP-GL/2 problems 649
With HP-GL/2, printing is misaligned ............................................................................................................................... 649
Lines or images are missing in printed HP-GL/2 jobs. ............................................................................................. 649
Lines are printed too thick or thin in HP-GL/2 print jobs ....................................................................................... 649
HP-GL/2 jobs are printed in monochrome (or color) ............................................................................................... 650
Printed colors of lines are inaccurate during HP-GL/2 printing .......................................................................... 650
HP-GL/2 jobs are printed 6 mm larger than specied ............................................................................................ 650
HP-GL/2 jobs are printed at maximum size, even if a standard size is specied ........................................ 650
HP-GL/2 printing takes a long time .................................................................................................................................. 650
The printer stops when printing a HP-GL/2 job (the carriage stops moving) ............................................... 650
Other problems 651
The Ink Tank Cover has become detached from the printer ................................................................................ 651
The printer does not go on .................................................................................................................................................. 651
The printer takes time to start up ..................................................................................................................................... 651
If the Printer Makes a Strange Sound ............................................................................................................................. 652
Messages advising to check the maintenance cartridge are not cleared ....................................................... 652
The printer consumes a lot of ink ..................................................................................................................................... 652
Ink Level Detection .................................................................................................................................................................. 652
Error Message
Error Message 655
Error Messages 656
Messages regarding paper 658
Paper mismatch ........................................................................................................................................................................ 658
MediaType Mismatch .............................................................................................................................................................. 658
The paper is too small. ........................................................................................................................................................... 659
The paper is too small. ........................................................................................................................................................... 659
PaprWidth Mismatch ............................................................................................................................................................... 660
Paper size not detected. ........................................................................................................................................................ 660
Insucient paper for job ....................................................................................................................................................... 661
12
Error Message
This paper cannot be used. ................................................................................................................................................. 661
Roll printing is selected. ......................................................................................................................................................... 661
Roll printing is selected, but sheets are loaded. ......................................................................................................... 662
The roll is empty. ...................................................................................................................................................................... 662
Sheet printing is selected. .................................................................................................................................................... 662
Regular printing is selected, but a roll is loaded. ........................................................................................................ 662
Paper jam ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 663
Paper is crooked. ...................................................................................................................................................................... 663
Paper not aligned with right guide. ................................................................................................................................... 664
Cannot detect papr ................................................................................................................................................................. 664
Leading edge detection error. ............................................................................................................................................. 664
Paper cutting failed. ................................................................................................................................................................ 664
End of paper feed. ................................................................................................................................................................... 665
Rel lever is in wrong position. ............................................................................................................................................. 665
Borderless printng not possible. ........................................................................................................................................ 665
Paper position not suitable for borderless printing. ................................................................................................. 666
Roll paper is not securely in contact with roll holder. ............................................................................................... 666
Messages regarding ink 667
Ink insucient. ........................................................................................................................................................................... 667
No ink left. ................................................................................................................................................................................... 667
Remaining level of the ink cannot be correctly detected. Check ink tank. ..................................................... 667
Cannot detect ink level correctly. Close tank cover. ................................................................................................. 667
Close Ink Tank Cover .............................................................................................................................................................. 668
Ink tank is empty. ..................................................................................................................................................................... 668
Not much ink is left. ................................................................................................................................................................ 668
Check if ink tank is set, and its color and direction. ................................................................................................. 668
The following ink tanks cannot be recognized. ........................................................................................................... 668
Wrong ink tank. ......................................................................................................................................................................... 668
Do not pull out ink tank. ........................................................................................................................................................ 668
Messages regarding printing or adjustment 669
Cannot adjust paper feed. .................................................................................................................................................... 669
Check printed document. ..................................................................................................................................................... 669
Messages regarding printheads 670
Cannot adjust printhead. ....................................................................................................................................................... 670
Wrong printhead. ...................................................................................................................................................................... 670
Printhead error .......................................................................................................................................................................... 670
Cannot recognize print head. .............................................................................................................................................. 670
Execute printhead cleaning. ................................................................................................................................................. 671
Messages regarding the maintenance cartridge 672
Insert the maintenance cartridge. ..................................................................................................................................... 672
Wrong maintenance cartridge. ........................................................................................................................................... 672
Maint. cart. The level is low .................................................................................................................................................. 672
No Maintenance Cartridge capacity. ................................................................................................................................ 672
Maintenance cartridge full. ................................................................................................................................................... 672
Maintenance cartridge problem. ........................................................................................................................................ 672
Messages regarding the hard disk 673
Hard disk error. ......................................................................................................................................................................... 673
File read error. ............................................................................................................................................................................ 673
The mail box is full. .................................................................................................................................................................. 673
Mail box full. Now printing without saving data. .......................................................................................................... 673
Mail box nearly full. .................................................................................................................................................................. 673
Maximum jobs stored. ............................................................................................................................................................ 673
Mail box full. Delete unwanted data ................................................................................................................................. 673
13
Error Message
Messages regarding HP-GL/2 675
This type of paper is not compatible with HP-GL/2. ................................................................................................. 675
GL2: Wxxxx The memory is full. (xxxx is 0501, 0903, or 0904) .......................................................................... 675
GL2: W0502 The parameter is out of range. ............................................................................................................... 675
GL2: W0504 This command is not supported. ............................................................................................................ 675
Other Messages 676
GARO Wxxxx (x represents a number) ........................................................................................................................... 676
ERROR Exxx-xxxx (x represents a letter or number) ................................................................................................ 676
Hardware error. xxxxxxxx-xxxx (x represents a letter or number) ...................................................................... 676
Top cover is open. .................................................................................................................................................................... 677
Prepare for parts replacement. .......................................................................................................................................... 677
Parts replacement time has passed. ................................................................................................................................ 677
Unknown le. .............................................................................................................................................................................. 677
Multi-sensor error .................................................................................................................................................................... 677
Error in cutter position. .......................................................................................................................................................... 677
Specications
Specifications 679
Printer Specifications 680
Specications ............................................................................................................................................................................. 680
Print Area ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 681
Appendix
Appendix 683
Safety Precautions 684
Safety Precautions ................................................................................................................................................................... 684
Legal Notices .............................................................................................................................................................................. 686
Manuals for this printer 688
Manuals for this printer ......................................................................................................................................................... 688
About This User Manual ........................................................................................................................................................ 688
Disposal of the product 690
WEEE Directive .......................................................................................................................................................................... 690
14
iPF785
User's Guide
Basic Printing Workflow
Printing procedure ..................................................................................... 16
Canceling print jobs ................................................................................... 25
Pausing Printing ........................................................................................ 29
Enhanced Printing Options 31
Windows Software 157
Mac OS Software 277
Handling and Use of Paper 361
Control Panel 435
Printer Parts 475
Network Setting 489
Print Job Management 509
Adjustments for Better Print Quality 571
Maintenance and Consumables 587
Troubleshooting 625
Error Message 655
Specications 679
Appendix 683
imagePROGRAF
Basic Printing Workow
15
Printing procedure
Printing procedure
Printing Options Using Rolls and Sheets ........................................................................................................................16
Turning the Printer On and O ........................................................................................................................................... 17
Loading and Printing on Rolls ............................................................................................................................................. 19
Loading and Printing on Sheets ......................................................................................................................................... 21
➔Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver (Windows) ................................................................................. 160
➔Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver (Mac OS) ................................................................................... 279
Printing in Windows ................................................................................................................................................................. 22
Printing from Mac OS ............................................................................................................................................................. 23
Printing Options Using Rolls and Sheets
Printing Options Using Rolls and Sheets
The printer supports both rolls and sheets.
This section introduces the main features of each, as well as the main printing methods available. Select rolls or sheets
to suit your particular printing application.
Note
•For information on the types of paper the printer supports, refer to the Paper Reference Guide. (See "Types of Pa-
per.") ➔P.362
•A variety of other ways to print are available besides those introduced here. Choose the printing method that suits your
particular printing application, referring to "Working with Various Print Jobs" and "Enhanced Printing Options" from the
table of contents.
Roll printing
Media in spooled rolls is generally called Roll Media. Rolls are loaded on the Roll Holder, which are in turn loaded in
the printer.
Rolls can be used to print large photos or create posters or banners that cannot be printed on regular sheets.
•
Large-format printing
Easily print vertical or horizontal banners from familiar applications such as Microsoft Office applications.
(See "Printing Vertical or Horizontal Banners (Large-Format Printing).") ➔P.97
•
Borderless printing
Print without a margin (border) around posters or photos.
(See "Borderless Printing on Paper of Equivalent Size.") ➔P.87
(See "Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width.") ➔P.90
(See "Borderless Printing at Actual Size.") ➔P.80
•
Banner printing
You can print multiple pages as a single continuous image, without margins between pages.
(See "Printing Multiple Pages Continuously.") ➔P.114
•
90-degree rotation before printing
Originals in portrait orientation are rotated 90 degrees when possible to use paper more efficiently.
(See "Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90 Degrees.") ➔P.135
•
Enlarged/reduced printing
You can freely adjust the size of originals by enlarging or reducing originals before printing.
(See "Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size.") ➔P.65
(See "Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width.") ➔P.67
(See "Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value.") ➔P.71
•
Free Layout function
Print multiple documents from multiple applications (such as word-processing programs, spreadsheet programs,
and so on) next to each other.
(See "Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other.") ➔P.110
Printing Options Using Rolls and Sheets
iPF785
User's Guide
Basic Printing Workow Printing procedure
16
Sheet printing
Sheets refer to individual sheets of paper.
Insert the sheet between the Platen and the Paper Retainer.
•
Enlarged/reduced printing
You can freely adjust the size of originals by enlarging or reducing originals before printing.
(See "Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size.") ➔P.65
(See "Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value.") ➔P.71
•
Free Layout function
Print multiple documents from multiple applications (such as word-processing programs, spreadsheet programs,
and so on) next to each other.
(See "Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other.") ➔P.110
Turning the Printer On and Off
Turning the Printer On and Off
Turning the printer on
1
Press the Power button to turn on the printer.
The printer will now start up.
After the Display Screen shows the Canon logo, "Starting up...
Please wait." is displayed.
2
The Power Lamp is lit when the printer finishes starting up, and the
printer is now in Standby.
The printer will not go into Standby in the following situations. Take
the appropriate action.
•
The Top Cover is open
Close the Top Cover.
•
The Ink Tank Cover is open
Close the Ink Tank Cover.
•
The Printhead is not installed
see "Replacing the Printhead." ➔P.599
iPF785
Turning the Printer On and O
User's Guide
Basic Printing Workow Printing procedure
17
•
An Ink Tank is not installed
see "Replacing Ink Tanks." ➔P.588
•
If "ERROR" is shown on the Display Screen
see "Error messages." ➔P.656
•
The Power Lamp and Message Lamp are not lit (even once), and nothing appears on the Display
Screen
Make sure the printer is plugged in correctly. Check the connection at the plug and electrical outlet.
•
No paper is loaded
Load paper. (See "Loading and Printing on Rolls.") ➔P.19 (See "Loading and Printing on
Sheets.") ➔P.21
Turning the printer off
Important
•Never disconnect the printer's power supply or unplug it during a print job. This may damage the printer.
1
Make sure no print jobs are in progress.
If the Message Lamp is flashing, check the message on the Display
Screen and take action as necessary. (See "Error Messag-
es.") ➔P.656
If the Data Lamp is flashing, the printer is receiving a print job. Turn
off the printer only after printing is finished.
2
Hold down the Power button for more than a second.
After "Shut Down.. Please Wait.." is shown on the Display Screen,
the printer shuts off.
Turning the Printer On and O
iPF785
User's Guide
Basic Printing Workow Printing procedure
18
Loading and Printing on Rolls
Loading and Printing on Rolls
These are the basic steps for loading and printing on rolls.
Follow these steps to load and print on rolls.
Note
•For details on supported sizes and types of rolls, see Paper Sizes or the Paper Reference Guide. (See "Paper
Sizes.") ➔P.362 (See "Types of Paper.") ➔P.362
•If you prefer to wait for the ink to dry after printing and simply eject the document, you can deactivate automatic cutting
and cut the paper manually. (See "Specifying the Cutting Method for Rolls.") ➔P.388
1
Turn the printer on. (See "Turning the Printer On and Off.") ➔P.17
2
Load the roll on the Roll Holder. (See "Attaching the Roll
Holder to Rolls.") ➔P.372
3
Load the roll in the printer. (See "Loading Rolls in the
Printer.") ➔P.375
iPF785
Loading and Printing on Rolls
User's Guide
Basic Printing Workow Printing procedure
19
4
Select the type of paper. (See "Changing the Type of Pa-
per.") ➔P.378
Note
•If no barcode has been printed on the roll and you have set ManageRemainRoll to On, specify the roll length
after the type of paper. (See "Specifying the Paper Length.") ➔P.380
5
Complete settings in the printer driver for the type of paper and other details.
•
Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver (Windows) ➔P.160
•
Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver (Mac OS) ➔P.279
6
Send the print job.
•
Printing in Windows ➔P.22
•
Printing from Mac OS ➔P.23
Loading and Printing on Rolls
iPF785
User's Guide
Basic Printing Workow Printing procedure
20
The printer now starts printing the print job.
Loading and Printing on Sheets
Loading and Printing on Sheets
These are the basic steps for loading sheets and then printing.
Follow the steps below to load and print on sheets.
Note
•For details on supported types and sizes of paper, see Paper Sizes or the Paper Reference Guide. (See "Paper
Sizes.") ➔P.362 (See "Types of Paper.") ➔P.362
1
Turn the printer on. (See "Turning the Printer On and Off.") ➔P.17
2
Complete settings in the printer driver for the type of paper and other details.
•
Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver (Windows) ➔P.160
•
Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver (Mac OS) ➔P.279
3
Send the print job.
•
Printing in Windows ➔P.22
•
Printing from Mac OS ➔P.23
iPF785
Loading and Printing on Sheets
User's Guide
Basic Printing Workow Printing procedure
21
4
Load the sheet. (See "Loading Sheets in the Print-
er.") ➔P.394
The printer now starts printing the print job.
Printing in Windows
Printing in Windows
Print from the application menu.
Important
•We recommend exiting unnecessary applications before printing. Running several applications while printing may in-
terrupt the transfer of print data and affect printing quality.
1
In the source application, select Print from the File menu to display the dialog box for printing conditions.
2
After confirming that the printer is selected in the dialog box, click Print or OK to start printing.
Note
•The appearance of the dialog box varies depending on
the software application. In most cases, the dialog box
includes basic printing options and enables you to
choose the printer, specify the range of pages, number
of copies, and so on.
Example: Print dialog box displayed by the application
•If another printer is selected, select the printer you want to use under Select Printer or in the dialog box dis-
played after clicking Printer.
Settings for many printing methods (including enlarged or reduced printing, borderless printing, and so on) are dis-
played in the printer driver dialog box. There are two ways to access the printer driver dialog box, as follows.
Printing in Windows
iPF785
User's Guide
Basic Printing Workow Printing procedure
22
•
From the application
(See "Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from Applications .") ➔P.164
•
From the operating system menu
(See "Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from the Operating System Menu .") ➔P.166
Printing from Mac OS
Printing from Mac OS
Print from the application menu after registering the printer.
Important
•We recommend exiting unnecessary applications before printing. Running several applications while printing may in-
terrupt the transfer of print data and affect printing quality.
Registering the printer
The printer needs to be registered in Print & Scan (identified as Printers & Scanners or Print & Fax in other versions
of Mac OS X) in System Preferences before printing.
For instructions on registering the printer, see "Configuring the Printer Driver Destination ." ➔P.498
Important
•During this setup process, the printer will not be listed among available printers if it is off or disconnected.
Printing from the application software
1
In the application software, select Print from the File menu to display the dialog box for printing conditions.
Note
•This dialog box includes basic printing options and enables you to choose the printer, specify the range of
pages, number of copies, and so on.
2
Select the printer in the Printer list.
iPF785
Printing from Mac OS
User's Guide
Basic Printing Workow Printing procedure
23
3
Click Print to start printing.
As shown in the following illustration, you can switch to
other panes in this dialog box to complete settings for
various methods of printing, including enlarged and re-
duced printing, borderless printing, and so on.
Printing from Mac OS
iPF785
User's Guide
Basic Printing Workow Printing procedure
24
Canceling print jobs
Canceling print jobs
Canceling Print Jobs from the Control Panel ............................................................................................................... 25
Canceling Print Jobs from Windows ................................................................................................................................ 26
Canceling Print Jobs from Mac OS .................................................................................................................................. 26
Canceling Print Jobs from the Control Panel
Canceling Print Jobs from the Control Panel
To cancel printing or reception of print jobs, press the Stop button on the Control Panel.
When you press the Stop button during printing, printer operation varies depending on the current status.
•
If you press the Stop button before printing starts
Pressing the Stop button before printing starts will display a confirmation message. To cancel the print job, select
Yes.
•
If you press the Stop button during printing
Pressing the Stop button during printing will display a confirmation message. To cancel the print job immediately,
select Yes.
iPF785
Canceling Print Jobs from the Control Panel
User's Guide
Basic Printing Workow Canceling print jobs
25
Canceling Print Jobs from Windows
Canceling Print Jobs from Windows
In the printer window, you can cancel jobs that are being sent to the printer.
Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor, you can cancel print jobs that have already been received by the printer or
that are currently being printed.
1
Click the printer icon in the taskbar to display the printer window.
Note
•You can also display this window by double-clicking the printer icon in the Printers and Faxes (or Printer)
folder, accessible through the Windows start menu.
2
Right-click the job to cancel and select Cancel.
3
If the job to cancel is not shown in the printer window (that is, if the print data has already been received by the
printer), double-click the taskbar icon to display imagePROGRAF Status Monitor.
4
On the Printer Status sheet, click Cancel Job.
Note
•The screen may differ slightly depending on the model you are using.
Canceling Print Jobs from Mac OS
Canceling Print Jobs from Mac OS
In the printer window, you can cancel jobs that are being sent to the printer.
Otherwise, you can cancel jobs from imagePROGRAF Printmonitor if they have been received by the printer or are
currently being printed.
Note
•Print jobs are shown in the printer window while they are being sent from the computer. After transmission, jobs are not
displayed even during printing.
•Print jobs are displayed in the imagePROGRAF Printmonitor window from the moment the printer starts receiving the
print data until the moment printing is finished. They are not displayed before print data is sent to the printer, even if the
computer has started preparing the print data.
Canceling Print Jobs from Windows
iPF785
User's Guide
Basic Printing Workow Canceling print jobs
26
1
Click the printer icon in the Dock to display the printer window.
2
Click Pause Printer to stop printing.
3
If there are no jobs in the printer window that can be
canceled, (that is, if the print data has already been
sent to the printer), click Utility to display imagePROG-
RAF Printmonitor.
4
Select the print job to cancel and click to delete
the print job.
Note
•The screen may differ slightly depending on the model you are using.
The job sent to the printer is canceled.
iPF785
Canceling Print Jobs from Mac OS
User's Guide
Basic Printing Workow Canceling print jobs
27
5
Exit imagePROGRAF Printmonitor. In the printer window, click Resume Printer.
Important
•Always follow these steps if you cancel print jobs from imagePROGRAF Printmonitor. If you do not restart
job processing, the next job cannot be printed.
Canceling Print Jobs from Mac OS
iPF785
User's Guide
Basic Printing Workow Canceling print jobs
28
Pausing Printing
Pausing Printing
Pausing Printing
Pausing Printing
During printing, if you set Pause Print in the Control Panel menu to On, printing is stopped at that point and the printer
enters a state in which printing is paused. (See "Control Panel Display.") ➔P.438
Printing from the job queue is not possible in this state.
To restore normal operation after this state, set Pause Print to Off.
Note
•In the following cases, the status is cleared even if you do not set Pause Print to Off, and printing from the job queue
resumes.
•When paper is advanced
•When you execute Chg. Paper Type in the Paper Menu
1
During printing, on the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel, press
◀ or ▶ to select the Job tab ( ).
Note
•If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.
2
Press the OK button.
The Job Menu is displayed.
3
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Pause Print, and then press the OK button.
4
Press ▲ or ▼ to select On or Off, and then press the OK button.
iPF785
Pausing Printing
User's Guide
Basic Printing Workow Pausing Printing
29
iPF785
User's Guide
Basic Printing Workow 15
Enhanced Printing Options
Choosing Paper for Printing ...................................................................... 32
Printing Photos and Office Documents ..................................................... 33
Printing CAD Drawings .............................................................................. 43
Adjusting Images ....................................................................................... 51
Printing enlargements or reductions .......................................................... 65
Printing at full size ..................................................................................... 76
Borderless Printing .................................................................................... 87
Printing banners or at other non-standard sizes ....................................... 97
Tiling and multiple pages per sheet ......................................................... 110
Centering originals ................................................................................... 126
Conserving roll paper .............................................................................. 135
Checking Images Before Printing ............................................................ 144
Other useful settings ................................................................................ 145
Windows Software 157
Mac OS Software 277
Handling and Use of Paper 361
Control Panel 435
Printer Parts 475
Network Setting 489
Print Job Management 509
Adjustments for Better Print Quality 571
Maintenance and Consumables 587
Troubleshooting 625
Error Message 655
Specications 679
Appendix 683
imagePROGRAF
Enhanced Printing Options
31
Choosing Paper for Printing
Choosing Paper for Printing
Choosing a Paper for Printing ............................................................................................................................................ 32
➔Changing the Type of Paper ................................................................................................................................. 378
Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver .............................................................................................................................32
➔Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver (Windows) .......................................................................................160
➔Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver (Mac OS) ......................................................................................... 279
Choosing a Paper for Printing
Choosing a Paper for Printing
Select the appropriate media type from the printer control panel or printer driver to match the paper loaded in the print-
er. The appropriate media type differs between the case of genuine Canon paper or Canon feed confirmed paper and
the case of paper other than Canon feed confirmed paper. Select the media type by following the description below.
For information on how to select the media type in the printer control panel, see Changing the Type of Paper ➔P.378 ,
and for information on how to select the media type in the printer driver, see Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver (Win-
dows) ➔P.160 or Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver (Mac OS) ➔P.279 .
Important
•If you use paper other than Canon feed confirmed paper, Canon provides absolutely no guarantees regarding print
quality or paper feed properties.
Note
•Genuine Canon paper and Canon feed confirmed paper are detailed in Paper Reference Guide.
•An error message is displayed on the printer Control Panel if the media type specified in the printer driver does not
match the media type specified in the printer. Although you can print under these conditions, the printing results may
not be suitable.
•
Genuine Canon paper or Canon feed confirmed paper
For genuine Canon paper or Canon feed confirmed paper, select the settings that are optimized for that type of
paper. For more information on the settings for genuine Canon paper or Canon feed confirmed paper, see "Dis-
playing the Paper Reference Guide." ➔P.366
•
Paper other than Canon feed confirmed paper
For paper other than Canon feed confirmed paper, one method is to select from existing settings and another
method is to create a new media type and add it to the printer control panel and printer driver. For details, see
"Using Paper Other Than Genuine Paper and feed confirmed Paper." ➔P.364
Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver
Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver
If you replace the paper, complete the printer driver settings for the paper type and size.
For instructions on configuring paper settings in the printer driver, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your
computer and operating system.
•
Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver (Windows) ➔P.160
•
Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver (Mac OS) ➔P.279
Choosing a Paper for Printing
iPF785
User's Guide
Enhanced Printing Options Choosing Paper for Printing
32
Printing Photos and Office Documents
Printing Photos and Office Documents
Printing Photos and Images ................................................................................................................................................. 33
Printing Photos and Images (Windows) .................................................................................................................... 33
Printing Photos and Images (Mac OS) ...................................................................................................................... 35
Printing Oce Documents ................................................................................................................................................... 37
Printing Oce Documents (Windows) ....................................................................................................................... 37
Printing Oce Documents (Mac OS) ......................................................................................................................... 38
Using PosterArtist to Compose Originals ...................................................................................................................... 41
Printing Photos and Images
Printing Photos and Images
By selecting the following Print Target from Easy Settings of the printer driver, you can easily configure the printing of
illustrations and photos.
Print Target Description
Photo (Color) Print photographic images from digital cameras with an optimal
setting.
Poster An optimal setting for posters. Print in vivid colors with impact and
high saturation.
Faithful Color Reproduction Print with minimum color difference. Suitable for printing scanner
images and when print results are too vivid.
Important
•Depending on the Media Type setting, some Print Target options may not be available.
Note
•You can check the settings values for each print target by clicking View Settings.
•You can also fine-tune these values as needed. (Advanced Settings)
For details on Advanced Settings, see "Giving Priority to Particular Graphic Elements and Colors for Printing." ➔P.58
For instructions on printing photos and images, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and oper-
ating system.
•
Printing Photos and Images (Windows) ➔P.33
•
Printing Photos and Images (Mac OS) ➔P.35
Printing Photos and Images (Windows)
Printing Photos and Images (Windows)
This topic describes how to print photos based on the following example.
•
Document: Photo image from a digital camera
•
Page size: 10×12 inches (254.0×304.8 mm)
•
Paper: Roll
•
Paper type: Canon Premium Glossy Paper 2 280
•
Roll paper width: 10 inches (254.0 mm)
iPF785
Printing Photos and Images
User's Guide
Enhanced Printing Options Printing Photos and Oce Documents
33
1
Choose Print in the application menu.
2
Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (See "Accessing the Printer
Driver Dialog Box from Applications .") ➔P.164
3
Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
4
In the AMedia Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Canon Premium Glossy
Paper 2 280.
In the AMedia Type, choose the type of paper used for printing, such as Glossy Paper, Canon Coated Pa-
per, and so on. Make sure the paper you select is loaded in the printer.
Note
•The paper type setting in the printer driver and related software (as well as on the Control Panel ) is updated
when you install the Media Configuration Tool from the User Software CD-ROM or if you change paper infor-
mation by using the Media Configuration Tool. For details, see "Media Configuration Tool." ➔P.405
5
After confirming that DEasy Settings is selected, click Photo (Color) in the EPrint Target list.
Note
•You can check the settings values selected in the EPrint Target list by clicking GView Settings.
6
Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup
sheet.
7
In the APage Size list, click the size of the original as specified in the application. In this case, click 10"x12".
8
Select and click a roll paper in the LPaper Source list.
Printing Photos and Images (Windows)
iPF785
User's Guide
Enhanced Printing Options Printing Photos and Oce Documents
34
9
Select the width of the loaded roll in the MRoll Paper Width list—in this case, 10-in. Roll (254.0mm).
10
Specify additional printing conditions.
For details on available printing conditions, see "Printer Driver Settings ." ➔P.158
11
Confirm the print settings and print as desired.
Note
•For instructions on confirming print settings, see "Confirming Print Settings ." ➔P.161
Printing Photos and Images (Mac OS)
Printing Photos and Images (Mac OS)
This topic describes how to print photos based on the following example.
•
Document: Photo image from a digital camera
•
Page size: 10×12 inches (254.0×304.8 mm)
•
Paper: Roll paper
•
Paper type: Canon Premium Glossy Paper 2 280
•
Roll paper width: 10 inches (254.0 mm)
1
Choose Page Setup from the application menu to display the Page Attributes dialog box.
Note
•The configuration method varies depending on the OS
and application software you are using.
If Page Setup is displayed in the application menu, the
settings are configured by opening the Page Attributes
dialog box from Page Setup.
If it is not displayed, the settings are configured in the upper
part of the printer driver displayed when you select Print
from the application software menu.
2
Select the printer in the BFormat for list.
3
In the CPaper Size list, click the size of the original. In this case, click 10"x12".
4
Click FOK to close the dialog box.
5
Choose Print in the application menu.
iPF785
Printing Photos and Images (Mac OS)
User's Guide
Enhanced Printing Options Printing Photos and Oce Documents
35
6
Access the Main pane.
7
In the AMedia Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Canon Premium Glossy
Paper 2 280.
Make sure the paper you select is loaded in the printer.
Note
•The types of paper indicated in the printer driver and related software (as well as on the Control Panel) are
updated when you install the Media Configuration Tool from the User Software CD-ROM or if you change pa-
per information by using the Media Configuration Tool. For details, see "Media Configuration Tool." ➔P.419
8
After confirming that DEasy Settings is selected, click Photo (Color) in the EPrint Target list.
Note
•For information on settings optimized for printing photos and images, see "Printing Photos and Images." ➔P.33
•You can check the settings values selected in the EPrint Target list by clicking GView set..
9
Make your selection in the FPrint Quality list.
10
Access the Page Setup pane.
Printing Photos and Images (Mac OS)
iPF785
User's Guide
Enhanced Printing Options Printing Photos and Oce Documents
36
11
Select and click a roll paper in the APaper Source list.
12
Select the paper width of the roll loaded in the printer for BRoll Width. In this case, 10 in. (254.0mm) is selec-
ted.
13
Specify additional printing conditions.
For details on available printing conditions, see "Printer Driver Settings ." ➔P.278
14
Confirm the print settings, and then click MPrint to start printing.
Note
•For tips on confirming print settings, see "Confirming Print Settings ." ➔P.281
Printing Office Documents
Printing Office Documents
By selecting Office Document from Easy Settings of the printer driver, you can easily configure settings for printing
office documents.
Print Target Description
Office Document Setting optimized for printing general office documents such as
materials for distribution so that they can be viewed easily.
Note
•You can check the settings values for each print target by clicking View Settings.
•You can also fine-tune these values as needed. (Advanced Settings)
For details on Advanced Settings, see "Giving Priority to Particular Graphic Elements and Colors for Printing." ➔P.58
Printing Office Documents (Windows)
Printing Office Documents (Windows)
This topic describes how to print office documents based on the following example.
•
Document: Office document created using word-processing or spreadsheet programs
•
Page size: A4 (210.0 × 297.0 mm [8.3 × 11.7 in])
•
Paper: Sheets
•
Paper type: Plain Paper
•
Paper size: A4 (210.0 × 297.0 mm [8.3 × 11.7 in])
1
Choose Print in the application menu.
2
Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (See "Accessing the Printer
Driver Dialog Box from Applications .") ➔P.164
iPF785
Printing Oce Documents
User's Guide
Enhanced Printing Options Printing Photos and Oce Documents
37
3
Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
4
In the AMedia Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.
5
After confirming that DEasy Settings is selected, click Office Document in the EPrint Target list.
Note
•You can check the settings values selected in the EPrint Target list by clicking GView Settings.
6
Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup
sheet.
7
In the APage Size list, click the size of the original as specified in the application. In this case, click ISO A4.
8
Click Manual in the LPaper Source list.
9
Specify additional printing conditions.
For details on available printing conditions, see "Printer Driver Settings ." ➔P.158
10
Confirm the print settings and print as desired.
Note
•For tips on confirming print settings, see "Confirming Print Settings ." ➔P.161
Printing Office Documents (Mac OS)
Printing Office Documents (Mac OS)
This topic describes how to print office documents based on the following example.
Printing Oce Documents (Mac OS)
iPF785
User's Guide
Enhanced Printing Options Printing Photos and Oce Documents
38
•
Document: Office document created using word-processing or spreadsheet programs
•
Page size: A4 (210.0 × 297.0 mm [8.3 × 11.7 in])
•
Paper: Sheets
•
Paper type: Plain Paper
•
Paper size: A4 (210.0 × 297.0 mm [8.3 × 11.7 in])
1
Choose Page Setup from the application menu to display the Page Attributes dialog box.
Note
•The configuration method varies depending on the OS
and application software you are using.
If Page Setup is displayed in the application menu, the
settings are configured by opening the Page Attributes
dialog box from Page Setup.
If it is not displayed, the settings are configured in the upper
part of the printer driver displayed when you select Print
from the application software menu.
2
Select the printer in the BFormat for list.
3
In the CPaper Size list, click the size of the original. In this case, click ISO A4 - for Paper Tray (Large Mar-
gins).
4
Click FOK to close the dialog box.
5
Choose Print in the application menu.
iPF785
Printing Oce Documents (Mac OS)
User's Guide
Enhanced Printing Options Printing Photos and Oce Documents
39
6
Access the Main pane.
7
In the AMedia Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.
8
After confirming that DEasy Settings is selected, click Office Document in the EPrint Target list.
Note
•You can check the settings values selected in the EPrint Target list by clicking GView set..
9
Make your selection in the FPrint Quality list.
10
Access the Page Setup pane.
11
Click Manual in the APaper Source list.
12
Specify additional printing conditions.
For details on available printing conditions, see "Printer Driver Settings ." ➔P.278
Printing Oce Documents (Mac OS)
iPF785
User's Guide
Enhanced Printing Options Printing Photos and Oce Documents
40
13
Confirm the print settings, and then click MPrint to start printing.
Note
•For tips on confirming print settings, see "Confirming Print Settings ." ➔P.281
Using PosterArtist to Compose Originals
Using PosterArtist to Compose Originals
You can print a variety of source documents from word-processing or spreadsheet programs or screen shots from web
browsers after composing an original with them using PosterArtist.
This topic describes how to use PosterArtist to compose originals from multiple applications, creating a poster layout
for printing.
1
Choose Print in the application menu.
2
Select the printer in the dialog box, and then open the printer driver dialog box. (See "Accessing the Printer Driv-
er Dialog Box from Applications (Windows).") ➔P.164
3
Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
4
Click the Layout tab to display the Layout sheet.
5
Select the APage Layout check box.
6
Click in the Edit Using PosterArtist in the APage Layout list.
Note
•This function cannot be used with a 64-bit version OS.
iPF785
Using PosterArtist to Compose Originals
User's Guide
Enhanced Printing Options Printing Photos and Oce Documents
41
7
When you attempt to print, PosterArtist starts up and
the PageCapture window is displayed. (At this point,
the document will not be printed yet.)
8
Choose the page to load in PosterArtist.
9
Edit and rearrange the image in the PosterArtist window as desired.
Without closing the PosterArtist window, repeat steps 1-8 to arrange originals from multiple applications on the
same page.
Note
•For details on how to edit and sort images, refer to the PosterArtist Manual.
10
Print from the PosterArtist menu.
Using PosterArtist to Compose Originals
iPF785
User's Guide
Enhanced Printing Options Printing Photos and Oce Documents
42
Printing CAD Drawings
Printing CAD Drawings
Printing CAD Drawings ...........................................................................................................................................................43
Printing Line Drawings and Text ........................................................................................................................................ 43
Printing Line Drawings and Text (Windows) ............................................................................................................ 44
Printing Line Drawings and Text (Mac OS) .............................................................................................................. 45
Printing from AutoCAD ..........................................................................................................................................................47
Specifying Colors and Printing CAD Drawings ............................................................................................................ 48
Specifying Colors and Printing CAD Drawings (Windows) ............................................................................... 49
HP-GL/2 Printing .......................................................................................................................................................................50
Printing CAD Drawings
Printing CAD Drawings
Using this printer, you can print fine lines and text clearly and sharply. It's easy to produce highly precise drawings from
CAD applications.
For instructions on CAD printing, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating system.
•
Printing Line Drawings and Text (Windows) ➔P.44
•
Printing Line Drawings and Text (Mac OS) ➔P.45
Printing Line Drawings and Text
Printing Line Drawings and Text
Printing is easy when you simply choose the type of original to print.
•
Easy Settings
Simply choose the printing application in the list for optimal printing results.
•
Print Target
Choose presets that match the type of document to be printed.
Print targets for line drawings and text
Print Target Description
CAD (Color Line Drawing) Settings optimized to print intricate lines in CAD drawings clearly.
CAD (Monochrome Line
Drawing )
Settings optimized to print black lines in CAD drawings clearly.
Perspective, GIS Settings optimized for printing 3D CAD drawings, perspective
drawings, and maps, including GIS maps.
Note
•You can check the settings values for each print target by clicking View Settings.
•You can also fine-tune these values as needed. ( Advanced Settings )
For details on Advanced Settings, see "Giving Priority to Particular Graphic Elements and Colors for Printing." ➔P.58
•
Print Quality
Choose the print quality.
iPF785
Printing CAD Drawings
User's Guide
Enhanced Printing Options Printing CAD Drawings
43
The printing mode is determined by a combination of the print quality and resolution.
Print Quality Description
Highest A setting for printing at the highest resolution when quality is most important. Printing takes
longer and consumes more ink than in other modes, but this mode offers superior printing
quality.
High Choose this setting to print at high resolution when quality is most important.
Printing takes longer and consumes more ink than in Standard or Fast modes, but this
mode offers exceptional printing quality.
Standard Choose this setting to print at standard resolution when quality and speed are both important.
Printing takes less time than in Highest or High mode.
Fast Choose this setting to print faster.
Printing in draft mode can help you work more efficiently when checking layouts.
For instructions on printing line drawings and text, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer
and operating system.
•
Printing Line Drawings and Text (Windows) ➔P.44
•
Printing Line Drawings and Text (Mac OS) ➔P.45
Printing Line Drawings and Text (Windows)
Printing Line Drawings and Text (Windows)
This topic describes how to print line drawings based on the following example.
•
Document: CAD drawing
•
Page size: A3 (297.0 × 420.0 mm [11.7 × 16.5 in])
•
Paper: Roll paper
•
Paper type: Plain Paper
•
Roll paper width: A2/A3 roll (420.0 mm [16.5 in])
1
Choose Print in the application menu.
2
Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (See "Accessing the Printer
Driver Dialog Box from Applications .") ➔P.164
3
Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
4
In the AMedia Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.
Printing Line Drawings and Text (Windows)
iPF785
User's Guide
Enhanced Printing Options Printing CAD Drawings
44
5
After confirming that DEasy Settings is selected, click CAD (Color Line Drawing) or CAD (Monochrome
Line Drawing ) in the EPrint Target list.
Note
•You can check the settings values selected in the EPrint Target list by clicking GView Settings.
6
Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup
sheet.
7
In APage Size, click the size of the original as specified in the application. In this case, click ISO A3.
8
Select and click a roll paper in the LPaper Source list.
9
Select the width of the loaded roll in the MRoll Paper Width list—in this case, ISO A2/A3 Roll (420.0mm).
10
Specify additional printing conditions.
For details on available printing conditions, see "Printer Driver Settings ." ➔P.158
11
Confirm the print settings and print as desired.
Note
•For tips on confirming print settings, see "Confirming Print Settings ." ➔P.161
Printing Line Drawings and Text (Mac OS)
Printing Line Drawings and Text (Mac OS)
This topic describes how to print line drawings based on the following example.
•
Document: CAD drawing
•
Page size: A3 (297.0 × 420.0 mm [11.7 × 16.5 in])
•
Paper: Roll
•
Paper type: Plain Paper
•
Roll paper width: A2/A3 roll (420.0 mm [16.5 in])
iPF785
Printing Line Drawings and Text (Mac OS)
User's Guide
Enhanced Printing Options Printing CAD Drawings
45
1
Choose Page Setup from the application menu to display the Page Attributes dialog box.
Note
•The configuration method varies depending on the OS
and application software you are using.
If Page Setup is displayed in the application menu, the
settings are configured by opening the Page Attributes
dialog box from Page Setup.
If it is not displayed, the settings are configured in the upper
part of the printer driver displayed when you select Print
from the application software menu.
2
Select the printer in the BFormat for list.
3
In the CPaper Size list, click the size of the original. In this case, click ISO A3.
4
Click FOK to close the dialog box.
5
Choose Print in the application menu.
6
Access the Main pane.
7
In the AMedia Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.
Printing Line Drawings and Text (Mac OS)
iPF785
User's Guide
Enhanced Printing Options Printing CAD Drawings
46
8
After confirming that DEasy Settings is selected, click CAD (Color Line Drawing) or CAD (Monochrome
Line Drawing ) in the EPrint Target list.
Note
•You can check the settings values selected in the EPrint Target list by clicking GView set..
9
Make your selection in the FPrint Quality list.
10
Access the Page Setup pane.
11
Select and click a roll paper in the APaper Source list.
12
Select the paper width of the roll loaded in the printer for BRoll Width. In this case, ISO A2/A3 (420.0mm) is
selected.
13
Specify additional printing conditions.
For details on available printing conditions, see "Printer Driver Settings ." ➔P.278
14
Confirm the print settings, and then click MPrint to start printing.
Note
•For tips on confirming print settings, see "Confirming Print Settings ." ➔P.281
•You can conserve roll paper by configuring settings suitable for the document.
For details on how to conserve paper and print, see "Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90 De-
grees ." ➔P.136
Printing from AutoCAD
Printing from AutoCAD
Printer Driver Optimization Module for AutoCAD is software for printing optimally from AutoCAD with the printer driver.
By optimally controlling the processing resolution of raster data and the memory to be used in image processing of
AutoCAD, printing superior in reliability and productivity is realized.
If you install Printer Driver Optimization Module for AutoCAD on a computer on which supported AutoCAD is installed,
it will be installed automatically.
Note
•Printer Driver Optimization Module for AutoCAD is applied automatically when you print from AutoCAD, and optimal
printing is performed.
iPF785
Printing from AutoCAD
User's Guide
Enhanced Printing Options Printing CAD Drawings
47
Confirming the Installation of Printer Driver Optimization Module for AutoCAD
You can confirm whether Printer Driver Optimization Module for AutoCAD is installed by the following method.
1
From the File menu of AutoCAD, select Print.
2
The Printing dialog box is displayed.
Printer Driver Optimization Module for AutoCAD is in-
stalled if in Plotter of Printer/plotter this is dis-
played:iPFxxxx - Optimized driver - by Canon Inc..
Installation of Printer Driver Optimization Module for AutoCAD
If Printer Driver Optimization Module for AutoCAD is not installed, install it by the following method.
1
Insert User Software CD-ROM in the CD-ROM drive and start the installer.
2
In the Setup Menu window, click Install Individual Software.
3
Click Install of Printer Driver Optimization Module for AutoCAD.
4
Follow the instructions on the screen.
Specifying Colors and Printing CAD Drawings
Specifying Colors and Printing CAD Drawings
You can complete color settings when Color (CAD) is selected in Color Mode.
Colors can be adjusted before printing as follows when Color Compatibility is selected.
Note
•Color (CAD) is displayed when you select Advanced Settings on the Main sheet and set Print Priority to Line Draw-
ing/Text.
Color Compatibility
Color Setting Item
Color Setting Description
Color (CAD) 1 Print in standard colors.
Color (CAD) 2 Print with approximate colors emulating Canon iPF750, iPF755, iPF650, iPF655, iPF760,
iPF765.
Specifying Colors and Printing CAD Drawings
iPF785
User's Guide
Enhanced Printing Options Printing CAD Drawings
48
Color Setting Description
Color (CAD) 3 Print with approximate colors emulating Canon iPF500, iPF600, iPF700, iPF510, iPF610,
iPF710, iPF605, iPF720, iPF810, iPF820, iPF815, iPF825.
Color (CAD) 4 Print emulating the HP Designjet 500/800, in colors resembling colors produced by these
printers.
Color (CAD) 5 Print emulating the HP Designjet T1100, in colors resembling colors produced by this printer.
Important
•If you have selected Color (CAD) 2, Color (CAD) 3, Color (CAD) 4, or Color (CAD) 5, it is not possible to match the
colors and image quality produced by the specified printer exactly.
For instructions on configuring Color Compatibility, refer to the following topics.
•
Specifying Colors and Printing CAD Drawings (Windows) ➔P.49
Specifying Colors and Printing CAD Drawings (Windows)
Specifying Colors and Printing CAD Drawings (Windows)
You can complete color settings when Color (CAD) is selected in Color Mode.
Note
•Color (CAD) is displayed when you select Advanced Settings on the Main sheet and set Print Priority to Line Draw-
ing/Text.
1
Click start > Printers and Faxes (or Printers ).
2
Select the printer, and then display the printer proper-
ties dialog box.
3
Click the Device Settings tab to display the Device
Settings sheet.
iPF785
Specifying Colors and Printing CAD Drawings (Windows)
User's Guide
Enhanced Printing Options Printing CAD Drawings
49
4
Click AColor Compatibility to display the Color Compati-
bility dialog box.
5
Select the desired color settings in the AColor Compatibility list.
Note
•For details on color settings, see "Specifying Colors and Printing CAD Drawings." ➔P.48
For printing instructions, refer to the following topic.
•
Choosing the Document Type and Printing Conditions ➔P.60
HP-GL/2 Printing
HP-GL/2 Printing
This printer supports printing using the original Canon GARO printer control language and printing using HP-GL/2 and
HP RTL emulation to print in colors resembling the colors produced by printers from other companies.
The printer automatically switches to the corresponding processing depending on whether a GARO or HP-GL/2 and
HP RTL emulation job is received.
Note
•GARO is an abbreviation of Graphic Arts Language with Raster Operations.
•HP-GL/2 is an abbreviation of Hewlett-Packard Graphics Language/2, and HP RTL is an abbreviation of Hewlett-Pack-
ard Raster Transfer Language.
•Emulation is good for obtaining results similar to printing on other printers.
When printing from applications that support HP-GL/2 output, specify HP-GL/2 in the application's plotter output set-
tings.
HP-GL/2 and HP RTL emulation related settings such as the printer to emulate are configured from the printer Control
Panel. (Refer to "Menu Structure ➔P.450 " and "Menu Settings ➔P.457 ")
Note
•For instructions on configuring these settings, refer to the software documentation.
It may not be possible to print jobs with excessively large amounts of data correctly.
•For information on CAD colors other than HP-GL/2 and HP RTL emulation, see "Menu Settings." ➔P.457
HP-GL/2 Printing
iPF785
User's Guide
Enhanced Printing Options Printing CAD Drawings
50
Adjusting Images
Adjusting Images
Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver ....................................................................................................................... 51
Fine-Tuning Colors of Photos and Images (Windows) ........................................................................................ 53
Fine-Tuning Colors of Photos and Images (Mac OS) .......................................................................................... 55
Giving Priority to Particular Graphic Elements and Colors for Printing ............................................................ 58
Choosing the Document Type and Printing Conditions (Windows) .............................................................. 60
Choosing the Document Type and Printing Conditions (Mac OS) ................................................................ 62
Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver
Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver
Color settings specified in the application for your documents are essentially given priority over other settings for each
print job, but further color adjustment is possible in the printer driver.
•
Color Mode
Choose how the printer driver processes color, as desired.
The available options vary depending on the color mode.
Color Mode Description Color Adjustment
Color Print in color. You can select the color balance and color
matching functions.
Monochrome Print in grayscale. You can adjust the color balance.
Color (CAD) A color mode optimized for line drawings
(2D-CAD). Lines in red, yellow, and other
colors are printed especially clearly.
You can adjust the color balance.
Monochrome (BK ink) A color mode for printing line drawings.
Only Black ink is used.
You can adjust the color balance.
Monochrome Bitmap Print in a color mode for CAD, using Color
Ink, with all non-white portions printed in
black.
No color adjustment is supported.
No color correction (*1) Prints without performing color-matching
in the printer driver.
You can adjust the color balance.
*1: If No color correction is selected, the Matching sheet / Matching pane is not displayed.
•
Color Adjustment
You can adjust colors separately for images, graphics, and text documents.
Adjustment Item Description
Cyan Fine-tune color tones by adjusting the levels of Cyan, Magenta, and Yellow.
Magenta
Yellow
Gray Tone Adjust the grayscale, in a range from cool, blue tones to warm, red tones.
Brightness Adjust the brightness of printed images while keeping the darkest and lightest portions intact.
Contrast Adjust the contrast of the darkest and lightest portions relative to each other.
For soft gradation, decrease the contrast. For hard gradation, increase the contrast.
Saturation Adjust the level of color saturation, in a range from subdued to vivid.
Note
•Click Object Adjustment to open the Object Adjustment dialog box, which allows you to select the color adjust-
ment target from Image, Graphics, and Text.
iPF785
Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver
User's Guide
Enhanced Printing Options Adjusting Images
51
•
Matching
You can choose the color-matching mode and method.
By adjusting the color-matching mode and method, you can make printed colors match the colors of on-screen
images more closely.
Important
•If No color correction is selected under Color Mode, the Matching cannot be changed.
Matching Mode Description Remarks
Driver Matching Mode Enables printing of optimal color tones us-
ing a driver specific color profile.
You should normally select this mode.
ICC Matching Mode Enables color matching using ICC pro-
files.
Select this if you want to print by specify-
ing the input profile, printer profile, and
matching method in detail.
This allows you to use ICC profiles for digi-
tal cameras and scanners, ICC profiles cre-
ated using the profile creation tool, etc.
Host ICM Mode Enables color matching by the host com-
puter using the ICM function of Windows.
Select this if you want to print from an ap-
plication that supports the ICM function.
Available when using Windows.
ColorSync Enables color matching by using the Col-
orSync function of Mac OS.
Select this if you want to perform soft
proofing using ColorSync before printing.
Available when using Mac OS.
To select ColorSync, choose ColorSync
on the Color Matching panel.
Matching Method Description Remarks
Auto Color-matching optimized for images,
graphics, or text.
The available options and their display or-
der vary depending on your selected color-
matching mode, as well as the operating
system.
Perceptual Color-matching optimized for printing typi-
cal photos attractively. Smooth gradation
is a feature. This is also an easy-to-use
mode when performing color adjustment
using application software.
Colorimetric Color-matching optimized for printing im-
age data with accurate colors in input col-
or space. This is the easiest-to-use mode
when you want to adjust the color and
print. However, gradation may be lost for
colors of wider range than the color repro-
duction range of the printer. Generally,
this is also called relative colorimetric.
Colorimetric (No Wht-pnt Corr) The processing method of color-matching
is identical to Colorimetric. Use this when
you want to further reproduce the target
paper material color of the image data.
Generally, this also is called absolute col-
orimetric
Saturation Color-matching optimized for printing
posters, etc., vividly.
For instructions on color adjustment, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating
system.
•
Fine-Tuning Colors of Photos and Images (Windows) ➔P.53
•
Fine-Tuning Colors of Photos and Images (Mac OS) ➔P.55
Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver
iPF785
User's Guide
Enhanced Printing Options Adjusting Images
52
Fine-Tuning Colors of Photos and Images (Windows)
Fine-Tuning Colors of Photos and Images (Windows)
You can specify your own print settings instead of using the Print Target presets. This topic describes how to fine-tune
the color tone of photos before printing.
1
Choose Print in the application menu.
2
Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (See "Accessing the Printer
Driver Dialog Box from Applications .") ➔P.164
3
Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
4
In the AMedia Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded.
5
Click DAdvanced Settings to switch the print mode.
6
Click Color in the GColor Mode list.
iPF785
Fine-Tuning Colors of Photos and Images (Windows)
User's Guide
Enhanced Printing Options Adjusting Images
53
7
Click HColor Settings to display the Color Settings dialog
box.
8
On the Color Adjustment sheet, adjust the color tones, brightness, and so on as desired.
Adjustment Item Description
DCyan Fine-tune color tones by adjusting the levels of Cyan, Magenta, and Yellow.
EMagenta
FYellow
GGray Tone Adjust the gray tone. Choose cool black (tinged with blue), pure black (neutral), warm
black (tinged with red), and so on.
HBrightness Adjust the brightness of printed images while keeping the darkest and lightest portions in-
tact.
IContrast Adjust the contrast of the darkest and lightest portions relative to each other.
For soft gradation, decrease the contrast. For hard gradation, increase the contrast.
JSaturation Adjust the level of color saturation, in a range from subdued to vivid.
Note
•Click Object Adjustment to open the Object Adjustment dialog box, which allows you to select the color
adjustment target from Image, Graphics, and Text.
9
Close the Color Settings dialog box.
10
Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup
sheet.
11
Confirm the settings of APage Size, LPaper Source, and so on.
Fine-Tuning Colors of Photos and Images (Windows)
iPF785
User's Guide
Enhanced Printing Options Adjusting Images
54
12
Confirm the print settings and print as desired.
Note
•For tips on confirming print settings, see "Confirming Print Settings ." ➔P.161
Fine-Tuning Colors of Photos and Images (Mac OS)
Fine-Tuning Colors of Photos and Images (Mac OS)
You can specify your own print settings instead of using the Print Target presets. This topic describes how to fine-tune
the color tone of photos before printing.
1
Choose Page Setup from the application menu to display the Page Attributes dialog box.
Note
•The configuration method varies depending on the OS
and application software you are using.
If Page Setup is displayed in the application menu, the
settings are configured by opening the Page Attributes
dialog box from Page Setup.
If it is not displayed, the settings are configured in the upper
part of the printer driver displayed when you select Print
from the application software menu.
2
Select the printer in the BFormat for list.
3
Choose the original size in the CPaper Size list.
4
Click FOK to close the dialog box.
5
Choose Print in the application menu.
iPF785
Fine-Tuning Colors of Photos and Images (Mac OS)
User's Guide
Enhanced Printing Options Adjusting Images
55
10
Click ISet to display the Color Settings dialog box.
11
On the Color Adjustment pane, adjust the color tones, brightness, and so on as desired.
Adjustment Item Description
DCyan Fine-tune color tones by adjusting the levels of Cyan, Magenta, and Yellow.
EMagenta
FYellow
GGray Tone Adjust the gray tone. Choose cool black (tinged with blue), pure black (neutral), warm
black (tinged with red), and so on.
HBrightness Adjust the brightness of printed images while keeping the darkest and lightest portions in-
tact.
IContrast Adjust the contrast of the darkest and lightest portions relative to each other.
For soft gradation, decrease the contrast. For hard gradation, increase the contrast.
JSaturation Adjust the level of color saturation, in a range from subdued to vivid.
Note
•Click Object Adjustment to open the Object Adjustment dialog box, which allows you to select the color
adjustment target from Images, Graphics, and Text.
12
Click OK to close the Color Settings dialog box.
iPF785
Fine-Tuning Colors of Photos and Images (Mac OS)
User's Guide
Enhanced Printing Options Adjusting Images
57
13
Access the Page Setup pane.
14
Confirm the print settings, and then click MPrint to start printing.
Note
•For tips on confirming print settings, see "Confirming Print Settings ." ➔P.281
Giving Priority to Particular Graphic Elements and Colors for Printing
Giving Priority to Particular Graphic Elements and Colors for Printing
You can specify detailed print settings as desired for the quality level, colors, and other criteria.
•
Advanced Settings
For printing results that appear just as expected for your original, you can specify which graphic elements and col-
ors to prioritize for printing.
Note
•Easy Settings are also available, providing convenient presets. To use the presets, simply choose the printing
application.
For details on Easy Settings, refer to the following topics.
•Printing Photos and Images ➔P.33
•Printing Line Drawings and Text ➔P.43
•Printing Office Documents ➔P.37
•
Print Priority
Choose the graphic elements that you want to emphasize for printing.
Print Priority (*1) Description
Image A setting for posters or other documents made up mainly of photos or images, or for empha-
sizing photos or images in printed documents.
Line Drawing/Text Choose this setting for CAD drawings made up mainly of intricate lines, or wall newspapers
and other notices with a large amount of text. Suitable for emphasizing detailed text in prin-
ted documents.
However, the quality may not be sufficient when printing photos or images that require a lot
of color coverage. In this case, choose Image instead.
Office Document Choose this setting for better legibility of documents combining text and graphics, such as
documents and presentation material created with typical office applications.
*1: Options suitable for the selected type of paper are listed under Print Priority.
Giving Priority to Particular Graphic Elements and Colors for Printing
iPF785
User's Guide
Enhanced Printing Options Adjusting Images
58
•
Print Quality
Choose the print quality.
The printing mode is determined by a combination of the print quality and resolution.
Print Quality (*1) Description Print Priority
Highest A setting for printing at the highest resolution when
quality is most important. Printing takes longer and
consumes more ink than in other modes, but this
mode offers superior printing quality.
Image
High Choose this setting to print at high resolution when
quality is most important.
Printing takes longer and consumes more ink than
in Standard or Fast modes, but this mode offers
exceptional printing quality.
Image
Line Drawing/Text
Standard Choose this setting to print at standard resolution
when quality and speed are both important.
Printing takes less time than in Highest or High
mode.
Image
Line Drawing/Text
Office Document
Fast Choose this setting to print faster.
Printing in draft mode can help you work more effi-
ciently when checking layouts.
Image
Line Drawing/Text
*1: Options suitable for the selected Print Priority are listed under Print Quality.
•
Color Settings
Setting Item Options Description
Color Mode (*1) Color
Monochrome
Color (CAD)
Monochrome (BK ink)
Monochrome Bitmap
No color correction
Choose whether to print in color or monochrome.
(See "Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driv-
er.") ➔P.51
Color Adjustment Cyan
Magenta
Yellow
Gray Tone
Brightness
Contrast
Saturation
You can adjust the levels of cyan, magenta, and
yellow as well as the brightness, contrast, satura-
tion, and gray tones.
If you choose Monochrome or Monochrome (BK
ink) in Color Mode only Brightness and Contrast
can be adjusted.
Image, Graphics, and Text are available as Object
Adjustment options.
Color-Matching Modes Driver Matching Mode
ICC Matching Mode
Host ICM Mode (Windows)
ColorSync (Mac OS)
Choose the color-matching mode.
Color-Matching Method (*2) Auto
Perceptual
Colorimetric
Saturation
Choose the color-matching method. The available
options vary depending on your selection in Color-
Matching Mode.
Gamma 2.2
1.8
You can adjust the gradation of intermediate tones
in an image.
You can select only after Driver Matching Mode
has been selected in Matching Mode.
*1: Options suitable for the selected Print Priority are listed under Color Mode.
*2: The order of options displayed varies depending on the operating system.
iPF785
Giving Priority to Particular Graphic Elements and Colors for Printing
User's Guide
Enhanced Printing Options Adjusting Images
59
•
Enhancing printing quality
Setting Item Description
Highest quality This prints at the highest resolution. Printing takes longer and consumes more ink than in
other modes, but this mode offers superior printing quality.
Thicken Fine Lines Prints making fine lines appear thicker.
Sharpen Text Choose this option to print intricate text more distinctly.
Reduce Print Unevenness (*1) Choose this option to counteract uneven printing.
Unidirectional Printing Prints by suppressing color variations and misaligned ruled lines. However, this takes more
time than regular printing.
Economy Printing When this mode is selected, less ink is consumed than in regular printing, but the quality is
diminished.
Select this mode if you want to conserve ink when checking drawings, for example. Depend-
ing on the Media Type and Print Quality settings, this mode may not be available.
*1: Displayed in Mac OS.
Note
•To print at a higher level of quality, in the printer driver, choose High or Highest in Print Quality, and select the
Unidirectional Printing check box.
For instructions on specifying the print quality and color settings before printing, refer to the following topics, as
appropriate for your computer and operating system.
•
Choosing the Document Type and Printing Conditions (Windows) ➔P.60
•
Choosing the Document Type and Printing Conditions (Mac OS) ➔P.62
Choosing the Document Type and Printing Conditions (Windows)
Choosing the Document Type and Printing Conditions (Windows)
You can specify your own print settings instead of using the Print Target presets. As an example, this topic describes
how to print CAD drawings as clearly as possible, with sharp lines and text.
1
Choose Print in the application menu.
2
Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (See "Accessing the Printer
Driver Dialog Box from Applications .") ➔P.164
3
Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
4
In the AMedia Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded.
Choosing the Document Type and Printing Conditions (Windows)
iPF785
User's Guide
Enhanced Printing Options Adjusting Images
60
5
Click DAdvanced Settings to switch the print mode.
6
Click Line Drawing/Text in the EPrint Priority list.
7
Click High (1200dpi) in the FPrint Quality list.
Note
•Options displayed in the FPrint Quality list vary depending on the paper type.
8
Click Color (CAD) in the GColor Mode list.
9
To adjust the color, click HColor Settings.
Note
•For instructions on adjusting color, see "Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver." ➔P.51
10
Select the KSharpen Text check box.
11
Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup
sheet.
12
Confirm the settings of APage Size, LPaper Source, and so on.
13
Confirm the print settings and print as desired.
Note
•For tips on confirming print settings, see "Confirming Print Settings ." ➔P.161
iPF785
Choosing the Document Type and Printing Conditions (Windows)
User's Guide
Enhanced Printing Options Adjusting Images
61
Choosing the Document Type and Printing Conditions (Mac OS)
Choosing the Document Type and Printing Conditions (Mac OS)
You can specify your own print settings instead of using the Print Target presets. This topic describes how print photo-
graphic images in monochrome.
1
Choose Page Setup from the application menu to display the Page Attributes dialog box.
Note
•The configuration method varies depending on the OS
and application software you are using.
If Page Setup is displayed in the application menu, the
settings are configured by opening the Page Attributes
dialog box from Page Setup.
If it is not displayed, the settings are configured in the upper
part of the printer driver displayed when you select Print
from the application software menu.
2
Select the printer in the BFormat for list.
3
Choose the original size in the CPaper Size list.
4
Click FOK to close the dialog box.
5
In the application menu, choose Print.
6
Access the Main pane.
Choosing the Document Type and Printing Conditions (Mac OS)
iPF785
User's Guide
Enhanced Printing Options Adjusting Images
62
7
In the AMedia Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded.
8
Click DAdvanced Settings to switch the print mode.
9
Click Image in the EPrint Priority list.
10
Click High (600dpi) in the FPrint Quality list.
Note
•Options displayed in the FPrint Quality list vary depending on the paper type.
11
Click Monochrome in the HColor Mode list.
12
To adjust the brightness and contrast, click ISet.
Note
•For instructions on adjusting brightness and contrast, see "Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver." ➔P.51
iPF785
Choosing the Document Type and Printing Conditions (Mac OS)
User's Guide
Enhanced Printing Options Adjusting Images
63
13
Access the Page Setup pane.
14
Confirm the print settings, and then click MPrint to start printing.
Note
•For tips on confirming print settings, see "Confirming Print Settings ." ➔P.281
Choosing the Document Type and Printing Conditions (Mac OS)
iPF785
User's Guide
Enhanced Printing Options Adjusting Images
64
Printing enlargements or reductions
Printing enlargements or reductions
Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size .................................................................................................................. 65
Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size (Windows) ......................................................................................65
Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width ........................................................................................................................... 67
Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (Windows) .............................................................................................. 67
Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (Mac OS) ................................................................................................ 69
Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value ............................................................................................................ 71
Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value (Windows) ............................................................................... 72
Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value (Mac OS) ................................................................................. 73
Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size
Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size
You can freely adjust the size of originals by enlarging or reducing them as desired.
•
Enlarged/Reduced Printing
Enlarge or reduce the original in the printer driver, as desired.
•
Fit Paper Size
Enlarge or reduce the original to match the size of the paper you are using.
For instructions on printing with resizing to fit the paper size, refer to the following topics.
•
Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size (Windows) ➔P.65
Note
•To print with resizing to fit the paper size on Mac OS, use Scale to fit paper size in the Paper Handling panel
provided by the OS.
For more information, see the Mac OS User Manual.
•For better printing results when enlarging photos from a digital camera in TIFF or JPEG format, use an image-
editing application software such as Adobe Photoshop to specify an image resolution of 150 dpi or more at actual
size.
Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size (Windows)
Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size (Windows)
This topic describes how to enlarge originals before printing to match the paper size, based on the following example.
•
Document: Any Type
iPF785
Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size
User's Guide
Enhanced Printing Options Printing enlargements or reductions
65
•
Page size: A4 (210.0×297.0 mm)/Letter (8.3 × 11.7 in)
•
Paper: Roll
•
Paper type: Plain Paper
•
Roll paper width: A2/A3 roll (420.0 mm [16.5 in])
1
Choose Print in the application menu.
2
Select the printer in the dialog box, and then open the printer driver dialog box. (See "Accessing the Printer
Driver Dialog Box from Applications .") ➔P.164
3
Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
4
In the AMedia Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.
5
Select the printing application in the EPrint Target list.
6
Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup
sheet.
7
Select and click a roll paper in the LPaper Source list.
8
Select the width of the loaded roll in the MRoll Paper Width list—in this case, ISO A2/A3 Roll (420.0mm).
9
In the APage Size list, click the size of the original as specified in the application. In this case, click ISO A4.
10
Select the CEnlarged/Reduced Printing check box.
11
Select the DFit Paper Size check box.
Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size (Windows)
iPF785
User's Guide
Enhanced Printing Options Printing enlargements or reductions
66
12
Click ISO A3 in the GPaper Size list.
13
Confirm the print settings and print as desired.
Note
•For tips on confirming print settings, see "Confirming Print Settings ." ➔P.161
Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width
Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width
You can freely adjust the size of originals by enlarging or reducing them as desired.
•
Enlarged/Reduced Printing
Enlarge or reduce the original in the printer driver, as desired.
•
Fit Roll Paper Width
Enlarge or reduce the original as a whole to match the roll paper width, as desired.
Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (Windows)
Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (Windows)
This topic describes how to enlarge originals before printing to match the roll width, based on the following example.
•
Document: Any type
•
Page size: A4 (210.0×297.0 mm)/Letter (8.3 × 11.7 in)
•
Paper: Roll
•
Paper type: Plain Paper
•
Roll paper width: 16 inches (406.4 mm)
1
Choose Print in the application menu.
2
Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (See "Accessing the Printer
Driver Dialog Box from Applications .") ➔P.164
iPF785
Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width
User's Guide
Enhanced Printing Options Printing enlargements or reductions
67
3
Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
4
In the AMedia Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.
5
Select the printing application in the EPrint Target list.
6
Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup
sheet.
7
Select and click a roll paper in the LPaper Source list.
8
In the APage Size list, click the size of the original as specified in the application. In this case, click ISO A4 or
Letter (8.5"x11").
Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (Windows)
iPF785
User's Guide
Enhanced Printing Options Printing enlargements or reductions
68
9
Select the CEnlarged/Reduced Printing check box.
Note
•If the CEnlarged/Reduced Printing check box is not
displayed on the Page Setup sheet, clear the BBor-
derless Printing check box.
10
Click EFit Roll Paper Width.
Note
•After you click EFit Roll Paper Width, the Information dialog box is displayed. Select the width of the loa-
ded roll in the Roll Paper Width list and click OK.
•Make sure the roll paper width you specify matches the width of the loaded roll.
11
Confirm the print settings and print as desired.
Note
•For tips on confirming print settings, see "Confirming Print Settings ." ➔P.161
Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (Mac OS)
Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (Mac OS)
This topic describes how to enlarge originals before printing to match the roll width, based on the following example.
•
Document: Any Type
•
Page size: A4 (210.0 × 297.0 mm [8.3 × 11.7 in])
•
Paper: Roll paper
•
Paper type: Plain Paper
•
Roll paper width: 16 inches (406.4 mm)
iPF785
Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (Mac OS)
User's Guide
Enhanced Printing Options Printing enlargements or reductions
69
1
Choose Page Setup from the application menu to display the Page Attributes dialog box.
Note
•The configuration method varies depending on the OS
and application software you are using.
If Page Setup is displayed in the application menu, the
settings are configured by opening the Page Attributes
dialog box from Page Setup.
If it is not displayed, the settings are configured in the upper
part of the printer driver displayed when you select Print
from the application software menu.
2
Select the printer in the BFormat for list.
3
In CPaper Size, click the size of the original. In this case, click ISO A4.
4
Click FOK to close the dialog box.
5
Choose Print in the application menu.
6
Access the Main pane.
7
In the AMedia Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.
8
Make your selection in the EPrint Target list.
Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (Mac OS)
iPF785
User's Guide
Enhanced Printing Options Printing enlargements or reductions
70
9
Make your selection in the FPrint Quality list.
10
Access the Page Setup pane.
11
Select and click a roll paper in the APaper Source list.
12
Select the paper width of the roll loaded in the printer for BRoll Width. In this case, 16 in. (406.4mm) is selec-
ted.
13
Select the DEnlarged/Reduced Printing check box.
14
Click FFit Roll Paper Width.
15
Confirm the print settings, and then click MPrint to start printing.
Note
•For tips on confirming print settings, see "Confirming Print Settings ." ➔P.281
Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value
Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value
You can freely adjust the size of originals by enlarging or reducing them as desired.
•
Enlarged/Reduced Printing
Enlarge or reduce the original in the printer driver, as desired.
•
Scaling
Enlarge or reduce originals by a particular amount, as desired.
iPF785
Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value
User's Guide
Enhanced Printing Options Printing enlargements or reductions
71
For instructions on entering a scaling value to resize originals, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your
computer and operating system.
•
Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value (Windows) ➔P.72
•
Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value (Mac OS) ➔P.73
Note
•For better printing results when enlarging photos from a digital camera in TIFF or JPEG format, use an image-
editing application software such as Adobe Photoshop to specify an image resolution of 150 dpi or more at actual
size.
Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value (Windows)
Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value (Windows)
This topic describes how to enlarge originals before printing by entering a scaling value, based on the following exam-
ple.
•
Document: Any Type
•
Page size: A4 (210.0 × 297.0 mm [8.3 × 11.7 in])
•
Paper: Roll paper
•
Paper type: Plain Paper
•
Roll paper width: A2/A3 roll (420.0 mm [16.5 in])
Important
•In borderless printing, you cannot resize originals by entering a scaling value.
1
Choose Print in the application menu.
2
Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (See "Accessing the Printer
Driver Dialog Box from Applications .") ➔P.164
3
Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
4
In the AMedia Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.
5
Select the printing application in the EPrint Target list.
Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value (Windows)
iPF785
User's Guide
Enhanced Printing Options Printing enlargements or reductions
72
6
Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup
sheet.
7
Select and click a roll paper in the LPaper Source list.
8
Select the width of the loaded roll in the MRoll Paper Width list—in this case, ISO A2/A3 Roll (420.0mm).
9
In the APage Size list, click the size of the original as specified in the application. In this case, click ISO A4.
10
Select the CEnlarged/Reduced Printing check box.
11
Click ISO A4 in the GPaper Size list.
12
Click FScaling and enter 120.
Note
•You can specify enlargement that exceeds the paper size, but in this case, the portions off the bottom and
right edges of the paper will not be printed.
•If the original size after enlargement or reduction is
smaller than the paper size, the original is printed in the
upper-left corner. In this case, you can center originals
by selecting EPrint Centered on the Layout sheet.
13
Confirm the print settings and print as desired.
Note
•For tips on confirming print settings, see "Confirming Print Settings ." ➔P.161
Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value (Mac OS)
Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value (Mac OS)
This topic describes how to enlarge originals before printing by entering a scaling value, based on the following exam-
ple.
•
Document: Any Type
iPF785
Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value (Mac OS)
User's Guide
Enhanced Printing Options Printing enlargements or reductions
73
•
Page size: A4 (210.0 × 297.0 mm [8.3 × 11.7 in])
•
Paper: Roll paper
•
Paper type: Plain Paper
•
Roll paper width: A2/A3 roll (420.0 mm [16.5 in])
1
Choose Page Setup from the application menu to display the Page Attributes dialog box.
Note
•The configuration method varies depending on the OS
and application software you are using.
If Page Setup is displayed in the application menu, the
settings are configured by opening the Page Attributes
dialog box from Page Setup.
If it is not displayed, the settings are configured in the upper
part of the printer driver displayed when you select Print
from the application software menu.
2
Select the printer in the BFormat for list.
3
In CPaper Size, click the size of the original. In this case, click ISO A4.
4
Click FOK to close the dialog box.
5
Choose Print in the application menu.
6
Access the Main pane.
Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value (Mac OS)
iPF785
User's Guide
Enhanced Printing Options Printing enlargements or reductions
74
7
In the AMedia Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.
8
Make your selection in the EPrint Target list.
9
Make your selection in the FPrint Quality list.
10
Access the Page Setup pane.
11
Select and click a roll paper in the APaper Source list.
12
Select the paper width of the roll loaded in the printer for BRoll Width. In this case, ISO A2/A3 (420.0mm) is
selected.
13
Select the DEnlarged/Reduced Printing check box.
14
Click GScaling and enter 120.
Note
•You can specify enlargement that exceeds the paper size, but in this case, the portion off the edge of the
paper will not be printed.
•If the original size after enlargement or reduction is smaller than the paper size, the original is printed in the
upper-left corner. In this case, you can center originals by selecting the JPrint Centered check box.
15
Confirm the print settings, and then click MPrint to start printing.
Note
•For tips on confirming print settings, see "Confirming Print Settings ." ➔P.281
iPF785
Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value (Mac OS)
User's Guide
Enhanced Printing Options Printing enlargements or reductions
75
Printing at full size
Printing at full size
Printing on Oversize Paper ................................................................................................................................................... 76
Printing at Full Size (Windows) ......................................................................................................................................77
Printing at Full Size (Mac OS) ........................................................................................................................................ 78
Borderless Printing at Actual Size .....................................................................................................................................80
Borderless Printing at Actual Size (Windows) ........................................................................................................ 81
Borderless Printing at Actual Size (Mac OS) .......................................................................................................... 83
Printing on Oversize Paper
Printing on Oversize Paper
You can print all areas of the original at full scale by selecting the paper size from Oversize (sizes where the margins
needed for printer operation have been added to the page size).
We recommend when printing with a focus on image.
Note
•If you prepare an original for printing without a margin and print it on paper of regular size, the image near the edge will
not be printed.
•
Oversize
When printing on standard paper sizes, printing is performed by taking the margins necessary for printer opera-
tions inside the region of the original. (See "Print Area.") ➔P.681 For example, printing the A4 size (210 x 297
mm) original shown in Figure (b) gives the result as shown in Figure (a).
However, if Oversize paper is selected, printing is performed by taking the margins necessary for printer opera-
tions outside of the region of the original to give the result as shown in Figure (c).
The A4 size print as shown in Figure (b) can then be obtained by trimming the margins from the periphery after
printing.
Important
•When printing on Oversize paper, load paper larger than the page size—a size that includes the margin re-
quired by the printer.
•Sheets: Load paper that is at least 10 mm (0.39 in) wider and 28 mm (1.10 in) higher than the page size
•Rolls:Load paper that is at least 10 mm (0.39 in) wider and 10 mm (0.39 in) higher than the page size
Note
•Paper larger than the maximum size supported by the printer cannot be used as paper for oversized printing.
(See "Paper Sizes.") ➔P.362
•Oversized printing (selecting Oversize in Page Size) is only available in Windows.
•If you are performing oversized printing in Mac OS, you need to configure printing on non-standard paper sizes.
•To specify a non-standard paper size in oversized printing, register the paper size as a Custom Paper Size. Over-
sized printing is not available with Custom Size. (See "Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes.") ➔P.104
Printing on Oversize Paper
iPF785
User's Guide
Enhanced Printing Options Printing at full size
76
For instructions on oversized printing, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating
system.
•
Printing at Full Size (Windows) ➔P.77
•
Printing at Full Size (Mac OS) ➔P.78
Printing at Full Size (Windows)
Printing at Full Size (Windows)
This topic describes how to print at full size based on the following example. (Oversized Printing)
•
Document: Any Type
•
Page size: A4 (210.0×297.0 mm)/Letter (8.3 × 11.7 in)
•
Paper: Roll
•
Paper type: Plain Paper
•
Roll paper width: A2/A3 roll (420.0 mm [16.5 in])
1
Choose Print in the application menu.
2
Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (See "Accessing the Printer
Driver Dialog Box from Applications .") ➔P.164
3
Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
4
In the AMedia Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.
5
Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup
sheet.
6
Click OSize Options to display the Paper Size Options dialog box.
iPF785
Printing at Full Size (Windows)
User's Guide
Enhanced Printing Options Printing at full size
77
7
In the Paper Size Options dialog box, select the Oversize check box in Display Series.
8
Click OK to close the Paper Size Options dialog box.
9
Click Oversize - ISO A4 in the APage Size list.
10
Select and click a roll paper in the LPaper Source list.
11
Select the width of the loaded roll in the MRoll Paper Width list—in this case, ISO A2/A3 Roll (420.0mm).
12
Confirm the print settings and print as desired.
Note
•For tips on confirming print settings, see "Confirming Print Settings ." ➔P.161
Printing at Full Size (Mac OS)
Printing at Full Size (Mac OS)
This topic describes how to print at full size based on the following example. (Oversized Printing)
•
Document: Any Type
•
Page size: A4 (210.0 × 297.0 mm [8.3 × 11.7 in])
•
Paper: Roll paper
•
Paper type: Plain Paper
•
Roll paper width: A2/A3 roll (420.0 mm [16.5 in])
1
Choose Page Setup from the application menu to display the Page Attributes dialog box.
Note
•The configuration method varies depending on the OS
and application software you are using.
If Page Setup is displayed in the application menu, the
settings are configured by opening the Page Attributes
dialog box from Page Setup.
If it is not displayed, the settings are configured in the upper
part of the printer driver displayed when you select Print
from the application software menu.
2
Select the printer in the BFormat for list.
3
In CPaper Size, click the size of the original. In this case, click ISO A4 - Oversize.
4
Click FOK to close the dialog box.
5
Choose Print in the application menu.
Printing at Full Size (Mac OS)
iPF785
User's Guide
Enhanced Printing Options Printing at full size
78
6
Access the Main pane.
7
In the AMedia Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.
8
Make your selection in the EPrint Target list.
9
Make your selection in the FPrint Quality list.
10
Access the Page Setup pane.
11
Select and click a roll paper in the APaper Source list.
12
Select the paper width of the roll loaded in the printer for BRoll Width. In this case, ISO A2/A3 (420.0mm) is
selected.
iPF785
Printing at Full Size (Mac OS)
User's Guide
Enhanced Printing Options Printing at full size
79
13
Confirm the print settings, and then click MPrint to start printing.
Note
•For tips on confirming print settings, see "Confirming Print Settings ." ➔P.281
Borderless Printing at Actual Size
Borderless Printing at Actual Size
Take advantage of borderless printing to print documents such as posters (made up mainly of photos or images) with-
out a surrounding margin, or border.
In regular printing, a margin required by the printer is added around the original. With borderless printing, you can print
documents without the margin, so that the printed image covers the entire surface of the paper.
•
Borderless printing is only available with rolls.
•
Paper you can use for borderless printing is restricted to particular types of paper and rolls of particular widths.
(See "Displaying the Paper Reference Guide.") ➔P.366
•
Although it normally prints borderless on the top, bottom, left, and right (4-edge borderless), in the following cases,
it becomes borderless only on the left and right (2-edge borderless) because the top and bottom of the printed
image are not automatically cut.
•
When paper where the borderless printing is described as two edges only in the Paper Reference Guide
(paper where printed image areas cannot be cut cleanly) is selected
•
When the following settings are made in the printer control panel
•
Cutting Mode is Manual
•
CutDustReduct. is On
•
When auto cut is configured as not performed in the printer driver
Important
•Borderless printing is not possible if details such as crop marks and margins are included as data on the periphery of
the original.
•If the length of the image to print is short, then since the roll paper is fed out to a prescribed length before cutting in
order to prevent cutting problems and ejection problems, the trailing edge of the roll paper might not be printed bor-
derless.
•These features cannot be used in combination with borderless printing: special page layouts, centering originals, and
printing cut lines on rolls.
•If Fit Paper Size or Print Image with Actual Size (Windows only) is selected while performing borderless printing,
Rotate Page 90 degrees (Conserve Paper) cannot be selected. Note that if borderless printing is possible, then
even if the original is rotated 90 degrees, it will be printed by automatically rotating the page by 90 degrees.
Choose the method of borderless printing that suits the original, as desired.
Borderless Printing at Actual Size
iPF785
User's Guide
Enhanced Printing Options Printing at full size
80
•
Print Image with Actual Size
Prints originals at actual size, without enlarging or reducing them. We recommend when focusing on image quali-
ty. You should create the original at a size larger by 3 mm on each side than the paper size.
Note
•Not all page sizes are available.
•When performing borderless printing without using Print Image with Actual Size, the image deteriorates slightly
because the image is automatically enlarged.
For instructions on borderless printing of photos and images at actual size, refer to the following topics, as appro-
priate for your computer and operating system.
•
Borderless Printing at Actual Size (Windows) ➔P.81
•
Borderless Printing at Actual Size (Mac OS) ➔P.83
Borderless Printing at Actual Size (Windows)
Borderless Printing at Actual Size (Windows)
This topic describes how to print borderlessly at actual size based on the following example.
Important
•When borderless printing is used, the edge of the paper is cut during printing. Thus, ink density may be uneven at the
edges. If you require higher image quality, select No from the Automatic Cutting list in the Roll Paper Options
dialog box. In this case, the paper can be printed without borders on the left and right sides only. Once printed and
cut, please cut the upper and lower bands with scissors.
•
Document: Any type
•
Page size: 10×12 inches (254.0×304.8 mm)
•
Paper: Roll
•
Paper type: Canon Heavyweight Coated Paper
•
Roll paper width: 10 inches (254.0 mm)
1
Create the original in the source application 3 mm (0.12 in) larger on each side than 254.0×304.8 mm (10 × 12
in) —that is, 260.0×310.8 mm (10.2 × 12.2 in)
Note
•If you can specify the margin, as in Microsoft Word, set the margin at 0 mm. For instructions on specifying the
margin, refer to the software documentation.
•The extra 3 mm (0.12 in) on each side will not be printed. Create the original so that it fits inside the paper
area to be printed on.
2
Choose Print in the application menu.
3
Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (See "Accessing the Printer
Driver Dialog Box from Applications .") ➔P.164
iPF785
Borderless Printing at Actual Size (Windows)
User's Guide
Enhanced Printing Options Printing at full size
81
4
Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
5
In the AMedia Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Canon Heavyweight Coat-
ed Paper.
6
Select the print target in the EPrint Target list.
Important
•When you are using paper that takes longer for ink to adhere for borderless printing and the Cutter Unit
touches printing surfaces that are not dry yet, it may damage the paper or the edge of the document that is
cut, depending on frequency of use. In this kind of situation, change the ink drying time using the following
procedure.
•Click Advanced Settings in Media Type.
•Select an ink drying time in the list for the Between Pages setting of Drying Time.
7
Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup
sheet.
8
In the APage Size list, click the size of the original as specified in the source application. In this case, click
10"x12".
9
Select and click a roll paper in the LPaper Source list.
Borderless Printing at Actual Size (Windows)
iPF785
User's Guide
Enhanced Printing Options Printing at full size
82
10
Select the BBorderless Printing check box to display
the Information dialog box.
11
Select the width of the loaded roll in the Roll Paper Width list—in this case, click 10-in. Roll (254.0mm).
12
Click OK to close the Information dialog box.
13
In CBorderless Printing Method, click FPrint Image with Actual Size.
14
Confirm the print settings and print as desired.
Note
•For tips on confirming print settings, see "Confirming Print Settings ." ➔P.161
Borderless Printing at Actual Size (Mac OS)
Borderless Printing at Actual Size (Mac OS)
This topic describes how to print borderlessly at actual size based on the following example.
Important
•When borderless printing is used, the edge of the paper is cut during printing. Thus, ink density may be uneven at the
edges. If you require higher image quality, select No from the Automatic Cutting list in the Paper Detailed Settings
dialog box. In this case, the paper can be printed without borders on the left and right sides only. Once printed and
cut, please cut the upper and lower bands with scissors.
•
Document: Any type
•
Page size: 10 × 12 inches (254.0×304.8 mm)–Borderless
•
Paper: Roll
•
Paper type: Canon Heavyweight Coated Paper
•
Roll paper width: 10 inches (254.0 mm)
iPF785
Borderless Printing at Actual Size (Mac OS)
User's Guide
Enhanced Printing Options Printing at full size
83
1
Choose Page Setup from the application menu to display the Page Attributes dialog box.
Note
•The configuration method varies depending on the OS
and application software you are using.
If Page Setup is displayed in the application menu, the
settings are configured by opening the Page Attributes
dialog box from Page Setup.
If it is not displayed, the settings are configured in the upper
part of the printer driver displayed when you select Print
from the application software menu.
2
Select the printer in the BFormat for list.
3
In the CPaper Size list, choose a paper size supported for borderless printing. Here, click 10"x12" - Border-
less.
Note
•Paper sizes supported for borderless printing are indicated by -Borderless.
4
Click FOK to close the dialog box.
5
In the application, create an original that takes up the entire space of the paper size.
6
Choose Print in the application menu.
Borderless Printing at Actual Size (Mac OS)
iPF785
User's Guide
Enhanced Printing Options Printing at full size
84
7
Access the Main pane.
8
In the AMedia Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Canon Heavyweight Coat-
ed Paper.
9
Select the print target in the EPrint Target list.
Important
•When you are using paper that takes longer for ink to adhere for borderless printing and the Cutter Unit
touches printing surfaces that are not dry yet, it may damage the paper or the edge of the document that is
cut, depending on frequency of use. In this kind of situation, change the ink drying time in Between Pages in
the Paper Detailed Settings dialog box.
10
Access the Page Setup pane.
11
Select and click a roll paper in the APaper Source list.
Select the paper width of the roll loaded in the printer for BRoll Width. In this case, 10 in. (254.0mm) is selec-
ted.
iPF785
Borderless Printing at Actual Size (Mac OS)
User's Guide
Enhanced Printing Options Printing at full size
85
Borderless Printing
Borderless Printing
Borderless Printing on Paper of Equivalent Size ........................................................................................................ 87
Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size (Windows) ...................................... 88
Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width ............................................................................90
Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (Windows) ............................................... 91
Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (Mac OS) ................................................. 93
Borderless Printing at Actual Size .....................................................................................................................................80
Borderless Printing at Actual Size (Windows) ........................................................................................................ 81
Borderless Printing at Actual Size (Mac OS) .......................................................................................................... 83
Borderless Printing on Paper of Equivalent Size
Borderless Printing on Paper of Equivalent Size
Take advantage of borderless printing to print documents such as posters (made up mainly of photos or images) with-
out a surrounding margin, or border.
In regular printing, a margin required by the printer is added around the original. With borderless printing, you can print
documents without the margin, so that the printed image covers the entire surface of the paper.
•
Borderless printing is only available with rolls.
•
Paper you can use for borderless printing is restricted to particular types of paper and rolls of particular widths.
(See "Displaying the Paper Reference Guide.") ➔P.366
•
Although it normally prints borderless on the top, bottom, left, and right (4-edge borderless), in the following cases,
it becomes borderless only on the left and right (2-edge borderless) because the top and bottom of the printed
image are not automatically cut.
•
When paper where the borderless printing is described as two edges only in the Paper Reference Guide
(paper where printed image areas cannot be cut cleanly) is selected
•
When the following settings are made in the printer control panel
•
Cutting Mode is Manual
•
CutDustReduct. is On
•
When auto cut is configured as not performed in the printer driver
Important
•Borderless printing is not possible if details such as crop marks and margins are included as data on the periphery of
the original.
•If the length of the image to print is short, then since the roll paper is fed out to a prescribed length before cutting in
order to prevent cutting problems and ejection problems, the trailing edge of the roll paper might not be printed bor-
derless.
•These features cannot be used in combination with borderless printing: special page layouts, centering originals, and
printing cut lines on rolls.
•If Fit Paper Size or Print Image with Actual Size (Windows only) is selected while performing borderless printing,
Rotate Page 90 degrees (Conserve Paper) cannot be selected. Note that if borderless printing is possible, then
even if the original is rotated 90 degrees, it will be printed by automatically rotating the page by 90 degrees.
iPF785
Borderless Printing on Paper of Equivalent Size
User's Guide
Enhanced Printing Options Borderless Printing
87
•
Fit Paper Size
Enlarge or reduce the original to match the size of the paper you are using.
Note
•The printer driver automatically enlarges originals 3 mm (0.12 in) past the dimensions of the paper on each side.
The 3 mm portion beyond the edge on each side is not printed.
For instructions on borderless printing of photos, images, and other documents to match the paper size, refer to
the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating system.
•
Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size (Windows) ➔P.88
Note
•To perform borderless printing with resizing to fit the paper size on Mac OS, select borderless in Paper Size
and use Scale to fit paper size in the Paper Handling panel provided by the OS.
For more information, see the Mac OS User Manual.
Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size (Windows)
Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size (Windows)
This topic describes how to enlarge originals before borderless printing to match the paper size, based on the following
example.
Important
•When borderless printing is used, the edge of the paper is cut during printing. Thus, ink density may be uneven at the
edges. If you require higher image quality, select No from the Automatic Cutting list in the Roll Paper Options
dialog box. In this case, the paper can be printed without borders on the left and right sides only. Once printed and
cut, please cut the upper and lower bands with scissors.
•
Document: Any type
•
Page size: 10×12 inches (254.0×304.8 mm)
•
Paper: Roll
•
Paper type: Canon Heavyweight Coated Paper
•
Roll paper width: 10 inches (254.0 mm)
Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size (Windows)
iPF785
User's Guide
Enhanced Printing Options Borderless Printing
88
1
In the application, create an original that takes up the entire space of the paper size.
Note
•If you can specify the margin, as in Microsoft Word, set the margin at 0 mm. For instructions on specifying the
margin, refer to the software documentation.
2
Choose Print in the application menu.
3
Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (See "Accessing the Printer
Driver Dialog Box from Applications .") ➔P.164
4
Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
5
In the AMedia Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Canon Heavyweight Coat-
ed Paper.
6
Select the print target in the EPrint Target list.
Important
•When you are using paper that takes longer for ink to adhere for borderless printing and the Cutter Unit
touches printing surfaces that are not dry yet, it may damage the paper or the edge of the document that is
cut, depending on frequency of use. In this kind of situation, change the ink drying time using the following
procedure.
•Click Advanced Settings in Media Type.
•Select an ink drying time in the list for the Between Pages setting of Drying Time.
7
Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup
sheet.
iPF785
Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size (Windows)
User's Guide
Enhanced Printing Options Borderless Printing
89
8
In the APage Size list, click the size of the original as specified in the application. In this case, click 10"x12".
9
Select and click a roll paper in the LPaper Source list.
10
Select the BBorderless Printing check box to display
the Information dialog box.
11
Select the width of the loaded roll in the Roll Paper Width list—in this case, click 10-in. Roll (254.0mm).
12
Click OK to close the Information dialog box.
13
In CBorderless Printing Method, click DFit Paper Size.
14
Click Match Page Size in the GPaper Size list.
15
Confirm the print settings and print as desired.
Note
•For tips on confirming print settings, see "Confirming Print Settings ." ➔P.161
Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width
Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width
Take advantage of borderless printing to print documents such as posters (made up mainly of photos or images) with-
out a surrounding margin, or border.
In regular printing, a margin required by the printer is added around the original. With borderless printing, you can print
documents without the margin, so that the printed image covers the entire surface of the paper.
•
Borderless printing is only available with rolls.
•
Paper you can use for borderless printing is restricted to particular types of paper and rolls of particular widths.
(See "Displaying the Paper Reference Guide.") ➔P.366
•
Although it normally prints borderless on the top, bottom, left, and right (4-edge borderless), in the following cases,
it becomes borderless only on the left and right (2-edge borderless) because the top and bottom of the printed
image are not automatically cut.
•
When paper where the borderless printing is described as two edges only in the Paper Reference Guide
(paper where printed image areas cannot be cut cleanly) is selected
•
When the following settings are made in the printer control panel
•
Cutting Mode is Manual
•
CutDustReduct. is On
•
When auto cut is configured as not performed in the printer driver
Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width
iPF785
User's Guide
Enhanced Printing Options Borderless Printing
90
Important
•Borderless printing is not possible if details such as crop marks and margins are included as data on the periphery of
the original.
•If the length of the image to print is short, then since the roll paper is fed out to a prescribed length before cutting in
order to prevent cutting problems and ejection problems, the trailing edge of the roll paper might not be printed bor-
derless.
•These features cannot be used in combination with borderless printing: special page layouts, centering originals, and
printing cut lines on rolls.
•If Fit Paper Size or Print Image with Actual Size (Windows only) is selected while performing borderless printing,
Rotate Page 90 degrees (Conserve Paper) cannot be selected. Note that if borderless printing is possible, then
even if the original is rotated 90 degrees, it will be printed by automatically rotating the page by 90 degrees.
Choose the method of borderless printing that suits the original, as desired.
•
Scale to fit Roll Paper Width
Enlarge or reduce the original as a whole to match the roll paper width.
Note
•You can combine this function with rotating pages 90 degrees before printing so that the original width (relative to
portrait orientation) matches the roll paper width in borderless printing.
For instructions on borderless printing of photos, images, and other documents to match the roll paper width, refer
to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating system.
•
Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (Windows) ➔P.91
•
Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (Mac OS) ➔P.93
Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (Windows)
Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (Windows)
This topic describes how to enlarge originals before borderless printing to match the roll width, based on the following
example.
Important
•When borderless printing is used, the edge of the paper is cut during printing. Thus, ink density may be uneven at the
edges. If you require higher image quality, select No from the Automatic Cutting list in the Roll Paper Options
dialog box. In this case, the paper can be printed without borders on the left and right sides only. Once printed and
cut, please cut the upper and lower bands with scissors.
•
Document: Any type
•
Page size: A4 (210.0×297.0 mm)/Letter (8.3 × 11.7 in)
•
Paper: Roll
•
Paper type: Canon Heavyweight Coated Paper
•
Roll paper width: 10 inches (254.0 mm)
iPF785
Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (Windows)
User's Guide
Enhanced Printing Options Borderless Printing
91
1
In the application, create an original that takes up the entire space of the paper size.
Note
•If you can specify the margin, as in Microsoft Word, set the margin at 0 mm. For instructions on specifying the
margin, refer to the software documentation.
2
Choose Print in the application menu.
3
Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (See "Accessing the Printer
Driver Dialog Box from Applications .") ➔P.164
4
Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
5
In the AMedia Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Canon Heavyweight Coat-
ed Paper.
6
Select the print target in the EPrint Target list.
Important
•When you are using paper that takes longer for ink to adhere for borderless printing and the Cutter Unit
touches printing surfaces that are not dry yet, it may damage the paper or the edge of the document that is
cut, depending on frequency of use. In this kind of situation, change the ink drying time using the following
procedure.
•Click Advanced Settings in Media Type.
•Select an ink drying time in the list for the Between Pages setting of Drying Time.
7
Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup
sheet.
Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (Windows)
iPF785
User's Guide
Enhanced Printing Options Borderless Printing
92
8
In the APage Size list, click the size of the original as specified in the application. In this case, click ISO A4.
9
Select and click a roll paper in the LPaper Source list.
10
Select the BBorderless Printing check box to display
the Information dialog box.
11
Select the width of the loaded roll in the Roll Paper Width list—in this case, click 10-in. Roll (254.0mm).
12
Click OK to close the Information dialog box.
13
In CBorderless Printing Method, make sure EScale to fit Roll Paper Width is selected.
14
Confirm the print settings and print as desired.
Note
•For tips on confirming print settings, see "Confirming Print Settings ." ➔P.161
Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (Mac OS)
Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (Mac OS)
This topic describes how to enlarge originals before borderless printing to match the roll width, based on the following
example.
Important
•When borderless printing is used, the edge of the paper is cut during printing. Thus, ink density may be uneven at the
edges. If you require higher image quality, select No from the Automatic Cutting list in the Paper Detailed Settings
dialog box. In this case, the paper can be printed without borders on the left and right sides only. Once printed and
cut, please cut the upper and lower bands with scissors.
•
Document: Any type
•
Page size: A4 (210.0×297.0 mm)/Letter (8.3 × 11.7 in)
•
Paper: Roll
•
Paper type: Canon Heavyweight Coated Paper
•
Roll paper width: 10 inches (254.0 mm)
iPF785
Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (Mac OS)
User's Guide
Enhanced Printing Options Borderless Printing
93
1
Choose Page Setup from the application menu to display the Page Attributes dialog box.
Note
•The configuration method varies depending on the OS
and application software you are using.
If Page Setup is displayed in the application menu, the
settings are configured by opening the Page Attributes
dialog box from Page Setup.
If it is not displayed, the settings are configured in the upper
part of the printer driver displayed when you select Print
from the application software menu.
2
Select the printer in the BFormat for list.
3
In CPaper Size, click the size of the original. In this case, click ISO A4.
Note
•All sizes are available in borderless printing if you resize originals to fit the roll width.
4
Click FOK to close the dialog box.
5
In the application, create an original that takes up the entire space of the paper size.
6
Choose Print in the application menu.
Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (Mac OS)
iPF785
User's Guide
Enhanced Printing Options Borderless Printing
94
7
Access the Main pane.
8
In the AMedia Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Canon Heavyweight Coat-
ed Paper.
9
Select the print target in the EPrint Target list.
Important
•When you are using paper that takes longer for ink to adhere for borderless printing and the Cutter Unit
touches printing surfaces that are not dry yet, it may damage the paper or the edge of the document that is
cut, depending on frequency of use. In this kind of situation, change the ink drying time in Between Pages in
the Paper Detailed Settings dialog box.
10
Access the Page Setup pane.
11
Select and click a roll paper in the APaper Source list.
12
Select the paper width of the roll loaded in the printer for BRoll Width. In this case, 10 in. (254.0mm) is selec-
ted.
iPF785
Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (Mac OS)
User's Guide
Enhanced Printing Options Borderless Printing
95
13
Select the DEnlarged/Reduced Printing check box.
14
Select the HBorderless Printing check box.
This ensures that FFit Roll Paper Width is automatically selected in DEnlarged/Reduced Printing.
15
Confirm the print settings, and then click MPrint to start printing.
Note
•For tips on confirming print settings, see "Confirming Print Settings ." ➔P.281
Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (Mac OS)
iPF785
User's Guide
Enhanced Printing Options Borderless Printing
96
Printing banners or at other non-standard sizes
Printing banners or at other non-standard sizes
Printing Vertical or Horizontal Banners (Large-Format Printing) ......................................................................... 97
Printing Vertical or Horizontal Banners (Large-Format Printing; Windows) .............................................. 98
Printing Vertical or Horizontal Banners (Large-Format Printing; Mac OS) .............................................. 101
Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes ..........................................................................................................................104
Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes (Windows) ............................................................................................. 104
Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes (Mac OS) ............................................................................................... 107
Printing Vertical or Horizontal Banners (Large-Format Printing)
Printing Vertical or Horizontal Banners (Large-Format Printing)
On this printer, large-format printing of up to 18.0 m is available using rolls.
If you use Print Plug-In for Office or PosterArtist, you can easily print maximum 18.0 m vertical or horizontal banners.
(Refer to "Print Plug-In for Officefeatures (Windows)" ➔P.236 and "Using PosterArtist to Compose Originals" ➔P.41 .)
However, you may not be able to print 18.0 m due to restrictions in the settable document size according to the applica-
tion software.
Fit Roll Paper Width
To match the width of vertical and horizontal banners with the width of rolls, use the printer driver function for automati-
cally enlarging/reducing and printing.
For example, if you automatically enlarge a document created with application software such as Microsoft Word, you
can print the full width of the roll easily.
For instructions on printing vertical or horizontal banners, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer
and operating system.
•
Printing Vertical or Horizontal Banners (Large-Format Printing; Windows) ➔P.98
•
Printing Vertical or Horizontal Banners (Large-Format Printing; Mac OS) ➔P.101
Important
•Before printing, check how much of the roll paper is left. If you have activated automatic detection of the remaining roll
paper, a warning message is displayed when there is not enough roll paper left.
•If not much ink is left, prepare replacement ink tanks.
•To print at a higher level of quality, in the printer driver, choose High or Highest in Print Quality, and choose Unidirec-
tional Printing as the direction of printing.
iPF785
Printing Vertical or Horizontal Banners (Large-Format Printing)
User's Guide
Enhanced Printing Options Printing banners or at other non-standard sizes
97
Printing Vertical or Horizontal Banners (Large-Format Printing; Windows)
Printing Vertical or Horizontal Banners (Large-Format Printing; Windows)
By automatic enlargement of a document created with an application software by the printer driver, you can print maxi-
mum 18.0 m vertical or horizontal banners.
However, you may not be able to print 18.0 m due to restrictions in the settable document size according to the applica-
tion software.
This topic describes how to print a banner about five times as long as the roll width based on the following example.
•
Document: A horizontal banner created in Microsoft Word
•
Page size: Non-standard (100×500 mm [3.9×19.7 in])
•
Paper: Roll
•
Paper type: Plain Paper
•
Roll paper width: 16 in (406.4 mm)
The print procedure is as follows.
1.
Register a Custom Paper Size in the printer driver.
Call a non-standard paper size registered in the printer driver with Custom Paper Size.
Once you register Custom Paper Size, you then can select it repeatedly from the paper size list.
Custom Paper Size can be set up to 18.0 m.
2.
In the application, create an original in the size you registered.
3.
Print the banner, using the settings that correspond to banners.
Registering a Custom Paper Size
This example describes how to register a paper size that is horizontally elongated and suitable for banners in either
horizontal or vertical format.
1
Display the printer driver dialog box. (See "Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from the Operating System
Menu .") ➔P.166
2
Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup
sheet.
3
Select and click a roll paper in the LPaper Source list.
4
Click OSize Options to display the Paper Size Options dialog box.
5
Enter a desired paper name in Custom Paper Size Name. My Horizontal Banner is used in this example.
6
In Units, click mm.
7
Under Paper Size, enter 100 in Width and 500 in Height.
Printing Vertical or Horizontal Banners (Large-Format Printing; Windows)
iPF785
User's Guide
Enhanced Printing Options Printing banners or at other non-standard sizes
98
8
Click Add to add the paper size of My Horizontal Banner.
9
Click OK to close the Paper Size Options dialog box.
10
Close the printer driver dialog box.
Note
•Although you can even set Custom Size for the paper size, the maximum settable size is 3.2 m. The setting of Cus-
tom Size is disabled when you exit the application software.
For more information, see "Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes ." ➔P.104
Creating the banner in the application
Follow the steps below to create the banner in Microsoft Word using the Custom Paper Size you registered.
1
Start Microsoft Word.
2
Choose Page Setup from the File menu to display the Page Setup dialog box.
3
Under Paper Size, click the Custom Paper Size you registered—My Horizontal Banner in this example.
Important
•If My Horizontal Banner is not listed, make sure this printer is selected as the printer to use.
•In applications such as Microsoft PowerPoint that do not enable you to choose registered paper sizes, use
the custom paper size setting in Custom and specify 100×500 mm (3.9×19.7 in)
4
Set the printing orientation to horizontal.
5
Create the banner.
Printing the banner
Follow these steps to print the banner using the corresponding banner settings.
1
Choose Print in the Microsoft Word menu.
2
Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (See "Accessing the Printer
Driver Dialog Box from Applications .") ➔P.164
3
Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
4
In the AMedia Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.
iPF785
Printing Vertical or Horizontal Banners (Large-Format Printing; Windows)
User's Guide
Enhanced Printing Options Printing banners or at other non-standard sizes
99
5
After confirming that DEasy Settings is selected, click Poster in the EPrint Target list.
6
Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup
sheet.
7
In the APage Size list, click the size you registered, My Horizontal Banner.
8
Select the CEnlarged/Reduced Printing check box.
Note
•If the CEnlarged/Reduced Printing check box is not
displayed on the Page Setup sheet, clear the BBor-
derless Printing check box.
9
Select and click a roll paper in the LPaper Source list.
10
After you click EFit Roll Paper Width, the Information dialog box is displayed.
11
Select the width of the loaded roll in the Roll Paper Width list. In this case, click 16-in. Roll (406.4mm), and
then click OK.
12
Confirm the print settings and print as desired.
Note
•For tips on confirming print settings, see "Confirming Print Settings ." ➔P.161
Printing Vertical or Horizontal Banners (Large-Format Printing; Windows)
iPF785
User's Guide
Enhanced Printing Options Printing banners or at other non-standard sizes
100
If printing is unsuccessful, you may be able to print after completing the following setting.
1
On the Layout sheet, click JSpecial Settings to dis-
play the Special Settings dialog box.
2
In the FineZoom Settings list, click Yes.
Printing Vertical or Horizontal Banners (Large-Format Printing; Mac OS)
Printing Vertical or Horizontal Banners (Large-Format Printing; Mac OS)
By automatic enlargement of a document created with an application software by the printer driver, you can print maxi-
mum 18.0 m vertical or horizontal banners.
This topic describes how to print a banner about five times as long as the roll width based on the following example.
•
Document: An original designed for a horizontal banner
•
Page Size: Non-standard (100×500 mm [3.9×19.7 in])
•
Paper: Roll
•
Paper type: Plain Paper
•
Roll paper width: 16 inches (406.4 mm)
The print procedure is as follows.
1.
In the application, create an original in the format of a horizontal or vertical banner.
2.
In Page Setup, register Custom Paper Sizes.
Once you register Custom Paper Sizes, you then can select it repeatedly from the paper size list.
Custom Paper Sizes can be set up to 18.0 m.
3.
Print the banner, using the settings that correspond to banners.
Note
•The following instructions are for OS X v10.7. The method of setting up non-standard paper sizes varies depending on
the version and settings of Mac OS X.
iPF785
Printing Vertical or Horizontal Banners (Large-Format Printing; Mac OS)
User's Guide
Enhanced Printing Options Printing banners or at other non-standard sizes
101
Register a Custom Paper Sizes
This example describes how to register and print using a page size that is horizontally elongated and suitable for ban-
ners in either horizontal or vertical format.
1
Create the document in the application.
2
Choose Print in the application menu.
3
Select the printer in the APrinter list.
4
Click Manage Custom Sizes in the FPaper Size list
to display the Custom Paper Sizes dialog box.
5
Double-click Untitled in the list at left, and then enter a name for the page size you want to register. Here, enter
100*500.
If the Untitled size is not listed at left, click + below the list.
6
Under Paper Size, enter 100 in Width and 500 in Height. Here, measurements are entered in millimeters.
7
Specify the margins by entering 3 in Non-Printable Area. Here, too, measurements are entered in millimeters.
8
Click OK to close the Custom Paper Sizes dialog box.
9
In the FPaper Size list, click the size of the original. In this case, click 100*500, the size you registered.
10
In GOrientation, click the icon of the document in landscape orientation.
11
If you configured the settings using the Page Attributes dialog box, click OK to close the dialog box.
Print the banner
Follow the steps below to print the banner using the corresponding banner settings.
1
Choose Print in the application menu.
Printing Vertical or Horizontal Banners (Large-Format Printing; Mac OS)
iPF785
User's Guide
Enhanced Printing Options Printing banners or at other non-standard sizes
102
2
Access the Main pane.
3
In the AMedia Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.
4
Make your selection in the EPrint Target list.
5
Make your selection in the FPrint Quality list.
6
Access the Page Setup pane.
7
Select and click a roll paper in the APaper Source list.
8
Select the paper width of the roll loaded in the printer for BRoll Width. In this case, 16 in. (406.4mm) is selec-
ted.
9
Select the DEnlarged/Reduced Printing check box.
10
Click FFit Roll Paper Width.
iPF785
Printing Vertical or Horizontal Banners (Large-Format Printing; Mac OS)
User's Guide
Enhanced Printing Options Printing banners or at other non-standard sizes
103
11
Confirm the print settings, and click MPrint to start printing.
Note
•For tips on confirming print settings, see "Confirming Print Settings ." ➔P.281
Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes
Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes
For printing on non-standard size paper, first register the paper size in the printer driver.
Once you register a paper size, you then can select it repeatedly from the paper size list. The paper size can be set up
to 18.0 m.
Note
•In Windows, although you can even set Custom Size for the paper size, the maximum settable size is 3.2 m. The
setting of Custom Size is disabled when you exit the application software.
For instructions on specifying non-standard paper sizes for printing, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your
computer and operating system.
•
Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes (Windows) ➔P.104
•
Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes (Mac OS) ➔P.107
Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes (Windows)
Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes (Windows)
For printing on non-standard size paper, first register the paper size in the printer driver.
Call a non-standard paper size registered in the printer driver with Custom Paper Size.
Once you register Custom Paper Size, you then can select it repeatedly from the paper size list.
Custom Paper Size can be set up to 18.0 m.
Note
•Although you also can set Custom Size for the paper size temporarily, the maximum settable size is 3.2 m. Also, the
setting of Custom Size is disabled when you exit the application software.
Registering and Printing With a Custom Paper Size
This topic describes how to register a non-standard paper size by the name of 430 mm Square and print based on the
following example.
•
Document: Any Type
•
Page Size: A square sheet (430 × 430 mm [16.9 × 16.9 in])
•
Paper: Sheets
•
Media Type: Any type
•
Paper Size: A square sheet (430 × 430 mm [16.9 × 16.9 in])
1
Load the square paper (430 × 430 mm [16.9 × 16.9 in]) in the printer.
2
Choose Print in the application menu.
3
Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (See "Accessing the Printer
Driver Dialog Box from Applications .") ➔P.164
Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes
iPF785
User's Guide
Enhanced Printing Options Printing banners or at other non-standard sizes
104
4
Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
5
In the AMedia Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded.
6
After confirming that DEasy Settings is selected, select from the EPrint Target list.
7
Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup
sheet.
8
Click OSize Options to display the Paper Size Options dialog box.
9
Enter a desired paper name in Custom Paper Size Name. 430 mm Square is used in this example.
10
Select mm in Units.
11
Enter 430 (16.9 in) in both Width and Height.
Note
•If you select the Fix the Ratio of the Width to Height check box, after you enter a value in either Width or
Height, the other value will be automatically applied based on the original aspect ratio.
12
Click Add to register 430 mm Square.
13
Click OK to close the Paper Size Options dialog box.
14
Click Manual in the LPaper Source list.
15
In the APage Size list, click the size you added,430 mm Square.
iPF785
Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes (Windows)
User's Guide
Enhanced Printing Options Printing banners or at other non-standard sizes
105
16
Confirm the print settings and print as desired.
Note
•For tips on confirming print settings, see "Confirming Print Settings ." ➔P.161
Printing by using Custom Size
This section describes how to print using Custom Size based on the following example.
•
Document: Any Type
•
Page size: Square of non-standard dimensions (430×430 mm [16.9×16.9 in])
•
Paper: Sheets
•
Paper type: Any type
•
Paper Size: A square sheet (430 × 430 mm [16.9 × 16.9 in])
1
Load the square paper (430 × 430 mm [16.9 × 16.9 in]) in the printer.
2
Choose Print in the application menu.
3
Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (See "Accessing the Printer
Driver Dialog Box from Applications .") ➔P.164
4
Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
5
In the AMedia Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded.
6
After confirming that DEasy Settings is selected, select from the EPrint Target list.
Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes (Windows)
iPF785
User's Guide
Enhanced Printing Options Printing banners or at other non-standard sizes
106
7
Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup
sheet.
8
Click Manual in the LPaper Source list.
9
Click Custom Size in the APage Size list to display the Custom Size Settings dialog box.
10
Confirm that mm is selected in Units.
11
Enter 430 (16.9 in) in both Width and Height.
12
Click OK to close the Custom Size Settings dialog box.
13
Confirm the print settings and print as desired.
Note
•For tips on confirming print settings, see "Confirming Print Settings ." ➔P.161
Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes (Mac OS)
Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes (Mac OS)
For printing on non-standard size paper, first register the paper size in the printer driver.
Call a non-standard paper size registered in the printer driver with Custom Paper Sizes .
Once you register Custom Paper Sizes, you then can select it repeatedly from the paper size list.
Custom Paper Sizes can be set up to 18.0 m.
This topic describes how to register a non-standard paper size by the name of 430*430 and print based on the follow-
ing example.
•
Document: Any Type
•
Page Size: A square sheet (430 × 430 mm [16.9 × 16.9 in])
•
Paper: Sheets
•
Media Type: Any type
•
Paper Size: A square sheet (430 × 430 mm [16.9 × 16.9 in])
Note
•The following instructions are for OS X v10.7. The method of setting up non-standard paper sizes varies depending on
the version and settings of Mac OS X.
1
Create the document in the application.
2
Load the square paper (430 × 430 mm [16.9 × 16.9 in]) in the printer.
iPF785
Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes (Mac OS)
User's Guide
Enhanced Printing Options Printing banners or at other non-standard sizes
107
3
Choose Print in the application menu.
4
Select the printer in the APrinter list.
5
Click Manage Custom Sizes in the FPaper Size list
to display the Custom Paper Sizes dialog box.
6
In Paper Size, enter the height and width of the original. Here, enter 430 mm in Height and Width.
7
In Non-Printable Area, enter 5 for the top and side margins and 23 for the bottom margin. Here, measure-
ments are entered in millimeters.
8
Double-click Untitled in the list at left in the Custom Paper Sizes dialog box and enter the paper name—in
this case, 430*430.
9
Click OK to close the Custom Paper Sizes dialog box.
10
In the FPaper Size list, click the size of the original. In this case, click 430*430, the size you registered.
11
If you configured the settings using the Page Attributes dialog box, click OK to close the dialog box, and then
select Print from the application software menu.
Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes (Mac OS)
iPF785
User's Guide
Enhanced Printing Options Printing banners or at other non-standard sizes
108
12
Access the Main pane.
13
In the AMedia Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded.
14
After confirming that DEasy Settings is selected, select from the EPrint Target list.
15
Make your selection in the FPrint Quality list.
16
Access the Page Setup pane.
17
Click Manual in the APaper Source list.
18
Confirm the print settings, and then click MPrint to start printing.
Note
•For tips on confirming print settings, see "Confirming Print Settings ." ➔P.281
iPF785
Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes (Mac OS)
User's Guide
Enhanced Printing Options Printing banners or at other non-standard sizes
109
Tiling and multiple pages per sheet
Tiling and multiple pages per sheet
Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other .......................................................................................................... 110
Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other (Windows) ............................................................................. 111
Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other (Mac OS) ............................................................................... 113
Printing Multiple Pages Continuously ............................................................................................................................ 114
Printing Multiple Pages Continuously (Windows) ............................................................................................... 114
Printing Multiple Pages Continuously (Mac OS) ..................................................................................................116
Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet ...................................................................................................................................118
Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet (Windows) ...................................................................................................... 118
Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet (Mac OS) ........................................................................................................ 120
Printing Posters in Sections ...............................................................................................................................................123
Printing Large Posters (Windows) ............................................................................................................................. 123
Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other
Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other
By arranging originals from word-processing or spreadsheet programs or web browser screen shots next to each other
on single sheets, you can create highly expressive presentation materials, easy-to-understand meeting materials, and
a variety of other printed documents.
•
Free Layout (Windows)
Besides combining multiple pages in a single-page layout, you can combine originals from multiple files—even
multiple source applications—in a single-page layout.
Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other
iPF785
User's Guide
Enhanced Printing Options Tiling and multiple pages per sheet
110
•
Free Layout (Mac OS)
Besides combining multiple pages in a single-page layout, you can combine originals from multiple files—even
multiple source applications—in a single-page layout.
For instructions on arranging originals from multiple applications, refer to the following topics.
•
Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other (Windows) ➔P.111
•
Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other (Mac OS) ➔P.113
Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other (Windows)
Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other (Windows)
This topic describes how to arrange multiple originals using the Free Layout function.
1
Choose Print in the application menu.
2
Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (See "Accessing the Printer
Driver Dialog Box from Applications .") ➔P.164
3
Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
iPF785
Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other (Windows)
User's Guide
Enhanced Printing Options Tiling and multiple pages per sheet
111
4
Click the Layout tab to display the Layout sheet.
5
Select the APage Layout check box.
6
Click Free Layout in the APage Layout list.
7
When you attempt to print, the imagePROGRAF Free
Layout window is displayed. (At this point, the docu-
ment will not be printed yet.)
8
Edit and rearrange the image in the imagePROGRAF Free Layout window as desired.
Note
•Without closing the imagePROGRAF Free Layout window, repeat steps 1–7 to arrange originals from multi-
ple applications on the same page.
•For instructions on editing and rearranging images, refer to the imagePROGRAF Free Layout help topic.
9
Print from the imagePROGRAF Free Layout menu.
Note
•For details on imagePROGRAF Free Layout functions, see "Free Layout." ➔P.202
Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other (Windows)
iPF785
User's Guide
Enhanced Printing Options Tiling and multiple pages per sheet
112
Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other (Mac OS)
Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other (Mac OS)
This topic describes how to use the Free Layout function to arrange multiple originals next to each other before print-
ing.
1
Choose Print in the application menu.
2
Access the Page Setup pane.
3
Select the NFree Layout check box.
4
Click MPrint.
5
The Canon imagePROGRAF Free Layout window is
displayed.
6
Edit and rearrange the image in the Canon imagePROGRAF Free Layout window as desired.
Note
•Without closing the Canon imagePROGRAF Free Layout window, repeat steps 1 to 4 to arrange originals
from multiple applications on the same page.
•For instructions on editing and rearranging images, refer to the Canon imagePROGRAF Free Layout help
topic.
iPF785
Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other (Mac OS)
User's Guide
Enhanced Printing Options Tiling and multiple pages per sheet
113
7
Print from the Canon imagePROGRAF Free Layout menu.
Note
•For details on Canon imagePROGRAF Free Layout functions, see "Free Layout." ➔P.319
Printing Multiple Pages Continuously
Printing Multiple Pages Continuously
You can print multiple pages as a single continuous image, without margins between pages.
•
Banner Printing
Important
•This feature is only available with rolls. It cannot be used when printing on sheets.
•When using Banner Printing, some of the settings are disabled, including Borderless Printing, Enlarge/Reduce
Printing, and Layout.
For instructions on borderless printing of photos and images at actual size, refer to the following topics, as appro-
priate for your computer and operating system.
•
Printing Multiple Pages Continuously (Windows) ➔P.114
•
Printing Multiple Pages Continuously (Mac OS) ➔P.116
Printing Multiple Pages Continuously (Windows)
Printing Multiple Pages Continuously (Windows)
This topic describes how to print multiple pages as a single continuous image, without margins between pages.
Important
•This feature is only available with rolls. It cannot be used when printing on sheets.
•When using Banner Printing, some of the settings are disabled, including Borderless Printing, Enlarge/Reduce Print-
ing, and Layout.
1
Choose Print in the application menu.
2
Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (See "Accessing the Printer
Driver Dialog Box from Applications .") ➔P.164
Printing Multiple Pages Continuously
iPF785
User's Guide
Enhanced Printing Options Tiling and multiple pages per sheet
114
3
Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
4
In the AMedia Type list, click the type of paper that is loaded.
5
Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup
sheet.
6
Select and click a roll paper in the LPaper Source list.
7
Click NRoll Paper Options to display the Roll Paper Op-
tions dialog box.
8
Select the BBanner Printing check box.
9
Click OK.
10
Confirm the print settings and print as desired.
Note
•For tips on confirming print settings, see "Confirming Print Settings ." ➔P.161
iPF785
Printing Multiple Pages Continuously (Windows)
User's Guide
Enhanced Printing Options Tiling and multiple pages per sheet
115
Printing Multiple Pages Continuously (Mac OS)
Printing Multiple Pages Continuously (Mac OS)
This topic describes how to print multiple pages as a single continuous image, without margins between pages.
Important
•This feature is only available with rolls. It cannot be used when printing on sheets.
•When using Banner Printing, some of the settings are disabled, including Borderless Printing, Enlarge/Reduce Print-
ing, and Layout.
1
Choose Page Setup from the application menu to display the Page Attributes dialog box.
Note
•The configuration method varies depending on the OS
and application software you are using.
If Page Setup is displayed in the application menu, the
settings are configured by opening the Page Attributes
dialog box from Page Setup.
If it is not displayed, the settings are configured in the upper
part of the printer driver displayed when you select Print
from the application software menu.
2
Select the printer in the BFormat for list.
3
Choose the original size in the CPaper Size list.
4
Click FOK to close the dialog box.
5
Choose Print in the application menu.
Printing Multiple Pages Continuously (Mac OS)
iPF785
User's Guide
Enhanced Printing Options Tiling and multiple pages per sheet
116
6
Access the Main pane.
7
In the AMedia Type list, click the type of paper that is loaded.
8
Make your selection in the EPrint Target list.
9
Make your selection in the FPrint Quality list.
10
Access the Page Setup pane.
11
Click Roll Paper (Banner) in the APaper Source list.
12
Confirm the print settings, and then click MPrint to start printing.
Note
•For tips on confirming print settings, see "Confirming Print Settings ." ➔P.281
iPF785
Printing Multiple Pages Continuously (Mac OS)
User's Guide
Enhanced Printing Options Tiling and multiple pages per sheet
117
Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet
Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet
To conserve paper, you can print several pages of the original on a single sheet by reducing the original and dividing
the sheet into areas for each page.
•
Page Layout
Specify a number of pages of the original to print on a single sheet, in a layout of multiple pages per sheet.
Important
•This function cannot be combined with the following options.
•Borderless Printing
•Scaling Originals (Windows)
•Banner Printing (Windows)
•When printing using this function, the Print Centered setting is disabled.
Note
•You can print up to 16 pages of the original on a single sheet.
•You can also change the page layout order and print page boundary lines, as desired.
For instructions on printing multiple pages per sheet, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer
and operating system.
•
Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet (Windows) ➔P.118
•
Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet (Mac OS) ➔P.120
Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet (Windows)
Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet (Windows)
This topic describes how to print four pages of originals together on a single sheet based on the following example.
•
Document: Any Type
•
Page size: A3 (297.0×420.0 mm [11.7×16.5 in])
•
Paper: Roll
•
Paper type: Plain Paper
•
Roll paper width: A2/A3 roll (420.0 mm [16.5 in])
1
Choose Print in the application menu.
2
Select the printer in the dialog box, and then open the printer driver dialog box. (See "Accessing the Printer
Driver Dialog Box from Applications .") ➔P.164
Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet
iPF785
User's Guide
Enhanced Printing Options Tiling and multiple pages per sheet
118
3
Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
4
In the AMedia Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.
5
Make your selection in the EPrint Target list.
6
Make your selection in the FPrint Quality list.
7
Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup
sheet.
8
In APage Size, click the size of the original as specified in the application software. In this case, click ISO A3.
9
Select and click a roll paper in the LPaper Source list.
10
Select the width of the loaded roll in the MRoll Paper Width list—in this case, ISO A2/A3 Roll (420.0mm).
iPF785
Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet (Windows)
User's Guide
Enhanced Printing Options Tiling and multiple pages per sheet
119
11
Click the Layout tab to display the Layout sheet.
12
Select the APage Layout check box.
13
Click 4 Pages/Sheet in the APage Layout list.
Note
•You can select the layout order for placing four pages on a sheet and a frame border in the Page Layout
Printing dialog box by clicking BSet. If you select a pattern to print borders, the size of the images are re-
duced about 5% to create space for the printed border. If None is selected, then the images are not reduced
for printing.
14
Confirm the print settings and print as desired.
Note
•For tips on confirming print settings, see "Confirming Print Settings ." ➔P.161
Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet (Mac OS)
Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet (Mac OS)
This topic describes how to print four pages of an original on a single sheet, based on the following example.
•
Document: Any Type
•
Page size: A3 (297.0 × 420.0 mm [11.7 × 16.5 in])
•
Paper: Roll paper
•
Paper type: Plain Paper
•
Roll paper width: A2/A3 roll (420.0 mm [16.5 in])
Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet (Mac OS)
iPF785
User's Guide
Enhanced Printing Options Tiling and multiple pages per sheet
120
1
Choose Page Setup from the application menu to display the Page Attributes dialog box.
Note
•The configuration method varies depending on the OS
and application software you are using.
If Page Setup is displayed in the application menu, the
settings are configured by opening the Page Attributes
dialog box from Page Setup.
If it is not displayed, the settings are configured in the upper
part of the printer driver displayed when you select Print
from the application software menu.
2
Select the printer in the BFormat for list.
3
In the CPaper Size list, click the size of the original. In this case, click ISO A3.
4
Click FOK to close the dialog box.
5
Choose Print in the application menu.
6
Access the Layout pane.
7
Click 4 in the APages per Sheet list.
Note
•You can choose the layout order and specify a boundary line for the four pages in BLayout Direction and
CBorder.
iPF785
Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet (Mac OS)
User's Guide
Enhanced Printing Options Tiling and multiple pages per sheet
121
8
Access the Main pane.
9
In the AMedia Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.
10
Make your selection in the EPrint Target list.
11
Make your selection in the FPrint Quality list.
12
Access the Page Setup pane.
13
Select and click a roll paper in the APaper Source list.
14
Select the paper width of the roll loaded in the printer for BRoll Width. In this case, ISO A2/A3 (420.0mm) is
selected.
Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet (Mac OS)
iPF785
User's Guide
Enhanced Printing Options Tiling and multiple pages per sheet
122
15
Confirm the print settings, and then click MPrint to start printing.
Note
•For tips on confirming print settings, see "Confirming Print Settings ." ➔P.281
Printing Posters in Sections
Printing Posters in Sections
You can enlarge an original to print it in sections on several sheets. By assembling the printed sheets, you can create a
poster larger than the maximum supported paper size of the printer.
•
Page Layout
Choose poster printing.
Important
•When printing using this function, the Print Centered, Watermark, No Spaces at Top or Bottom (Conserve
Paper), and Page Options settings are disabled.
For instructions on printing large posters, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and oper-
ating system.
•
Printing Large Posters (Windows) ➔P.123
Note
•This method of poster printing is supported in Windows.
Printing Large Posters (Windows)
Printing Large Posters (Windows)
You can enlarge an original to print it in sections on several sheets. By assembling the printed sheets, you can create a
poster larger than the maximum supported paper size of the printer. This topic describes how to enlarge an A2 original
for printing it in sections on four sheets, based on the following example.
•
Document: Poster
•
Page size: A2 (420.0×594.0 mm [16.5 × 23.4 in])
•
Paper: Sheets
•
Paper Size: A2 (420.0 × 594.0 mm [16.5 × 23.4 in])
1
Choose Print in the application menu.
2
Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (See "Accessing the Printer
Driver Dialog Box from Applications .") ➔P.164
iPF785
Printing Posters in Sections
User's Guide
Enhanced Printing Options Tiling and multiple pages per sheet
123
3
Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
4
In the AMedia Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded.
5
Click Poster in the EPrint Target list.
6
Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup
sheet.
7
In APage Size, click the size of the original as specified in the application. In this case, click ISO A2.
8
Click Manual in the LPaper Source list.
Printing Large Posters (Windows)
iPF785
User's Guide
Enhanced Printing Options Tiling and multiple pages per sheet
124
9
Click the Layout tab to display the Layout sheet.
10
Select the APage Layout check box.
11
Click Poster (2 x 2) in the APage Layout list.
Note
•Follow the steps below to print only a portion of the poster as divided for printing.
•Click BSet under APage Layout to display the Pages to Print dialog box.
•On the Pages to Print dialog box, clear the check boxes of the portion you do not want to print.
•Click OK to close the Pages to Print dialog box.
12
Confirm the print settings and print as desired.
Note
•For tips on confirming print settings, see "Confirming Print Settings ." ➔P.161
iPF785
Printing Large Posters (Windows)
User's Guide
Enhanced Printing Options Tiling and multiple pages per sheet
125
Centering originals
Centering originals
Printing Originals Centered on Rolls .............................................................................................................................. 126
Printing Originals Centered on Rolls (Windows) ................................................................................................. 126
Printing Originals Centered on Rolls (Mac OS) ....................................................................................................128
Printing Originals Centered on Sheets .......................................................................................................................... 130
Printing Originals Centered on Sheets (Windows) ............................................................................................. 130
Printing Originals Centered on Sheets (Mac OS) ............................................................................................... 132
Printing Originals Centered on Rolls
Printing Originals Centered on Rolls
You can print originals centered on a page—for example, if the paper is larger than the original, or if you are reducing
the original.
•
Print Centered
If you use originals smaller than the roll paper width, you can center them relative to the width when printing.
For instructions on centering originals when printing on rolls, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your
computer and operating system.
•
Printing Originals Centered on Rolls (Windows) ➔P.126
•
Printing Originals Centered on Rolls (Mac OS) ➔P.128
Printing Originals Centered on Rolls (Windows)
Printing Originals Centered on Rolls (Windows)
This topic describes how to center originals before printing on rolls based on the following example.
•
Document: Any type
•
Page size: A4 (210.0×297.0 mm)/Letter (8.3 × 11.7 in)
•
Paper: Roll
•
Paper type: Plain Paper
•
Roll width: A3/A4 roll (297.0 mm [11.7 in])
1
Choose Print in the application menu.
2
Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (See "Accessing the Printer
Driver Dialog Box from Applications .") ➔P.164
Printing Originals Centered on Rolls
iPF785
User's Guide
Enhanced Printing Options Centering originals
126
3
Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
4
In the AMedia Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.
5
Select the print target in the EPrint Target list.
6
Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup
sheet.
7
In the APage Size list, click the size of the original as specified in the application. In this case, click ISO A4 or
Letter (8.5"x11").
8
Select and click a roll paper in the LPaper Source list.
9
Select the width of the loaded roll in the MRoll Paper Width list—in this case, ISO A3/A4 Roll (297.0mm).
iPF785
Printing Originals Centered on Rolls (Windows)
User's Guide
Enhanced Printing Options Centering originals
127
10
Click the Layout tab to display the Layout sheet.
11
Select the EPrint Centered check box.
12
Confirm the print settings and print as desired.
Note
•For tips on confirming print settings, see "Confirming Print Settings ." ➔P.161
Printing Originals Centered on Rolls (Mac OS)
Printing Originals Centered on Rolls (Mac OS)
This topic describes how to center originals before printing on rolls based on the following example.
•
Document: Any Type
•
Page size: A4 (210.0 × 297.0 mm [8.3 × 11.7 in])
•
Paper: Roll paper
•
Paper type: Plain Paper
•
Roll paper width: A3/A4 roll (297.0 mm [11.7 in])
1
Choose Page Setup from the application menu to display the Page Attributes dialog box.
Note
•The configuration method varies depending on the OS
and application software you are using.
If Page Setup is displayed in the application menu, the
settings are configured by opening the Page Attributes
dialog box from Page Setup.
If it is not displayed, the settings are configured in the upper
part of the printer driver displayed when you select Print
from the application software menu.
2
Select the printer in the BFormat for list.
Printing Originals Centered on Rolls (Mac OS)
iPF785
User's Guide
Enhanced Printing Options Centering originals
128
3
In CPaper Size, click the size of the original. In this case, click ISO A4.
4
Click FOK to close the dialog box.
5
Choose Print in the application menu.
6
Access the Main pane.
7
In the AMedia Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.
8
Make your selection in the EPrint Target list.
9
Make your selection in the FPrint Quality list.
10
Access the Page Setup pane.
11
Select and click a roll paper in the APaper Source list.
iPF785
Printing Originals Centered on Rolls (Mac OS)
User's Guide
Enhanced Printing Options Centering originals
129
12
Select the paper width of the roll loaded in the printer for BRoll Width. In this case, ISO A3/A4 (297.0mm) is
selected.
13
Select the JPrint Centered check box.
14
Confirm the print settings, and then click MPrint to start printing.
Note
•For tips on confirming print settings, see "Confirming Print Settings ." ➔P.281
Printing Originals Centered on Sheets
Printing Originals Centered on Sheets
You can print originals centered on a page—for example, if the paper is larger than the original, or if you are reducing
the original.
•
Print Centered
If you use paper larger than the original size or print originals after reduction, the printed images may be aligned in
the upper-left corner of the paper. In this case, you can center originals on sheets when printing.
For instructions on centering originals when printing on sheets, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your
computer and operating system.
•
Printing Originals Centered on Sheets (Windows) ➔P.130
•
Printing Originals Centered on Sheets (Mac OS) ➔P.132
Printing Originals Centered on Sheets (Windows)
Printing Originals Centered on Sheets (Windows)
This topic describes how to reduce an original 50% for printing centered on a sheet.
•
Document: Any Type
•
Page size: A4 (210.0 × 297.0 mm [8.3 × 11.7 in])
•
Paper: Sheets
•
Paper type: Plain Paper
•
Paper size: A4 (210.0 × 297.0 mm [8.3 × 11.7 in])
1
Choose Print in the application menu.
2
Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (See "Accessing the Printer
Driver Dialog Box from Applications .") ➔P.164
Printing Originals Centered on Sheets
iPF785
User's Guide
Enhanced Printing Options Centering originals
130
3
Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
4
In the AMedia Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.
5
Make your selection in the EPrint Target list.
6
Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup
sheet.
7
In the APage Size list, click the size of the original as specified in the application. In this case, click ISO A4.
8
Select the CEnlarged/Reduced Printing check box.
9
Click Match Page Size in the GPaper Size list.
10
Click FScaling and enter 50.
11
Click Manual in the LPaper Source list.
iPF785
Printing Originals Centered on Sheets (Windows)
User's Guide
Enhanced Printing Options Centering originals
131
12
Click the Layout tab to display the Layout sheet.
13
Select the EPrint Centered check box.
14
Confirm the print settings and print as desired.
Important
•If you have selected Manual as the paper source, follow the instructions on the printer control panel to enter
the paper size.
Note
•For tips on confirming print settings, see "Confirming Print Settings ." ➔P.161
Printing Originals Centered on Sheets (Mac OS)
Printing Originals Centered on Sheets (Mac OS)
This topic describes how to center originals for printing on sheets, based on the following example.
•
Document: Any Type
•
Page size: A4
•
Paper: Sheets
•
Paper type: Plain Paper
•
Paper size: Non-standard
Printing Originals Centered on Sheets (Mac OS)
iPF785
User's Guide
Enhanced Printing Options Centering originals
132
1
Choose Page Setup from the application menu to display the Page Attributes dialog box.
Note
•The configuration method varies depending on the OS
and application software you are using.
If Page Setup is displayed in the application menu, the
settings are configured by opening the Page Attributes
dialog box from Page Setup.
If it is not displayed, the settings are configured in the upper
part of the printer driver displayed when you select Print
from the application software menu.
2
Select the printer in the BFormat for list.
3
In the CPaper Size list, click the size of the original. In this case, click ISO A4 - for Paper Tray (Large Mar-
gins).
4
Click FOK to close the dialog box.
5
Choose Print in the application menu.
6
Access the Main pane.
7
In the AMedia Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.
8
Make your selection in the EPrint Target list.
iPF785
Printing Originals Centered on Sheets (Mac OS)
User's Guide
Enhanced Printing Options Centering originals
133
9
Make your selection in the FPrint Quality list.
10
Access the Page Setup pane.
11
Click Manual in the APaper Source list.
12
Select the JPrint Centered check box.
13
Confirm the print settings, and then click MPrint to start printing.
Note
•For tips on confirming print settings, see "Confirming Print Settings ." ➔P.281
Important
•If you have selected Manual as the paper source, follow the instructions on the printer control panel to enter the pa-
per size.
Printing Originals Centered on Sheets (Mac OS)
iPF785
User's Guide
Enhanced Printing Options Centering originals
134
Conserving roll paper
Conserving roll paper
Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90 Degrees .................................................................................... 135
Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90 Degrees (Windows) ....................................................... 135
Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90 Degrees (Mac OS) ......................................................... 136
Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without Top and Bottom Margins .........................................139
Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without Top and Bottom Margins (Windows)
...................................139
Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without Top and Bottom Margins (Mac OS)
.....................................141
Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90 Degrees
Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90 Degrees
You can conserve roll paper by specifying particular settings as suitable for your original.
•
Rotate Page 90 degrees (Conserve Paper)
When originals are printed in portrait orientation, the original is rotated 90 degrees before printing if it fits within the
roll width. This enables you to conserve paper.
Important
•If the page would exceed the roll paper width after rotation, use this function with Scale to fit Roll Paper Width to
print rotated pages.
For tips on conserving roll paper, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating sys-
tem.
•
Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90 Degrees (Windows) ➔P.135
•
Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90 Degrees (Mac OS) ➔P.136
Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90 Degrees (Windows)
Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90 Degrees (Windows)
This topic describes how to conserve paper by rotating originals 90 degrees before printing, based on the following
example.
•
Document: Any type
•
Page size: A4 (210.0×297.0 mm)/Letter (8.3×11.7 in)
•
Paper: Roll
•
Paper type: Plain Paper
•
Roll paper width: A3/A4 roll (297.0 mm [11.7 in])
This example illustrates how to rotate an A4 (210.0×297.0 mm)/Letter (8.3×11.7 in) original in portrait orientation 90
degrees to fit within the width of A3/A4 roll paper (297.0 mm [11.7 in]), which enables you to conserve paper.
1
Choose Print in the application menu.
2
Select the printer in the dialog box, and then open the printer driver dialog box. (See "Accessing the Printer
Driver Dialog Box from Applications .") ➔P.164
iPF785
Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90 Degrees
User's Guide
Enhanced Printing Options Conserving roll paper
135
3
Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
4
In the AMedia Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.
5
Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup
sheet.
6
In the APage Size list, click the size of the original as specified in the application. In this case, click ISO A4 or
Letter (8.5"x11").
7
Select and click a roll paper in the LPaper Source list.
8
Select the width of the loaded roll in the MRoll Paper Width list—in this case, ISO A3/A4 Roll (297.0mm).
9
Select the KRotate Page 90 degrees (Conserve Paper) check box.
10
Confirm the print settings and print as desired.
Note
•For tips on confirming print settings, see "Confirming Print Settings ." ➔P.161
Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90 Degrees (Mac OS)
Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90 Degrees (Mac OS)
This topic describes how to conserve roll paper by rotating originals 90 degrees before printing, based on the following
example.
•
Document: Any Type
•
Page size: A4 (210.0 × 297.0 mm [8.3 × 11.7 in])
Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90 Degrees (Mac OS)
iPF785
User's Guide
Enhanced Printing Options Conserving roll paper
136
•
Paper: Roll paper
•
Paper type: Plain Paper
•
Roll paper width: A3/A4 roll (297.0 mm [11.7 in])
This example illustrates how to rotate an A4 (210.0×297.0 mm)/Letter (8.3 × 11.7 in) original in portrait orientation 90
degrees to fit within the width of A3/A4 roll (297.0 mm [11.7 in]), which enables you to conserve paper.
1
Choose Page Setup from the application menu to display the Page Attributes dialog box.
Note
•The configuration method varies depending on the OS
and application software you are using.
If Page Setup is displayed in the application menu, the
settings are configured by opening the Page Attributes
dialog box from Page Setup.
If it is not displayed, the settings are configured in the upper
part of the printer driver displayed when you select Print
from the application software menu.
2
Select the printer in the BFormat for list.
3
In CPaper Size, click the size of the original. In this case, click ISO A4.
4
Click FOK to close the dialog box.
5
Choose Print in the application menu.
iPF785
Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90 Degrees (Mac OS)
User's Guide
Enhanced Printing Options Conserving roll paper
137
6
Access the Main pane.
7
In the AMedia Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.
8
Access the Page Setup pane.
9
Select and click a roll paper in the APaper Source list.
10
Select the paper width of the roll loaded in the printer for BRoll Width. In this case, ISO A3/A4 (297.0mm) is
selected.
11
Select the LRotate Page 90 degrees check box.
12
Confirm the print settings, and then click MPrint to start printing.
Note
•For tips on confirming print settings, see "Confirming Print Settings ." ➔P.281
Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90 Degrees (Mac OS)
iPF785
User's Guide
Enhanced Printing Options Conserving roll paper
138
Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without Top and Bottom Margins
Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without Top and Bottom Margins
You can conserve roll paper by specifying particular settings as suitable for your original.
•
No Spaces at Top or Bottom (Conserve Paper)
You can print without feeding the paper for blank portions of originals if there are top and bottom margins in origi-
nals. This enables you to conserve as much paper as the size of the margins.
Important
•Printing without the top and bottom margins is not supported in the following cases.
•If you have chosen poster as the type of page layout
Note
•Even during borderless printing, you can print without the top and bottom margins.
•Printing without the top and bottom margins may cause inconsistency in the size of printed documents, depending
on the layout of images or text in your originals.
For tips on conserving roll paper, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating sys-
tem.
•
Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without Top and Bottom Margins (Windows) ➔P.139
•
Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without Top and Bottom Margins (Mac OS) ➔P.141
Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without Top and Bottom Margins (Windows)
Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without Top and Bottom Margins (Windows)
This topic describes how to conserve roll paper when printing originals that have a top and bottom margin, based on
the following example.
•
Document: Any type
•
Page size: A4 (210.0×297.0 mm)/Letter (8.3 × 11.7 in)
•
Paper: Roll
•
Paper type: Plain Paper
•
Roll paper width: A3/A4 roll (297.0 mm [11.7 in])
1
Choose Print in the application menu.
2
Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (See "Accessing the Printer
Driver Dialog Box from Applications .") ➔P.164
iPF785
Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without Top and Bottom Margins
User's Guide
Enhanced Printing Options Conserving roll paper
139
3
Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
4
In the AMedia Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.
5
Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup
sheet.
6
In the APage Size list, click the size of the original as specified in the application. In this case, click ISO A4 or
Letter (8.5"x11").
7
Select and click a roll paper in the LPaper Source list.
8
Select the width of the loaded roll in the MRoll Paper Width list—in this case, ISO A3/A4 Roll (297.0mm).
Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without Top and Bottom Margins (Windows)
iPF785
User's Guide
Enhanced Printing Options Conserving roll paper
140
9
Click the Layout tab to display the Layout sheet.
10
Select the GNo Spaces at Top or Bottom (Conserve Paper) check box.
11
Confirm the print settings and print as desired.
Note
•For tips on confirming print settings, see "Confirming Print Settings ." ➔P.161
Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without Top and Bottom Margins (Mac OS)
Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without Top and Bottom Margins (Mac OS)
This topic describes how to conserve roll paper when printing originals that have a top and bottom margin, based on
the following example.
•
Document: Any Type
•
Page size: A4 (210.0 × 297.0 mm [8.3 × 11.7 in])
•
Paper: Roll paper
•
Paper type: Plain Paper
•
Roll paper width: A3/A4 roll (297.0 mm [11.7 in])
1
Choose Page Setup from the application menu to display the Page Attributes dialog box.
Note
•The configuration method varies depending on the OS
and application software you are using.
If Page Setup is displayed in the application menu, the
settings are configured by opening the Page Attributes
dialog box from Page Setup.
If it is not displayed, the settings are configured in the upper
part of the printer driver displayed when you select Print
from the application software menu.
2
Select the printer in the BFormat for list.
iPF785
Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without Top and Bottom Margins (Mac OS)
User's Guide
Enhanced Printing Options Conserving roll paper
141
3
In CPaper Size, click the size of the original. In this case, click ISO A4.
4
Click FOK to close the dialog box.
5
Choose Print in the application menu.
6
Access the Main pane.
7
In the AMedia Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.
8
Access the Page Setup pane.
9
Select and click a roll paper in the APaper Source list.
10
Select the paper width of the roll loaded in the printer for BRoll Width. In this case, ISO A3/A4 (297.0mm) is
selected.
11
Select the KNo Spaces at Top or Bottom check box.
Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without Top and Bottom Margins (Mac OS)
iPF785
User's Guide
Enhanced Printing Options Conserving roll paper
142
12
Confirm the print settings, and then click MPrint to start printing.
Note
•For tips on confirming print settings, see "Confirming Print Settings ." ➔P.281
iPF785
Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without Top and Bottom Margins (Mac OS)
User's Guide
Enhanced Printing Options Conserving roll paper
143
Checking Images Before Printing
Checking Images Before Printing
Checking the Layout in a Preview Before Printing
Checking the Layout in a Preview Before Printing
You can check the print layout on the preview screen.
•
Open Preview When Print Job Starts (Windows)
While viewing the preview screen, you can also adjust orientation or other settings, and your changes will be in-
stantly applied on the preview screen.
Note
•Under some settings and in some environments, PageComposer may be started.
•
Preview (Mac OS)
While viewing the preview screen, you can also adjust layout or size settings, and your changes will be instantly
applied on the preview screen.
For instructions on how to check the layout before printing, refer to the following topics:
•
Checking the Layout in a Preview Before Printing (Windows) ➔P.162
•
Checking the Layout in a Preview Before Printing (Mac OS) ➔P.281
Checking the Layout in a Preview Before Printing
iPF785
User's Guide
Enhanced Printing Options Checking Images Before Printing
144
Other useful settings
Other useful settings
Printing With Watermarks .................................................................................................................................................. 145
Printing with Watermarks—COPY, FILE COPY, and so on (Windows) ........................................................ 146
Making the Original Orientation Match the Paper Orientation ........................................................................... 148
Making the Original Orientation Match the Paper Orientation (Windows) .............................................. 148
Making the Original Orientation Match the Paper Orientation (Mac OS) .................................................149
Using Favorites ........................................................................................................................................................................ 151
➔Using Favorites (Windows) .................................................................................................................................... 163
➔Using Favorites (Mac OS) ...................................................................................................................................... 282
Cutting Roll Paper After Printing .....................................................................................................................................152
Cutting Roll Paper After Printing (Windows) ........................................................................................................ 152
Cutting Roll Paper After Printing (Mac OS) .......................................................................................................... 153
Printing With Watermarks
Printing With Watermarks
You can add watermarks (background images) to documents that require special handling.
•
Watermark
Watermarks are applied to all pages of your document.
Important
•Watermarks are not printed if you select poster as the type of page layout.
The following watermarks are provided:
•
CONFIDENTIAL
•
COPY
•
DRAFT
•
FILE COPY
•
FINAL
•
PRELIMINARY
•
PROOF
•
TOP SECRET
You can also create your own watermarks. Specify the following options to customize your watermark.
•
Watermark string: Specify the font, size, color, and so on. Surround the watermark with a frame, if desired.
•
Watermark position: Specify the position on the page, the angle, and so on.
•
Watermark printing method: Specify whether to print the watermark superimposed or under the document im-
age. You can also print the watermark only on the first page, if desired.
iPF785
Printing With Watermarks
User's Guide
Enhanced Printing Options Other useful settings
145
Note
•Watermarks are supported in Windows.
•In addition to the provided watermarks, you can create up to 50 original watermarks.
For detailed instructions on printing with watermarks, refer to the following topics:
•
Printing with Watermarks—COPY, FILE COPY, and so on (Windows) ➔P.146
Printing with Watermarks—COPY, FILE COPY, and so on (Windows)
Printing with Watermarks—COPY, FILE COPY, and so on (Windows)
This topic describes how to print with watermarks, based on the following example of printing with a FILE COPY water-
mark.
•
Document: Any type
•
Page size: A2 (420.0×594.0 mm [16.5 × 23.4 in])
•
Paper: Roll paper
•
Paper type: Plain Paper
•
Roll paper width: A2/A3 roll (420.0 mm [16.5 in[)
1
Choose Print in the application menu.
2
Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (See "Accessing the Printer
Driver Dialog Box from Applications .") ➔P.164
3
Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
4
In the AMedia Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.
5
Make your selection in the EPrint Target list.
Note
•You can check the settings values selected in the EPrint Target list by clicking GView Settings.
Printing with Watermarks—COPY, FILE COPY, and so on (Windows)
iPF785
User's Guide
Enhanced Printing Options Other useful settings
146
6
Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup
sheet.
7
In APage Size, click the size of the original as specified in the application software. In this case, click ISO A2.
8
Select and click a roll paper in the LPaper Source list.
9
Select the width of the loaded roll in the MRoll Paper Width list—in this case, ISO A2/A3 Roll (420.0mm).
10
Click the Layout tab to display the Layout sheet.
11
Select the CWatermark check box.
12
Click FILE COPY in the Watermarks list.
Note
•Click DEdit Watermark to open the Edit Watermark dialog box. In the Edit Watermark dialog box, you can
create custom watermarks and change the position and angle of watermarks.
13
Confirm the print settings and print as desired.
Note
•For tips on confirming print settings, see "Confirming Print Settings ." ➔P.161
iPF785
Printing with Watermarks—COPY, FILE COPY, and so on (Windows)
User's Guide
Enhanced Printing Options Other useful settings
147
Making the Original Orientation Match the Paper Orientation
Making the Original Orientation Match the Paper Orientation
You can specify the original orientation to match the orientation of the paper for printing.
•
Orientation
Paper is usually loaded in the printer in portrait orientation. When you have an original in landscape orientation,
you can specify the printing orientation so that the original is printed in landscape orientation.
•
Rotate 180 degrees
The original is rotated 180 degrees to print it upside down.
•
Mirror
A mirror image of the original is printed.
For instructions on specifying the original orientation before printing, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for
your computer and operating system.
•
Making the Original Orientation Match the Paper Orientation (Windows) ➔P.148
•
Making the Original Orientation Match the Paper Orientation (Mac OS) ➔P.149
Making the Original Orientation Match the Paper Orientation (Windows)
Making the Original Orientation Match the Paper Orientation (Windows)
This topic describes how to print an original in landscape orientation after matching the paper orientation, based on the
following example.
•
Document: An original in landscape orientation
•
Page size: A4 (210.0 × 297.0 mm)/Letter (8.3 × 11.7 in)
•
Paper: Roll
•
Paper type: Plain Paper
•
Roll paper width: A2/A3 roll (420.0 mm [16.5 in])
1
Choose Print in the application menu.
2
Select the printer in the dialog box, and then open the printer driver dialog box. (See "Accessing the Printer
Driver Dialog Box from Applications .") ➔P.164
3
Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
Making the Original Orientation Match the Paper Orientation
iPF785
User's Guide
Enhanced Printing Options Other useful settings
148
4
In the AMedia Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.
5
Make your selection in the EPrint Target list.
6
Make your selection in the FPrint Quality list.
7
Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup
sheet.
8
In the APage Size list, click the size of the original as specified in the application. In this case, click ISO A4 or
Letter (8.5"x11").
9
In HOrientation, click JLandscape.
10
Select and click a roll paper in the LPaper Source list.
11
Select the width of the loaded roll in the MRoll Paper Width list—in this case, ISO A2/A3 Roll (420.0mm).
12
Confirm the print settings and print as desired.
Note
•For tips on confirming print settings, see "Confirming Print Settings ." ➔P.161
Making the Original Orientation Match the Paper Orientation (Mac OS)
Making the Original Orientation Match the Paper Orientation (Mac OS)
This topic describes how to print an original in landscape orientation after matching the paper orientation, based on the
following example.
•
Document: An original in landscape orientation
•
Page size: A4 (210.0 × 297.0 mm [8.3 × 11.7 in])
•
Paper: Roll paper
•
Paper type: Plain Paper
•
Roll paper width: A2/A3 roll (420.0 mm [16.5 in])
iPF785
Making the Original Orientation Match the Paper Orientation (Mac OS)
User's Guide
Enhanced Printing Options Other useful settings
149
1
Choose Page Setup from the application menu to display the Page Attributes dialog box.
Note
•The configuration method varies depending on the OS
and application software you are using.
If Page Setup is displayed in the application menu, the
settings are configured by opening the Page Attributes
dialog box from Page Setup.
If it is not displayed, the settings are configured in the upper
part of the printer driver displayed when you select Print
from the application software menu.
2
Select the printer in the BFormat for list.
3
In CPaper Size, click the size of the original. In this case, click ISO A4.
4
In DOrientation, click the icon of the document in landscape orientation.
5
Click FOK to close the dialog box.
6
Choose Print in the application menu.
7
Access the Main pane.
8
In the AMedia Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.
Making the Original Orientation Match the Paper Orientation (Mac OS)
iPF785
User's Guide
Enhanced Printing Options Other useful settings
150
9
Make your selection in the EPrint Target list.
10
Make your selection in the FPrint Quality list.
11
Access the Page Setup pane.
12
Select and click a roll paper in the APaper Source list.
13
Select the paper width of the roll loaded in the printer for BRoll Width. In this case, ISO A2/A3 (420.0mm) is
selected.
14
Confirm the print settings, and then click MPrint to start printing.
Note
•For tips on confirming print settings, see "Confirming Print Settings ." ➔P.281
Using Favorites
Using Favorites
You can register print settings as Favorites to reuse settings from a particular job that met your expectations, or set-
tings for a particular page size that you will use repeatedly.
•
Favorites
Registering a favorite for later use. You can choose the settings you have registered from a list before printing,
and you can check the settings details.
Note
•You can also save the favorite settings as files. Using these files is a convenient way to print under the same
conditions on another computer. (In Windows.)
For instructions on using favorites to print, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and oper-
ating system.
•
Using Favorites (Windows) ➔P.163
•
Using Favorites (Mac OS) ➔P.282
iPF785
Using Favorites
User's Guide
Enhanced Printing Options Other useful settings
151
Cutting Roll Paper After Printing
Cutting Roll Paper After Printing
Roll paper can be automatically cut after printing.
Note
•It may not be possible to cut certain types of paper, such as adhesive paper. For details on types of paper that cannot
be used with the auto cut feature, see the Paper Reference Guide. (See "Types of Paper.") ➔P.362
•
Automatic Cutting
Roll paper is cut automatically after printing. If you prefer, you can print continuously without cutting the roll, or you
can print a cut line.
For instructions on cutting roll paper after printing, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer
and operating system.
•
Cutting Roll Paper After Printing (Windows) ➔P.152
•
Cutting Roll Paper After Printing (Mac OS) ➔P.153
Cutting Roll Paper After Printing (Windows)
Cutting Roll Paper After Printing (Windows)
This topic describes how to cut roll paper automatically after printing (using the auto cut function), as well as how to
print a cut line for manual cutting.
Note
•The auto cut function is activated on the printer by default and when the printer driver is installed. Follow the steps
below to reactivate the function if it is disabled, or to select the setting for printing a cut line instead.
1
Choose Print in the application menu.
2
Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (See "Accessing the Printer
Driver Dialog Box from Applications .") ➔P.164
3
Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup
sheet.
4
Select and click a roll paper in the LPaper Source list.
5
Click NRoll Paper Options to display the Roll Paper Op-
tions dialog box.
Cutting Roll Paper After Printing
iPF785
User's Guide
Enhanced Printing Options Other useful settings
152
6
To enable automatic cutting, click Yes in the AAutomatic Cutting list. If you prefer to cut the paper later your-
self, click Print Cut Guideline.
7
Click OK to close the Roll Paper Options dialog box.
8
Confirm the print settings and print as desired.
Note
•For tips on confirming print settings, see "Confirming Print Settings ." ➔P.161
Roll paper will be automatically cut after printing.
Cutting Roll Paper After Printing (Mac OS)
Cutting Roll Paper After Printing (Mac OS)
This topic describes how to cut roll paper automatically after printing (using the auto cut function), as well as how to
print a cut line for manual cutting.
Note
•The auto cut function is activated on the printer by default and when the printer driver is installed. Follow the steps
below to reactivate the function if it is disabled, or to select the setting for printing a cut line instead.
1
Choose Page Setup from the application menu to display the Page Attributes dialog box.
Note
•The configuration method varies depending on the OS
and application software you are using.
If Page Setup is displayed in the application menu, the
settings are configured by opening the Page Attributes
dialog box from Page Setup.
If it is not displayed, the settings are configured in the upper
part of the printer driver displayed when you select Print
from the application software menu.
2
Select the printer in the BFormat for list.
3
Choose the original size in the CPaper Size list.
4
Click FOK to close the dialog box.
5
Choose Print in the application menu.
iPF785
Cutting Roll Paper After Printing (Mac OS)
User's Guide
Enhanced Printing Options Other useful settings
153
10
Click CSet to display the Paper Detailed Settings di-
alog box.
11
To enable automatic cutting, click Printer Default in the HAutomatic Cutting list. If you prefer to cut the pa-
per later yourself, click Print Cut Guideline.
Important
•If the automatic cut function has been deactivated on the printer, change the auto cut setting on the printer
Control Panel.
12
Click OK to close the Paper Detailed Settings dialog box.
13
Confirm the print settings, and then click MPrint to start printing.
Note
•For tips on confirming print settings, see "Confirming Print Settings ." ➔P.281
iPF785
Cutting Roll Paper After Printing (Mac OS)
User's Guide
Enhanced Printing Options Other useful settings
155
iPF785
User's Guide
Basic Printing Workow 15
Enhanced Printing Options 31
Windows Software
Printer Driver ........................................................................................... 158
Preview .................................................................................................... 191
Free Layout ............................................................................................. 202
Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy ............................................... 225
Print Plug-In for Office ............................................................................. 236
➔Status Monitor ................................................................................... 510
➔Accounting ......................................................................................... 515
➔Device Setup Utility ........................................................................... 506
➔Media Configuration Tool ................................................................... 405
Mac OS Software 277
Handling and Use of Paper 361
Control Panel 435
Printer Parts 475
Network Setting 489
Print Job Management 509
Adjustments for Better Print Quality 571
Maintenance and Consumables 587
Troubleshooting 625
Error Message 655
Specications 679
Appendix 683
imagePROGRAF
Windows Software
157
Printer Driver
Printer Driver
Printer Driver Settings ........................................................................................................................................................ 158
Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver ......................................................................................................................... 160
Conrming Print Settings .................................................................................................................................................. 161
Checking the Layout in a Preview Before Printing ................................................................................................. 162
Using Favorites ...................................................................................................................................................................... 163
Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from Applications ...............................................................................164
Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from the Operating System Menu ..............................................166
Main Sheet ............................................................................................................................................................................... 167
Paper Information on Printer Dialog Box .............................................................................................................. 170
Paper Detailed Settings Dialog Box .........................................................................................................................170
View Settings Dialog Box for the Printing Application ....................................................................................172
Color Adjustment Sheet: Color ................................................................................................................................. 172
Object Adjustment Dialog box: Color ...................................................................................................................... 174
Matching Sheet ................................................................................................................................................................ 174
Color Adjustment Sheet: Monochrome ................................................................................................................. 176
Object Adjustment Dialog box: Monochrome ...................................................................................................... 177
Page Setup Sheet ................................................................................................................................................................. 178
Output Method Dialog box ........................................................................................................................................... 180
Paper Size Options Dialog Box .................................................................................................................................. 181
Layout Sheet ........................................................................................................................................................................... 182
Page Options Dialog Box ............................................................................................................................................. 184
Special Settings Dialog Box ........................................................................................................................................ 185
Favorites Sheet ...................................................................................................................................................................... 186
Utility Sheet ............................................................................................................................................................................. 187
Support Sheet ........................................................................................................................................................................ 188
Settings Summaries Dialog Box ................................................................................................................................ 189
Device Settings Sheet ......................................................................................................................................................... 189
Printer Driver Settings
Printer Driver Settings
For instructions on accessing the Windows printer driver, refer to the following topics.
•
Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from Applications ➔P.164
•
Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from the Operating System Menu ➔P.166
For information on the Windows printer driver settings, refer to the following topics.
Printer Driver Settings
iPF785
User's Guide
Windows Software Printer Driver
158
•
Main Sheet ➔P.167
You can specify the type of paper, color processing, print quality, print preview, and other settings. Choose Easy
Settings to specify basic print settings based on the printing application or Advanced Settings to complete more
detailed settings as desired.
•
Paper Detailed Settings Dialog Box ➔P.170
•
View Settings Dialog Box for the Printing Application ➔P.172
•
Color Adjustment Sheet: Color ➔P.172
•
Object Adjustment Dialog box: Color ➔P.174
•
Matching Sheet ➔P.174
•
Color Adjustment Sheet: Monochrome ➔P.176
•
Object Adjustment Dialog box: Monochrome ➔P.177
•
Page Setup Sheet ➔P.178
You can specify the page size of the original, borderless printing, enlargement or reduction, the orientation, the
paper size and feed source, and automatic cutting.
•
Output Method Dialog box ➔P.180
•
Paper Size Options Dialog Box ➔P.181
•
Layout Sheet ➔P.182
You can specify the page layout, watermarks, the orientation, the number of copies, and print processing options.
•
Page Options Dialog Box ➔P.184
•
Special Settings Dialog Box ➔P.185
•
Favorites Sheet ➔P.186
Groups of print settings you select on each sheet can be saved as a favorite. Favorites you have added can be
edited or used at the time of printing as desired.
•
Utility Sheet ➔P.187
You can specify settings related to maintenance for the Printhead and feed amount, as well as settings for Color
imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy.
•
Support Sheet ➔P.188
You can view support information and the user manual.
•
Device Settings Sheet ➔P.189
You can display settings for optional equipment installed on the printer and see the version information for the
printer driver.
imagePROGRAF Free Layout is a feature for freely arranging originals from various source applications on a single
page as desired before printing. For details, see "Free Layout." ➔P.202
iPF785
Printer Driver Settings
User's Guide
Windows Software Printer Driver
159
Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy is a feature for automatic enlargement and printing of scanned originals
from a Color imageRUNNER. For details, see "Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy." ➔P.225
Note
•Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy is not displayed in 64-bit editions of Windows.
Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver
Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver
If you have replaced the paper, you must complete the following settings in the printer driver.
Important
•Always specify the same type and size of paper in the printer menu and printer driver.
1
Choose Print in the application menu.
2
Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (See "Accessing the Printer
Driver Dialog Box from Applications .") ➔P.164
3
Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
4
In the AMedia Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded.
Note
•Click the BGet Information button to display the Paper Information on Printer dialog box. On the Paper
Information on Printer dialog box, you can obtain information on the paper in the printer and configure print-
er driver settings for the feed source and type of paper.
This function requires that the Status Monitor be installed.
Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver
iPF785
User's Guide
Windows Software Printer Driver
160
5
Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup
sheet.
6
In the APage Size list, select the size of the original as specified in the application.
7
In the LPaper Source list, select how paper is supplied.
8
If you have selected roll paper in LPaper Source, select the width of the loaded roll in MRoll Paper Width.
Note
•A variety of settings are available in the printer driver to suit different printing applications.
For details on available printing conditions, see "Printer Driver Settings ." ➔P.158
Confirming Print Settings
Confirming Print Settings
There are two ways to confirm the print settings, as follows.
•
Checking a preview of the settings
A preview of the settings is displayed on the left side of the Main, Page Setup, and Layout sheets. By checking
illustrations and numerical values in the preview, you can confirm current settings for the page size, orientation,
paper source, layout, and so on.
Display Area Information Displayed
PTop illustrations Illustrations indicate the orientation, page layout, borderless printing selection, color mode,
and other settings information.
QMiddle, bordered area The page size, paper size, and method and percentage of enlargement or reduction are indi-
cated.
iPF785
Conrming Print Settings
User's Guide
Windows Software Printer Driver
161
Display Area Information Displayed
RBottom illustrations Illustrations indicate the feed source, orientation, borderless printing selection, and other set-
tings information.
Note
•To confirm the Print Target specified in Easy Settings, click GView Settings on the Main sheet to display the
View Settings dialog box.
•
Checking a print preview
You can check an image of the original just as it will be printed.
When you activate this feature, imagePROGRAF Preview or PageComposer is started before printing. Confirm-
ing how documents will be printed this way helps prevent printing errors.
For details on print previews, see "Checking the Layout in a Preview Before Printing." ➔P.144
Checking the Layout in a Preview Before Printing
Checking the Layout in a Preview Before Printing
This topic describes how to preview images of print jobs before actually printing them.
1
Choose Print in the application menu.
2
Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (See "Accessing the Printer
Driver Dialog Box from Applications .") ➔P.164
3
Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
4
Select the LOpen Preview When Print Job Starts check box.
5
After you click OK, when you print a job, the image-
PROGRAF Preview window will be displayed.
Checking the Layout in a Preview Before Printing
iPF785
User's Guide
Windows Software Printer Driver
162
Note
•If PageComposer is running, access the Special Settings dialog box from the Layout sheet and clear Pre-
view Switching.
6
On the main window, you can check the layout and change settings as needed.
7
To print, click Print in the File menu.
Note
•For details on imagePROGRAF Preview functions, see "Preview." ➔P.191
Using Favorites
Using Favorites
This topic describes how to register favorites and print using favorite settings.
Registering a favorite
This section describes the procedure for registering printing settings that have been changed in the driver as Favor-
ites.
1
Choose Print in the application menu.
2
Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (See "Accessing the Printer
Driver Dialog Box from Applications .") ➔P.164
3
Perform normal printing settings.
The favorite is registered from here.
4
Click the Favorites tab to display the Favorites sheet.
5
Click HAdd to display the Add dialog box.
iPF785
Using Favorites
User's Guide
Windows Software Printer Driver
163
6
Enter a desired name in Name, such as Photos for Presentations or Monthly Report.
7
Choose a fitting icon for these print settings in the Icon list.
8
In Comment, enter a description of the favorite to be added, as desired.
9
Click OK to close the Add dialog box.
The favorite you have added is now displayed in AFavorites.
Note
•To save a favorite as a file, click JExport and specify the file to save.
Printing using the favorite
Follow the steps below to print using the favorite you have registered.
1
Choose Print in the application menu.
2
Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (See "Accessing the Printer
Driver Dialog Box from Applications .") ➔P.164
3
Click the Favorites tab to display the Favorites sheet.
4
In the AFavorites, choose the favorite you registered.
Note
•To import a favorite, click IImport and specify the favorite file.
5
Click DApply Favorite to replace the favorite settings with the current print settings.
6
Confirm the print settings and print as desired.
Note
•For instructions on confirming print settings, see "Confirming Print Settings ." ➔P.161
Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from Applications
Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from Applications
1
Choose Print from the File menu to display the dialog box for printing conditions.
Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from Applications
iPF785
User's Guide
Windows Software Printer Driver
164
2
Select the printer, and then display the printer driver dialog box.
Note
•The dialog box for specifying printing conditions varies depending on the source application. In some cases,
when you select the printer, a sheet for configuring the printer driver is added to the dialog box.
In the following case, click Preferences.
•
Example: Print dialog box displayed by the application software
Six sheets of print settings are displayed by the printer
driver: Main, Page Setup, Layout, Favorites, Utility,
and Support.
Note
•The titles of dialog boxes may vary depending on the application, and sheets other than these six sheets may
be displayed.
Important
•If you access the printer driver dialog box from the source application, changes you make to the settings will only
apply temporarily to that application. Because these are sizes you specify temporarily in the printer driver, the sizes
will not be available after you exit the application.
•You can also access the printer driver dialog box from the Windows system menu.
To use the settings continuously in all applications, open the printer driver from the system menu to make the settings.
(See "Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from the Operating System Menu .") ➔P.166
iPF785
Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from Applications
User's Guide
Windows Software Printer Driver
165
Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from the Operating System Menu
Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from the Operating System Menu
1
Click start > Printers and Faxes (or Printers ).
2
Select the printer, and then display the printer proper-
ties dialog box.
3
Click Printing Preferences to display the Main(or
Printing Preferences) dialog box, titled with the name
of this printer.
Note
•The Device Settings sheet is also an extension of the printer driver. (See "Device Settings Sheet .") ➔P.189
Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from the Operating System Menu
iPF785
User's Guide
Windows Software Printer Driver
166
Six sheets of print settings are displayed by the printer
driver: Main, Page Setup, Layout, Favorites, Utility,
and Support.
Important
•If you access the printer driver dialog box from the operating system menu, changes you make to the settings will
apply to all applications you use for printing.
•You can also access the printer driver dialog box from applications.
(See "Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from Applications .") ➔P.164
Main Sheet
Main Sheet
The following settings are available on the Main sheet. For details on settings items, refer to the printer driver help file.
Note
•On the Main sheet, choose Easy Settings to specify basic print settings based on the particular printing application, or
switch to Advanced Settings to complete more detailed settings as desired.
Common Items
•AMedia Type
Select the type of paper.
For information on the types of paper the printer supports, refer to the Paper Reference Guide. (See "Displaying
the Paper Reference Guide.") ➔P.366
•BGet Information
Displays Paper Information on Printer. You can update the printer driver settings for the feed source, media
type, and roll width by selecting the feed source.
•
Paper Information on Printer Dialog Box ➔P.170
iPF785
Main Sheet
User's Guide
Windows Software Printer Driver
167
•CAdvanced Settings
Displays Paper Detailed Settings. You can configure the printing settings to match the type of media, such as the
ink drying time.
•
Paper Detailed Settings Dialog Box ➔P.170
•LOpen Preview When Print Job Starts
When the check box is selected, imagePROGRAF Preview is launched before printing.
This allows you to check on-screen previews of documents before printing.
•
Checking the Layout in a Preview Before Printing ➔P.144
•MStatus Monitor
Starts imagePROGRAF Status Monitor.
You can check the printer status, job status, and other conditions.
You can also set up email notification if printer errors occur by completing the Email Notice settings.
For details, refer to the Status Monitor help file.
•NAbout
Displays version information for the printer driver.
•SDefaults
Restores all settings on the sheet to the default values.
Configuration using Easy Settings
•EPrint Target
Choose presets that match the type of document to be printed.
•
Printing Photos and Images ➔P.33
•
Printing Line Drawings and Text ➔P.43
•
Printing Office Documents ➔P.37
Depending on the AMedia Type setting, some EPrint Target options may not be available.
•FPrint Quality
Choose the level of print quality.
•
Giving Priority to Particular Graphic Elements and Colors for Printing ➔P.58
•GView Settings
Displays the EPrint Target setting values.
Main Sheet
iPF785
User's Guide
Windows Software Printer Driver
168
You can view and change the order of EPrint Target setting values.
•
View Settings Dialog Box for the Printing Application ➔P.172
Configuration using Advanced Settings
•EPrint Priority
Choose the graphic elements that you want to emphasize for printing.
•
Giving Priority to Particular Graphic Elements and Colors for Printing ➔P.58
•FPrint Quality
Choose the level of print quality.
•
Giving Priority to Particular Graphic Elements and Colors for Printing ➔P.58
•THighest quality
When the check box is selected, printing is performing focusing on quality. Printing takes longer and consumes
more ink than in other modes, but this mode offers superior printing quality.
Note
•If you set FPrint Quality to High, you can select THighest quality. However, depending on AMedia Type and
EPrint Priority, you may not be able to select THighest quality.
•UEconomy Printing
If you select this option, you can print with less ink consumed. However, print quality is lower than in regular print-
ing.
Select this option to save ink, such as when printing to check drawings. Depending on the settings of AMedia
Type and FPrint Quality, you may not be able to select this option.
Note
•If you set FPrint Quality to Fast, you can select UEconomy Printing. However, depending on AMedia Type
and EPrint Priority, you may not be able to select UEconomy Printing.
•GColor Mode
Choose the color mode.
•
Giving Priority to Particular Graphic Elements and Colors for Printing ➔P.58
Note
•Depending on the AMedia Type setting, some GColor Mode options may not be available.
iPF785
Main Sheet
User's Guide
Windows Software Printer Driver
169
•HColor Settings
Click to display the Color Settings dialog box for more advanced color settings.
•
Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver ➔P.51
•IThicken Fine Lines
Select this option to print fine lines more distinctly.
•JUnidirectional Printing
Select this checkbox to prevent problems such as misaligned lines and improve the print quality. However, the
printing speed becomes slower.
•KSharpen Text
Select this option to print text more sharply.
Paper Information on Printer Dialog Box
Paper Information on Printer Dialog Box
On the Paper Information on Printer dialog box, you can obtain information on the paper in the printer and configure
printer driver settings for the paper source and media type.
Note
•To display the Paper Information on Printer dialog box, on the Main sheet, click Get Information by Media Type.
(See "Main Sheet .") ➔P.167
•APaper Source
Shows the paper source supported by the printer, as well as information about the loaded paper. To update the
paper source and media type settings in the printer driver, select the desired Paper Source option and click OK.
Paper Detailed Settings Dialog Box
Paper Detailed Settings Dialog Box
In the Paper Detailed Settings dialog box, you can set Drying Time for the paper selected with Media Type of the
Main sheet, etc.
You can display this dialog box by clicking Advanced Settings of Media Type on the Main sheet. (See "Main
Sheet .") ➔P.167
Paper Information on Printer Dialog Box
iPF785
User's Guide
Windows Software Printer Driver
170
As for the items for which you can select Printer Default in this dialog box, you also can set them from the control
panel of the printer. (See "Menu Settings.") ➔P.457
ADrying Time
Specify the time that the printer waits for ink to dry, as needed. The Between Pages setting is only valid for rolls.
•BBetween Pages
You can set the time to wait after printing 1 document page until ejecting the paper. Since waiting time is required
for ink to dry before a roll is cut, you can deliver paper in the Output Stacker with the ink dried even if Cutting
Mode is set to Automatic.
Setting Item Details
Printer Default The setting of the control panel of the printer is applied.
Off Paper is ejected immediately after printing completes.
30 sec. / 1 min. / 3 min. / 5 min. / 10
min. / 30 min. / 60 min.
Paper is ejected when the set time elapses after printing completes.
•CBetween Scans
You can set the time to wait after printing 1 line on a page until printing the next line. Set this to avoid bleeding or
color unevenness such as when bleeding occurs on a page or when color unevenness occurs during borderless
printing.
Setting Item Details
Printer Default The setting of the control panel of the printer is applied.
Off The next line is printed immediately after a line is printed.
1 sec. / 3 sec. / 5 sec. / 7 sec. / 9
sec.
The next line is printed when the set time elapses after a line is printed.
* Increase the time according to the occurrence condition of bleeding or unevenness.
DRoll Paper Margin for Safety
You can specify the length of a margin on the leading edge of paper to ensure that paper susceptible to curling is held
firmly against the Platen.
•ENear End Margin
Specify the length of the Near End Margin (the leading edge margin) of the roll, as needed.
Setting Item Details
Printer Default The setting of the control panel of the printer is applied.
3 mm (0.12 in) The document is printed in the standard size.
* Select this when you do not have any problems in printing.
iPF785
Paper Detailed Settings Dialog Box
User's Guide
Windows Software Printer Driver
171
Setting Item Details
20 mm (0.8 in) Select this when rubbing against the printhead occurs such as when using paper that tends
to curl.
FCut Speed
Select the speed of automatic cutting, as needed. You can adjust this setting if paper is not cut well when automatic
cutting is used.
Setting Item Details
Printer Default The setting of the control panel of the printer is applied.
High Speed When the Standard setting does not result in cutting the surface cleanly, select this.
Standard Select this when you do not have any problems in automatic cutting.
Low Speed This helps prevent adhesive from sticking to the cutter and keeps the cutter sharp if you se-
lect it when using adhesive paper.
GMirror
Specify whether to print a mirror image, as needed. Select this option to print a version of the document or image with
the left and right sides inverted.
View Settings Dialog Box for the Printing Application
View Settings Dialog Box for the Printing Application
In the View Settings dialog box, you can check details of the selected printing application.
Note
•To display the View Settings dialog box, on the Main sheet, click View Settings by Print Target. (See "Main
Sheet .") ➔P.167
•APrint Target
Shows all Print Target options (settings items for the printing application).
•BName
Identifies the item selected in Print Target by its name and an icon.
•CDetails
Here, you can confirm detailed settings values for each listed item for the selected Print Target.
Color Adjustment Sheet: Color
Color Adjustment Sheet: Color
If the color tone as printed is not as you expected, you can adjust it on the Color Adjustment sheet.
View Settings Dialog Box for the Printing Application
iPF785
User's Guide
Windows Software Printer Driver
172
Note
•To display the Color Adjustment sheet, on the Main sheet, click Color Settings by Color Mode in Advanced Set-
tings. (See "Main Sheet .") ➔P.167
•ASample Type
Choose a sample image from Standard, Portrait, Landscape, or Graphics.
•BView Color Pattern
Select this checkbox to display the color pattern.
•CApply to Sample
Select this checkbox to apply the changed settings to the sample image.
•DCyan/EMagenta/FYellow
Fine-tune color tones by adjusting the levels of each color.
•GGray Tone
Adjust the color tone of grays as desired. Choose Cool Black (tinged with blue) or Warm Black (tinged with red).
•HBrightness
Adjust the overall image brightness as desired. You can adjust the brightness if the printed document is lighter or
darker than the original image (that is, the original photo that was scanned or the original graphic as it appears on
the computer screen).
•IContrast
Adjust the contrast of the darkest and lightest portions relative to each other, as desired. Increasing the Contrast
makes images sharper, and reducing the Contrast softens images.
•JSaturation
Adjust the color intensity as desired. Increasing the Saturation setting makes colors more vivid, and reducing the
Saturation makes colors more subdued.
•KObject Adjustment
Select this option to display the Object Adjustment dialog box, in which you can specify objects subject to color
adjustment.
•
Object Adjustment Dialog box: Color ➔P.174
•SDefaults
Click to restore all settings on the sheet to the default values.
iPF785
Color Adjustment Sheet: Color
User's Guide
Windows Software Printer Driver
173
Note
•For details on settings items, see "Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver." ➔P.51
Object Adjustment Dialog box: Color
Object Adjustment Dialog box: Color
In the Object Adjustment dialog box, you can specify what type of print jobs to apply color adjustment to. If an original
comprises images, graphics, and text, you can specify which portion to apply color adjustment to.
Note
•To display the Object Adjustment dialog box, click Object Adjustment on the Color Adjustment sheet.
•AImage
Select this option to apply color adjustment to image areas, such as photos.
•BGraphics
Select this option to apply color adjustment to graphics, such as lines and circles.
•CText
Select this option to apply color adjustment to text.
Matching Sheet
Matching Sheet
On the Matching sheet, you can specify color matching to compensate for differences in the appearance of colors on
various devices.
Important
•If No color correction is selected under Color Mode, the Matching sheet is not displayed.
Note
•To display the Matching sheet, on the Main sheet, click Color Settings in Color Mode in Advanced Settings, and
then click the Matching sheet. (See "Main Sheet .") ➔P.167
Object Adjustment Dialog box: Color
iPF785
User's Guide
Windows Software Printer Driver
174
Driver Matching Mode
The following options are available when you select Driver Matching Mode in the AMatching Mode list.
•AMatching Mode
Select the color matching mode to use, as desired.
Normally, select Driver Matching Mode. For color matching based on ICC profiles, select ICC Matching Mode or
Host ICM Mode, depending on your color matching system.
•BMatching Method
Select the color matching method that suits the document to be printed. Various Matching Method options are
available depending on your selection in Matching Mode.
•EGamma
You can adjust the gradation of intermediate tones in an image.
2.2 is normally selected. If you want a softer impression than 2.2, select 1.8.
ICC Matching Mode and Host ICM Mode
The following options are available when you select ICC Matching Mode or Host ICM Mode in the AMatching Mode
list.
iPF785
Matching Sheet
User's Guide
Windows Software Printer Driver
175
•AMatching Mode
Select the color matching mode to use, as desired.
•BInput Profile Settings
You can select Image, Graphics, or Text. You can choose Matching Method and Input Profile.
Various options are available depending on your selected Matching Mode.
To apply the same input profile automatically for Graphics and Text, select Use the Same Profile for All Ob-
jects. To apply separate input profiles to Graphics and Text, clear Use the Same Profile for All Objects and
specify the individual settings.
•CPrinter Profile Settings
Specify the printer profile as desired. Normally, select Auto Settings.
We recommend that you select an ICC profile created using commercially available profile creation software in
order to perform color management accurately on paper other than genuine Canon paper and feed confirmed pa-
per.
The created ICC profile needs to be saved in the following folder on the computer you are using.
C:\Windows\system32\spool\drivers\color folder
Note
•C: may vary according to the user environment.
Note
•For details on settings items, see "Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver." ➔P.51
Color Adjustment Sheet: Monochrome
Color Adjustment Sheet: Monochrome
On the Color Adjustment sheet for monochrome printing, you can adjust the brightness and contrast.
Note
•To display the Color Adjustment sheet, on the Main sheet, click Color Settings by Color Mode in Advanced Set-
tings. (See "Main Sheet .") ➔P.167
•ASample Type
Choose a sample image from Standard, Portrait, Landscape, or Graphics.
•BView Color Pattern
Select this checkbox to display the color pattern.
Color Adjustment Sheet: Monochrome
iPF785
User's Guide
Windows Software Printer Driver
176
•CApply to Sample
Select this checkbox to apply the changed settings to the sample image.
•DCyan/EMagenta/FYellow
Not available.
•GGray Tone
Not available.
•HBrightness
Adjust the overall image brightness as desired. You can adjust the brightness if the printed document is lighter or
darker than the original image (that is, the original photo that was scanned or the original graphic as it appears on
the computer screen).
•IContrast
Adjust the contrast of the darkest and lightest portions relative to each other, as desired. Increasing the Contrast
makes images sharper, and reducing the Contrast softens images.
•JSaturation
Not available.
•KObject Adjustment
Select this option to display the Object Adjustment dialog box, in which you can specify objects subject to color
adjustment.
•
Object Adjustment Dialog box: Monochrome ➔P.177
•SDefaults
Click to restore all settings on the sheet to the default values.
Note
•For details on settings items, see "Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver." ➔P.51
Object Adjustment Dialog box: Monochrome
Object Adjustment Dialog box: Monochrome
In the Object Adjustment dialog box, you can specify what type of print jobs to apply color adjustment to. If an original
comprises images, graphics, and text, you can specify which portion to apply color adjustment to.
Note
•To display the Object Adjustment dialog box, click Object Adjustment on the Color Adjustment sheet.
•AImage
Select this option to apply color adjustment to image areas, such as photos.
iPF785
Object Adjustment Dialog box: Monochrome
User's Guide
Windows Software Printer Driver
177
•BGraphics
Select this option to apply color adjustment to graphics, such as lines and circles.
•CText
Select this option to apply color adjustment to text.
Page Setup Sheet
Page Setup Sheet
The following settings are available on the Page Setup sheet. For details on settings items, refer to the printer driver
help file.
•APage Size
Select the page size as specified in the source application.
For details on available page sizes, see "Paper Sizes." ➔P.362
•BBorderless Printing
Borderless printing is available if roll paper is selected in the LPaper Source list. Choose from the following op-
tions when this setting is activated.
•
Borderless Printing on Paper of Equivalent Size ➔P.87
•
Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width ➔P.90
•
Borderless Printing at Actual Size ➔P.80
•DFit Paper Size
Scales the document image to match the paper size.
•EScale to fit Roll Paper Width
Scales the document image to match the roll width.
•FPrint Image with Actual Size
Prints documents at their actual size. This function is available when you have selected the size same as the width
of Roll Paper for either the length or width of the document from the APage Size list.
Page Setup Sheet
iPF785
User's Guide
Windows Software Printer Driver
178
•GPaper Size
Available when DFit Paper Size is selected.
Choose the size of the paper you will print on.
For details on available paper sizes, see "Paper Sizes." ➔P.362
Paper sizes compatible with borderless printing are shown in the list.
•CEnlarged/Reduced Printing
Choose from the following options when this setting is activated.
•
Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size ➔P.65
•
Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width ➔P.67
•
Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value ➔P.71
•DFit Paper Size
Scales the document image to match the paper size.
•EFit Roll Paper Width
Scales the document image to match the roll width.
•FScaling
Resizes the document image based on a specified scaling value. Enter a value in a range of 5–600.
•GPaper Size
Choose the size of the paper you will print on.
For details on available paper sizes, see "Paper Sizes." ➔P.362
•HOrientation
Choose the printing orientation.
•
Making the Original Orientation Match the Paper Orientation ➔P.148
•KRotate Page 90 degrees (Conserve Paper)
Activate this setting to rotate the document image by 90 degrees before printing.
•
Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90 Degrees ➔P.135
•LPaper Source
Choose the feed source, as desired.
Options displayed in the list vary depending on the selection in Media Type on the Main sheet.
•MRoll Paper Width
Choose the roll width.
For details on available roll widths, see "Paper Sizes." ➔P.362
iPF785
Page Setup Sheet
User's Guide
Windows Software Printer Driver
179
•NRoll Paper Options
Complete optional roll paper settings. Click to display the Roll Paper Options dialog box.
Under AAutomatic Cutting, you can specify Yes or No and Print Cut Guideline.
•
Cutting Roll Paper After Printing ➔P.152
Select BBanner Printing when printing multiple pages continuously.
•
Printing Multiple Pages Continuously ➔P.114
•POutput Method
Click to display the Output Method dialog box, which enables you to complete the Output Method and Name of
data to be saved settings.
•
Output Method Dialog box ➔P.180
•OSize Options
Click to display the Paper Size Options dialog box, which enables you to register additional paper sizes or select
the size system for use.
•
Paper Size Options Dialog Box ➔P.181
•SDefaults
Restores all settings on the sheet to the default values.
Output Method Dialog box
Output Method Dialog box
The Output Method dialog box allows you to select the Output Method and set the save settings when saving to the
box.
Output Method Dialog box
iPF785
User's Guide
Windows Software Printer Driver
180
Note
•To display the Output Method dialog box, on the Page Setup sheet, click Output Method. (See "Page Setup
Sheet .") ➔P.178
•AOutput Method
If Print is selected, the print job is saved to the printer hard disk after printing has finished.
If Save in mail box is selected, the print job is saved to the printer hard disk. If you choose Save in mail box,
also specify the destination personal box in the Mail box list.
If Print after reception is complete is checked, you can prevent degradation of print quality that occurs when
receiving a print job is interrupted and printing is aborted in the middle.
These can be selected as Print options.
•BName of data to be saved
To use the file name, choose Use file name.
Otherwise choose Enter name and enter a name in Name.
•CMail box
Displays a list of mail boxes. If you choose Save in mail box, also specify the destination personal box from the
list.
•DAcquire Mail Box Name
When this is clicked, the box name acquired from the printer main unit is displayed in Mail box.
Paper Size Options Dialog Box
Paper Size Options Dialog Box
In the Paper Size Options dialog box, you can create and register your own Custom Paper Size. The sizes you define
are listed with standard paper sizes for selection later as needed.
Important
•You cannot create any arbitrary roll paper width as a Custom Paper Size.
•If you select a Paper Size from Paper Size Options, load paper of a size equal to or larger than the Paper Size
Options into the printer. If the size of the loaded paper is smaller than the Paper Size Options, an incomplete output
image may be printed.
Note
•To display the Paper Size Options dialog box, on the Page Setup sheet, click Paper Size Options. (See "Page Setup
Sheet .") ➔P.178
•APaper Size List
Shows the names and sizes of paper that can be used with the printer driver.
iPF785
Paper Size Options Dialog Box
User's Guide
Windows Software Printer Driver
181
•BDelete
Custom paper sizes created by users can be deleted from the APaper Size List, as needed.
However, they cannot be deleted in the following situations.
•
If a standard paper size of the printer driver is selected.
•
If an oversized paper size is selected.
•
If a paper size marked with a red circle is selected.
•CCustom Paper Size Name
You can name Custom Paper Size as desired.
•DUnits
Specify the desired unit of measure for the Custom Paper Size height and width.
•EPaper Size
Specify the desired Width and Height. You can make your selection from sizes that are compatible with Border-
less Printing by selecting Borderless Printing Size. To maintain the aspect ratio of the Width and Height as you
resize the paper, select Fix the Ratio of the Width to Height.
•FAdd
Enables you to register the custom paper size you have specified or overwrite an existing custom paper size.
•GDisplay Series
You can limit the number of options shown in Page Size, Paper Size, and Paper Size List.
Layout Sheet
Layout Sheet
The following settings are available on the Layout sheet. For details on settings items, refer to the printer driver help.
•APage Layout
Activate this setting to select a particular page layout.
•
Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet ➔P.118
•
Printing Posters in Sections ➔P.123
•
Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other ➔P.110
•
Using PosterArtist to Compose Originals ➔P.41
•BSet
Click to display one of the following dialog boxes depending on the selection in APage Layout. In these dialog
boxes, you can specify layout details and which pages to print, as well as other settings.
•
Page Layout Printing
•
Pages to Print
Layout Sheet
iPF785
User's Guide
Windows Software Printer Driver
182
•
Free Layout Settings
•CWatermark
Activating this option makes two settings available, Watermarks and DEdit Watermark.
•
Printing With Watermarks ➔P.145
•
Watermarks
Lists the provided watermarks. Choose the watermark to print.
•DEdit Watermark
Click to display the Edit Watermark dialog box for creating your own, original watermark.
•EPrint Centered
Activate this setting to print document images in the center of the paper.
•
Printing Originals Centered on Rolls ➔P.126
•
Printing Originals Centered on Sheets ➔P.130
•FRotate 180 degrees
Activate this option to rotate document images by 180 degrees before printing.
•GNo Spaces at Top or Bottom (Conserve Paper)
Activate this setting to print the next image skipping blank areas above and below printable data in documents,
which enables you to conserve the paper.
•
Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without Top and Bottom Margins ➔P.139
•HCopies
Enter the number of copies to print, in a range of 1–999.
•
Reverse Order
Activate this option to print pages in reverse order.
•IPage Options
Click to display the Page Options dialog box, which enables you to complete settings for printing the user name,
date, or page number in the header or footer.
•
Page Options Dialog Box ➔P.184
•JSpecial Settings
If the printing results are not as you expected, click this option to display the Special Settings dialog box and
change how printing is processed.
•
Special Settings Dialog Box ➔P.185
•SDefaults
Click to restore all settings on the sheet to the default values.
iPF785
Layout Sheet
User's Guide
Windows Software Printer Driver
183
Page Options Dialog Box
Page Options Dialog Box
The Page Options dialog box offers the following settings.
Note
•To display the Page Options dialog box, on the Layout sheet, click Page Options. (See "Layout Sheet .") ➔P.182
•APrint Date
Select where the date is printed, as desired. To print the time as well, select BPrint Time Also.
•CPrint User Name
Select where the user name is printed, as desired.
•DPrint Page Number
Select where the page number is printed, as desired.
•EFormat Settings
Click to display the Format Settings dialog box, which enables you to complete format-related settings.
Note
•If you specify the same position for multiple items, the items are printed from left to right in this order: date, user
name, and page number.
•When you print multiple pages per sheet using Page Layout Printing or similar functions, these items will be
printed for each page.
Page Options Dialog Box
iPF785
User's Guide
Windows Software Printer Driver
184
Special Settings Dialog Box
Special Settings Dialog Box
If the printing results are not as you expected, you can change how printing is processed in the Special Settings dia-
log box.
Note
•To display the Special Settings dialog box, on the Layout sheet, click Special Settings. (See "Layout
Sheet .") ➔P.182
•Click the processing method for Parameter within the Settings Summaries frame to display a list of the setting details
under the frame.
•ASpooling at Printer Driver
Sets whether or not print jobs are spooled in the printer driver and processed by PageComposer.
Printing results may be improved in some cases by setting this to No or No (EMF Spooling).
Note
•When set to No or No (EMF Spooling), functions such as Page Layout, Watermark, Reverse Order, Page Op-
tions, FineZoom Settings, and Preview Switchingcan no longer be used.
•
BFineZoom Settings
This function is used in large-format printing.
If it is set to Yes, problems in the printing may be improved.
If it is set to No, image distortions such as fine lines disappearing may be improved.
•
CPreview Switching
When this setting is turned on, PageComposer starts when printing is performed with the Open Preview
When Print Job Starts check box selected in the Main sheet.
•DApplication Color Matching Priority
When this is on, you can give applications priority in color management.
•EFast Graphic Process
Turning this setting on may help produce the expected results if image colors are inconsistent in printed docu-
ments or if lines are printed in varying thicknesses.
Note
•This function cannot be used on 64-bit version of Windows.
•FReduce Print Unevenness
If you want to reduce unevenness of the printed image, turn this on to improve the print result. However, printing
may take longer for some images.
•GAdjust faint lines
Turn this off to obtain expected results when fine lines have been printed in a color different from other diagrams
and illustrations. However, lines in some colors may appear broken.
iPF785
Special Settings Dialog Box
User's Guide
Windows Software Printer Driver
185
Favorites Sheet
Favorites Sheet
The following settings are available on the Favorites sheet. For details on settings items, refer to the printer driver
help.
•AFavorites
Printing favorites you have created are listed with Default Settings favorites.
•
Using Favorites ➔P.151
•BSettings Details
Displays details of the favorite selected in the AFavorites.
•CComment
Displays notes registered in the favorite.
•DApply Favorite
Click to change the current print settings to those of the favorite selected in the AFavorites.
•EApplication Settings Priority
Activate this setting to use settings values specified in the source application in preference to favorite settings se-
lected in the AFavorites, when clicking DApply Favorite. For details on the settings items used in preference,
refer to the printer driver help.
•FDelete
Click to delete the selected favorite from the AFavorites list.
•GEdit
Click to display the Edit dialog box, which enables you to change the name and icon for the favorite selected in
the AFavorites list.
Favorites Sheet
iPF785
User's Guide
Windows Software Printer Driver
186
•HAdd
Click to display the Add dialog box, which enables you to add the current print settings as a favorite.
•IImport
Click to display the Open dialog box, which enables you to import favorite settings saved as a file.
•JExport
Click to display the Save As dialog box, which enables you to save the favorite settings as a file.
•KUp
Click to move the selected favorite up in the AFavorites list.
•LDown
Click to move the selected favorite down in the AFavorites list.
Utility Sheet
Utility Sheet
The following items can be executed on the Utility sheet. For details on the utilities, refer to the relevant utility help.
•AMaintenance
Click to start the imagePROGRAF Status Monitor, which offers the following maintenance for the printer.
•
Nozzle (ink ejecting outlet) check
•
Nozzle (ink ejecting outlet) cleaning
•
Head alignment adjustment
•
Feed amount adjustment
iPF785
Utility Sheet
User's Guide
Windows Software Printer Driver
187
•BColor imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy
Click to launch Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy (iR enlargement copy), which enables you to create
hot folders used for Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy and assign print settings to hot folders.
•
Printing Enlargements of Scanned Originals from a Color imageRUNNER ➔P.234
For details, see "Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy." ➔P.225
Note
•Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy is not displayed in 64-bit editions of Windows.
Support Sheet
Support Sheet
On the Support sheet, you can view support information and the user's manual.
•ASupport Information
Click to access the Canon support webpage, where you can find the latest information on the printer and consum-
ables, check for printer driver updates, and browse other information.
•BUser Manual
Click to connect to the Internet and display the printer user's manual.
•CSettings Summaries
Click to display the View Settings dialog box, which enables you to confirm the settings for the Main, Page Set-
up, Layout, and Favorites sheets.
Support Sheet
iPF785
User's Guide
Windows Software Printer Driver
188
Settings Summaries Dialog Box
Settings Summaries Dialog Box
The Settings Summaries dialog box enables you to confirm the settings for the Main, Page Setup, Layout, and Fa-
vorites sheets.
•ACopy
Click to copy the settings information to the clipboard. You can paste the settings information into a file created
with a text editor or similar application.
Device Settings Sheet
Device Settings Sheet
Many settings items on the printer properties sheets are controlled by Windows applications. However, the Device Set-
tings sheet is for configuring the printer, and it is an extension of the printer driver.
The following settings are available on the Device Settings sheet.
•AColor Compatibility
Click to display the Color Compatibility dialog box, which enables you to adjust colors if you have selected Color
Mode > Color (CAD).
•
For details on color settings, see "Specifying Colors and Printing CAD Drawings." ➔P.48
iPF785
Settings Summaries Dialog Box
User's Guide
Windows Software Printer Driver
189
Preview
Preview
The Features of Preview ......................................................................................................................................................191
Starting Preview ...................................................................................................................................................................... 191
Preview Main Window ........................................................................................................................................................... 193
Dialog Area ................................................................................................................................................................................ 195
Enlarge/Reduce the screen display ................................................................................................................................196
Moving a Page ......................................................................................................................................................................... 196
Using the ruler ......................................................................................................................................................................... 196
Priority setting for rotating 90 degrees ....................................................................................................................... 197
Printing with Selecting the Layout .................................................................................................................................. 198
Print on the Center ................................................................................................................................................................ 200
Not Print Spaces at the Top/Bottom ............................................................................................................................. 201
The Features of Preview
The Features of Preview
The main features of Preview are as follows.
•
While viewing this screen, you can adjust layout settings of a document created with application software.
•
You can not only adjust layout settings but also your changes will be instantly applied on the preview screen, and
you can print the preview screen as it is seen.
Note
•The media type, image size, detailed media settings, and the printer settings can cause the actual print output to differ
from the Preview settings.
Starting Preview
Starting Preview
Follow the procedure below to start the Preview.
1
Start the apllication software which you use.
2
From the application software's File menu, select the printer setup menu to open the Print dialog box.
Note
•Normally, select Print from the File menu.
iPF785
The Features of Preview
User's Guide
Windows Software Preview
191
3
On the Main sheet, click on the Open Preview When
Print Job Starts check box.
Click the OK button to save the settings.
Note
•Your printer is depicted in the lower-left area of this screen.
4
On the Print dialog box in the apllication software, click the Print button.
5
Preview main window is displayed.
Starting Preview
iPF785
User's Guide
Windows Software Preview
192
Preview Main Window
Preview Main Window
The Preview main window consists of the menu and tool bars, preview and dialog area and status bar.
Note
•You can use the View menu to show or hide the tool bar.
•
Menu Bar
This allows you to select menus required for operations.
•
Tool Bar
This allows you to select tool buttons required for major operations.
•
Preview Area
You can check the settings you made in this area.
iPF785
Preview Main Window
User's Guide
Windows Software Preview
193
Dialog Area
Dialog Area
You can select the layout and print on the center.
•
Media Type/Paper Source/Paper Size
You can confirm the information that is set.
•
Layout Selection
You can print which conserves paper by selecting the layout.
For more information about Layout Selection, see "Printing with Selecting the Layout." ➔P.198
•
Center Originals Across Roll
You can print on the center of the media loaded in the printer.
For more information about Center Originals Across Roll, see "Print on the Center." ➔P.200
Note
•Available only if rolls are selected in Paper Source.
•
No Spaces at Top or Bottom
You can save paper on not to feed roll paper for the empty spaces when the print data contains spaces at the top
or bottom.
For more information about No Spaces at Top or Bottom, see "Not Print Spaces at the Top/Bottom." ➔P.201
Note
•Available only if rolls are selected in Paper Source.
•
Print Button
Click the button to start printing.
iPF785
Dialog Area
User's Guide
Windows Software Preview
195
•
Cancel Button
Click the button to stop printing.
•
Printer Information
You can confirm the information acquired from the printer.
•
Update Printer Information Button
Click the button to update the printer information with connecting to the printer.
•
Status Monitor Button
Click the button to start Status Monitor.
Enlarge/Reduce the screen display
Enlarge/Reduce the screen display
You can enlarge or reduce the screen display when you select Zoom from the View menu.
Setting Details
Fit Screen Display all.
Fit to Width Display to the width of the paper.
Reduce Display at half of the standard size.
Standard Display at the standard size.
Enlarge Display with the double of the standard size.
Enlarge More Display with the triple of the standard size.
Note
•This item can be selected even if you have clicked the ▼ button in the toolbar Zoom.
Moving a Page
Moving a Page
You can move a page to display when you select Go to Page from the View menu.
Setting Details
First Page Go to the first page.
Previous Page Go to the previous page.
Next Page Go to the next page.
Last Page Go to the last page.
Go To Page Go to the specified page.
Note
•You can also move a page by clicking on the tool bar.
Using the ruler
Using the ruler
You can confirm the layout with using the ruler.
•
Switching the ruler Show/Hide
In the View menu, select Ruler to switch the ruler Show/Hide.
•
Changing the ruler unit
You can set the ruler unit when you select Units from the View menu.
Setting Details
mm Use mm as the ruler unit.
inch Use inches as the ruler unit.
Enlarge/Reduce the screen display
iPF785
User's Guide
Windows Software Preview
196
Priority setting for rotating 90 degrees
Priority setting for rotating 90 degrees
You can select Rotate 90 Degrees If Possible or Use Driver Settings from the Options menu.
Setting Details
Rotate 90 Degrees If Possible Rotates pages in portrait orientation 90 degrees before printing. Pages are only rotated if
they can fit lengthwise across the roll.
Use Driver Settings Follows printer driver settings when determining whether to rotate pages.
Selecting Rotate 90 Degrees If Possible or Placing a checkmark for Rotate Page 90 degrees (Conserve Paper) on
the printer driver
Selecting Use Driver Settings
iPF785
Priority setting for rotating 90 degrees
User's Guide
Windows Software Preview
197
Printing with Selecting the Layout
Printing with Selecting the Layout
You can print which conserves paper by selecting the layout.
1
In Layout Selection, click the layout button to use.
Button Details
Upper Button
Turn at the position of .
Right Button
Turn at the position of .
Left Button
Turn at the position of .
Lower Button
Turn at the position of .
Printing with Selecting the Layout
iPF785
User's Guide
Windows Software Preview
198
Note
•Right Button or Left Button can be selected only when the rotated pages can fit lengthwise across the roll.
•By clicking Right Button or Left Button, you can save paper by printing in landscape orientation on roll pa-
per.
•You can select only Upper Button or Lower Button if
Cut Sheet is selected.
Button Details
The button is selected currently.
The button can be selected.
The button can not be selected.
2
Click the Print button.
Printing on the selected layout begins.
iPF785
Printing with Selecting the Layout
User's Guide
Windows Software Preview
199
Print on the Center
Print on the Center
You can print on the center of the media loaded in the printer.
1
Click the Center Originals Across Roll check box on.
2
Click the Print button.
Printing on the center begins.
Note
•Available only if rolls are selected in Paper Source.
Print on the Center
iPF785
User's Guide
Windows Software Preview
200
Not Print Spaces at the Top/Bottom
Not Print Spaces at the Top/Bottom
You can save paper on not to feed roll paper for the empty spaces when the print data contains spaces at the top or
bottom.
1
Click the No Spaces at Top or Bottom check box on.
2
Click the Print button.
Printing on the settings with no spaces at top or bottom begins.
iPF785
Not Print Spaces at the Top/Bottom
User's Guide
Windows Software Preview
201
Free Layout
Free Layout
The Features of Free Layout ............................................................................................................................................. 202
Starting Free Layout ............................................................................................................................................................. 203
Free Layout Main Window .................................................................................................................................................. 204
Detailed Settings .....................................................................................................................................................................205
Preferences Dialog Box ....................................................................................................................................................... 206
Page Options Dialog Box .....................................................................................................................................................207
Zoom Dialog Box .....................................................................................................................................................................208
Format Dialog Box ..................................................................................................................................................................208
Laying out a Multiple-File Document on One Page ..................................................................................................210
Laying out a Document Created with Multiple Application Programs on One Page ................................ 212
Selecting an Object ............................................................................................................................................................... 215
Changing the Object Size ................................................................................................................................................... 215
Moving an Object ................................................................................................................................................................... 216
Rotating an Object ................................................................................................................................................................. 216
Laying out Objects Automatically ....................................................................................................................................217
Aligning Objects ...................................................................................................................................................................... 217
Changing the Object Overlapping Order ......................................................................................................................219
Pasting a Copied or Cut Object ....................................................................................................................................... 220
Folded Duplex Window ......................................................................................................................................................... 221
Finished Size Settings Dialog Box ................................................................................................................................... 222
Binding Settings Dialog Box ...............................................................................................................................................223
Prints using Folded Duplex .................................................................................................................................................224
The Features of Free Layout
The Features of Free Layout
The main features of Free Layout are as follows.
•
Allows you to lay out at will and print a document created with application software.
•
You can not only lay out multiple pages on one page but also lay out and print a multiple-file document on one
page, or lay out and print a document created with multiple application programs on one page.
•
Any two pages can be arranged and printed in a layout that becomes duplex on folding.
This can be used such as for advertising posters that are suspended from the ceiling.
Note
•The media type, image size, detailed media settings, and the printer settings can cause the actual print output to differ
from the Free Layout settings.
The Features of Free Layout
iPF785
User's Guide
Windows Software Free Layout
202
Starting Free Layout
Starting Free Layout
Follow the procedure below to start the Free Layout.
1
Start the apllication software which you use.
2
From the application software's File menu, select the printer setup menu to open the Print dialog box.
Note
•Normally, select Print from the File menu.
3
From the list, select the printer and select the Layout
sheet.
Note
•Your printer is depicted in the lower-left area of this screen.
4
In the Layout sheet, click on the Page Layout check box and select Free Layout from the list.
Click the OK button to save the settings.
Note
•When you select Free Layout, all other setting items will be disabled.
iPF785
Starting Free Layout
User's Guide
Windows Software Free Layout
203
5
On the Print dialog box in the apllication software, click
the Print button.
Free Layout main window is displayed.
Free Layout Main Window
Free Layout Main Window
The Free Layout main window consists of the menu and tool bars, layout area and status bar.
Note
•You can use the View menu to show or hide the tool and status bar.
•
Menu Bar
This allows you to select menus required for operations.
Free Layout Main Window
iPF785
User's Guide
Windows Software Free Layout
204
•
Tool Bar
This allows you to select tool buttons required for major operations.
•
Layout Area
This allows you to lay out objects and edit the object size and orientation.
•
Status Bar
This shows the paper size, unit of length, and number of objects.
Detailed Settings
Detailed Settings
The printer driver opens when you select Detailed Settings from the File menu. The printer driver is used to configure
basic settings to match the type of media loaded in the printer.
iPF785
Detailed Settings
User's Guide
Windows Software Free Layout
205
Refer to "Printer Driver" ➔P.158 for details on the printer driver.
Note
•When you select the Detailed Settings, the only three sheets displayed are the Main sheet, the Page Setup sheet,
and theLayout sheet. Some of the printer driver settings may be disabled.
Preferences Dialog Box
Preferences Dialog Box
This dialog box appears when you select Preferences from the File menu. This allows you to configure the preferen-
ces of Free Layout.
•
Units
Set the unit for paper length, margins, and so on.
•
Gridlines
You can input a grid line width value in numerical characters so that they serve as a guide to laying out objects.
Note
•You can input between 10.0 and 200.0(mm) (between 0.39 and 7.88(inch)).
•You can change the numbers by clicking either ▲ button or ▼ button.
•
Divisions
You can change the number of divisions of grid lines so that they serve as a guide to laying out objects.
Note
•You can input between 1 and 10.
•You can change the numbers by clicking either ▲ button or ▼ button.
•
Grid Color
Select the grid line color.
•
Auto Arrange Spacing
Change the object-to-object spacing to be applied in the operation of laying out objects automatically.
Note
•You can input between 0.0 and 100.0(mm) (between 0.00 and 3.94(inch)).
•You can change the numbers by clicking either ▲ button or ▼ button.
•
Object Frame Style
You can select the object frame style for printing.
The following settings are available for the object frame style.
Setting Details
None You can print with no frame style.
Preferences Dialog Box
iPF785
User's Guide
Windows Software Free Layout
206
Setting Details
Solid Line You can print the solid line as the frame style.
Dotted Line You can print the dotted line as the frame style.
Dashed Line You can print the dashed line as the frame style.
Crop Marks You can print with the crop marks.
Page Options Dialog Box
Page Options Dialog Box
This dialog box appears when you select Page Options from the File menu. This allows you to configure the roll paper
length, object layout order, and margins of Free Layout.
•
Roll Paper Length
Set the length of one page to print on roll paper.
The following settings are available for roll paper length.
Setting Details
Auto Settings The one-page length to be printed on roll paper is automatically set so that the laid-out ob-
jects are printed on one page.
Manual Settings You can input the length of one page to print on roll paper in numerical characters.
Note
•Available only if rolls are selected in Paper Source.
•You can input between 203.2 and 18000.0(mm) (between 8.00 and 708.66(inch)).
•You can change the numbers by clicking either ▲ button or ▼ button.
•
Order
Set the object layout order.
The following settings are available for order.
Setting Details
Upper Left to Right The objects are laid out from upper left to right.
Upper Left to Bottom The objects are laid out from upper left to bottom.
Upper Right to Left The objects are laid out from upper right to left.
Lower Left to Top The objects are laid out from lower left to top.
iPF785
Page Options Dialog Box
User's Guide
Windows Software Free Layout
207
Note
•When you have selected Roll Paper Length > Auto Settings and Paper Orientation > Vertical, you can choose
Upper Left to Right or Upper Right to Left.
•When you have selected Roll Paper Length > Auto Settings and Paper Orientation > Horizontal, you can
choose Upper Left to Bottom or Lower Left to Top.
•
Margins
You can input the paper margins in numerical characters.
Note
•You can input between 0.0 and 50.0(mm) (between 0.00 and 1.97(inch)).
•You can change the numbers by clicking either ▲ button or ▼ button.
Zoom Dialog Box
Zoom Dialog Box
This dialog box appears when you select Zoom from the View menu. You can enlarge or reduce the screen display.
•
Scaling
Set the magnification for enlargement or reduction of the screen display.
Note
•You can input between 25 and 400.
•You can change the numbers by clicking ▼ button.
Format Dialog Box
Format Dialog Box
This dialog box appears when you select Format from the Object menu after you select an object.
Size Sheet
You can rotate, enlarge, or reduce an object.
Zoom Dialog Box
iPF785
User's Guide
Windows Software Free Layout
208
Note
•When the objects are not selected, you can not select Format.
•
Rotate
When you place a checkmark here, you can select Rotate Right or Rotate Left.
Setting Details
Rotate Right Rotates the object 90 degrees clockwise.
Rotate Left Rotates the object 90 degrees counterclockwise.
Note
•When several objects are selected, you cannot select Rotate.
•
Enl./Red.
When you place a checkmark here, you can select Scaling, Fit Paper Size, or Fit Photo Size.
Setting Details
Scaling Allows you to input the value of the enlargement or reduction ratio of an object.
Fit Paper Size Prints by enlarging or reducing each object to match the paper size. If you are using roll pa-
per, objects are enlarged or reduced so that the width of each object matches the width of
the roll paper.
Fit Photo Size Prints all of the objects at the specified photo size.
Note
•You can input between 25 and 600.
•You can change the numbers by clicking either ▲ button or ▼ button.
Position Sheet
You can rotate, enlarge, or reduce an object.
Note
•When the objects are not selected, you can not select Format.
iPF785
Format Dialog Box
User's Guide
Windows Software Free Layout
209
•
Object Position
You can move the object position by changing the values.
Setting Details
Vertical Pos You can input the number of the vertical position in numerical characters.
Horizontal Pos You can input the number of the horizontal position in numerical characters.
Page Pos You can input the number of the page position in numerical characters.
•
Object Size
You can confirm the object size.
Note
•When several objects are selected, you cannot display Object Size.
Laying out a Multiple-File Document on One Page
Laying out a Multiple-File Document on One Page
You can lay out and print a multiple-file document on one page.
1
From the application software's File menu, select the printer setup menu to open the Print dialog box.
Note
•Normally, select Print from the File menu.
2
Click Properties to open the Properties dialog box.
Laying out a Multiple-File Document on One Page
iPF785
User's Guide
Windows Software Free Layout
210
3
In the Page Setup sheet, select Paper Source.
Note
•Your printer is depicted in the lower-left area of this screen.
4
In the Layout sheet, click on the Page Layout check
box and select Free Layout from the list.
Note
•Your printer is depicted in the lower-left area of this screen.
•When you select Free Layout, all other setting items will be disabled.
5
Click the OK button to save the settings.
iPF785
Laying out a Multiple-File Document on One Page
User's Guide
Windows Software Free Layout
211
6
In the Print dialog box, select the pages to print and
the number of copies, and click the OK button.
Free Layout starts, laying out the document created
with application software in the layout area as an ob-
ject.
7
Leaving Free Layout running, open other files with the application software and repeat the above steps.
Laying out a Document Created with Multiple Application Programs on One Page
Laying out a Document Created with Multiple Application Programs on One Page
You can lay out and print a document created with multiple application programs on one page.
1
From the application software's File menu, select the printer setup menu to open the Print dialog box.
Note
•Normally, select Print from the File menu.
Laying out a Document Created with Multiple Application Programs on One Page
iPF785
User's Guide
Windows Software Free Layout
212
2
Click Properties to open the Properties dialog box.
3
In the Page Setup sheet, select Paper Source.
Note
•Your printer is depicted in the lower-left area of this screen.
4
In the Layout sheet, click on the Page Layout check
box and select Free Layout from the list.
iPF785
Laying out a Document Created with Multiple Application Programs on One Page
User's Guide
Windows Software Free Layout
213
Note
•Your printer is depicted in the lower-left area of this screen.
•When you select Free Layout, all other setting items will be disabled.
5
Click the OK button to save the settings.
6
In the Print dialog box, select the pages to print and
the number of copies, and click the OK button.
Free Layout starts, laying out the document created
with application software in the layout area as an ob-
ject.
7
Leaving Free Layout running, open other files with other application software and repeat the above steps.
Laying out a Document Created with Multiple Application Programs on One Page
iPF785
User's Guide
Windows Software Free Layout
214
Selecting an Object
Selecting an Object
When an object is selected, a select box (blue border) appears around the object.
Note
•To select an object, click that object.
•To select multiple successive objects, click them while holding down the Shift key.
•To select multiple arbitrary objects, click them while holding down the Ctrl key.
•To select all objects, select Select All from the Edit menu.
•When you specify the area with dragging the mouse, the object in the area is selected.
Changing the Object Size
Changing the Object Size
You can change the object size by means of mouse operation or by specifying a scaling value.
Note
•The vertical-to-horizontal ratio remains unchanged when the object is enlarged or reduced.
Resizing by means of mouse operation
1
Select an object.
iPF785
Selecting an Object
User's Guide
Windows Software Free Layout
215
2
Place the pointer at a corner of the selection box
around the object to show the arrow handle, and drag
this handle to change the object size.
Resizing by specifying a scaling value
1
Select an object.
Click on the Enl./Red. checkbox in the Format Dialog Box ➔P.208 and select Scaling.
2
You either enter numbers directly.
Note
•You can input between 25 and 600.
•You can change the numbers by clicking either ▲ button or ▼ button.
3
Click the OK button.
Moving an Object
Moving an Object
You can move the object position.
1
Select an object.
2
Place the pointer inside the selection box of the object
to show the crosshair handle, and drag it to move the
object.
Alternatively, you can move the Object Position by
changing the values in Vertical Pos, Horizontal Pos
and Page Pos in the Format Dialog Box ➔P.208 .
Rotating an Object
Rotating an Object
You can rotate the object.
1
Select an object.
Moving an Object
iPF785
User's Guide
Windows Software Free Layout
216
2
Select Rotate Left 90 Degrees orRotate Right 90 De-
grees from the toolbar.
Alternatively, you may click on the Rotate check box in
the Format Dialog Box ➔P.208 then select Rotate
Right or Rotate Left, and click the OK button.
Laying out Objects Automatically
Laying out Objects Automatically
Click Auto Arrange Object in the tool bar. This automatically lays out objects. Alternatively, you may select Auto Ar-
range Object from the Object menu.
Note
•The object layout order varies depending on the Order setting in the Page Options Dialog Box ➔P.207 dialog box.
Aligning Objects
Aligning Objects
You can align objects systematically.
1
Select multiple objects.
2
Click the align button from the toolbar.
Alternatively, you may select the align menu from the Object menu.
•
Align Top
Lays out the objects, justifying them to the top.
iPF785
Laying out Objects Automatically
User's Guide
Windows Software Free Layout
217
•
Center Vertically
Lays out the objects, justifying them to the vertical
center.
•
Align Bottom
Lays out the objects, justifying them to the bottom.
•
Align Left
Lays out the objects, justifying them to the left.
•
Center Horizontally
Lays out the objects, justifying them to the horizon-
tal center.
Aligning Objects
iPF785
User's Guide
Windows Software Free Layout
218
•
Align Right
Lays out the objects, justifying them to the right.
Changing the Object Overlapping Order
Changing the Object Overlapping Order
You can change the object overlapping order.
1
Select an object.
2
Select the Overlapping Order menu from the Object menu.
Note
•The order of overlapping affects the order of objects automatically laid out.
•You can also select by clicking the right button of the mouse on an object.
•
Bring to Front
Moves the object to the frontmost position.
•
Send to Back
Moves the object to the backmost position.
iPF785
Changing the Object Overlapping Order
User's Guide
Windows Software Free Layout
219
•
Bring Forward
Moves the object one position to the front.
•
Send Backward
Moves the object one position to the back.
Pasting a Copied or Cut Object
Pasting a Copied or Cut Object
1
Click Copy or Cut from the toolbar.
Alternatively, you may select Copy or Cut from the Edit menu.
2
Click Paste from the toolbar.
Alternatively, you may select Paste from the Edit menu.
Note
•The copied or cut object is laid out at the end of the page.
•You can also select by clicking the right button of the mouse on an object.
•In order to paste an object on any position that you like, you can paste the object with Pointed Paste by clicking the
right button of the mouse on any position that you want.
Pasting a Copied or Cut Object
iPF785
User's Guide
Windows Software Free Layout
220
Folded Duplex Window
Folded Duplex Window
This window is displayed if you select Folded Duplex from the Edit menu after selecting an object. Using the Folded
Duplex function allows you to print with fold lines added.
The Folded Duplex window consists of the menu and tool bars, layout area and status bar.
Note
•The toolbar and status bar can be toggled between hidden and displayed from the View menu.
•
Menu Bar
This allows you to select menus required for operations.
•
Tool Bar
This allows you to select tool buttons required for major operations.
iPF785
Folded Duplex Window
User's Guide
Windows Software Free Layout
221
•
Layout Area
This allows you to check the arrangement and orientation of objects.
•
Status Bar
This shows the paper source, roll paper width, and output size.
Finished Size Settings Dialog Box
Finished Size Settings Dialog Box
This dialog box is displayed when you select Finished Size Settings from the Edit menu. This allows you to configure
finished size settings.
•
Finished Size
Selects the method for setting the finished size.
The following settings are available for the finished size.
Setting Details
Fit Roll Paper Width Prints by automatically enlarging or reducing the entire document so that the width of the
document matches the roll paper width.
Specify Folded Size Prints by automatically enlarging or reducing the entire document to match the size of the
paper. Select the actual size of the paper you want to print on in Fit Paper Size.
Rotate Page 90 degrees (Conserve
Paper)
Prints by rotating pages by 90 degrees. Pages are automatically rotated if they will fit within
the roll paper width when rotated, and are not rotated if they will not fit within the roll paper
width.
Finished Size Settings Dialog Box
iPF785
User's Guide
Windows Software Free Layout
222
Binding Settings Dialog Box
Binding Settings Dialog Box
This is displayed when you select Binding Settings from theEdit menu. This allows you to configure the binding edge
settings.
•
Binding Edge
Configures the binding edge when folding paper.
The following settings are available for the binding edge.
Setting Details
Bottom Prints by placing the binding margin (gutter) at the bottom of the document.
Top Prints by placing the binding margin (gutter) at the top of the document.
•
Binding
Configures the binding margin (gutter).
Prints by creating a binding margin (gutter) of the specified size. Enter the margin size as a number.
Note
•The values that can be entered are 0 to 50 (mm).
•
Print Fold Lines
Configures the color and type of fold lines.
Note
•To not print fold lines, clear the Print Fold Lines checkbox.
•
Fold Line Color
You can select the fold lines.
•
Fold Line Type
You can select the fold lines.
The following settings are available for the fold line type.
Setting Details
Solid Line You can print the solid line as the frame style.
Dotted Line You can print the dotted line as the frame style.
Dashed Line You can print the dashed line as the frame style.
•
Only Print Center and Edges
To print fold lines at the center and both edges, select the Only Print Center and Edges checkbox.
iPF785
Binding Settings Dialog Box
User's Guide
Windows Software Free Layout
223
Prints using Folded Duplex
Prints using Folded Duplex
This prints 2 pages consecutively. Folding back the paper at the fold lines of the center substitutes for duplex printing.
1
Select two objects from the layout area of Free Layout.
2
Select Folded Duplex from the Edit menu of Free Layout.
Open the Folded Duplex window and arrange the selected objects in the layout area.
3
Open the Finished Size Settings dialog box from the Edit menu.
4
Select Fit Roll Paper Width orSpecify Folded Size in Finished Size.
Note
•Rotate Page 90 degrees (Conserve Paper) is also available whenSpecify Folded Size is selected.
5
Click OK to save the settings.
6
Open the Binding Settings dialog box from the Edit menu.
7
Select Bottom or Top in Binding Edge.
8
Specify the Binding width in Binding.
9
Configure the Fold Line Color and Fold Line Type from Print Fold Lines.
Note
•When the Only Print Center and Edges checkbox is selected, fold lines are only printed at the three loca-
tions of the center and both edges.
10
Click OK to save the settings.
11
Confirm the print setting and begin printing.
Prints using Folded Duplex
iPF785
User's Guide
Windows Software Free Layout
224
Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy
Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy
The Features of Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy ...................................................................................225
Starting Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy ................................................................................................... 225
Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy Dialog Box ............................................................................................. 226
Hot Folder .................................................................................................................................................................................. 227
Creating a New Hot Folder ................................................................................................................................................. 228
Specifying an Existing Shared Folder as a Hot Folder ........................................................................................... 231
Setting the Print Parameters .............................................................................................................................................234
Printing Enlargements of Scanned Originals from a Color imageRUNNER .................................................. 234
The Features of Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy
The Features of Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy
The main features of Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy are as follows.
•
Allows the document scanned with the Color imageRUNNER to be automatically enlarged and printed.
•
You can perform basic printer settings such as printer selection, media type and output profile selection, and
matching methods, in addition to borderless printing and enlargement/reduction process without growing through
the printer driver.
Note
•The media type, image size, detailed media settings, and the printer settings can cause the actual print output to differ
from the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy settings.
Starting Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy
Starting Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy
Follow the procedure below to start the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy.
To start by selecting Printers and Faxes from the start button
1
Open the folder of the OS you are using for configuring printers.
For example, on Windows XP click the start button on the desktop, and then select Printers and Faxes.
2
Right-click the Printers icon and select Printing Prefer-
ences to open the Printing Preferences dialog box.
In the Utility sheet, click the Color imageRUNNER En-
largement Copy button.
iPF785
The Features of Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy
User's Guide
Windows Software Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy
225
3
The Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy dialog
box displays.
Note
•If you click on the Add to Startup folder check box in the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy dialog box, the
icon of Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy utility will appear on the task bar when starting Windows thereafter.
To start by selecting Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy from the start button
1
From the Windows start button, select Color image-
RUNNER Enlargement Copy.
2
The Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy dialog
box displays.
Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy Dialog Box
Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy Dialog Box
The explanation below is on the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy dialog box.
Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy Dialog Box
iPF785
User's Guide
Windows Software Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy
226
Note
•For the step to open the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy dialog box, see "Starting Color imageRUNNER
Enlargement Copy." ➔P.225
•
Hot Folder
The hot folder list appears.
•
Add Button
Click the button to open the Easy Setup Wizard dialog box so that you can add a hot folder.
•
Edit Button
From the Hot Folder list, select a hot folder and click the button to open the Add/Edit Hot Folder dialog box that
allows you to edit the hot folder.
•
Delete Button
From the Hot Folder list, select a hot folder and click the button to delete the hot folder.
•
Start Button
Clicking the button changes the status of the selected inactive Hot Folder to active.
•
Stop Button
Clicking the button changes the status of the selected active Hot Folder to inactive.
•
Add to Startup folder
Register the application in the Windows startup menu.
•
Save Printed Data
Automatically saves printed data.
•
About Button
Click the button to display the name and the version number of the utility.
•
Operation Guide Button
Click the button to display the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy Setup Manual.
Hot Folder
Hot Folder
Hot folder refers to a folder used for Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy.
•
When transferred to the PC's hot folder, the document data scanned with the Color imageRUNNER is printed in
enlarged size from the printer according to the print conditions set in the hot folder.
•
You can create a new hot folder, edit or delete an existing one, and set print conditions at will.
Note
•You can create up to 20 hot folders.
iPF785
Hot Folder
User's Guide
Windows Software Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy
227
Creating a New Hot Folder
Creating a New Hot Folder
1
Open the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy
dialog box, and then click the Add button.
Note
•For the step to open the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy dialog box, see "Starting Color image-
RUNNER Enlargement Copy." ➔P.225
2
The Easy Setup Wizard dialog box displays.
Click the Next button.
3
Select the type of printer to use.
Click the Next button.
Creating a New Hot Folder
iPF785
User's Guide
Windows Software Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy
228
4
Select the media type to print.
Note
•If the Borderless Printing checkbox is checked, only media types that can be used for borderless printing are
displayed in the list.
Click the Next button.
5
Select roll paper or cut sheet to print. Also, select the
media size to print.
Click the Next button.
6
Select the color matching method.
Click the Next button.
iPF785
Creating a New Hot Folder
User's Guide
Windows Software Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy
229
7
To receive a document scanned with the Color imageRUNNER, you need to share a folder. Enter the folder
shared name in Shared Name.
Click the Next button.
Note
•This shared name is used as the name of the hot folder.
•You cannot use the Back button, after clicking the Next button here.
8
Click Finish button to close the Easy Setup Wizard di-
alog box.
The hot folder you have created appears in the Hot
Folder list in the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement
Copy dialog box.
Creating a New Hot Folder
iPF785
User's Guide
Windows Software Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy
230
Specifying an Existing Shared Folder as a Hot Folder
Specifying an Existing Shared Folder as a Hot Folder
1
Share the folder you want to specify as a hot folder.
2
Open the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy
dialog box, and then click the Add button.
Note
•For the step to open the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy dialog box, see "Starting Color image-
RUNNER Enlargement Copy." ➔P.225
3
The Easy Setup Wizard dialog box displays.
Click the Manual Settings button.
iPF785
Specifying an Existing Shared Folder as a Hot Folder
User's Guide
Windows Software Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy
231
4
The Add/Edit Hot Folder dialog box displays.
Enter the hot folder name in Name.
Click the Browse botton, with selecting Specify a fold-
er, to set the existing shared folder.
5
The location of the folders will appear.
Select the folder to specify a hot folder, and click the OK button.
Specifying an Existing Shared Folder as a Hot Folder
iPF785
User's Guide
Windows Software Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy
232
6
As necessary, set the print conditions in the hot folder.
(See "Setting the Print Parameters.") ➔P.234
Click the OK button to close the Add/Edit Hot Folder
dialog box.
The hot folder you have created appears in the Hot
Folder list in the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement
Copy dialog box.
iPF785
Specifying an Existing Shared Folder as a Hot Folder
User's Guide
Windows Software Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy
233
Setting the Print Parameters
Setting the Print Parameters
The printer driver opens when you click the Properties button in the Add/Edit Hot Folder dialog box. The printer driv-
er is used to configure basic settings to match the type of media loaded in the printer.
Refer to "Printer Driver" ➔P.158 for details on the printer driver.
Note
•The only three sheets displayed are the Main sheet, the Page Setup sheet, and the Layout sheet. Some of the printer
driver settings may be disabled.
•
Apply Sharpness
Place a checkmark here to set the sharpness.
Drag the slider bar to the left or right to adjust. You can also adjust by directly entering a number in the numeric
input field.
Note
•You can input between 0 and 500.
•You can change the numbers by clicking either ▲ button or ▼ button.
•You cannot be applied to PDF files.
Printing Enlargements of Scanned Originals from a Color imageRUNNER
Printing Enlargements of Scanned Originals from a Color imageRUNNER
Scanned originals from a Color imageRUNNER can be enlarged and printed automatically.
Originals you create by scanning with a Color imageRUNNER are transferred to a "hot folder" and printed automatically
after enlargement according to printing conditions you specify for that folder.
This processing sequence is called the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy function.
To use Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy, first complete these settings in the following order.
1.
Register a hot folder on your computer.
Register a hot folder on your computer for storing scanned originals from the Color imageRUNNER and complete
the settings for enlargement copy. For details, see "Creating a New Hot Folder." ➔P.228
2.
Complete the scanning settings on the Color imageRUNNER.
Configure the Color imageRUNNER to send scanned originals to the hot folder.
After these settings are complete, you can print enlarged copies of scanned originals from the Color imageRUNNER.
Setting the Print Parameters
iPF785
User's Guide
Windows Software Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy
234
Completing the scanning settings on the Color imageRUNNER.
Configure the Color imageRUNNER to send scanned originals to the hot folder. It is easy to send scanned originals to
the hot folder if you assign the scanning settings and destination to a Favorites button on the Color imageRUNNER.
For instructions on assigning scanning settings and destinations to a Favorites button, refer to the setting manual, dis-
played by clicking Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy Setup Manual button of Color imageRUNNER En-
largement Copy utility, or refer to the Color imageRUNNER manual.
Scanning the original and print an enlargement
Follow the steps below to scan an original on the Color imageRUNNER for enlarged printing on the printer. For detailed
instructions, refer to the Color imageRUNNER manual.
1
Load the original on the platen glass or document feeder of the Color imageRUNNER.
2
Press Send to display the screen for transmission.
3
Press Favorites, and then press the Favorites button assigned to the hot folder.
4
Press Start on the control panel. If you scan originals on the platen glass, after scanning all originals, press
Done on the touch-panel display.
Scanned originals are sent to the hot folder and automatically enlarged and printed following the conditions you
specified for the folder.
iPF785
Printing Enlargements of Scanned Originals from a Color imageRUNNER
User's Guide
Windows Software Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy
235
Print Plug-In for Office
Print Plug-In for Office
Print Plug-In for Ocefeatures ........................................................................................................................................ 236
Steps to install ......................................................................................................................................................................... 237
Steps to uninstall .................................................................................................................................................................... 239
When Print Plug-In for Oce is not displayed ........................................................................................................... 240
To start from Microsoft Word .......................................................................................................................................... 243
Print Matching Roll Width(Word) ..................................................................................................................................... 245
Borderless Printing(Word) .................................................................................................................................................. 247
Multi-Page Printing(Word) .................................................................................................................................................. 249
Register the settings (Word) ............................................................................................................................................. 251
Print Using Registered Settings(Word) .........................................................................................................................252
Portrait Orientation/Landscape Orientation(Word) ................................................................................................. 254
To start from Microsoft PowerPoint .............................................................................................................................. 255
Print Matching Roll Width(PowerPoint) .........................................................................................................................257
Borderless Printing(PowerPoint) ...................................................................................................................................... 259
Multi-Page Printing(PowerPoint) ...................................................................................................................................... 262
Register the settings (PowerPoint) ................................................................................................................................. 263
Print Using Registered Settings(PowerPoint) ............................................................................................................ 264
Portrait Orientation/Landscape Orientation(PowerPoint) ..................................................................................... 266
To start from Microsoft Excel ........................................................................................................................................... 267
Print Entire Sheet(Excel) ......................................................................................................................................................269
Print Selected Area(Excel) .................................................................................................................................................. 271
Conguring Binding (Excel) ................................................................................................................................................274
Conguring Special Settings ............................................................................................................................................. 275
Print Plug-In for Officefeatures
Print Plug-In for Officefeatures
Print Plug-In for Office is a Plug-In that enables easy printing from Microsoft Office.
•
It is displayed on the toolbar/ribbon, so it is easily accessible.
•
It can be set by just selecting from the Wizard.
•
Large-Format Printing custom size can also be set in the Wizard from Microsoft Word or Microsoft Power-
Point.
•
Custom size can be set automatically from Microsoft Excel.
•
The layout can be checked before printing by starting the preview screen.
Note
•64 bit edition Windows OS operates only on WOW64 (32 bit emulator).
Important
•The Print Plug-In for Office toolbar/ribbon might not be displayed in Microsoft Office after installing imagePROG-
RAF Print Plug-In for Office. For details, refer to "When Print Plug-In for Office is not displayed" ➔P.240 .
•If you opened the Office document from Internet Explorer, the software will not run correctly.
•If you are editing an embedded object or link object, the software will not run correctly.
•If you added the imagePROGRAF Print Plug-In ribbon to the Microsoft Office Quick Access toolbar, the software
will not run correctly.
Print Plug-In for Ocefeatures
iPF785
User's Guide
Windows Software Print Plug-In for Oce
236
Steps to install
Steps to install
Below are the steps to install Print Plug-In for Office.
Note
•You must log into Windows as an Administrator before the installation.
1
Insert "User Software CD-ROM" into the CD-ROM drive and start the installer.
Note
•If the installer screen does not display, open the CD-ROM icon from My Computer, click iPFInst.exe, and
open the icon.
2
Click the imagePROGRAF Print Plug-In button.
3
Click the Nextbutton.
iPF785
Steps to install
User's Guide
Windows Software Print Plug-In for Oce
237
4
Read the License Agreement, and click the Yes but-
ton.
5
Click the Start button.
6
Click the Yes button.
Note
•The following message may be displayed in Windows 8 or
a later OS. If this happens, install the .NET Framework by
following the procedure.
Steps to install
iPF785
User's Guide
Windows Software Print Plug-In for Oce
238
7
Click the Exit button.
The installation for Print Plug-In for Office is com-
plete.
Important
•When you install this software, the virtual printer Canon imagePROGRAF PrintPlugIn may be installed. If you want
to use this software, do not uninstall the virtual printer Canon imagePROGRAF PrintPlugIn.
•The Print Plug-In for Office toolbar/ribbon might not be displayed in Microsoft Office after installing imagePROG-
RAF Print Plug-In for Office.
Refer to the following topic for details on how to display the imagePROGRAF Print Plug-In for Office toolbar/ribbon.
•When Print Plug-In for Office is not displayed ➔P.240
Steps to uninstall
Steps to uninstall
Below are the steps to uninstall Print Plug-In for Office.
1
If Microsoft Office is open, close it.
2
Select Control Panel from the start menu.
3
Open Add or Remove Programs.
4
Select imagePROGRAF Print Plug-In, and click the
Remove button.
Note
•You cannot uninstall Print Plug-In for Office if an Office application is running. When a message appears, select
Cancel and close all Office applications that are running.
iPF785
Steps to uninstall
User's Guide
Windows Software Print Plug-In for Oce
239
When Print Plug-In for Office is not displayed
When Print Plug-In for Office is not displayed
Buttons such as Start imagePROGRAF Print Plug-In sometimes do not appear in the Word, PowerPoint and Excel
Office applications, and the Print Plug-In for Office functions are not available.
In this event, re-install Print Plug-In for Office.
If you are using Microsoft Office 2003 or later, you can also enable add-ins to display Print Plug-In for Office.
See below for the procedure for re-installing the plug-in or enabling add-ins.
Re-installing Print Plug-In for Office
If a problem occurs, such as the system or an application terminating abnormally, the Microsoft Office application dis-
ables add-ins as a safety precaution.
In this event, you will need to re-install Print Plug-In for Office to display the imagePROGRAF Print Plug-In toolbar/
ribbon.
Note
•You cannot re-install Print Plug-In for Office once an Office application is running. When the message appears, select
Cancel and close the active Office application.
Re-install Print Plug-In for Office as follows:
1
Close Microsoft Office if it is open.
2
Install Print Plug-In for Office.
For information about instsalling, see "Steps to install." ➔P.237
Enabling Print Plug-In for Office for items disabled in Office applications
If a problem occurs, such as the system or an application terminating abnormally, the Microsoft Office application dis-
ables add-ins as a safety precaution.
In this event, you will need to restore the disabled add-ins in order to display the imagePROGRAF Print Plug-In tool-
bar/ribbon.
Use the procedure below to restore the add-ins disabled by Microsoft Office.
•
For Microsoft Office 2010 or later
1
Select Options from the File menu.
2
From the list on the left side of the <application name> options dialog box, select Add-ins.
When Print Plug-In for Oce is not displayed
iPF785
User's Guide
Windows Software Print Plug-In for Oce
240
3
Select Disabled Items in the Manage combo box and
click the Go button.
4
If Addin imageprograf print plug-in (ipfaddinif.dll) is dis-
played in the Disabled Items dialog box, select it and click the
Enable button.
5
Close all the dialog boxes and restart the Office application.
•
For Microsoft Office 2007
1
Click the Office button and then click the <application
name> options button.
2
From the list on the left side of the <application name> options dialog box, select Add-ins.
iPF785
When Print Plug-In for Oce is not displayed
User's Guide
Windows Software Print Plug-In for Oce
241
3
Select Disabled Items in the Manage combo box and
click the Go button.
4
If Addin imageprograf print plug-in (ipfaddinif.dll) is dis-
played in the Disabled Items dialog box, select it and click the
Enable button.
5
Close all the dialog boxes and restart the Office application.
•
For Microsoft Office 2003
1
Click About <application name> in the Help menu of application.
When Print Plug-In for Oce is not displayed
iPF785
User's Guide
Windows Software Print Plug-In for Oce
242
2
Click the Disabled Items button in the About <appli-
cation name> dialog box.
3
If Addin imageprograf print plug-in (ipfaddinif.dll) is dis-
played in the Disabled Items dialog box, select it and click the
Enable button.
4
Close all the dialog boxes and restart the Office application.
To start from Microsoft Word
To start from Microsoft Word
Below are the steps to start Print Plug-In for Office from Microsoft Word.
1
Start Microsoft Word.
2
If Start imagePROGRAF Print Plug-In is displayed on the toolbar/
ribbon, click it.
Important
•If the imagePROGRAF Print Plug-In toolbar/ribbon is not displayed, refer to the following.
•"When Print Plug-In for Office is not displayed" ➔P.240
3
Check that the imagePROGRAF Print Plug-In toolbar/ribbon
is displayed.
iPF785
To start from Microsoft Word
User's Guide
Windows Software Print Plug-In for Oce
243
4
Click the buttons on the toolbar/ribbon according to the items you want to set.
Icon Contents
Menu
Displays the About, Help, and Special Settings dialog boxes.
You can change the settings using the Special Settings dialog box.
Refer to "Configuring Special Settings" ➔P.275 for details.
Printer list
Select Printer.
If you select Show All Printers, the imagePROGRAF printers will be displayed again. Se-
lect this when you want to display all printer drivers or update the display.
PrintButton
The print Wizard is displayed.
The settings Print Matching Roll Width, Borderless Printing, Multi-Page Printing, and
Print Using Registered Settings can be set.
Paper Settings Button
Large-Format Wizard is displayed.
Settings for Portrait or Landscape Orientation can be set.
Printing Wizard dialog box
Important
•If you want to change the display to another file or application while the Printing Wizard is open, close the
Printing Wizard dialog box. Otherwise, you may not be able to change displays or operate the toolbar/
ribbon.
To start from Microsoft Word
iPF785
User's Guide
Windows Software Print Plug-In for Oce
244
Large-Format Printing Wizard dialog box
Important
•If you want to change the display to another file or application while the Large-Format Printing Wizard is
open, close the Large-Format Printing Wizard dialog box. Otherwise, you may not be able to change dis-
plays or operate the toolbar/ribbon.
•The layout may collapse if you create a form using existing data. If that is the case, modify the data again.
Print Matching Roll Width(Word)
Print Matching Roll Width(Word)
Prints to the edge of the roll width. You can print large exhibits and posters, and also print Portrait and Landscape ori-
entations made in Large-Format Printing Wizard.
1
Start Microsoft Word.
2
If Start imagePROGRAF Print Plug-In is displayed, click it.
3
Click Print from the imagePROGRAF Print Plug-In
toolbar/ribbon.
The Printing Wizard dialog box is displayed.
iPF785
Print Matching Roll Width(Word)
User's Guide
Windows Software Print Plug-In for Oce
245
Important
•If you want to change the display to another file or application while the Printing Wizard is open, close the
Printing Wizard dialog box. Otherwise, you may not be able to change displays or operate the toolbar/
ribbon.
4
Click Print Matching Roll Width.
5
Select Roll Paper Width that is set in the printer.
6
Select image size.
7
Select layout.
8
Select Next.
9
Select Media Type.
10
Select Print Range from All Pages, Current Page, and Pages.
If Pages is selected, enter the number of pages.
Print Matching Roll Width(Word)
iPF785
User's Guide
Windows Software Print Plug-In for Oce
246
11
Enter Copies.
Note
•When Print in Draft mode is selected, printing is fast but the print quality is poor.
•When Saturation is selected, you can print posters, etc., vividly.
•The settings are registered when the One-Touch Registration is pressed. This is convenient if you to need
print multiple times using the same setting.
•Press the Print Preview button to display the preview screen. You can check and make changes to the layout
in the preview screen.
•When you print to the edge of the roll width, the maximum length will be the lesser of 5.587 times the roll
paper width, or 18.0m.
12
Press Print to start printing.
Borderless Printing(Word)
Borderless Printing(Word)
Prints up to the border of the media. Photos and posters can be printed without worrying about margins.
1
Start Microsoft Word.
2
If Start imagePROGRAF Print Plug-In is displayed, click it.
3
Click Print from the imagePROGRAF Print Plug-In
toolbar/ribbon.
The Printing Wizard dialog box is displayed.
Important
•If you want to change the display to another file or application while the Printing Wizard is open, close the
Printing Wizard dialog box. Otherwise, you may not be able to change displays or operate the toolbar/
ribbon.
iPF785
Borderless Printing(Word)
User's Guide
Windows Software Print Plug-In for Oce
247
4
Click Borderless Printing.
5
A confirmation dialog box is displayed. If the data fills up the page, confirm that Continue using the plug-in is
selected in Choose how to proceed and press OK.
Note
•To adjust the data, select Return to application and press OK. Exit Print Plug-In for Office and return to the
application.
6
Select Roll Paper Width that is set in the printer.
7
Select layout.
Borderless Printing(Word)
iPF785
User's Guide
Windows Software Print Plug-In for Oce
248
8
Select Next.
9
Select Media Type.
10
Select Print Range from All Pages, Current Page, and Pages.
If Pages is selected, enter the number of pages.
11
Enter Copies.
Note
•When Print in Draft mode is selected, printing is fast but the print quality is poor.
•When Saturation is selected, you can print posters, etc., vividly.
•Press the One-Touch Registration button to register the settings. This is useful for multiple printing using the
same settings.
•Press the Print Preview button to display the preview screen. You can confirm and make changes to the lay-
out in the preview screen.
•The maximum length for Borderless Printing is the lesser of 5.587 times the roll paper width, or 18.0m.
12
Press Print to start printing.
Multi-Page Printing(Word)
Multi-Page Printing(Word)
Prints multiple pages as one page. You can print handouts into a single page, or print matter with many pages.
1
Start Microsoft Word.
2
If Start imagePROGRAF Print Plug-In is displayed, click it.
iPF785
Multi-Page Printing(Word)
User's Guide
Windows Software Print Plug-In for Oce
249
3
Click Print from the imagePROGRAF Print Plug-In
toolbar/ribbon.
The Printing Wizard dialog box is displayed.
Important
•If you want to change the display to another file or application while the Printing Wizard is open, close the
Printing Wizard dialog box. Otherwise, you may not be able to change displays or operate the toolbar/
ribbon.
4
Click Multi-Page Printing.
5
Select Roll Paper Width that is set in the printer.
6
Select layout from Layout Selection.
Multi-Page Printing(Word)
iPF785
User's Guide
Windows Software Print Plug-In for Oce
250
7
Select Next.
8
Select Media Type.
9
Select Print Range from All Pages, Current Page, and Pages.
If Pages is selected, enter the number of pages.
10
Enter Copies.
Note
•When Print in Draft mode is selected, printing is fast but the print quality is poor.
•When Saturation is selected, you can print posters, etc., vividly.
•The settings are registered when the One-Touch Registration is pressed. This is convenient if you to need
print multiple times using the same setting.
•Press the Print Preview button to display the preview screen. You can check and make changes to the layout
in the preview screen.
•The maximum length for Multi-Page Printing is the lesser of 5.587 times the roll paper width, or 18.0m.
11
Press Print to start printing.
Register the settings (Word)
Register the settings (Word)
If you are going to print multiple times using the same setting, you can select One-Touch Registration. Registered
settings can be recalled from Print Using Registered Settings.
1
Set up to the Print screen from Print Matching Roll Width,Borderless Printing or Multi-Page Printing of
Printing Menu.
Note
•Up to 20 items can be registered.
•The available settings are as follows.
•Print Matching Roll Width(Word) ➔P.245
•Borderless Printing(Word) ➔P.247
•Multi-Page Printing(Word) ➔P.249
iPF785
Register the settings (Word)
User's Guide
Windows Software Print Plug-In for Oce
251
2
Click the One-Touch Registration button.
3
Enter name in Name.
Up to 31 characters can be entered.
4
Click . The name you entered is displayed in Registered Settings.
5
Click OK, and return to the Print screen.
6
Click Print to print, and click Cancel to cancel the print.
Note
•Clicking Cancel in the Print screen will not delete the registered settings.
Print Using Registered Settings(Word)
Print Using Registered Settings(Word)
Prints using the registered settings.
1
Start Microsoft Word.
2
If Start imagePROGRAF Print Plug-In is displayed, click it.
3
Click Print from the imagePROGRAF Print Plug-In
toolbar/ribbon.
The Printing Wizard dialog box is displayed.
Print Using Registered Settings(Word)
iPF785
User's Guide
Windows Software Print Plug-In for Oce
252
Important
•If you want to change the display to another file or application while the Printing Wizard is open, close the
Printing Wizard dialog box. Otherwise, you may not be able to change displays or operate the toolbar/
ribbon.
4
Click Print Using Registered Settings.
5
Click the Nextbutton.
6
Select Media Type.
7
Select Print Range from All Pages, Current Page, or Pages.
If Pages is selected, enter the number of pages.
8
Enter Copies.
Note
•When Print in Draft mode is selected, printing is fast but the print quality is poor.
•When Saturation is selected, you can print posters, etc., vividly.
•Press the Print Preview button to display the preview screen. You can check and make changes to the layout
in the preview screen.
•The maximum print length when printing with the registered settings is the lesser of 5.587 times the roll paper
width, or 18.0m.
iPF785
Print Using Registered Settings(Word)
User's Guide
Windows Software Print Plug-In for Oce
253
9
Press Print to start printing.
Portrait Orientation/Landscape Orientation(Word)
Portrait Orientation/Landscape Orientation(Word)
Print to the edge of the roll width. You can print large exhibits and posters, or print the Landscape or Portrait Orienta-
tion Page Sizes made in the Large-Format Printing Wizard.
Create Page Size in Portrait or Landscape Orientation.
Use the Large-Format Printing Wizard to create portrait page sizes for Potrait Orientation, and landscape page sizes
for Landscape Orientation.
1
Start Microsoft Word.
2
If Start imagePROGRAF Print Plug-In is displayed, click it.
3
Click Paper Settings from the imagePROGRAF Print Plug-In toolbar/ribbon.
The Large-Format Printing Wizard dialog box is displayed.
Note
•If you want to change the display to another file or application while the Large-Format Printing Wizard is
open, close the Large-Format Printing Wizard dialog box. Otherwise, you may not be able to change dis-
plays or operate the toolbar/ribbon.
4
Click Portrait Orientation or Landscape Orientation.
Note
•The steps taken to create a Portrait Page Size will be used as an example to explain the procedure.
Portrait Orientation/Landscape Orientation(Word)
iPF785
User's Guide
Windows Software Print Plug-In for Oce
254
5
Adjust Length from the list-box or slide-bar.
6
Click the Create Page button.
7
ClickOK if the message is displayed.
8
Edit and create the document.
Note
•Printing is done in Print Matching Roll Width of the Printing Wizard. For details on Print Matching Roll
Width, see "Print Matching Roll Width(Word)." ➔P.245
Important
•The layout may collapse if you create a form using existing data. If that is the case, modify the data again.
To start from Microsoft PowerPoint
To start from Microsoft PowerPoint
Below are the steps to start Print Plug-In for Office from Microsoft PowerPoint.
1
Start Microsoft PowerPoint.
2
If Start imagePROGRAF Print Plug-In is displayed on the toolbar/
ribbon, click it.
iPF785
To start from Microsoft PowerPoint
User's Guide
Windows Software Print Plug-In for Oce
255
Important
•If the imagePROGRAF Print Plug-In toolbar/ribbon is not displayed, refer to the following.
•When Print Plug-In for Office is not displayed ➔P.240
3
Check that the imagePROGRAF Print Plug-In toolbar/ribbon
is displayed.
4
Click the buttons on the toolbar/ribbon according to the items you want to set.
Icon Contents
Menu
Displays the About, Help, and Special Settings dialog boxes. (See "Configuring Special
Settings.") ➔P.275
Printer list
Select Printer.
If you select Show All Printers, the imagePROGRAF printers will be displayed again. Se-
lect this when you want to display all printer drivers or update the display.
PrintButton
The print Wizard is displayed.
The settings Print Matching Roll Width, Borderless Printing, Multi-Page Printing, and
Print Using Registered Settings can be set.
Paper Settings Button
Large-Format Wizard is displayed.
Settings for Portrait or Landscape Orientation can be set.
Printing Wizard dialog box
Important
•If you want to change the display to another file or application while the Printing Wizard is open, close the
Printing Wizard dialog box. Otherwise, you may not be able to change displays or operate the toolbar/
ribbon.
Note
•If you open a password protected document as read-only, the Printing Wizard cannot be run.
To start from Microsoft PowerPoint
iPF785
User's Guide
Windows Software Print Plug-In for Oce
256
Large-Format Printing Wizard dialog box
Important
•If you want to change the display to another file or application while the Large-Format Printing Wizard is
open, close the Large-Format Printing Wizard dialog box. Otherwise, you may not be able to change dis-
plays or operate the toolbar/ribbon.
•The layout may collapse if you create a form using existing data. If that is the case, modify the data again.
Note
•If you open a password protected document as read-only, the Large-Format Printing Wizard cannot be run.
Remove the password protection.
Print Matching Roll Width(PowerPoint)
Print Matching Roll Width(PowerPoint)
Prints to the edge of the roll width. You can print large exhibits and posters, and also print Portrait and Landscape ori-
entations made in Large-Format Printing Wizard.
1
Start Microsoft PowerPoint.
2
If Start imagePROGRAF Print Plug-In is displayed, click it.
iPF785
Print Matching Roll Width(PowerPoint)
User's Guide
Windows Software Print Plug-In for Oce
257
3
Click Print from the imagePROGRAF Print Plug-In
toolbar/ribbon.
The Printing Wizard dialog box is displayed.
Important
•If you want to change the display to another file or application while the Printing Wizard is open, close the
Printing Wizard dialog box. Otherwise, you may not be able to change displays or operate the toolbar/
ribbon.
4
Click Print Matching Roll Width.
5
Select Roll Paper Width that is set in the printer.
6
Select image size.
7
Select layout.
Print Matching Roll Width(PowerPoint)
iPF785
User's Guide
Windows Software Print Plug-In for Oce
258
8
Select Next.
9
Select Media Type.
10
Select Print Range from All Slides, Current Slide, and Slides.
If Slides is selected, enter the slide number.
11
Enter Copies.
Note
•When Print in Draft mode is selected, printing is fast but the print quality is poor.
•When Saturation is selected, you can print posters, etc., vividly.
•The settings are registered when the One-Touch Registration is pressed. This is convenient if you to need
print multiple times using the same setting.
•Press the Print Preview button to display the preview screen. You can check and make changes to the layout
in the preview screen.
•When you print to the edge of the roll width, the maximum length will be the lesser of 14.22 times the roll
paper width, or 18.0m.
12
Press Print to start printing.
Borderless Printing(PowerPoint)
Borderless Printing(PowerPoint)
Prints up to the border of the media. Photos and posters can be printed without worrying about margins.
1
Start Microsoft PowerPoint.
2
If Start imagePROGRAF Print Plug-In is displayed, click it.
iPF785
Borderless Printing(PowerPoint)
User's Guide
Windows Software Print Plug-In for Oce
259
3
Click Print from the imagePROGRAF Print Plug-In
toolbar/ribbon.
The Printing Wizard dialog box is displayed.
Important
•If you want to change the display to another file or application while the Printing Wizard is open, close the
Printing Wizard dialog box. Otherwise, you may not be able to change displays or operate the toolbar/
ribbon.
4
Click Borderless Printing.
5
A confirmation dialog box is displayed. If the data fills up the page, confirm that Continue using the plug-in is
selected in Choose how to proceed and press OK.
Note
•To adjust the data, select Return to application and press OK. Exit Print Plug-In for Office and return to the
application.
Borderless Printing(PowerPoint)
iPF785
User's Guide
Windows Software Print Plug-In for Oce
260
6
Select Roll Paper Width that is set in the printer.
7
Select layout.
8
Select Next.
9
Select Media Type.
10
Select Print Range from All Slides, Current Slide, and Slides.
If Slides is selected, enter the slide number.
11
Enter Copies.
Note
•When Print in Draft mode is selected, printing is fast but the print quality is poor.
•When Saturation is selected, you can print posters, etc., vividly.
•Press the One-Touch Registration button to register the settings. This is useful for multiple printing using the
same settings.
•Press the Print Preview button to display the preview screen. You can confirm and make changes to the lay-
out in the preview screen.
•The maximum length for Borderless Printing is the lesser of 14.22 times the roll paper width, or 18.0m.
iPF785
Borderless Printing(PowerPoint)
User's Guide
Windows Software Print Plug-In for Oce
261
12
Press Print to start printing.
Multi-Page Printing(PowerPoint)
Multi-Page Printing(PowerPoint)
Prints multiple pages as one page. You can print handouts into a single page, or print matter with many pages.
1
Start Microsoft PowerPoint.
2
If Start imagePROGRAF Print Plug-In is displayed, click it.
3
Click Print from the imagePROGRAF Print Plug-In
toolbar/ribbon.
The Printing Wizard dialog box is displayed.
Important
•If you want to change the display to another file or application while the Printing Wizard is open, close the
Printing Wizard dialog box. Otherwise, you may not be able to change displays or operate the toolbar/
ribbon.
4
Click Multi-Page Printing.
5
Select Roll Paper Width that is set in the printer.
6
Select layout from Layout Selection.
Multi-Page Printing(PowerPoint)
iPF785
User's Guide
Windows Software Print Plug-In for Oce
262
7
Select Next.
8
Select Media Type.
9
Select Print Range from All Slides, Current Slide, and Slides.
If Slides is selected, enter the slide number.
10
Enter Copies.
Note
•When Print in Draft mode is selected, printing is fast but the print quality is poor.
•When Saturation is selected, you can print posters, etc., vividly.
•The settings are registered when the One-Touch Registration is pressed. This is convenient if you to need
print multiple times using the same setting.
•Press the Print Preview button to display the preview screen. You can check and make changes to the layout
in the preview screen.
•The maximum length for Multi-Page Printing is the lesser of 14.22 times the roll paper width, or 18.0m.
11
Press Print to start printing.
Register the settings (PowerPoint)
Register the settings (PowerPoint)
If you are going to print multiple times using the same setting, you can select One-Touch Registration. Registered
settings can be recalled from Print Using Registered Settings.
1
Set up to the Print screen from Print Matching Roll Width,Borderless Printing or Multi-Page Printing of
Printing Menu.
Note
•Up to 20 items can be registered.
•The available settings are as follows.
•Print Matching Roll Width(PowerPoint) ➔P.257
•Borderless Printing(PowerPoint) ➔P.259
•Multi-Page Printing(PowerPoint) ➔P.262
iPF785
Register the settings (PowerPoint)
User's Guide
Windows Software Print Plug-In for Oce
263
2
Click the One-Touch Registration button.
3
Enter name in Name.
Up to 31 characters can be entered.
4
Click . The name you entered is displayed in Registered Settings.
5
Click OK, and return to the Print screen.
6
Click Print to print, and click Cancel to cancel the print.
Note
•Clicking Cancel in the Print screen will not delete the registered settings.
Print Using Registered Settings(PowerPoint)
Print Using Registered Settings(PowerPoint)
Prints using the registered settings.
1
Start Microsoft PowerPoint.
2
If Start imagePROGRAF Print Plug-In is displayed, click it.
3
Click Print from the imagePROGRAF Print Plug-In
toolbar/ribbon.
The Printing Wizard dialog box is displayed.
Print Using Registered Settings(PowerPoint)
iPF785
User's Guide
Windows Software Print Plug-In for Oce
264
Important
•If you want to change the display to another file or application while the Printing Wizard is open, close the
Printing Wizard dialog box. Otherwise, you may not be able to change displays or operate the toolbar/
ribbon.
4
Click Print Using Registered Settings.
5
Click the Nextbutton.
6
Select Media Type.
7
Select Print Range from All Slides, Current Slide, and Slides.
If Slides is selected, enter the slide number.
8
Enter Copies.
Note
•When Print in Draft mode is selected, printing is fast but the print quality is poor.
•When Saturation is selected, you can print posters, etc., vividly.
•Press the Print Preview button to display the preview screen. You can check and make changes to the layout
in the preview screen.
•The maximum print length when printing with the registered settings is the lesser of 14.22 times the roll paper
width, or 18.0m.
iPF785
Print Using Registered Settings(PowerPoint)
User's Guide
Windows Software Print Plug-In for Oce
265
9
Press Print to start printing.
Portrait Orientation/Landscape Orientation(PowerPoint)
Portrait Orientation/Landscape Orientation(PowerPoint)
Print to the edge of the roll width. You can print large exhibits and posters, or print the Landscape or Portrait Orienta-
tion Page Sizes made in the Large-Format Printing Wizard.
Create Page Size in Portrait or Landscape Orientation.
Use the Large-Format Printing Wizard to create portrait page sizes for Potrait Orientation, and landscape page sizes
for Landscape Orientation.
1
Start Microsoft PowerPoint.
2
If Start imagePROGRAF Print Plug-In is displayed, click it.
3
Click Paper Settings from the imagePROGRAF Print
Plug-In toolbar/ribbon.
The Large-Format Printing Wizard dialog box is dis-
played.
Important
•If you want to change the display to another file or application while the Large-Format Printing Wizard is
open, close the Large-Format Printing Wizard dialog box. Otherwise, you may not be able to change dis-
plays or operate the toolbar/ribbon.
4
Click Portrait Orientation or Landscape Orientation.
Note
•The steps taken to create a Portrait Page Size will be used as an example to explain the procedure.
Portrait Orientation/Landscape Orientation(PowerPoint)
iPF785
User's Guide
Windows Software Print Plug-In for Oce
266
5
Adjust Length from the list-box or slide-bar.
6
Click the Create Page button.
7
ClickOK if the message is displayed.
8
Edit and create the document.
Important
•The layout may collapse if you create a form using existing data. If that is the case, modify the data again.
Note
•Printing is done in Print Matching Roll Width of the Printing Wizard. For details on Print Matching Roll
Width, see "Print Matching Roll Width(PowerPoint)." ➔P.257
To start from Microsoft Excel
To start from Microsoft Excel
Below are the steps to start Print Plug-In for Office from Microsoft Excel.
1
Start Microsoft Excel.
2
If Start imagePROGRAF Print Plug-In is displayed on the toolbar/
ribbon, click it.
iPF785
To start from Microsoft Excel
User's Guide
Windows Software Print Plug-In for Oce
267
Important
•If the imagePROGRAF Print Plug-In toolbar/ribbon is not displayed, refer to the following.
•When Print Plug-In for Office is not displayed ➔P.240
3
Check that the imagePROGRAF Print Plug-In toolbar/ribbon is
displayed.
4
Click the buttons on the toolbar/ribbon according to the items you want to set.
Icon Contents
Menu
Displays the About, Help, and Special Settings dialog boxes. (See "Configuring Special
Settings.") ➔P.275
Printer list
Select Printer.
If you select Show All Printers, the imagePROGRAF printers will be displayed again. Se-
lect this when you want to display all printer drivers or update the display.
PrintButton
The print Wizard is displayed.
The settings Print Entire Sheet and Print Selected Area can be set.
Printing Wizard dialog box
Important
•If you want to change the display to another file or application while the Printing Wizard is open, close the
Printing Wizard dialog box. Otherwise, you may not be able to change displays or operate the toolbar/
ribbon.
•The Printing Wizard will not start if you click the Print button on the toolbar/ribbon while editing a cell.
•When more than one worksheet is selected, the Printing Wizard cannot be run. Select only one worksheet
and click Print again.
•When an object is selected, the Printing Wizard is not started if you click the Print button on the toolbar/
ribbon.
•If the paper size in Excel is blank, the Printing Wizard cannot be run. From the File menu in Excel, select
Page Setup and check Paper size.
To start from Microsoft Excel
iPF785
User's Guide
Windows Software Print Plug-In for Oce
268
Note
•If you click the Print button with a graph selected, a message dialog box will appear asking if you want to
continue printing. If you click No, you will return to the application.
•If you click the Print button with a page break set, a message dialog box will appear asking if you want to
continue printing. If you click No, you will return to the application. If you do not use the set page break, check
the page break preview and change the setting.
•If you click the Print button with a page range set, a message dialog box will appear asking if you want to
continue printing. If you click No, you will return to the application. If you do not use the set page range, check
the page break preview and change the setting.
•If you click the Print button with a worksheet or cell protected, a message dialog box will appear asking if you
want to continue printing. If you click No, you will return to the application. If you want to change the setting,
remove the protection from the worksheet or cell.
Print Entire Sheet(Excel)
Print Entire Sheet(Excel)
For resizing the entire sheet to fit the roll width. Choose this option to enlarge the currently displayed sheet before print-
ing.
1
Start Microsoft Excel.
2
If Start imagePROGRAF Print Plug-In is displayed, click it.
3
Click Print from the imagePROGRAF Print Plug-In toolbar/ribbon.
Important
•When more than one worksheet is selected, the Printing Wizard cannot be run. Select only one worksheet
and click Print again.
If a print area is set, a confirmation message dialog box will ap-
pear.
To print the entire sheet, cancel the setting of the print area.
The Printing Wizard dialog box is displayed.
iPF785
Print Entire Sheet(Excel)
User's Guide
Windows Software Print Plug-In for Oce
269
4
Click Print Entire Sheet.
A message will appear informing you that analysis is in
progress.
The Layout menu will appear automatically.
Note
•If data analysis requires time, a message dialog will appear. If you select No, you will return to the application.
5
Select Roll Paper Width that is set in the printer.
6
Select image size.
7
Select layout.
8
To configure Binding, click the Binding Settings button.
Refer to "Configuring Binding (Excel)" ➔P.274 for details on the procedure for configuring Binding.
Print Entire Sheet(Excel)
iPF785
User's Guide
Windows Software Print Plug-In for Oce
270
9
Select Next.
10
Select Media Type.
11
Enter Copies.
12
If the upper and lower margins are too wide, check No Spaces at Top or Bottom (Conserve Paper).
The upper and lower margins can be checked in Print Preview.
Note
•When Print in Draft mode is selected, printing is fast but the print quality is poor.
•When Saturation is selected, you can print posters, etc., vividly.
•Press the Print Preview button to display the preview screen. You can check and make changes to the layout
in the preview screen.
•When you print to the edge of the roll width, the maximum print length is 18.0m.
13
Press Print to start printing.
Important
•If divided into plural pages, try reducing the data size or the range you select.
•You cannot run Print or Print Preview if you select it for a worksheet with no data displayed.
Print Selected Area(Excel)
Print Selected Area(Excel)
For resizing the selected range of cells to fit the roll width. Choose this option to enlarge a particular part of the sheet
before printing.
1
Start Microsoft Excel.
2
If Start imagePROGRAF Print Plug-In is displayed, click it.
3
Click Print from the imagePROGRAF Print Plug-In toolbar/ribbon.
Important
•When more than one worksheet is selected, the Printing Wizard cannot be run. Select only one worksheet
and click Print again.
iPF785
Print Selected Area(Excel)
User's Guide
Windows Software Print Plug-In for Oce
271
If a print area is set, a confirmation message dialog box will ap-
pear.
To print the selected area, cancel the setting of the print area.
The Printing Wizard dialog box is displayed.
4
Click Print Selected Area.
Important
•If only one cell is selected, Print Selected Area cannot be selected.
A message will appear informing you that analysis is in
progress.
Print Selected Area(Excel)
iPF785
User's Guide
Windows Software Print Plug-In for Oce
272
The Layout menu will appear automatically.
Important
•If the range selected in Excel 2007 or later is too large, it will not be possible to analyze the data. Select a
smaller range and then run the analysis.
Note
•If data analysis requires time, a message dialog will appear. If you select No, you will return to the application.
5
Select Roll Paper Width that is set in the printer.
6
Select image size.
7
Select layout.
8
To configure Binding, click the Binding Settings button.
Refer to "Configuring Binding (Excel)" ➔P.274 for details on the procedure for configuring Binding.
9
Select Next.
10
Select Media Type.
11
Enter Copies.
iPF785
Print Selected Area(Excel)
User's Guide
Windows Software Print Plug-In for Oce
273
12
If the upper and lower margins are too wide, check No Spaces at Top or Bottom (Conserve Paper).
The upper and lower margins can be checked in Print Preview.
Note
•When Print in Draft mode is selected, printing is fast but the print quality is poor.
•When Saturation is selected, you can print posters, etc., vividly.
•Press the Print Preview button to display the preview screen. You can check and make changes to the layout
in the preview screen.
•When you print to the edge of the roll width, the maximum print length is 18.0m.
13
Press Print to start printing.
Important
•If divided into plural pages, try reducing the data size or the range you select.
•You cannot run Print or Print Preview if you select it for a worksheet with no data displayed.
Configuring Binding (Excel)
Configuring Binding (Excel)
You can configure Binding margins for binding printouts.
1
Configure the settings up to Layout Selection in the Layout screen in Print Entire Sheet or Print Selected
Area.
Refer to "Print Entire Sheet(Excel)" ➔P.269 and "Print Selected Area(Excel)" ➔P.271 for the configuration
methods.
2
Click the Binding Settings button.
Important
•You cannot click the Binding Settings button in the following situations.
•When the Image Size is set to a value smaller than 100%
•When a graph is selected
•When page breaks have been set
•When a sheet or cell is protected
Open the Binding Settings dialog box.
3
If the Binding checkbox is not checked, select it to turn binding on.
4
Select Binding Edge.
5
Select Binding Margin.
Conguring Binding (Excel)
iPF785
User's Guide
Windows Software Print Plug-In for Oce
274
6
Click the OK button.
Return to the Layout screen.
Check that the Binding settings are applied in the pre-
view screen.
7
Configure the settings in the Printing Wizard dialog box.
Configuring Special Settings
Configuring Special Settings
You can configure Special Settings from the imagePROGRAF Print Plug-In toolbar.
1
Click imagePROGRAF in the toolbar, and select Spe-
cial Settings.
2
Turn the checkbox for the item you want to change on or off.
Item Details
Show progress indicator during plug-in startup When this setting is off, hides the progress indicator that appears while the
plug-in is starting up.
Center sheets and print areas When this setting is off, printing is performed without changing the position.
When this setting is on, printing is performed with the top, bottom, left, and
right margins layed out equally. When this setting is off, printing is performed
without changing the position.
This function is only valid in Microsoft Excel.
Ensure image quality when creating page sizes When this setting is on, documents are created at the maximum size. This
reduces the enlargement ratio during actual printing, which minimizes degra-
dation of the quality of photos, etc.
This function is only valid in Microsoft PowerPoint.
Correct the print area when analyzing For data that cannot be processed with usual data analysis, the print area is
corrected and then the data is processed. When data analysis fails, you may
be able to print by turning on this checkbox.
This function is only valid in Microsoft Excel.
3
Click OK to close the Special Settings dialog box.
iPF785
Conguring Special Settings
User's Guide
Windows Software Print Plug-In for Oce
275
iPF785
User's Guide
Basic Printing Workow 15
Enhanced Printing Options 31
Windows Software 157
Mac OS Software
Printer Driver ........................................................................................... 278
Preview .................................................................................................... 296
Free Layout ............................................................................................. 319
Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy ............................................... 344
➔Printmonitor ....................................................................................... 513
➔Media Configuration Tool ................................................................... 419
Handling and Use of Paper 361
Control Panel 435
Printer Parts 475
Network Setting 489
Print Job Management 509
Adjustments for Better Print Quality 571
Maintenance and Consumables 587
Troubleshooting 625
Error Message 655
Specications 679
Appendix 683
imagePROGRAF
Mac OS Software
277
Printer Driver
Printer Driver
Printer Driver Settings ........................................................................................................................................................ 278
Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver ......................................................................................................................... 279
Conrming Print Settings .................................................................................................................................................. 281
Checking the Layout in a Preview Before Printing ................................................................................................. 281
Using Favorites ...................................................................................................................................................................... 282
Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from Applications ...............................................................................282
Main Pane ................................................................................................................................................................................. 283
Paper Detailed Settings Dialog Box .........................................................................................................................286
View set. Dialog Box for the Printing Application ............................................................................................. 288
Matching pane ................................................................................................................................................................... 288
Color Settings Pane: Color .......................................................................................................................................... 291
Object Adjustment dialog box: Color ....................................................................................................................... 292
Color Settings Pane: Monochrome ..........................................................................................................................292
Object Adjustment dialog box: Monochrome .......................................................................................................293
Page Setup Pane ................................................................................................................................................................... 294
Additional Settings Pane .................................................................................................................................................... 295
Printer Driver Settings
Printer Driver Settings
For instructions on accessing the Mac OS printer driver, refer to the following topics.
•
Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from Applications ➔P.282
For information on the Mac OS printer driver settings, refer to the following topics.
•
Main Pane ➔P.283
You can specify the media type, color processing, print quality, print preview, and other settings. Choose Easy
Settings to specify basic print settings based on the printing application or Advanced Settings to complete more
detailed settings as desired.
•
Paper Detailed Settings Dialog Box ➔P.286
Printer Driver Settings
iPF785
User's Guide
Mac OS Software Printer Driver
278
•
View set. Dialog Box for the Printing Application ➔P.288
•
Color Settings Pane: Color ➔P.291
•
Object Adjustment dialog box: Color ➔P.292
•
Matching pane ➔P.288
•
Color Settings Pane: Monochrome ➔P.292
•
Object Adjustment dialog box: Monochrome ➔P.293
•
Page Setup Pane ➔P.294
You can specify the page size of the original, borderless printing, enlargement or reduction, the orientation, the
paper size and source, and automatic cutting.
•
Additional Settings Pane ➔P.295
You can configure the method of outputting print jobs to the printer.
With the imagePROGRAF Free Layout feature, you can arrange originals from various source applications on a single
page before printing. For details, see "Free Layout." ➔P.319
With the imagePROGRAF Preview feature, you can check the layout before printing and adjust layout or size settings
while viewing a preview screen. For details, see "Preview." ➔P.296
With the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy feature, you can automatically enlarge and print scanned originals
from a Color imageRUNNER. For details, see "Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy." ➔P.344
Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver
Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver
If you have replaced the paper, you must complete the following settings in the printer driver.
1
This sets the BFormat for and CPaper Size.
Note
•The configuration method varies depending on the OS
and application software you are using.
If Page Setup is displayed in the application menu, the
settings are configured by opening the Page Attributes
dialog box from Page Setup.
If it is not displayed, the settings are configured in the upper
part of the printer driver displayed when you select Print
from the application software menu.
2
Select the printer in the APrinter list.
3
Choose the original size in the FPaper Size list.
4
If you configured the settings using the Page Attributes dialog box, click FOK to close the dialog box, and
then select Print from the application software menu.
iPF785
Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver
User's Guide
Mac OS Software Printer Driver
279
5
Access the Main pane.
6
In the AMedia Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded.
7
Access the Page Setup pane.
8
In the APaper Source list, select how paper is supplied.
9
If Roll Paper is selected in APaper Source, select the width of the roll paper that is loaded in BRoll Width.
Note
•A variety of settings are available in the printer driver to suit different printing applications.
For details on available printing conditions, see "Printer Driver Settings ." ➔P.278
Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver
iPF785
User's Guide
Mac OS Software Printer Driver
280
Confirming Print Settings
Confirming Print Settings
The ways to confirm what printing conditions have been specified are as follows.
Checking a print preview
You can check an image of the original just as it will be printed.
Confirming the image of print jobs beforehand helps prevent printing errors.
For details on print previews, see "Checking the Layout in a Preview Before Printing." ➔P.144
Checking the Layout in a Preview Before Printing
Checking the Layout in a Preview Before Printing
This topic describes how to check the layout before printing using the Canon imagePROGRAF Preview function.
1
Choose Print in the application menu.
2
Access the Main pane.
3
Select the OPrint Preview check box.
4
Click MPrint.
iPF785
Conrming Print Settings
User's Guide
Mac OS Software Printer Driver
281
5
The Canon imagePROGRAF Preview window is dis-
played.
6
Check the layout and adjust settings in the Canon imagePROGRAF Preview window as desired.
7
Print from the Canon imagePROGRAF Preview menu.
Note
•For details on imagePROGRAF Preview functions, see "Preview." ➔P.296
Using Favorites
Using Favorites
You can use the Presets function in Mac OS for favorite-based printing.
Note
•In the printing dialog box, click Save As in the Presets list to save the current print settings. This is a standard feature
of the operating system. For details, refer to the Mac OS documentation.
Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from Applications
Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from Applications
1
In the application software, select Print from the File menu to display the dialog box for printing conditions.
Note
•This dialog box includes basic printing options and enables you to choose the printer, specify the range of
pages, number of copies, and so on.
2
Select the printer in the Printer list.
Using Favorites
iPF785
User's Guide
Mac OS Software Printer Driver
282
3
Click Print to start printing.
As shown in the following illustration, you can switch to
other panes in this dialog box to complete settings for
various methods of printing, including enlarged and re-
duced printing, borderless printing, and so on.
Main Pane
Main Pane
The following settings are available on the Main pane. For details on settings items, refer to the printer driver help.
Note
•On the Main pane, choose Easy Settings to specify basic print settings based on the print target, or switch to Ad-
vanced Settings to complete more detailed settings as desired.
Common Items
•AMedia Type
Select the paper type.
iPF785
Main Pane
User's Guide
Mac OS Software Printer Driver
283
For information on the types of paper the printer supports, refer to the Paper Reference Guide. (See "Displaying
the Paper Reference Guide.") ➔P.366
•CSet
Displays Paper Detailed Settings. You can configure the printing settings to match the type of media, such as the
ink drying time.
•
Paper Detailed Settings Dialog Box ➔P.286
•OPrint Preview
When the check box is selected, imagePROGRAF Preview is launched before printing.
This allows you to check on-screen previews of documents before printing.
Important
•When Free Layout is selected on the Page Setup panel, Free Layout is disabled.
•
Checking the Layout in a Preview Before Printing ➔P.144
Configuration using Easy Settings
•EPrint Target
Choose presets that match the type of document to be printed.
•
Printing Photos and Images ➔P.33
•
Printing Office Documents ➔P.37
•FPrint Quality
Choose the level of print quality.
•GView set.
Click to display the View set. dialog box, which enables you to confirm the settings for the selected item from the
EPrint Target list or change the order of items listed in EPrint Target.
•
View set. Dialog Box for the Printing Application ➔P.288
Main Pane
iPF785
User's Guide
Mac OS Software Printer Driver
284
Configuration using Advanced Settings
•EPrint Priority
Choose the graphic elements that you want to emphasize for printing.
•
Giving Priority to Particular Graphic Elements and Colors for Printing ➔P.58
•FPrint Quality
Choose the level of print quality.
•
Giving Priority to Particular Graphic Elements and Colors for Printing ➔P.58
•NHighest quality
When the check box is selected, printing is performing focusing on quality. Printing takes longer and consumes
more ink than in other modes, but this mode offers superior printing quality.
Note
•If you set FPrint Quality to High, you can select NHighest quality. However, depending on AMedia Type,
you may not be able to select NHighest quality.
•KEconomy Printing
When this mode is selected, you can print with less ink consumed. However, print quality is lower than in regular
printing. Select this option to save ink, such as when printing to check drawings. Depending on the AMedia Type
and FPrint Quality settings, this mode may not be available.
Note
•If you set FPrint Quality to Fast, you can select KEconomy Printing. However, depending on AMedia Type,
you may not be able to select KEconomy Printing.
•RFast Graphic Process
Select this option to print faster than usual, when possible.
•HColor Mode
Choose the color mode.
•
Giving Priority to Particular Graphic Elements and Colors for Printing ➔P.58
iPF785
Main Pane
User's Guide
Mac OS Software Printer Driver
285
•ISet
Click to display the Color Settings dialog box for more advanced color settings.
•
Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver ➔P.51
•JUnidirectional Printing
Select this checkbox to prevent problems such as misaligned lines and improve the print quality. However, the
printing speed becomes slower.
•QThicken Fine Lines
Select this check box to print fine lines more distinctly.
•PSharpen Text
Select this check box to print text more sharply.
•SReduce Print Unevenness
Select this checkbox for two-pass printing to reduce color shading.
This option is displayed if you have selected Plain Paper in Media Type and Office Document in Print Priority.
Paper Detailed Settings Dialog Box
Paper Detailed Settings Dialog Box
The Paper Detailed Settings dialog box offers the following settings. For details on settings items, refer to the printer
driver help.
Note
•To display the Paper Detailed Settings dialog box, on the Main pane, click Set by Media Type. (See "Main
Pane .") ➔P.283
AMedia Type
The paper selected with Media Type of the Main panel is displayed.
For information on the types of paper the printer supports, refer to the Paper Reference Guide. (See "Displaying the
Paper Reference Guide.") ➔P.366
BDrying Time
Specify the time that the printer waits for ink to dry, as needed. The Between Pages setting is only valid for rolls.
Paper Detailed Settings Dialog Box
iPF785
User's Guide
Mac OS Software Printer Driver
286
•CBetween Pages
You can set the time to wait after printing 1 document page until ejecting the paper. Since waiting time is required
for ink to dry before a roll is cut, you can deliver paper in the Output Stacker with the ink dried even if Cutting
Mode is set to Automatic.
Setting Item Details
Printer Default The setting of the control panel of the printer is applied.
None Paper is ejected immediately after printing completes.
30 sec. / 1 min. / 3 min. / 5 min. / 10
min. / 30 min. / 60 min.
Paper is ejected when the set time elapses after printing completes.
•DBetween Scans
You can set the time to wait after printing 1 line on a page until printing the next line. Set this to avoid bleeding or
color unevenness such as when bleeding occurs on a page or when color unevenness occurs during borderless
printing.
Setting Item Details
Printer Default The setting of the control panel of the printer is applied.
None The next line is printed immediately after a line is printed.
1 sec. / 3 sec. / 5 sec. / 7 sec. / 9
sec.
The next line is printed when the set time elapses after a line is printed.
* Increase the time according to the occurrence condition of bleeding or unevenness.
ERoll Paper Margin for Safety
You can specify the length of a margin on the leading edge of paper to ensure that paper susceptible to curling is held
firmly against the Platen.
•FNear End Margin
Specify the length of the Near End Margin (the leading edge margin) of the roll, as needed.
Setting Item Details
Printer Default The setting of the control panel of the printer is applied.
3 mm (0.12 in) The document is printed in the standard size.
* Select this when you do not have any problems in printing.
20 mm (0.8 in) Select this when rubbing against the printhead occurs such as when using paper that tends
to curl.
GCut Speed
Select the speed of automatic cutting, as needed. You can adjust this setting if paper is not cut well when automatic
cutting is used.
Setting Item Details
Printer Default The setting of the control panel of the printer is applied.
High Speed When the Standard setting does not result in a clean cut surface, select this.
Standard Select this when you do not have any problems in automatic cutting.
Low Speed This helps prevent adhesive from sticking to the cutter and keeps the cutter sharp if you se-
lect it when using adhesive paper.
HAutomatic Cutting
Set whether to perform roll cutting automatically or print a cut line.
iPF785
Paper Detailed Settings Dialog Box
User's Guide
Mac OS Software Printer Driver
287
The following settings are available for automatic cutting.
Setting Item Details
Printer Default The setting of the control panel of the printer is applied.
None After printing completes, the roll is not cut per page, and the next page of data is printed
successively.
Print Cut Guideline After printing completes, a line is printed per page, and the next page of data is printed suc-
cessively.
JMirror
Specify whether to print a mirror image, as needed. Select this option to print a version of the document or image with
the left and right sides inverted.
View set. Dialog Box for the Printing Application
View set. Dialog Box for the Printing Application
In the View set. dialog box, you can check details of the selected printing application.
Note
•To display the View set. dialog box, on the Main pane, click View set. by Print Target. (See "Main Pane .") ➔P.283
•APrint Target
Shows all Print Target options (settings items for the printing application).
•BName
Identifies the item selected in Print Target by its name and an icon.
•CDetails
Here, you can confirm detailed settings values for each item selected in the Print Target list.
Matching pane
Matching pane
On the Matching pane, you can specify color matching to compensate for differences in the appearance of colors on
various devices.
Important
•The Matching pane is not displayed when No color correction or Monochrome is selected in Color Mode.
View set. Dialog Box for the Printing Application
iPF785
User's Guide
Mac OS Software Printer Driver
288
Note
•To display the Matching pane, on the Main pane click Color Settings by Color Mode in Advanced Settings, and
then click the Matching tab. (See "Main Pane .") ➔P.283
Driver Matching Mode
The following options are available when you select Driver Matching Mode in the AMatching Mode list.
•AMatching Mode
Select the color matching mode to use, as desired.
Normally, select Driver Matching Mode. For color matching based on ICC profiles, select ICC Matching Mode
depending on your color matching system.
•BMatching Method
Select the color matching method that suits the document to be printed. Various BMatching Method options are
available depending on your selection in AMatching Mode.
•EGamma
You can adjust the gradation of intermediate tones in an image.
2.2 is normally selected. If you want a softer impression than 2.2, select 1.8.
iPF785
Matching pane
User's Guide
Mac OS Software Printer Driver
289
ICC Matching Mode
The following options are available when you select ICC Matching Mode, in the AMatching Mode list.
Note
•To display the Matching pane, on the Main pane, click Color Settings by Color Mode in Advanced Settings, and
then click the Matching tab. (See "Main Pane .") ➔P.283
•AMatching Mode
Select the color matching mode to use, as desired.
•BInput Profile Settings
You can choose Input Profile.
Various options are available depending on your selected AMatching Mode.
•CMatching Method
You can choose CMatching Method.
Various options are available depending on your selected AMatching Mode.
•DPrinter Profile Settings
Specify the printer profile as desired.
We recommend that you select an ICC profile created using commercially available profile creation software in
order to perform color management accurately on paper other than genuine Canon paper and feed confirmed pa-
per.
The created ICC profile needs to be saved in the following folder on the computer you are using.
/user/(user name)/library/ColorSync/Profiles folder
Note
•For details on settings items, see "Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver." ➔P.51
Matching pane
iPF785
User's Guide
Mac OS Software Printer Driver
290
Color Settings Pane: Color
Color Settings Pane: Color
In general, make any needed adjustments to the color of documents in the application used to create them. However, if
the color tone as printed is not as you expected, you can also adjust the color in the printer driver.
If the color tone as printed is not as you expected, you can adjust it on the Color Adjustment pane.
Note
•To display the Color Adjustment pane, on the Main pane click Color Settings by Color Mode in Advanced Settings.
(See "Main Pane .") ➔P.283
•For details on settings items, see "Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver." ➔P.51
•ASample Type
Choose a sample image from Standard, Portrait, Landscape, or Graphics.
•BView Color Pattern
Select this checkbox to display the color pattern.
•CApply to Sample
Select this checkbox to apply the changed settings to the sample image.
•DCyan/EMagenta/FYellow
Correct color tones by adjusting the levels of each color.
•GGray Tone
Adjust the color tone of grays as desired. Choose Cool (tinged with blue) or Warm (tinged with red).
•HBrightness
Adjust the overall image brightness as desired. You can adjust the brightness if the printed document is lighter or
darker than the original image (that is, the original photo that was scanned or the original graphic as it appears on
the computer screen).
•IContrast
Adjust the contrast of the darkest and lightest portions relative to each other, as desired. Increasing the Contrast
makes images sharper, and reducing the Contrast softens images.
•JSaturation
Adjust the color intensity as desired. Increasing the Saturation setting makes colors more vivid, and reducing the
Saturation makes colors more subdued.
•KObject Adjustment
Select this option to display the Object Adjustment dialog box, in which you can specify objects subject to color
adjustment.
iPF785
Color Settings Pane: Color
User's Guide
Mac OS Software Printer Driver
291
•
Object Adjustment dialog box: Color ➔P.292
Object Adjustment dialog box: Color
Object Adjustment dialog box: Color
In the Object Adjustment dialog box, you can specify what type of print jobs to apply color adjustment to. If an original
comprises images, graphics, and text, you can specify which portion to apply color adjustment to.
Note
•To display the Object Adjustment dialog box, click Object Adjustment on the Color Adjustment panel.
•AImages
Select this option to apply color adjustment to image areas, such as photos.
•BGraphics
Select this option to apply color adjustment to graphics, such as lines and circles.
•CText
Select this option to apply color adjustment to text.
Color Settings Pane: Monochrome
Color Settings Pane: Monochrome
On the Color Adjustment pane for monochrome printing, you can adjust the brightness and contrast.
Object Adjustment dialog box: Color
iPF785
User's Guide
Mac OS Software Printer Driver
292
Note
•To display the Color Adjustment pane, on the Main pane, click Color Settings in Advanced Settings. (See "Main
Pane .") ➔P.283
•For details on settings items, see "Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver." ➔P.51
•ASample Type
Choose a sample image from Standard, Portrait, Landscape, or Graphics.
•BView Color Pattern
Select this checkbox to display the color pattern.
•CApply to Sample
Select this checkbox to apply the changed settings to the sample image.
•DCyan/EMagenta/FYellow
Not available.
•GGray Tone
Not available.
•HBrightness
Adjust the overall image brightness as desired. You can adjust the brightness if the printed document is lighter or
darker than the original image (that is, the original photo that was scanned or the original graphic as it appears on
the computer screen).
•IContrast
Adjust the contrast of the darkest and lightest portions relative to each other, as desired. Increasing the IContrast
makes images sharper, and reducing the IContrast softens images.
•JSaturation
Not available.
•KObject Adjustment
Select this option to display the Object Adjustment dialog box, in which you can specify objects subject to color
adjustment.
•
Object Adjustment dialog box: Monochrome ➔P.293
Object Adjustment dialog box: Monochrome
Object Adjustment dialog box: Monochrome
In the Object Adjustment dialog box, you can specify what type of print jobs to apply color adjustment to. If an original
comprises images, graphics, and text, you can specify which portion to apply color adjustment to.
iPF785
Object Adjustment dialog box: Monochrome
User's Guide
Mac OS Software Printer Driver
293
Note
•To display the Object Adjustment dialog box, click Object Adjustment on the Color Adjustment panel.
•AImages
Select this option to apply color adjustment to image areas, such as photos.
•BGraphics
Select this option to apply color adjustment to graphics, such as lines and circles.
•CText
Select this option to apply color adjustment to text.
Page Setup Pane
Page Setup Pane
The following settings are available on the Page Setup pane. For details on settings items, refer to the printer driver
help.
•APaper Source
Choose how paper is supplied.
Options displayed in the list vary depending on the selection in AMedia Type in the Main pane.
•BRoll Width
Select the paper width of the roll loaded in the printer.
•DEnlarged/Reduced Printing
Select this checkbox to choose the following options.
•
Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width ➔P.67
•
Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value ➔P.71
•FFit Roll Paper Width
Resizes the document image to match the roll width.
•GScaling
Resizes the document image based on a specified scaling value. Enter a value in a range of 5–600.
•HBorderless Printing
Borderless printing is available if roll paper is selected in the APaper Source list.
Page Setup Pane
iPF785
User's Guide
Mac OS Software Printer Driver
294
Activate this setting for borderless printing to match the size and width of the paper.
•
Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width ➔P.90
•
Borderless Printing at Actual Size ➔P.80
•JPrint Centered
Select this checkbox to print document images in the center of the paper.
•
Printing Originals Centered on Rolls ➔P.126
•
Printing Originals Centered on Sheets ➔P.130
•KNo Spaces at Top or Bottom
Select this checkbox to print the next image skipping blank areas above and below printable data in documents,
which enables you to conserve the paper.
•
Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without Top and Bottom Margins ➔P.139
•LRotate Page 90 degrees
Select this checkbox to rotate the document image by 90 degrees before printing.
•
Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90 Degrees ➔P.135
•NFree Layout
Select this checkbox to start imagePROGRAF Free Layout before printing.
This allows you to print multiple documents next to each other.
Important
•When Print Preview is selected on the Main panel, Print Preview is disabled.
•
Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other ➔P.110
Additional Settings Pane
Additional Settings Pane
The following settings are available on the Additional Settings pane.
•ASend job to
You can configure the method for saving print jobs to the printer hard disk.
•BPrint after reception is complete
You can prevent degradation of print quality that occurs when receiving a print job is interrupted and printing is
aborted in the middle.
iPF785
Additional Settings Pane
User's Guide
Mac OS Software Printer Driver
295
Preview
Preview
The Features of Preview ......................................................................................................................................................296
Starting Preview ...................................................................................................................................................................... 296
Preview Main Window ........................................................................................................................................................... 298
Paper Settings Panel ............................................................................................................................................................. 300
Easy Settings ...................................................................................................................................................................... 302
Advanced Settings ........................................................................................................................................................... 303
Output Settings Panel .......................................................................................................................................................... 304
Color Settings Panel .............................................................................................................................................................. 306
Color Adjustment ............................................................................................................................................................. 307
Matching ............................................................................................................................................................................... 309
Driver Matching Mode .............................................................................................................................................. 311
ICC Matching Mode ................................................................................................................................................... 312
ColorSync ....................................................................................................................................................................... 313
Preferences Dialog Box ....................................................................................................................................................... 313
Zoom Dialog Box .....................................................................................................................................................................313
Go to Page Dialog Box ......................................................................................................................................................... 314
Print with No Borders ........................................................................................................................................................... 314
Print on the Center ................................................................................................................................................................ 315
Not Print Spaces at the Top/Bottom ............................................................................................................................. 315
Print Page Rotated 90 Degrees ....................................................................................................................................... 316
Display with Fitting to the Width of the Paper .......................................................................................................... 316
Display with All ......................................................................................................................................................................... 317
Display with Actual Size ....................................................................................................................................................... 317
Moving a Page ......................................................................................................................................................................... 318
The Features of Preview
The Features of Preview
The main features of Preview are as follows.
•
While viewing this screen, you can adjust layout settings of a document created with application software.
•
You can not only adjust layout settings but also your changes will be instantly applied on the preview screen, and
you can print the preview screen as it is seen.
Note
•The media type, image size, detailed media settings, and the printer settings can cause the actual print output to differ
from the Preview settings.
Starting Preview
Starting Preview
Follow the procedure below to start the Preview.
1
Start the apllication software which you use.
2
From the application software's File menu, select the printer setup menu to open the Print dialog box.
Note
•Normally, select Print from the File menu.
3
Click Print Preview in the Main panel to attach a checkmark.
The Features of Preview
iPF785
User's Guide
Mac OS Software Preview
296
Preview Main Window
Preview Main Window
The Preview main window consists of the menu and tool bars, and preview, dialog , drawer and status area.
Note
•You can use the View menu to show or hide the tool bar.
•
Menu Bar
This allows you to select menus required for operations.
•
Tool Bar
This allows you to select tool buttons required for major operations.
Preview Main Window
iPF785
User's Guide
Mac OS Software Preview
298
This area appears when you click Drawer from the tool bar.
Alternatively, you may select Drawer from the View menu.
•
Status Area
This shows Input Size and Output Size.
Paper Settings Panel
Paper Settings Panel
This panel appears when you select Paper Settings in the dialog area.
•
Media Type
This allows you to select the media type.
Paper Settings Panel
iPF785
User's Guide
Mac OS Software Preview
300
Note
•Always select media type that is actually set in the printer. When the media you chose is different from the media
set in the printer, you may not receive the desired print results.
•
Easy Settings / Advanced Settings
Two modes are available to provide the optimum print settings for jobs.
The settings available on each mode are as follows.
•
Easy Settings ➔P.302
•
Advanced Settings ➔P.303
•
Paper Source
You can select the paper source.
The following settings are available for paper source.
Setting Details
Manual Select for manual paper feed printing.
Roll Paper Select to print on roll paper.
•
Roll Paper Width
This selects the width of the roll media set to the printer.
Note
•Available only if rolls are selected in Paper Source.
•
Copies
You can input the number of print copies in numerical characters.
Note
•The maximum value is 999.
•You can change the numbers by clicking either ▲ button or ▼ button.
•
Restore Defaults Button
Click the button to reset to the setting when starting Preview.
•
Print Button
Click the button to begin printing.
•
Update Printer Info. Button
Click the button to acquire printer information.
iPF785
Paper Settings Panel
User's Guide
Mac OS Software Preview
301
Easy Settings
Easy Settings
You can easily select the best settings for the print job by just selecting an item from the print target list that matches
the content of the document.
•
Print Target
You can easily select the best settings for the print job simply.
If you select each Print Target item the corresponding comment for that item is displayed below the list.
Setting Details
Default Settings Suitable for printing normal documents that contain a mixture of text, photographs, and
graphics.
Poster The best setting for posters.Prints using vivid and high impact colors.
CAD (Color Line Drawing) Prints the fine lines of CAD drawings and other such documents sharp and clear.
CAD (B/W Line Drawing) Suitable for printing CAD drawings with sharp, dark lines.
Perspective, GIS Suitable for attractive printing of 3D-CAD drawings, perspective drawings, and GIS drawings
including maps.
Photo (Color) Suitable for printing photographic images captured with a digital camera.
Office Document Suitable for printing handouts as well as general office documents for which print clarity is
key.
Faithful Color Reproduction Prints by faithfully reproducing the colors of the original image.
Custom Settings Suitable for printing documents for which Advanced Settings have been specified.
Note
•The number of settings available for selection depends on the media type.
•
Print Quality
Selecting print quality strikes a balance between the quality of the printed image and printing speed.
Easy Settings
iPF785
User's Guide
Mac OS Software Preview
302
The level of the print quality and resolution settings are displayed in the following combinations.
Setting Details
Print Quality Highest quality / Highest / High / Standard / Fast
Resolution 1200dpi / 600dpi / 300dpi
Note
•The availability of settings is determined by the media type and print priority selections.
•Printing time is longer and more ink is consumed with High than with Fast, however, print quality is higher.
•Printing time is shorter and less ink is consumed with Fast than with High, however, print quality is lower.
•For Highest quality, the resolution is not displayed.
Advanced Settings
Advanced Settings
Presents detailed settings for the print quality, the color mode, and other items so you can select the values for these
settings yourself.
•
Print Priority
Select a print quality mode that is appropriate for the print job.
Setting Details
Image This mode achieves the best results for printing photographic images and illustrations.
Line Drawing This mode is best for printing CAD drawings with fine lines or wall newssheet or other docu-
ments that contain large amounts of text. However, you may not achieve the quality you ex-
pect with printing photographs or other images with many filled areas. For these types of
jobs, select Image.
Office Document Prints common office documents, such as proposals, memos for distribution, etc., so they are
easy to read.
iPF785
Advanced Settings
User's Guide
Mac OS Software Preview
303
Note
•The number of settings available for selection depends on the media type.
•
Print Quality
Selecting print quality strikes a balance between the quality of the printed image and printing speed.
The level of the print quality and resolution settings are displayed in the following combinations.
Setting Details
Print Quality Highest quality / Highest / High / Standard / Fast
Resolution 1200dpi / 600dpi / 300dpi
Note
•The availability of settings is determined by the media type and print priority selections.
•Printing time is longer and more ink is consumed with High than with Fast, however, print quality is higher.
•Printing time is shorter and less ink is consumed with Fast than with High, however, print quality is lower.
•For Highest quality, the resolution is not displayed.
Output Settings Panel
Output Settings Panel
This panel appears when you select Output Settings in the dialog area.
•
Enlarged/Reduced Printing
Select the method for enlarged/reduced printing.
The following settings are available for enlarged/reduced printing.
Setting Details
Fit Paper Size Enlarges/reduces the whole page automatically to fit the media size selected for output. Se-
lect the media size to print from Paper Size.
Output Settings Panel
iPF785
User's Guide
Mac OS Software Preview
304
Setting Details
Fit Roll Paper Width Enlarges/reduces the whole page automatically to fit the width of the roll paper with the page
width.
*Make sure that the width of the roll paper in the printer is set correctly for Roll Paper Width
in the Paper Settings panel.
*Displayed only if rolls are selected in Paper Source.
Scaling Enlarges/reduces the whole page by the scaling rate as specified. Input the scaling value in
numerical characters. You can specify a range between 5 and 600%.
*You can change the numbers by clicking either ▲ button or ▼ button.
*Although Scaling can be set to make the image larger than the media size, the part that
does not fit in the media cannot be printed.
*This is not displayed when a checkmark is placed in Borderless Printing.
•
Borderless Printing
You can print the media without margins on all sides when the roll paper with the specific width and the specific
media type is used.
For more information about Borderless Printing, see "Print with No Borders." ➔P.314
Note
•Available only if rolls are selected in Paper Source.
•This is not displayed when a checkmark is placed in Print Centered.
•
Paper Size
You can select the size of the print media.
Note
•This is not displayed when Fit Roll Paper Width is set in Enlarged/Reduced Printing.
•
Print Centered
You can print on the center of the media loaded in the printer.
For more information about Print Centered, see "Print on the Center." ➔P.315
Note
•This is not displayed when a checkmark is placed in Borderless Printing.
•
No Spaces at Top or Bottom
You can save paper on not to feed roll paper for the empty spaces when the print data contains spaces at the top
or bottom.
For more information about No Spaces at Top or Bottom, see "Not Print Spaces at the Top/Bottom." ➔P.315
Note
•Available only if rolls are selected in Paper Source.
•
Rotate Page
Select the method for rotating page.
The following settings are available for rotating page.
Setting Details
Rotate Right 90 Degrees Rotates the portrait page right 90 degrees and print in landscape orientation. When the rota-
ted page can fit in the width of roll paper, the page is rotated automatically, and when it can
not fit in the width of roll paper, the page is not rotated.
Rotate Left 90 Degrees Rotates the portrait page left 90 degrees and print in landscape orientation. When the rotated
page can fit in the width of roll paper, the page is rotated automatically, and when it can not fit
in the width of roll paper, the page is not rotated.
Rotate 180 degrees Allows you to rotate the image 180 degrees from the vertical to the right.
iPF785
Output Settings Panel
User's Guide
Mac OS Software Preview
305
•
Restore Defaults Button
Click the button to reset to the setting when starting Preview.
•
Print Button
Click the button to begin printing.
•
Update Printer Info. Button
Click the button to acquire printer information.
Color Settings Panel
Color Settings Panel
This panel appears when you select Color Settings in the dialog area.
•
Color Mode
You can select a color mode to suit the print job.
Setting Details
Color Enables color printing.
Monochrome Disables color printing and converts image from continuous color to grayscaled mono-
chrome.
Color (CAD) Prints lines in the best color possible so they are easy to see.
Monochrome Bitmap Prints all colors other than white in black.
Monochrome (BK ink) Select to print all lines with black ink.
No color correction Prints without performing color matching in the printer driver. Select this when color matching
is performed by the application such as Adobe Photoshop or when you want to print color
charts using the profile creation tool.
Note
•The availability of settings depends on the print priority and media type selections.
Color Settings Panel
iPF785
User's Guide
Mac OS Software Preview
306
•
Color Adjustment / Gray Adjustment / Matching
You can set the color adjustment and matching.
•
Color Adjustment ➔P.307
•
Matching ➔P.309
Note
•Matching is not displayed if No color correction has been selected in Color Mode.
•
Restore Defaults Button
Click the button to reset to the setting when starting Preview.
•
Print Button
Click the button to begin printing.
•
Update Printer Info. Button
Click the button to acquire printer information.
Color Adjustment
Color Adjustment
You can set the color adjustment.
Adjusting Color
Normally colors should be adjusted in the software application, but if you see colors in the printout that do not match
colors on the screen, you can perform color adjustments.
1
Select Color on Color Mode in the Color Settings panel.
2
Select Color Adjustment.
iPF785
Color Adjustment
User's Guide
Mac OS Software Preview
307
3
Drag each slider to the left or right to adjust.
Setting Details
Cyan Adjusts the strength of colors to compensate the hues.
Magenta Adjusts the strength of colors to compensate the hues.
Yellow Adjusts the strength of colors to compensate the hues.
Brightness Adjusts the brightness of the entire image. When the results of the printout are brighter
than the original images such as the original photo before scanning and graphics created
on the display, or when you want to print in different degrees of brightness, use this fea-
ture.
Contrast Adjusts the relative brightness between the brightest and darkest portions of the image.
*For soft gradation, decrease the contrast. For hard gradation, increase the contrast.
Saturation Adjusts the hues for vivid color or dark color.
Gray Tone Adjusts gray from cool black (bluish tones) to warm black (reddish tones).
Note
•You can also click the up or down arrow, or enter the number directly to increase or decrease the value.
Adjusting Monochrome
Use the monochrome setting to print monochrome images of color photographs captured with a scanner or digital cam-
era or other color images.
1
Select Monochrome on Color Mode in the Color Settings panel.
2
Select Color Adjustment.
Color Adjustment
iPF785
User's Guide
Mac OS Software Preview
308
3
Drag each slider to the left or right to adjust.
Setting Details
Brightness Adjusts the brightness of the entire image. When the results of the printout are brighter
than the original images such as the original photo before scanning and graphics created
on the display, or when you want to print in different degrees of brightness, use this fea-
ture.
Contrast Adjusts the relative brightness between the brightest and darkest portions of the image.
*For soft gradation, decrease the contrast. For hard gradation, increase the contrast.
Note
•You can also click the up or down arrow, or enter the number directly to increase or decrease the value.
Matching
Matching
You can set the matching.
Important
•If No color correction is selected under Color Mode, the Matching is not displayed.
•
Matching Mode
You can select a matching mode to suit the print job.
Setting Details
Driver Matching Mode ➔P.311 Enables printing of optimal color tones using a driver specific color profile. You should nor-
mally select this mode.
ICC Matching Mode ➔P.312 Enables color matching using ICC profiles. Select this if you want to print by specifying the
input profile, printer profile, and matching method in detail. This allows you to use ICC pro-
files for digital cameras and scanners, ICC profiles created using the profile creation tool, etc.
iPF785
Matching
User's Guide
Mac OS Software Preview
309
Setting Details
ColorSync ➔P.313 Enables color matching by using the ColorSync function of OS X. Select this if you want to
perform soft proofing using ColorSync before printing.
Note
•You need to set each correction on the printer driver.
•ColorSync needs to be selected in the Color Matching panel of the driver in order to select ColorSync.
•
Matching Method
You can select a matching method to suit the print job.
•
Gamma
You can adjust the gradation of intermediate tones in an image. 2.2 is normally selected. If you want a softer im-
pression than 2.2, select 1.8.
Note
•You can select only after Driver Matching Mode has been selected in Matching Mode.
•
Input Profile
Select the input profile.
Note
•You can select only after ICC Matching Mode has been selected in Matching Mode.
•
Printer Profile
Select the printer profile.
Note
•You can select only after ICC Matching Mode has been selected in Matching Mode.
•
Soft Proof
When you place a checkmark here, ColorSync applies to the preview area.
Note
•You can select only after ColorSync has been selected in Matching Mode.
Matching
iPF785
User's Guide
Mac OS Software Preview
310
Driver Matching Mode
Driver Matching Mode
1
Under Matching Mode, select Driver Matching Mode.
2
Click the Matching Method list, and then select a setting.
Setting Details
Auto Automatically selects the best color matching method for each Image, Graphics, Text.
Perceptual Color-matching optimized for printing typical photos attractively. Smooth gradation is a fea-
ture. This is also an easy-to-use mode when performing color adjustment using application
software.
Saturation Color-matching optimized for printing posters, etc., vividly.
Colorimetric Color-matching optimized for printing image data with accurate colors in input color space.
This is the easiest-to-use mode when you want to adjust the color and print. However, gra-
dation may be lost for colors of wider range than the color reproduction range of the printer.
Generally, this is also called relative colorimetric.
iPF785
Driver Matching Mode
User's Guide
Mac OS Software Preview
311
ICC Matching Mode
ICC Matching Mode
1
Under Matching Mode, select ICC Matching Mode.
2
Click the Matching Method list, and then select a setting.
Setting Details
Perceptual Color-matching optimized for printing typical photos attractively. Smooth gradation is a fea-
ture. This is also an easy-to-use mode when performing color adjustment using application
software.
Saturation Color-matching optimized for printing posters, etc., vividly.
Colorimetric Color-matching optimized for printing image data with accurate colors in input color space.
This is the easiest-to-use mode when you want to adjust the color and print. However, gra-
dation may be lost for colors of wider range than the color reproduction range of the printer.
Generally, this is also called relative colorimetric.
Colorimetric (No White-Point Cor-
rection)
The processing method of color-matching is identical to Colorimetric. Use this when you
want to further reproduce the target paper material color of the image data. Generally, this
also is called absolute colorimetric.
3
Click the Input Profile list and select an input profile.
4
Click the Printer Profile list and select a printer profile.
ICC Matching Mode
iPF785
User's Guide
Mac OS Software Preview
312
ColorSync
ColorSync
1
Check that ColorSync is selected in Matching Mode.
2
To apply ColorSync to previews, check the Soft Proof check box.
Preferences Dialog Box
Preferences Dialog Box
This dialog box appears when you select Preferences from the imagePROGRAF Advanced Preview menu. You can
set the preferences for Preview.
•
Units
Set the unit for paper length, margins, and so on.
Zoom Dialog Box
Zoom Dialog Box
This dialog box appears when you select Zoom from the View menu. You can enlarge or reduce the screen display.
iPF785
ColorSync
User's Guide
Mac OS Software Preview
313
•
Scaling
Set the magnification for enlargement or reduction of the screen display.
Note
•You can input between 10 and 400.
•You can change the numbers by clicking ▼ button.
Go to Page Dialog Box
Go to Page Dialog Box
This dialog box appears when you select Go to Page from the View menu.
Note
•You can not select Go to Page if the document is only one page.
•
Page
Input the page number in numerical characters to display in the preview area.
Note
•You can change the numbers in the range of the page of the documents.
Print with No Borders
Print with No Borders
You can use the borderless printing function to print without margins surrounding the image.
Note
•With some media borderless printing can be performed only between two edges.
•To use the borderless printing function, the specified media must be set to the printer.
1
On the Paper Settings Panel ➔P.300 , select Roll Paper in Paper Source.
2
On the Output Settings Panel ➔P.304 , click the Enlarged/Reduced Printing check box on.
3
Select Fit Roll Paper Width.
4
Click the Borderless Printing check box on.
Go to Page Dialog Box
iPF785
User's Guide
Mac OS Software Preview
314
5
Click the Print button.
Borderless printing begins.
Print on the Center
Print on the Center
You can print on the center of the media loaded in the printer.
Note
•This is not displayed when a checkmark is placed in Borderless Printing.
1
On the Output Settings Panel ➔P.304 , click the Print
Centered check box on.
2
Click the Print button.
Printing on the center begins.
Not Print Spaces at the Top/Bottom
Not Print Spaces at the Top/Bottom
You can save paper on not to feed roll paper for the empty spaces when the print data contains spaces at the top or
bottom.
Note
•This is not displayed when a checkmark is placed in Borderless Printing.
1
On the Paper Settings Panel ➔P.300 , select Roll Paper in Paper Source.
iPF785
Print on the Center
User's Guide
Mac OS Software Preview
315
2
On the Output Settings Panel ➔P.304 , click the No
Spaces at Top or Bottom check box on.
3
Click the Print button.
Printing on the settings with no spaces at top or bottom begins.
Print Page Rotated 90 Degrees
Print Page Rotated 90 Degrees
You can save paper by printing in landscape orientation on roll paper.
1
On the Paper Settings Panel ➔P.300 , select Roll Paper in Paper Source.
2
On the Output Settings Panel ➔P.304 , click the Rotate Page check box on.
3
Select Rotate Right 90 Degrees or Rotate Left 90 De-
grees.
4
Click the Print button.
Printing on rotating 90 degrees begins.
Display with Fitting to the Width of the Paper
Display with Fitting to the Width of the Paper
In the preview area, you can display to the width of the paper.
1
Select Fit to Width from the tool bar.
Print Page Rotated 90 Degrees
iPF785
User's Guide
Mac OS Software Preview
316
2
Fitting to the width of the paper, it is displayed.
Display with All
Display with All
In the preview area, you can display all.
1
Select Fit Screen from the tool bar.
2
All is displayed.
Display with Actual Size
Display with Actual Size
In the preview area, you can display the actual size.
1
Select Actual Size from the tool bar.
iPF785
Display with All
User's Guide
Mac OS Software Preview
317
2
Actual size is displayed.
Moving a Page
Moving a Page
You can move a page to display in the preview area.
1
Select each button in Go to Page on the tool bar.
Setting Details
Go to the first page.
Go to the previous page.
Go to the next page.
Go to the last page.
2
The target page appears.
Note
•You can also move a page by clicking the page on the thumbnails.
Moving a Page
iPF785
User's Guide
Mac OS Software Preview
318
Free Layout
Free Layout
The Features of Free Layout ............................................................................................................................................. 319
Starting Free Layout ............................................................................................................................................................. 319
Free Layout Main Window .................................................................................................................................................. 321
Paper Settings Panel ............................................................................................................................................................. 323
Easy Settings ...................................................................................................................................................................... 324
Advanced Settings ........................................................................................................................................................... 326
Color Settings Panel .............................................................................................................................................................. 327
Color Adjustment ............................................................................................................................................................. 328
Matching ............................................................................................................................................................................... 330
Driver Matching Mode .............................................................................................................................................. 332
ICC Matching Mode ................................................................................................................................................... 333
ColorSync ....................................................................................................................................................................... 334
Preferences Dialog Box ....................................................................................................................................................... 334
Page Setup Dialog Box .........................................................................................................................................................335
Zoom Dialog Box .....................................................................................................................................................................336
Format Dialog Box ..................................................................................................................................................................337
Laying out a Multiple-File Document on One Page ..................................................................................................337
Laying out a Document Created with Multiple Application Programs on One Page ................................ 338
Selecting an Object ............................................................................................................................................................... 338
Changing the Object Size ................................................................................................................................................... 339
Moving an Object ................................................................................................................................................................... 339
Rotating an Object ................................................................................................................................................................. 340
Laying out Objects Automatically ....................................................................................................................................340
Aligning Objects ...................................................................................................................................................................... 340
Changing the Object Overlapping Order ......................................................................................................................342
Pasting a Copied or Cut Object ....................................................................................................................................... 343
The Features of Free Layout
The Features of Free Layout
The main features of Free Layout are as follows.
•
Allows you to lay out at will and print a document created with application software.
•
You can not only lay out multiple pages on one page but also lay out and print a multiple-file document on one
page, or lay out and print a document created with multiple application programs on one page.
Note
•The media type, image size, detailed media settings, and the printer settings can cause the actual print output to differ
from the Free Layout settings.
Starting Free Layout
Starting Free Layout
Follow the procedure below to start the Free Layout.
1
Start the apllication software which you use.
2
From the application software's File menu, select the printer setup menu to open the Print dialog box.
Note
•Normally, select Print from the File menu.
3
Click on Free Layout in the Page Setup panel to attach a checkmark.
iPF785
The Features of Free Layout
User's Guide
Mac OS Software Free Layout
319
Free Layout Main Window
Free Layout Main Window
The Free Layout main window consists of the menu and tool bars, layout area and dialog areas.
Note
•You can use the View menu to show or hide the tool.
•
Menu Bar
This allows you to select menus required for operations.
•
Tool Bar
This allows you to select tool buttons required for major operations.
iPF785
Free Layout Main Window
User's Guide
Mac OS Software Free Layout
321
Paper Settings Panel
Paper Settings Panel
This panel appears when you select Paper Settings in the dialog area.
•
Media Type
This allows you to select the media type.
Note
•Always select media type that is actually set in the printer. When the media you chose is different from the media
set in the printer, you may not receive the desired print results.
•
Easy Settings / Advanced Settings
Two modes are available to provide the optimum print settings for jobs.
The settings available on each mode are as follows.
•
Easy Settings ➔P.324
•
Advanced Settings ➔P.326
•
Paper Source
You can select the paper source.
The following settings are available for paper source.
Setting Details
Manual Select for manual paper feed printing.
Roll Paper Select to print on roll paper.
•
Roll Paper Width
This selects the width of the roll media set to the printer.
Note
•Available only if rolls are selected in Paper Source.
iPF785
Paper Settings Panel
User's Guide
Mac OS Software Free Layout
323
•
Copies
You can input the number of print copies in numerical characters.
Note
•The maximum value is 999.
•You can change the numbers by clicking either ▲ button or ▼ button.
•
Restore Defaults Button
Click the button to reset to the setting when starting Free Layout.
•
Print Button
Click the button to begin printing.
•
Update Printer Info. Button
Click the button to acquire printer information.
Easy Settings
Easy Settings
You can easily select the best settings for the print job by just selecting an item from the print target list that matches
the content of the document.
•
Print Target
You can easily select the best settings for the print job simply.
If you select each Print Target item the corresponding comment for that item is displayed below the list.
Setting Details
Default Settings Suitable for printing normal documents that contain a mixture of text, photographs, and
graphics.
Poster The best setting for posters.Prints using vivid and high impact colors.
CAD (Color Line Drawing) Suitable for printing fine lines such as drawings clearly.
CAD (B/W Line Drawing) Suitable for printing CAD drawings with sharp, dark lines.
Easy Settings
iPF785
User's Guide
Mac OS Software Free Layout
324
Setting Details
Perspective, GIS Suitable for attractive printing of 3D-CAD drawings, perspective drawings, and GIS drawings
including maps.
Photo (Color) Suitable for printing photographic images captured with a digital camera.
Office Document Suitable for printing handouts as well as general office documents for which print clarity is
key.
Faithful Color Reproduction Prints by minimizing color differences. Suitable for when the printing results are too vivid or
when printing scanned images.
Custom Settings Suitable for printing documents for which Advanced Settings have been specified.
Note
•The number of settings available for selection depends on the media type.
•
Print Quality
Selecting print quality strikes a balance between the quality of the printed image and printing speed.
The level of the print quality and resolution settings are displayed in the following combinations.
Setting Details
Print Quality Highest quality / Highest / High / Standard / Fast
Resolution 1200dpi / 600dpi / 300dpi
Note
•The availability of settings is determined by the media type and print priority selections.
•Printing time is longer and more ink is consumed with High than with Fast, however, print quality is higher.
•Printing time is shorter and less ink is consumed with Fast than with High, however, print quality is lower.
•For Highest quality, the resolution is not displayed.
iPF785
Easy Settings
User's Guide
Mac OS Software Free Layout
325
Advanced Settings
Advanced Settings
Presents detailed settings for the print priority, the print quality, and other items so you can select the values for these
settings yourself.
•
Print Priority
Select a print quality mode that is appropriate for the print job.
Setting Details
Image This mode achieves the best results for printing photographic images and illustrations.
Line Drawing This mode is best for printing CAD drawings with fine lines or wall newssheet or other docu-
ments that contain large amounts of text. However, you may not achieve the quality you ex-
pect with printing photographs or other images with many filled areas. For these types of
jobs, select Image.
Office Document Prints common office documents, such as proposals, memos for distribution, etc., so they are
easy to read.
Note
•The number of settings available for selection depends on the media type.
•
Print Quality
Selecting print quality strikes a balance between the quality of the printed image and printing speed.
The level of the print quality and resolution settings are displayed in the following combinations.
Setting Details
Print Quality Highest quality / Highest / High / Standard / Fast
Resolution 1200dpi / 600dpi / 300dpi
Advanced Settings
iPF785
User's Guide
Mac OS Software Free Layout
326
Note
•The availability of settings is determined by the media type and print priority selections.
•Printing time is longer and more ink is consumed with High than with Fast, however, print quality is higher.
•Printing time is shorter and less ink is consumed with Fast than with High, however, print quality is lower.
•For Highest quality, the resolution is not displayed.
Color Settings Panel
Color Settings Panel
This panel appears when you select Color Settings in the dialog area.
•
Color Mode
You can select a color mode to suit the print job.
Setting Details
Color Enables color printing.
Monochrome Disables color printing and converts image from continuous color to grayscaled mono-
chrome.
Color (CAD) Prints lines in the best color possible so they are easy to see.
Monochrome Bitmap Prints all colors other than white in black.
Monochrome (BK ink) Select to print all lines with black ink.
No color correction Prints without performing color matching in the printer driver. Select this when color matching
is performed by the application such as Adobe Photoshop or when you want to print color
charts using the profile creation tool.
Note
•The availability of settings depends on the print priority and media type selections.
iPF785
Color Settings Panel
User's Guide
Mac OS Software Free Layout
327
•
Color Adjustment / Matching
You can set the color adjustment and matching.
•
Color Adjustment ➔P.328
•
Matching ➔P.330
Note
•Matching is not displayed if No color correction has been selected in Color Mode.
•
Restore Defaults Button
Click the button to reset to the setting when starting Free Layout.
•
Print Button
Click the button to begin printing.
•
Update Printer Info. Button
Click the button to acquire printer information.
Color Adjustment
Color Adjustment
You can set the color adjustment.
Adjusting Color
Normally colors should be adjusted in the software application, but if you see colors in the printout that do not match
colors on the screen, you can perform color adjustments.
1
Select Color on Color Mode in the Color Settings panel.
2
Select Color Adjustment.
Color Adjustment
iPF785
User's Guide
Mac OS Software Free Layout
328
3
Drag each slider to the left or right to adjust.
Setting Details
Cyan Adjusts the strength of colors to compensate the hues.
Magenta Adjusts the strength of colors to compensate the hues.
Yellow Adjusts the strength of colors to compensate the hues.
Brightness Adjusts the brightness of the entire image. When the results of the printout are brighter
than the original images such as the original photo before scanning and graphics created
on the display, or when you want to print in different degrees of brightness, use this fea-
ture.
Contrast Adjusts the relative brightness between the brightest and darkest portions of the image.
*For soft gradation, decrease the contrast. For hard gradation, increase the contrast.
Saturation Adjusts the hues for vivid color or dark color.
Gray Tone Adjusts gray from cool black (bluish tones) to warm black (reddish tones).
Note
•You can also click the up or down arrow, or enter the number directly to increase or decrease the value.
Adjusting Monochrome
Use the monochrome setting to print monochrome images of color photographs captured with a scanner or digital cam-
era or other color images.
1
Select Monochrome on Color Mode in the Color Settings panel.
2
Select Color Adjustment.
iPF785
Color Adjustment
User's Guide
Mac OS Software Free Layout
329
3
Drag each slider to the left or right to adjust.
Setting Details
Brightness Adjusts the brightness of the entire image. When the results of the printout are brighter
than the original images such as the original photo before scanning and graphics created
on the display, or when you want to print in different degrees of brightness, use this fea-
ture.
Contrast Adjusts the relative brightness between the brightest and darkest portions of the image.
*For soft gradation, decrease the contrast. For hard gradation, increase the contrast.
Note
•You can also click the up or down arrow, or enter the number directly to increase or decrease the value.
Matching
Matching
You can set the matching.
Important
•If No color correction is selected under Color Mode, the Matching is not displayed.
•
Matching Mode
You can select a matching mode to suit the print job.
Setting Details
Driver Matching Mode ➔P.332 Enables printing of optimal color tones using a driver specific color profile. You should nor-
mally select this mode.
ICC Matching Mode ➔P.333 Enables color matching using ICC profiles. Select this if you want to print by specifying the
input profile, printer profile, and matching method in detail. This allows you to use ICC pro-
files for digital cameras and scanners, ICC profiles created using the profile creation tool, etc.
Matching
iPF785
User's Guide
Mac OS Software Free Layout
330
Setting Details
ColorSync ➔P.334 Enables color matching by using the ColorSync function of OS X. Select this if you want to
perform soft proofing using ColorSync before printing.
Note
•You need to set each correction on the printer driver.
•ColorSync needs to be selected in the Color Matching panel of the driver in order to select ColorSync.
•
Matching Method
You can select a matching method to suit the print job.
•
Gamma
You can adjust the gradation of intermediate tones in an image. 2.2 is normally selected. If you want a softer im-
pression than 2.2, select 1.8.
Note
•You can select only after Driver Matching Mode has been selected in Matching Mode.
•
Input Profile
Select the input profile.
Note
•You can select only after ICC Matching Mode has been selected in Matching Mode.
•
Printer Profile
Select the printer profile.
Note
•You can select only after ICC Matching Mode has been selected in Matching Mode.
•
Soft Proof
When you place a checkmark here, ColorSync applies to the layout area.
Note
•You can select only after ColorSync has been selected in Matching Mode.
iPF785
Matching
User's Guide
Mac OS Software Free Layout
331
Driver Matching Mode
Driver Matching Mode
1
Under Matching Mode, select Driver Matching Mode.
2
Click the Matching Method list, and then select a setting.
Setting Details
Auto Automatically selects the best color matching method for each Image, Graphics, Text.
Perceptual Color-matching optimized for printing typical photos attractively. Smooth gradation is a fea-
ture. This is also an easy-to-use mode when performing color adjustment using application
software.
Saturation Color-matching optimized for printing posters, etc., vividly.
Colorimetric Color-matching optimized for printing image data with accurate colors in input color space.
This is the easiest-to-use mode when you want to adjust the color and print. However, gra-
dation may be lost for colors of wider range than the color reproduction range of the printer.
Generally, this is also called relative colorimetric.
Driver Matching Mode
iPF785
User's Guide
Mac OS Software Free Layout
332
ICC Matching Mode
ICC Matching Mode
1
Under Matching Mode, select ICC Matching Mode.
2
Click the Matching Method list, and then select a setting.
Setting Details
Perceptual Color-matching optimized for printing typical photos attractively. Smooth gradation is a fea-
ture. This is also an easy-to-use mode when performing color adjustment using application
software.
Saturation Color-matching optimized for printing posters, etc., vividly.
Colorimetric Color-matching optimized for printing image data with accurate colors in input color space.
This is the easiest-to-use mode when you want to adjust the color and print. However, gra-
dation may be lost for colors of wider range than the color reproduction range of the printer.
Generally, this is also called relative colorimetric.
Colorimetric (No White-Point Cor-
rection)
The processing method of color-matching is identical to Colorimetric. Use this when you
want to further reproduce the target paper material color of the image data. Generally, this
also is called absolute colorimetric.
3
Click the Input Profile list and select an input profile.
4
Click the Printer Profile list and select a printer profile.
iPF785
ICC Matching Mode
User's Guide
Mac OS Software Free Layout
333
ColorSync
ColorSync
1
Check that ColorSync is selected in Matching Mode.
2
Place a checkmark on Soft Proof to simulate the output product in Layout Area.
Preferences Dialog Box
Preferences Dialog Box
This dialog box appears when you select Preferences from the imagePROGRAF Advanced Preview menu. You can
set the preferences for Free Layout.
•
Units
Set the unit for paper length, margins, and so on.
•
Gridlines
You can input a grid line width value in numerical characters so that they serve as a guide to laying out objects.
ColorSync
iPF785
User's Guide
Mac OS Software Free Layout
334
Note
•You can input between 10.0 and 200.0(mm) (between 0.39 and 7.87(inch)).
•You can change the numbers by clicking either ▲ button or ▼ button.
•
Divisions
You can change the number of divisions of grid lines so that they serve as a guide to laying out objects.
Note
•You can input between 1 and 10.
•You can change the numbers by clicking either ▲ button or ▼ button.
•
Grid Color
Select the grid line color.
•
Print Object Frames
You can print the object border.
Note
•If you do not want to print the object border, deselect the Print Object Frames check box.
•
Object Frame Style
You can select the object frame style for printing.
The following settings are available for the object frame style.
Setting Details
Solid Line You can print the solid line as the frame style.
Dotted Line You can print the dotted line as the frame style.
Dashed Line You can print the dashed line as the frame style.
•
Auto Arrange Spacing
Change the object-to-object spacing to be applied in the operation of laying out objects automatically.
Note
•You can input between 0.0 and 100.0(mm) (between 0.00 and 3.94(inch)).
•You can change the numbers by clicking either ▲ button or ▼ button.
Page Setup Dialog Box
Page Setup Dialog Box
This dialog box appears when you select Page Setup from the File menu.This dialog box provides selections for set-
ting the media size, orientation and other important features.
•
Paper Orientation
This selects the paper orientation.
iPF785
Page Setup Dialog Box
User's Guide
Mac OS Software Free Layout
335
The following settings are available for orientation.
Setting Details
Vertical Prints the image and text created with the application software in the orientation as it is.
Horizontal Prints the image and text by rotating sideways 90 degrees from the orientation as specified in
the application.
•
Roll Paper Length
Set the length of one page to print on roll paper.
When you place a checkmark on Auto Settings, the one-page length to be printed on roll paper is automatically
set so that the laid-out objects are printed on one page.
Note
•Available only if rolls are selected in Paper Source.
•You can input between 203.2 and 18000.0(mm) (between 8.00 and 708.66(inch)).
•You can change the numbers by clicking either ▲ button or ▼ button.
•
Order
Set the object layout order.
The following settings are available for order.
Setting Details
Upper Left to Right The objects are laid out from upper left to right.
Upper Left to Bottom The objects are laid out from upper left to bottom.
Note
•When you have selected Roll Paper Length > Auto Settings and Paper Orientation > Vertical, you can choose
only Upper Left to Right.
•When you have selected Roll Paper Length > Auto Settings and Paper Orientation > Horizontal, you can
choose only Upper Left to Bottom.
•
Paper Size
You can select the size of the print media.
Note
•You cannot display this if Roll Paper is selected in Paper Source.
Zoom Dialog Box
Zoom Dialog Box
This dialog box appears when you select Zoom from the View menu. You can enlarge or reduce the screen display.
•
Scaling
Set the magnification for enlargement or reduction of the screen display.
Note
•You can input between 10 and 400.
•You can change the numbers by clicking ▼ button.
Zoom Dialog Box
iPF785
User's Guide
Mac OS Software Free Layout
336
Format Dialog Box
Format Dialog Box
This dialog box appears when you select Format from the Object menu after you select an object. You can rotate,
enlarge, or reduce an object.
Note
•When the objects are not selected, you can not select Format.
•
Rotate
When you place a checkmark here, you can select Rotate Right or Rotate Left.
Setting Details
Rotate Right Rotates the object 90 degrees clockwise.
Rotate Left Rotates the object 90 degrees counterclockwise.
Note
•When several objects are selected, you cannot select Rotate.
•
Scaling
You can input the value for enlargement or reduction of the obeject in numerical characters.
Note
•You can input between 25 and 400.
•You can change the numbers by clicking either ▲ button or ▼ button.
•
Object Size
You can confirm the object size.
Note
•When several objects are selected, you cannot display Object Size.
Laying out a Multiple-File Document on One Page
Laying out a Multiple-File Document on One Page
You can lay out and print a multiple-file document on one page.
1
From the application software's File menu, select the printer setup menu to open the Print dialog box.
Note
•Normally, select Print from the File menu.
2
Click on Free Layout in the Page Setup panel to attach a checkmark.
iPF785
Format Dialog Box
User's Guide
Mac OS Software Free Layout
337
3
In the Print dialog box, select the pages to print and the number of copies, and click the Print button.
Free Layout starts, laying out the document created with application software in the layout area as an object.
4
Leaving Free Layout running, open other files with the application software and repeat the above steps.
Laying out a Document Created with Multiple Application Programs on One Page
Laying out a Document Created with Multiple Application Programs on One Page
You can lay out and print a document created with multiple application programs on one page.
1
From the application software's File menu, select the printer setup menu to open the Print dialog box.
Note
•Normally, select Print from the File menu.
2
Click on Free Layout in the Page Setup panel to attach a checkmark.
3
In the Print dialog box, select the pages to print and the number of copies, and click the Print button.
Free Layout starts, laying out the document created with application software in the layout area as an object.
4
Leaving Free Layout running, open the files with other application software and repeat the above steps.
Selecting an Object
Selecting an Object
When an object is selected, a select box (blue border) appears around the object.
Note
•To select an object, click that object.
•To select multiple successive objects, click them while holding down the shift key.
•To select multiple arbitrary objects, click them while holding down the command key.
•To select all objects, select Select All from the Edit menu.
Laying out a Document Created with Multiple Application Programs on One Page
iPF785
User's Guide
Mac OS Software Free Layout
338
Changing the Object Size
Changing the Object Size
You can change the object size by means of mouse operation or by specifying a scaling value.
Note
•The vertical-to-horizontal ratio remains unchanged when the object is enlarged or reduced.
Resizing by means of mouse operation
1
Select an object.
2
Place the pointer at a corner of the selection box
around the object to show the arrow handle, and drag
this handle to change the object size.
Resizing by specifying a scaling value
1
Select an object.
2
Open the Format Dialog Box ➔P.337 .
3
Use Scaling to set the magnification for enlargement or reduction. You either enter numbers directly.
Note
•You can input between 25 and 400.
•You can change the numbers by clicking either ▲ button or ▼ button.
4
Click the OK button.
Moving an Object
Moving an Object
You can move the object position.
1
Select an object.
2
Place the pointer inside the selection box of the object
to show the crosshair handle, and drag it to move the
object.
iPF785
Changing the Object Size
User's Guide
Mac OS Software Free Layout
339
Rotating an Object
Rotating an Object
You can rotate the object.
1
Select an object.
2
Select Rotate Left or Rotate Right from the toolbar.
Alternatively, you may click on the Rotate check box in
the Format Dialog Box ➔P.337 then select Rotate
Right or Rotate Left, and click the OK button.
Note
•When several objects are selected, you cannot select Rotate.
Laying out Objects Automatically
Laying out Objects Automatically
Click Auto Arrange in the tool bar. This automatically lays out objects. Alternatively, you may select Auto Arrange
Object from the Object menu.
Note
•The object layout order varies depending on the Order setting on the Page Setup Dialog Box ➔P.335 .
Aligning Objects
Aligning Objects
You can align objects systematically.
1
Select multiple objects.
Rotating an Object
iPF785
User's Guide
Mac OS Software Free Layout
340
2
Select the align menu from the Object menu.
•
Align Top
Lays out the objects, justifying them to the top.
•
Center Vertically
Lays out the objects, justifying them to the vertical
center.
•
Align Bottom
Lays out the objects, justifying them to the bottom.
•
Align Left
Lays out the objects, justifying them to the left.
iPF785
Aligning Objects
User's Guide
Mac OS Software Free Layout
341
•
Center Horizontally
Lays out the objects, justifying them to the horizon-
tal center.
•
Align Right
Lays out the objects, justifying them to the right.
Changing the Object Overlapping Order
Changing the Object Overlapping Order
You can change the object overlapping order.
1
Select an object.
2
Select the overlapping order menu from the Object menu.
•
Bring to Front
Moves the object to the frontmost position.
Changing the Object Overlapping Order
iPF785
User's Guide
Mac OS Software Free Layout
342
•
Send to Back
Moves the object to the backmost position.
•
Bring Forward
Moves the object one position to the front.
•
Send Backward
Moves the object one position to the back.
Pasting a Copied or Cut Object
Pasting a Copied or Cut Object
1
Click Copy or Cut from the toolbar.
Alternatively, you may select Copy or Cut from the Edit menu.
2
Click Paste from the toolbar.
Alternatively, you may select Paste from the Edit menu.
Note
•The copied or cut object is laid out at the end of the page.
iPF785
Pasting a Copied or Cut Object
User's Guide
Mac OS Software Free Layout
343
Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy
Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy
The Features of Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy ...................................................................................344
Starting Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy ................................................................................................... 344
Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy Dialog Box ............................................................................................. 345
Hot Folder .................................................................................................................................................................................. 345
Creating a New Hot Folder ................................................................................................................................................. 346
Editing a Hot Folder (Setting Print Conditions) ......................................................................................................... 347
Deleting a Hot Folder ............................................................................................................................................................ 349
Setting the Print Parameters .............................................................................................................................................350
Paper Settings Panel ............................................................................................................................................................. 350
Easy Settings ...................................................................................................................................................................... 352
Advanced Settings ........................................................................................................................................................... 353
Output Settings Panel .......................................................................................................................................................... 354
Color Settings Panel .............................................................................................................................................................. 356
Driver Matching Mode .................................................................................................................................................... 357
ICC Matching Mode ......................................................................................................................................................... 358
Printing Enlargements of Scanned Originals from a Color imageRUNNER .................................................. 358
The Features of Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy
The Features of Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy
The main features of Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy are as follows.
•
Allows the document scanned with the Color imageRUNNER to be automatically enlarged and printed.
•
You can perform basic printer settings such as printer selection, media type and output profile selection, and
matching methods, in addition to borderless printing and enlargement/reduction process without growing through
the printer driver.
Note
•The media type, image size, detailed media settings, and the printer settings can cause the actual print output to differ
from the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy settings.
Starting Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy
Starting Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy
You can start the utility by clicking on the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy.app icon in Applications > Can-
on Utilities > iR Enlargement Copy.
Note
•If you are using OS X v10.7 and later, start it from Launchpad.
The Features of Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy
iPF785
User's Guide
Mac OS Software Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy
344
Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy Dialog Box
Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy Dialog Box
The explanation below is on the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy dialog box.
Note
•For the step to open the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy dialog box, see "Starting Color imageRUNNER
Enlargement Copy." ➔P.344
•
Delete files in the folder
From the Hot Folder list, select a hot folder and click the Delete button to delete only files in the hot folder.
•
Delete the entire folder, as well as items in the list above
From the Hot Folder list, select a hot folder and click the Delete button to delete the hot folder.
•
Delete Button
Select Delete files in the folder or Delete the entire folder, as well as items in the list above and click this
button to delete the hot folder or only files in the hot folder.
•
Add Button
Click the button to open the Destination Selection dialog box so that you can add a hot folder.
•
Edit Button
From the Hot Folder list, select a hot folder and click this button to open the Add/Edit Hot Folder dialog box that
allows you to edit the hot folder.
•
Monitor Hot Folder Constantly
If the check box is selected, the Hot Folder is monitored from after the next login.
Hot Folder
Hot Folder
Hot folder refers to a folder used for Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy.
•
When transferred to the PC's hot folder, the document data scanned with the Color imageRUNNER is printed in
enlarged size from the printer according to the print conditions set in the hot folder.
•
You can create a new hot folder, edit or delete an existing one, and set print conditions at will.
Note
•You can create up to 10 hot folders.
iPF785
Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy Dialog Box
User's Guide
Mac OS Software Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy
345
Creating a New Hot Folder
Creating a New Hot Folder
1
Open the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy
dialog box.
Note
•For the step to open the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy dialog box, see "Starting Color image-
RUNNER Enlargement Copy." ➔P.344
2
Click the Add button in Enlarged Copy Settings to
open the Destination Selection dialog box.
3
From the printer list in Destination, select the printer of destination.
4
Click the OK button to open the Add/Edit Hot Folder
dialog box.
5
In Name, enter the name to display in the Hot Folder list.
6
In Hot Folder, enter the Hot Folder name.
Creating a New Hot Folder
iPF785
User's Guide
Mac OS Software Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy
346
7
Click the OK button. The created Hot Folder is listed in
the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy dialog
box.
8
Click the Close button to close the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy dialog box.
9
From the Apple Menu, open the Sharing dialog box for System Preferences.
10
For OS X v10.6:
Check the File Sharing checkbox and click the Options button.
Check the Share files and folders using FTP and Share files and folders using SMB checkboxes to config-
ure the sharing.
For OS X v10.7 and later:
Check the File Sharing checkbox and click the Options button.
Check the Share files and folders using SMB checkbox to configure the sharing.
Note
•You can create up to 10 hot folders.
Editing a Hot Folder (Setting Print Conditions)
Editing a Hot Folder (Setting Print Conditions)
1
Open the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy
dialog box.
2
Select the Hot Folder from the Hot Folder list.
3
From Enlarged Copy Settings, click Edit button to open the Add/Edit Hot Folder dialog box.
iPF785
Editing a Hot Folder (Setting Print Conditions)
User's Guide
Mac OS Software Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy
347
6
Make the necessary settings in the Color Settings Pan-
el ➔P.356 .
7
Click the OK button to close the Add/Edit Hot Folder dialog box.
8
From the Apple Menu, open the Sharing dialog box for System Preferences.
9
For OS X v10.6:
Check the File Sharing checkbox and click the Options button.
Check the Share files and folders using FTP and Share files and folders using SMB checkboxes to config-
ure the sharing.
For OS X v10.7 and later:
Check the File Sharing checkbox and click the Options button.
Check the Share files and folders using SMB checkbox to configure the sharing.
Note
•If you've made shared settings when you created a new Hot Folder, you do not need to execute steps 8 to 9.
Deleting a Hot Folder
Deleting a Hot Folder
1
Open the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy
dialog box.
2
Select the Hot Folder you want to delete from the Hot Folder list.
iPF785
Deleting a Hot Folder
User's Guide
Mac OS Software Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy
349
3
Select Delete the entire folder, as well as items in the
list above, and then click the Delete button.
4
Read the messag,e and then click the OK button.
Note
•Select Delete files in the folder to delete only files in the hot folder.
Setting the Print Parameters
Setting the Print Parameters
You can set the print conditions in the setting panels within the Add/Edit Hot Folder dialog box.
The settings available on each panel are as follows.
•
Paper Settings Panel ➔P.350
•
Output Settings Panel ➔P.354
•
Color Settings Panel ➔P.356
Paper Settings Panel
Paper Settings Panel
•
Easy Settings / Advanced Settings
Two modes are available to provide the optimum print settings for jobs.
The settings available on each mode are as follows.
•
Easy Settings ➔P.352
•
Advanced Settings ➔P.353
•
Media Type
This allows you to select the media type.
Setting the Print Parameters
iPF785
User's Guide
Mac OS Software Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy
350
Note
•Always select media type that is actually set in the printer. When the media you chose is different from the media
set in the printer, you may not receive the desired print results.
•
Paper Source
You can select the paper source.
The following settings are available for paper source.
Setting Details
Manual Select for manual paper feed printing.
Roll Paper Select to print on roll paper.
•
Roll Paper Width
This selects the width of the roll media set to the printer.
Note
•Available only if rolls are selected in Paper Source.
•
Automatic Cutting
You can set the printer to cut roll paper automatically or print a guideline for cutting.
The following settings are available for automatic cutting.
Setting Details
Printer Default The value set on the printer operation panel takes priority.
None Each page is not cut after it is printed and printing continues without interruption.
Print Cut Guideline A print cut guideline is printed after each page and printing continues without interruption.
Note
•Available only if rolls are selected in Paper Source.
•
Copies
You can input the number of print copies in numerical characters.
Note
•The maximum value is 999.
•You can change the numbers by clicking either ▲ button or ▼ button.
iPF785
Paper Settings Panel
User's Guide
Mac OS Software Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy
351
Easy Settings
Easy Settings
You can easily select the best settings for the print job by just selecting an item from the print target list that matches
the content of the document.
•
Print Target
You can easily select the best settings for the print job simply.
If you select each Print Target item the corresponding comment for that item is displayed below the list.
Setting Details
Default Settings Suitable for printing normal documents that contain a mixture of text, photographs, and
graphics.
Office Document Suitable for printing handouts as well as general office documents for which print clarity is
key.
Poster The best setting for posters.Prints using vivid and high impact colors.
CAD (Color Line Drawing) Prints the fine lines of CAD drawings and other such documents sharp and clear.
CAD (B/W Line Drawing) Suitable for printing CAD drawings with sharp, dark lines.
Perspective, GIS Suitable for attractive printing of 3D-CAD drawings, perspective drawings, and GIS drawings
including maps.
Photo (Color) Suitable for printing photographic images captured with a digital camera.
Faithful Color Reproduction Prints by faithfully reproducing the colors of the original image.
Custom Settings Suitable for printing documents for which Advanced Settings have been specified.
Note
•The number of settings available for selection depends on the media type.
•
Print Quality
Selecting print quality strikes a balance between the quality of the printed image and printing speed.
The level of the print quality and resolution settings are displayed in the following combinations.
Setting Details
Print Quality Highest / High / Standard / Fast
Resolution 1200dpi / 600dpi / 300dpi
Easy Settings
iPF785
User's Guide
Mac OS Software Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy
352
Note
•The availability of settings is determined by the media type and print priority selections.
•Printing time is longer and more ink is consumed with High than with Fast, however, print quality is higher.
•Printing time is shorter and less ink is consumed with Fast than with High, however, print quality is lower.
Advanced Settings
Advanced Settings
Presents detailed settings for the print priority, the print quality, and other items so you can select the values for these
settings yourself.
•
Print Priority
Select a print quality mode that is appropriate for the print job.
Setting Details
Image This mode achieves the best results for printing photographic images and illustrations.
Line Drawing This mode is best for printing CAD drawings with fine lines or wall newssheet or other docu-
ments that contain large amounts of text. However, you may not achieve the quality you ex-
pect with printing photographs or other images with many filled areas. For these types of
jobs, select Image.
Office Document Prints common office documents, such as proposals, memos for distribution, etc., so they are
easy to read.
Note
•The number of settings available for selection depends on the media type.
•
Print Quality
Selecting print quality strikes a balance between the quality of the printed image and printing speed.
The level of the print quality and resolution settings are displayed in the following combinations.
Setting Details
Print Quality Highest / High / Standard / Fast
Resolution 1200dpi / 600dpi / 300dpi
iPF785
Advanced Settings
User's Guide
Mac OS Software Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy
353
Note
•The availability of settings is determined by the media type and print priority selections.
•Printing time is longer and more ink is consumed with High than with Fast, however, print quality is higher.
•Printing time is shorter and less ink is consumed with Fast than with High, however, print quality is lower.
Output Settings Panel
Output Settings Panel
•
Enlarged/Reduced Printing
Select the method for enlarged/reduced printing.
The following settings are available for enlarged/reduced printing.
Setting Details
Fit Paper Size Enlarges/reduces the whole page automatically to fit the media size selected for output. Se-
lect the media size to print from Paper Size.
Fit Roll Paper Width Enlarges/reduces the whole page automatically to fit the width of the roll paper with the page
width.
*Make sure that the width of the roll paper in the printer is set correctly for Roll Paper Width
in the Paper Settings panel.
*Displayed only if rolls are selected in Paper Source.
Scaling Enlarges/reduces the whole page by the scaling rate as specified. Input the scaling value in
numerical characters. You can specify a range between 5 and 600%.
*You can change the numbers by clicking either ▲ button or ▼ button.
*Although Scaling can be set to make the image larger than the media size, the part that
does not fit in the media cannot be printed.
*This is not displayed when a checkmark is placed in Borderless Printing.
•
Borderless Printing
You can print the media without margins on all sides when the roll paper with the specific width and the specific
media type is used.
Note
•Available only if rolls are selected in Paper Source.
Output Settings Panel
iPF785
User's Guide
Mac OS Software Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy
354
•
Paper Size
You can select the size of the print media.
Note
•This is not displayed when Fit Roll Paper Width is set in Enlarged/Reduced Printing.
•
Print Centered
Select this feature to print the image in the center of a cut sheet or to print left and right margins evenly from the
edges of roll paper.
Note
•This feature is useful when you print the document enlarged or reduced with Scaling as well. When an image is
scaled, it is always enlarged or reduced in reference to a starting point in the upper left corner of the page. If the
image is reduced, the bottom and right margins are enlarged and the top and left margins remain unchanged. At
that point, you can set all margins evenly with this feature.
•
No Spaces at Top or Bottom
You can set the printer to print without any empty area when the print data contains empty area at the top or bot-
tom. Since the printer does not feed paper over the empty area, you can save paper.
Note
•Available only if rolls are selected in Paper Source.
•
Rotate Page
Select the method for rotating page.
The following settings are available for rotating page.
Setting Details
Rotate Right 90 Degrees Rotates the portrait page right 90 degrees and print in landscape orientation. When the rota-
ted page can fit in the width of roll paper, the page is rotated automatically, and when it can
not fit in the width of roll paper, the page is not rotated.
*When Fit Roll Paper Width is selected under Enlarged/Reduced Printing, then the image
is enlarged or reduced after rotating to fit the width of the roll paper.
Rotate Left 90 Degrees Rotates the portrait page left 90 degrees and print in landscape orientation. When the rotated
page can fit in the width of roll paper, the page is rotated automatically, and when it can not fit
in the width of roll paper, the page is not rotated.
*When Fit Roll Paper Width is selected under Enlarged/Reduced Printing, then the image
is enlarged or reduced after rotating to fit the width of the roll paper.
Rotate 180 degrees Allows you to rotate the image 180 degrees from the vertical to the right.
Note
•Available only if rolls are selected in Paper Source.
•
Output Method Button
Click the button to open the Output Method dialog box.
In this dialog box, you can specify the object output method.
iPF785
Output Settings Panel
User's Guide
Mac OS Software Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy
355
Color Settings Panel
Color Settings Panel
•
Color Mode
You can select a color mode to suit the print job.
Setting Details
Color Enables color printing.
Monochrome Disables color printing and converts image from continuous color to grayscaled mono-
chrome.
Color (CAD) Prints lines in the best color possible so they are easy to see.
Monochrome Bitmap Prints all colors other than white in black.
Monochrome (BK ink) Select to print all lines with black ink.
Note
•The availability of settings depends on the print priority and media type selections.
•
Matching Mode
Under Matching Mode, select the matching mode.
Setting Details
Driver Matching Mode ➔P.357 Enables printing of optimal color tones using a driver specific color profile. You should nor-
mally select this mode.
ICC Matching Mode ➔P.358 Enables color matching using ICC profiles. Select this if you want to print by specifying the
input profile, printer profile, and matching method in detail. This allows you to use ICC pro-
files for digital cameras and scanners, ICC profiles created using the profile creation tool, etc.
No Correction No color matching is performed. Select this option when you want to perform color matching
in the software application.
Color Settings Panel
iPF785
User's Guide
Mac OS Software Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy
356
Driver Matching Mode
Driver Matching Mode
1
Under Matching Mode, select Driver Matching Mode.
2
Click Matching Method list, and then select a setting.
Setting Details
Auto Automatically selects the best color matching method for each Image, Graphics, Text.
Perceptual Color-matching optimized for printing typical photos attractively. Smooth gradation is a fea-
ture. This is also an easy-to-use mode when performing color adjustment using application
software.
Saturation Color-matching optimized for printing posters, etc., vividly.
Colorimetric Color-matching optimized for printing image data with accurate colors in input color space.
This is the easiest-to-use mode when you want to adjust the color and print. However, gra-
dation may be lost for colors of wider range than the color reproduction range of the printer.
Generally, this is also called relative colorimetric.
iPF785
Driver Matching Mode
User's Guide
Mac OS Software Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy
357
ICC Matching Mode
ICC Matching Mode
1
Under Matching Mode, select ICC Matching Mode.
2
Click Matching Method list, and then select a setting.
Setting Details
Perceptual Color-matching optimized for printing typical photos attractively. Smooth gradation is a fea-
ture. This is also an easy-to-use mode when performing color adjustment using application
software.
Saturation Color-matching optimized for printing posters, etc., vividly.
Colorimetric Color-matching optimized for printing image data with accurate colors in input color space.
This is the easiest-to-use mode when you want to adjust the color and print. However, gra-
dation may be lost for colors of wider range than the color reproduction range of the printer.
Generally, this is also called relative colorimetric.
Colorimetric (No White-Point Cor-
rection)
The processing method of color-matching is identical to Colorimetric. Use this when you
want to further reproduce the target paper material color of the image data. Generally, this
also is called absolute colorimetric.
3
Click the Input Profile list, and then select an input profile.
Note
•To match the color on the printing, select the input profile for Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy of the
Color imageRUNNER type in use.
4
Click the Printer Profile list, and then select a printer profile.
Printing Enlargements of Scanned Originals from a Color imageRUNNER
Printing Enlargements of Scanned Originals from a Color imageRUNNER
Scanned originals from a Color imageRUNNER can be enlarged and printed automatically.
Originals you create by scanning with a Color imageRUNNER are transferred to a "hot folder" and printed automatically
after enlargement according to printing conditions you specify for that folder.
This processing sequence is called the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy function.
To use Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy, first complete these settings in the following order.
1.
Register a hot folder on your computer.
ICC Matching Mode
iPF785
User's Guide
Mac OS Software Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy
358
Register a hot folder on your computer for storing scanned originals from the Color imageRUNNER and complete
the settings for enlargement copy. For details, see "Creating a New Hot Folder." ➔P.346
2.
Complete the scanning settings on the Color imageRUNNER.
Configure the Color imageRUNNER to send scanned originals to the hot folder.
After these settings are complete, you can print enlarged copies of scanned originals from the Color imageRUNNER.
Completing the scanning settings on the Color imageRUNNER.
Configure the Color imageRUNNER to send scanned originals to the hot folder. It is easy to send scanned originals to
the hot folder if you assign the scanning settings and destination to a Favorites button on the Color imageRUNNER.
For instructions on assigning scanning and sending settings to the Favorites button, refer to the Color imageRUNNER
manual.
Scanning the original and print an enlargement
Follow the steps below to scan an original on the Color imageRUNNER for enlarged printing on the printer. For detailed
instructions, refer to the Color imageRUNNER manual.
1
Load the original on the platen glass or document feeder of the Color imageRUNNER.
2
Press Send to display the screen for transmission.
3
Press Favorites, and then press the Favorites button assigned to the hot folder.
4
Press Start on the control panel. If you scan originals on the platen glass, after scanning all originals, press
Done on the touch-panel display.
Scanned originals are sent to the hot folder and automatically enlarged and printed following the conditions you
specified for the folder.
iPF785
Printing Enlargements of Scanned Originals from a Color imageRUNNER
User's Guide
Mac OS Software Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy
359
iPF785
User's Guide
Basic Printing Workow 15
Enhanced Printing Options 31
Windows Software 157
Mac OS Software 277
Handling and Use of Paper
Paper ....................................................................................................... 362
Handling rolls ........................................................................................... 372
Handling sheets ....................................................................................... 394
Output Stacker ......................................................................................... 400
Media Configuration Tool (Windows) ....................................................... 405
Media Configuration Tool (Mac OS) ........................................................ 419
Control Panel 435
Printer Parts 475
Network Setting 489
Print Job Management 509
Adjustments for Better Print Quality 571
Maintenance and Consumables 587
Troubleshooting 625
Error Message 655
Specications 679
Appendix 683
imagePROGRAF
Handling and Use of Paper
361
Paper
Paper
Types of Paper .........................................................................................................................................................................362
Paper Sizes ................................................................................................................................................................................ 362
Using Paper Other Than Genuine Paper and feed conrmed Paper ...............................................................364
Printing on Paper Other Than Genuine Paper and feed conrmed Paper Using Existing Settings
......................365
Displaying the Paper Reference Guide ......................................................................................................................... 366
Updating paper information .............................................................................................................................................. 368
Types of Paper
Types of Paper
The following types of paper are supported by the printer. For details on the paper supported by the printer, refer to the
Paper Reference Guide. (See "Displaying the Paper Reference Guide.") ➔P.366
•
Plain Paper
•
Coated Paper
•
Photo Paper
•
Glossy Paper
•
Proofing Paper
•
CAD-dedicated Paper Etc.
The following content is described in the Paper Reference Guide.
•
Types of paper
•
Paper handling
•
Paper product specifications
•
Use precautions
•
Setting of printer driver, control panel etc.
•
Paper Reference Guide display method
You can display the Paper Reference Guide from [imagePROGRAF Support Information]. (See "Displaying the
Paper Reference Guide.") ➔P.366
1.
Method of Updating Supported Paper
Photo Paper
To use newly released paper, register the latest paper information on the printer with the Media Configuration Tool.
(See "Updating paper information.") ➔P.368
Important
•To install the Paper Reference Guide and register paper types applicable to your region on your printer even
when not using the printer driver, install the Media Configuration Tool.
(See "Media Configuration Tool(Windows).") ➔P.405
(See "Media Configuration Tool(Mac OS).") ➔P.419
Paper Sizes
Paper Sizes
Rolls
Rolls that meet the following conditions are supported.
•
Outer diameter: Up to 150 mm (6 in)
•
Inner diameter of paper core: 2 or 3 inches
•
Printing side out
Types of Paper
iPF785
User's Guide
Handling and Use of Paper Paper
362
Roll Width Roll Paper Width Setting in Printer Driver Borderless Printing (*1)
914.4 mm (36.00 in) 36-in. Roll (914.4mm) Yes
841.0 mm (33.11 in) ISO A0/A1 Roll (841.0mm) Yes
762.0 mm (30.00 in) 30-in. Roll (762.0mm) No
728.0 mm (28.66 in) JIS B1/B2 Roll (728.0mm) Yes
609.6 mm (24.00 in) 24-in. Roll (609.6mm) Yes
594.0 mm (23.39 in) ISO A1/A2 Roll (594.0mm) Yes
515.0 mm (20.28 in) JIS B2/B3 Roll (515.0mm) Yes
431.8 mm (17.00 in) 17-in. Roll (431.8mm) Yes
420.0 mm (16.54 in) ISO A2/A3 Roll (420.0mm) Yes
406.4 mm (16.00 in) 16-in. Roll (406.4mm) No
355.6 mm (14.00 in) 14-in. Roll (355.6mm) Yes
300.0 mm (11.81 in) 300mm Roll (300.0mm) Yes
297.0 mm (11.69 in) ISO A3/A4 Roll (297.0mm) Yes
257.0 mm (10.12 in) JIS B4 Roll (257.0mm) Yes
254.0 mm (10.00 in) 10-in. Roll (254.0mm) Yes
*1: For information on types of paper compatible with borderless printing, refer to the Paper Reference Guide. (See "Types of
Paper.") ➔P.362
Sheets
Sheets of the following sizes are supported.
Paper Sizes Dimensions
ISO A0 841.0 × 1189.0 mm (33.11 × 46.81 in)
ISO A1 594.0 × 841.0 mm (23.39 × 33.11 in)
ISO A2+ 431.8 × 609.6 mm (17.00 × 24.00 in)
ISO A2 420.0 × 594.0 mm (16.54 × 23.39 in)
ISO A3+ 329.0 × 483.0 mm (12.95 × 19.02 in)
ISO A3 297.0 × 420.0 mm (11.69 × 16.54 in)
ISO A4 210.0 × 297.0 mm (8.27 × 11.69 in)
ISO B1 707.0 × 1000.0 mm (27.83 × 39.37 in)
ISO B2 500.0 × 707.0 mm (19.69 × 27.83 in)
ISO B3 353.0 × 500.0 mm (13.90 × 19.69 in)
ISO B4 250.0 × 353.0 mm (9.84 × 13.90 in)
JIS B1 728.0 × 1030.0 mm (28.66 × 40.55 in)
JIS B2 515.0 × 728.0 mm (20.28 × 28.66 in)
JIS B3 364.0 × 515.0 mm (14.33 × 20.28 in)
JIS B4 257.0 × 364.0 mm (10.12 × 14.33 in)
34"x44"(ANSI E) 863.6 × 1117.6 mm (34.00 × 44.00 in)
28"x40"(ANSI F) 711.2 × 1016.0 mm (28.00 × 40.00 in)
22"x34"(ANSI D) 558.8 × 863.6 mm (22.00 × 34.00 in)
17"x22"(ANSI C) 431.8 × 558.8 mm (17.00 × 22.00 in)
11"x17"(Ledger) 279.4 × 431.8 mm (11.00 × 17.00 in)
13"x19"(Super B) 330.2 × 482.6 mm (13.00 × 19.00 in)
iPF785
Paper Sizes
User's Guide
Handling and Use of Paper Paper
363
Paper Sizes Dimensions
Letter(8.5"x11") 215.9 × 279.4 mm (8.50 × 11.00 in)
Legal(8.5"x14") 215.9 × 355.6 mm (8.50 × 14.00 in)
36"x48"(ARCH E) 914.4 × 1219.2 mm (36.00 × 48.00 in)
30"x42"(ARCH E1) 762.0 × 1066.8 mm (30.00 × 42.00 in)
26"x38"(ARCH E2) 660.4 × 965.2 mm (26.00 × 38.00 in)
27"x39"(ARCH E3) 685.8 × 990.6 mm (27.00 × 39.00 in)
24"x36"(ARCH D) 609.6 × 914.4 mm (24.00 × 36.00 in)
18"x24"(ARCH C) 457.2 × 609.6 mm (18.00 × 24.00 in)
12"x18"(ARCH B) 304.8 × 457.2 mm (12.00 × 18.00 in)
9"x12"(ARCH A) 228.6 × 304.8 mm (9.00 × 12.00 in)
DIN C0 917.0 × 1296.0 mm (36.10 × 51.02 in)
DIN C1 648.0 × 917.0 mm (25.51 × 36.10 in)
DIN C2 458.0 × 648.0 mm (18.03 × 25.51 in)
DIN C3 324.0 × 458.0 mm (12.76 × 18.03 in)
DIN C4 229.0 × 324.0 mm (9.02 × 12.76 in)
20"x24" 508.0 × 609.6 mm (20.00 × 24.00 in)
18"x22" 457.2 × 558.8 mm (18.00 × 22.00 in)
14"x17" 355.6 × 431.8 mm (14.00 × 17.00 in)
12"x16" 304.8 × 406.4 mm (12.00 × 16.00 in)
10"x12" 254.0 × 304.8 mm (10.00 × 12.00 in)
10"x15" 254.0 × 381.0 mm (10.00 × 15.00 in)
US Photo 16"x20" 406.4 × 508.0 mm (16.00 × 20.00 in)
Poster 20"x30" 508.0 × 762.0 mm (20.00 × 30.00 in)
Poster 30"x40" 762.0 × 1016.0 mm (30.00 × 40.00 in)
13"x22" 329.0 × 558.0 mm (12.95 × 21.97 in)
Poster 300x900mm 300.0 × 900.0 mm (11.81 × 35.43 in)
Custom Paper Size 203.2 x 203.2 mm (8.00 x 8.00 in) to 917.0 x 1600.0 mm (36.10 x 62.99 in)
Note
•For details on non-standard paper sizes, see "Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes." ➔P.104
•Borderless printing is not supported on sheets.
Using Paper Other Than Genuine Paper and feed confirmed Paper
Using Paper Other Than Genuine Paper and feed confirmed Paper
When using this printer to print on paper other than genuine Canon paper and feed confirmed paper, use paper that
meets the following conditions.
Note
•Refer to Paper Reference Guide for details on genuine Canon paper and feed confirmed paper. (See "Displaying the
Paper Reference Guide.") ➔P.366
•
Paper where the size is described in "Paper Sizes" (See "Paper Sizes.") ➔P.362
•
Paper where the thickness is described in "Paper Thickness" in "Specifications" (See "Specifications.") ➔P.680
•
Paper where bleeding and ink overflow does not occur when printing
•
Paper that does not warp severely when loading the paper or printing
Using Paper Other Than Genuine Paper and feed conrmed Paper
iPF785
User's Guide
Handling and Use of Paper Paper
364
Important
•If you use paper other than genuine Canon paper and feed confirmed paper, Canon provides absolutely no guaran-
tees regarding print quality or paper feed properties. Refer to Paper Reference Guide for details on genuine Canon
paper and feed confirmed paper. (See "Displaying the Paper Reference Guide.") ➔P.366
Load paper in the printer and then select the paper type in the control panel and printer driver and print.
You can print easily by selecting from existing settings provided in the printer control panel and printer driver. (See
"Printing on Paper Other Than Genuine Paper and feed confirmed Paper Using Existing Settings.") ➔P.365
Printing on Paper Other Than Genuine Paper and feed confirmed Paper Using Existing Settings
Printing on Paper Other Than Genuine Paper and feed confirmed Paper Using Existing Settings
You can easily print on paper other than genuine Canon paper and feed confirmed paper without making complicated
settings by selecting existing settings provided in the printer control panel and printer driver depending on the media
type you are using. The existing settings consist of general-purpose paper settings provided for each media type and
special settings that allow you to select the amount of ink to use.
Important
•The genuine Canon paper settings provided in the printer control panel and printer driver are optimized for genuine
Canon paper. If these settings are selected for printing on paper other than genuine Canon paper, the ink may bleed
or the printhead may rub against the paper. In order to easily print on paper other than genuine Canon paper and feed
confirmed paper, we recommend that you select one of the following general-purpose paper settings or special set-
tings.
Note
•For an overview of the media types, see "Types of Paper." ➔P.362
•For details on how to select the media type in the control panel and printer driver, see "Types of Paper." ➔P.362
Choosing General-Purpose Paper Settings
Since these settings anticipate a wide variety of paper other than genuine Canon paper and feed confirmed paper,
these settings will make it difficult for bleeding ink and the printhead rubbing to occur. Refer to the following table for
the relationships between the conditions of the paper other than genuine Canon paper and feed confirmed paper and
the media type to select.
Type Approximate weight Approximate thickness Printer control panel Printer driver
Plain Paper 70 g/m² 0.09 mm (0.0035 in.) Plain Paper Plain Paper
Coated Paper 90 g/m² 0.13 mm (0.0051 in.) LW. Coated Paper Lightweight Coated Paper
170 g/m² 0.22 mm (0.0087 in.) HW. Coated Paper Heavyweight Coated Paper
Photo Paper 180 g/m² 0.18 mm (0.0071 in.) LW. Photo Paper Lightweight Photo Paper
LWPhotoPaper(LI)(*1)Lightweight Photo Paper (LowInk)(*1)
260 g/m² 0.26 mm (0.010 in.) HW. Photo Paper Heavyweight Photo Paper
HWPhotoPaper(LI)(*1)Heavyweight Photo Paper (LowInk)(*1)
Proof 80 g/m² 0.10 mm (0.0039 in.) News Proof (*2)
Sign/CAD Paper 150 g/m² 0.11 mm (0.0043 in.) CAD Clear Film CAD Clear Film
90 g/m² 0.08mm (0.0031 in.) CAD Trce(LowInk) CAD Tracing Paper (Low Ink)
100 g/m² 0.13 mm (0.0051 in.) Syn.Papr(LowInk) Synthetic Paper (LowInk)
*1: Print using slightly less ink. Try this if you are concerned about rubbing of ink after printing.
*2: Software RIP is required separately.
Selecting Special Settings
Special settings are provided that allow you to select the amount of ink used in steps. You can fix lackluster colors or
bleeding ink by selecting special settings where the amount of ink used is suitable for the paper you are using.
iPF785
Printing on Paper Other Than Genuine Paper and feed conrmed Paper Using Existing Settings
User's Guide
Handling and Use of Paper Paper
365
"Special 1" uses the least amount of ink, with the amount of ink used increasing through 5 steps as the number increa-
ses up to "Special 5" which uses the greatest amount of ink. Although colors become more vivid as the amount of ink
used increases, bleeding also occurs more easily. We recommend that you try in order starting from "Special 1" while
checking the state of the printing.
Displaying the Paper Reference Guide
Displaying the Paper Reference Guide
The Paper Reference Guide are not included. To view, display the Paper Reference Guide on the website from the
links in the installed software. An Internet connection is required in order to view them.
•
Windows
The basic instructions for displaying the Paper Reference Guide from the printer driver are as follows.
1.
Open the printer driver.
(See "Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from Applications (Windows).") ➔P.164
(See "Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from the Operating System Menu (Windows).") ➔P.166
2.
Select the Support sheet and click the User Manual
button.
3.
Click Paper Reference Guide.
•
Mac OS
The basic instructions for displaying the Paper Reference Guide from the imagePROGRAF Printmonitor are as
follows.
1.
Click the System Preferences icon in the Dock.
Displaying the Paper Reference Guide
iPF785
User's Guide
Handling and Use of Paper Paper
366
2.
Click Print & Scan. (This is identified as Printers & Scan-
ners or Print & Fax in other versions of Mac OS X.)
3.
Select the printer from the list of printers and click Options &
Supplies.
4.
Click Utility.
5.
Click Open Printer Utility.
iPF785
Displaying the Paper Reference Guide
User's Guide
Handling and Use of Paper Paper
367
6.
Click Support.
7.
Click the User Manual button.
8.
Click Paper Reference Guide.
Updating paper information
Updating paper information
As for paper information of the printer Control Panel and printer driver, you can update it to the latest information by
downloading and installing the latest version of Media Information File from the imagePROGRAF website.
The latest Media Information File can be downloaded by accessing the imagePROGRAF website from the links in the
software installed on your computer. Contact your Canon dealer if you are unable to download it.
For details on Media Information File (Media Information File), refer as follows.
•
Media Configuration Tool ➔P.405 (Windows)
•
Media Configuration Tool ➔P.419 （Mac OS）
Updating paper information
iPF785
User's Guide
Handling and Use of Paper Paper
368
Important
•When your version of Media Configuration Tool is older than the version released on the imagePROGRAF web-
site, download and install the latest version of Media Configuration Tool before installing Media Information
File. If you do not install the latest version of Media Configuration Tool before installing Media Information File,
the latest paper information cannot be updated.
•
Windows
The basic instructions for accessing the dedicated website from the printer driver are as follows.
1.
Open the printer driver.
(See "Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from Applications (Windows).") ➔P.164
(See "Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from the Operating System Menu (Windows).") ➔P.166
2.
Select the Support sheet and click the Support In-
formation button.
The default browser on your computer is started and
the imagePROGRAF webpage is displayed.
•
Mac OS
The basic instructions for accessing the dedicated website from the imagePROGRAF Printmonitor are as follows.
1.
Click the System Preferences icon in the Dock.
2.
Click Print & Scan. (This is identified as Printers & Scan-
ners or Print & Fax in other versions of Mac OS X.)
iPF785
Updating paper information
User's Guide
Handling and Use of Paper Paper
369
Handling rolls
Handling rolls
Attaching the Roll Holder to Rolls ................................................................................................................................... 372
Loading Rolls in the Printer ................................................................................................................................................ 375
Changing the Type of Paper .............................................................................................................................................. 378
Specifying the Paper Length ............................................................................................................................................. 380
Removing the Roll from the Printer ............................................................................................................................... 380
Removing the Roll Holder from Rolls .............................................................................................................................383
➔Clearing Jammed Roll Paper .......................................................................................................................................627
➔Clearing Jammed Paper (Paper Feed Slot) .......................................................................................................... 633
Feeding Roll Paper Manually ............................................................................................................................................. 384
Keeping Track of the Amount of Roll Paper Left ..................................................................................................... 385
Specifying the Ink Drying Time for Rolls ......................................................................................................................385
Specifying the Cutting Method for Rolls ..................................................................................................................... 388
Cutting the Leading Edge of Roll Paper Automatically ..........................................................................................391
Reducing Dust from Cutting Rolls .................................................................................................................................. 393
Roll Holder Set ......................................................................................................................................................................... 487
Attaching the Roll Holder to Rolls
Attaching the Roll Holder to Rolls
When printing on rolls, attach the Roll Holder to the roll.
Rolls have a two- or three-inch paper core. Use the correct attachment for the paper core. The printer comes equipped
with the 2-Inch Paper Core Attachment installed.
Using Rolls with a 2-Inch Paper Core Using Rolls with a 3-Inch Paper Core
Holder Stopper (Left Side) Roll Holder (Right Side) Holder Stopper (Left Side) Roll Holder (Right Side)
2-Inch Paper Core Attachment No Attachment Needed 3-Inch Paper Core Attachment L 3-Inch Paper Core Attachment R
Caution
•Set the roll on a table or other flat surface so that it does not roll or fall. Rolls are heavy, and dropping a roll may cause
injury.
Attaching the Roll Holder to Rolls
iPF785
User's Guide
Handling and Use of Paper Handling rolls
372
Important
•When handling the roll, be careful not to soil the printing surface. This may affect the printing quality. We recommend
wearing clean cloth gloves when handling rolls to protect the printing surface.
•Use scissors or a cutting tool to cut the edge of the roll paper if it is uneven, dirty, or has tape residue. Otherwise, it
may cause feeding problems and affect the printing quality. Be careful not to cut through any barcodes printed on the
roll.
•Align the edges of the paper on both ends of the roll. Misalignment may cause feeding problems.
Note
•For details on supported sizes and types of rolls, see Paper Sizes or the Paper Reference Guide. (See "Paper
Sizes.") ➔P.362 (See "Displaying the Paper Reference Guide.") ➔P.366
•To view instructions as you attach the Roll Holder, press the Navigate button. (See "How to View Instructions with Navi-
gate.") ➔P.443
1
Lift the Holder Stopper lever (a) from the shaft side to
unlock it. Holding the Holder Stopper at the position in-
dicated (b), remove it from the Roll Holder.
2
Insert the respective attachments for the roll paper core on the Roll Holder and Holder Stopper.
•
Using rolls with a 2-inch paper core
Holder Stopper (Left Side) Roll Holder (Right
Side)
Align the tips (a) of the 2-Inch Paper Core Attachment with the holes (b) of the Holder Stopper and insert
it firmly.
No attachment is
needed.
iPF785
Attaching the Roll Holder to Rolls
User's Guide
Handling and Use of Paper Handling rolls
373
•
Using rolls with a 3-inch paper core
Holder Stopper (Left Side) Roll Holder (Right Side)
Align the tips (a) of the 3-Inch Paper Core Attachment L with
the holes (b) of the Holder Stopper and insert it firmly.
Align the tips (a) of 3-Inch Paper Core Attachment R with the
holes (b) of the Roll Holder and insert it firmly.
3
With the edge of the roll paper facing forward as shown,
insert the Roll Holder from the right of the roll. Insert it
firmly until the roll touches the flange (a) of the Roll Hold-
er, leaving no gap.
Attaching the Roll Holder to Rolls
iPF785
User's Guide
Handling and Use of Paper Handling rolls
374
4
Insert the Holder Stopper from the left in the Roll Holder
as shown. Holding it at the position shown (b), push it
firmly in until the flange (a) of the Holder Stopper touches
the roll. Lock the Holder Stopper lever (c) by pushing it
down toward the shaft side.
Loading Rolls in the Printer
Loading Rolls in the Printer
Follow these steps to load rolls in the printer.
Note
•Before loading rolls, make sure the printer is clean inside the Top Cover and around the Ejection Guide. If these areas
are dirty, we recommend cleaning them in advance. (See "Cleaning Inside the Top Cover.") ➔P.612
1
Press the Load button.
2
Press ▲ or ▼ to select "Load Roll Paper", and then press the OK button.
Note
•If any paper has been advanced that will not be used, a message is shown requesting you to remove it.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Yes, and then press the OK button. Remove the paper and go to the next step.
iPF785
Loading Rolls in the Printer
User's Guide
Handling and Use of Paper Handling rolls
375
3
Positioning your hands as shown, open the Roll Cover.
4
Holding the Roll Holder flange (a), rest the Roll Holder
shaft on the Roll Ledge (b).
At this time, position the holder so that the R label (c)
on the [W label (c) on the Roll Holder flange is aligned
with the R label (d) on the printer .
Loading Rolls in the Printer
iPF785
User's Guide
Handling and Use of Paper Handling rolls
376
5
Holding the Roll Holder flange (a), guide the holder
along the Roll Loading Slots (b) on both ends, keeping
the holder level as you load it in the Roll Holder Slot.
Caution
•Do not force the Roll Holder into the printer with the right and left ends reversed. This may damage the printer
and Roll Holder.
•Do not release the flanges until the holder is loaded in the Roll Holder Slot.
•Be careful not to pinch your fingers between the Roll Loading Slots (b) and the Roll Holder shaft (c) when
loading rolls.
6
Insert the edge of the roll in the Paper Feed Slot (a) and
advance the roll until you hear the feed tone.
Important
•Be careful not to soil the printing surface of roll paper as you insert it in the slot. This may affect the printing
quality. We recommend wearing clean cloth gloves when handling rolls to protect the printing surface.
•If the paper is wrinkled or warped, straighten it out before loading it.
•Load paper straight so it is not fed askew.
7
Once paper feeding starts, you will need to do the following, based on the ManageRemainRoll setting and the
barcode printed on rolls. (See "Keeping Track of the Amount of Roll Paper Left.") ➔P.385
ManageRe-
mainRoll Barcodes Printer Operation After the Paper is Fed
Off Printed A menu for selection of the type of paper is automatically shown on the Display Screen.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select the type of paper, and then press the OK button.
Not printed
On Printed The type and amount of paper left is automatically detected based on the barcode printed on the roll.
There is no need to specify the type and length of the paper.
Not printed A menu for selection of the paper type and length is automatically shown on the Display Screen.
iPF785
Loading Rolls in the Printer
User's Guide
Handling and Use of Paper Handling rolls
377
ManageRe-
mainRoll Barcodes Printer Operation After the Paper is Fed
On Not printed Press ▲ or ▼ to select the type and length of paper loaded, and then press the OK button.
Note
•For details on types of paper to select, see the Paper Reference Guide. (See "Displaying the Paper Refer-
ence Guide.") ➔P.366
8
Holding it at the positions indicated, close the Roll Cover.
Note
•Cut the edge of the roll after the paper is advanced if it is soiled or if there are cuts from scissors or the blade
after removing creased edges. (See "Specifying the Cutting Method for Rolls.") ➔P.388
Changing the Type of Paper
Changing the Type of Paper
Follow these steps to change the type of paper specified on the printer after you have loaded paper.
If you will continue using this type of paper later, selecting Keep Paper Type > On will save the time and effort of con-
figuring the media type setting when you load the paper again. The current media type settings before you select On
will be automatically selected at that time. (See "Using the Same Type of Paper Regularly.") ➔P.379
Important
•For best printing results, the printer fine-tunes the print head height and the feed amount for each type of paper. Be
sure to select the type of paper to use correctly before printing.
•Because the printer fine-tunes the feed amount for each type of paper, the margins and the size of printed images
may vary depending on the type of paper used. If margins and the size of images are not as you expected, adjust the
paper feed amount.
(See "Adjusting the Feed Amount.") ➔P.579
•Rolls and sheets have different printing areas, and sheets having a larger bottom margin than rolls.
(See "Print Area.") ➔P.681
Changing the Type of Paper
Note
•When you load a roll, a menu for selection of the type of paper is shown on the Display Screen. Select the type of
paper, and then press the OK button.
If no barcode has been printed on the roll and you have set ManageRemainRoll to On, specify the roll length after the
type of paper. (See "Specifying the Paper Length.") ➔P.380
1
On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel, press ◀ or ▶ to se-
lect the Paper tab ( ).
Changing the Type of Paper
iPF785
User's Guide
Handling and Use of Paper Handling rolls
378
Note
•If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.
2
Press the OK button.
The Paper Menu is displayed.
3
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Chg. Paper Type, and then press the OK button.
4
Press ▲ or ▼ to select the type of paper loaded ( Roll Paper or Cut Sheet ), and then press the OK button.
5
Press ▲ or ▼ to select the type of paper loaded in the printer, and then press the OK button.
Important
•Be sure to select the correct paper type. If this setting does not match the loaded paper, it may cause feed
errors and affect printing quality.
Note
•For details on types of paper, see the Paper Reference Guide. (See "Types of Paper.") ➔P.362 By default,
Plain Paper is selected.
•If you move the Release Lever, the setting automatically reverts to the previously selected paper.
Using the Same Type of Paper Regularly
Configure this setting so that current media type settings will be automatically selected when you load the same type of
paper later.
1
On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel, press ◀ or ▶ to se-
lect the Paper tab ( ).
Note
•If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.
2
Press the OK button.
The Paper Menu is displayed.
3
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Keep Paper Type, and then press the OK button.
4
Press ▲ or ▼ to select On, and then press the OK button.
Note
•The specified media type setting is updated in the following situations.
•When using sheets, if you send a print job before loading a sheet, the media type setting is updated to match the
type of paper specified by the print job.
•When you have selected ManageRemainRoll > On on the Control Panel and a barcode is printed on the roll, the
media type setting is updated to match the type of paper specified by the barcode.
•To change the media type setting, see "Changing the Type of Paper." ➔P.378
iPF785
Changing the Type of Paper
User's Guide
Handling and Use of Paper Handling rolls
379
Specifying the Paper Length
Specifying the Paper Length
When changing the length of paper after the paper has been advanced, specify the length as follows.
Note
•Specify the paper length when you have set ManageRemainRoll to On. (See "Keeping Track of the Amount of Roll
Paper Left.") ➔P.385
1
On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel, press ◀ or ▶ to se-
lect the Paper tab ( ).
Note
•If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.
2
Press the OK button.
The Paper Menu is displayed.
3
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Chg. Paper Size, and then press the OK button.
4
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Roll Length, and then press the OK button.
5
Press ▲ or ▼ to select the length of paper loaded in the printer, and then press the OK button.
Specify the roll length as follows.
1.
Press the ◀ or ▶ button to move to the next field for input.
2.
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to enter the value.
3.
Repeat steps 1 and 2 to finish entering the value, and then press the OK button.
Removing the Roll from the Printer
Removing the Roll from the Printer
Remove rolls from the printer as follows.
Note
•If you need to cut the roll, see "Specifying the Cutting Method for Rolls." ➔P.388
1
On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel, press ◀ or ▶ to se-
lect the Paper tab ( ).
Note
•If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.
2
Press the OK button.
The Paper Menu is displayed.
3
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Eject Paper, and then press the OK button.
Specifying the Paper Length
iPF785
User's Guide
Handling and Use of Paper Handling rolls
380
4
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Yes, and then press the OK button.
The roll is now rewound and ejected.
Caution
•If you have selected ManageRemainRoll > On in the
Control Panel menu, a barcode is printed on the lead-
ing edge of the roll.
Do not remove the roll before the barcode is printed.
You will be unable to keep track of the amount of roll
paper left. (See "Keeping Track of the Amount of Roll Paper Left.") ➔P.385
5
Positioning your hands as shown, open the Roll Cover.
6
Using both hands, rotate the Roll Holder toward the back to
rewind the roll.
iPF785
Removing the Roll from the Printer
User's Guide
Handling and Use of Paper Handling rolls
381
7
Holding the Roll Holder flange (a), remove the holder from
the Roll Holder Slot.
Note
•For instructions on removing the Roll Holder from rolls, see "Removing the Roll Holder from Rolls." ➔P.383
8
Holding it at the positions indicated, close the Roll Cover.
Note
•To load new roll paper in the printer at this point, see "Loading Rolls in the Printer." ➔P.375
Removing the Roll from the Printer
iPF785
User's Guide
Handling and Use of Paper Handling rolls
382
Removing the Roll Holder from Rolls
Removing the Roll Holder from Rolls
1
Lift the Holder Stopper lever (a) from the shaft side to
unlock it. Holding the Holder Stopper at the position in-
dicated (b), remove it from the Roll Holder.
2
Remove the Roll Holder from the roll.
3
When removing attachments, push the tips (a) in as you remove the attachment.
•
3-Inch Paper Core Attachment R (Roll Holder side)
iPF785
Removing the Roll Holder from Rolls
User's Guide
Handling and Use of Paper Handling rolls
383
•
3-Inch Paper Core Attachment L (Holder Stopper side)
•
2-Inch Paper Core Attachment
Important
•Store the roll in the original bag or box, away from high temperature, humidity, and direct sunlight. If paper is not
stored properly, the printing surface may become scratched, which may affect the printing quality when you use it
again.
Feeding Roll Paper Manually
Feeding Roll Paper Manually
After a roll has been advanced, you can press the Feed button to feed or retract the roll with the ▲ and ▼ buttons.
1
Press the Feed button.
2
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to advance or retract the roll.
Press ▲ to retract the roll manually.
Press ▼ to advance the roll manually.
Note
•If you hold down ▲ or ▼ for less than a second, the roll will move about 1 mm (0.04 in).
If you hold down ▲ or ▼ for more than a second, the roll will move until you release the button. Release the button
when the Display Screen indicates "End of paper feed. Cannot feed paper more.".
Feeding Roll Paper Manually
iPF785
User's Guide
Handling and Use of Paper Handling rolls
384
Keeping Track of the Amount of Roll Paper Left
Keeping Track of the Amount of Roll Paper Left
Setting ManageRemainRoll to On in the Paper Menu of the Control Panel will print a barcode with text on the roll
when the roll is removed that identifies the type of paper and amount left. When ManageRemainRoll is On and you
load rolls with printed barcodes, the type of paper and amount left are automatically detected after rolls are loaded. The
barcode will be cut off after it has been read.
Important
•If the barcode on the roll is not detected, enter the type and length of paper on the Control Panel.
Follow these steps to set ManageRemainRoll to On as follows.
1
On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel, press ◀ or ▶ to se-
lect the Paper tab ( ).
Note
•If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.
2
Press the OK button.
The Paper Menu is displayed.
3
Press ▲ or ▼ to select ManageRemainRoll, and then press the OK button.
4
Press ▲ or ▼ to select On, and then press the OK button.
Specifying the Ink Drying Time for Rolls
Specifying the Ink Drying Time for Rolls
When you are using paper that takes longer for ink to adhere, ink may be transferred onto the paper surface during
ejection, soiling it. In that case, you may be able to improve the condition by setting the time to wait for the ink to dry
after printing.
Note
•If the Cutter touches the print surface on which the ink is not dry, the paper surface may become scratched or soiled, or
the paper surface may rub when the paper falls and the surface may become soiled.
To wait for the ink to dry without allowing printed documents to fall after printing, set Cutting Mode on the menu of the
printer to Eject. (See "Specifying the Cutting Method for Rolls.") ➔P.388
•The settings can also be made from the Control Panel on the printer. Select the type of paper from Paper Details in
Paper Menu. (See "Menu Settings.") ➔P.457
Windows
1
Display the printer driver dialog box.
(See "Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from the Operating System Menu (Windows).") ➔P.166
iPF785
Keeping Track of the Amount of Roll Paper Left
User's Guide
Handling and Use of Paper Handling rolls
385
2
Select the Main sheet and click CAdvanced Settings
in AMedia Type.
3
In the Paper Detailed Settings dialog box displayed
next, select the desired settings values in BBetween
Pages and CBetween Scans in ADrying Time, and
then click OK.
(See "Paper Detailed Settings Dialog Box (Win-
dows).") ➔P.170
Mac OS
1
Choose Print in the application menu.
Specifying the Ink Drying Time for Rolls
iPF785
User's Guide
Handling and Use of Paper Handling rolls
386
2
Select the Main pane and click CSettings in AMedia
Type.
3
In the Paper Detailed Settings dialog box displayed
next, select the desired settings values in CBetween
Pages and DBetween Scans in BDrying Time, and
then click OK.
(See "Paper Detailed Settings Dialog Box (Mac
OS).") ➔P.286
iPF785
Specifying the Ink Drying Time for Rolls
User's Guide
Handling and Use of Paper Handling rolls
387
Specifying the Cutting Method for Rolls
Specifying the Cutting Method for Rolls
How rolls are cut after ejection varies depending on printer settings.
Cutting Method Printer Setting Driver Setting
Automatic The roll is automatically cut by the Cutter Unit follow-
ing printer driver settings.
Media
Menu > Pa-
per Details
> (Various
Types of
Paper) >
Cutting
Mode
Automatic Automatic
Cutting
Yes
Eject (wait-
ing for ink to
dry after
printing)
Choose this setting if you prefer not to have docu-
ments dropped immediately after printing, as when
waiting for ink to dry.
To cut the roll with the Cutter Unit, press the Cut but-
ton.
Eject Yes
Manual
(when using
media that
cannot be
cut with the
Cutter Unit )
Choose this setting when using media that cannot be
cut using the Cutter Unit.
Cut each page from the roll using scissors. For con-
tinuous printing (if you will cut each page later), se-
lect Automatic Cutting > Yes or select Print Cut
Guideline.
(See "Cutting Roll Paper After Printing.") ➔P.152
Manual No, Yes, Print
Cut Guideline
Paper cut-
ting (to have
the roll cut
at your
specified
position)
Choose this option if you want to cut pages by press-
ing Cutter Unit buttons for manual cutting after print-
ing when Automatic Cutting > No is selected or
Print Cut Guideline is selected in the printer driver.
Otherwise choose this option if you want to cut the
roll edge after loading a roll.
Cut button
pressed
Yes No, Print Cut
Guideline
Note
•Automatic and Eject are valid only when you have selected Automatic Cutting > Yes in the printer driver.
•With Eject, printing does not resume after a series of jobs have been printed continuously until the roll is cut.
•Eject is the preset selection in Cutting Mode for some types of paper. For this paper, we recommend keeping the
preset cutting mode.
Cut rolls manually in the following cases:
Eject (waiting for ink to dry after printing)
Important
•When cutting wide printed documents after ejection, have two people support the documents. If the paper drops, prin-
ted documents may be damaged.
•Do not lift the paper when holding printed documents before cutting. If the paper rises, it may affect the printing quality
or cause rough cut edges.
Specifying the Cutting Method for Rolls
iPF785
User's Guide
Handling and Use of Paper Handling rolls
388
1
On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel, press ◀ or ▶ to se-
lect the Paper tab ( ).
Note
•If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.
2
Press the OK button. The Paper Menu is displayed.
3
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Paper Details, and then press the OK button.
4
Press ▲ or ▼ to select the type of paper, and then press the OK button.
5
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Cutting Mode, and then press the OK button.
6
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Eject, and then press the OK button.
7
Starts printing.
When printing is finished, the printer will stop without cutting.
8
Holding the printed document to prevent it from dropping, press the
Cut button to cut the roll.
Manual (when using media that cannot be cut with the Cutter Unit )
iPF785
Specifying the Cutting Method for Rolls
User's Guide
Handling and Use of Paper Handling rolls
389
1
On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel, press ◀ or ▶ to se-
lect the Paper tab ( ).
Note
•If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.
2
Press the OK button. The Paper Menu is displayed.
3
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Paper Details, and then press the OK button.
4
Press ▲ or ▼ to select the type of paper, and then press the OK button.
5
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Cutting Mode, and then press the OK button.
6
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Manual, and then press the OK button.
7
Starts printing.
The printer stops advancing the paper after printing.
8
Press the Feed button.
Roll paper is fed to the specified cut position and then automatically
stopped.
9
Cut the roll paper manually with scissors or the like.
10
Press the OK button.
After the roll is rewound, it stops automatically.
Specifying the Cutting Method for Rolls
iPF785
User's Guide
Handling and Use of Paper Handling rolls
390
Paper cutting (to have the roll cut at your specified position)
1
Press the Feed button.
2
Press the ▼ button to advance the roll to the position for cutting.
3
Press the Cut button.
4
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Yes, and then press the OK button.
After the roll paper is cut, it is rewound automatically.
Caution
•If paper would be short when cut at a particular position, the roll may automatically be advanced in some
cases before cutting.
Cutting the Leading Edge of Roll Paper Automatically
Cutting the Leading Edge of Roll Paper Automatically
If the leading edge of the paper is cut crooked or is not cut straight when roll paper is loaded, it will not print correctly. If
this happens, you can cut the leading edge of the paper straight when loading a paper roll by using Trim Edge First in
the Control Panel menu.
Trim Edge First offers the following options.
•
Automatic
If the leading edge of the paper is cut crooked and is not cut straight when loading roll paper, cut the leading edge
straight and eject the fragment of paper to prevent printing on the platen and soiling the printer.
iPF785
Cutting the Leading Edge of Roll Paper Automatically
User's Guide
Handling and Use of Paper Handling rolls
391
•
On (Preset Len)
The amount to cut from the leading edge of the paper varies depending on the media type, and is cut to a prescri-
bed length. For more information on the prescribed length, see the leading edge precut length in the Paper Refer-
ence Guide. (See "Displaying the Paper Reference Guide.") ➔P.366
•
On(Input Length)
The amount to cut from the leading edge of paper is specified in the control panel. The amount to cut from the
leading edge can be specified in the range of lengths displayed in the control panel. The range of lengths differs
between each media type.
Note
•The amount to cut from the leading edge of paper cannot be set shorter than the length displayed in the control
panel.
•
Manual
The amount to cut from the leading edge of the paper can be adjusted by pressing the ▲ and ▼ buttons.
After making the adjustment, you can cut the paper by pressing the Paper Cutting button and selecting "Cut pa-
per".
After the paper has been cut, press "Finish paper set".
Note
•If you do not press "Finish paper set" after cutting the paper, you will not be able to print again.
•
Off
The edge is not cut and scraps are not removed.
Follow these steps to change the Trim Edge First setting.
1
On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel, press ◀ or ▶ to se-
lect the Paper tab ( ).
Note
•If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.
2
Press the OK button.
The Paper Menu is displayed.
3
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Paper Details, and then press the OK button.
4
Press ▲ or ▼ to select the type of paper, and then press the OK button.
5
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Trim Edge First, and then press the OK button.
Cutting the Leading Edge of Roll Paper Automatically
iPF785
User's Guide
Handling and Use of Paper Handling rolls
392
6
Press ▲ or ▼ to select the desired setting option, and then press the OK button.
This setting takes effect the next time you load a roll.
Reducing Dust from Cutting Rolls
Reducing Dust from Cutting Rolls
For media such as Backlit Film that are more likely to generate debris when cut, select CutDustReduct. > On in the
Paper Menu of the Control Panel. This option reduces debris from cutting by printing black lines at the leading and
trailing edges of documents. It may help prevent Printhead damage. You can specify for CutDustReduct. to be activa-
ted for particular types of paper.
Important
•Do not set CutDustReduct. to On for paper that wrinkles easily, such as Plain Paper or lightweight paper. This may
impair cutting and cause paper jams.
•Borderless printing is not available when CutDustReduct. is set to On. To use borderless printing, select CutDustRe-
duct. > Off.
Set CutDustReduct. to On as follows.
1
On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel, press ◀ or ▶ to se-
lect the Paper tab ( ).
Note
•If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.
2
Press the OK button.
The Paper Menu is displayed.
3
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Paper Details, and then press the OK button.
4
Press ▲ or ▼ to select the type of paper loaded in the printer, and then press the OK button.
5
Press ▲ or ▼ to select CutDustReduct., and then press the OK button.
6
Press ▲ or ▼ to select On, and then press the OK button.
iPF785
Reducing Dust from Cutting Rolls
User's Guide
Handling and Use of Paper Handling rolls
393
Handling sheets
Handling sheets
Loading Sheets in the Printer ........................................................................................................................................... 394
Changing the Type of Paper .............................................................................................................................................. 378
Printing From a Desired Starting Point ......................................................................................................................... 396
Removing Sheets .................................................................................................................................................................... 399
➔Clearing a Jammed Sheet ............................................................................................................................................ 630
➔Clearing Jammed Paper (Paper Feed Slot) .......................................................................................................... 633
Loading Sheets in the Printer
Loading Sheets in the Printer
Follow these steps to load sheets in the printer.
Important
•One sheet of paper can be loaded in the Paper Feed Slot at a time. Do not load more than one sheet at a time. This
may cause paper jams.
•Before feeding paper or printing, make sure the sheet is flat against the Roll Cover. The sheet may jam if it curls
before feeding or printing and the trailing edge drops toward the front.
•Paper that is wrinkled or warped may jam. If necessary, straighten the paper and reload it.
•Load the paper straight. Loading paper askew will cause an error. (See "Paper is crooked..") ➔P.663
Note
•Store unused paper in the original package, away from high temperature, humidity, and direct sunlight.
1
Select sheets as the paper source.
•
If a print job was received
Sheets are automatically selected, and the media type and size specified by the print job are shown on the
Display Screen. Go to the next step.
•
If no print job was received
1.
Press the Load button.
2.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select "Load Cut Sheet", and then press the OK button.
Note
•If any paper has been advanced that will not be used, a message is shown requesting you to remove it.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Yes, and then press the OK button. Remove the paper and go to the next step.
Loading Sheets in the Printer
iPF785
User's Guide
Handling and Use of Paper Handling sheets
394
2
Slide the Width Guide (a) to align it with the mark for the size
of paper you will load.
3
Load a single sheet printing-side up in the Paper Feed
Slot, with the right edge aligned with the Paper Align-
ment Guide (a) to the right of the Roll Cover.
Insert the paper until the leading edge makes contact
and you hear a tone.
iPF785
Loading Sheets in the Printer
User's Guide
Handling and Use of Paper Handling sheets
395
4
Move the Width Guide (a) carefully to match the size of pa-
per loaded.
Set the Width Guide against the edge of the paper to prevent
the paper from becoming crooked or wrinkled.
5
Press the OK button.
•
If a print job was received
The printer now starts printing the print job.
•
If no print job was received
A menu for selection of the type of paper is automatically shown on the Display Screen.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select the type of paper, and then press the OK button.
The printer now starts feeding the paper.
Note
•Refer to Paper Reference Guide for details on type of paper to select. (See "Displaying the Paper Reference
Guide.") ➔P.366
Printing From a Desired Starting Point
Printing From a Desired Starting Point
When printing inside boundaries or in other situations when you want to specify a particular position to start printing
from, set Width Detection to Off in the printer menu for the type of paper used.
Set Width Detection to Off
1
On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel, press ◀ or ▶ to se-
lect the Paper tab ( ).
Note
•If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.
Printing From a Desired Starting Point
iPF785
User's Guide
Handling and Use of Paper Handling sheets
396
2
Press the OK button.
The Paper Menu is displayed.
3
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Paper Details, and then press the OK button.
4
Press ▲ or ▼ to select the type of paper, and then press the OK button.
5
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Width Detection, and then press the OK button.
6
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Off, and then press the OK button.
Load paper in the desired position to start printing from
Follow these instructions to load paper at the desired starting position for printing when Width Detection is Off.
1
If you did not send a print job in advance, a menu for selection of the type of paper is displayed.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select the type of paper, and then press the OK button.
Note
•If a print job was received before paper was advanced, the media type and size specified by the job are
shown on the Display Screen.
Thus, this screen is not displayed. Go to step 2.
2
"Width Detection OFF. OK to continue?" is now shown on the Display Screen. Press ▲ or ▼ to select
"Leave OFF", and then press the OK button.
3
After a menu for selection of the paper size is displayed, press ▲ or ▼ to select the paper size, and then press
the OK button.
4
Open the Top Cover and check the position where paper is loa-
ded.
To start printing from the current position, close the Top
Cover.
To reposition the paper, push the Release Lever back.
iPF785
Printing From a Desired Starting Point
User's Guide
Handling and Use of Paper Handling sheets
397
5
Keeping the right edge of the paper aligned with the extended
line of the Paper Alignment Line (a) to the right of the ejection
guide and the leading edge aligned with the groove (b) at the
far end of the Platen, load the paper at the position from
which to start printing.
6
Pull the Release Lever forward and close the Top Cov-
er.
Printing From a Desired Starting Point
iPF785
User's Guide
Handling and Use of Paper Handling sheets
398
Removing Sheets
Removing Sheets
Remove sheets from the printer as follows.
1
On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel, press ◀ or ▶ to se-
lect the Paper tab ( ).
Note
•If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.
2
Press the OK button.
The Paper Menu is displayed.
3
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Eject Paper, and then press the OK button.
4
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Yes, and then press the OK button.
The paper is ejected from the front of the printer.
5
Holding the paper, push the Release Lever back and
remove the sheet.
6
Pull the Release Lever forward.
iPF785
Removing Sheets
User's Guide
Handling and Use of Paper Handling sheets
399
Output Stacker
Output Stacker
Using the Output Stacker
Using the Output Stacker
This section describes how to use the Output Stacker.
•
When storing printed documents on the Output Stacker
Use position (1). For details on how to use the Extended position which is a useful function for retrieving printed
matter, refer to the note regarding the Extended position. (See "Note regarding the Extended position.") ➔P.400
•
When the Output Stacker is not used, when loading paper, or when moving the printer
Use position (2).
When moving the printer, always lift the Support Rod to Extended position A before putting it in position (2), other-
wise the Basket Cloth may touch the floor and be soiled or damaged. (See "Switching to Extended position
A.") ➔P.401
Important
•When storing printed documents on the Output Stacker, always use it in position (1). If you do not, printed documents
may not be dropped into the Output Stacker, and the printed surface may become soiled.
•The Output Stacker can hold one sheet. When printing multiple pages, remove each sheet after it is printed.
•The Output Stacker can hold printed documents from paper up to 52.02 inches (1,296 mm) long.
Note regarding the Extended position
The Output Stacker has a regular position and a position for easy removal of printed documents. Use the best position
for the paper size and orientation that you are using.
For information on types and sizes of paper you can use with the stacker in extended position, refer to the following.
•
Printer Stand ST-34: Output stacker operation guide (Included with the Printer Stand ST-34)
Regular position
Using the Output Stacker
iPF785
User's Guide
Handling and Use of Paper Output Stacker
400
Extended position A Extended position B
•
Switching to Extended position A
Switch the stacker to Extended position A as follows.
1
Lift the Support Rod to the position shown (a) and
switch the stacker to Extended position A.
iPF785
Using the Output Stacker
User's Guide
Handling and Use of Paper Output Stacker
401
2
When using 24-inch or A1 (portrait) roll paper, pull out
the Adjustable Stopper (a). This completes the proce-
dure for switching to Extended position A.
Once the printing has finished, use the following procedure to return to the regular position.
1
Lower the Support Rod to the position shown (a) to re-
turn to the regular position. If the Adjustable Stopper (b)
is extended, retract it.
2
Return to the regular position.
•
Switching to Extended position B
Switch the stacker to Extended position B as follows.
Using the Output Stacker
iPF785
User's Guide
Handling and Use of Paper Output Stacker
402
1
Grasp the Output stacker handle (a) and pull out the Out-
put Stacker so that it tilts towards you.
2
Open the Output Stacker Ejection Guides (a). This
completes the procedure of switching to Extended posi-
tion B.
Once the printing has finished, use the following procedure to return to the regular position.
1
Push the Output Stacker Ejection Guides (a) closed un-
til it clicks into place.
iPF785
Using the Output Stacker
User's Guide
Handling and Use of Paper Output Stacker
403
2
Hold onto the Output stacker handle (a) and pull the
Output stacker release lever (b) towards you.
3
While continuing to hold the Output stacker handle (a),
slowly lower the Output Stacker.
4
Return to the regular position.
Using the Output Stacker
iPF785
User's Guide
Handling and Use of Paper Output Stacker
404
Media Configuration Tool (Windows)
Media Configuration Tool (Windows)
The Features of Media Conguration Tool ..................................................................................................................405
Installation Procedures .........................................................................................................................................................405
Starting Method ...................................................................................................................................................................... 407
Media Conguration Tool Main Window ....................................................................................................................... 408
Editing Media Type Information for Genuine Paper and Feed Conrmed Paper ....................................... 408
Adding Media Types ........................................................................................................................................................ 410
Changing Media Names ................................................................................................................................................. 412
Deleting Media Types You Have Added .................................................................................................................. 414
Switching Media Types Display Show/Hide ........................................................................................................... 415
Changing the Display Order of Media Types ........................................................................................................ 417
Checking the update .............................................................................................................................................................418
The Features of Media Configuration Tool
The Features of Media Configuration Tool
In imagePROGRAF, the best printer settings for each paper are collected together in media information files in order to
give the highest quality printing results. Settings for Canon genuine paper and Canon feed confirmed paper are provi-
ded by Canon in these media information files.
Note
•Canon genuine paper and Canon feed confirmed paper are detailed in the Paper Reference Guide.
The Media Configuration Tool allows you to perform the following tasks.
•
When supported paper has been newly added to the printer, you can add that media type to the printer control
panel and printer driver by using the media information file provided by Canon.
•
You can rearrange lists of the types of paper on the printer control panel and in printer driver dialog boxes and
rename them, in addition to other functions.
Important
•Normally, the Media Configuration Tool is installed and the media information is configured when you install the printer
driver from the User Software CD-ROM. Use this software if you want to add new media information or edit existing
media information.
•Administration of paper information using the Media Configuration Tool should be performed by the printer administra-
tor.
Drivers Applicable with Media Configuration Tool
•
imagePROGRAF Printer Driver
Installation Procedures
Installation Procedures
The Media Configuration Tool installation screen appears when you start the installation of a new version of the Media
Configuration Tool. The installation procedure started from this screen is described below.
Important
•If the printer driver is installed from the User Software CD-ROM, the Media Configuration Tool is also installed and the
media information is also configured. Therefore, the following procedure does not normally need to be performed. To
install the Media Configuration Tool without using the User Software CD-ROM, such as when you have downloaded a
new version of the Media Configuration Tool from the Canon website, use the following procedure.
•You must be logged in as Administrator when installing software in Windows.
iPF785
The Features of Media Conguration Tool
User's Guide
Handling and Use of Paper Media Conguration Tool (Windows)
405
1
Start the Media Configuration Tool installer.
Click the Next button.
2
The next screen presents selections for the country or area
where the printer is used.
Select a country or territory then click the Next button.
3
The License Agreement is displayed.
If you accept the agreement, click Yes.
4
The Change Installation Location screen appears.
Select the destination folder then click the Next button.
Installation Procedures
iPF785
User's Guide
Handling and Use of Paper Media Conguration Tool (Windows)
406
5
The Installation Complete screen appears.
Click the Finish button.
This completes the installation of Media Configuration Tool.
Starting Method
Starting Method
Follow the procedure below to start Media Configuration Tool.
From the start menu go to All Programs > iPFxxxx Media Configuration Tool > iPFxxxx Media Configuration
Tool.
Media Configuration Tool main window is displayed.
Note
•If you only start the Media Configuration Tool, the media information on the printer control panel and in the printer driver
is not updated. If this screen is displayed, select Add Genuine Paper in the main window, and click the Update button
in the Edit Media Types screen to update the media information.
iPF785
Starting Method
User's Guide
Handling and Use of Paper Media Conguration Tool (Windows)
407
Media Configuration Tool Main Window
Media Configuration Tool Main Window
The explanation below is on the Media Configuration Tool main window.
Note
•For the step to open the Media Configuration Tool main window, see "Starting Method." ➔P.407
•
Add Genuine Paper button
When this button is clicked, the Edit Media Types dialog box is displayed, which allows you to add media informa-
tion files released by Canon to the printer control panel and printer driver. You can also change names, toggle
between displaying and hiding, and delete added media types.
You can also change the display order of the paper types.
Refer to "Editing Media Type Information for Genuine Paper and Feed Confirmed Paper" ➔P.408 for details on
Add Genuine Paper.
•
Link to Support Information button
You can check information such as the latest information for the product and software version upgrade informa-
tion.
•
Link to User Manual Button
Displays the printer user's manual
Editing Media Type Information for Genuine Paper and Feed Confirmed Paper
Editing Media Type Information for Genuine Paper and Feed Confirmed Paper
To add genuine paper and feed confirmed paper to the printer control panel and printer driver and edit the media type
information, click the Add Genuine Paper button in the Media Configuration Tool main window.
Confirm the printer, where media type information is to be updated, to be displayed in Printer in the Select Printer
dialog box, and then click the Next button.
Communication with the printer begins.
Media Conguration Tool Main Window
iPF785
User's Guide
Handling and Use of Paper Media Conguration Tool (Windows)
408
Important
•Do not attempt to print or turn the printer off while the program is communicating with the printer.
The Edit Media Types dialog box is displayed.
Note
•In the following screens, you cannot change the printer where media type information is to be updated.
Note
•Paper that is displayed grayed out does not appear in the printer driver or printer panel.
•
Add Button
To add genuine paper or feed confirmed paper to the printer control panel and printer driver, click this button.
For details on the procedure for adding media types, see "Adding Media Types." ➔P.410
Important
•To add media types, download the media information file (.amf file) in advance from the Canon website.
•
Rename Button
To change the name on the printer control panel and the name in the printer driver for genuine paper and feed
confirmed paper, select the paper to change and click this button.
For details on the procedure for changing paper display names, see "Changing Media Names." ➔P.412
•
Delete Button
To delete added genuine paper and feed confirmed paper from the printer control panel and printer driver, select
the paper to delete and click this button.
For details on the procedure for deleting added media types, see "Deleting Media Types You Have Add-
ed." ➔P.414
•
Show/Hide Button
To change whether or not genuine paper or feed confirmed paper is displayed in the printer control panel and
printer driver, select the paper to change and click this button.
For details on the procedure for changing whether or not to display media types, see "Switching Media Types Dis-
play Show/Hide." ➔P.415
•
Change Display Order button ( or )
To change the display order of a media type in the printer control panel and printer driver, select the paper to
change and click this button.
For details on the procedure for changing the display order of media types, see "Changing the Display Order of
Media Types." ➔P.417
iPF785
Editing Media Type Information for Genuine Paper and Feed Conrmed Paper
User's Guide
Handling and Use of Paper Media Conguration Tool (Windows)
409
Important
•When you update the media type information, perform the same update on all of the PCs that are using that printer.
Note
•It may not be possible to deleting, showing/hiding, and changing the display order under some conditions.
•If a display name is displayed grayed out, that media type will not appear in the printer driver or printer panel.
Adding Media Types
Adding Media Types
Media information files (.amf files) released by Canon are registered in the printer control panel and printer driver.
Important
•Do not perform printing on the target printer while adding the media types.
•Reinstalling Media Configuration Tool after registering a media information file may delete the registered media infor-
mation file.In this case, first download and install latest Media Configuration Tool, then download and register the re-
quired media information file.
1
Open the Edit Media Types dialog box, and then click
the Add button.
Note
•For details on the procedure for opening the Edit Media Types dialog box, see "Editing Media Type Informa-
tion for Genuine Paper and Feed Confirmed Paper." ➔P.408
2
The Add Media Type dialog box displays.
Click the Browse button.
Adding Media Types
iPF785
User's Guide
Handling and Use of Paper Media Conguration Tool (Windows)
410
3
Open the folder that contains the media information files (.amf
files).
4
The names of the media information files contained in
the selected folder are displayed in Media Information
File in the Add Media Type dialog box. Select the
check box for the paper you want to add and click the
OK button.
Note
•If Master Media Information File is displayed as the Type of the Media Information File, the media type
display order and media type display/non-display settings are initialized. Reconfigure these after added the
master media information file.
5
Click OK when the confirmation message is displayed.
6
In the Edit Media Types dialog box, click the Update
button.
iPF785
Adding Media Types
User's Guide
Handling and Use of Paper Media Conguration Tool (Windows)
411
7
The Confirm Update dialog box is displayed.
Configure Update Target and click the Execute button.
Communication with the printer begins.
Note
•You should normally select Update the printer control panel and printer driver.
Important
•When setting a data to the printer that differs from the data to be updated, the selected media information file
is updated. When you would like to remain the data that is set to the printer, click the Cancel button.
•Do not attempt to print or turn the printer off while the program is communicating with the printer.
8
Click the OK button.
Changing Media Names
Changing Media Names
1
Open the Edit Media Types dialog box.
Note
•For details on the procedure for opening the Edit Media Types dialog box, see "Editing Media Type Informa-
tion for Genuine Paper and Feed Confirmed Paper." ➔P.408
Changing Media Names
iPF785
User's Guide
Handling and Use of Paper Media Conguration Tool (Windows)
412
2
In the Media Type list, select the name to change.
Click the Rename button.
3
The Rename Media dialog box is displayed.
Edit the names in Name in Printer Driver and Name
on Control Panel and click the OK button.
Note
•To restore the original names, click the Restore button.
•The characters that can be entered for Name in Printer Driver and Name on Control Panel are stated be-
low.
alphanumeric, space, "-", ".", "_", "(", ")", "+", "%", ",", "/"
•For Name in Printer Driver up to 32 one Byte characters can be entered, and for Name on Control Panel up
to 16 one Byte characters can be entered.
4
In the Edit Media Types dialog box, click the Update
button.
5
The Confirm Update dialog box is displayed.
Configure Update Target and click the Execute button.
Communication with the printer begins.
iPF785
Changing Media Names
User's Guide
Handling and Use of Paper Media Conguration Tool (Windows)
413
Note
•You should normally select Update the printer control panel and printer driver.
Important
•When setting a data to the printer that differs from the data to be updated, the selected media information file
is updated. When you would like to remain the data that is set to the printer, click the Cancel button.
•Do not attempt to print or turn the printer off while the program is communicating with the printer.
6
Click the OK button.
Deleting Media Types You Have Added
Deleting Media Types You Have Added
1
Open the Edit Media Types dialog box.
Note
•For details on the procedure for opening the Edit Media Types dialog box, see "Editing Media Type Informa-
tion for Genuine Paper and Feed Confirmed Paper." ➔P.408
2
In the Media Type list, select the name of the media to
delete.
Click the Delete button.
Note
•Only paper for which Status in the Media Type is Add can be deleted.
Deleting Media Types You Have Added
iPF785
User's Guide
Handling and Use of Paper Media Conguration Tool (Windows)
414
3
In the Edit Media Types dialog box, click the Update
button.
4
The Confirm Update dialog box is displayed.
Click the Execute button.
Communication with the printer begins.
Important
•When setting a data to the printer that differs from the data to be updated, the selected media information file
is updated. When you would like to remain the data that is set to the printer, click the Cancel button.
•Do not attempt to print or turn the printer off while the program is communicating with the printer.
5
Click the OK button.
Switching Media Types Display Show/Hide
Switching Media Types Display Show/Hide
1
Open the Edit Media Types dialog box.
iPF785
Switching Media Types Display Show/Hide
User's Guide
Handling and Use of Paper Media Conguration Tool (Windows)
415
Note
•For details on the procedure for opening the Edit Media Types dialog box, see "Editing Media Type Informa-
tion for Genuine Paper and Feed Confirmed Paper." ➔P.408
2
In the Media Type list, select the name of the media to
switch off or on for display.
Click the Show/Hide button.
The selected paper is alternately shown or hidden.
Note
•You can select multiple paper.
•The names of media switched for non-display appear grayed out in the Media Type list.
•Each time you click the Show/Hide button, the display mode cycles from showing both the printer driver and
printer panel, to hiding both the printer driver and printer panel, and then to showing only the printer panel.
3
In the Edit Media Types dialog box, click the Update
button.
4
The Confirm Update dialog box is displayed.
Configure Update Target and click the Execute button.
Communication with the printer begins.
Note
•You should normally select Update the printer control panel and printer driver.
Switching Media Types Display Show/Hide
iPF785
User's Guide
Handling and Use of Paper Media Conguration Tool (Windows)
416
Important
•When setting a data to the printer that differs from the data to be updated, the selected media information file
is updated. When you would like to remain the data that is set to the printer, click the Cancel button.
•Do not attempt to print or turn the printer off while the program is communicating with the printer.
5
Click the OK button.
Changing the Display Order of Media Types
Changing the Display Order of Media Types
1
Open the Edit Media Types dialog box.
Note
•For details on the procedure for opening the Edit Media Types dialog box, see "Editing Media Type Informa-
tion for Genuine Paper and Feed Confirmed Paper." ➔P.408
2
Select the paper in the Media Type list for which to
change the display order, and then click the buttons to
move the item ( or ).
The selected item moves one line up or down for every
button click.
iPF785
Changing the Display Order of Media Types
User's Guide
Handling and Use of Paper Media Conguration Tool (Windows)
417
3
In the Edit Media Types dialog box, click the Update
button.
4
The Confirm Update dialog box is displayed.
Configure Update Target and click the Execute button.
Communication with the printer begins.
Note
•You should normally select Update the printer control panel and printer driver.
Important
•When setting a data to the printer that differs from the data to be updated, the selected media information file
is updated. When you would like to remain the data that is set to the printer, click the Cancel button.
•Do not attempt to print or turn the printer off while the program is communicating with the printer.
5
Click the OK button.
Checking the update
Checking the update
After updating the media information using the Media Configuration Tool, you can check whether the update has been
applied to the printer in the control panel of the printer.
1
Click the About button in the Media Configuration Tool main window to open the About dialog box.
2
Check the value xx.xx (xxxx) of MIT DB Version.
3
Check the value xx.xx (xxxx) of MIT in Settings/Adjustment Menu > Printer Info > System Info in the printer
control panel.
If the values in Steps 2 and 3 are the same, the update has been applied to the printer.
Checking the update
iPF785
User's Guide
Handling and Use of Paper Media Conguration Tool (Windows)
418
Media Configuration Tool (Mac OS)
Media Configuration Tool (Mac OS)
The Features of Media Conguration Tool ..................................................................................................................419
Procedures for Installing ..................................................................................................................................................... 419
Starting Method ...................................................................................................................................................................... 421
Media Conguration Tool Main Window ....................................................................................................................... 422
Editing Media Type Information for Genuine Paper and Feed Conrmed Paper ....................................... 423
Adding Media Types ........................................................................................................................................................ 424
Changing Media Names ................................................................................................................................................. 427
Deleting Media Types You Have Added .................................................................................................................. 429
Switching Media Types Display Show/Hide ........................................................................................................... 430
Changing the Display Order of Media Types ........................................................................................................ 432
Checking the update .............................................................................................................................................................433
The Features of Media Configuration Tool
The Features of Media Configuration Tool
In imagePROGRAF, the best printer settings for each paper are collected together in media information files in order to
give the highest quality printing results. Settings for Canon genuine paper and Canon feed confirmed paper are provi-
ded by Canon in these media information files.
Note
•Canon genuine paper and Canon feed confirmed paper are detailed in the Paper Reference Guide.
The Media Configuration Tool allows you to perform the following tasks.
•
When supported paper has been newly added to the printer, you can add that media type to the printer control
panel and printer driver by using the media information file provided by Canon.
•
You can rearrange lists of the types of paper on the printer control panel and in printer driver dialog boxes and
rename them, in addition to other functions.
Important
•Normally, the Media Configuration Tool is installed and the media information is configured when you install the printer
driver from the User Software CD-ROM. Use this software if you want to add new media information or edit existing
media information.
•Administration of paper information using the Media Configuration Tool should be performed by the printer administra-
tor.
Drivers Applicable with Media Configuration Tool
•
imagePROGRAF Printer Driver
Procedures for Installing
Procedures for Installing
Start the installer in the new version of Media Configuration Tool, and follow procedures below to install the Media Con-
figuration Tool.
Important
•If the printer driver is installed from the User Software CD-ROM, the Media Configuration Tool is also installed and the
media information is also configured. Therefore, the following procedure does not normally need to be performed. To
install the Media Configuration Tool without using the User Software CD-ROM, such as when you have downloaded a
new version of the Media Configuration Tool from the Canon website, use the following procedure.
iPF785
The Features of Media Conguration Tool
User's Guide
Handling and Use of Paper Media Conguration Tool (Mac OS)
419
1
Double-click Canon iPFxxxx Series Media Configuration
Tool.pkg to start the Media Configuration Tool installer.
2
The License is displayed.
After you have read Canon Software License Agreement, click
the Continue button.
3
The next screen presents selections for the country or area
where the printer is used.
Select a country or territory then click the Continue button.
4
Click the Install button.
Procedures for Installing
iPF785
User's Guide
Handling and Use of Paper Media Conguration Tool (Mac OS)
420
5
Enter an administrator name/password and click the In-
stall Software button.
6
Click the Close button.
The installation of Media Configuration Tool is complete.
Note
•When the installation is completed properly, the Media Configuration Tool folder is saved in the following
folder.
Applications > Canon Utilities > iPFxxxx Media Configuration Tool
•The iPFxxxx in the folder above will be the printer name in use.
Starting Method
Starting Method
Follow the procedure below to start the Media Configuration Tool.
From the Applications menu > Canon Utilities >iPFxxxx Media Configuration Tool > MCTxxxx.app.
Media Configuration Tool main window is displayed.
iPF785
Starting Method
User's Guide
Handling and Use of Paper Media Conguration Tool (Mac OS)
421
Note
•If a compatible printer driver is not installed, the Media Configuration Tool will not start. If you attempt to start the Media
Configuration Tool when a printer driver is not installed, the warning message below is displayed.
•If you only start the Media Configuration Tool, the media information on the printer control panel and in the printer driver
is not updated. If this screen is displayed, select Add Genuine Paper in the main window, and click the Update button
in the Edit Media Types screen to update the media information.
Media Configuration Tool Main Window
Media Configuration Tool Main Window
The explanation below is on the Media Configuration Tool main window.
Note
•For the step to open the Media Configuration Tool main window, see "Starting Method." ➔P.421
•
Add Genuine Paper button
When this button is clicked, the Edit Media Types dialog box is displayed, which allows you to add media informa-
tion files released by Canon to the printer control panel and printer driver. You can also change names, toggle
between displaying and hiding, and delete added media types.
You can also change the display order of the paper types.
Refer to "Editing Media Type Information for Genuine Paper and Feed Confirmed Paper" ➔P.423 for details on
Add Genuine Paper.
•
Link to Support Information button
You can check information such as the latest information for the product and software version upgrade informa-
tion.
•
Link to User Manual Button
Displays the printer user's manual
Media Conguration Tool Main Window
iPF785
User's Guide
Handling and Use of Paper Media Conguration Tool (Mac OS)
422
Editing Media Type Information for Genuine Paper and Feed Confirmed Paper
Editing Media Type Information for Genuine Paper and Feed Confirmed Paper
To add genuine paper and feed confirmed paper to the printer control panel and printer driver and edit the media type
information, click the Add Genuine Paper button in the Media Configuration Tool main window.
Confirm the printer, where media type information is to be updated, to be displayed in Printer in the Select Printer
dialog box, and then click the Next button.
Communication with the printer begins.
Important
•Do not attempt to print or turn the printer off while the program is communicating with the printer.
The Edit Media Types dialog box is displayed.
Note
•In the following screens, you cannot change the printer where media type information is to be updated.
Note
•Paper that is displayed grayed out does not appear in the printer driver or printer panel.
•
Add Button
To add genuine paper or feed confirmed paper to the printer control panel and printer driver, click this button.
For details on the procedure for adding media types, see "Adding Media Types." ➔P.424
Important
•To add media types, download the media information file (.amf file) in advance from the Canon website.
iPF785
Editing Media Type Information for Genuine Paper and Feed Conrmed Paper
User's Guide
Handling and Use of Paper Media Conguration Tool (Mac OS)
423
•
Rename Button
To change the name on the printer control panel and the name in the printer driver for genuine paper and feed
confirmed paper, select the paper to change and click this button.
For details on the procedure for changing paper display names, see "Changing Media Names." ➔P.427
•
Delete Button
To delete added genuine paper and feed confirmed paper from the printer control panel and printer driver, select
the paper to delete and click this button.
For details on the procedure for deleting added media types, see "Deleting Media Types You Have Add-
ed." ➔P.429
•
Show/Hide Button
To change whether or not genuine paper or feed confirmed paper is displayed in the printer control panel and
printer driver, select the paper to change and click this button.
For details on the procedure for changing whether or not to display media types, see "Switching Media Types Dis-
play Show/Hide." ➔P.430
•
Change Display Order button ( or )
To change the display order of a media type in the printer control panel and printer driver, select the paper to
change and click this button.
For details on the procedure for changing the display order of media types, see "Changing the Display Order of
Media Types." ➔P.432
Important
•When you update the media type information, perform the same update on all of the PCs that are using that printer.
Note
•It may not be possible to deleting, showing/hiding, and changing the display order under some conditions.
•If a display name is displayed grayed out, that media type will not appear in the printer driver or printer panel.
Adding Media Types
Adding Media Types
Media information files (.amf files) released by Canon are registered in the printer control panel and printer driver.
Important
•Do not perform printing on the target printer while adding the media types.
•Reinstalling Media Configuration Tool after registering a media information file may delete the registered media infor-
mation file.In this case, first download and install latest Media Configuration Tool, then download and register the re-
quired media information file.
1
Open the Edit Media Types dialog box, and then click
the Add button.
Adding Media Types
iPF785
User's Guide
Handling and Use of Paper Media Conguration Tool (Mac OS)
424
Note
•For details on the procedure for opening the Edit Media Types dialog box, see "Editing Media Type Informa-
tion for Genuine Paper and Feed Confirmed Paper." ➔P.423
2
The Add Media Type dialog box displays.
Click the Browse button.
3
Open the folder that contains the media information
files (.amf files).
4
The names of the media information files contained in
the selected folder are displayed in Media Information
File in the Add Media Type dialog box. Select the
check box for the paper you want to add and click the
OK button.
Note
•If Master Media Information File is displayed as the Type of the Media Information File, the media type
display order and media type display/non-display settings are initialized. Reconfigure these after added the
master media information file.
5
Click OK when the confirmation message is displayed.
iPF785
Adding Media Types
User's Guide
Handling and Use of Paper Media Conguration Tool (Mac OS)
425
6
In the Edit Media Types dialog box, click the Update
button.
7
The Confirm Update dialog box is displayed.
Configure Update Target and click the Execute button.
Communication with the printer begins.
Note
•You should normally select Update the printer control panel and printer driver.
Important
•When setting a data to the printer that differs from the data to be updated, the selected media information file
is updated. When you would like to remain the data that is set to the printer, click the Cancel button.
•Do not attempt to print or turn the printer off while the program is communicating with the printer.
8
Click the OK button.
Adding Media Types
iPF785
User's Guide
Handling and Use of Paper Media Conguration Tool (Mac OS)
426
Changing Media Names
Changing Media Names
1
Open the Edit Media Types dialog box.
Note
•For details on the procedure for opening the Edit Media Types dialog box, see "Editing Media Type Informa-
tion for Genuine Paper and Feed Confirmed Paper." ➔P.423
2
In the Media Type list, select the name to change.
Click the Rename button.
3
The Rename Media dialog box is displayed.
Edit the names in Name in Printer Driver and Name
on Control Panel and click the OK button.
Note
•To restore the original names, click the Restore button.
•The characters that can be entered for Name in Printer Driver and Name on Control Panel are stated be-
low.
alphanumeric, space, "-", ".", "_", "(", ")", "+", "%", ",", "/"
•For Name in Printer Driver up to 32 one Byte characters can be entered, and for Name on Control Panel up
to 16 one Byte characters can be entered.
iPF785
Changing Media Names
User's Guide
Handling and Use of Paper Media Conguration Tool (Mac OS)
427
4
In the Edit Media Types dialog box, click the Update
button.
5
The Confirm Update dialog box is displayed.
Configure Update Target and click the Execute button.
Communication with the printer begins.
Note
•You should normally select Update the printer control panel and printer driver.
Important
•When setting a data to the printer that differs from the data to be updated, the selected media information file
is updated. When you would like to remain the data that is set to the printer, click the Cancel button.
•Do not attempt to print or turn the printer off while the program is communicating with the printer.
6
Click the OK button.
Changing Media Names
iPF785
User's Guide
Handling and Use of Paper Media Conguration Tool (Mac OS)
428
Deleting Media Types You Have Added
Deleting Media Types You Have Added
1
Open the Edit Media Types dialog box.
Note
•For details on the procedure for opening the Edit Media Types dialog box, see "Editing Media Type Informa-
tion for Genuine Paper and Feed Confirmed Paper." ➔P.423
2
In the Media Type list, select the name of the media to
delete.
Click the Delete button.
Note
•Only paper for which Status in the Media Type is Add can be deleted.
3
In the Edit Media Types dialog box, click the Update
button.
iPF785
Deleting Media Types You Have Added
User's Guide
Handling and Use of Paper Media Conguration Tool (Mac OS)
429
4
The Confirm Update dialog box is displayed.
Click the Execute button.
Communication with the printer begins.
Important
•When setting a data to the printer that differs from the data to be updated, the selected media information file
is updated. When you would like to remain the data that is set to the printer, click the Cancel button.
•Do not attempt to print or turn the printer off while the program is communicating with the printer.
5
Click the OK button.
Switching Media Types Display Show/Hide
Switching Media Types Display Show/Hide
1
Open the Edit Media Types dialog box.
Note
•For details on the procedure for opening the Edit Media Types dialog box, see "Editing Media Type Informa-
tion for Genuine Paper and Feed Confirmed Paper." ➔P.423
Switching Media Types Display Show/Hide
iPF785
User's Guide
Handling and Use of Paper Media Conguration Tool (Mac OS)
430
2
In the Media Type list, select the name of the media to
switch off or on for display.
Click the Show/Hide button.
The selected paper is alternately shown or hidden.
Note
•You can select multiple paper.
•The names of media switched for non-display appear grayed out in the Media Type list.
•Each time you click the Show/Hide button, the display mode cycles from showing both the printer driver and
printer panel, to hiding both the printer driver and printer panel, and then to showing only the printer panel.
3
In the Edit Media Types dialog box, click the Update
button.
4
The Confirm Update dialog box is displayed.
Configure Update Target and click the Execute button.
Communication with the printer begins.
Note
•You should normally select Update the printer control panel and printer driver.
iPF785
Switching Media Types Display Show/Hide
User's Guide
Handling and Use of Paper Media Conguration Tool (Mac OS)
431
Important
•When setting a data to the printer that differs from the data to be updated, the selected media information file
is updated. When you would like to remain the data that is set to the printer, click the Cancel button.
•Do not attempt to print or turn the printer off while the program is communicating with the printer.
5
Click the OK button.
Changing the Display Order of Media Types
Changing the Display Order of Media Types
1
Open the Edit Media Types dialog box.
Note
•For details on the procedure for opening the Edit Media Types dialog box, see "Editing Media Type Informa-
tion for Genuine Paper and Feed Confirmed Paper." ➔P.423
2
Select the paper in the Media Type list for which to
change the display order, and then click the buttons to
move the item ( or ).
The selected item moves one line up or down for every
button click.
Changing the Display Order of Media Types
iPF785
User's Guide
Handling and Use of Paper Media Conguration Tool (Mac OS)
432
3
In the Edit Media Types dialog box, click the Update
button.
4
The Confirm Update dialog box is displayed.
Configure Update Target and click the Execute button.
Communication with the printer begins.
Note
•You should normally select Update the printer control panel and printer driver.
Important
•When setting a data to the printer that differs from the data to be updated, the selected media information file
is updated. When you would like to remain the data that is set to the printer, click the Cancel button.
•Do not attempt to print or turn the printer off while the program is communicating with the printer.
5
Click the OK button.
Checking the update
Checking the update
After updating the media information using the Media Configuration Tool, you can check whether the update has been
applied to the printer in the control panel of the printer.
1
Click the About button in the Media Configuration Tool main window to open the About dialog box.
2
Check the value xx.xx (xxxx) of MIT DB Version.
iPF785
Checking the update
User's Guide
Handling and Use of Paper Media Conguration Tool (Mac OS)
433
3
Check the value xx.xx (xxxx) of MIT in Settings/Adjustment Menu > Printer Info > System Info in the printer
control panel.
If the values in Steps 2 and 3 are the same, the update has been applied to the printer.
Checking the update
iPF785
User's Guide
Handling and Use of Paper Media Conguration Tool (Mac OS)
434
iPF785
User's Guide
Basic Printing Workow 15
Enhanced Printing Options 31
Windows Software 157
Mac OS Software 277
Handling and Use of Paper 361
Control Panel
Operations and Display Screen ............................................................... 436
Printer Menu ............................................................................................ 446
Printer Parts 475
Network Setting 489
Print Job Management 509
Adjustments for Better Print Quality 571
Maintenance and Consumables 587
Troubleshooting 625
Error Message 655
Specications 679
Appendix 683
imagePROGRAF
Control Panel
435
Operations and Display Screen
Operations and Display Screen
Control Panel ............................................................................................................................................................................ 436
Control Panel Display ............................................................................................................................................................ 438
How to View Instructions with Navigate ....................................................................................................................... 443
Checking Instructions During Printer Operations .................................................................................................... 444
Control Panel
Control Panel
a
Display Screen
Shows printer menus, as well as the printer status and messages.
b
Data Lamp (green)
•
Flashing
During printing, the Data lamp flashes when the printer is receiving or processing print jobs. Otherwise, this
lamp flashes when the print job is paused or the printer is updating the firmware.
•
Off
There are no active print jobs when the Data lamp is off.
c
Message Lamp (orange)
•
On
A warning message is displayed.
•
Flashing
An error message is displayed.
•
Off
The printer is off or is operating normally.
d
Power button (green)
Turns the printer on and off. (See "Turning the Printer On and Off.") ➔P.17
The Power button is lit when the printer is on or in Sleep mode.
Control Panel
iPF785
User's Guide
Control Panel Operations and Display Screen
436
e
Stop button
Cancels print jobs in progress and ends the ink drying period.
f
Navigate button
Enables you to check instructions for loading and removing paper or replacing ink tanks or printheads, as well as
other operations. (See "How to View Instructions with Navigate.") ➔P.443
g
Arrow buttons
•
◀ button
Press this button on the Tab Selection screen to move to another tab.
In menu items requiring numerical input, press this button to move to another digit.
•
▲ button
Press this button in the menu to move to another item.
In menu items requiring numerical input, press this button to increment the number.
•
▶ button
Press this button on the Tab Selection screen to move to another tab.
In menu items requiring numerical input, press this button to move to another digit.
•
▼ button
Press this button in the menu to move to another item.
In menu items requiring numerical input, press this button to decrement the number.
h
OK button
Press this button on the Tab Selection screen to display the menu of the tab shown.
Pressing this button in menu items of each tab for which is displayed at left will move to the lower level of the
menu item, enabling you to execute menu commands or set menu values.
Also press this button if the Display Screen indicates to press the OK button.
i
Back button
Displays the screen before the current screen.
j
Menu button
Displays the Tab Selection screen. (See "Menu Settings.") ➔P.457
k
Load button
Press this button when loading or replacing paper.
(See "Loading Rolls in the Printer.") ➔P.375
(See "Loading Sheets in the Printer.") ➔P.394
l
Feed button
Pressing this button when rolls are loaded enables you to reposition the paper. (See "Feeding Roll Paper Manual-
ly.") ➔P.384
m
Cut button
Pressing this button when rolls are loaded cuts the paper, if you have specified Automatic or Eject in Cutting
Mode in the Control Panel menu. (See "Specifying the Cutting Method for Rolls.") ➔P.388
n
Cut Sheet lamp (green)
Lit when sheets are selected as the paper source.
o
Roll Media lamp (green)
Lit when rolls are selected as the paper source.
Note
•To recover from Sleep mode, any button can be pressed except the Power button.
iPF785
Control Panel
User's Guide
Control Panel Operations and Display Screen
437
Control Panel Display
Control Panel Display
After the printer starts up, the Tab Selection screen is displayed.
Each of the four tabs presents status, menus, and error information related to the particular tab.
Types of tabs
The Tab Selection screen presents four tabs. Each tab is represented by an icon in the top row. Press the ◀ or ▶
button to access other tabs.
Paper tab A tab indicating status and showing menus related to paper. Pressing the OK button when this tab is high-
lighted will display the Paper Menu.
•
Top line displayed
The paper icon is highlighted.
•
Middle line displayed
Indicates the printer status and shows menu names.
•
Bottom line displayed
The first and second lines display the paper type and size.
Ink tab A tab indicating status and showing menus related to ink. Pressing the OK button when this tab is highligh-
ted will display the Ink Menu.
•
Top line displayed
The ink icon is highlighted.
•
Middle line displayed
Indicates the printer status and shows menu names.
•
Bottom line displayed
Here, the remaining ink level is indicated. (See "Checking Ink Tank Levels.") ➔P.594
Job tab A tab indicating status and showing menus related to print jobs. Pressing the OK button when this tab is
highlighted will display the Job Menu menu.
•
Top line displayed
The job icon is highlighted.
•
Middle line displayed
Indicates the printer status and shows menu names.
Settings/Adj. tab A tab indicating status and showing menus related to settings and adjustment. Pressing the OK button
when this tab is highlighted will display the Set./Adj. Menu.
•
Top line displayed
The settings/adjustment icon is highlighted.
•
Middle line displayed
Indicates the printer status and shows menu names.
•
Bottom line displayed
The remaining Maintenance Cartridge capacity is shown on the first line and Tot.Print Area on the
second. The display unit for Tot.Print Area can be specified in the Length Unit menu. (See "Menu
Settings.") ➔P.457
Control Panel Display
iPF785
User's Guide
Control Panel Operations and Display Screen
438
Printer status and modes
The printer has the following status.
Standby The printer is ready to receive jobs sent from the computer. Jobs sent from the computer are printed im-
mediately.
Printing Paused Printing is paused on the printer. Any jobs sent from the computer are held without being printed.
Printing Printing is in progress on the printer. Jobs sent from the computer are printed after the current job. The
time left until printing is finished is indicated in the upper-right corner of the screen. (Values exceeding 10
hours are not shown.)
Sleep The printer is in power-saving mode. The printer automatically enters Sleep mode to conserve power
when idle for a specific period (by default, five minutes), that is, if no print jobs are received or buttons are
pressed while all covers are closed.
You can specify the period before the printer enters Sleep mode in the Sleep Timer menu. (See "Menu
Settings.") ➔P.457
After entering Sleep mode from Standby mode, the printer automatically recovers if print jobs are re-
ceived, and the jobs are printed.
Off The printer is not on.
If no operations are performed on the printer for the duration of the time set in Shut Down Timer after
entering Sleep mode, the printer automatically turns off. (See "Menu Settings.") ➔P.457
iPF785
Control Panel Display
User's Guide
Control Panel Operations and Display Screen
439
Error The printer requires your attention. Any jobs sent from the computer cannot be processed. The tab related
to the error is displayed.
For information about the display in the case of multiple errors, see "Display Transitions in Error Status."
Control Panel Display
iPF785
User's Guide
Control Panel Operations and Display Screen
440
Display Transitions in Normal Status
The display transitions while the printer is in the normal status (the status where no errors have occurred) are shown
below.
*1: The printer automatically enters Sleep mode when idle for a specific period (by default, five minutes), that is, if no
print jobs are received or buttons are pressed while all covers are closed. However, it does not enter Sleep mode
while error messages are displayed or when a roll can be manually advanced by pressing the Feed button.
*2: When the printer is in Sleep mode, you can press any button except the Power button to recover from Sleep mode.
Sleep mode is also terminated if a print job is received or a command is issued from RemoteUI.
iPF785
Control Panel Display
User's Guide
Control Panel Operations and Display Screen
441
Display Transitions in Error Status
The display transitions while an error has occurred on the printer are shown below.
If multiple errors have occurred, the tabs for errors that have occurred other than the currently displayed error are dis-
played flashing. You can move between the tabs to check the errors by pressing the ◀ and ▶ keys. If multiple errors
have occurred in the Job tab and Settings/Adj. tab, the error message switches every four seconds within each tab.
Control Panel Display
iPF785
User's Guide
Control Panel Operations and Display Screen
442
How to View Instructions with Navigate
How to View Instructions with Navigate
You can refer to instructions for loading paper, replacing ink tanks, and performing other operations on the printer con-
trol panel.
1
Press the Navigate button.
2
Press ▲ or ▼ to select the desired navigation menu.
3
Press ▲ or ▼ to select View Op. Guide, and then press the OK button.
Instructions are now displayed.
Example: Loading sheets
iPF785
How to View Instructions with Navigate
User's Guide
Control Panel Operations and Display Screen
443
Checking Instructions During Printer Operations
Checking Instructions During Printer Operations
You can refer to instructions on the printer control panel when loading paper, replacing ink tanks, or performing other
operations.
How to view instructions
Once you complete an action described in the instructions, the printer detects the action and switches to the next in-
struction screen.
In the case of actions the printer cannot detect, instruction screens are switched every four seconds, and the sequence
of operations is shown repeatedly.
When all actions in the sequence are finished, the instruction screen for the next step is displayed.
Example: Ink tank replacement
Checking Instructions During Printer Operations
iPF785
User's Guide
Control Panel Operations and Display Screen
444
Note
•During a continuous display of instructions, you can press the ◀ button to pause the instructions on the current screen.
Press the ◀ or ▶ button to display the previous or next screens. If you do not press the ◀ or ▶ button within 30
seconds, continuous display is resumed.
Press the OK button to display the instruction screen for the next step.
iPF785
Checking Instructions During Printer Operations
User's Guide
Control Panel Operations and Display Screen
445
Printer Menu
Printer Menu
Printer Menu Operations ..................................................................................................................................................... 446
Menu Operations .................................................................................................................................................................... 447
Menu Structure ....................................................................................................................................................................... 450
Menu Settings .......................................................................................................................................................................... 457
Status Print ............................................................................................................................................................................... 468
Printing Interface Setting Reports .................................................................................................................................. 471
Printer Menu Operations
Printer Menu Operations
The printer menu is classified into regular menu items available when no print job is in progress and menu during print-
ing items only available while printing is in progress.
•
Regular menu operations ➔P.446
•
Menu operations during printing ➔P.446
Regular menu operations
To view available menus organized on tabs, select a tab on the Tab Selection screen and press the OK button.
Note
•If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed, pressing OK will not display menus.
Menus can be selected after you resolve the problem.
The following operations are available from the menu.
•
Paper Menu
Paper menu settings
•
Ink Menu
Ink menu operations
•
Job Menu
Menu operations to manage print jobs
•
Set./Adj. Menu
Menu operations for printer adjustment and maintenance
For a description of specific menu items available, see "Menu Settings." ➔P.457
For instructions on selecting menu items, see "Menu Operations." ➔P.447
Note
•By default, menu settings apply to all print jobs. However, for settings that are also available in the printer driver, the
values specified in the printer driver take priority.
Menu operations during printing
During printing, only a limited set of menu items are displayed. Menu items that are not displayed during printing should
be operated after printing has finished.
To display menus during printing, select a tab on the Tab Selection screen on the Control Panel, and then press the
OK button.
Note
•If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed, pressing OK will not display menus.
Menus can be selected after you resolve the problem.
The following operations are available from the menu during printing.
•
Ink Menu
Printer Menu Operations
iPF785
User's Guide
Control Panel Printer Menu
446
Ink menu operations
•
Job Menu
Menu operations to manage print jobs
•
Set./Adj. Menu
Fine-tuning paper feeding
Display of printer-related information
For a description of specific menu items available, see "Menu Settings." ➔P.457
For instructions on selecting menu items during printing, see "Menu Operations." ➔P.447
Menu Operations
Menu Operations
To view available menus organized on tabs, select a tab on the Tab Selection screen and press the OK button. For
details, see "Menu Settings." ➔P.457
•
When the Ink tab is selected and the OK button is pressed
Note
•If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed, pressing OK will not display menus.
Menus can be selected after you resolve the problem.
Simply press buttons on the Control Panel to access menus on various tabs from the Tab Selection screen and set or
execute Menu items.
The following section describes menu operations and how they are presented in this User Manual.
•
Accessing menus ➔P.447
•
Specifying menu items ➔P.449
•
Specifying numerical values ➔P.449
•
Executing menu commands ➔P.449
Accessing menus
Printer menus are grouped by function.
iPF785
Menu Operations
User's Guide
Control Panel Printer Menu
447
Menus are displayed with the upper line selected. You can use the buttons on the Control Panel to access each menu.
•
Press Back button to access a higher menu in the menu list, and press OK button to access a lower one.
•
Press ▲ to access a higher menu in the menu list, and press ▼ to access a lower one. If items of the menu list
are more than the lines of the screen, press ▲ and ▼ to scroll the menu. Items you select are highlighted.
The scroll bar at right indicates the current position in the overall menu.
•
Lower menus are available if is displayed at left next to the second and subsequent rows. To access the lower
menus, select the menu and press the OK button.
Menu Operations
iPF785
User's Guide
Control Panel Printer Menu
448
Specifying menu items
Menu items can be set as follows.
1
Press ▲ or ▼ to select the desired setting, and then press the OK but-
ton.
After two seconds, the display reverts to the upper level menu.
Note
•If a confirmation message is displayed regarding the setting you entered, follow the on-screen instructions.
•If you have changed the Interface Setup menu settings, a message confirming whether to register the set-
tings is displayed if you press Back button or Menu button. Follow the instructions shown on the screen.
Specifying numerical values
Follow these steps to enter numbers. In this example, network settings items are entered.
1
Press the ◀ or ▶ button to move to the next field for input.
2
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to enter the value.
Note
•Hold down ▲ or ▼ to increase or decrease the value continuously.
3
Repeat steps 1 and 2 to complete the settings, and then press the OK button.
Note
•If a confirmation message is displayed regarding the setting you entered, follow the on-screen instructions.
•If you have changed the Interface Setup menu settings, a message confirming whether to register the set-
tings is displayed if you press Back button or Menu button. Follow the instructions shown on the screen.
Executing menu commands
Menu commands can be executed as follows.
1
Press ▲ or ▼ to select the action to execute, and then press the OK button.
The menu command is now executed.
iPF785
Menu Operations
User's Guide
Control Panel Printer Menu
449
Menu Structure
Menu Structure
The menu structure is shown categorized by tab. The * on the right side of an item indicates the default value.
The printer menu is classified into regular menu items available when no print job is in progress and menu during print-
ing items only available while printing is in progress. see "Printer Menu Operations." ➔P.446
Regular menu Menu during printing
Paper Menu Not displayed
Ink Menu The same Ink Menu as normal is displayed.
Job Menu The same Job Menu as normal is displayed.
Set./Adj. Menu A limited Set./Adj. Menu containing the following items is displayed.
•
Adj. Fine Feed(*1)
•
Printer Info
*1: Only displayed in the menu during printing. Not displayed in the regular menu.
For instructions on menu operations, see "Menu Operations." ➔P.447
For details on menu items, see "Menu Settings." ➔P.457
Paper Menu
The Paper Menu is not displayed during printing.
First Level Second Level Third Level Fourth Level Fifth Level
Load Paper Roll Paper | Cut Sheet
Eject Paper
Chg. Paper Type(*1) Roll Paper (The paper type is displayed here.) (*1)
Cut Sheet (The paper type is displayed here.) (*1)
Chg. Paper Size Sheet Size (The size of paper is displayed here.) (*2)
CustomPaperSize (Set the length and width)
Roll Length(*3) (Set the length)
Roll Width(*4) (Set the width)
ManageRemainRoll Off* | On
Paper Details (The paper type is dis-
played here.) (*1)
Head Height Automatic* | Highest | High | Standard | Low | Low-
est | Super Low
Skew Check Lv. High Accuracy | Standard* | Loose | Off
Cutting Mode(*6) Automatic | Eject | Manual
Cut Speed Fast | Standard | Slow
Trim Edge First Automatic | Off | On (Preset Len) | On(Input
Length) | Manual
CutDustReduct. Off | On
VacuumStrngth Automatic* | Strongest | Strong | Standard | Weak |
Weakest
Scan Wait Time Dry time Off* | 1 sec. | 3 sec. | 5
sec. | 7 sec. | 9 sec.
Area(*5) Entire area* | Leading
edge
Roll DryingTime Off | 30 sec. | 1 min. | 3 min. | 5 min. | 10 min. | 30
min. | 60 min.
NearEnd RollMrgn 3mm | 20mm
NearEnd Sht Mrgn 3mm | 20mm
BordlessOversize Standard* | Little
Width Detection Off | On*
Menu Structure
iPF785
User's Guide
Control Panel Printer Menu
450
First Level Second Level Third Level Fourth Level Fifth Level
Return Defaults
Paper Details
Keep Paper Type Off* | On
*1: For information on the types of paper the printer supports, refer to the Paper Reference Guide. (See "Displaying the Paper
Reference Guide.") ➔P.366 Types of paper in the printer driver and related software (as well as on the Control Panel ) are upda-
ted when you install the printer driver from the User Software CD-ROM or if you update paper information with the Media Config-
uration Tool. (See "Updating paper information.") ➔P.368
*2: For information on the sizes of paper the printer supports, see "Paper Sizes." ➔P.362
*3: Available only if ManageRemainRoll is On.
*4: Available only if Width Detection is Off.
*5: Leading edge is not available as a setting option in the Paper Detailed Settings dialog box of the printer driver.
*6: see "Specifying the Cutting Method for Rolls." ➔P.388
Ink Menu
First Level
Rep. Ink Tank
Head Cleaning A
Job Menu
First Level Second Level Third Level Fourth Level Fifth Level
Print Job Job List (Choose a print job.) Delete | Preempt Jobs(*1)
Stored Job Mailbox List (Enter a password if
one has been set.)
Job List Print | Delete
Print Job List
Job Log(*2)
(Choose from information
about the latest three print
jobs.)
Document Name
User Name
Page Count
Job Status OK | CANCELED
Print Start Time yyyy/mm/dd hh:mm:ss
Print End Time yyyy/mm/dd hh:mm:ss
Print Time xxxsec.
Print Size xxxxxxxxsq.mm
Media Type
Interface USB | Network | HDD
Ink Consumed Tot.Ink Consumed xxx.xxx ml
(The ink color is dis-
played here.)
xxx.xxx ml
Print settings
Head Height
Temp./Humidity
Adjustment req.
Print Job Log
Pause Print Off* | On
HDD Information Total capacity | Box free space
*1: If a pending job is selected, Print Anyway is displayed.
*2: Restrictions apply if a password is configured using Change Password in the Admin. Menu.
Viewing is possible for administrators only.
iPF785
Menu Structure
User's Guide
Control Panel Printer Menu
451
Set./Adj. Menu
Limited items are displayed during printing. The displayed items are indicated by annotations.
First Level Second Level Third Level Fourth Level Fifth Level Sixth Level Seventh Level Eighth Level
Test Print Nozzle Check | Status Print | Interface Print | GL2 Set Print | Paper Details | Print Job Log | Menu Map | Color Palette
Adjust Print-
er
Head Posi.
Adj.
Auto(Standard) | Auto(Advanced) | Manual(*1)
Head Inc. Adj.
Feed Priori-
ty
Adj. Priority Automatic* | Print Quality | Print Length
Adj. Quali-
ty(*2)
Auto(GenuinePpr) | Auto(OtherPaper) | Manual
Adjust
Length(*3)
Adjustment-
Print
A:High | B:Standard/Draft
Change
Settings
A:High | B:Standard/Draft
Mainte-
nance
Head
Cleaning
Head Cleaning A | Head Cleaning B
Nozzle
Check
Replace
P.head
Repl. maint cart
Head Info
GL2 Set-
tings
Quality
Manager
Color Mode Monochrome | Color (CAD) 1* | Color (CAD) 2 | Color (CAD) 3 | Color (CAD) 4 |
Color (CAD) 5
Print Quality Fast | Standard* | High
Input Reso-
lution
600dpi* |
300dpi
Print (Econ-
omy)
Off* | On
Paper Man-
ager
Paper
Source
Automatic* | Roll Paper | Cut Sheet
Margin 3mm(Standard)* |
5mm
Oversize Off | On*
Conserve
Paper
Off* | On
Auto Rotate Off* | On
Enlarge/
Reduce
Off* | Specify scaling | Fit to paper
Print cen-
tered
Off* | On
Standard
cut
Off* | On
Nesting Use Nesting Off* | On
Nesting
Wait-
Time(*4)
xx min.
Cut
Lines(*4)
Off* | On
Line & Pen
Manager
Enable
merge
Off* | On
Menu Structure
iPF785
User's Guide
Control Panel Printer Menu
452
First Level Second Level Third Level Fourth Level Fifth Level Sixth Level Seventh Level Eighth Level
Pen Setup Select Pa-
lette
Software* | Palette A | Palette B | Factory
Define Pa-
lette
Palette A (Select the
pen number)
Width (Indicates the
value of
Width )
Color 0～255
Line Attrib-
utes
No Setting |
Circle Setting
Palette B (Select the
pen number)
(Indicates
Width, Color,
and Line At-
tributes )
(Specify the
values of
Width, Color,
and Line At-
tributes )
Factory (Select the
pen number)
(Indicates Width, Color, and
Line Attributes )
Reset Pa-
lette
All Palette | Palette A | Palette B
Smoothing Software* | Smooth
ThickenFi-
neLines
Off* | On
AdjustFaint-
Lines
Off | On*
Ln wdth
correct
Black/gray | Color
Processin-
gOption
Warning Off* | On
On-the-Fly Off* | On
Detect img
size
Off* | Command priority | Detected size
GL2 Set Print
Interface
Setup(*8)
EOP Tim-
er(*8)
10 sec. | 30 sec. | 1 min. | 2 min. | 5 min. | 10 min.* | 30 min. | 60 min.
TCP/IP(*8) IPv4(*8) IPv4
Mode(*8)
Automatic | Manual*
Protocol(*5)
(*8)
DHCP(*8) On | Off*
BOOTP(*8) On | Off*
RARP(*8) On | Off*
IPv4 Set-
tings(*9)
IP Ad-
dress(*9)
xxx.xxx.xxx.x
xx
Subnet
Mask(*9)
xxx.xxx.xxx.x
xx
Default G/
W(*9)
xxx.xxx.xxx.x
xx
DNS Set-
tings(*9)
DNS Dync
update(*9)
On | Off*
Pri. DNS SrvAddr(*9)
Sec. DNS SrvAddr(*9)
DNS Host Name(*9)
DNS Domain Name(*9)
IPv6(*8) IPv6 Sup-
port(*8)
On | Off*
iPF785
Menu Structure
User's Guide
Control Panel Printer Menu
453
First Level Second Level Third Level Fourth Level Fifth Level Sixth Level Seventh Level Eighth Level
IPv6 Stles-
sAddrs(*8)
(*10)
On* | Off
DHCPv6(*8)
(*10)
On | Off*
DNS Set-
tings(*9)
(*10)
DNS Dync
update(*9)
Statefull
Addr(*9)
On | Off*
Stateless
Addr(*9)
On | Off*
Pri. DNS SrvAddr(*9)
Sec. DNS SrvAddr(*9)
DNS Host Name(*9)
DNS Domain Name(*9)
Ethernet
Driver(*8)
Auto De-
tect(*8)
On* | Off
Comm.Mod
e(*6)(*8)
Half Duplex* | Full Duplex
Ethernet
Type(*6)(*8)
10 Base-T* | 100 Base-TX | 1000 Base-T
Spanning
Tree(*8)
Not Use* | Use
MAC Ad-
dress(*8)
xxxxxxxxxx
xx
Interface Print(*8)
Return Defaults(*8)
System Set-
up
Sleep Tim-
er(*11)
5 min.* | 10 min. | 15 min. | 20 min. | 30 min. | 40 min. | 50 min. | 60 min. | 210 min.
Shut Down
Timer
Off | 5 min. | 10 min. | 30 min. | 1 hour | 4 hours | 8 hours* | 12 hours
Buzzer Off | On*
Contrast
Adj.
-4,-3,-2,-1,0*,+1,+2,+3,+4
Date &
Time(*8)
Date
yyyy/mm/d
d(*7)(*8)
Time
hh:mm
Date For-
mat(*8)
yyyy/mm/dd* | dd/mm/yyyy | mm/dd/yyyy
Language English | 日本語 | Français | Italiano | Deutsch | Español | Português | Русский | 中文 (简体字) | 한국
어
Time
Zone(*8)
0:London (GMT) | +1:Paris,Rome | +2:Athens,Cairo | +3:Moscow | +4:Eerevan,Baku | +5:Islamabad
| +6:Dacca | +7:Bangkok | +8:Hong Kong | +9:Tokyo,Seoul | +10:Canberra | +11:NewCaledonia |
+12:Wellington | -12:Eniwetok | -11:Midway is. | -10:Hawaii(AHST) | -9:Alaska(AKST) | -8:Oregon
(PST) | -7:Arizona(MST) | -6:Texas (CST) | -5:NewYork(EST) | -4:Santiago | -3:Buenos Aires | -2: |
-1:Cape Verde
Length Unit meter* | feet/inch
Detect Mis-
match
Pause | Warning | None* | Hold Job
Paper Size
Basis
Roll Selec-
tion 1
ISO A3 (297mm)* | 300mm Roll
Roll Selec-
tion 2
10in. (254mm)* | JIS B4 (257mm)
Menu Structure
iPF785
User's Guide
Control Panel Printer Menu
454
First Level Second Level Third Level Fourth Level Fifth Level Sixth Level Seventh Level Eighth Level
Keep Paper
Size
Off* | On
TrimEdge
Reload
Automatic | Off* | On
Rep.P.head
Print
Off | On*
Nozzle
Check
Frequency Standard* | 1 page | 10 pages | Off
Warning Off* | On
Use
USB(*8)
On* | Off
Use Ether-
net(*8)
On* | Off
Use Remo-
teUI(*8)
On* | Off
Reset PaprSetngs(*8)
Erase HDD
Data
High Speed(*8) | Secure High Spd.(*8) | Secure(*8)
Output
Method
Print* | Print (Auto Del) | Save: Box XX
Print After
Recv
Off* | On
Save: Com-
mon Box
Off | On*
Show Job
Log(*8)
Off | On*
Prep.Move-
Printer
Standard | Limited
Admin.
Menu(*8)
Change
Pass-
word(*9)
(The screen for setting the password is displayed)
Init.Admin.Pswd(*9)
Adj. Fine Feed(*12)(*13)
Printer In-
fo(*12)
Paper Info
Ink Info
Head Info
System Info
Error Log
Use Situa-
tion
Tot.Print Area | Duty Counter
*1: Available after you have used Auto(Advanced) in Head Posi. Adj. once.
*2: Available if Adj. Priority is Automatic or Print Quality.
*3: Available if Adj. Priority is Automatic or Print Length.
*4: Available only if Use Nesting is On.
*5: Not displayed if IPv4 Mode is Manual.
*6: Not displayed if Auto Detect is On.
*7: Follows the setting in Date Format.
*8: Restrictions apply if a password is configured using Change Password in the Admin. Menu.
Viewing and configuration is possible for administrators, and only viewing for other users.
*9: Restrictions apply if a password is configured using Change Password in the Admin. Menu.
Viewing and configuration is possible for administrators only.
iPF785
Menu Structure
User's Guide
Control Panel Printer Menu
455
*10: Not displayed if IPv6 Support is Off.
*11: Default setting for the time to enter the power save mode/Sleep mode is recommended.
*12: Displayed as the menu during printing while printing is in progress.
*13: Not displayed in the regular menu.
Menu Structure
iPF785
User's Guide
Control Panel Printer Menu
456
Menu Settings
Menu Settings
Menu items are as follows.
The printer menu is classified into regular menu items available when no print job is in progress and menu during print-
ing items only available while printing is in progress. see "Printer Menu Operations." ➔P.446
Regular menu Menu during printing
Paper Menu Not displayed
Ink Menu The same Ink Menu as normal is displayed.
Job Menu The same Job Menu as normal is displayed.
Set./Adj. Menu A limited Set./Adj. Menu containing the following items is displayed.
•
Adj. Fine Feed (*1)
•
Printer Info
*1: Only displayed in the menu during printing. Not displayed in the regular menu.
For instructions on selecting menu items, see "Menu Operations." ➔P.447
For details on the displayed menu hierarchy, see "Menu Structure." ➔P.450
Paper Menu
The Paper Menu is not displayed during printing.
Setting Item Description, Instructions
Load Paper Select either sheets or rolls and load the paper.
Eject Paper Choose this item before removing loaded paper.
Chg. Paper Type (*1) Change the type of paper loaded. (See "Changing the Type of Pa-
per.") ➔P.378
Chg. Paper Size Change the size of paper loaded. (See "Specifying the Paper
Length.") ➔P.380 (See "Paper Sizes.") ➔P.362
ManageRemainRoll Choose On to print a barcode at the end of a roll before you remove
it. The printed barcode can be used in managing the amount of roll
paper left. Choose Off if you prefer not to print the barcode.
(See "Keeping Track of the Amount of Roll Paper Left.") ➔P.385
Paper Details (The type of paper
is displayed here.)
(*1)
Head Height Adjust the Printhead height. (See "Troubleshooting Paper Abrasion
and Blurry Images.") ➔P.578
Skew Check Lv. If you print on Japanese paper (washi) or other handmade paper
that has an irregular width, choose Loose for a higher skew detec-
tion threshold, or choose Off to disable skew detection. However, if
paper is loaded askew when detection is Off, note that paper jams
or Platen soiling may occur.
Cutting Mode Specify whether or not to cut with the standard round-bladed cutter.
If you choose Automatic, the roll will be cut automatically using the
Cutter Unit, depending on the printer driver settings.
Select Eject to prevent printed documents from falling immediately
after printing such as when you wait for the ink to dry, etc. Manual
prints lines at the cut position instead of cutting after printing.
(See "Specifying the Cutting Method for Rolls.") ➔P.388
Cut Speed Choose the cutting speed. The preset selection represents the opti-
mal cutting speed for the type of paper. We recommend keeping the
preset cutting speed.
If you use adhesive paper, choosing Slow helps prevent adhesive
from sticking to the cutter and keeps the cutter sharp.
Trim Edge First Selects whether or not to automatically cut the leading edge of the
roll paper when roll paper is loaded.
iPF785
Menu Settings
User's Guide
Control Panel Printer Menu
457
Setting Item Description, Instructions
Paper Details (The type of paper
is displayed here.)
(*1)
Trim Edge First (See "Cutting the Leading Edge of Roll Paper Automatical-
ly.") ➔P.391
CutDustReduct. If you choose On, a line will be printed at the cut position when pa-
per cutting is selected. This option reduces the amount of debris giv-
en off after cutting. It also helps prevent adhesive from sticking to
the cutter and keeps the cutter sharp if you use adhesive paper.
(See "Reducing Dust from Cutting Rolls.") ➔P.393
VacuumStrngth Specify the level of suction that holds paper against the Platen.
(See "Adjusting the Vacuum Strength.") ➔P.585
Scan Wait Time Specify the time to wait for the ink to dry between each scan (after
the printhead finishes moving in one direction), in consideration of
how quickly the ink dries. Also specify the applicable area for the ink
drying time. Select Entire area to apply the ink drying time after
each scan until the document is fully printed. Select Leading edge
to apply the ink drying time after each scan only in the area 110–140
mm from the leading edge. (The applicable length varies depending
on the Print Quality setting.) Note that printing will take longer if
you specify the Scan Wait Time setting. In particular, when Lead-
ing edge is selected, colors may be uneven in the boundary be-
tween the areas with and without a drying time.
Roll DryingTime Specify the time to wait for the ink to dry for each sheet.
NearEnd
RollMrgn
Specify the minimum margin at the leading edge of roll paper to en-
sure better printing quality at the leading edge.
Note that if you choose 3mm, it may lower the printing quality at the
leading edge and affect feeding accuracy. The printed surface may
be scratched, and ink may adhere to the leading edge. It may also
cause the Platen to become soiled.
NearEnd Sht
Mrgn
Specify a margin at the leading edge of sheets to ensure better
printing quality at the leading edge.
Note that if you choose 3mm, it may lower the printing quality at the
leading edge and affect feeding accuracy. The printed surface may
be scratched, and ink may adhere to the leading edge.
BordlessOver-
size
Select the amount of oversize extension of the original during bor-
derless printing.
Normally, we recommend that you set this to Standard.
If it is set to Little, although it will reduce soiling on the back sur-
face, white patches may remain on the printed surface.
Width Detection Specify this option to print inside boundaries or in other cases when
specifying a particular starting position for printing.
Paper width and skew are not detected if you select Off. If paper is
loaded askew, paper jams or Platen soiling may occur.
Return Defaults Choose OK to restore Paper Details to the default values.
Paper Details Print the paper settings as specified in Paper Details.
Keep Paper Type Select On when printing on a particular type of paper regularly.
(See "Changing the Type of Paper.") ➔P.378
*1: For information on the types of paper the printer supports, refer to the Paper Reference Guide. (See "Displaying the Paper
Reference Guide.") ➔P.366 Types of paper in the printer driver and related software (as well as on the Control Panel ) are upda-
ted when you install the printer driver from the User Software CD-ROM or if you update paper information with the Media Config-
uration Tool. (See "Updating paper information.") ➔P.368
Menu Settings
iPF785
User's Guide
Control Panel Printer Menu
458
Ink Menu
Setting Item Description, Instructions
Rep. Ink Tank Replace the Ink Tank at this point. Follow the instructions dis-
played to complete the required procedure. (See "Replacing Ink
Tanks.") ➔P.588
Head Cleaning A Printhead cleaning options. (See "Cleaning the Print-
head.") ➔P.598
Execute Head Cleaning A if printing is faint, oddly colored, or
contains foreign substances.
Job Menu
Setting Item Description, Instructions
Print Job Job List (Choose a
print job)
Delete Delete the current job or queued jobs. (See "Managing the Job
Queue (Deleting or Preempting Other Jobs).") ➔P.534
Preempt Jobs Print the job first after the current print job is finished. (See "Man-
aging the Job Queue (Deleting or Preempting Other
Jobs).") ➔P.534
Stored
Job
Mailbox
List
(Enter a
password
if one has
been set.)
Job List Print Print the saved job.
Delete Delete the saved job.
Print Job List Print a list of saved print jobs.
Job Log (Choose
from infor-
mation
about the
last three
print jobs.)
Document Name Indicates the document name of the selected print job.
User Name Indicates the name of the user who sent the print job.
Page Count Indicates the number of pages in the job.
Job Status Indicates the printing results.
Print Start Time Indicates when the print job was started.
Print End Time Indicates when the print job was finished.
Print Time Indicates the time required to print the job.
Print Size Indicates the paper size in the print job.
Media Type Indicates the type of paper in the print job.
Interface Indicates the interface used for the print job.
Ink Consumed Indicates a rough estimate of how much ink was consumed per
job.(*1)
Print settings A counter for maintenance purposes. Indicates job print settings.
Head Height A counter for maintenance purposes. Indicates the head height
when jobs wereprinted.
Temp./Humidity A counter for maintenance purposes. Indicates the temperature
and humiditywhen jobs were printed.
Adjustment req. A counter for maintenance purposes. Indicates adjustment condi-
tions appliedto jobs.
Print Job Log Print a record of print jobs, including the paper type and size,
amount of ink consumed, and so on. Ink consumption indicates a
rough estimate of the amount of ink consumed per print job.(*1)
Pause Print Choose On to stop printing.
HDD Information Indicates the total hard disk capacity and the mail box free space.
iPF785
Menu Settings
User's Guide
Control Panel Printer Menu
459
*1: A rough estimate of the amount of ink consumed per print job is displayed. Actual ink consumption may be different. The aver-
age margin of error for estimates calculated according to Canon measurement conditions for ink costs is ±15%. Canon does not
guarantee the accuracy of these estimates. Estimates may vary depending on conditions of use. Calculation of these estimates
does not include ink consumed when cleaning printheads by forceful ejection of ink.
Set./Adj. Menu
Limited items are displayed during printing. The displayed items are indicated by annotations.
Setting Item Description, Instructions
Test
Print
Nozzle Check Print a test pattern to check the nozzles.
Status Print Print information about the setting values and condition of
the printer.
Interface Print Print interface settings information.
GL2 Set Print Print the settings as specified in GL2 Settings.
Paper Details Print the paper settings as specified in Paper Details.
Print Job Log Print a record of print jobs, including the paper type and
size, amount of ink consumed, and so on. Ink consumption
indicates a rough estimate of the amount of ink consumed
per print job.(*1)
Menu Map Print the menu structure.
Color Palette Print the GL2 color palette.
Adjust
Printer
Head
Posi.
Adj.
Auto(Standard) The printer prints and reads a test pattern for automatic ad-
justment of Printhead alignment relative to the printing di-
rection. (See "Automatic Adjustment to Straighten Lines and
Colors.") ➔P.572
Auto(Advanced) The printer prints and reads a test pattern for automatic ad-
justment of Printhead alignment relative to the printing di-
rection and spacing between nozzles and colors. (See "Au-
tomatic Adjustment to Straighten Lines and Col-
ors.") ➔P.572
Manual Print a test pattern for adjustment of Printhead alignment
relative to the printing direction. Enter the adjustment value
manually based on the resulting pattern. (See "Manual Ad-
justment to Straighten Lines and Colors.") ➔P.573
Head Inc. Adj. Print a test pattern for adjustment of the Printhead orienta-
tion. (See "Adjusting Line Misalignment.") ➔P.575
Feed
Priority
Adj. Pri-
ority
Automatic Specify exact paper feeding, if desired. Normally, select Au-
tomatic. Choose Print Quality for attractive printing.
Choosing Print Quality also makes banding less noticea-
ble. Choose Print Length if you prefer to feed the paper an
exact amount.
Print Quality
Print Length
Adj.
Quality
Auto(GenuinePpr) Specify this mode with paper identified in the Paper Refer-
ence Guide. (See "Displaying the Paper Reference
Guide.") ➔P.366
The printer prints and reads a test pattern for automatic ad-
justment of the feed amount. (See "Automatic Banding Ad-
justment.") ➔P.580
Auto(OtherPaper) Specify this mode with paper not in the Paper Reference
Guide. (See "Displaying the Paper Reference
Guide.") ➔P.366
Menu Settings
iPF785
User's Guide
Control Panel Printer Menu
460
Setting Item Description, Instructions
Adjust
Printer
Feed
Priority
Adj.
Quality
Auto(OtherPaper) The printer prints and reads a test pattern for automatic ad-
justment of the feed amount. Note that this function takes
more time and consumes more ink than Auto(Genu-
inePpr). (See "Automatic Banding Adjustment.") ➔P.580
Manual Use this mode with highly transparent media or other paper
for which Auto(GenuinePpr) or Auto(OtherPaper) cannot
be used.
Print a test pattern for adjustment of the feed amount based
on the type of paper. (See "Manual Banding Adjust-
ment.") ➔P.582
Adjust
Length
Adjust-
ment-
Print
A:High Print a test pattern for particular types of paper to compen-
sate for paper stretching or shrinkage, after which you enter
the amount of adjustment. (See "Adjusting Line
Length.") ➔P.584
B:Standard/Draft
Change
Settings
A:High Displayed when you have selected Feed Priority > Adj.
Priority > Print Length.
Adjustment relative to the amount of stretching or shrinkage
of the current paper.
Enter either the adjustment results from AdjustmentPrint
or the discrepancy that you measured (as a percentage).
For paper that tends to stretch, increase the feed amount by
choosing a higher adjustment value. For paper that tends to
shrink, decrease the feed amount by choosing a lower ad-
justment value. (See "Adjusting Line Length.") ➔P.584
B:Standard/Draft
Mainte-
nance
Head Cleaning Clean the Printhead. (See "Cleaning the Print-
head.") ➔P.598
Choose Head Cleaning A if printing is faint, oddly colored,
or contains foreign substances.
Choose Head Cleaning B if no ink is printed at all, or if
printing is not improved by Head Cleaning A.
Nozzle Check Print a test pattern to check the nozzles.
Replace P.head Execute when replacing the Printhead. Follow the instruc-
tions displayed to complete the required procedure. (See
"Replacing the Printhead.") ➔P.599
Not displayed during a warning message that the remaining
Maintenance Cartridge capacity is low.
Repl. maint cart Execute when replacing the Maintenance Cartridge. Follow
the instructions displayed to complete the required proce-
dure. (See "Replacing the Maintenance Car-
tridge.") ➔P.606
Head Info Indicates information about the printhead.
GL2 Set-
tings
Quality
Manager
Color
Mode
Monochrome Print in monochrome.
Color (CAD) 1 Print in standard colors.
Color (CAD) 2 Print with approximate colors emulating Canon iPF750,
iPF755, iPF650, iPF655, iPF760, iPF765.(*2)
Color (CAD) 3 Print with approximate colors emulating Canon iPF500,
iPF600, iPF700, iPF510, iPF610, iPF710, iPF605, iPF720,
iPF810, iPF820, iPF815, iPF825.(*2)
Color (CAD) 4 Print emulating the HP Designjet 500/800, in colors resem-
bling colors produced by these printers.(*2)
Color (CAD) 5 Print emulating the HP Designjet T1100, in colors resem-
bling colors produced by this printer.(*2)
iPF785
Menu Settings
User's Guide
Control Panel Printer Menu
461
Setting Item Description, Instructions
GL2 Set-
tings
Quality
Manager
Print Quality Choose the print quality.
Input Resolution Choose the printer input resolution, 600dpi or 300dpi.
Print (Economy) When On is selected, print using less ink.
However, the quality is lower than regular printing.
Select On to conserve ink such as the layout confirmation.
Note that although Print (Economy) is only available when
Fast is selected in Print Quality, it might not be available
depending on the paper type.
Paper
Manager
Paper Source Choose the source of paper for HP-GL/2 printing.
Margin Specify the margin around paper. The margin for the trailing
edge of sheets is 23 mm (0.9 in).
However, if you have specified the leading margin in Paper
Details, the larger of the setting values has priority.
Oversize Set the position of the margin relative to the image range.
Choose Off to set the margin inside the image range.
The image may be missing depending on the layout.
Choose On to set the margin outside the image range.
Although the image will not be missing, you should print on
paper larger than the size of the image range plus the mar-
gins.
Conserve Paper Conserves paper when printing.
Auto Rotate If the long side of an original is shorter than the roll width,
the original is automatically rotated 90 degrees to conserve
paper. Similarly, if the long side of an original in landscape
orientation is longer than the roll width and the short side is
shorter than the roll width, the original is repositioned to fit
on the paper.
HP RTL print jobs are not rotated. Because HP RTL images
are not rotated even if the paper is rotated 90 degrees, im-
ages may be cut off or the blank paper may be ejected. In
this case, set Auto Rotate to Off.
Enlarge/Reduce Enlarge or reduce the image.
Choose Specify scaling to print based on the specified
scaling value.
The specified range is 25 to 400 %.
Choose Fit to paper to print by resizing to fit the paper loa-
ded in the printer.
If Standard cut is On, the printing is resized to fit the stand-
ard paper size.
Print centered Print in the center of the paper.
Standard cut Automatically selects the best standard paper size from the
width of the loaded roll paper and the image size and cuts
the roll paper.
Nesting Use Nesting Selecting On will store print jobs until multiple documents
can be arranged to fill up the roll width, instead of printing
each print job as it is received.
Nesting WaitTime Specify a time to wait until printing, as desired.
Cut Lines Select On to print cut lines between each document on the
roll.
Line &
Pen
Manager
Enable merge Specify whether to merge or print over colors where lines
overlap.
Menu Settings
iPF785
User's Guide
Control Panel Printer Menu
462
Setting Item Description, Instructions
GL2 Set-
tings
Line &
Pen
Manager
Enable merge Choose Off to print the second line over the first. Choose
On to merge all overlapping colors.
Pen Set-
up
Select Palette As pen values, choose Software, Palette A, Palette B, or
Factory.
Choose Software to print according to software settings.
Choose Palette A or Palette B to print using the value
specified in Define Palette.
Define Palette Specify the Width, Color, and Line Attributes in the pa-
lette Pen no.. Choose Factory to confirm the values when
Factory is selected in Select Palette.
In Line Attributes, choose No Setting or Circle Setting as
the processing for the ends and junctions of lines.
•
If you choose No Setting
•
If you choose Circle Setting
Reset Palette Restore Define Palette to the default palette settings.
Smoothing Choose whether to print arcs as smooth curved lines or as
multiple connected line segments.
•
If you choose Software
Operation is determined by the application. If nothing is
specified by the application, the result is as shown in the
figure.
Note: By default, this is a 72-sided figure
•
If you choose Smooth
ThickenFineLines Select On to print fine lines more distinctly.
AdjustFaintLines If fine lines are printed in colors that do not match the colors
of other shapes, selecting Off may help produce the expec-
ted results. However, lines in some colors may appear bro-
ken.
iPF785
Menu Settings
User's Guide
Control Panel Printer Menu
463
Setting Item Description, Instructions
GL2 Set-
tings
Line &
Pen
Manager
Ln wdth correct Corrects by using a correction value that specifies the pen
width.
You can configure Black/gray and Color for each group.
The specified range is -20 to +20.
Proces-
singOp-
tion
Warning Select On to have any GL2-related warnings displayed.
On-the-Fly Selecting On will start printing jobs sooner if you are printing
only HP RTL print jobs and printing would not start until lat-
er. However, images may be incomplete in some cases, so
be sure to check the printing results.
Detect img size Sets the method of deciding the region to output in order to
print efficiently while avoiding missing images.
If Off is selected and the data contains image range infor-
mation, the image range information is followed.
If Off is selected and the data does not contain image range
information, a size with the maximum roll paper width of the
printer for the width and 1.5 times the maximum roll paper
width for the length is used.
If Command priority is selected and the data contains im-
age range information, the image range information is fol-
lowed.
If Command priority is selected and the data does not con-
tain image range information, the detected minimum image
area is used.
If Detected size is selected, the detected minimum image
area is used.
GL2 Set Print Print GL2 settings information.
Interface
Setup
EOP Timer Specify the timeout period before cancellation of print jobs
that cannot be received by the printer.
TCP/IP IPv4 IPv4 Mode Choose whether the printer IP address is configured auto-
matically or a static IP address is entered manually.
Protocol DHCP Specify the protocol used to configure the IP address auto-
matically.
BOOTP
RARP
IPv4
Settings
IP Address Specify the printer network information when using a static
IP address.
Enter the IP address assigned to the printer, as well as the
network subnet mask and default gateway.
The value that was automatically configured is displayed if
you have set IPv4 Mode to Automatic.
Subnet Mask
Default G/W
DNS
Settings
DNS Dync update Specify whether DNS server registration is updated auto-
matically.
Pri. DNS SrvAddr Specify the DNS server address.
Sec. DNS SrvAddr
DNS Host Name Specify the DNS host name.
DNS Domain Name Specify the DNS domain name.
IPv6 IPv6 Support Specify whether to connect via IPv6.
IPv6 StlessAddrs Specify whether a IPv6 stateless address is used.
DHCPv6 Specify whether DHCPv6 settings are used.
DNS
Settings
DNS
Dync
update
Statefull
Addr
Specify whether DNS server registration is updated auto-
matically.
Menu Settings
iPF785
User's Guide
Control Panel Printer Menu
464
Setting Item Description, Instructions
Interface
Setup
TCP/IP IPv6 DNS
Settings
DNS
Dync
update
State-
less
Addr
Specify whether DNS server registration is updated auto-
matically.
Pri. DNS SrvAddr Specify the DNS server address.
Sec. DNS SrvAddr
DNS Host Name Specify the DNS host name.
DNS Domain Name Specify the DNS domain name.
Ethernet
Driver
Auto Detect Specify the communication method. To apply your changes,
choose Register Setting.
Choose On for automatic configuration of the LAN commu-
nication protocol. Choose Off to use settings values of
Comm.Mode and Ethernet Type.
Comm.Mode Choose the LAN communication method.
Ethernet Type Choose the LAN transfer rate.
Spanning Tree Choose whether spanning-tree packets are supported over
the LAN.
MAC Address Indicates the MAC address.
Interface Print Print interface settings information.
Return Defaults Choose OK to restore Interface Setup settings to the de-
fault values.
System
Setup
Sleep Timer Specify the period before the printer enters sleep mode.
Shut Down Timer Sets the time until the printer turns off automatically. If no
operations are performed on the printer for the duration of
the time set in Shut Down Timer after entering Sleep
mode, the printer automatically turns off.
Buzzer Choose On for the buzzer to sound once for warnings and
three times for errors.
Contrast Adj. Adjust the Display Screen contrast level.
Date &
Time
Date Set the current date.
Time Set the current time. Available only if the Date setting is
specified.
Date Format Specify the date format.
Language Specify the language used on the Display Screen.
Time Zone Specify the time zone. Time zone options indicate a main
city in this time zone and the difference from Greenwich
Mean Time.
Length Unit Choose the display unit for length. Change the unit dis-
played for the remaining amount of roll paper, Tot.Print
Area, and so on.
Detect Mismatch Specify printing behavior if the type and size of paper speci-
fied in the printer menu does not match the type and size in
the printer driver.
Choose Pause to have printing paused under these circum-
stances. Choose Warning to continue printing after notifica-
tion. Choose None to continue printing without notification.
Choose Hold Job to store jobs with mismatched types and
sizes of paper on the printer hard disk, in a print queue
awaiting processing. (See "Using the Printer Hard
Disk.") ➔P.529
iPF785
Menu Settings
User's Guide
Control Panel Printer Menu
465
Setting Item Description, Instructions
System
Setup
Paper
Size Ba-
sis
Roll Selection 1 If roll size detection is activated, choose whether ISO A3
(297mm) or 300mm Roll is applied when a roll of an inter-
mediate width is detected.
Roll Selection 2 If roll size detection is activated, choose whether 10in.
(254mm) or JIS B4 (257mm) is applied when a roll of an
intermediate width is detected.
Keep Paper Size Choose On to use the paper size setting as the basis for
printing instead of other settings. The margin setting of the
printer menu will be used instead of the margin setting of
the printer driver if the latter is smaller, which may prevent
text or images in the margin from being printed.
Choose Off to give priority to margin settings. The larger
value is used if the margin specified in the printer driver
does not match the margin in the printer menu.
TrimEdge Reload Specify whether to trim the leading edge of the currently re-
tracted roll when the roll is advanced. Cut the edge if you
are concerned about any marks left on the roll when the roll
is left in the retracted position.
Specify On to have rolls cut when printing begins after
Sleep mode or when the power is restored. Selecting Auto-
matic will trim the edge when the roll has been in the re-
tracted position for two days or more.
Rep.P.head Print Choose On to have the printer automatically execute the
Advanced Adj. operations after you replace the Printhead.
(See "Automatic Adjustment to Straighten Lines and Col-
ors.") ➔P.572
Nozzle Check In Frequency, specify the timing for automatic checks of
nozzle clogging. Choose Standard to have the printer ad-
just the timing for checks based on the frequency of nozzle
use. Choose 1 page to check once per page. Choose 10
pages to check once per 10 pages. Choose Off to not exe-
cute check.
If On is selected in Warning, a warning may be displayed
on the Control Panel depending on the result of the nozzle
check.
Use USB When Off is selected, the device can no longer be ac-
cessed via USB.
Use Ethernet When Off is selected, the device can no longer be ac-
cessed via Ethernet.
Use RemoteUI Choosing Off prohibits access from RemoteUI. Settings can
only be configured from the control panel.
Menu Settings
iPF785
User's Guide
Control Panel Printer Menu
466
Setting Item Description, Instructions
System
Setup
Reset PaprSetngs Restores settings that you have changed with Media Con-
figuration Tool to the default values.
Erase
HDD Da-
ta
High Speed Erases file management data for print job data stored on
the printer's hard disk. (See "Erasing Data on the Printer's
Hard Disk.") ➔P.485
Secure High Spd. Overwrites the entire hard disk with random data. (See
"Erasing Data on the Printer's Hard Disk.") ➔P.485
Secure Overwrites the entire hard disk with 00, FF, and random da-
ta (one time each). Verification is performed to check if the
data was correctly written. (See "Erasing Data on the Print-
er's Hard Disk.") ➔P.485
Output
Method
Print Select the printing method for jobs received from software
other than the printer driver. When using the printer driver,
configure settings on the printer.
To print as usual, select Print. Selecting Print (Auto Del)
will print the job and then delete the data from the printer's
hard disk. Selecting Save: Box 01 will only save the print
job in the box, without printing it.
Print (Auto Del)
Save: Box XX
Print After Recv A setting for jobs received from software other than the
printer driver. When using the printer driver, configure set-
tings on the printer. Select On to print the job after it has
been saved.
Save: Common Box Select Off to print without saving jobs in the common box.
Show Job Log Selecting Off prevents display of the log in Job Menu >
Job Log. Additionally, the log is not printed if you choose
Job Menu > Print Job Log. Note that because job logs are
not collected, the Status Monitor accounting functions will
not work correctly.
Prep.MovePrinter When transferring the printer to another location, choose
the level of transfer and follow the instructions on the
screen. (See "Preparing to Transfer the Printer.") ➔P.616
Not displayed during a warning message that the remaining
Maintenance Cartridge capacity is low.
Admin.
Menu
Change Password The password that can be entered is a number from 0 to
9999999.
The restriction states and main items are shown below. For
more specific information on restricted items, see "Menu
Structure." ➔P.450
•
Viewing and configuration by administrators only
Change Password
Init.Admin.Pswd
Etc.
•
Viewing and configuration by administrators, and only
viewing by other users
Date & Time
Time Zone
Use RemoteUI
Etc.
Init.Admin.Pswd Choose OK to restore the Admin. Menu password to the
default values.
iPF785
Menu Settings
User's Guide
Control Panel Printer Menu
467
Setting Item Description, Instructions
Adj. Fine Feed (*2) (*3) Displayed when you have selected Feed Priority > Adj.
Priority > Automatic or Print Quality. Fine-tune the feed
amount manually.
Printer
Info (*2)
Paper Info Indicates the current paper size, type, and related printer
settings.
Ink Info Indicates ink levels and maintenance cartridge capacity.
Head Info Indicates information about the printhead.
System Info Indicates the firmware version, serial number, and interface
information.
Error Log Indicates the most recent error messages (up to five).
Use Situation A counter for maintenance purposes.
Displays printer usage related information.
*1: A rough estimate of how much ink was consumed per job is displayed. Actual ink consumption may be different. The average
margin of error for estimates calculated according to Canon measurement conditions for ink costs is ±15%. Canon does not guar-
antee the accuracy of these estimates. Estimates may vary depending on conditions of use. Calculation of these estimates does
not include ink consumed when cleaning printheads by forceful ejection of ink.
*2: Displayed as the menu during printing while printing is in progress.
*3: Not displayed in the regular menu.
Status Print
Status Print
You can print a Status Print report indicating the current status of the printer.
With Status Print, information is printed regarding the printer firmware version, various settings, and the status of con-
sumables.
Printing Status Print reports
1
Load paper.
If using cut sheets, load paper A4/Letter-sized, you will need three sheets.
2
On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel, press ◀ or ▶ to se-
lect Settings/Adj. tab ( ).
Note
•If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.
3
Press the OK button.
The Set./Adj. Menu is displayed.
4
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Test Print, and then press the OK button.
5
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Status Print, and then press the OK button.
Status Print
iPF785
User's Guide
Control Panel Printer Menu
468
Checking the information in Status Print reports
The following information is included in Status Print reports.
Canon imagePROGRAF iPFxxxx Status Print Printer model
Firm Firmware version
Boot Boot ROM version
MIT(DBF) MIT database format version
MIT(DB) MIT database version
S/N Printer serial number
Date Indicates when the status print report was printed.
Paper Menu Information on the loaded paper.
Roll Media Type
Cut Sheet Type
ManageRemainRoll
Keep Paper Type
Job Menu Job-related information.
Job Log A counter for maintenance purposes.
Various information about previous jobs.
HDD Information Indicates the total hard disk capacity and the mail box free
space.
Total capacity
Box free space
Set./Adj. Menu Settings and adjustment informa-
tion.
System Setup Printer system settings, as well as
settings regarding warnings and
errors.
Sleep Timer
Shut Down Timer
Buzzer
Contrast Adj.
Date Format
Language
Time Zone
Length Unit
Detect Mismatch
Paper Size Basis Paper-related settings.
Roll Selection 1
Roll Selection 2
Keep Paper Size
TrimEdge Reload
Rep.P.head Print Settings after a test pattern was
printed following head replace-
ment.
Nozzle Check Nozzle-check settings.
iPF785
Status Print
User's Guide
Control Panel Printer Menu
469
Frequency Nozzle-check settings.
Warning
Use USB Use USB settings values.
Use Ethernet Use Ethernet settings values.
Use RemoteUI Settings used by RemoteUI.
Show Job Log Print job settings.
Output Method Print job settings.
Print After Recv
Save: Common Box Save: Common Box settings val-
ues.
Adjust Printer Adjustment settings.
Head Posi. Adj. A counter for maintenance purpo-
ses.
Head position adjustment values
for previous jobs.
Adjust Log
Printer Info Ink information, RAM usage, and
a record of errors.
Ink Info Ink-related information.
MC Maintenance Cartridge capacity
(%)
(The ink color is dis-
played here.)
Ink levels.
The remaining ink is displayed in
a five-level scale.
System Info Indicates the total amount of
RAM.
RAM
Error Log The past five error codes.
HEAD LOT NUMBER/ DATE OF INSTALLATION The printhead lot number and date and time when the Printhead
was installed.
HEAD INFxx
PARTS STATUS Utilization status of replacement parts that require servicing.
COUNTER
COUNTER Utilization status of the cutter, media, and other items (indicating
how much they have been used).
CUTTER
MEDIA
LIFE TTL
LIFE ROLL
LIFE CUTSHEET
MEDIA 1-7,OTHER
NAME
TTL
ROLL
CUTSHEET
AFTER INSTALLATION
Status Print
iPF785
User's Guide
Control Panel Printer Menu
470
DUTY Counters for maintenance purposes. Needed when service is
requested.
UNIT:m2
UNIT:sq.f
UNIT:A4 Sheet
UNIT:Letter Sheet
Printing Interface Setting Reports
Printing Interface Setting Reports
You can print an Interface Print report indicating the current interface settings values of the printer.
Printing Interface Print reports
1
Load the paper.
If using sheets, load paper A4/Letter-sized, you will need at least three sheets.
2
On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel, press ◀ or ▶ to se-
lect the Settings/Adj. tab ( ).
Note
•If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.
3
Press the OK button.
The Set./Adj. Menu is displayed.
4
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Test Print, and then press the OK button.
5
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Interface Print, and then press the OK button.
Confirming Interface Print information
The following information is included in the Interface Print report.
Canon imagePROGRAF iPFxxxx Interface Print Printer model
Firm Firmware Version
Boot Boot ROM Version
MIT(DBF) MIT Database Format Version
MIT(DB) MIT Database Version
S/N Printer serial number
Date The date when the interface setup print report was
printed.
EOP Timer Specify the timeout period before cancellation of
print jobs that cannot be received by the printer.
TCP/IPv4 Frame Type IPv4 settings values.
Use DHCP
iPF785
Printing Interface Setting Reports
User's Guide
Control Panel Printer Menu
471
TCP/IPv4 Use BOOTP IPv4 settings values.
Use RARP
Enable DNS Dynamic Update
Use Zeroconf Function
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Gateway Address
LPD Printing
IPP Printing
IPP Printer URI
RAW Printing
Raw Mode Bi-direction
FTP Printing
WSD Printing
Use Discovery
Scope
Primary DNS Server Address
Secondary DNS Server Address
DNS Host Name
DNS Domain Name
MulticastDNS ServiceName
SNMPv1
SNMPv3
TCP/IPv6 Use IPv6 IPv6 settings values.
Use DHCPv6 Stateful Address
Prefix Length
Primary DNS Server Address
Secondary DNS Server Address
Use a stateless address Stateless Address 1
Prefix Length 1
Stateless Address 2
Prefix Length 2
Stateless Address 3
Prefix Length 3
Stateless Address 4
Prefix Length 4
Stateless Address 5
Prefix Length 5
Stateless Address 6
Prefix Length 6
Use a link-local Address Link-Local Address
Printing Interface Setting Reports
iPF785
User's Guide
Control Panel Printer Menu
472
TCP/IPv6 Use a link-local Address Prefix Length IPv6 settings values.
Use a manual address IP Address
Prefix Length
Default Router Address
Prefix Length
Primary DNS Server Address
Secondary DNS Server Address
Use the same host name and do-
main name as IPv4
DNS Host Name
DNS Domain Name
Perform dynamic updating of stateful addresses
Dynamically update the stateless address
Dynamically update the manual address
Network Interface Physical Interface Network interface settings values.
Transmission Rate
MAC Address
Auto Detect
Communication
Ethernet Type
Spanning Tree
Use the Jumbo Frame Function
iPF785
Printing Interface Setting Reports
User's Guide
Control Panel Printer Menu
473
iPF785
User's Guide
Basic Printing Workow 15
Enhanced Printing Options 31
Windows Software 157
Mac OS Software 277
Handling and Use of Paper 361
Control Panel 435
Printer Parts
Printer parts ............................................................................................. 476
Hard Disk ................................................................................................. 483
Optional accessories ............................................................................... 487
Network Setting 489
Print Job Management 509
Adjustments for Better Print Quality 571
Maintenance and Consumables 587
Troubleshooting 625
Error Message 655
Specications 679
Appendix 683
imagePROGRAF
Printer Parts
475
Printer parts
Printer parts
Front ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 476
Side ............................................................................................................................................................................................... 478
Top Cover (Inside) .................................................................................................................................................................. 479
Roll Cover (Inside) .................................................................................................................................................................. 480
Carriage ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 480
Ink Tank Cover (Inside) ......................................................................................................................................................... 481
Stand ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 482
Control Panel ............................................................................................................................................................................ 436
Front
Front
a
Roll Cover
Open this cover to load rolls. (See "Roll Cover (Inside).") ➔P.480
b
Paper Feed Slot
When loading paper, insert it here.
c
Roll Ledge
When loading rolls, rest the Roll Holder here before loading it in the Roll Holder Slot.
d
Release Lever
When releasing the Paper Retainer, push this lever back.
e
Control Panel
Use this panel to operate the printer and check the printer status. (See "Control Panel.") ➔P.436
Front
iPF785
User's Guide
Printer Parts Printer parts
476
f
Ink Tank Cover
Open this cover to replace an Ink Tank. (See "Ink Tank Cover (Inside).") ➔P.481
g
Paper Alignment Line
An orange line for alignment of paper.
h
Maintenance Cartridge Cover
Open this cover to replace the Maintenance Cartridge.
i
Maintenance Cartridge
Absorbs ink used for maintenance purposes such as head cleaning. (Replace the cartridge when it is full.)
j
Cutter Unit
A round-bladed cutter for automatic roll cutting.
k
Cutter Rail
The Cutter Unit passes over this rail to cut paper.
l
Output Tray
All printed documents are ejected from this slot.
m
Ejection Guide
Supports output paper.
n
Top Cover
Open this cover to install the Printhead and remove any jammed paper from inside the printer, as needed. (See
"Top Cover (Inside).") ➔P.479
o
Width Guide
When loading the sheets , move the guide to match the paper size.
p
Stand
A stand that holds the printer. Equipped with casters to facilitate moving it. (See "Stand.") ➔P.482
iPF785
Front
User's Guide
Printer Parts Printer parts
477
Side
Side
a
Manual Pocket
Store printer manuals in this pocket.
b
Ethernet Port
Connect an Ethernet cable to this port.
c
USB Port
Connect a USB cable to this port. The printer is compatible with Hi-Speed USB connections.
d
Carrying Handles
When carrying the printer, have three people hold it by these handles on the back at both ends.
Grasp these parts on the left and right sides also when moving the printer with the stand attached.
e
Power Supply Connector
Connect the power cord to this connector.
Side
iPF785
User's Guide
Printer Parts Printer parts
478
Top Cover (Inside)
Top Cover (Inside)
a
Carriage
Moves the Printhead. The carriage serves a key role in printing. (See "Carriage.") ➔P.480
b
Carriage Shaft
The Carriage slides along this shaft.
c
Paper Retainer
Important in supplying the paper. This retainer holds paper as it is fed.
d
Platen
The Printhead moves across the platen to print. Vacuum holes on the platen hold paper in place.
e
Borderless Printing Ink Grooves
For catching ink outside the edges of paper during borderless printing.
f
Linear Scale
The linear scale serves a key role in detecting the Carriage position. Be careful not to touch this part when clean-
ing inside the Top Cover or clearing paper jams.
g
Cleaning Brush
When cleaning inside the printer under the Top Cover, use this brush to sweep away paper dust on the Platen.
iPF785
Top Cover (Inside)
User's Guide
Printer Parts Printer parts
479
Roll Cover (Inside)
Roll Cover (Inside)
a
Roll Holder
Load the roll on this holder.
b
Holder Stopper
Secure rolls on the Roll Holder with this part.
c
Roll Loading Slots
Slide the Roll Holder along these slots.
d
Roll Holder Slot
Load the Roll Holder into this holder slot.
Carriage
Carriage
Roll Cover (Inside)
iPF785
User's Guide
Printer Parts Printer parts
480
a
Angle Adjustment Lever
Use this lever to fine-tune the printer to correct misalignment of printed lines.
b
Printhead
The printhead is equipped with ink nozzles. The carriage serves a key role in printing.
c
Printhead Fixer Lever
Locks the Printhead Fixer Cover.
d
Printhead Fixer Cover
Holds the Printhead in place.
Ink Tank Cover (Inside)
Ink Tank Cover (Inside)
Left Side Right Side
a
Ink Tank Lock Lever
A lever that locks the Ink Tank in place and protects it. Lift and press down the lever when replacing an Ink Tank.
b
Ink Color Label
Load an Ink Tank that matches the color and name on this label.
c
Ink Lamp (Red)
Indicates the state of the Ink Tank as follows when the Ink Tank Cover is opened.
•
On
The Ink Tank is installed correctly.
•
Off
No Ink Tank is installed, or the ink level detection function has been released.
•
Flashing Slowly
Not much ink is left.
•
Flashing Rapidly
There is no ink left.
d
Ink Tank
Cartridges of ink in various colors.
iPF785
Ink Tank Cover (Inside)
User's Guide
Printer Parts Printer parts
481
Stand
Stand
•
Printer Stand ST-34
a
Accessory Pocket
Stores printer accessories.
b
Output Stacker
Printed documents are ejected into the output tray.
c
Locking Caster
Lock to immobilize the caster.
Before moving the printer, always unlock all four casters. Moving the printer while casters are locked may
scratch the casters or the floor.
d
Adjustable Stopper
Pull out depending on the paper size when using the output stacker in the Extended position A.
For details on the extended position, see "Using the Output Stacker." ➔P.400
e
Paper Guide
Guides printed documents into the output stacker.
f
Output stacker handle
This handle is grasped and supports the sliding output stacker when putting the output stacker into Extended
position B and returning it to the regular position.
For details on the extended position, see "Using the Output Stacker." ➔P.400
g
Output stacker release lever
Pull this lever towards you to release Extended position B.
For details on the extended position, see "Using the Output Stacker." ➔P.400
h
Output Stacker Ejection Guides
This guide supports the paper that is output when using the output stacker in Extended position B.
Stand
iPF785
User's Guide
Printer Parts Printer parts
482
Hard Disk
Hard Disk
Printer Hard Disk Operations ............................................................................................................................................ 483
Checking the Free Hard Disk Space .............................................................................................................................. 484
Erasing Data on the Printer's Hard Disk ....................................................................................................................... 485
Printer Hard Disk Operations
Printer Hard Disk Operations
Printer hard disk operations are available from the following programs and interfaces.
•
Printer driver
•
Free Layout
•
Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy
•
Preview
•
imagePROGRAF Status Monitor
•
imagePROGRAF Printmonitor
•
RemoteUI
•
Control Panel
The hard disk operations available through each interface are as follows.
Operation
•
Printer driver
•
Free Layout
•
Color imageRUNNER
Enlargement Copy
•
Preview
•
imagePROGRAF Sta-
tus Monitor
•
imagePROGRAF Print-
monitor
RemoteUI Control Pan-
el
Saving print jobs Save in mail box Yes No No No
Do Not Save Print Jobs
in the Common Box
No No No Yes
Save print jobs sent
from sources other than
the printer driver
No No No Yes
Operations with saved
jobs
Print saved jobs No Yes Yes Yes
Delete saved jobs No Yes Yes Yes
Job queue management Display job queue No Yes Yes Yes
Delete No Yes Yes Yes
Preempt Jobs No Yes Yes Yes
Operations with held
jobs
No Yes Yes Yes
Mail box management Move saved jobs No Yes Yes No
Modify saved jobs No Yes Yes No
Modify mail boxes No Yes Yes No
Print a list of saved jobs No No No Yes
Display a list of saved
jobs
No Yes Yes Yes
Other operations Display free hard disk
space
No Yes Yes Yes
Initialize hard disk No No No Yes
Display the time of print-
ing
No Yes Yes Yes
iPF785
Printer Hard Disk Operations
User's Guide
Printer Parts Hard Disk
483
Operation
•
Printer driver
•
Free Layout
•
Color imageRUNNER
Enlargement Copy
•
Preview
•
imagePROGRAF Sta-
tus Monitor
•
imagePROGRAF Print-
monitor
RemoteUI Control Pan-
el
Display error messages No Yes Yes Yes
Checking the Free Hard Disk Space
Checking the Free Hard Disk Space
Check the space available on the printer's hard disk as follows.
This operation is available from the Control Panel, in RemoteUI, imagePROGRAF Status Monitor, and imagePROG-
RAF Printmonitor.
Using the Control Panel
1
On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel, press ◀ or ▶ to se-
lect the Job tab ( ).
Note
•If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.
2
Press the OK button.
The Job Menu is displayed.
3
Press ▲ or ▼ to select HDD Information, and then press the OK button.
Using RemoteUI
To view the box list, select Stored Job in Job Management. On the Stored Job page, the free hard disk space is
shown in the upper-right corner when boxes are listed.
For details, refer to the RemoteUI help file.
Checking the Free Hard Disk Space
iPF785
User's Guide
Printer Parts Hard Disk
484
Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor
The Hard Disk sheet shows the free hard disk space.
For details, refer to the imagePROGRAF Status Monitor help file.
Using imagePROGRAF Printmonitor
The Hard Disk pane shows the free hard disk space.
For details, refer to the imagePROGRAF Printmonitor help file.
Erasing Data on the Printer's Hard Disk
Erasing Data on the Printer's Hard Disk
When erasing all data on the hard disk, choose from the following three options.
This operation is only available from the Control Panel.
Erasure Method Details
High Speed Erases file management data for print job data stored on the printer's hard disk. Choose this method for
relatively fast erasure. Because only the file management data is erased, the print job data itself is not
erased. Note that it may be possible to read this data using commercial data recovery software.
iPF785
Erasing Data on the Printer's Hard Disk
User's Guide
Printer Parts Hard Disk
485
Erasure Method Details
Secure High Spd. Overwrites the entire hard disk with random data. No verification is performed to check if the data was
correctly written. Choose this method to erase highly confidential data. Note that it may be possible to read
the overwritten data using specialized data recovery tools.
Secure Overwrites the entire hard disk with 00, FF, and random data (one time each). Verification is performed to
check if the data was correctly written. Choose this method to erase especially confidential data. It is virtu-
ally impossible to recover the overwritten data. Conforms to the DoD5220.22-M standard of the U.S. De-
partment of Defense.
Important
•For a more secure method of preventing data recovery, we recommend physically or magnetically destroying the hard
disk. In this case, the hard disk can no longer be used.
•Erase HDD Data is not available if there is a job queue.
Additionally, print jobs are not processed during execution of Erase HDD Data.
1
On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel, press ◀ or ▶ to se-
lect the Settings/Adj. tab ( ).
Note
•If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.
2
Press the OK button.
The Set./Adj. Menu is displayed.
3
Press ▲ or ▼ to select System Setup, and then press the OK button.
4
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Erase HDD Data, and then press the OK button.
5
Press ▲ or ▼ to select High Speed, Secure High Spd., or Secure, and then press the OK button to display
the confirmation screen.
Note
•If a password has been set on the printer, the Admin.Pswd screen is displayed. In this case, enter the pass-
word and press the OK button to go to the next step.
•As for the time required for deletion, confirm it on the Control Panel. However, when High Speed is selected,
this finishes in several seconds.
6
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Yes, and then press the OK button to start erasure.
After the printer hard disk is erased, the printer automatically restarts.
Erasing Data on the Printer's Hard Disk
iPF785
User's Guide
Printer Parts Hard Disk
486
Optional accessories
Optional accessories
Roll Holder Set
Roll Holder Set
Load a roll on the roll holder and then load the holder in the printer. The Roll Holder in the Roll Holder Set RH2-33 is for
use with both 2-inch and 3-inch paper cores. Use the correct attachment for the particular paper core. (See "Attaching
the Roll Holder to Rolls.") ➔P.372
•
Roll Holder Set RH2-33
•
Roll Holder (for 2- and 3-inch paper cores)
•
Attachments
Using the 2-Inch Paper Core Attachment Using the 3-Inch Paper Core Attachment
2-Inch Paper Core Attachment 3-Inch Paper Core Attachment L 3-Inch Paper Core Attachment R
iPF785
Roll Holder Set
User's Guide
Printer Parts Optional accessories
487
iPF785
User's Guide
Basic Printing Workow 15
Enhanced Printing Options 31
Windows Software 157
Mac OS Software 277
Handling and Use of Paper 361
Control Panel 435
Printer Parts 475
Network Setting
Network Environment .............................................................................. 490
Using RemoteUI ...................................................................................... 492
Initial Settings .......................................................................................... 494
Mac OS Settings ...................................................................................... 502
Other Settings .......................................................................................... 503
Device Setup Utility (Windows) ............................................................... 506
Print Job Management 509
Adjustments for Better Print Quality 571
Maintenance and Consumables 587
Troubleshooting 625
Error Message 655
Specications 679
Appendix 683
imagePROGRAF
Network Setting
489
Network Environment
Network Environment
Network Environment
Network Environment
System requirements
The system requirements, which vary depending on your network, are as follows.
•
Printing over a TCP/IP network (when using IPv4)
•
Compatible operating systems
•
Windows XP
•
Windows Server 2003
•
Windows Vista
•
Windows Server 2008
•
Windows 7
•
Windows 8
•
Windows Server 2003 x64
•
Windows Vista x64
•
Windows Server 2008 x64
•
Windows Server 2012 x64
•
Windows 7 x64
•
Windows 8 x64
•
OS X v10.6.8 or later
•
Unix（Solaris 9）
•
Unix（Red Hat 9）
•
Printing over a TCP/IP network (when using IPv6)
•
Compatible operating systems
•
Windows Vista
•
Windows Server 2008
•
Windows 7
•
Windows 8
•
Windows Vista x64
•
Windows Server 2008 x64
•
Windows Server 2012 x64
•
Windows 7 x64
•
Windows 8 x64
•
OS X v10.6.8 or later
Note
•When using IPv6, you must specify IPv6 on the Control Panel or in RemoteUI. For instructions, "Configuring TCP/
IPv6 Network Settings" ➔P.497 or see "Configuring the Printer's TCP/IP Network Settings With Remo-
teUI." ➔P.498
•The imagePROGRAF printer driver is not compatible with Unix.
Network Environment
After confirming what type of network environment you will connect the printer to, set up the printer and computers as
needed. For the specifications of the network interface, see "Specifications." ➔P.680
Network Environment
iPF785
User's Guide
Network Setting Network Environment
490
Using RemoteUI
Using RemoteUI
Using RemoteUI
Using RemoteUI
RemoteUI is software with which you can access the printer via the network from your Web browser to confirm the
printer status, operate jobs, and configure the settings. Since the software (Web server) for using RemoteUI is built in
the printer, preparing software other than a Web browser is unnecessary. You can use RemoteUI if an imagePROG-
RAF printer on a network is connected to your computer. If you start your Web browser and specify the IP address of
the printer, the RemoteUI screen is displayed, and you can use RemoteUI.
Important
•To use RemoteUI, an IP address must be set on the printer in advance. For the method of setting an IP address, see
"Configuring the IP Address on the Printer." ➔P.494
What You Can Do With RemoteUI
With RemoteUI, you can access the printer via a network, configure network settings, and display the current status of
the printer, various types of information, the processing status of jobs, etc.
Starting RemoteUI
Start RemoteUI by the following operations.
1
Start your Web browser.
2
Enter the following URL in Address or Location.
http://printer IP address or name/
Example: http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx/
3
The RemoteUI screen is displayed.
Note
•The screen slightly differs depending on the model of printer.
Configuring the Network With RemoteUI
For details on configuring printer settings for networks, refer to the following topics.
•
Configuring the Printer's TCP/IP Network Settings With RemoteUI ➔P.498
•
Specifying Printer-Related Information ➔P.503
Using RemoteUI
iPF785
User's Guide
Network Setting Using RemoteUI
492
Important
•For the Web browser, use Netscape Navigator 6.0 or later, Internet Explorer 5.01 or later, or Firefox 1.5 or later. For
Mac OS X, Safari 1.32 or later or 2.03 or later also is supported.
•This cannot be used connected via a proxy server. In environments where a proxy server is used, add the printer's IP
address to Exceptions (addresses accessed without a proxy server) in the web browser proxy server settings. (Set-
tings may vary depending on the network environment.)
•Enable JavaScript and cookies in the web browser.
•If you access RemoteUI with the printer name instead of its IP address, make sure the DNS settings are correctly
configured.
•Depending on the network environment, you may not be able to start RemoteUI.
•Confirm whether System Setup > Use RemoteUI is set to On on the Control Panel of the printer.
Note
•RemoteUI also offers many other features. You can display the ink levels, check error messages and other status infor-
mation, and cancel print jobs.
•By factory default, the English screen is displayed. To change the display language, select the desired language under
Language before logging on in administrator mode.
•If you login in Administrator Mode, you can configure to use the Jumbo Frame function in the Network page. However,
this function might not be able to be used depending on the network environment.
iPF785
Using RemoteUI
User's Guide
Network Setting Using RemoteUI
493
Initial Settings
Initial Settings
Conguring the IP Address on the Printer .................................................................................................................. 494
Conguring the IP Address Using imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility ................................................ 506
Conguring the IP Address Using the Printer Control Panel ........................................................................ 494
Conguring the IP Address Using ARP and PING Commands ..................................................................... 495
Conguring TCP/IPv6 Network Settings ...................................................................................................................... 497
Conguring the Printer Driver Destination (Windows) ........................................................................................... 497
Conguring the Printer Driver Destination (Mac OS) ............................................................................................. 498
Conguring the Printer's TCP/IP Network Settings With RemoteUI ................................................................ 498
Configuring the IP Address on the Printer
Configuring the IP Address on the Printer
You must configure the printer's IP address before using the printer in a TCP/IP network.
The printer's IP address is configured automatically when you install the printer driver following the instructions in the
Setup Guide.
Configure the IP address by using imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility, the printer Control Panel, or ARP or PING
commands, if the IP address is changed, or if you change the printer connection mode to a network connection. For
details on configuring the IP address, refer to the following topics.
•
Configuring the IP Address Using imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility ➔P.506 (Windows)
•
Configuring the IP Address Using the Printer Control Panel ➔P.494
•
Configuring the IP Address Using ARP and PING Commands ➔P.495
Important
•If you use a DHCP server for automatic assignment of the printer's IP address, printing may no longer be possible
after the printer is turned off and on. This is because an IP address different from before has been assigned. Thus,
when using DHCP server functions, consult your network administrator and configure the settings in one of the follow-
ing ways.
•Configure the setting for dynamic DNS updating
In the printer menu, either set DNS Dync update to On, or activate the setting Enable DNS Dynamic Update in
RemoteUI.
(See "Menu Settings.") ➔P.457
(See "Configuring the Printer's TCP/IP Network Settings With RemoteUI.") ➔P.498
•Configure the setting for assignment of the same IP address each time the printer starts up
Note
•We recommend configuring the printer's IP address even if you will use the printer in networks other than TCP/IP net-
works. Configuring the printer's IP address enables you to use RemoteUI to configure the network settings and man-
age the printer with a web browser.
For details on RemoteUI, see "Using RemoteUI." ➔P.492
Configuring the IP Address Using the Printer Control Panel
Configuring the IP Address Using the Printer Control Panel
This topic describes how to configure the printer's IP address on the Control Panel.
1
On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel, press ◀ or ▶ to se-
lect the Settings/Adj. tab ( ).
Conguring the IP Address on the Printer
iPF785
User's Guide
Network Setting Initial Settings
494
Note
•If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.
2
Press the OK button.
The Set./Adj. Menu is displayed.
3
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Interface Setup, and then press the OK button.
4
Press ▲ or ▼ to select TCP/IP, and then press the OK button.
5
Press ▲ or ▼ to select IPv4, and then press the OK button.
6
Press ▲ or ▼ to select IPv4 Settings, and then press the OK button.
7
Press ▲ or ▼ to select IP Address, and then press the OK button.
8
After you press ◀ or ▶ to select the input field, numerical input is possible.
9
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to enter the value.
Note
•Pressing the ▲ button increases the number by 1. The maximum value is 9, after which 0 is displayed.
•Pressing the ▼ button decreases the number by 1. The minimum value is 0, after which 9 is displayed.
•Hold down ▲ or ▼ to increase or decrease the value continuously.
•Make sure the IP address you enter for the printer is not the same as any computer IP address in your net-
work.
10
Repeat steps 8 and 9 to complete the settings, and then press the OK button.
11
Press the Menu button.
If you have changed the settings, a confirmation message is dis-
played. Press ▲ or ▼ to select Yes, and then press the OK button.
Important
•Be sure to complete step 11. This will activate the values you have entered.
•If an error message is displayed, check the settings and correct any invalid values.
Note
•You can also specify the subnet mask and default gateway on the Control Panel.
Configuring the IP Address Using ARP and PING Commands
Configuring the IP Address Using ARP and PING Commands
This topic describes how to configure the IP address using ARP and PING commands.
iPF785
Conguring the IP Address Using ARP and PING Commands
User's Guide
Network Setting Initial Settings
495
To use the ARP and PING commands, you will need to know the printer's MAC address. You can confirm the MAC
address on the Control Panel.
1
Check the printer's MAC address.
You can confirm the MAC address on the Control Panel as follows:
1.
On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel, press ◀ or ▶ to
select the Settings/Adj. tab ( ).
2.
Press the OK button.
The Set./Adj. Menu is displayed.
3.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Interface Setup, and then press the OK button.
4.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Ethernet Driver, and then press the OK button.
5.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select MAC Address, and then press the OK button.
Note
•If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.
•You can investigate the MAC address by printing an interface setting report.
(See "Printing Interface Setting Reports.") ➔P.471
2
In Windows, open a command prompt, or in Mac OS, start Terminal.
3
Execute the following command to add entries to the ARP table for managing IP addresses and corresponding
MAC addresses.
arp -s [IP address] [the printer's MAC address you have verified]
Example: arp -s xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx 00-1E-8F-xx-xx-xx
Note
•In Mac OS when using Terminal, enter the arp command in the format arp -s xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx 00:1E:
8F:xx:xx:xx. For details, refer to the help file for the command line.
4
Execute the following command to send the IP address to the printer and configure it.
ping [IP address as specified in the ARP command] -l 479
Example: ping xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx -l 479
Note
•In -l, the l is the letter l.
•In Mac OS when using Terminal, enter the ping command in the format ping -s 479 xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx. For de-
tails, refer to the help file for the command line.
Note
•The subnet mask and default gateway are set to 0.0.0.0. Use RemoteUI to change the subnet mask and default gate-
way to match your network settings.
For details on RemoteUI, see "Using RemoteUI." ➔P.492
Conguring the IP Address Using ARP and PING Commands
iPF785
User's Guide
Network Setting Initial Settings
496
Configuring TCP/IPv6 Network Settings
Configuring TCP/IPv6 Network Settings
When printing in a TCP/IPv6 network, you must configure the TCP/IPv6 settings on the Control Panel.
Follow the steps below to configure the TCP/IPv6 network settings.
1
On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel, press ◀ or ▶ to se-
lect the Settings/Adj. tab ( ).
Note
•If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.
2
Press the OK button.
The Set./Adj. Menu is displayed.
3
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Interface Setup, and then press the OK button.
4
Press ▲ or ▼ to select TCP/IP, and then press the OK button.
5
Press ▲ or ▼ to select IPv6, and then press the OK button.
6
Press ▲ or ▼ to select IPv6 Support, and then press the OK button.
7
Press ▲ or ▼ to select On, and then press the OK button.
Important
•Once you set IPv6 Support to On, the IPv6 StlessAddrs setting takes effect.
Note
•You can also configure IPv6 StlessAddrs and DHCPv6 from the printer Control Panel.
Configuring the Printer Driver Destination (Windows)
Configuring the Printer Driver Destination (Windows)
This topic describes how to specify the printer driver destination if the printer's IP address is changed, or if you will use
the printer over a network connection instead of via USB connection.
The procedure described below is the configuration based on the LPR or Raw protocol using the standard TCP/IP port
in Windows ( Standard TCP/IP Port ).
Important
•If you will use the printer in a TCP/IP network, make sure the printer's IP address is configured correctly.
•Configuring the IP Address on the Printer ➔P.494
Note
•This section describes the procedure in Windows 7.
1
Open the Devices and Printers window.
2
Right-click the icon of this printer and choose Printer Properties to open the printer properties window.
3
Click the Port tab to display the Port sheet.
iPF785
Conguring TCP/IPv6 Network Settings
User's Guide
Network Setting Initial Settings
497
4
Click Add Port to display the Printer Ports dialog box.
5
In the Available Port list, select Standard TCP/IP Port.
6
Click New Port.
After the wizard starts, a window is displayed for the Welcome to the Add Standard TCP/IP Printer Port Wiz-
ard.
7
Click Next.
8
In Printer Name or IP Address, enter the printer's IP address. If the DNS is configured, you can also enter the
DNS Domain Name.
9
Follow the instructions on the screen to add a printer port.
10
Click Close to close the Printer Ports dialog box.
11
Make sure the printer port you added is displayed under Ports, and that the port is selected.
12
Click Close to close the printer properties window.
Configuring the Printer Driver Destination (Mac OS)
Configuring the Printer Driver Destination (Mac OS)
Specify the printer driver destination as follows if the printer's IP address is changed, or if you will use the printer over a
network connection instead of via USB connection.
•
If you switch to printing in a TCP/IP network, or if the printer's IP address is changed, see "Configuring the Destina-
tion in TCP/IP Networks ." ➔P.502
•
If you switch to printing in a Bonjour network, see "Configuring the Destination for Bonjour Network ." ➔P.502
Configuring the Printer's TCP/IP Network Settings With RemoteUI
Configuring the Printer's TCP/IP Network Settings With RemoteUI
Follow the steps below to configure the TCP/IP network settings.
When using an IPv4 IP address
1
Start the web browser and enter the following URL in the Location (or Address ) box to display the RemoteUI
page.
http://printer IP address or name/
Example: http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx/
2
Select Administrator Mode and click Logon.
Note
•If a password has been set on the printer, enter the password.
3
Click Network in the Device Manager menu at left to display the Network page.
4
Click Edit in the upper-right corner of the TCP/IPv4 group to display the Edit TCP/IP Protocol Settings page.
5
Refer to the TCP/IP Settings Items table to complete the settings.
TCP/IP Settings Items
Item Details Default Setting
Use DHCP Activate this setting to use DHCP for configuring the IP address. Off
Use BOOTP Activate this setting to use BOOTP for configuring the IP address. Off
Conguring the Printer Driver Destination (Mac OS)
iPF785
User's Guide
Network Setting Initial Settings
498
Item Details Default Setting
Use RARP Activate this setting to use RARP for configuring the IP address. Off
Enable DNS Dynamic
Update
Activate this setting to perform DNS server registration automatically. Off
Use Zeroconf Func-
tion
Activate this setting to use Bonjour. On
IP Address Specify the printer's IP address. 0.0.0.0
Subnet Mask Specify the printer's subnet mask. 0.0.0.0
Gateway Address Specify the printer's default gateway. 0.0.0.0
LPD Printing Activate this setting to use LDP Printing. On
IPP Printing Activate this setting to use IPP Printing. On
IPP Printer URI Specify the URI of the printer used for IPP printing using up to 252 charac-
ters.
printer
RAW Printing Activate this setting to use Raw Printing. On
RAW Mode Bi-direc-
tion
Activate this setting to use Raw mode bidirectional communication. Off
FTP Printing Activate this setting to use FTP Printing. On
Use Discovery Activate this setting to use SLP Discovery function. On
Scope Enter the SLP search range. default
SMTP Server Address Specify the SMTP server's IP address.
You can also specify the SMTP server domain name, if desired.
0.0.0.0
Primary DNS Server
Address
Specify the IP address of the primary DNS server. 0.0.0.0
Secondary DNS Serv-
er Address
Specify the IP address of the secondary DNS server. 0.0.0.0
DNS Host Name Specify the printer host name, up to 63 characters (1–63 characters). Use sin-
gle-byte letters, numbers, and - (hyphens). Do not use numbers or - for the
first character or - for the last character.
NB-18GBipxxxxxx
DNS Domain Name Specify the printer domain name, up to 63 characters. Use single-byte letters,
numbers, - (hyphens), and . (periods). Do not use numbers, -, or . for the first
character, or - or . for the last character.
blank
Multicast DNS Serv-
ice Name
Specify the printer's Multicast DNS service name. (1–63 characters)
This name will be displayed when Bonjour functions are used.
Canon iPFxxxx
(xxxxxx)
6
Click OK to display the Network page.
Note
•If you specify to configure the IP address using DHCP, BOOTP, or RARP, there must be a server that supports such
protocol running in the network.
•If you specify to configure the IP address using DHCP, BOOTP, or RARP, the IP address obtained by this method is
used first. If you cannot obtain the IP address, the address specified in IP Address is used.
•It takes up to two minutes to determine whether DHCP, BOOTP, or RARP are available. We recommend clearing check
boxes of options you will not use.
•If you are using a DNS server, select Enable DNS Dynamic Update and enter the IP Address for DNS servers and
DNS domain name in Primary DNS Server Address, Secondary DNS Server Address and DNS Domain Name,
respectively.
iPF785
Conguring the Printer's TCP/IP Network Settings With RemoteUI
User's Guide
Network Setting Initial Settings
499
When using an IPv6 IP address
1
Start the web browser and enter the following URL in the Location (or Address ) box to display the RemoteUI
page.
http://printer IP address or name/
Example: http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx/
2
Select Administrator Mode and click Logon.
Note
•If a password has been set on the printer, enter the password.
3
Click Network in the Device Manager menu at left to display the Network page.
4
Click Edit in the upper-right corner of the TCP/IPv6 group to display the Edit TCP/IPv6 Protocol Settings
page.
5
Refer to the TCP/IPv6 Settings Items table to complete the settings.
TCP/IPv6 Settings Items
Item Details Default Setting
Use IPv6 Activate to enable IPv6. Off
Use DHCPv6 Activate when using a DHCPv6 server to acquire the IP ad-
dress.
Off
Use a stateless address Activate when using an IPv6-compatible router to acquire the IP
address.
On
Use a manual address Activate when configuring the IP address manually. Off
IP Address Enter the printer's IP address. ::
Prefix Length Enter the IP address prefix length. 0
Default Router Ad-
dress
Enter the default router address. ::
Prefix Length Enter the prefix length of the default router address. 0
Primary DNS Server Address Specify the IP address of the primary DNS server. ::
Secondary DNS Server Address Specify the IP address of the secondary DNS server. ::
Use the same host name and domain
name as IPv4
Activate when using the same DNS host and domain names as
for IPv4.
Off
DNS Host Name Specify the printer host name, up to 63 characters (1–63 charac-
ters). Use single-byte letters, numbers, and - (hyphens). Do not
use numbers or - for the first character or - for the last character.
NB-18GBip6xxxxxx
DNS Domain Name Specify the printer domain name, up to 63 characters. Use sin-
gle-byte letters, numbers, - (hyphens), and . (periods). Do not
use numbers, -, or . for the first character, or - or . for the last
character.
blank
Perform dynamic updating of stateful
addresses
Activate this setting to automatically register the stateful address
with the DNS server.
Off
Dynamically update the stateless ad-
dress
Activate this setting to automatically register the stateless ad-
dress with the DNS server.
Off
Dynamically update the manual ad-
dress
Activate this setting to automatically register the manual address
with the DNS server.
Off
6
Click OK to display the Network page.
Conguring the Printer's TCP/IP Network Settings With RemoteUI
iPF785
User's Guide
Network Setting Initial Settings
500
Note
•If you are using a DNS server, select Enable DNS Dynamic Update and enter the IP Address for DNS servers and
DNS domain name in Primary DNS Server Address, Secondary DNS Server Address and DNS Domain Name,
respectively.
iPF785
Conguring the Printer's TCP/IP Network Settings With RemoteUI
User's Guide
Network Setting Initial Settings
501
Mac OS Settings
Mac OS Settings
Conguring the Destination in TCP/IP Networks .................................................................................................... 502
Conguring the Destination for Bonjour Network ..................................................................................................502
Configuring the Destination in TCP/IP Networks
Configuring the Destination in TCP/IP Networks
If you use the printer in a TCP/IP network, register the printer in Print & Scan (This is identified as Printers & Scan-
ners or Print & Fax in other versions of Mac OS.) in the Mac OS System Preferences.
Note
•For details on how to register a printer using a TCP/IP network, see the OS User Manual.
Important
•If you use the printer in a TCP/IP network, make sure the printer's IP address is configured correctly. (See "Configur-
ing the IP Address Using the Printer Control Panel.") ➔P.494
Configuring the Destination for Bonjour Network
Configuring the Destination for Bonjour Network
If you use the printer in a network that uses the Bonjour function, register the printer in Print & Scan (This is identified
as Printers & Scanners or Print & Fax in other versions of Mac OS.) in the Mac OS System Preferences.
Note
•For details on how to register a printer using Bonjour, see the OS User Manual.
Important
•Bonjour and IP Print (Auto) do not support printing to a printer on other network groups that require a router for con-
nection. Make sure the computer and printer are on the same network. For information about network settings, ask
your network administrator.
•By default, Bonjour is activated on the printer. You can activate or deactivate the Bonjour function or change the print-
er name by using RemoteUI. For instructions on changing it, see "Using RemoteUI." ➔P.492
Conguring the Destination in TCP/IP Networks
iPF785
User's Guide
Network Setting Mac OS Settings
502
Other Settings
Other Settings
Specifying Printer-Related Information ......................................................................................................................... 503
Conguring the Communication Mode Manually ..................................................................................................... 504
Email Notication When Printing is Finished or Errors Occur ............................................................................ 505
Initializing the Network Settings ....................................................................................................................................... 505
Specifying Printer-Related Information
Specifying Printer-Related Information
Follow the steps below to specify device information and security settings.
1
Start the web browser and enter the following URL in the Location (or Address ) box to display the RemoteUI
page.
http://printer IP address or name/
Example: http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx/
2
Select Administrator Mode and click Logon.
Note
•If a password has been set on the printer, enter the password.
3
Click Information in the Device Manager menu at left to display the Information page.
4
To display the relevant settings page, click Edit in the upper-right corner of Device Information or Security,
depending on what information you want to specify.
To change the administrator password, click the Change Password button in the Security group.
5
Refer to the table of settings for device information and security as you complete these settings.
Security setting items are displayed when you click the Change Password button in the Security group.
Device Information Settings
Item Details Default Setting
Device Name Enter a device name.
(0–32 characters)
blank
Location Enter the location where the device is installed.
(0–32 characters)
blank
Administrator Enter the administrator's name.
(0–32 characters)
blank
Phone Enter the administrator's contact information.
(0–32 characters)
blank
Comments(E-mail) Enter any comments regarding the administrator.
(0–32 characters)
blank
Security Settings
Item Details Default Setting
New Password Enter the new password.
(0-9999999)
blank
Confirm Enter the new password again to confirm it.
(0-9999999)
blank
*1: On the Security settings screen, besides entering a password, you can specify other security-related information, such as
IP address-based SNMP or TCP usage restrictions, MAC address-based access restrictions, or IPP and FTP authentica-
tion settings.
iPF785
Specifying Printer-Related Information
User's Guide
Network Setting Other Settings
503
6
Click OK to activate the settings.
Configuring the Communication Mode Manually
Configuring the Communication Mode Manually
This topic gives instructions for configuring the communication mode manually.
1
On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel, press ◀ or ▶ to se-
lect the Settings/Adj. tab ( ).
Note
•If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.
2
Press the OK button.
The Set./Adj. Menu is displayed.
3
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Interface Setup, and then press the OK button.
4
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Ethernet Driver, and then press the OK button.
5
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Auto Detect, and then press the OK button.
6
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Off, and then press the OK button.
The display reverts to the Ethernet Driver menu.
7
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Comm.Mode, and then press the OK button.
8
Press ▲ or ▼ to select the communication mode, and then press the OK button.
The display reverts to the Ethernet Driver menu.
9
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Ethernet Type, and then press the OK button.
10
Press ▲ or ▼ to select the Ethernet type, and then press the OK button.
The display reverts to the Ethernet Driver menu.
11
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Spanning Tree, and then press the OK button.
12
Press ▲ or ▼ to enable or disable spanning tree support, and then press the OK button.
The display reverts to the Ethernet Driver menu.
13
Press the Menu button.
After the confirmation message is displayed, press the OK button.
The new settings will take effect after the printer restarts.
Conguring the Communication Mode Manually
iPF785
User's Guide
Network Setting Other Settings
504
Email Notification When Printing is Finished or Errors Occur
Email Notification When Printing is Finished or Errors Occur
The printer can notify you of the printer status by email. Even when you are away from the printer, you can know when
printing is finished or if errors occur. Receive notification via email on your mobile phone or at your computer.
Use the imagePROGRAF Status Monitor (Windows) function to set up email recipients and message timing. Besides
being informed of finished print jobs or errors, you can also complete settings for email notification when service is nee-
ded or it's time to replace consumables. For detailed instructions,see "Specifying Printer-Related Information." ➔P.503
Note
•For details on email notification using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor (in Windows), refer to the imagePROGRAF
Status Monitor help.
•Mail server authentication is only supported with imagePROGRAF Status Monitor.
Initializing the Network Settings
Initializing the Network Settings
Use RemoteUI to restore the network settings to the default values as follows.
Important
•Initializing the network settings will also restore the default value of the printer's IP address. As a result, the RemoteUI
page cannot be displayed in the web browser after this procedure.
•For instructions on reconfiguring the IP address, see "Configuring the IP Address on the Printer." ➔P.494
•For details on RemoteUI, see "Using RemoteUI." ➔P.492
1
Start the web browser and enter the following URL in the Location (or Address ) box to display the RemoteUI
page.
http://printer IP address or name/
Example: http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx/
2
Select Administrator Mode and click Logon.
Note
•If a password has been set on the printer, enter the password.
3
Click Network in the Device Manager menu at left to display the Network page.
4
Click Reset to Default settings in the lower-right corner of the Network Interface group.
5
After confirming the message, click OK to restore the network settings to the default values.
Note
•You can also use imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility or the Control Panel to restore the default network settings.
iPF785
Email Notication When Printing is Finished or Errors Occur
User's Guide
Network Setting Other Settings
505
Device Setup Utility (Windows)
Device Setup Utility (Windows)
imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility .............................................................................................................................506
Installing imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility ......................................................................................................... 506
Conguring the IP Address Using imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility ...................................................... 506
imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility
imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility
imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility is a utility to establish communication between the printer and your computer
by completing relevant settings. After the printer is installed, for example, you can use imagePROGRAF Device Setup
Utility to complete the network settings initially.
•
Starting imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility will show a list of printers found on the network. In this list, select
the printer (specifically, the printer's MAC address) that you want to set up, and then configure the basic settings
from your computer, such as the printer's IP address and the network frame type.
•
You can see which printers are online in the network by checking the printer list. Communication between your
computer and these printers is possible.
Note
•We recommend that your network or printer administrator complete the setup work using imagePROGRAF Device
Setup Utility.
•For details, refer to the imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility help.
Installing imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility
Installing imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility
Install imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility from the User Software CD-ROM provided with the printer as follows:
1
Insert the User Software CD-ROM in the CD-ROM drive.
2
On the Setup Menu window, click Install Individual Software.
3
Click Install in imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility.
4
Follow the instructions on the screen to proceed with the installation.
Configuring the IP Address Using imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility
Configuring the IP Address Using imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility
On a computer running Windows, you can use imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility provided with the printer to con-
figure the printer's IP address. This topic describes how to configure the IP address using imagePROGRAF Device
Setup Utility.
Important
•To configure network settings, you must be logged in with administrative rights such as Administrator account. We
recommend that your network administrator configure the network settings.
Note
•For instructions on installing imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility, see "Installing imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utili-
ty." ➔P.506
imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility
iPF785
User's Guide
Network Setting Device Setup Utility (Windows)
506
When specifying an IPv4 IP address
1
Start imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility from the
start menu.
2
In the Device Name list displayed, select the printer to configure.
3
Choose Protocol Settings from the Printer menu.
4
Select the IPv4 tab.
5
In the Setting IP Address list, choose Manual.
6
Enter the IP address assigned to the printer and click the Set button.
7
Click OK after the Confirmation message is displayed.
8
Exit imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility.
Note
•To configure the IP address automatically, choose Auto in the Setting IP Address list and select DHCP, BOOTP, or
RARP.
•You can also specify the subnet mask and default gateway.
iPF785
Conguring the IP Address Using imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility
User's Guide
Network Setting Device Setup Utility (Windows)
507
When specifying an IPv6 IP address
1
Start imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility from the
start menu.
2
In the Device Name list displayed, select the printer to configure.
3
Choose Protocol Settings from the Printer menu.
4
Select the IPv6 tab.
5
In IPv6, select On.
6
When there is an IPv6-compatible router in the network environment, select On in Stateless Address.
Additionally, when there is an DHCPv6-compatible server in the network environment, select On in DHCPv6.
Note
•When there is no IPv6-compatible router or DHCPv6-compatible server, select On in Manual and enter the
IPv6 Address and Prefix Length.
7
Click Set.
8
Click OK after the Confirmation message is displayed.
9
Exit imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility.
Conguring the IP Address Using imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility
iPF785
User's Guide
Network Setting Device Setup Utility (Windows)
508
iPF785
User's Guide
Basic Printing Workow 15
Enhanced Printing Options 31
Windows Software 157
Mac OS Software 277
Handling and Use of Paper 361
Control Panel 435
Printer Parts 475
Network Setting 489
Print Job Management
Status Monitor (Windows) ....................................................................... 510
Printmonitor (Mac OS) ............................................................................. 513
Accounting (Windows) ............................................................................. 515
Basic Print Job Operations ...................................................................... 529
Advanced Print Job Operations ............................................................... 551
Adjustments for Better Print Quality 571
Maintenance and Consumables 587
Troubleshooting 625
Error Message 655
Specications 679
Appendix 683
imagePROGRAF
Print Job Management
509
Status Monitor (Windows)
Status Monitor (Windows)
The Features of imagePROGRAF Status Monitor .................................................................................................... 510
Job Management Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor .................................................................................... 511
The Features of imagePROGRAF Status Monitor
The Features of imagePROGRAF Status Monitor
imagePROGRAF Status Monitor is a utility for checking the printer status and managing print jobs.
Two screens are available in imagePROGRAF Status Monitor : Printer List shows a list of printers, and Status Moni-
tor shows details for each printer.
•
You can view a list of the printers for which printer drivers have been installed on your computer, printers connec-
ted to your computer, and printers found on the network.
•
If a printer error occurs, you can investigate the corrective action immediately.
•
Printer status can be checked in real time on a computer monitor.
•
Displays the ink level of every color in the printer. An icon and warning message will notify you when ink levels are
low.
•
The type of paper loaded in each media source is identified. You can also check to see if paper has run out.
•
This way, the utility enables you to check printer information and take care of printer maintenance for optimal print-
ing results.
•
You can also set up automatic email notification of any printer problems or errors to email addresses you desig-
nate in advance.
•
You can check the status of the hard disk and the documents saved on the hard disk.
The Features of imagePROGRAF Status Monitor
iPF785
User's Guide
Print Job Management Status Monitor (Windows)
510
•
You can use the Accounting Manager to collect the print job logs for the printers and check information such as
the printing costs.
For details of the Accounting Manager, see "Accounting Manager." ➔P.515
Note
•For details, refer to the imagePROGRAF Status Monitor help.
Job Management Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor
Job Management Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor
You can use the Job sheet in imagePROGRAF Status Monitor for operations such as pausing and canceling print jobs.
•
Preempting Other Jobs
If you select a print job and click the Preempt Other Jobs button, the selected job is printed ahead of the job that
currently precedes it in the print queue.
•
Pausing/Resuming Print Jobs
Selecting a print job and clicking the Pause button pauses printing of the selected job.
To resume printing of a paused print job, select the print job and click the Resume button.
Note
•Once all the print data for a print job has been sent to the printer, the job can no longer be paused/resumed.
•
Canceling Print Jobs
Selecting a print job and clicking the Cancel Job button cancels printing of the selected job.
Note
•You cannot cancel other users' print jobs.
•
Printing Held Jobs
Printing of the job with a Status of Holding is paused because the paper specified by the driver does not match
the paper currently loaded in the printer.
Use the procedure below to print the held job.
1
Select the held job and click the Replace Paper button.
2
Replace the paper in the printer with the correct paper.
iPF785
Job Management Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor
User's Guide
Print Job Management Status Monitor (Windows)
511
Note
•To continue printing without changing the paper in the printer, select the held job and click Continue to print button.
•The printing behavior when the paper specified by the driver does not match the paper currently loaded in the printer
can be changed by using Detect Mismatch in the operation panel menu. Refer to "Menu Settings" ➔P.457 for details.
Job Management Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor
iPF785
User's Guide
Print Job Management Status Monitor (Windows)
512
Printmonitor (Mac OS)
Printmonitor (Mac OS)
The Features of imagePROGRAF Printmonitor ......................................................................................................... 513
Job Management Using imagePROGRAF Printmonitor ......................................................................................... 514
The Features of imagePROGRAF Printmonitor
The Features of imagePROGRAF Printmonitor
imagePROGRAF Printmonitor is a utility for checking the printer status and managing print jobs.
•
Printer status can be checked in real time on a computer monitor.
•
You can check the status of print jobs, cancel jobs, and manage them as needed.
•
If a printer error occurs, you can investigate the corrective action immediately.
•
You can also set up automatic email notification of any printer problems or errors to email addresses you desig-
nate in advance.
•
You can check the status of the hard disk and the documents saved on the hard disk.
Note
•If the status of the desired printer is not shown in imagePROGRAF Printmonitor, select the printer again as follows.
1. Make sure the printer is on and connected to the network or to a local port.
2. In the Printer menu, select the name of the desired printer. After the printer is detected, the printer status is shown.
3. If information about the printer is not shown in step 2, choose Search Printer in the Printer menu. Printer names
listed in the Printer menu are updated with the printers that are now detected.
4. In the Printer menu, select the name of the desired printer. After the printer is detected, the printer status is shown.
iPF785
The Features of imagePROGRAF Printmonitor
User's Guide
Print Job Management Printmonitor (Mac OS)
513
Job Management Using imagePROGRAF Printmonitor
Job Management Using imagePROGRAF Printmonitor
You can use the Driver Panel in imagePROGRAF Printmonitor for operations such as pausing and canceling print
jobs.
•
Pausing/Resuming Print Jobs
Selecting a print job and clicking the button pauses printing of the selected job.
To resume printing of a paused print job, select the print job and click the button.
Note
•Once all the print data for a print job has been sent to the printer, the job can no longer be paused/resumed.
•
Canceling Print Jobs
Selecting a print job and clicking the button cancels printing of the selected job.
Note
•You cannot cancel other users' print jobs.
•
Preempting Other Jobs
If you select a print job and click the button, the selected job is printed ahead of the job that currently pre-
cedes it in the print queue.
•
Printing Held Jobs
Printing of the job with a Status of Holding is paused because the paper specified by the driver does not match
the paper currently loaded in the printer.
Use the procedure below to print the held job.
1
Select the held job and click the Replace Paper button.
2
Replace the paper in the printer with the correct paper.
Note
•To continue printing without changing the paper in the printer, select the held job and click Continue to print button.
Job Management Using imagePROGRAF Printmonitor
iPF785
User's Guide
Print Job Management Printmonitor (Mac OS)
514
Accounting (Windows)
Accounting (Windows)
Accounting Manager .............................................................................................................................................................515
Launching the Accounting Manager .............................................................................................................................. 515
Accounting Manager Main Window ................................................................................................................................516
Job List Area .................................................................................................................................................................518
Accounting Manager Basic Procedures ....................................................................................................................... 520
Conguring Unit Costs in Accounting Manager ....................................................................................................... 520
Setting the Unit Cost for Ink ....................................................................................................................................... 521
Setting the Unit Cost for Paper ................................................................................................................................. 522
Setting the Unit Cost for Items Other Than Ink and Paper ........................................................................... 523
Conguring Units and Display Settings in Accounting Manager ...................................................................... 524
Automatically Acquiring Print Job Logs at Regular Intervals .............................................................................. 525
Canceling Regular Print Job Log Acquisition ............................................................................................................. 525
Switching Between Displaying Jobs on Printer and Regularly Acquired Jobs .............................................525
Exporting Print Job Data as a CSV File .........................................................................................................................526
Displaying Job Properties or Period Properties ........................................................................................................ 526
Showing, Saving and Loading Selected Unit Cost Data ........................................................................................ 527
Showing the Total Amount of Ink and Paper Consumed ...................................................................................... 527
Accounting Manager
Accounting Manager
The Accounting Manager stores the printer's print job logs so that you can use the information for checking printing
costs, etc.
The benefits of using the Accounting Manager are outlined below.
•
Print Job Log Collection
This allows you to check which documents were printed from each printer, who printed them and when.
•
Calculation of the Total Pages Used and the Total Cost
This allows you to use the collected print job logs to calculate totals for items such as the number of pages printed,
the amount of paper used and the printing costs incurred.
•
Regular Data Acquisition for Print Jobs
Job logs can be automatically collected periodically.
•
Exporting Print Job Data
This allows you to export collected print job data as a CSV file.
Important
•The Accounting Manager in Status Monitor displays approximate estimates of the amount of paper consumed and the
ink consumed per job. Canon cannot guarantee the accuracy of these estimates. These estimates will also vary de-
pending on the conditions of printer use.
•Print job log collection is not performed when Set./Adj. Menu -> Printer Info -> Show Job Log of the control panel is
Off. However,
•even if Show Job Log is set to Off, regularly acquired jobs that already have been retrieved at that time are dis-
played.
•When Show Job Log has been set to On again, all jobs within the printer at that time are displayed.
Launching the Accounting Manager
Launching the Accounting Manager
The procedure for launching the Accounting Manager is shown below.
1
Open the imagePROGRAF Status Monitor window.
iPF785
Accounting Manager
User's Guide
Print Job Management Accounting (Windows)
515
2
Select Accounting in the Accounting menu.
Or, open the Accounting sheet and click the Account-
ing button.
Note
•If Show Job Log is set to off and an administrator password is configured in the printer, the administrator password
needs to be entered on startup.
If the password is correct, you are logged on as administrator and Accounting starts.
Furthermore, when you exit from Accounting, you can choose to log off as administrator.
•If you log off as administrator, you need to enter the password again the next time it starts.
•The administrator password can be set or cleared using Chg.Admin.Pswd/Init.Admin.Pswd in the Admin. Menu in the
Set./Adj. Menu in the printer.
The administrator menu can only be displayed and configured by the administrator.
Accounting Manager Main Window
Accounting Manager Main Window
The Accounting Manager main window consists of a title bar, menu bar, toolbars, listed job selection area, job list area,
totals area and status bar.
•
Title Bar
This displays the printer model, its serial number and the port number it is using.
•
Menu Bar
Allows you to select the menu options required for operation.
Accounting Manager Main Window
iPF785
User's Guide
Print Job Management Accounting (Windows)
516
•
Toolbars
Provide tool buttons and pull-down menus for the main operations.
Note
•You can opt to either show or hide the toolbars in the View menu.
•
Listed Job Selection Area
You can use this area to select which job log is displayed.
If you are using regular data acquisition, this area allows you to view the collective job logs for each specified peri-
od.
For more information on how to select the job logs displayed, see "Switching Between Displaying Jobs on Printer
and Regularly Acquired Jobs." ➔P.525
•
Job List Area
This area lists the details of acquired jobs.
Displays a list of the jobs in the printers or periodically acquired jobs. (See "Job List Area.") ➔P.518
Note
•You can change the items that are displayed and the display order using the Advanced Display Settings dialog
box. The Advanced Display Settings dialog box can be displayed by selecting Advanced Display Settings
from the Show menu.
iPF785
Accounting Manager Main Window
User's Guide
Print Job Management Accounting (Windows)
517
•
Totals Area
Displays the total costs for the selected job and the amounts of paper and ink consumed.
Note
•If you are viewing regularly acquired print jobs, selecting a period on the left side of the window displays the total
costs for that period and the amounts of paper and ink consumed.
•
Status Bar
Displays messages and other information.
Job List Area
Job List Area
The job items and details that can be displayed in the job list area are as follows.
•
No.
The job serial number.
•
Job Cost
The cost of printing.
Note
•If the ink and paper unit costs are not set, **** is displayed.
•
Document Name
This is the name of the printed document.
•
Printing Results
OK is displayed when the print process was executed, and Cancel is displayed if the print process was not execu-
ted.
•
Media Type
This is the type of paper used in printing.
Job List Area
iPF785
User's Guide
Print Job Management Accounting (Windows)
518
•
Output Image Size
The size of the image used for printing.
Note
•If the job has multiple pages, the size of the last page is displayed.
•
Paper Consumed
The area of paper used for printing.
Note
•The Paper Consumed may differ from the product of Paper Width and Paper Length.
•
Paper Width
The width of paper used for printing.
Note
•If the job has multiple pages, the width of the last page is displayed.
•
Paper Length
The length of paper used for printing.
•
Ink Consumed
The amount of ink used for printing.
•
Owner
The sender of the job.
•
Print Job Start Time/Print Time
The time when printing started and the time taken to print.
•
Number of Pages
The number of pages printed.
•
Roll Paper Width
The width of roll paper used for printing.
•
Paper Cost
The cost of paper used for printing.
Note
•If the paper unit cost is not set, **** is displayed.
•
Total Ink Cost
The total value of the cost of ink used for printing.
Note
•If the ink unit cost is not set, **** is displayed.
•
Total of Other Costs
The total value of costs other than paper and ink.
•
Ink Cost Details
The cost of each ink color.
•
Ink Consumption Details
The amount of each color of ink used.
iPF785
Job List Area
User's Guide
Print Job Management Accounting (Windows)
519
Accounting Manager Basic Procedures
Accounting Manager Basic Procedures
The first time you use the Accounting Manager, use the following procedures to configure the settings.
1
Configure unit costs, including the costs of ink and paper.
For details of the unit cost settings, see "Configuring Unit Costs in Accounting Manager." ➔P.520
2
Set options such as the units displayed.
For details of the unit settings, see "Configuring Units and Display Settings in Accounting Manager." ➔P.524
3
If you are using Regular Data Acquisition, configure the Regular Data Acquisition settings.
For details of the Regular Data Acquisition settings, see "Automatically Acquiring Print Job Logs at Regular Inter-
vals." ➔P.525
4
Specify the jobs to be listed.
For details of how to select the job logs displayed, see "Switching Between Displaying Jobs on Printer and Regu-
larly Acquired Jobs." ➔P.525
This displays the required print job logs and lists the details.
Configuring Unit Costs in Accounting Manager
Configuring Unit Costs in Accounting Manager
Select Unit Costs in the Settings menu to open the Unit Costs dialog box. Configure the unit cost settings in this
dialog box.
Note
•When you select a job and then open the Unit Costs dialog box, items with unit costs that have not yet been config-
ured for that job are shown highlighted.
•
Setting the Unit Cost for Ink ➔P.521
•
Setting the Unit Cost for Paper ➔P.522
•
Setting the Unit Cost for Items Other Than Ink and Paper ➔P.523
Accounting Manager Basic Procedures
iPF785
User's Guide
Print Job Management Accounting (Windows)
520
Setting the Unit Cost for Ink
Setting the Unit Cost for Ink
Open the Ink sheet. Set the unit cost for ink in this sheet.
To set the same unit cost for all the inks
1
Select the Use same price for all ink checkbox.
2
Enter the Tank Capacity and corresponding Price.
3
Click the OK button.
Important
•Your settings are not applied until you click the OK button.
To set different unit costs for each ink color
1
Select the ink color to be costed.
2
Enter the Tank Capacity and corresponding Price.
3
Click the Overwrite button.
4
Repeat steps 1 to 3 for all the inks.
5
Click the OK button.
Important
•Your settings are not applied until you click the OK button.
iPF785
Setting the Unit Cost for Ink
User's Guide
Print Job Management Accounting (Windows)
521
Setting the Unit Cost for Paper
Setting the Unit Cost for Paper
Opens the Paper sheet. This sheet is used to configure the unit cost of paper.
Setting Standard Prices
1
Select the media type in Media Type.
2
Enter the Width and Length of the paper, as well as the Price for the area of the configured width x height.
3
Click the Add button. To change the unit cost of a media type that has already been configured, click the Over-
write button.
4
Click the OK button.
Important
•The settings are not applied until you click the OK button.
Specifying Price by Roll Paper
1
Select the media type in Media Type.
Setting the Unit Cost for Paper
iPF785
User's Guide
Print Job Management Accounting (Windows)
522
2
Click the Roll Paper Width Settings button to display the Roll
Paper Width Settings dialog box.
3
Enter the Roll Paper Width and Length of the paper, as well as the Price for the configured length.
4
Click the Add button to return to the Paper sheet.
5
To change the unit cost of a media type that has already been configured, click the Overwrite button.
6
Click the OK button.
Important
•If you do not set the standard prices, you cannot set the price for each roll paper.
•If the Roll Paper Width is set to the same value as the Width of the paper configured in the standard prices, the cost
is calculated using the price configured in the Roll Paper Width Settings dialog box.
•The settings are not applied until you click the OK button.
Setting the Unit Cost for Items Other Than Ink and Paper
Setting the Unit Cost for Items Other Than Ink and Paper
Open the Other sheet. Use this sheet to set any price for items other than inks and paper.
iPF785
Setting the Unit Cost for Items Other Than Ink and Paper
User's Guide
Print Job Management Accounting (Windows)
523
1
Enter any name in the Name field.
2
Enter a value in Unit Cost.
3
Use Allocated to specify whether the costs are allocated as being incurred by the print job.
4
Click the Add button. To change the unit cost for a media type you have already set, click the Overwrite but-
ton.
5
Click the OK button.
Important
•Your settings are not applied until you click the OK button.
Note
•You can set unit costs for up to 5 items.
Configuring Units and Display Settings in Accounting Manager
Configuring Units and Display Settings in Accounting Manager
Select Units and Display in the Settings menu to open the Units and Display dialog box. Use this dialog box to con-
figure the display settings.
•
Date Display Format
Use this option to select the display format for dates. "YYYY" indicates the year, "MM" the month and "DD" the
day.
•
Currency Unit
Enter the currency unit. Enter a text string up to 3 characters long.
•
1000 Separator
Use this option to select the symbol used as a separator in numbers. The symbol is inserted every 3 digits.
•
Decimal Symbol
Use this option to select the symbol used as a decimal point.
•
Ink Consumed
Use this option to select the unit used for ink consumption.
•
Paper Width
Use this to select the unit used for paper width.
Conguring Units and Display Settings in Accounting Manager
iPF785
User's Guide
Print Job Management Accounting (Windows)
524
•
Paper Length
Use this to select the unit used for paper length.
•
Area Display Format
Use this to select the unit used for paper area.
Automatically Acquiring Print Job Logs at Regular Intervals
Automatically Acquiring Print Job Logs at Regular Intervals
This feature collects print job logs from the printer at regular intervals and saves the logs on your computer.
1
Select Regular Data Acquisition in the Settings menu.
2
Select Acquire print job logs regularly.
3
Click the OK button to close the dialog box.
Important
•Print job log collection is not performed when Set./Adj. Menu -> Printer Info -> Show Job Log of the control panel is
Off. However, even if Show Job Log is set to Off, regularly acquired jobs that already have been retrieved at that
time are displayed.
Note
•Immediately after you configure Regular Data Acquisition, no print jobs are displayed. Wait a few moments and then
select Refresh in the View menu to display the print jobs.
•A maximum of 10,000 records are saved in a print job log. If this number is exceeded, jobs are deleted from the log
starting from the oldest record. To save old data, it is recommended that you export the data as a CSV file.
For details of how to export print job logs as CSV files, see "Exporting Print Job Data as a CSV File." ➔P.526
Canceling Regular Print Job Log Acquisition
Canceling Regular Print Job Log Acquisition
You can use this procedure to cancel the regular acquisition of print job logs from printers.
1
Select Regular Data Acquisition in the Settings menu.
2
Uncheck the Acquire print job logs regularly option.
3
Click the OK button to close the dialog box.
Switching Between Displaying Jobs on Printer and Regularly Acquired Jobs
Switching Between Displaying Jobs on Printer and Regularly Acquired Jobs
The print job logs displayed by the Status Monitor Accounting Manager contain two types of job: Jobs on Printer and
Regularly Acquired Jobs.
You can select whether to display Jobs on Printer or Regularly Acquired Jobs in the Listed Job Selection Area on the
left side of the window.
•
Jobs on Printer
This shows a list of the print jobs currently held on printers.
You can change the number of jobs displayed per page using the Print Jobs Shown Per Page setting in the View
menu or the toolbar.
You can skip to a particular page using the Go to option in the View menu or the toolbar.
Note
•For printers with built-in hard disks, you can view up to 500 print jobs per printer.
•For printers without built-in hard disks, you can view up to 32 print jobs per printer. However, only 10 jobs can be
displayed if the printer is switched off.
•
Regularly Acquired Jobs
This shows a list of regularly acquired print jobs.
iPF785
Automatically Acquiring Print Job Logs at Regular Intervals
User's Guide
Print Job Management Accounting (Windows)
525
To view all the jobs in a set period, specify the period using Calculate Total for Period and then Starting Date (or
Starting Day of Week or Starting Month) in the View menu or the toolbar.
For example, to view monthly job logs starting on the 1st of each month, set Calculate Total for Period to Month-
ly and set Starting Date to 1.
Note
•Up to 10,000 regularly acquired jobs are displayed for each printer.
Exporting Print Job Data as a CSV File
Exporting Print Job Data as a CSV File
You can export the collected print job data in the form of a CSV file by selecting Export Job Cost Data in the File
menu.
Note
•You can also select Export Job Cost Data using the icon in the toolbar.
•
Selected Jobs
Exports the data for the selected print jobs in the job list as a CSV file.
Note
•You can select multiple jobs by holding down the Shift key or Ctrl key as you click the job names.
•
Listed Jobs
Exports the data for the print jobs currently displayed in the list as a CSV file.
Displaying Job Properties or Period Properties
Displaying Job Properties or Period Properties
You can display the Job properties dialog box or Period Properties dialog box to check detailed cost information and
other items.
The Job properties dialog box displays detailed information about the selected job.
The Period Properties dialog box displays detailed information within the Regularly Acquired Jobs period.
•
Displaying the Job properties Dialog Box
Select a job from the job list, and then select Show Job Properties from Job properties in the File menu. You
can also select multiple jobs at once.
Note
•You can also display the dialog box by selecting a job, right-clicking it, and then selecting Show Job Properties,
or by using the icon in the toolbar.
•
Displaying the Period Properties Dialog Box
Select a period from the Regularly Acquired Jobs list, and then select Show Period Properties from Job prop-
erties in the File menu. You can also select multiple periods at once.
Note
•You can also display the dialog box by selecting and right-clicking a period and then selecting Show Period
Properties, or by using the icon in the toolbar.
Exporting Print Job Data as a CSV File
iPF785
User's Guide
Print Job Management Accounting (Windows)
526
•
Components of the Job properties Dialog Box/Period Properties Dialog Box
•
Job tab
Displays detailed information about the selected job. You can display detailed information about each job by
selecting the corresponding Document Name.
•
Owner tab
You can display detailed information about each owner by selecting the corresponding Owner.
•
Copy button
Click this button to copy the displayed text information to the clipboard.
Showing, Saving and Loading Selected Unit Cost Data
Showing, Saving and Loading Selected Unit Cost Data
•
Show Unit Cost Data
Select Show Unit Cost Data in the File menu to open the Unit Cost Data dialog box. This lists the unit costs for
items such as the selected ink and paper.
You can copy text-based information in this dialog box to the clipboard by clicking the Copy button.
•
Save Unit Cost Data
Select a destination folder using Save Unit Cost Data in the File menu. The unit cost data for items such as the
selected ink and paper is saved as a file.
•
Load Unit Cost Data
Selecting Load Unit Cost Data in the File menu loads saved unit cost data.
Showing the Total Amount of Ink and Paper Consumed
Showing the Total Amount of Ink and Paper Consumed
Select Show Ink and Paper Consumed in the File menu to open the Show Ink and Paper Consumed dialog box.
This lists the total amounts of ink and paper consumed by the printer so far.
You can copy text-based information in this dialog box to the clipboard by clicking the Copy button.
iPF785
Showing, Saving and Loading Selected Unit Cost Data
User's Guide
Print Job Management Accounting (Windows)
527
Basic Print Job Operations
Basic Print Job Operations
Using the Printer Hard Disk ............................................................................................................................................... 529
Saving Print Jobs on the Printer Hard Disk ................................................................................................................ 531
Managing the Job Queue (Deleting or Preempting Other Jobs) ....................................................................... 534
Managing Pending Jobs (Printing or Deleting Jobs on Hold) ..............................................................................536
Printing Saved Jobs ............................................................................................................................................................... 538
Deleting Saved Jobs .............................................................................................................................................................. 542
Moving Saved Jobs ................................................................................................................................................................546
Using the Printer Hard Disk
Using the Printer Hard Disk
The printer can save print jobs on the built-in hard disk.
Using print jobs stored on the printer enables you to print the jobs again as needed without using a computer.
Saving print jobs offers the following benefits.
•
Save the time spent using a computer
When you send a print job to the printer, you can save it on the printer after printing or simply save it on the printer
without printing it yet. Saved print jobs can be printed in the required quantity later without the need to use a com-
puter again.
•
Simplify reprinting, if any errors occur
If errors occur in the middle of printing (as when paper runs out), you can resume printing after clearing the error
without resending the print job from a computer.
•
Streamline printing work
Without using a computer, you can select print jobs and print in the desired quantity. You can also select multiple
print jobs to print during the same period. This enables unattended operation at night, for example.
Output Method
To save print jobs on the printer's hard disk, configure the printer driver.
In Windows, this is set using the Output Method dialog box.
In Mac OS, this is set using the Additional Settings pane.
•
Print
Save print jobs on the printer's hard disk after printing.
•
Save in mail box
Save print jobs on the printer's hard disk.
•
Print after reception is complete
This option is available in combination with Print. You can prevent degradation of print quality that occurs when
receiving a print job is interrupted and printing is aborted in the middle.
iPF785
Using the Printer Hard Disk
User's Guide
Print Job Management Basic Print Job Operations
529
Storage destination
The storage area on the printer's hard disk is divided into a temporary storage area and a permanent storage area. The
temporary storage area stores print jobs in the job queue or shared mailbox. The permanent storage area stores jobs
in personal boxes.
•
Job queue
The job queue refers to print jobs that are being processed by the printer (saved, received, prepared for process-
ing, printed, deleted, or held). Up to 64 jobs can be stored in the temporary storage area.
When the job queue is full, additional jobs sent from a computer are treated as "standby" jobs, to be processed
when possible.
However, if all queued jobs are simply being held, the oldest job is deleted and the print job sent from the comput-
er is processed.
•
Shared mailbox
Jobs for which you have specified Print in Output Method (in Windows) or Send job to (in Mac OS) are saved in
the shared mailbox and classified as saved jobs.
There is one shared mailbox, numbered 00. A password cannot be set for the shared mailbox.
Up to 100 print jobs can be saved here, but they will be deleted one after another starting with the oldest job in the
following situations.
•
If there are more than 100 jobs queued and saved in the shared mailbox combined
•
If no more temporary storage space is available when jobs for which you have selected Print in Output
Method (in Windows) or Send job to (in Mac OS) are received
•
If there is not enough space in the temporary or permanent storage area when jobs for which you have selec-
ted Save in mail box in Output Method (in Windows) or Send job to (in Mac OS) are received
•
Personal boxes
Jobs are classified as saved jobs and saved in personal boxes in the following situations.
•
When a saved job stored in the shared mailbox is moved to a personal box
•
When you have selected Save in mail box as the option in Output Method (in Windows) or Send job to (in
Mac OS)
There are 29 personal boxes, numbered 01 to 29. You can specify a name and password for each personal box.
Up to 100 print jobs can be saved in all personal boxes combined.
Using the Printer Hard Disk
iPF785
User's Guide
Print Job Management Basic Print Job Operations
530
Saving Print Jobs on the Printer Hard Disk
Saving Print Jobs on the Printer Hard Disk
To save print jobs on the printer's hard disk, configure the printer driver.
Note
•Printing from the following software also enables you to save print jobs on the printer's hard disk.
Windows
•Free Layout ➔P.202
•Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy ➔P.225
•Preview ➔P.191
Mac OS
•Free Layout ➔P.319
•Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy ➔P.344
•Preview ➔P.191
Configuring the Printer Driver in Windows
1
Access the Page Setup sheet.
iPF785
Saving Print Jobs on the Printer Hard Disk
User's Guide
Print Job Management Basic Print Job Operations
531
2
Click Output Method to display the Output Method di-
alog box.
3
Make your selection in Output Method.
•
Print
Save print jobs on the printer's hard disk after printing.
•
Save in mail box
Save print jobs on the printer's hard disk.
If you choose Save in mail box, also specify the destination personal box in the Mail box list.
•
Print after reception is complete
This option is available in combination with Print. You can prevent degradation of print quality that occurs
when receiving a print job is interrupted and printing is aborted in the middle.
Note
•Click Acquire Mail Box Name to display personal box names in the Mail box list, as acquired from the print-
er.
4
In Name of data to be saved, specify how to name saved print jobs.
•
To use the file name, choose Use file name.
•
Otherwise choose Enter name and enter a name in Name.
5
Click OK to close the Output Method dialog box.
Saving Print Jobs on the Printer Hard Disk
iPF785
User's Guide
Print Job Management Basic Print Job Operations
532
Configuring the printer driver in Mac OS
1
Access the Additional Settings pane.
2
Make your selection in Send job to.
•
Print
Save print jobs on the printer's hard disk after printing.
•
Save in mail box
Save print jobs on the printer's hard disk.
The Destination dialog box is displayed if you se-
lect Save in mail box. Here, specify the name and
personal box number for saved print jobs.
1.
In Document title, enter a name to identify saved print jobs.
Note
•If printed from Free Layout or Preview, the Document title is saved under the name imagePROG-
RAF.
2.
Select the personal box number in the Mail box list.
3.
Click OK to close the Destination dialog box.
•
Print after reception is complete
This option is available in combination with Print. You can prevent degradation of print quality that occurs
when receiving a print job is interrupted and printing is aborted in the middle.
iPF785
Saving Print Jobs on the Printer Hard Disk
User's Guide
Print Job Management Basic Print Job Operations
533
Managing the Job Queue (Deleting or Preempting Other Jobs)
Managing the Job Queue (Deleting or Preempting Other Jobs)
Print jobs being processed by the printer are collectively called the job queue. You can delete or preempt jobs in the job
queue as needed.
These operations are available from the Control Panel, in RemoteUI, imagePROGRAF Status Monitor, and image-
PROGRAF Printmonitor.
•
Delete
Note that only jobs that are not currently being deleted can be deleted from the job queue.
•
Preempting other jobs
You can preempt other jobs by printing jobs that are currently being received or prepared for processing first.
Note
•For information on managing jobs being held, see "Managing Pending Jobs (Printing or Deleting Jobs on
Hold)." ➔P.536
Using the Control Panel
1
On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel, press ◀ or ▶ to se-
lect the Job tab ( ).
Note
•If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.
Managing the Job Queue (Deleting or Preempting Other Jobs)
iPF785
User's Guide
Print Job Management Basic Print Job Operations
534
2
Press the OK button.
The Job Menu is displayed.
3
Manage the job queue as needed.
•
Deleting jobs
1.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Print Job, and then press the OK button.
2.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select the print job to delete, and then press the OK button.
3.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Delete, and then press the OK button.
•
Preempting other jobs
1.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Print Job, and then press the OK button.
2.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select the job to print first, and then press the OK button.
3.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Preempt Jobs, and then press the OK button.
Using RemoteUI
Manage jobs as needed on the Print Job page. For details, refer to the RemoteUI help file.
Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor (Windows)
Manage jobs as needed on the Job sheet. For details, refer to the imagePROGRAF Status Monitor help file.
iPF785
Managing the Job Queue (Deleting or Preempting Other Jobs)
User's Guide
Print Job Management Basic Print Job Operations
535
Using imagePROGRAF Printmonitor (Mac OS)
Manage jobs as needed on the Driver sheet. For details, refer to the imagePROGRAF Printmonitor help file.
Managing Pending Jobs (Printing or Deleting Jobs on Hold)
Managing Pending Jobs (Printing or Deleting Jobs on Hold)
If the type or size of paper loaded does not match the settings in the print job received when you have set Detect Mis-
match to Hold Job in the Control Panel menu, the print job is held on the printer as a pending job in the job queue.
Manage held jobs such as these as follows.
These operations are available from the Control Panel or in RemoteUI, imagePROGRAF Status Monitor, and image-
PROGRAF Printmonitor.
Note
•As long as you do not manage held jobs from the Control Panel, imagePROGRAF Status Monitor, or imagePROG-
RAF Printmonitor, they will remain in the job queue. In this case, the printer processes the next job in the queue without
pausing.
•To print held jobs, replace the loaded paper with the paper specified in the print job.
(See "Loading Rolls in the Printer.") ➔P.375
(See "Loading Sheets in the Printer.") ➔P.394
Using the Control Panel
1
On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel, press ◀ or ▶ to se-
lect the Job tab ( ).
"There are held jobs." is displayed if jobs are being held.
Note
•If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.
2
Press the OK button.
The Job Menu menu is displayed.
3
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Print Job, and then press the OK button.
Managing Pending Jobs (Printing or Deleting Jobs on Hold)
iPF785
User's Guide
Print Job Management Basic Print Job Operations
536
4
Press ▲ or ▼ to select the print job to manage, and then press the OK
button.
Held jobs are labeled with an icon.
5
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Print Anyway or Delete, and then press the OK button.
•
If you choose Print Anyway
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Yes or No, and then press the OK button.
•
If you choose Delete
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Yes or No, and then press the OK button.
Using RemoteUI
Manage jobs as needed on the Print Job page. For details, refer to the RemoteUI help file.
Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor
Manage jobs as needed on the Job sheet. For details, see "Job Management Using imagePROGRAF Status Moni-
tor." ➔P.511
iPF785
Managing Pending Jobs (Printing or Deleting Jobs on Hold)
User's Guide
Print Job Management Basic Print Job Operations
537
Using imagePROGRAF Printmonitor
Manage jobs as needed on the Driver sheet. For details, see "Job Management Using imagePROGRAF Printmoni-
tor." ➔P.514
Printing Saved Jobs
Printing Saved Jobs
Print saved print jobs stored on the printer's hard disk as follows.
These operations are available from the Control Panel or in RemoteUI, imagePROGRAF Status Monitor, and image-
PROGRAF Printmonitor.
Using the Control Panel
1
On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel, press ◀ or ▶ to se-
lect the Job tab ( ).
Note
•If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.
2
Press the OK button.
The Job Menu menu is displayed.
3
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Stored Job, and then press the OK button.
Printing Saved Jobs
iPF785
User's Guide
Print Job Management Basic Print Job Operations
538
4
Press ▲ or ▼ to select the box number (in the range 00–29), and then press the OK button.
Note
•Enter a password if one has been set, and then press the OK button.
5
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Job List, and then press the OK button.
6
Press ▲ or ▼ to select the saved job, and then press the OK button.
7
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Print, and then press the OK button.
8
Specify the number of copies and press the OK button.
Using RemoteUI
1
On the Stored Job page, choose the box.
Note
•Enter a password if one has been set.
2
Select the print job and click Resume.
iPF785
Printing Saved Jobs
User's Guide
Print Job Management Basic Print Job Operations
539
3
On the Print Saved Document page, enter the quanti-
ty to print in Copies and click OK.
For details, refer to the RemoteUI help.
Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor
1
On the Hard Disk sheet, select a box and click Open.
Note
•Enter a password if one has been set.
Printing Saved Jobs
iPF785
User's Guide
Print Job Management Basic Print Job Operations
540
2
In the Documents dialog box, select the print job and
click Print.
3
In the Print dialog box, enter the quantity to print in
Copies and click OK.
Note
•The printing time initially indicates how long it took to finish printing one copy during the previous print job.
If you change the value in Copies, the printing time indicates the time it took to print one copy during the
previous print job multiplied by the number of copies.
For details, refer to the imagePROGRAF Status Monitor help file.
Using imagePROGRAF Printmonitor
1
On the Hard Disk pane, click ▶ by Inbox No./Name.
iPF785
Printing Saved Jobs
User's Guide
Print Job Management Basic Print Job Operations
541
Note
•Enter a password if one has been set.
The password is a four-digit number.
2
Select the saved job and click Resume Printing.
3
In the Resume Printing dialog box, enter the quantity
to print and click OK.
For details, refer to the imagePROGRAF Printmonitor help file.
Deleting Saved Jobs
Deleting Saved Jobs
Delete saved print jobs stored on the printer's hard disk as follows.
This operation is available from the Control Panel, in RemoteUI, imagePROGRAF Status Monitor, and imagePROG-
RAF Printmonitor.
Deleting Saved Jobs
iPF785
User's Guide
Print Job Management Basic Print Job Operations
542
Using the Control Panel
1
On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel, press ◀ or ▶ to se-
lect the Job tab ( ).
Note
•If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.
2
Press the OK button.
The Job Menu is displayed.
3
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Stored Job, and then press the OK button.
4
Press ▲ or ▼ to select the box number (in the range 00–29), and then press the OK button.
Note
•Enter a password if one has been set, and then press the OK button.
5
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Job List, and then press the OK button.
6
Press ▲ or ▼ to select the saved job, and then press the OK button.
7
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Delete, and then press the OK button.
8
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Yes, and then press the OK button.
Using RemoteUI
1
On the Stored Job page, choose the mail box.
Note
•Enter a password if one has been set.
iPF785
Deleting Saved Jobs
User's Guide
Print Job Management Basic Print Job Operations
543
2
Select the print job and click Delete.
For details, refer to the RemoteUI help file.
Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor
1
On the Hard Disk sheet, select a box and click Open.
Note
•Enter a password if one has been set.
Deleting Saved Jobs
iPF785
User's Guide
Print Job Management Basic Print Job Operations
544
2
In the Documents dialog box, select the print job and
click Delete.
For details, refer to the imagePROGRAF Status Monitor help file.
Using imagePROGRAF Printmonitor
1
In the Hard Disk pane, click ▶ next to Inbox No./
Name.
Note
•Enter a password if one has been set.
The password is a four-digit number.
iPF785
Deleting Saved Jobs
User's Guide
Print Job Management Basic Print Job Operations
545
2
Select the print job and click the Delete button.
For details, refer to the imagePROGRAF Printmonitor help file.
Moving Saved Jobs
Moving Saved Jobs
Print jobs stored on the printer's hard disk (saved jobs) can be moved from the current box to another box as follows.
However, jobs saved in personal boxes cannot be moved to the shared mailbox.
This operation is available in RemoteUI, imagePROGRAF Status Monitor, and imagePROGRAF Printmonitor.
Important
•Jobs stored in the shared mailbox may be automatically deleted under some conditions. To prevent jobs from being
deleted, move them from the shared mailbox to personal boxes. (See "Using the Printer Hard Disk.") ➔P.529
Using RemoteUI
1
On the Stored Job page, choose the box.
Moving Saved Jobs
iPF785
User's Guide
Print Job Management Basic Print Job Operations
546
Note
•Enter a password if one has been set.
2
Select the print job and click Move Document.
3
On the Move Document page, select the name or
number of the destination personal box in the Destina-
tion mail box list and click OK.
For details, refer to the RemoteUI help file.
Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor (Windows)
1
On the Hard Disk sheet, select a box and click Open.
iPF785
Moving Saved Jobs
User's Guide
Print Job Management Basic Print Job Operations
547
Note
•Enter a password if one has been set.
2
In the Documents dialog box, select the print job and
click Move.
3
In the Move dialog box, select the destination personal
box and click OK.
For details, refer to the imagePROGRAF Status Monitor help file.
Moving Saved Jobs
iPF785
User's Guide
Print Job Management Basic Print Job Operations
548
Using imagePROGRAF Printmonitor (Mac OS)
1
In the Hard Disk pane, click ▶ next to Inbox No./
Name.
Note
•Enter a password if one has been set.
The password is a four-digit number.
2
Select the print job and click Move.
iPF785
Moving Saved Jobs
User's Guide
Print Job Management Basic Print Job Operations
549
Advanced Print Job Operations
Advanced Print Job Operations
Saving Print Jobs Sent from Sources Other than the Printer Driver .............................................................. 551
Printing Without Saving Jobs in the Common Box .................................................................................................. 552
Setting Passwords for Personal Boxes ......................................................................................................................... 553
Naming Personal Boxes ....................................................................................................................................................... 556
Displaying a List of Saved Jobs ....................................................................................................................................... 559
Printing a List of Saved Jobs ............................................................................................................................................ 562
Displaying Details of Saved Jobs ..................................................................................................................................... 563
Renaming Saved Jobs .......................................................................................................................................................... 566
➔Printer Hard Disk Operations ..................................................................................................................................... 483
➔Checking the Free Hard Disk Space ....................................................................................................................... 484
Saving Print Jobs Sent from Sources Other than the Printer Driver
Saving Print Jobs Sent from Sources Other than the Printer Driver
To save print jobs sent from software or systems other than the printer driver or applications provided with the printer,
complete the Output Method and Print After Recv settings in the Control Panel menu.
Note
•Contact the software or system developer for information about support for this printer function.
Specifying Output Method
In Output Method, specify how to manage jobs, regarding printing and saving them.
•
Print
Save print jobs automatically at the same time they are printed. (This is the default format.)
•
Print (Auto Del)
Save print jobs temporarily at the same time they are printed and delete them after printing.
•
Save: Box 01 (Here, the number represents a box number)
Save print jobs on the printer.
1
On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel, press ◀ or ▶ to se-
lect the Settings/Adj. tab ( ).
Note
•If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.
iPF785
Saving Print Jobs Sent from Sources Other than the Printer Driver
User's Guide
Print Job Management Advanced Print Job Operations
551
2
Press the OK button.
The Set./Adj. Menu is displayed.
3
Press ▲ or ▼ to select System Setup, and then press the OK button.
4
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Output Method, and then press the OK button.
Note
•If a password has been set on the printer, the Logon screen is displayed.
To change the settings, select Administrator and press the OK button. When the Admin.Pswd screen is dis-
played, enter the password and press the OK button to proceed to the next step.
If you select User and press the OK button, you can check settings values but cannot change them.
5
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Print, Print (Auto Del), or Save: Box 01.
Follow these steps only when you select Save: Box 01.
6
Press ▲ or ▼ to select the box, and then press the OK button.
Specify Print After Recv
To save print jobs on the hard disk before printing, specify Print After Recv.
Printing will start when Print After Recv is set to On, even if you have selected Save: Box 01 in Output Method.
1
On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel, press ◀ or ▶ to se-
lect the Settings/Adj. tab ( ).
Note
•If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.
2
Press the OK button.
The Set./Adj. Menu is displayed.
3
Press ▲ or ▼ to select System Setup, and then press the OK button.
4
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Print After Recv, and then press the OK button.
5
Press ▲ or ▼ to select On or Off, and then press the OK button.
Printing Without Saving Jobs in the Common Box
Printing Without Saving Jobs in the Common Box
Jobs sent from a computer for which you have selected Print in Output Method (in Windows) or Send job to (in Mac
OS) in the printer driver are saved in the shared mailbox. (See "Using the Printer Hard Disk.") ➔P.529
When Save: Common Box is Off in the Control Panel menu, print jobs for which you have selected Print in the Out-
put Method dialog box of the printer driver are deleted from the shared mailbox after printing.
Printing Without Saving Jobs in the Common Box
iPF785
User's Guide
Print Job Management Advanced Print Job Operations
552
Use this function when printing highly confidential documents.
1
On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel, press ◀ or ▶ to se-
lect the Settings/Adj. tab ( ).
Note
•If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.
2
Press the OK button.
The Set./Adj. Menu is displayed.
3
Press ▲ or ▼ to select System Setup, and then press the OK button.
4
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Save: Common Box, and then press the OK button.
Note
•If a password has been set on the printer, the Logon screen is displayed.
To change the settings, select Administrator and press the OK button.
When the Admin.Pswd screen is displayed, enter the password and press the OK button to proceed to the
next step.
If you select User and press the OK button, you can check settings values but cannot change them.
5
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Off, and then press the OK button.
Setting Passwords for Personal Boxes
Setting Passwords for Personal Boxes
For greater security, you can specify a password for personal boxes. After you set a password, it will be required to
modify the personal box settings, as well as to display, print, delete, move, and modify jobs saved in the personal box.
This operation is available in RemoteUI, imagePROGRAF Status Monitor, and imagePROGRAF Printmonitor.
Note
•By default, no passwords are set for personal boxes.
•A password cannot be set for the shared mailbox.
•Enter a four-digit number as the password, in the range 0001–9999.
•Even if you have set passwords, they are not required to access personal boxes in Administrator Mode in RemoteUI.
Using RemoteUI
1
On the Stored Job page, choose the personal box.
iPF785
Setting Passwords for Personal Boxes
User's Guide
Print Job Management Advanced Print Job Operations
553
2
Click Edit.
3
In the Set/Register User's Inbox dialog box, specify the password and click OK.
•
Set Password
Select the check box.
•
Password
Enter the password. (This field is limited to four digits in the range 0001–9999.)
•
Confirmation Number
Re-enter the password to confirm it.
For details, refer to the RemoteUI help.
Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor (Windows)
1
On the Hard Disk sheet, select the personal box and
click Open.
Setting Passwords for Personal Boxes
iPF785
User's Guide
Print Job Management Advanced Print Job Operations
554
2
In the Documents dialog box, click Settings.
3
In the Settings dialog box, specify the password and click OK.
•
Set password
Select the check box.
•
Password
Enter the password. (This field is limited to four digits in the range 0001–9999.)
•
Re-enter to confirm
Re-enter the password to confirm it.
For details, refer to the imagePROGRAF Status Monitor help file.
Using imagePROGRAF Printmonitor (Mac OS)
1
On the Hard Disk pane, click ▶ by Inbox No./Name.
Select a saved job in the list and click Set.
iPF785
Setting Passwords for Personal Boxes
User's Guide
Print Job Management Advanced Print Job Operations
555
2
In the Settings dialog box, specify the password and click OK.
•
Set password
Select the check box.
•
Password
Enter the password. (This field is limited to four digits in the range 0001–9999.)
•
Verify
Re-enter the password to confirm it.
For details, refer to the imagePROGRAF Printmonitor help file.
Naming Personal Boxes
Naming Personal Boxes
For easier identification, you can assign names to personal boxes.
This operation is available in RemoteUI, imagePROGRAF Status Monitor, and imagePROGRAF Printmonitor.
Using RemoteUI
1
On the Stored Job page, choose the personal box.
Note
•Enter a password if one has been set for the personal
box.
Naming Personal Boxes
iPF785
User's Guide
Print Job Management Advanced Print Job Operations
556
2
Click Edit.
3
In the Set/Register User's Inbox dialog box, enter the
name in Inbox Name and click OK.
For details, refer to the RemoteUI help file.
Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor (Windows)
1
On the Hard Disk sheet, select the personal box and
click Open.
Note
•Enter a password if one has been set for the personal
box.
iPF785
Naming Personal Boxes
User's Guide
Print Job Management Advanced Print Job Operations
557
2
In the Documents dialog box, click Settings.
3
In the Settings dialog box, enter the name and click
OK.
For details, refer to the imagePROGRAF Status Monitor help file.
Using imagePROGRAF Printmonitor (Mac OS)
1
In the Hard Disk pane, click ▶ next to Inbox No./
Name. Select a saved job in the list and click Set.
Naming Personal Boxes
iPF785
User's Guide
Print Job Management Advanced Print Job Operations
558
Note
•Enter a password if one has been set.
The password is a four-digit number.
2
In the Settings dialog box, enter the name and click
OK.
For details, refer to the imagePROGRAF Printmonitor help file.
Displaying a List of Saved Jobs
Displaying a List of Saved Jobs
Print jobs stored on the printer's hard disk (saved jobs) can be listed by box as follows.
These operations are available from the Control Panel or in RemoteUI, imagePROGRAF Status Monitor, and image-
PROGRAF Printmonitor.
Using the Control Panel
1
On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel, press ◀ or ▶ to se-
lect the Job tab ( ).
Note
•If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.
2
Press the OK button.
The Job Menu is displayed.
3
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Stored Job, and then press the OK button.
iPF785
Displaying a List of Saved Jobs
User's Guide
Print Job Management Advanced Print Job Operations
559
4
Press ▲ or ▼ to select the box number (in the range 00–29), and then press the OK button.
Note
•Enter a password if one has been set, and then press the OK button.
5
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Job List, and then press the OK button.
Using RemoteUI
On the Stored Job page, choose the box.
Note
•Enter a password if one has been set.
Jobs saved in the box are listed.
For details, refer to the RemoteUI help.
Displaying a List of Saved Jobs
iPF785
User's Guide
Print Job Management Advanced Print Job Operations
560
Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor (Windows)
On the Hard Disk sheet, select a box and click Open.
Note
•Enter a password if one has been set.
Jobs saved in that box are displayed in the Documents dialog box.
For details, refer to the imagePROGRAF Status Monitor help file.
iPF785
Displaying a List of Saved Jobs
User's Guide
Print Job Management Advanced Print Job Operations
561
Using imagePROGRAF Printmonitor (Mac OS)
On the Hard Disk pane, click ▶ by Inbox No./Name.
Note
•Enter a password if one has been set.
The password is a four-digit number.
For details, refer to the imagePROGRAF Printmonitor help file.
Printing a List of Saved Jobs
Printing a List of Saved Jobs
The list of print jobs stored on the printer's hard disk (saved jobs) can be printed by box as follows.
1
On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel, press ◀ or ▶ to se-
lect the Job tab ( ).
Note
•If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.
2
Press the OK button.
The Job Menu is displayed.
Printing a List of Saved Jobs
iPF785
User's Guide
Print Job Management Advanced Print Job Operations
562
3
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Stored Job, and then press the OK button.
4
Press ▲ or ▼ to select the box number (in the range 00–29), and then press the OK button.
Note
•Enter a password if one has been set, and then press the OK button.
5
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Print Job List, and then press the OK button.
Displaying Details of Saved Jobs
Displaying Details of Saved Jobs
Details of print jobs stored on the printer's hard disk (saved jobs) can be displayed as follows.
This operation is available in RemoteUI, imagePROGRAF Status Monitor, and imagePROGRAF Printmonitor.
Using RemoteUI
1
On the Stored Job page, choose the box.
Note
•Enter a password if one has been set.
2
Select the print job and click Details.
iPF785
Displaying Details of Saved Jobs
User's Guide
Print Job Management Advanced Print Job Operations
563
The Details of the saved document page is dis-
played.
For details, refer to the RemoteUI help file.
Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor (Windows)
1
On the Hard Disk sheet, select a box and click Open.
Note
•Enter a password if one has been set.
Displaying Details of Saved Jobs
iPF785
User's Guide
Print Job Management Advanced Print Job Operations
564
2
In the Documents dialog box, select the print job and
click Properties.
The Properties dialog box is displayed.
For details, refer to the imagePROGRAF Status Monitor help file.
Using imagePROGRAF Printmonitor (Mac OS)
1
In the Hard Disk pane, click ▶ next to Inbox No./
Name.
iPF785
Displaying Details of Saved Jobs
User's Guide
Print Job Management Advanced Print Job Operations
565
Note
•Enter a password if one has been set.
The password is a four-digit number.
For details, refer to the imagePROGRAF Printmonitor help file.
Renaming Saved Jobs
Renaming Saved Jobs
Print jobs stored on the printer's hard disk (saved jobs) can be renamed as follows.
This operation is available in RemoteUI, imagePROGRAF Status Monitor, and imagePROGRAF Printmonitor.
Using RemoteUI
1
On the Stored Job page, choose the box.
Note
•Enter a password if one has been set.
2
Select the print job and click Details.
Renaming Saved Jobs
iPF785
User's Guide
Print Job Management Advanced Print Job Operations
566
3
On the Details of the saved document page, click
Change Document.
4
In the Rename Saved Document dialog box, enter the
name and click OK.
For details, refer to the RemoteUI help file.
Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor (Windows)
1
On the Hard Disk sheet, select a box and click Open.
Note
•Enter a password if one has been set.
iPF785
Renaming Saved Jobs
User's Guide
Print Job Management Advanced Print Job Operations
567
2
In the Documents dialog box, select the print job and
click Properties.
3
In the Properties dialog box, enter the new name and
click OK.
For details, refer to the imagePROGRAF Status Monitor help file.
Using imagePROGRAF Printmonitor (Mac OS)
1
In the Hard Disk pane, click ▶ next to Inbox No./
Name.
Renaming Saved Jobs
iPF785
User's Guide
Print Job Management Advanced Print Job Operations
568
Note
•Enter a password if one has been set.
The password is a four-digit number.
2
Select the print job and click Set.
3
In the Settings dialog box, enter the new name and
click OK.
For details, refer to the imagePROGRAF Printmonitor help file.
iPF785
Renaming Saved Jobs
User's Guide
Print Job Management Advanced Print Job Operations
569
iPF785
User's Guide
Basic Printing Workow 15
Enhanced Printing Options 31
Windows Software 157
Mac OS Software 277
Handling and Use of Paper 361
Control Panel 435
Printer Parts 475
Network Setting 489
Print Job Management 509
Adjustments for Better Print Quality
Adjusting the Printhead ........................................................................... 572
Adjusting the feed amount ....................................................................... 579
Maintenance and Consumables 587
Troubleshooting 625
Error Message 655
Specications 679
Appendix 683
imagePROGRAF
Adjustments for Better Print Quality
571
Adjusting the Printhead
Adjusting the Printhead
Adjusting the Printhead ....................................................................................................................................................... 572
Automatic Adjustment to Straighten Lines and Colors ................................................................................... 572
Manual Adjustment to Straighten Lines and Colors ......................................................................................... 573
Adjusting Line Misalignment ..............................................................................................................................................575
Troubleshooting Paper Abrasion and Blurry Images .............................................................................................. 578
Adjusting the Printhead
Adjusting the Printhead
If printed documents are affected by the following problems, try adjusting the printhead.
•
Printing is faint or affected by banding in different colors
Execute Nozzle Check to check for printhead nozzle clogging.
For instructions, see "Checking for Nozzle Clogging." ➔P.597
•
Printed vertical lines are warped or colors are out of alignment
Execute Head Posi. Adj. to adjust the printhead position.
Normally, execute Auto(Standard) or Auto(Advanced). However, when using special paper or if printing is not
improved after executing Auto(Advanced), try Manual.
(See "Automatic Adjustment to Straighten Lines and Colors.") ➔P.572
(See "Manual Adjustment to Straighten Lines and Colors.") ➔P.573
•
Printed lines are misaligned
Execute Head Inc. Adj. to adjust the angle of inclination of the printhead.
Even slight misalignment can be corrected.
(See "Adjusting Line Misalignment.") ➔P.575
•
Paper rubs against the printhead, or image edges are blurred
Executing Head Height to adjust the printhead height may improve printing results.
(See "Troubleshooting Paper Abrasion and Blurry Images.") ➔P.578
Automatic Adjustment to Straighten Lines and Colors
Automatic Adjustment to Straighten Lines and Colors
If printed vertical lines are warped or colors are out of alignment, execute Head Posi. Adj. to adjust the Printhead
alignment.
There are two modes for automatic Printhead adjustment: Auto(Standard) and Auto(Advanced).
Auto(Standard) will fix most slight image distortion or color misalignment, but if not, try Auto(Advanced).
Use Auto(Standard) or Auto(Advanced) to have the printer print and read a test pattern for automatic adjustment of
the Printhead.
Important
•This function is not available with Tracing Paper, Translucent Matte Film, or Clear Film.
•If adjustment is not possible as expected using special media, try another type of paper, or try Manual adjustment.
(See "Manual Adjustment to Straighten Lines and Colors.") ➔P.573
Adjusting the Printhead
iPF785
User's Guide
Adjustments for Better Print Quality Adjusting the Printhead
572
Note
•Because the results of adjustment vary depending on the type of paper used for adjustment, use the same type of
paper as you will use for printing.
•Use Auto(Standard) if you have switched to another type of paper or if you want the boundaries between colors to
appear as clear as possible.
•Use Auto(Advanced) to fine-tune the space between nozzles or colors if you have switched the printhead or if clearer
printing is required. We recommend Auto(Advanced) for printing at the highest level of quality.
Paper to Prepare
When Using Rolls An unused roll at least 10 inches wide
When Using Sheets Auto(Standard) : One sheet of unused paper of at least A4/Letter size
Auto(Advanced): Six sheets of unused paper of at least A4/Letter size (or one sheet when using A2 or larger)
Perform adjustment as follows.
1
Load the paper.
•
Attaching the Roll Holder to Rolls ➔P.372
•
Loading Rolls in the Printer ➔P.375
•
Loading Sheets in the Printer ➔P.394
Important
•Always make sure the loaded paper matches the type of paper specified on the printer. Adjustment
cannot be completed correctly unless the loaded paper matches the settings.
2
On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel, press ◀ or ▶ to se-
lect the Settings/Adj. tab ( ).
Note
•If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.
3
Press the OK button.
The Set./Adj. Menu is displayed.
4
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Adjust Printer, and then press the OK button.
5
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Head Posi. Adj., and then press the OK button.
6
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Auto(Standard) or Auto(Advanced), and then press the OK button.
A test pattern is printed for adjustment.
Adjustment is now finished if you have printed on a roll or a sheet of A2 size or larger.
7
If you are printing on sheets smaller than A2 size for Auto(Advanced), a confirmation message is displayed
requesting you to continue printing. Press the OK button and follow the instructions displayed.
Manual Adjustment to Straighten Lines and Colors
Manual Adjustment to Straighten Lines and Colors
If printed vertical lines are warped or colors are out of alignment, execute Head Posi. Adj. to adjust the Printhead
alignment.
Normally, execute Standard.
(See "Automatic Adjustment to Straighten Lines and Colors.") ➔P.572
iPF785
Manual Adjustment to Straighten Lines and Colors
User's Guide
Adjustments for Better Print Quality Adjusting the Printhead
573
However, when printing on special paper, or if printing is not improved after Standard, try Manual.
Manual adjustment requires you to examine the printed test pattern and enter an adjustment value.
Note
•We recommend using the type of paper you use most often for adjustment.
Items to Prepare
When Using Rolls An unused roll at least 254.0 mm (10.00 in) wide
When Using Sheets Two sheets of unused paper, A4/Letter size (or one sheet when using A2)
Perform adjustment as follows.
1
Load paper.
•
Attaching the Roll Holder to Rolls ➔P.372
•
Loading Rolls in the Printer ➔P.375
•
Loading Sheets in the Printer ➔P.394
Important
•Always make sure the loaded paper matches the type of paper specified on the printer. Adjustment
cannot be completed correctly unless the loaded paper matches the settings.
2
On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel, press ◀ or ▶ to se-
lect the Settings/Adj. tab ( ).
Note
•If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.
3
Press the OK button.
The Set./Adj. Menu is displayed.
4
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Adjust Printer, and then press the OK button.
5
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Head Posi. Adj., and then press the OK button.
6
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Manual, and then press the OK button.
A test pattern is printed for adjustment.
Note
•Manual may be unavailable in some cases, even if it is displayed in the menu.
If so, execute Standard once.
(See "Automatic Adjustment to Straighten Lines and Colors.") ➔P.572
•If you printed on cut sheets, follow the instructions on the Display Screen and use another sheet of the same
type of paper.
Manual Adjustment to Straighten Lines and Colors
iPF785
User's Guide
Adjustments for Better Print Quality Adjusting the Printhead
574
7
Press ▲ or ▼ to select D, and then press the OK button.
8
Press ▲ or ▼ to select D-1, and then press the OK button.
9
Examine adjustment test pattern D-1 and determine the number with
straight lines.
Note
•If two patterns seem equally good and you cannot decide which one is better, choose an intermediate value.
For example, choose 11 if you cannot decide whether pattern 10 or 12 is better.
10
Press ▲ or ▼ to select the pattern number you have decided, and then press the OK button.
11
Repeat steps 8–10 to specify the adjustment value for D-2 to D-17.
Note that D-6 and D-12 cannot be configured.
12
Press the Back button.
13
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Register Setting, and then press the OK button.
14
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Yes, and then press the OK button.
The adjustment value is now registered, and adjustment is complete.
Adjusting Line Misalignment
Adjusting Line Misalignment
If printed lines are misaligned, execute Head Inc. Adj. to adjust the angle of inclination of the Printhead. Executing
Head Inc. Adj. requires you to examine a printed test pattern and enter an adjustment value.
Paper to Prepare
Rolls An unused roll at least 10 inches wide
Sheets One sheet of unused paper of at least A4/Letter size
Perform adjustment as follows.
1
Load the paper.
•
Attaching the Roll Holder to Rolls ➔P.372
•
Loading Rolls in the Printer ➔P.375
•
Loading Sheets in the Printer ➔P.394
Note
•When loading paper, specify the type of paper correctly. Using paper that you have not specified on the printer
may cause feeding problems and affect the printing quality.
•We recommend loading a type of paper that you use often.
iPF785
Adjusting Line Misalignment
User's Guide
Adjustments for Better Print Quality Adjusting the Printhead
575
2
On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel, press ◀ or ▶ to se-
lect the Settings/Adj. tab ( ).
Note
•If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.
3
Press the OK button.
The Set./Adj. Menu is displayed.
4
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Adjust Printer, and then press the OK button.
5
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Head Inc. Adj., and then press the OK button.
After the Carriage is moved, a message is displayed requesting you to open the Top Cover.
6
Open the Top Cover.
7
Align the Angle Adjustment Lever with the red square and
close the Top Cover.
Adjusting Line Misalignment
iPF785
User's Guide
Adjustments for Better Print Quality Adjusting the Printhead
576
A test pattern is printed for adjustment.
Important
•Do not touch the Linear Scale (a) or Carriage Shaft (b).
Touching these parts may damage them.
•If you accidentally move the Carriage, you will hear a warning tone. In this case, close the Top Cover.
8
Examine the test pattern for adjustment. Determine the
straightest set of lines.
9
Open the Top Cover and move the Angle Adjustment Lever to
match the number (or the square) of the straightest set of lines.
If no single set of lines is perfectly straight, move the Angle Ad-
justment Lever to a position between the numbers (or between
the number and the square) of the two sets of lines that are
least misaligned.
10
Close the Top Cover.
The Printhead is now straight, and adjustment is complete.
iPF785
Adjusting Line Misalignment
User's Guide
Adjustments for Better Print Quality Adjusting the Printhead
577
Troubleshooting Paper Abrasion and Blurry Images
Troubleshooting Paper Abrasion and Blurry Images
The Printhead height setting affects printing quality.
Specifying a low Printhead height makes images clearer and enhances printing quality but may cause paper to rub
against the Printhead.
On the other hand, specifying a high Printhead height will prevent paper from rubbing against the Printhead but may
reduce the printing quality.
Important
•Paper rubbing against or becoming caught on the Printhead may jam or result in printed documents that are soiled.
Note
•Raise or lower the printhead, depending on the nature of the problem.
(See "Paper rubs against the Printhead.") ➔P.639
(See "The edges of the paper are dirty.") ➔P.640
(See "Image edges are blurred or white banding occurs.") ➔P.643
1
On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel, press ◀ or ▶ to se-
lect the Paper tab ( ).
Note
•If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.
2
Press the OK button.
The Paper Menu is displayed.
3
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Paper Details, and then press the OK button.
4
Press ▲ or ▼ to select the type of paper, and then press the OK button.
Note
•When Head Height is set to Automatic, the setting value selected
for the previous print job is displayed (to the right of Automatic )
once you select the type of paper currently supplied.
However, the value is cleared when the printer is turned off or the pa-
per is replaced.
5
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Head Height, and then press the OK button.
6
Press ▲ or ▼ to select the desired setting value, and then press the OK button.
Note
•Using Automatic will ensure that the printer adjusts the Printhead height to the optimal level before printing,
accounting for the ambient temperature and humidity. When a setting other than Automatic is used, that val-
ue will always be applied.
•Depending on the type of paper, some setting values may not be available.
Troubleshooting Paper Abrasion and Blurry Images
iPF785
User's Guide
Adjustments for Better Print Quality Adjusting the Printhead
578
Adjusting the feed amount
Adjusting the feed amount
Adjusting the Feed Amount ............................................................................................................................................... 579
Selecting a Feed Amount Adjustment Method ................................................................................................... 579
Automatic Banding Adjustment ................................................................................................................................. 580
Manual Banding Adjustment ....................................................................................................................................... 582
Fine-Tuning the Paper Feed Amount ........................................................................................................................583
Adjusting Line Length .....................................................................................................................................................584
Adjusting the Vacuum Strength ....................................................................................................................................... 585
Adjusting the Feed Amount
Adjusting the Feed Amount
If printed documents are affected by the following problems, try adjusting the feed amount.
•
Banding in different colors
•
Line length is not accurate in the direction paper is fed
To adjust the feed amount, do the following, in this order.
1
Depending on the issue, adjust Adj. Priority to suit the particular type of paper.
(See "Selecting a Feed Amount Adjustment Method.") ➔P.579
2
Execute Adj. Quality or Adjust Length, depending on the selection in Adj. Priority.
(See "Automatic Banding Adjustment.") ➔P.580
(See "Manual Banding Adjustment.") ➔P.582
(See "Adjusting Line Length.") ➔P.584
3
After executing Adj. Quality, execute Adj. Fine Feed for further adjustment as needed.
(See "Fine-Tuning the Paper Feed Amount.") ➔P.583
Selecting a Feed Amount Adjustment Method
Selecting a Feed Amount Adjustment Method
Methods of adjusting the amount paper is fed are set in Adj. Priority.
Adjust Adj. Priority to suit your particular printing application.
•
Print Quality: Adjusts the feed amount to reduce banding across the sheet in printed documents.
Adj. Quality settings are applied. When Adj. Fine Feed is executed, the Adj. Fine Feed settings are applied in
addition to the Adj. Quality settings.
•
Print Length: Adjusts the feed amount for better accuracy of lines in printed documents.
The settings of A:High or B:Standard/Draft in Adjust Length are applied.
•
Automatic: Print Quality or Print Length is selected, depending on Print Priority as selected in the printer driv-
er at the time of printing.
Image or Office Document: Print Quality is selected.
Line Drawing/Text: Print Length is selected.
Note
•Either A:High or B:Standard/Draft in the Adjust Length menu is applied, depending on printer driver settings at the
time of printing.
•If you have selected Easy Settings in the printer driver, follow these steps to confirm the Print Priority setting.
•Windows: Click View Settings on the Main tab to display the View Settings dialog box.
•Mac OS: Click View set. on the Main pane to display the View set. dialog box.
iPF785
Adjusting the Feed Amount
User's Guide
Adjustments for Better Print Quality Adjusting the feed amount
579
Follow these steps to configure the settings.
1
Load the paper.
•
Attaching the Roll Holder to Rolls ➔P.372
•
Loading Rolls in the Printer ➔P.375
•
Loading Sheets in the Printer ➔P.394
2
On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel, press ◀ or ▶ to se-
lect the Settings/Adj. tab ( ).
Note
•If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.
3
Press the OK button.
The Set./Adj. Menu is displayed.
4
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Adjust Printer, and then press the OK button.
5
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Feed Priority, and then press the OK button.
6
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Adj. Priority, and then press the OK button.
7
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Automatic, Print Quality, or Print Length, and then press the OK button.
Automatic Banding Adjustment
Automatic Banding Adjustment
If printed images are affected by banding in different colors across the sheet, execute Adj. Quality for automatic ad-
justment of the paper feed amount.
There are two modes of automatic adjustment to correct banding: Auto(GenuinePpr) and Auto(OtherPaper). In either
mode, the printer prints and reads a test pattern for automatic adjustment of the feed amount.
•
Auto(GenuinePpr)
Use this mode with paper identified in the Paper Reference Guide.
(See "Types of Paper.") ➔P.362
•
Auto(OtherPaper)
Use this mode with paper not in the Paper Reference Guide, or if Auto(GenuinePpr) does not eliminate banding.
(See "Types of Paper.") ➔P.362
Automatic Banding Adjustment
iPF785
User's Guide
Adjustments for Better Print Quality Adjusting the feed amount
580
Note
•Always check the Adj. Priority values before using Auto(GenuinePpr) or Auto(OtherPaper).
(See "Selecting a Feed Amount Adjustment Method.") ➔P.579
•Adjustment is not possible with Auto(GenuinePpr) and Auto(OtherPaper) when using highly transparent media.
In this case, use Manual adjustment.
(See "Manual Banding Adjustment.") ➔P.582
•If additional fine-tuning is necessary after Auto(GenuinePpr) and Auto(OtherPaper), execute Adj. Fine Feed.
(See "Fine-Tuning the Paper Feed Amount.") ➔P.583
•Use Adjust Length to ensure that lines in CAD drawings are printed at exactly the right length.
(See "Adjusting Line Length.") ➔P.584
•This may take some time, depending on the type of paper.
•Use paper of the same type and size for adjustment as you will use for printing.
Items to Prepare
When Using Rolls An unused roll at least 10 inches wide
When Using Sheets Auto(GenuinePpr) : One sheet of unused paper, A4/Letter size
Auto(OtherPaper) : Two sheets of unused paper, A4/Letter size (or one sheet when using A2)
Perform adjustment as follows.
1
Load the paper.
•
Attaching the Roll Holder to Rolls ➔P.372
•
Loading Rolls in the Printer ➔P.375
•
Loading Sheets in the Printer ➔P.394
Note
•Always make sure the loaded paper matches the type of paper specified. Adjustment cannot be completed
correctly unless the loaded paper matches the settings.
2
On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel, press ◀ or ▶ to se-
lect the Settings/Adj. tab ( ).
Note
•If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.
3
Press the OK button.
The Set./Adj. Menu is displayed.
4
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Adjust Printer, and then press the OK button.
5
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Feed Priority, and then press the OK button.
6
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Adj. Quality, and then press the OK button.
7
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Auto(GenuinePpr) or Auto(OtherPaper), and then press the OK button.
A test pattern is printed for adjustment.
Adjustment is now finished if you have printed on a roll or a sheet of A2 size or larger.
iPF785
Automatic Banding Adjustment
User's Guide
Adjustments for Better Print Quality Adjusting the feed amount
581
8
If you are printing on sheets smaller than A2 size for Auto(OtherPaper), a confirmation message is shown on
the Display Screen requesting you to continue printing.
Press the OK button and follow the instructions on the Display Screen.
Manual Banding Adjustment
Manual Banding Adjustment
If printed images are affected by banding in different colors, execute Adj. Quality for adjustment of the paper feed
amount.
Use Manual adjustment with highly transparent media or other paper for which Auto(GenuinePpr) or Auto(OtherPa-
per) cannot be used.
(See "Automatic Banding Adjustment.") ➔P.580
Manual adjustment requires you to enter an adjustment value after a test pattern is printed.
Note
•Use paper of the same type and size for adjustment as you will use for printing.
•Always check the Adj. Priority values before using Manual adjustment.
(See "Selecting a Feed Amount Adjustment Method.") ➔P.579
•If additional fine-tuning is necessary after Manual adjustment, use Adj. Fine Feed
(See "Fine-Tuning the Paper Feed Amount.") ➔P.583
•Use Adjust Length to ensure that lines in CAD drawings are printed at exactly the right length.
(See "Adjusting Line Length.") ➔P.584
Paper to Prepare
When Using Rolls An unused roll at least 10 inches wide
When Using Sheets Two sheets of unused paper of at least A4/Letter size
Perform adjustment as follows.
1
Load the paper.
•
Attaching the Roll Holder to Rolls ➔P.372
•
Loading Rolls in the Printer ➔P.375
•
Loading Sheets in the Printer ➔P.394
Important
•Always make sure the loaded paper matches the type of paper specified. Adjustment cannot be completed
correctly unless the loaded paper matches the settings.
2
On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel, press ◀ or ▶ to se-
lect the Settings/Adj. tab ( ).
Note
•If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.
3
Press the OK button.
The Set./Adj. Menu is displayed.
4
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Adjust Printer, and then press the OK button.
5
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Feed Priority, and then press the OK button.
Manual Banding Adjustment
iPF785
User's Guide
Adjustments for Better Print Quality Adjusting the feed amount
582
6
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Adj. Quality, and then press the OK button.
7
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Manual, and then press the OK button.
Test pattern A is printed for manual adjustment.
Note
•When printing on sheets, follow the instructions on the Display Screen and remove the sheet.
8
Examine test pattern A for adjustment. Determine the
pattern in which banding is least noticeable.
Note
•If banding seems least noticeable in two patterns but you cannot decide which one is better, choose an inter-
mediate value.
For example, choose 11 if you cannot decide whether pattern 10 or 12 is better.
9
Press ▲ or ▼ to select the pattern number you have decided, and then press the OK button.
Test pattern B is printed for adjustment.
Note
•If you printed test pattern A on a sheet, follow the instructions on the Display Screen and use another sheet of
the same type of paper.
Additionally, after test pattern B is printed, follow the instructions on the Display Screen and remove the sheet.
10
Examine test pattern B for adjustment. Determine the pattern in which banding is least noticeable.
11
Press ▲ or ▼ to select the pattern number you have decided, and then press the OK button.
The adjustment value is now registered, and adjustment is complete.
Fine-Tuning the Paper Feed Amount
Fine-Tuning the Paper Feed Amount
If the contrast is uneven or banding in different colors appears at 50 mm (2.0 in) intervals in printed documents, try
executing Adj. Fine Feed during printing to fine-tune the feed amount.
Note
•The Adj. Fine Feed menu is only displayed during printing.
Additionally, it is displayed when you have selected Automatic or Print Quality in Adj. Priority in Feed Priority.
(See "Menu Settings.") ➔P.457
•Always execute Adj. Quality before Adj. Fine Feed.
Once you execute Adj. Quality, the Adj. Fine Feed value will revert to 0.
(See "Automatic Banding Adjustment.") ➔P.580
(See "Manual Banding Adjustment.") ➔P.582
Perform adjustment as follows.
1
On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel, press ◀ or ▶ to se-
lect the Settings/Adj. tab ( ).
iPF785
Fine-Tuning the Paper Feed Amount
User's Guide
Adjustments for Better Print Quality Adjusting the feed amount
583
Note
•If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.
2
Press the OK button.
The Set./Adj. Menu is displayed.
3
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Adj. Fine Feed, and then press the OK button.
4
Press ▲ or ▼ to select a setting value in the range -5 to 5, and then press the OK button.
At this time, if banding in dark colors appears, select a setting value in the range 1 to 5, and if banding in light
colors appears, select a setting value in the range -1 to -5.
Adjusting Line Length
Adjusting Line Length
To ensure that lines in CAD drawings are printed at exactly the right length, use Adjust Length to adjust the amount
that paper is advanced.
There are two options in Adjust Length : AdjustmentPrint and Change Settings.
•
AdjustmentPrint
After a test pattern is printed, you will measure the discrepancy based on the results of printing.
•
Change Settings
No test pattern is printed. Instead, you will measure a document already printed to determine the discrepancy.
Additionally, two modes are available in both AdjustmentPrint and Change Settings : A:High or B:Standard/Draft.
Choose the mode that suits your particular printing application.
•
A:High
This setting is applied when Highest or High is selected in Print Quality in the printer driver.
•
B:Standard/Draft
This setting is applied when Standard or Fast is selected in Print Quality in the printer driver.
Note
•Always check the Adj. Priority values before using Adjust Length. (See "Selecting a Feed Amount Adjustment Meth-
od.") ➔P.579
•Use paper of the same type and size for adjustment as you will use for printing.
Paper to Prepare
When Using Rolls
•
An unused roll at least 10 inches wide
•
High-precision ruler
When Using Sheets
•
One sheet of unused paper of at least A4/Letter size
•
High-precision ruler
Perform adjustment as follows.
1
Load the paper.
•
Attaching the Roll Holder to Rolls ➔P.372
•
Loading Rolls in the Printer ➔P.375
•
Loading Sheets in the Printer ➔P.394
Important
•Always make sure the loaded paper matches the type of paper specified. Adjustment cannot be completed
correctly unless the loaded paper matches the settings.
Adjusting Line Length
iPF785
User's Guide
Adjustments for Better Print Quality Adjusting the feed amount
584
2
On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel, press ◀ or ▶ to se-
lect the Settings/Adj. tab ( ).
Note
•If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.
3
Press the OK button.
The Set./Adj. Menu is displayed.
4
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Adjust Printer, and then press the OK button.
5
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Feed Priority, and then press the OK button.
6
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Adjust Length, and then press the OK button.
7
Press ▲ or ▼ to select AdjustmentPrint or Change Settings, and then
press the OK button.
When you select AdjustmentPrint, a test pattern is printed for you to
measure the scale and calculate the discrepancy. The scale bar prints Milli-
meter in 50 mm increments and Inch in 1-inch increments.
Note
•A test pattern is printed in black when you choose A:High or in magenta if you choose B:Standard/Draft.
•To cancel printing the test pattern for adjustment, hold down the Stop button. When "Stop printing?" is dis-
played, press ▲ or ▼ to select Yes, and then press the OK button.
8
Press ▲ or ▼ to enter the amount of discrepancy, and then press the OK button.
If the scale is shorter than the actual size, use a positive setting value. If it is longer, use a negative value.
The feed amount can be adjusted in 0.02% increments.
Adjusting the Vacuum Strength
Adjusting the Vacuum Strength
When printing on heavyweight paper or paper that curls or wrinkles easily, if the Printhead rubs against paper, adjust-
ing the level of suction against paper on the Platen may improve results.
Important
•Paper rubbing against or becoming caught on the Printhead may jam or result in printed documents that are soiled.
1
On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel, press ◀ or ▶ to se-
lect the Paper tab ( ).
Note
•If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.
iPF785
Adjusting the Vacuum Strength
User's Guide
Adjustments for Better Print Quality Adjusting the feed amount
585
2
Press the OK button.
The Paper Menu is displayed.
3
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Paper Details, and then press the OK button.
4
Press ▲ or ▼ to select the type of paper, and then press the OK button.
Note
•When VacuumStrngth is set to Automatic, the setting value selec-
ted for the previous print job is displayed (to the right of Automatic )
once you select the type of paper currently supplied.
However, the value is cleared when the printer is turned off or the pa-
per is replaced.
5
Press ▲ or ▼ to select VacuumStrngth, and then press the OK button.
6
Press ▲ or ▼ to select the desired setting value, and then press the OK button.
Adjusting the Vacuum Strength
iPF785
User's Guide
Adjustments for Better Print Quality Adjusting the feed amount
586
iPF785
User's Guide
Basic Printing Workow 15
Enhanced Printing Options 31
Windows Software 157
Mac OS Software 277
Handling and Use of Paper 361
Control Panel 435
Printer Parts 475
Network Setting 489
Print Job Management 509
Adjustments for Better Print Quality 571
Maintenance and Consumables
Ink Tanks ................................................................................................. 588
Printheads ............................................................................................... 597
Maintenance Cartridge ............................................................................ 606
Cleaning the Printer ................................................................................. 612
Other Maintenance .................................................................................. 616
Troubleshooting 625
Error Message 655
Specications 679
Appendix 683
imagePROGRAF
Maintenance and Consumables
587
Ink Tanks
Ink Tanks
Ink Tanks .................................................................................................................................................................................... 588
Replacing Ink Tanks ............................................................................................................................................................... 588
Checking Ink Tank Levels .................................................................................................................................................... 594
When to Replace Ink Tanks ................................................................................................................................................ 594
Attach the Ink Tank Cover to the printer ..................................................................................................................... 595
Ink Tanks
Ink Tanks
When purchasing, check the Model number.
Shape Colors Model number Ink Type Capacity
Matte black PFI-107MBK Pigment ink
130 ml (4.4 fl oz)
Black PFI-107BK
Dye ink
Cyan PFI-107C
Magenta PFI-107M
Yellow PFI-107Y
Shape Colors Model number Ink Type Capacity
Matte black PFI-207MBK Pigment ink
300 ml (10.2 fl oz)
Black PFI-207BK
Dye ink
Cyan PFI-207C
Magenta PFI-207M
Yellow PFI-207Y
Note
•For instructions on Ink Tank replacement, see "Replacing Ink Tanks." ➔P.588
Replacing Ink Tanks
Replacing Ink Tanks
Compatible ink tanks
For information on the compatible ink tanks for this printer, see "Ink Tanks." ➔P.588
Replacement ink tanks in 130 ml (4.4 fl oz) and 300 ml (10.2 fl oz) capacities are supported.
Note
•Depending on the color, you can also use ink tanks of different capacities.
Ink Tanks
iPF785
User's Guide
Maintenance and Consumables Ink Tanks
588
Precautions when handling ink tanks
Take the following precautions when handling ink tanks.
Caution
•For safety, keep ink tanks out of the reach of children.
•If ink is accidentally ingested, contact a physician immediately.
Important
•There may be ink around the ink supply section of ink tanks you removed. Handle ink tanks carefully during replace-
ment. The ink may stain clothing.
•Do not install used ink tanks in another model of printer.
This will prevent correct ink level detection, which may damage the printer or cause other problems.
•We recommend using up an Ink Tank in the course of printing within six months after breaking the seal. Printing quali-
ty may be affected if you use older ink tanks.
•Do not leave the printer without ink tanks installed for extended periods (a month or more). Residual ink may become
clogged inside the printer and affect printing quality.
Confirm the message
When the ink level becomes low, a message is displayed on the Display Screen.
According to the message, replace the ink tank or prepare a new ink tank. (See "When to Replace Ink
Tanks.") ➔P.594
If a message requests you to replace an Ink Tank, press the OK button. In this case, you can skip the step Access the
menu for ink tank replacement. Follow the instructions in Remove the ink tanks.
Important
•Do not remove an Ink Tank during initialization immediately after turning on the printer, or during printhead cleaning.
Ink may leak out.
Note
•Ink Tank replacement is possible even during printing, when print jobs are being canceled, or when paper is being
advanced.
iPF785
Replacing Ink Tanks
User's Guide
Maintenance and Consumables Ink Tanks
589
Access the menu for Ink Tank replacement
1
On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel, press ◀ or ▶ to se-
lect the Ink tab ( ).
Note
•If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.
2
Press the OK button.
The Ink Menu is displayed.
3
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Rep. Ink Tank, and then press the OK button.
A message on the Display Screen requests you to open the Ink Tank Cover.
Remove the Ink Tank
1
Open the Ink Tank Cover and check the ink lamps.
Ink lamps flash when there is little ink left.
2
Press the tip of the Ink Tank Lock Lever of the color for replacement
horizontally and pull the Ink Tank Lock Lever up to open it.
Replacing Ink Tanks
iPF785
User's Guide
Maintenance and Consumables Ink Tanks
590
3
Hold the Ink Tank by the grips and remove it. Press the OK button.
Important
•Do not turn off the printer while the Ink Tank is removed.
It may cause the interior of the Ink Tank Cover to become soiled.
•If there is still ink in the Ink Tank you removed, store it with the ink
holes (a) facing up. Otherwise, ink may leak and cause stains. Put the
Ink Tank in a plastic bag and seal it.
Note
•Dispose of used ink tanks according to local regulations.
Installing Ink Tanks
1
Before opening the pouch, gently agitate the Ink Tank once or twice.
Agitate the ink in the Ink Tank by slowly rotating the Ink Tank up-
side-down and right side up repeatedly.
Important
•After installing an ink tank, do not remove and shake it. Doing so may cause the ink to leak out.
•If you do not agitate the Ink Tank, the ink may settle, which may affect printing quality.
iPF785
Replacing Ink Tanks
User's Guide
Maintenance and Consumables Ink Tanks
591
2
Open the pouch and remove the Ink Tank.
Important
•Never touch the ink holes or electrical contacts. This may cause stains, damage the Ink Tank, and affect
printing quality.
3
Press the OK button and install the Ink Tank into the holder as
shown, with the ink holes facing down.
Important
•Ink tanks cannot be installed in the holder if the color or orienta-
tion is incorrect.
If the Ink Tank does not fit in the holder, do not force it in. Check
the Ink Tank serial number, the Ink Color Label, the color of the
Ink Tank, and the orientation of the Ink Tank before reinstalling
it.
Forcing the Ink Tank into the holder may damage the printer.
4
Push the Ink Tank Lock Lever closed until it clicks into place.
Replacing Ink Tanks
iPF785
User's Guide
Maintenance and Consumables Ink Tanks
592
Important
•Do not push the Ink Tank in by hand.
Forcing the Ink Tank into the holder may damage the printer.
•If a 130 ml (4.4 fl oz) ink tank is installed facing the wrong direc-
tion, the rotating part of the Ink Tank Lock Lever come out of
place.
If this happens, open the Ink Tank Lock Lever to return it to the
proper position.
5
Make sure the Ink Lamp is lit in red.
Note
•If the Ink Lamp is not lit, reinstall the tank.
6
Close the Ink Tank Cover.
iPF785
Replacing Ink Tanks
User's Guide
Maintenance and Consumables Ink Tanks
593
Checking Ink Tank Levels
Checking Ink Tank Levels
On the Display Screen, you can check how much ink is left in the ink tanks.
To check remaining Ink Tank levels, access the Tab Selection screen on the Control Panel and press ◀ or ▶ to se-
lect the Ink tab ( ).
Note
•If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.
•If an error has occurred and the Tab Selection screen cannot be displayed, display Ink Info as follows.
1. Press the OK button to display Printer Info.
2. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select Ink Info.
3. Press the OK button.
The remaining ink levels shown on the Display Screen correspond to the inks identified by the Color Label on the bot-
tom of the Display Screen.
These symbols may be displayed above the ink level: ! if ink is low, × if no ink is left, and ? if you have deactivated ink
level detection.
The remaining ink level is indicated as shown below.
If the Display Screen indicates to replace the Ink Tank, replace the Ink Tank. If a message is displayed indicating to
check the remaining ink levels, or after tasks that consume a lot of ink such as large-format printing or head cleaning,
check the remaining levels and replace Ink Tank as needed. (See "Replacing Ink Tanks.") ➔P.588
When to Replace Ink Tanks
When to Replace Ink Tanks
Replace or prepare to replace ink tanks in the following situations.
If a message for checking the ink is shown on the Display Screen
When there is little ink left, the Message Lamp is lit and "Not much ink is left." is shown on the Display Screen. You
can continue to print, but prepare to replace the Ink Tank. (See "Checking Ink Tank Levels.") ➔P.594
Checking Ink Tank Levels
iPF785
User's Guide
Maintenance and Consumables Ink Tanks
594
Before print jobs and maintenance that consume a lot of ink
If little ink is left, there may not be enough for large-format printing, head cleaning, and maintenance, which require a
lot of ink. In this case, replace or prepare to replace the Ink Tank before maintenance.
If a message for ink replacement is shown on the Display Screen
When ink runs out, the Message Lamp flashes, a message regarding Ink Tank replacement is shown on the Display
Screen, and printing is disabled. Replace the Ink Tank at this point.
Attach the Ink Tank Cover to the printer
Attach the Ink Tank Cover to the printer
If too much force is applied to the Ink Tank Cover while it is open, Ink Tank Cover may become detached from the
printer.
If the Ink Tank Cover has become detached from the printer, attach it using the following procedure.
Note
•Although the attachment procedure describes the Ink Tank Cover on the right side of the printer, the Ink Tank Cover on
the left side can also be attached using the same procedure.
1
Rotate the Ink Tank Cover attachment part and store it in the printer.
iPF785
Attach the Ink Tank Cover to the printer
User's Guide
Maintenance and Consumables Ink Tanks
595
2
Move the Ink Tank Cover horizontally to align the posi-
tion with the printer.
3
Rotate the Ink Tank Cover and place it on the printer.
4
Push down on the near side of the Ink Tank Cover from the top until it
clicks.
5
Open the Ink Tank Cover and check that it is attached to the printer.
Attach the Ink Tank Cover to the printer
iPF785
User's Guide
Maintenance and Consumables Ink Tanks
596
Printheads
Printheads
Printhead .................................................................................................................................................................................... 597
Checking for Nozzle Clogging ...........................................................................................................................................597
Cleaning the Printhead .........................................................................................................................................................598
Replacing the Printhead ...................................................................................................................................................... 599
Printhead
Printhead
When purchasing, check the Model number.
Shape Model number
PF-04
Note
•For instructions on replacing the Printhead, see "Replacing the Printhead." ➔P.599
Checking for Nozzle Clogging
Checking for Nozzle Clogging
If printing is faint or affected by banding in different colors, make sure the Printhead nozzles are clear by printing a test
pattern to check the nozzles.
Note
•Nozzles are periodically checked to ensure they are clear. Configure the settings on the Control Panel menu in Nozzle
Check. (See "Menu Settings.") ➔P.457
Paper to Prepare
When Using Rolls An unused roll at least 254.0 mm (10.00 in) wide
When Using Sheets One sheet of unused paper of at least A4/Letter size
1
Load paper.
•
Attaching the Roll Holder to Rolls ➔P.372
•
Loading Rolls in the Printer ➔P.375
•
Loading Sheets in the Printer ➔P.394
2
On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel, press ◀ or ▶ to se-
lect the Settings/Adj. tab ( ).
iPF785
Printhead
User's Guide
Maintenance and Consumables Printheads
597
Note
•If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.
3
Press the OK button.
The Set./Adj. Menu is displayed.
4
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Test Print, and then press the OK button.
5
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Nozzle Check, and then press the OK button.
The printer now prints a test pattern for checking the nozzles.
6
Check the printing results.
If the horizontal lines are not faint or incomplete, the nozzles are
clear.
If some sections of the horizontal lines are faint or incomplete, the
nozzles for those colors are clogged.
If horizontal lines are faint or incomplete, follow the steps below
and check again for nozzle clogging.
1.
Clean the Printhead. (See "Cleaning the Printhead.") ➔P.598
2.
Print a test pattern to check the nozzles.
Note
•If you repeat these steps several times but the horizontal lines are still faint or incomplete, the Printhead may have
reached the end of its useful life. Contact your Canon dealer for assistance.
Cleaning the Printhead
Cleaning the Printhead
If printing is faint, cleaning the Printhead may improve results.
Choose one of two Printhead cleaning modes ( Head Cleaning A or Head Cleaning B ), depending on the problem to
resolve.
•
Head Cleaning A
Use this mode if printing is faint or contains foreign substances. This method of cleaning consumes the least
amount of ink.
It takes about three minutes to complete.
•
Head Cleaning B
Use this mode if no ink is ejected at all, or if Head Cleaning A does not solve the problem.
It takes about three and a half minutes to complete.
Important
•Do not remove the Maintenance Cartridge or ink tanks during either Head Cleaning A or Head Cleaning B.
Ink may leak or an error may occur.
•If printing does not improve even if you execute Head Cleaning B, try repeating Head Cleaning B once or twice. If
this still does not improve printing, the Printhead may have reached the end of its useful life. Contact your Canon
dealer for assistance.
Note
•By default, nozzles are checked at fixed intervals.
Configure the settings on the Control Panel menu in Nozzle Check.
(See "Menu Settings.") ➔P.457
Cleaning the Printhead
iPF785
User's Guide
Maintenance and Consumables Printheads
598
Perform cleaning as follows.
1
On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel, press ◀ or ▶ to se-
lect the Settings/Adj. tab ( ).
Note
•If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.
2
Press the OK button.
The Set./Adj. Menu is displayed.
3
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Maintenance, and then press the OK button.
4
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Head Cleaning, and then press the OK button.
5
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Head Cleaning A or Head Cleaning B, and then press the OK button.
Head cleaning is now executed.
6
Print a test pattern to check the nozzles, and determine whether cleaning has cleared the nozzles. (See
"Checking for Nozzle Clogging.") ➔P.597
Replacing the Printhead
Replacing the Printhead
When to replace the Printhead
Replace the Printhead in the following situations.
•
If the printing quality does not improve even after one or two cycles of Head Cleaning B from the printer
menu
•
If the Display Screen indicates "Open top cover and replace the printhead."
•
If your Canon dealer has advised you to replace the Printhead
Compatible printheads
For information on compatible printheads, see "Printhead." ➔P.597
Precautions when handling the Printhead
Take the following precautions when handling the Printhead.
Caution
•For safety, keep the Printhead out of the reach of children.
•If ink is accidentally ingested, contact a physician immediately.
•Do not touch the Printhead immediately after printing. The Printhead becomes extremely hot, and there is a risk of
burns.
Important
•There may be ink around the nozzles of the Printhead you remove. Handle the Printhead carefully during replace-
ment. The ink may stain clothing.
•Do not open the Printhead pouch until immediately before installation. After removing the Printhead from the pouch,
install it right away. If the Printhead is left after the pouch is opened, the nozzles may dry out, which may affect print-
ing quality.
iPF785
Replacing the Printhead
User's Guide
Maintenance and Consumables Printheads
599
Access the menu for Printhead replacement
Caution
•When replacing the Printhead immediately after printing, wait a few minutes before replacing it. The metal parts of the
Printhead become hot during printing, and there is a risk of burns from touching these parts.
Important
•Your hands may become dirty during Printhead replacement. Use the gloves provided with the new Printhead for re-
placement.
Note
•Prepare a new Ink Tank when ink levels are low.
1
On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel, press ◀ or ▶ to se-
lect the Settings/Adj. tab ( ).
Note
•If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.
2
Press the OK button.
The Set./Adj. Menu is displayed.
3
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Maintenance, and then press the OK button.
4
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Replace P.head, and then press the OK button.
Ink begins being drawn in. When it finishes, instructions are displayed on the Display Screen.
It takes about two minutes to complete.
Replace the Printhead
1
Open the Top Cover.
Instructions are now shown on the Display Screen regarding
Printhead replacement.
Important
•During Printhead replacement, do not move the Carriage from the position indicated. If you accidentally
move the Carriage, you will hear a warning tone, and Printhead replacement is no longer possible.
If you move the Carriage by mistake, close the Top Cover. The Carriage will be moved to the position as
indicated.
Replacing the Printhead
iPF785
User's Guide
Maintenance and Consumables Printheads
600
2
If the Printhead Fixer Cover or Printhead Fixer Lever is dirty,
use a damp cloth that you have wrung out completely to wipe
it clean.
Important
•Do not touch the Linear Scale (a) or Carriage Shaft (b).
Touching these parts may damage them.
•Never touch the metal contacts of the Carriage. This may damage the printer.
iPF785
Replacing the Printhead
User's Guide
Maintenance and Consumables Printheads
601
3
Pull the Printhead Fixer Lever forward all the way to open it
completely.
4
Pull up the Printhead Fixer Cover to open it completely.
5
Remove the Printhead and press the OK button.
Note
•Dispose of the used Printhead in accordance with local regulations.
Replacing the Printhead
iPF785
User's Guide
Maintenance and Consumables Printheads
602
6
Holding the new Printhead by the grips (a), remove it from the
pouch.
Important
•When handling the Printhead, always hold it by the grips (a). Never touch the nozzles (b) or metal contacts
(c). This may damage the Printhead and affect printing quality.
•Never touch the ink supply section (d). This may cause
printing problems.
7
While firmly holding the Printhead you have removed, use your
other hand to remove the orange Protective Part (a). Squeeze
the grips (c) of Protective Part (b) and pull it down to remove it.
Important
•The inside surface of the Protective Part (a) and Protective Part (b) is coated with ink to protect the nozzles.
Be careful not to touch these surfaces when removing the caps.
•The Printhead contains ink to protect the nozzles. We recommend removing Protective Part (b) as you hold it
over the Printhead package or safely out of the way to avoid spilling ink and staining your clothes or the
surrounding area. If ink accidentally spills, wipe off the ink with a dry cloth.
•If you need to put a Printhead somewhere temporarily before installation, do not keep the nozzles and metal
contacts facing down. If the nozzles or metal contacts are damaged, it may affect the printing quality.
•Do not reattach the removed Protective Part. Dispose of these materials in accordance with local regula-
tions.
iPF785
Replacing the Printhead
User's Guide
Maintenance and Consumables Printheads
603
8
With the nozzles facing down and the metal contacts toward
the back, insert the Printhead into the Carriage. Carefully push
the printhead firmly into the Carriage, ensuring that the nozzles
and metal contacts do not touch the carriage.
9
Pull the Printhead Fixer Cover down toward the front to lock
the Printhead in place.
10
Push the Printhead Fixer Lever toward the back of the printer
until it clicks.
11
Close the Top Cover.
Ink now fills the system. It takes about seven minutes to com-
plete.
Important
•While ink is being filled, definitely do not remove the Ink Tank or Maintenance Cartridge. Ink may leak out.
Replacing the Printhead
iPF785
User's Guide
Maintenance and Consumables Printheads
604
Note
•After Printhead has been replaced and filled with ink, Head Posi. Adj. ( Auto(Advanced) ) is performed if you
have selected Rep.P.head Print > On in the Control Panel menu. (See "Menu Settings.") ➔P.457
In this case, follow the instructions on the Display Screen for Printhead adjustment.
If Rep.P.head Print is Off, perform Head Posi. Adj. ( Auto(Advanced) ) yourself. (See "Automatic Adjust-
ment to Straighten Lines and Colors.") ➔P.572
iPF785
Replacing the Printhead
User's Guide
Maintenance and Consumables Printheads
605
Maintenance Cartridge
Maintenance Cartridge
Maintenance Cartridge ........................................................................................................................................................ 606
Replacing the Maintenance Cartridge ........................................................................................................................... 606
Checking the Remaining Maintenance Cartridge Capacity ................................................................................. 610
When to Replace the Maintenance Cartridge ............................................................................................................ 611
Maintenance Cartridge
Maintenance Cartridge
When purchasing, check the Model number.
Shape Model number
MC-10
Note
•For instructions on replacing the Maintenance Cartridge, see "Replacing the Maintenance Cartridge." ➔P.606
Replacing the Maintenance Cartridge
Replacing the Maintenance Cartridge
Compatible maintenance cartridges
For information on compatible maintenance cartridges, see "Maintenance Cartridge." ➔P.606
Precautions when handling the Maintenance Cartridge
Take the following precautions when handling the Maintenance Cartridge.
Caution
•For safety, keep the Maintenance Cartridge out of the reach of children.
•If ink is accidentally ingested, contact a physician immediately.
Important
•Do not remove the Maintenance Cartridge except to replace it. Ink may leak out.
•Do not remove an Maintenance Cartridge during initialization immediately after turning on the printer, during Printhead
cleaning, while ink is being drawn out, or during initialization immediately after replacing the Maintenance Cartridge.
The Maintenance Cartridge may become damaged or ink may leak out.
•To prevent ink from leaking from a used Maintenance Cartridge, avoid dropping the cartridge or storing it at an angle.
Otherwise, ink may leak and cause stains.
•Ink adheres to the top of the Maintenance Cartridge after it has been used. Handle the Maintenance Cartridge careful-
ly during replacement. The ink may stain clothing.
Maintenance Cartridge
iPF785
User's Guide
Maintenance and Consumables Maintenance Cartridge
606
Confirm the message
When the Maintenance Cartridge is almost empty, a message is shown on the Display Screen. According to the mes-
sage, replace the Maintenance Cartridge or prepare a new Maintenance Cartridge. (See "When to Replace the Mainte-
nance Cartridge.") ➔P.611
If a message is displayed requesting Maintenance Cartridge replacement, you can skip the step Access the menu for
Maintenance Cartridge replacement. Follow the instructions in Replace the Maintenance Cartridge.
Access the menu for Maintenance Cartridge replacement
1
On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel, press ◀ or ▶ to se-
lect the Settings/Adj. tab ( ).
Note
•If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.
2
Press the OK button.
The Set./Adj. Menu is displayed.
3
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Maintenance, and then press the OK button.
4
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Repl. maint cart, and then press the OK button.
A message on the Display Screen advises you to open the Maintenance Cartridge Cover.
iPF785
Replacing the Maintenance Cartridge
User's Guide
Maintenance and Consumables Maintenance Cartridge
607
Replace the Maintenance Cartridge
1
Open the box, remove the plastic bag and packaging ma-
terial, and take out the Maintenance Cartridge.
Important
•Never touch the metal contacts (a). This may damage the
Maintenance Cartridge.
2
At this point, open the Maintenance Cartridge Cover.
3
Hold the used Maintenance Cartridge by the grip (a) with one
hand and put your other hand under the Maintenance Car-
tridge to hold it firmly on the bottom, keeping it level as you
pull it out.
Replacing the Maintenance Cartridge
iPF785
User's Guide
Maintenance and Consumables Maintenance Cartridge
608
Important
•Used Maintenance Cartridges are heavy. Always grasp the cartridge firmly and keep the cartridge level dur-
ing removal and storage. If you drop a used Maintenance Cartridge or store it at an angle, ink may leak and
cause stains.
•The remaining Maintenance Cartridge capacity is recorded on each printer. Do not install a used Mainte-
nance Cartridge in another printer.
4
Keep the used Maintenance Cartridge level as you put it in
the plastic bag. Expel excess air from the plastic bag and
seal the zipper.
5
Confirm the Maintenance Cartridge is right-side up, put it in
the box with the packaging material attached, and store it
so that it stays level.
Important
•Always put the used Maintenance Cartridge back in the box and store the box on a flat surface. Also, seal
the zipper thoroughly. Otherwise, ink may leak and cause stains.
Note
•Put the used Maintenance Cartridge in the plastic bag of the new cartridge, and dispose of it in accordance
with local regulations.
6
Keeping the new Maintenance Cartridge level, insert it all the
way in.
The printer now initializes the Maintenance Cartridge.
iPF785
Replacing the Maintenance Cartridge
User's Guide
Maintenance and Consumables Maintenance Cartridge
609
Important
•Do not remove the Maintenance Cartridge during initialization immediately after replacing the Maintenance
Cartridge. The Maintenance Cartridge may become damaged.
7
Close the Maintenance Cartridge Cover.
Note
•If you did not perform the operation in Access the menu for Maintenance Cartridge replacement, this is
the end of the procedure and you do not need to press the OK key in the next step.
8
Press the OK button.
Checking the Remaining Maintenance Cartridge Capacity
Checking the Remaining Maintenance Cartridge Capacity
The Maintenance Cartridge absorbs excess ink from borderless printing, printhead cleaning, and other processes. You
can confirm the remaining capacity of the Maintenance Cartridge by checking the Maintenance Cartridge capacity
shown on the Display Screen.
To check remaining Maintenance Cartridge capacity, access the Tab Selection screen on the Control Panel and press
◀ or ▶ to select the Settings/Adj. tab ( ).
Note
•If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.
If the Display Screen indicates to replace the Maintenance Cartridge, replace the Maintenance Cartridge. If a message
is displayed indicating to check the remaining capacity of the Maintenance Cartridge, or before tasks that deplete much
of the capacity such as head cleaning or preparations to move the printer, check the remaining Maintenance Cartridge
capacity and prepare a new Maintenance Cartridge as needed. (See "Replacing the Maintenance Cartridge.") ➔P.606
Checking the Remaining Maintenance Cartridge Capacity
iPF785
User's Guide
Maintenance and Consumables Maintenance Cartridge
610
When to Replace the Maintenance Cartridge
When to Replace the Maintenance Cartridge
Replace or prepare to replace the Maintenance Cartridge in the following situations.
If a message for checking the Maintenance Cartridge is shown on the Display Screen
When the Maintenance Cartridge is almost full, the Message Lamp is lit and "The level is low" is shown on the Dis-
play Screen. You can continue to print, but check the remaining Maintenance Cartridge capacity and prepare to replace
the Maintenance Cartridge with a new one. (See "Checking the Remaining Maintenance Cartridge Capacity.") ➔P.610
When much of the Maintenance Cartridge capacity is depleted
Printhead cleaning, Printhead replacement, and preparations to transfer the printer deplete much of the Maintenance
Cartridge capacity. (In particular, preparing to move the printer depletes a lot of the capacity.)
Check the remaining Maintenance Cartridge capacity before this maintenance and replace the Maintenance Cartridge
if necessary.
If a message for the Maintenance Cartridge replacement is shown on the Display Screen
When the Maintenance Cartridge is full, the Message Lamp flashes and a message to replace the Maintenance Car-
tridge is shown on the Display Screen. Printing is disabled, and you cannot replace the Printhead or transfer the print-
er. Replace the Maintenance Cartridge with a new one.
iPF785
When to Replace the Maintenance Cartridge
User's Guide
Maintenance and Consumables Maintenance Cartridge
611
Cleaning the Printer
Cleaning the Printer
Cleaning the Printer Exterior ............................................................................................................................................. 612
Cleaning Inside the Top Cover .......................................................................................................................................... 612
Cleaning the Printhead .........................................................................................................................................................598
Cleaning the Printer Exterior
Cleaning the Printer Exterior
Clean the printer regularly to maintain better printing quality and help prevent problems.
To ensure a comfortable working environment, clean the printer exterior about once a month.
1
Turn the printer off. (See "Turning the Printer On and Off.") ➔P.17
2
Unplug the power cord from the outlet.
Caution
•Always turn off the printer and unplug the power cord before cleaning or maintenance. Accidentally leaving
the printer on poses a risk of injury if you touch moving parts inside the printer.
3
Using a damp cloth that you have wrung out completely, wipe
the exterior surfaces of the printer. Dry the surfaces with a dry
cloth.
Warning
•Never use flammable solvents such as alcohol, benzene, or thinner. If these substances come into contact
with electrical components inside the printer, there is a risk of fire or electrical shock.
Important
•If the Ejection Guide is dirty, it may soil the edge of the paper when the paper is cut. We recommend clean-
ing the Ejection Guide even if it does not appear dirty, because it may actually be covered with paper dust.
4
Plug the power cord into the outlet.
Cleaning Inside the Top Cover
Cleaning Inside the Top Cover
Clean inside the Top Cover about once a month to maintain better printing quality and help prevent problems.
Also clean inside the Top Cover in the following situations to ensure optimal operation.
•
If the printed surface or the underside of paper is dirty after printing
•
After you have used up a roll
•
After borderless printing
•
After printing on small paper
•
After printing on paper that generates a lot of cutting debris
•
If you have replaced the roll
•
After printing on paper that generates a lot of paper dust
•
After printing on adhesive paper
Cleaning the Printer Exterior
iPF785
User's Guide
Maintenance and Consumables Cleaning the Printer
612
Important
•If the Platen inside the Top Cover becomes dirty, it may soil the underside of paper. We recommend cleaning the
Platen after borderless printing or printing on small paper.
•If the Ejection Guide is dirty, it may soil the edge of the paper when the paper is cut. We recommend cleaning the
Ejection Guide even if it does not appear dirty, because it may actually be covered with paper dust.
•Printing on adhesive paper may leave adhesive on the Platen, Paper Retainer, or other parts. To prevent paper jams,
we recommend cleaning inside the Top Cover after printing.
1
Open the Top Cover.
2
If paper dust has accumulated in the Vacuum holes (a)
on the Platen or in the Borderless Printing Ink Grooves
(b), use the Cleaning Brush (c), provided with the print-
er, to wipe it away.
Note
•If the Cleaning Brush is dirty, rinse it in water.
iPF785
Cleaning Inside the Top Cover
User's Guide
Maintenance and Consumables Cleaning the Printer
613
3
Using a damp cloth that you have wrung out completely, wipe
inside the Top Cover to clean it. Wipe away any ink residue
on the Platen as a whole (a), the Paper Retainer (b), Border-
less Printing Ink Grooves (c), and Ejection Guide (d).
Warning
•Never use flammable solvents such as alcohol, benzene, or thinner. If these substances come into contact
with electrical components inside the printer, there is a risk of fire or electrical shock.
Important
•Do not use a dry cloth to wipe inside the Top Cover. This may create a static charge, which may attract dust
and affect the printing quality.
•Do not touch the Linear Scale (a) or Carriage Shaft (b).
This may stain your hands and damage the printer.
Cleaning Inside the Top Cover
iPF785
User's Guide
Maintenance and Consumables Cleaning the Printer
614
Other Maintenance
Other Maintenance
Preparing to Transfer the Printer .................................................................................................................................... 616
Reinstalling the Printer ......................................................................................................................................................... 619
Updating the Firmware ........................................................................................................................................................ 622
Preparing to Transfer the Printer
Preparing to Transfer the Printer
To protect the internal parts in transit, always follow these steps before transferring the printer to a new location.
Refer to the Setup Guide for details on packing the printer and installing it after transfer.
Important
•Avoid tilting the printer excessively in transit. This may cause ink in the printer to leak and cause stains.
Note
•When you execute prepare to transfer, ink is drawn into the Maintenance Cartridge. Depending on the amount of free
space in the mounted Maintenance Cartridge, you may need to replace it with a new one at this time.
Note that replacement is not required if there is 80% or more free space. (See "Checking the Remaining Maintenance
Cartridge Capacity.") ➔P.610
•Depending on the state of the printer, part replacement may be necessary when preparing to transfer the printer (that
is, when you execute the printer menu item to prepare for transfer).
Remove paper
1
Remove the paper.
•
Rolls (See "Removing the Roll from the Printer.") ➔P.380
•
Sheets (See "Removing Sheets.") ➔P.399
Access the Prep.MovePrinter menu
1
If a message instructing you to replace the Maintenance Cartridge is displayed on the Display Screen, replace
the Maintenance Cartridge.
(See "Replacing the Maintenance Cartridge.") ➔P.606
2
On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel, press ◀ or ▶ to se-
lect the Settings/Adj. tab ( ).
Note
•If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.
3
Press the OK button.
The Set./Adj. Menu is displayed.
4
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Prep.MovePrinter, and then press the OK button.
Preparing to Transfer the Printer
iPF785
User's Guide
Maintenance and Consumables Other Maintenance
616
5
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Standard or Limited, and then press the OK button.
Displays the confirmation screen.
Important
•If Limited is selected, do not transport in low temperature environments. The ink remaining in the printer
may freeze and damage the printer.
6
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Yes (or Execute if Limited is selected), and then press the OK button.
Ink is now drawn into the Maintenance Cartridge.
Once preparations are finished, a message on the Display Screen requests you to open the Ink Tank Cover.
Important
•Do not remove the Maintenance Cartridge except when the message for replacing it is displayed.
If you remove the Maintenance Cartridge while ink is being drawn out, the ink may leak out.
•If consumables must be replaced, the message "Consumables must be replaced. Call for service." is
shown on the Display Screen and preparation is not possible. If this message is displayed, press the OK
button and contact your Canon dealer for assistance.
Remove the Ink Tank
1
Open the Ink Tank Cover.
2
Pressing the tip of the Ink Tank Lock Lever horizontally, lift the Ink
Tank Lock Lever to release the lock.
3
Holding the ink tanks by the grips, remove them.
iPF785
Preparing to Transfer the Printer
User's Guide
Maintenance and Consumables Other Maintenance
617
Important
•Store the ink tanks you removed with the ink holes (a) facing up. Oth-
erwise, ink may leak and cause stains.
4
Repeat steps 2 and 3 to remove all ink tanks.
5
Push all ink tank lock levers closed until they click into place.
6
Close the Ink Tank Cover.
Ink is now drawn into the Maintenance Cartridge.
Important
•Do not remove the Maintenance Cartridge except when the message for replacing it is displayed.
If you remove the Maintenance Cartridge while ink is being drawn out, the ink may leak out.
7
When the processing is complete, "Completed! Turn Power Off!!" is
displayed. Press the Power button to turn the power off.
Preparing to Transfer the Printer
iPF785
User's Guide
Maintenance and Consumables Other Maintenance
618
Pack the printer
1
Disconnect the power cord and interface cable.
Important
•Turn off the printer before you unplug it. It may damage the printer if you unplug it before it is off and transfer
it in that state. If you accidentally unplug the printer, plug it in again, reinstall the ink tanks, and follow this
procedure again.
2
Tape down printer covers to secure them, in the reverse or-
der of tape removal during installation.
3
Remove the Stand by reversing the installation procedure, when it was attached to the printer.
4
Disassemble and repackage the Stand by following the installation procedure in reverse.
5
Repack the Roll Holder, Holder Stopper, and printer in shipping materials, and then package them in a shipping
box.
Reinstalling the Printer
Reinstalling the Printer
The basic workflow for reinstalling the printer is as follows.
For detailed instructions, see the Setup Guide.
Assemble the stand
1
Referring to the Printer Stand Setup Guide, assemble the
Stand.
iPF785
Reinstalling the Printer
User's Guide
Maintenance and Consumables Other Maintenance
619
Caution
•The Stand must be assembled by at least two people on a flat surface. Attempting assembly by yourself
poses a risk of injury or bending the Stand.
•When assembling the Stand, lock all four of the casters. Attempting to move the stand when the casters are
not locked poses a risk of injury or damage to the location site.
•Before moving the assembled stand, lift the support
rod to the position shown (a) and unlock all four cas-
ters. Moving the stand with the support rod lowered or
the casters locked may cause injury or damage the
area of installation or basket cloth.
Install the printer
1
Mount the printer on the assembled Stand and tighten the
screws firmly.
Caution
•Moving the printer requires at least three people. Be careful to avoid back strain and other injuries.
•When moving the printer, firmly grasp the Carrying Han-
dles. The printer may be unsteady if you hold it at other
positions, which poses a risk of injury from dropping the
printer.
•When placing the printer on the Stand, lock all four of the casters of the Stand. Attempting to place the printer
on the Stand while the casters are not locked poses a risk of injury.
Reinstalling the Printer
iPF785
User's Guide
Maintenance and Consumables Other Maintenance
620
2
Remove tape and packaging material attached to the print-
er.
3
Connect the power cord to the Power Supply Connector on
the right side of the printer.
4
Plug the power cord into the outlet.
5
Press the power button to turn the printer on.
Instructions are displayed on the Display Screen.
6
Open the Ink Tank Cover and install the ink tanks.
iPF785
Reinstalling the Printer
User's Guide
Maintenance and Consumables Other Maintenance
621
7
Load the Roll Media on the Roll Holder.
(See "Attaching the Roll Holder to Rolls.") ➔P.372
8
Load the Roll Media in the printer.
(See "Loading Rolls in the Printer.") ➔P.375
9
Install the software.
Note that the driver installation procedure varies depending
on the type of connection.
Important
•When the printer is connected to a network (via TCP/IP), the printer's IP address may be changed if you
reinstall the printer.
In this case, be sure to reconfigure the printer's IP address.
Updating the Firmware
Updating the Firmware
Update the printer firmware to take advantage of new and improved printer functions.
Confirming the firmware version
1
On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel, press ◀ or ▶ to se-
lect the Settings/Adj. tab ( ).
Note
•If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.
Updating the Firmware
iPF785
User's Guide
Maintenance and Consumables Other Maintenance
622
2
Press the OK button.
The Set./Adj. Menu is displayed.
3
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Printer Info, and then press the OK button.
4
Press ▲ or ▼ to select System Info, and then press the OK button.
The firmware version is displayed.
Updating the Firmware
To obtain the latest firmware, visit the Canon website. If the firmware available online is newer than the installed firm-
ware, update the printer firmware. For details on downloading and updating the firmware, visit the Canon website.
iPF785
Updating the Firmware
User's Guide
Maintenance and Consumables Other Maintenance
623
iPF785
User's Guide
Basic Printing Workow 15
Enhanced Printing Options 31
Windows Software 157
Mac OS Software 277
Handling and Use of Paper 361
Control Panel 435
Printer Parts 475
Network Setting 489
Print Job Management 509
Adjustments for Better Print Quality 571
Maintenance and Consumables 587
Troubleshooting
Frequently Asked Questions ................................................................... 626
Problems Regarding Paper ..................................................................... 627
Printing does not start .............................................................................. 637
The printer stops during a print job .......................................................... 638
Problems with the printing quality ............................................................ 639
Cannot print over a network .................................................................... 646
Installation problems ................................................................................ 647
HP-GL/2 problems ................................................................................... 649
Other problems ........................................................................................ 651
Error Message 655
Specications 679
Appendix 683
imagePROGRAF
Troubleshooting
625
Frequently Asked Questions
Frequently Asked Questions
Frequently Asked Questions
Frequently Asked Questions
This section presents frequently asked questions and answers. To view more detailed explanations, click the hyperlinks
in the answer column.
Question Answer
I want to easily create
vertical or horizontal ban-
ners.
You can print originals that are in landscape (or portrait) orientation automatically enlarged to fit the roll
width. This is an easy way to create vertical or horizontal banners.
(See "Printing Vertical or Horizontal Banners (Large-Format Printing).") ➔P.97
Does this printer support
sub-ink tank system?
This printer supports sub-ink tank system.
Even if an ink tank becomes empty during printing, since a certain amount of ink always is stored in a sub-
ink tank, you can replace the ink tank while printing.
(See "Replacing Ink Tanks.") ➔P.588
I want to know how to
configure roll cutting.
You can select the cutting method by the setting of the printer driver and the setting of the printer.
To cut rolls automatically after printing, set Cutting Mode of the printer to Automatic and Automatic Cut-
ting of the printer driver to Yes.
When using paper for which ink adhesion takes time or the print surface is easily scratched, we recommend
that you set the Cutting Mode setting of the printer to Eject.
(See "Specifying the Cutting Method for Rolls.") ➔P.388
(See "Cutting Roll Paper After Printing.") ➔P.152
I want to configure so that
the roll is cut automatical-
ly after waiting for the ink
to dry.
In the printer driver, you can set the time for waiting until the ink dries.
Also, you can set likewise on the printer.
(See "Specifying the Ink Drying Time for Rolls.") ➔P.385
(See "Menu Structure.") ➔P.450
How do I print without
borders?
When printing on rolls, you can perform borderless printing by configuring the printer driver. (when printing
on cut sheets, you cannot perform borderless printing)
(See "Borderless Printing on Paper of Equivalent Size.") ➔P.87
(See "Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width.") ➔P.90
(See "Borderless Printing at Actual Size.") ➔P.80
I want to know the paper
types that can be used in
this printer.
Concerning the paper that can be used in this printer, refer to the imagePROGRAF home page or the Paper
Reference Guide.
(See "Displaying the Paper Reference Guide.") ➔P.366
The paper type that I
want to print is not dis-
played on the Display
Screen.
When using newly released paper, paper information must be registered on the printer and the printer driver.
Download the new version of Media Information File from the imagePROGRAF website and install it.
(See "Updating paper information.") ➔P.368
Can I perform duplex
printing?
This printer cannot perform duplex printing.
If you use the Folded Duplex function in the Free Layout of Windows software, you can print two pages
one-sided, fold them at the center and suspend them to substitute for duplex printing.
(See "Prints using Folded Duplex (Windows).") ➔P.224
I want to perform enlarge-
ment printing.
With the printer driver, you can specify the ratio matching the document with the paper size and width and
perform enlargement printing or reduction printing.
(See "Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size.") ➔P.65
(See "Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width.") ➔P.67
(See "Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value.") ➔P.71
Frequently Asked Questions
iPF785
User's Guide
Troubleshooting Frequently Asked Questions
626
Problems Regarding Paper
Problems Regarding Paper
Clearing Jammed Roll Paper ..............................................................................................................................................627
Clearing a Jammed Sheet ................................................................................................................................................... 630
Clearing Jammed Paper (Paper Feed Slot) ................................................................................................................. 633
Roll paper cannot be inserted into the Paper Feed Slot ....................................................................................... 635
Cannot load sheets ................................................................................................................................................................ 635
Paper is not cut neatly ......................................................................................................................................................... 635
Paper is not cut ....................................................................................................................................................................... 635
Depression on the leading edge is left ......................................................................................................................... 636
The size of clear lm cannot be detected ................................................................................................................... 636
Roll Paper is Continuously Ejected ................................................................................................................................. 636
Clearing Jammed Roll Paper
Clearing Jammed Roll Paper
If paper from a roll becomes jammed, "Paper jam." is shown on the Display Screen of the Control Panel. Remove the
jammed paper as follows.
1
Positioning your hands as shown, open the Roll Cover.
2
Cut the loaded roll paper with regular scissors or the like.
iPF785
Clearing Jammed Roll Paper
User's Guide
Troubleshooting Problems Regarding Paper
627
Caution
•When cutting paper, be careful to avoid injury or damage to the printer.
3
Push the Release Lever back.
4
Remove the jammed paper.
•
If paper is jammed inside the Top Cover
1.
Open the Top Cover and move the Carriage to the
left or right side manually, away from the jam.
Important
•Do not move the Carriage over jammed paper. This may damage the Printhead.
2.
Clear any jammed paper from inside the Top Cover.
After removing the paper, make sure there are no other scraps of paper in the printer.
Clearing Jammed Roll Paper
iPF785
User's Guide
Troubleshooting Problems Regarding Paper
628
3.
Close the Top Cover.
Important
•Do not touch the Linear Scale (a) or Carriage Shaft (b).
This may stain your hands and damage the printer.
•
If paper from a roll is jammed by the Paper Feed Slot
Remove the jammed paper from the Paper Feed Slot.
After removing the paper, make sure there are no other
scraps of paper in the printer.
iPF785
Clearing Jammed Roll Paper
User's Guide
Troubleshooting Problems Regarding Paper
629
•
If the paper is jammed by the Ejection Guide
Remove the jammed paper from the Output Tray.
After removing the paper, make sure there are no other
scraps of paper in the printer.
5
Pull the Release Lever forward.
Clearing a Jammed Sheet
Clearing a Jammed Sheet
If a sheet becomes jammed, "Paper jam." is shown on the Display Screen of the Control Panel. Remove the jammed
paper as follows.
1
Push the Release Lever back.
Clearing a Jammed Sheet
iPF785
User's Guide
Troubleshooting Problems Regarding Paper
630
2
Remove the jammed paper.
•
If paper is jammed inside the Top Cover
1.
Open the Top Cover and move the Carriage to the
left or right side manually, away from the jam.
Important
•Do not move the Carriage over jammed paper. This may damage the Printhead.
2.
Clear any jammed paper from inside the Top Cover.
After removing the paper, make sure there are no other scraps of paper in the printer.
3.
Close the Top Cover.
iPF785
Clearing a Jammed Sheet
User's Guide
Troubleshooting Problems Regarding Paper
631
Important
•Do not touch the Linear Scale (a) or Carriage Shaft (b).
This may stain your hands and damage the printer.
•
If the paper is jammed by the Paper Feed Slot
Remove the jammed paper from the Paper Feed Slot.
After removing the paper, make sure there are no other
scraps of paper in the printer.
•
If the paper is jammed by the Ejection Guide
Remove the jammed paper from the Output Tray.
After removing the paper, make sure there are no other
scraps of paper in the printer.
Clearing a Jammed Sheet
iPF785
User's Guide
Troubleshooting Problems Regarding Paper
632
3
Pull the Release Lever forward.
Clearing Jammed Paper (Paper Feed Slot)
Clearing Jammed Paper (Paper Feed Slot)
Follow these steps to remove any scraps left in the Paper Feed Slot after you clear jammed sheets or roll paper.
1
Turn the printer off. (See "Turning the Printer On and Off.") ➔P.17
2
Push the Release Lever back.
iPF785
Clearing Jammed Paper (Paper Feed Slot)
User's Guide
Troubleshooting Problems Regarding Paper
633
3
Positioning your hands as shown, open the Roll Cover.
4
Fold an A4 sheet lengthwise four times and insert it
through the gap of the Paper Feed Slot. Push the scrap out
toward the Platen.
5
Remove the scrap when it is pushed out onto the Platen.
6
If any scraps remain inside the paper feed slot, repeat steps 4 and 5.
7
Holding it at the positions indicated, close the Roll Cover.
Clearing Jammed Paper (Paper Feed Slot)
iPF785
User's Guide
Troubleshooting Problems Regarding Paper
634
8
Pull the Release Lever forward.
Roll paper cannot be inserted into the Paper Feed Slot
Roll paper cannot be inserted into the Paper Feed Slot
Cause Corrective Action
The roll paper is warped. Straighten out curls and reload the roll.
Paper is jammed by the paper feed slot. Remove the jammed paper.
(See "Clearing Jammed Roll Paper.") ➔P.627
(See "Clearing a Jammed Sheet.") ➔P.630
The paper source selection is incorrect. Press the Load button and select the paper source.
Cannot load sheets
Cannot load sheets
Cause Corrective Action
The paper source selection is incorrect. Press the Load button and select the paper source.
Paper is not cut neatly
Paper is not cut neatly
Cause Corrective Action
The paper is bent or curled at the cut position. Straighten out any curling by the edges of the paper.
Paper rises by the ends of the cut position before
it is cut.
Reload the paper correctly.
You are using paper that cannot be cut with the
Cutter Unit.
Specify Manual in Cutting Mode in the Control Panel menu and use scissors or a
cutting tool to cut the roll after printing.
(See "Specifying the Cutting Method for Rolls.") ➔P.388
Cut Speed is not configured correctly in the Con-
trol Panel menu.
Change the Cut Speed setting in the Control Panel menu.
(See "Menu Structure.") ➔P.450
During cutting, printed documents fall out at an
angle.
In the Control Panel menu, set Cutting Mode to Eject. Hold documents after print-
ing, as they are cut.
(See "Specifying the Cutting Method for Rolls.") ➔P.388
Paper is not cut
Paper is not cut
Cause Corrective Action
In the printer driver, No or Print Cut Guideline is specified in Au-
tomatic Cutting.
Specify Yes in Automatic Cutting in the printer driver.
(See "Page Setup Sheet (Windows).") ➔P.178
(See "Paper Detailed Settings Dialog Box (Mac OS).") ➔P.286
In the Control Panel menu, Cutting Mode is set to Eject or Man-
ual.
If the Cutting Mode is Eject, press the Cut button to cut the paper.
If the Cutting Mode is Manual, cut rolls with scissors or the like.
(See "Specifying the Cutting Method for Rolls.") ➔P.388
iPF785
Roll paper cannot be inserted into the Paper Feed Slot
User's Guide
Troubleshooting Problems Regarding Paper
635
Depression on the leading edge is left
Depression on the leading edge is left
Cause Corrective Action
Keeping a roll in the printer for a long time
without printing on it may leave a depression
on the leading edge.
When printing quality is most important, we recommend setting TrimEdge Reload to On
or Automatic so that the paper edge is automatically cut before printing.
(See "Menu Structure.") ➔P.450
The size of clear film cannot be detected
The size of clear film cannot be detected
Cause Corrective Action
The Platen is soiled with ink or other substances. Open the Top Cover and clean the entire Platen.
(See "Cleaning Inside the Top Cover.") ➔P.612
Roll Paper is Continuously Ejected
Roll Paper is Continuously Ejected
Cause Corrective Action
Although sheets are se-
lected as the paper
source, a roll was ad-
vanced.
After roll ejection stops, follow these steps to reload the roll.
1.
Push the Release Lever back.
2.
Open the Roll Cover.
3.
Using both hands, rotate the Roll Holder toward the back to rewind the roll. At this time, ensure that both
ends of the roll are rewound evenly.
4.
Pull the Release Lever forward.
5.
Load the roll. At this time, be sure to press the Load button and select "Load Roll Paper".
(See "Loading Rolls in the Printer.") ➔P.375
Depression on the leading edge is left
iPF785
User's Guide
Troubleshooting Problems Regarding Paper
636
Printing does not start
Printing does not start
The Data lamp on the Control Panel does not light up ......................................................................................... 637
The printer does not respond even if print jobs are sent .................................................................................... 637
Ink Filling.. is displayed ......................................................................................................................................................... 637
The display screen indicates Agitating... ...................................................................................................................... 637
The Data lamp on the Control Panel does not light up
The Data lamp on the Control Panel does not light up
Cause Corrective Action
The printer is not
on.
Make sure the power cord is securely plugged in, all the way. Press the Power button to turn on the printer.
The target printer
was not selected
when printing.
•
In Windows, select the printer by clicking Select Printer or Printer in the printing dialog box and try printing
again.
•
In Mac OS, open the dialog box of the printer driver, select the printer from the list of Printer, and try printing
again.
The print job is
paused.
•
In Windows, restart the print job as follows.
1.
Select the printer icon in the Printers and Faxes (or Printers ) window.
2.
Clear Pause Printing in the File menu to restart the print job.
•
In Mac OS, restart the print job as follows.
1.
Click Print & Scan. (This is identified as Printers & Scanners or Print & Fax in other versions of Mac OS.)
2.
Select the printer, and then Resume Printer (or Resume ) in the Printers menu to restart the print job.
The printer does not respond even if print jobs are sent
The printer does not respond even if print jobs are sent
Cause Corrective Action
In the Control Panel menu, Pause Print is On. Set Pause Print to Off.
(See "Pausing Printing.") ➔P.29
In the Control Panel menu, Use USB or Use Ethernet is
set to Off.
Set Use USB or Use Ethernet to On.
(See "Menu Settings.") ➔P.457
You have selected Save in mail box in Output Method on
the printer.
Print the job saved on the printer's hard disk.
(See "Printing Saved Jobs.") ➔P.538
Print jobs are pending. Manage the jobs on hold and print as needed.
(See "Managing Pending Jobs (Printing or Deleting Jobs on Hold).") ➔P.536
Ink Filling.. is displayed
Ink Filling.. is displayed
Cause Corrective Action
The printer was forced off during operation. Wait until the system has been filled with ink.
The display screen indicates Agitating...
The display screen indicates Agitating...
Cause Corrective Action
Ink agitation is in progress. Please wait until ink agitation is finished.
iPF785
The Data lamp on the Control Panel does not light up
User's Guide
Troubleshooting Printing does not start
637
The printer stops during a print job
The printer stops during a print job
An error message is shown on the Display Screen ................................................................................................. 638
The printer ejects blank, unprinted paper ................................................................................................................... 638
The printer stops when printing a HP-GL/2 job (the carriage stops moving) ............................................. 650
An error message is shown on the Display Screen
An error message is shown on the Display Screen
Cause Corrective Action
The last portion of roll paper was used during a print job, and paper could not be
advanced because the trailing edge is taped to the roll.
Remove the used roll and insert a new roll.
(See "Removing the Roll from the Printer.") ➔P.380
(See "Removing the Roll Holder from Rolls.") ➔P.383
(See "Loading and Printing on Rolls.") ➔P.19
The printer ejects blank, unprinted paper
The printer ejects blank, unprinted paper
Cause Corrective Action
The leading edge of the roll paper was cut to
straighten it.
The leading edge of rolls may be cut to straighten it if Trim Edge First is set to a value
other than Off in the Control Panel menu.
(See "Cutting the Leading Edge of Roll Paper Automatically.") ➔P.391
The Printhead nozzles are clogged. Print a test pattern to check the nozzles and make sure the Printhead is in good condi-
tion for printing.
(See "Checking for Nozzle Clogging.") ➔P.597
A print job was received from an incompatible
printer driver.
Use the correct imagePROGRAF printer driver for the printer and try printing again.
The printer has received print data that in-
cludes HP RTL commands when Auto Rotate
is On in the Control Panel menu.
In the Control Panel, set Auto Rotate to Off and print again.
(See "Menu Settings.") ➔P.457
The printer is damaged. Contact your Canon dealer for assistance.
An error message is shown on the Display Screen
iPF785
User's Guide
Troubleshooting The printer stops during a print job
638
Problems with the printing quality
Problems with the printing quality
Printing is faint ........................................................................................................................................................................ 639
Paper rubs against the Printhead ................................................................................................................................... 639
The edges of the paper are dirty .................................................................................................................................... 640
The surface of the paper is dirty .................................................................................................................................... 641
The back side of the paper is dirty ................................................................................................................................ 641
Printed colors are inaccurate ............................................................................................................................................ 641
Banding in dierent colors occurs ................................................................................................................................. 642
Colors in printed images are uneven ............................................................................................................................. 642
Image edges are blurred or white banding occurs ..................................................................................................643
The contrast becomes uneven during printing ......................................................................................................... 643
The length of printed images is inaccurate in the feeding direction ............................................................... 644
Images are printed crooked ...............................................................................................................................................644
Documents are printed in monochrome ...................................................................................................................... 644
Line thickness is not uniform ............................................................................................................................................ 644
Lines are misaligned .............................................................................................................................................................. 645
Printing is faint
Printing is faint
Cause Corrective Action
You may be printing on the wrong side
of the paper.
Print on the printing surface.
The Printhead nozzles are clogged. Print a test pattern to check the nozzles and see if they are clogged.
(See "Checking for Nozzle Clogging.") ➔P.597
Because the printer was left without ink
tanks installed for some time, ink has
become clogged in the ink supply sys-
tem.
After the ink tanks have been installed for 24 hours, run Head Cleaning B from the Control
Panel.
(See "Cleaning the Printhead.") ➔P.598
Paper is jammed inside the Top Cover. Follow the steps below to remove the jammed piece of paper inside the Top Cover.
1.
Open the Top Cover and make sure the Carriage is not over the Platen.
2.
Remove any scraps of paper inside the Top Cover.
(See "Clearing Jammed Roll Paper.") ➔P.627
(See "Clearing a Jammed Sheet.") ➔P.630
3.
Close the Top Cover.
The ink was not dry when paper was
cut.
Specify a longer drying period in the Control Panel menu, in Paper Details > Roll DryingTime.
(See "Menu Settings.") ➔P.457
Printing may be faint if Print Quality in
Advanced Settings in the printer driv-
er is set to Standard or Fast.
In Advanced Settings of the printer driver, choose Highest or High in Print Quality.
Printing in Fast or Standard mode is faster and consumes less ink than in Highest or High
modes, but the printing quality is lower.
(See "Giving Priority to Particular Graphic Elements and Colors for Printing.") ➔P.58
You are printing on paper that tends to
generate dust when cut.
In the Control Panel menu, set CutDustReduct. in Paper Details to On.
(See "Reducing Dust from Cutting Rolls.") ➔P.393
Paper rubs against the Printhead
Paper rubs against the Printhead
Cause Corrective Action
The type of paper specified in the
printer driver does not match the type
loaded in the printer.
Load paper of the same type as you have specified in the printer driver.
(See "Loading Rolls in the Printer.") ➔P.375
(See "Loading Sheets in the Printer.") ➔P.394
iPF785
Printing is faint
User's Guide
Troubleshooting Problems with the printing quality
639
Cause Corrective Action
The type of paper specified in the
printer driver does not match the type
loaded in the printer.
Make sure the same type of paper is specified in the printer driver as you have loaded in the
printer.
1.
Press the Stop button and stop printing.
2.
Change the type of paper in the printer driver and try printing again.
Paper has been loaded incorrectly,
causing it to wrinkle.
Reload the paper.
(See "Loading Rolls in the Printer.") ➔P.375
(See "Loading Sheets in the Printer.") ➔P.394
The Printhead is set too low in the
Control Panel menu.
In the Control Panel menu, set Head Height to Automatic.
(See "Troubleshooting Paper Abrasion and Blurry Images.") ➔P.578
You are printing on heavyweight paper
or paper that curls or wrinkles easily
after absorbing ink.
For paper-based media such as Heavyweight Coated Paper, set the VacuumStrngth to
Strong or Strongest in the Control Panel menu. If the paper still rubs against the printhead,
set the Head Height in the Control Panel menu to a higher value than the current setting.
(See "Adjusting the Vacuum Strength.") ➔P.585
(See "Troubleshooting Paper Abrasion and Blurry Images.") ➔P.578
For film-based media such as Tracing Paper, set the VacuumStrngth to Standard, Strong or
Strongest in the Control Panel menu. If the paper still rubs against the printhead, set the Head
Height in the Control Panel menu to a higher value than the current setting.
(See "Adjusting the Vacuum Strength.") ➔P.585
(See "Troubleshooting Paper Abrasion and Blurry Images.") ➔P.578
When printing on paper 0.1 mm (0.004 in) thick or less, choose a VacuumStrngth setting of
Weakest in the Control Panel menu. If rubbing still occurs, in the Control Panel menu, use a
higher Head Height setting.
(See "Adjusting the Vacuum Strength.") ➔P.585
(See "Troubleshooting Paper Abrasion and Blurry Images.") ➔P.578
When you have loaded paper, the pa-
per you have loaded does not match
the type selected on the Control Panel.
Be sure to select the correct type of paper in the Control Panel menu when loading paper.
(See "Loading Rolls in the Printer.") ➔P.375
(See "Loading Sheets in the Printer.") ➔P.394
The edges of the paper are dirty
The edges of the paper are dirty
Cause Corrective Action
The Platen has become dirty after bor-
derless printing or printing on small pa-
per.
Open the Top Cover and clean the Platen.
(See "Cleaning Inside the Top Cover.") ➔P.612
The type of paper as specified on the
printer does not match the type specified
in the printer driver.
Make sure the same type of paper is specified on the printer as in the printer driver.
(See "Changing the Type of Paper.") ➔P.378
Make sure the same paper type is specified in the printer driver as on the printer.
1.
Press the Stop button and stop printing.
2.
Change the type of paper in the printer driver and try printing again.
The paper is wrinkled or warped. Straighten out the wrinkles or curls and reload the paper. Do not use paper that has been
printed on previously.
(See "Loading Rolls in the Printer.") ➔P.375
(See "Loading Sheets in the Printer.") ➔P.394
A cut line is printed because CutDus-
tReduct. is On in the Control Panel
menu to reduce cutting dust.
If this function is not needed, set CutDustReduct. to Off in the Control Panel menu.
(See "Menu Settings.") ➔P.457
The Printhead is set too low in the Con-
trol Panel menu.
In the Control Panel menu, set Head Height to Automatic.
(See "Troubleshooting Paper Abrasion and Blurry Images.") ➔P.578
You are printing on heavyweight paper
or paper that curls or wrinkles easily af-
ter absorbing ink.
For paper-based media such as Heavyweight Coated Paper, set the VacuumStrngth to
Strong or Strongest in the Control Panel menu. If the paper still rubs against the printhead,
set the Head Height in the Control Panel menu to a higher value than the current setting.
The edges of the paper are dirty
iPF785
User's Guide
Troubleshooting Problems with the printing quality
640
Cause Corrective Action
You are printing on heavyweight paper
or paper that curls or wrinkles easily af-
ter absorbing ink.
(See "Adjusting the Vacuum Strength.") ➔P.585
(See "Troubleshooting Paper Abrasion and Blurry Images.") ➔P.578
For film-based media such as Tracing Paper, set the VacuumStrngth to Standard, Strong
or Strongest in the Control Panel menu. If the paper still rubs against the printhead, set the
Head Height in the Control Panel menu to a higher value than the current setting.
(See "Adjusting the Vacuum Strength.") ➔P.585
(See "Troubleshooting Paper Abrasion and Blurry Images.") ➔P.578
The Ejection Guide is soiled. Clean the Ejection Guide.
(See "Cleaning the Printer Exterior.") ➔P.612
The surface of the paper is dirty
The surface of the paper is dirty
Cause Corrective Action
The Paper Retainer is soiled. Clean the Paper Retainer.
(See "Cleaning Inside the Top Cover.") ➔P.612
You are using a paper that does
not dry easily.
In the Control Panel menu, set Roll DryingTime to at least 1 min.
(See "Menu Settings.") ➔P.457
When paper that does not dry easily is used for printing, it may curl during printing and touch the
Output Tray.
In this case, in the Control Panel menu, complete the settings for Dry time and Area in Scan Wait
Time.
However, note that printing will now take longer.
(See "Menu Settings.") ➔P.457
The back side of the paper is dirty
The back side of the paper is dirty
Cause Corrective Action
The Platen has become dirty after borderless print-
ing or printing on small paper.
Open the Top Cover and clean the Platen.
(See "Cleaning Inside the Top Cover.") ➔P.612
The Platen has become soiled because you have
set Width Detection to Off in the Control Panel
menu.
Set Width Detection to On in the Control Panel menu, and then open the Top
Cover and clean the Platen.
(See "Cleaning Inside the Top Cover.") ➔P.612
Open the Top Cover and clean the Platen. After this, manually advance the roll
onto the Platen before printing.
(See "Cleaning Inside the Top Cover.") ➔P.612
(See "Feeding Roll Paper Manually.") ➔P.384
The Paper Retainer is soiled. Clean the Paper Retainer.
(See "Cleaning Inside the Top Cover.") ➔P.612
Printed colors are inaccurate
Printed colors are inaccurate
Cause Corrective Action
Color adjustment has not been activated in the Ad-
vanced Settings of the printer driver.
In the Advanced Settings of the printer driver, access Color Settings in Color
Mode to adjust colors.
(See "Main Sheet (Windows).") ➔P.167
(See "Main Pane (Mac OS).") ➔P.283
Colors have not been adjusted on the computer or
monitor.
Refer to the computer and monitor documentation to adjust the colors.
Adjust the settings of the color management software, referring to the software
documentation as needed.
The Printhead nozzles are clogged. Print a test pattern to check the nozzles and see if they are clogged.
(See "Checking for Nozzle Clogging.") ➔P.597
Application Color Matching Priority is set to Off in
the Windows printer driver.
Click Special Settings in the Layout sheet of the printer driver, and set Applica-
tion Color Matching Priority to On in the dialog box that is displayed.
iPF785
The surface of the paper is dirty
User's Guide
Troubleshooting Problems with the printing quality
641
Cause Corrective Action
Application Color Matching Priority is set to Off in
the Windows printer driver.
(See "Layout Sheet (Windows).") ➔P.182
Color may change slightly even on the same model
of printer if you use a different version of the firmware
or printer driver, or when you print under different set-
tings or in a different printing environment.
Follow these steps to prepare the printing environment.
1.
Use the same version of firmware or printer driver.
2.
Specify the same value for all settings items.
Banding in different colors occurs
Banding in different colors occurs
Cause Corrective Action
The paper feed amount is out of adjust-
ment.
Adjust the feed amount.
(See "Adjusting the Feed Amount.") ➔P.579
Printing does not proceed smoothly be-
cause print jobs are interrupted during
transmission.
Exit other applications and cancel other print jobs.
In the Control Panel menu, Adj. Priority
is set to Print Length.
Setting Adj. Priority to Print Quality in the Control Panel menu and adjusting the feed
amount may improve results.
(See "Adjusting the Feed Amount.") ➔P.579
The Printhead is out of alignment. Adjust the Printhead alignment.
(See "Automatic Adjustment to Straighten Lines and Colors.") ➔P.572
The Printhead nozzles are clogged. Print a test pattern to check the nozzles and see if they are clogged.
(See "Checking for Nozzle Clogging.") ➔P.597
Streaks may occur if you set the Print
Quality too low.
Choose a higher level of Print Quality in the Advanced Settings of the printer driver and
try printing again.
Printing in Fast or Standard mode is faster and consumes less ink than in Highest or High
modes, but the printing quality is lower.
(See "Giving Priority to Particular Graphic Elements and Colors for Printing.") ➔P.58
The type of paper specified in the printer
driver does not match the type loaded in
the printer.
Load paper of the same type as you have specified in the printer driver.
(See "Loading Rolls in the Printer.") ➔P.375
(See "Loading Sheets in the Printer.") ➔P.394
Make sure the same type of paper is specified in the printer driver as you have loaded in the
printer.
1.
Press the Stop button and stop printing.
2.
Change the type of paper in the printer driver and try printing again.
Colors in printed images are uneven
Colors in printed images are uneven
Cause Corrective Action
Line Drawing/Text is selected when
printing images in many solid colors.
In Print Priority in the Advanced Settings of the printer driver, choose Image.
You are printing on paper that curls easi-
ly.
Printed colors may appear uneven on the leading edge of paper that is susceptible to curling.
Select a stronger level in VacuumStrngth in the Control Panel menu to increase suction
against the paper, or specify a leading margin of 20 mm (0.79 in) or more.
(See "Adjusting the Vacuum Strength.") ➔P.585
Printed colors may be uneven if you set
the Print Quality too low.
Choose a higher level of Print Quality in the Advanced Settings of the printer driver.
Printing in Fast or Standard mode is faster and consumes less ink than in Highest or High
modes, but the printing quality is lower.
(See "Giving Priority to Particular Graphic Elements and Colors for Printing.") ➔P.58
Color may be uneven between dark and
light image areas.
Select Unidirectional Printing in the Advanced Settings of the printer driver.
Banding in dierent colors occurs
iPF785
User's Guide
Troubleshooting Problems with the printing quality
642
Cause Corrective Action
When borderless printing is used, the
edge of the paper is cut during printing.
Thus, ink density may be slightly uneven
at the leading edges.
Specify No in Auto Cut in the printer driver before printing. In this case, the paper can be
printed without borders on the left and right sides only. Cut the printed document ejected from
the printer, and then use scissors or a cutting tool to cut away the edges on the top and bot-
tom.
Choose a higher level of Print Quality in the Advanced Settings of the printer driver.
(See "Giving Priority to Particular Graphic Elements and Colors for Printing.") ➔P.58
The Printhead is out of alignment. Adjust the Printhead alignment.
(See "Automatic Adjustment to Straighten Lines and Colors.") ➔P.572
Allowing printed documents to dry on top
of each other may cause uneven colors.
To avoid uneven colors, we recommend drying each sheet separately.
Density may be uneven if you use Glos-
sy Paper or Coated Paper.
In Advanced Settings of the printer driver, choose Highest or High in Print Quality.
The type of paper specified in the printer
driver does not match the type loaded in
the printer.
Load paper of the same type as you have specified in the printer driver.
(See "Loading Rolls in the Printer.") ➔P.375
(See "Loading Sheets in the Printer.") ➔P.394
Make sure the same type of paper is specified in the printer driver as you have loaded in the
printer.
1.
Press the Stop button and stop printing.
2.
Change the type of paper in the printer driver and try printing again.
Scan Wait Time > Area in the Control
Panel menu is set to Leading edge.
When Scan Wait Time > Area is set to Leading edge, colors may be uneven 110–140 mm
from the leading edge. (The position varies depending on the Print Quality setting.)
In this case, select Scan Wait Time > Area > Entire area.
However, note that printing will now take longer.
(See "Menu Settings.") ➔P.457
Image edges are blurred or white banding occurs
Image edges are blurred or white banding occurs
Cause Corrective Action
The Platen suction is too strong. In the Control Panel menu, reduce the level of VacuumStrngth.
(See "Adjusting the Vacuum Strength.") ➔P.585
Incorrect Printhead alignment value. In the Control Panel menu, set Head Height to a lower height.
(See "Troubleshooting Paper Abrasion and Blurry Images.") ➔P.578
The type of paper specified in the printer
driver does not match the type loaded in
the printer.
Load paper of the same type as you have specified in the printer driver.
(See "Loading Rolls in the Printer.") ➔P.375
(See "Loading Sheets in the Printer.") ➔P.394
Make sure the same type of paper is specified in the printer driver as you have loaded in the
printer.
1.
Press the Stop button and stop printing.
2.
Change the type of paper in the printer driver and try printing again.
The contrast becomes uneven during printing
The contrast becomes uneven during printing
Cause Corrective Action
The paper feed amount is out of adjustment. Adjust the feed amount.
(See "Adjusting the Feed Amount.") ➔P.579
The type of paper specified in the printer driver
does not match the type loaded in the printer.
Load paper of the same type as you have specified in the printer driver.
(See "Loading Rolls in the Printer.") ➔P.375
(See "Loading Sheets in the Printer.") ➔P.394
Make sure the same type of paper is specified in the printer driver as you have loaded
in the printer.
iPF785
Image edges are blurred or white banding occurs
User's Guide
Troubleshooting Problems with the printing quality
643
Cause Corrective Action
The type of paper specified in the printer driver
does not match the type loaded in the printer.
1.
Press the Stop button and stop printing.
2.
Change the type of paper in the printer driver and try printing again.
The length of printed images is inaccurate in the feeding direction
The length of printed images is inaccurate in the feeding direction
Cause Corrective Action
In the Control Panel menu, Adj. Priority is
set to Print Quality.
Set Adj. Priority to Print Length in the Control Panel menu, and then execute Adjust
Length.
(See "Adjusting the Feed Amount.") ➔P.579
The type of paper specified in the printer
driver does not match the type loaded in the
printer.
Load paper of the same type as you have specified in the printer driver.
(See "Loading Rolls in the Printer.") ➔P.375
(See "Loading Sheets in the Printer.") ➔P.394
Make sure the same type of paper is specified in the printer driver as you have loaded in
the printer.
1.
Press the Stop button and stop printing.
2.
Change the type of paper in the printer driver and try printing again.
Images are printed crooked
Images are printed crooked
Cause Corrective Action
In the Control Panel menu, Skew Check Lv. is set to Loose or Off. In the Control Panel menu, set Skew Check Lv. to Standard.
In the Control Panel menu, Width Detection is set to Off. Set Width Detection to On in the Control Panel menu.
Documents are printed in monochrome
Documents are printed in monochrome
Cause Corrective Action
In the Advanced Settings of the printer driver, Mono-
chrome, Monochrome (BK ink), or Monochrome
Bitmap is specified in Color Mode.
In the Advanced Settings of the printer driver, specify Color in Color Mode
and try printing again.
The Printhead nozzles are clogged. Print a test pattern to check the color ink nozzles and see if they are clogged.
(See "Checking for Nozzle Clogging.") ➔P.597
Line thickness is not uniform
Line thickness is not uniform
Cause Corrective Action
In the Special Settings dialog box of
the Windows printer driver, Fast Graph-
ic Process is set to On.
Access the printer driver Properties dialog box from Print in the File menu of the source ap-
plication, and follow these steps to print.
1.
Clear the option Open Preview When Print Job Starts on the Main sheet.
2.
Clear the option Page Layout on the Layout sheet.
3.
Click the Special Settings button in the Layout sheet, open the Special Settings dialog
box, and set Fast Graphic Process to Off.
The type of paper specified in the print-
er driver does not match the type loa-
ded in the printer.
Load paper of the same type as you have specified in the printer driver.
(See "Loading Rolls in the Printer.") ➔P.375
(See "Loading Sheets in the Printer.") ➔P.394
Make sure the same type of paper is specified in the printer driver as you have loaded in the
printer.
1.
Press the Stop button and stop printing.
2.
Change the type of paper in the printer driver and try printing again.
The length of printed images is inaccurate in the feeding direction
iPF785
User's Guide
Troubleshooting Problems with the printing quality
644
Lines are misaligned
Lines are misaligned
Cause Corrective Action
The Printhead alignment is not adjusted. Adjust the Printhead alignment.
(See "Automatic Adjustment to Straighten Lines and Colors.") ➔P.572
(See "Manual Adjustment to Straighten Lines and Colors.") ➔P.573
(See "Adjusting Line Misalignment.") ➔P.575
The type of paper specified in the printer
driver does not match the type loaded in
the printer.
Load paper of the same type as you have specified in the printer driver.
(See "Loading Rolls in the Printer.") ➔P.375
(See "Loading Sheets in the Printer.") ➔P.394
Make sure the same type of paper is specified in the printer driver as you have loaded in the
printer.
1.
Press the Stop button and stop printing.
2.
Change the type of paper in the printer driver and try printing again.
iPF785
Lines are misaligned
User's Guide
Troubleshooting Problems with the printing quality
645
Cannot print over a network
Cannot print over a network
Cannot connect the printer to the network ................................................................................................................ 646
Cannot print over a TCP/IP network ..............................................................................................................................646
Cannot print over a Bonjour network ............................................................................................................................ 646
Cannot connect the printer to the network
Cannot connect the printer to the network
Cause Corrective Action
The Ethernet cable is
not connected cor-
rectly to the printer's
Ethernet port.
1.
Make sure the printer is connected to the network with the correct Ethernet cable, and then turn the printer
on. For instructions on connecting the cable, refer to the Setup Guide.
2.
Make sure the Link indicator is lit.
The bottom indicator is green if the printer is connected via 1000Base-T, while the top indicator is orange if
connected via 100Base-TX and the top indicator is green if connected via 10Base-T.
If the Link indicator is not lit, check the following points.
•
Make sure the connection point is on.
•
Make sure the end of the Ethernet cable is connected correctly.
Insert the Ethernet cable until it clicks and locks in place.
•
Make sure there is no problem with the Ethernet cable.
If there is any problem, replace the Ethernet cable.
•
Check the communication mode with the connection point.
Although the printer normally detects the communication mode and transmission rate of the communica-
tion point automatically (in auto negotiation mode), sometimes the communication point settings cannot
be detected. In this case, configure the connection method manually, specifying the communication mode
in use.
(See "Configuring the Communication Mode Manually.") ➔P.504
Cannot print over a TCP/IP network
Cannot print over a TCP/IP network
Cause Corrective Action
The printer's IP address is not configured cor-
rectly.
Make sure the printer's IP address is configured correctly.
(See "Configuring the IP Address Using imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility.") ➔P.506
(See "Configuring the IP Address Using the Printer Control Panel.") ➔P.494
The printer's TCP/IP network settings are not
configured correctly.
Make sure the printer's TCP/IP network settings are configured correctly.
(See "Configuring the Printer's TCP/IP Network Settings With RemoteUI.") ➔P.498
The computer you are trying to print from is not
configured correctly.
Make sure the computer's TCP/IP network settings are configured correctly.
(See "Configuring the Printer Driver Destination (Windows).") ➔P.497
(See "Configuring the Destination in TCP/IP Networks (Mac OS).") ➔P.502
Cannot print over a Bonjour network
Cannot print over a Bonjour network
Cause Corrective Action
The computer you are trying to
print from is not configured correct-
ly.
Make sure the computer is configured correctly.
(See "Configuring the Destination for Bonjour Network (Mac OS).") ➔P.502
The computer and printer are not
on the same network.
Due to the nature of Bonjour, you cannot print if the printer is on another network behind a router.
Make sure the computer and printer are on the same network. For information about network set-
tings, ask your network administrator.
Cannot connect the printer to the network
iPF785
User's Guide
Troubleshooting Cannot print over a network
646
Installation problems
Installation problems
The computer does not recognize the printer .......................................................................................................... 647
Removing Installed Printer Drivers ................................................................................................................................. 647
The computer does not recognize the printer
The computer does not recognize the printer
Cause Corrective Action
In the Control Panel menu, Use USB or Use Ethernet is set to Off. Set Use USB or Use Ethernet to On.
(See "Menu Settings.") ➔P.457
Removing Installed Printer Drivers
Removing Installed Printer Drivers
Follow these steps to remove installed printer drivers and utilities.
Removing printer drivers (Windows)
Remove the printer driver as follows.
Note
•The following procedure is for Windows 7. The method of removing printer drivers varies depending on the version of
Windows.
1
From the Windows start menu, select All Programs > Canon Printer Uninstaller > imagePROGRAF Printer
Driver Uninstaller to display the Delete Printer window.
2
Select the printer in the list and click Delete.
3
Click Yes after the Warning message is displayed.
4
Make sure that the printer has been removed from the list, and then click Exit.
Removing imagePROGRAF Status Monitor (Windows)
Remove imagePROGRAF Status Monitor as follows.
Note
•The following procedure is for Windows 7. The method of removing printer drivers varies depending on the version of
Windows.
1
Select Control Panel from the start menu.
2
Select Uninstall a program.
Note
•If the User Account Control dialog box is displayed, click Yes.
3
Select imagePROGRAF Status Monitor, and then click the Uninstall button.
Removing imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility (Windows)
Remove imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility as follows.
Note
•The following procedure is for Windows 7. The method of removing printer drivers varies depending on the version of
Windows.
iPF785
The computer does not recognize the printer
User's Guide
Troubleshooting Installation problems
647
1
From the Windows start menu, select All Programs > imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility > Uninstaller
(imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility) to start the wizard.
2
In the wizard window, click Delete, and then click Next.
3
Follow the instructions on the screen to remove imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility.
Removing Installed Printer Drivers
iPF785
User's Guide
Troubleshooting Installation problems
648
HP-GL/2 problems
HP-GL/2 problems
With HP-GL/2, printing is misaligned ............................................................................................................................. 649
Lines or images are missing in printed HP-GL/2 jobs. ........................................................................................... 649
Lines are printed too thick or thin in HP-GL/2 print jobs ..................................................................................... 649
HP-GL/2 jobs are printed in monochrome (or color) ............................................................................................. 650
Printed colors of lines are inaccurate during HP-GL/2 printing ........................................................................ 650
HP-GL/2 jobs are printed 6 mm larger than specied .......................................................................................... 650
HP-GL/2 jobs are printed at maximum size, even if a standard size is specied ...................................... 650
HP-GL/2 printing takes a long time ................................................................................................................................ 650
The printer stops when printing a HP-GL/2 job (the carriage stops moving) ............................................. 650
With HP-GL/2, printing is misaligned
With HP-GL/2, printing is misaligned
Cause Corrective Action
The plotter origin is incorrect. Check the printing commands.
Set Detect img size to Command priority or Detected size in the Control Pan-
el menu.
The Margin setting in the Control Panel menu is in-
correct.
Adjust the Margin setting values in the Control Panel menu.
Lines or images are missing in printed HP-GL/2 jobs.
Lines or images are missing in printed HP-GL/2 jobs.
Cause Corrective Action
The memory is full. Check the size of the data in the print job.
An HP-GL/2 command not supported by this printer was
received.
Check the print job and settings.
The printer has received print data that includes HP RTL
commands when Auto Rotate is On in the Control Panel
menu.
In the Control Panel, set Auto Rotate to Off and print again.
(See "Menu Settings.") ➔P.457
The plotter origin is incorrect. Set Detect img size to Command priority or Detected size in the Control
Panel menu.
(See "Menu Settings.") ➔P.457
Oversize in the Control Panel menu is set to Off. Set Oversize to On in the Control Panel menu.
(See "Menu Settings.") ➔P.457
Lines are printed too thick or thin in HP-GL/2 print jobs
Lines are printed too thick or thin in HP-GL/2 print jobs
Cause Corrective Action
The Width setting in the Control Panel menu
is incorrect.
Change the Width setting configured in Pen no. of the Palette A or Palette B selected
in the Control Panel menu.
(See "Menu Settings.") ➔P.457
ThickenFineLines in the Control Panel menu
is set to Off.
If fine lines are printed faintly, setting ThickenFineLines to On will print the lines more
distinctly.
(See "Menu Settings.") ➔P.457
The Ln wdth correct setting in the Control
Panel menu is incorrect.
Change the Ln wdth correct setting in the Control Panel menu.
(See "Menu Settings.") ➔P.457
iPF785
With HP-GL/2, printing is misaligned
User's Guide
Troubleshooting HP-GL/2 problems
649
HP-GL/2 jobs are printed in monochrome (or color)
HP-GL/2 jobs are printed in monochrome (or color)
Cause Corrective Action
The Color Mode setting in the
Control Panel menu is incorrect.
Check the Color Mode setting in the Control Panel menu.
(See "Menu Settings.") ➔P.457
However, for optimal Printhead performance, the printer consumes trace amounts of color ink even
when Monochrome is selected as Color Mode.
Printed colors of lines are inaccurate during HP-GL/2 printing
Printed colors of lines are inaccurate during HP-GL/2 printing
Cause Corrective Action
AdjustFaintLines is On in the Con-
trol Panel menu.
Setting AdjustFaintLines to Off in the Control Panel menu may help produce the expected re-
sults. However, lines in some colors may appear broken.
HP-GL/2 jobs are printed 6 mm larger than specified
HP-GL/2 jobs are printed 6 mm larger than specified
Cause Corrective Action
The page size of the HP-GL/2 print job, as created in the source application, is incor-
rect.
In the Control Panel menu, set Oversize to Off.
(See "Menu Settings.") ➔P.457
HP-GL/2 jobs are printed at maximum size, even if a standard size is specified
HP-GL/2 jobs are printed at maximum size, even if a standard size is specified
Cause Corrective Action
The page size of the HP-GL/2 print job, as created in the
source application, is incorrect.
Set Detect img size to Command priority or Detected size in the Con-
trol Panel menu.
(See "Menu Settings.") ➔P.457
Set Conserve Paper to On in the Control Panel menu.
(See "Menu Settings.") ➔P.457
HP-GL/2 printing takes a long time
HP-GL/2 printing takes a long time
Cause Corrective Action
Large print jobs with a lot of data take longer to print. Please wait a while until printing is finished.
A job was printed when Input Resolution in the Control
Panel menu was set to 600dpi.
In the Control Panel menu, set Input Resolution to 300dpi and print
again.
(See "Menu Settings.") ➔P.457
The printer stops when printing a HP-GL/2 job (the carriage stops moving)
The printer stops when printing a HP-GL/2 job (the carriage stops moving)
Cause Corrective Action
The printer is analyzing the print job. Please wait a while until printing is finished.
A job was printed when Input Resolution in the Control
Panel menu was set to 600dpi.
In the Control Panel menu, set Input Resolution to 300dpi and print again.
(See "Menu Settings.") ➔P.457
HP-GL/2 jobs are printed in monochrome (or color)
iPF785
User's Guide
Troubleshooting HP-GL/2 problems
650
Other problems
Other problems
The Ink Tank Cover has become detached from the printer .............................................................................. 651
The printer does not go on ................................................................................................................................................ 651
The printer takes time to start up ...................................................................................................................................651
If the Printer Makes a Strange Sound ...........................................................................................................................652
Messages advising to check the maintenance cartridge are not cleared ..................................................... 652
The printer consumes a lot of ink ................................................................................................................................... 652
Ink Level Detection ................................................................................................................................................................ 652
The Ink Tank Cover has become detached from the printer
The Ink Tank Cover has become detached from the printer
Cause Corrective Action
The Ink Tank Cover became detached from the printer because too much
force was applied to the Ink Tank Cover.
Attach the Ink Tank Cover to the printer.
(See "Attach the Ink Tank Cover to the printer.") ➔P.595
The printer does not go on
The printer does not go on
Cause Corrective Action
The printer is unplugged. Plug the power cord into the outlet, and then turn on the printer.
The specified voltage is not supplied. Check the voltage of the outlet and breaker.
(See "Specifications.") ➔P.680
The printer takes time to start up
The printer takes time to start up
Cause Corrective Action
The printer may have shut down incorrectly last time. This may happen
after power outages or if the printer is unplugged before it is turned off.
In this case, the next time power is restored, the printer's hard disk is
checked, and startup may take some time.
Please wait a while, because it may take several minutes to
finish checking the hard disk.
If an error message is displayed after the hard disk check, fol-
low the instructions indicated to resolve the problem.
iPF785
The Ink Tank Cover has become detached from the printer
User's Guide
Troubleshooting Other problems
651
If the Printer Makes a Strange Sound
If the Printer Makes a Strange Sound
Cause Corrective Action
The printer
makes a sound
during opera-
tion.
The following sounds do not indicate a problem with the printer.
•
There is a sound of suction from the Platen
To prevent paper from rising, paper is held against the Platen by suction from Vacuum holes under it.
•
There is a sound when a different size of paper is used and when the Carriage goes from side to side
When paper of a different size is used, a valve is automatically activated to switch the area for paper suction, which
may make a sound. This mechanism prevents suction from Vacuum holes where there is no paper.
In addition, ink is ejected in sync with the movement of the Carriage back and forth to ensure optimal ink flow. At
this time, the valve automatically switches the area for paper suction, which may make a sound.
•
Roll paper makes a fluttering sound during printing
There may be a fluttering sound when large paper is advanced.
•
If you suddenly hear the tone for cleaning operations
At regular intervals, for printer maintenance, cleaning operations will begin automatically, even if the printer is in
Sleep mode.
•
If you suddenly hear the tone for ink agitation
At regular intervals, to ensure optimal printing quality, the ink is agitated automatically, even if the printer is in Sleep
mode.
The ink is also agitated automatically under the following conditions. Note that other operations are not possible
while "Agitating..." is displayed on the control panel.
•
After the printer is turned on
In other cases, contact your Canon dealer.
Messages advising to check the maintenance cartridge are not cleared
Messages advising to check the maintenance cartridge are not cleared
Cause Corrective Action
The printer has not detected the new Maintenance
Cartridge that was used to replace the old one.
Remove the new Maintenance Cartridge you have just installed and insert it again
firmly.
(See "Replacing the Maintenance Cartridge.") ➔P.606
The printer consumes a lot of ink
The printer consumes a lot of ink
Cause Corrective Action
Many full-page color images are
printed.
In print jobs such as photos, images are filled with color. This consumes a lot of ink. This does not
indicate a problem with the printer.
Head Cleaning B in the Control
Panel menu is executed frequent-
ly.
Head Cleaning B in the Control Panel menu consumes a lot of ink. This does not indicate a prob-
lem with the printer. Unless the printer has been moved or stored for a long period or you are trou-
bleshooting Printhead problems, we recommend not performing Head Cleaning B, to the extent
possible.
You have just finished initial instal-
lation, when more ink is con-
sumed to fill the system.
After initial installation or at the first-time use after transfer, ink flows into the system between the
Ink Tank and Printhead.
Although the amount of remaining ink may drop as a result, it does not indicate a problem.
The Printhead nozzles are clog-
ged.
Check for nozzle clogging.
(See "Checking for Nozzle Clogging.") ➔P.597
Ink Level Detection
Ink Level Detection
Ink level detection will be deactivated if you load ink tanks once emptied.
Ink level detection
Ink tanks specified for this printer feature an ink level detection function to prevent the ink from running out during print-
ing, which prevents printer damage. (See "Ink Tanks.") ➔P.588
If the Printer Makes a Strange Sound
iPF785
User's Guide
Troubleshooting Other problems
652
This function will not work correctly if you use refill ink tanks. As a result, printing stops. Thus, before using refill ink
tanks, you must cancel the ink level detection.
Printing with the ink level detection canceled may lead to printer damage and printing problems. Canon Inc. is not liable
for any damage that may occur as a result of refilling ink.
Important
•After ink level detection has been released, this function cannot be reactivated for currently loaded Ink Tank. To use
ink level detection again, replace the Ink Tank with new ones specified for use with the printer.
•Repeatedly removing and inserting an Ink Tank may damage the connection between the Ink Tank and the printer,
which may cause ink leakage from the Ink Tank and damage the printer.
Releasing ink level detection
1
On the Display Screen, a message indicates that the ink level cannot be
detected. After checking the message, press the ▶ button.
2
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Information, and then press the OK button.
3
A confirmation message is shown on the Display Screen about releasing
ink level detection. After checking the message, press the ▶ button.
4
After checking the message, press the ▶ button.
5
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Yes, and then press the OK button.
iPF785
Ink Level Detection
User's Guide
Troubleshooting Other problems
653
6
Check the message and press the ▶ button.
7
Check the message and press the ▶ button.
8
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Yes, and then press the OK button.
9
A confirmation message about updating ink information is shown on the
Display Screen. After checking the message, press the ▶ button.
10
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Yes, and then press the OK button.
Ink level detection is now released.
Ink Level Detection
iPF785
User's Guide
Troubleshooting Other problems
654
iPF785
User's Guide
Basic Printing Workow 15
Enhanced Printing Options 31
Windows Software 157
Mac OS Software 277
Handling and Use of Paper 361
Control Panel 435
Printer Parts 475
Network Setting 489
Print Job Management 509
Adjustments for Better Print Quality 571
Maintenance and Consumables 587
Troubleshooting 625
Error Message
Error Messages ....................................................................................... 656
Messages regarding paper ...................................................................... 658
Messages regarding ink .......................................................................... 667
Messages regarding printing or adjustment ............................................ 669
Messages regarding printheads .............................................................. 670
Messages regarding the maintenance cartridge ..................................... 672
Messages regarding the hard disk .......................................................... 673
Messages regarding HP-GL/2 ................................................................. 675
Other Messages ...................................................................................... 676
Specications 679
Appendix 683
imagePROGRAF
Error Message
655
Error Messages
Error Messages
Borderless printng not possible. ...................................................................................................................................... 665
Cannot adjust paper feed. ..................................................................................................................................................669
Cannot adjust printhead. .....................................................................................................................................................670
Cannot detect ink level correctly. Close tank cover. ............................................................................................... 667
Cannot detect papr ............................................................................................................................................................... 664
Cannot recognize print head. ............................................................................................................................................ 670
Check if ink tank is set, and its color and direction. ............................................................................................... 668
Check printed document. ................................................................................................................................................... 669
Close Ink Tank Cover ............................................................................................................................................................ 668
Do not pull out ink tank. ...................................................................................................................................................... 668
End of paper feed. ................................................................................................................................................................. 665
ERROR Exxx-xxxx (x represents a letter or number) .............................................................................................. 676
Error in cutter position. ........................................................................................................................................................677
Execute printhead cleaning. ............................................................................................................................................... 671
File read error. ..........................................................................................................................................................................673
GARO Wxxxx (x represents a number) ......................................................................................................................... 676
GL2: W0502 The parameter is out of range. ............................................................................................................. 675
GL2: W0504 This command is not supported. ..........................................................................................................675
GL2: Wxxxx The memory is full. (xxxx is 0501, 0903, or 0904) ........................................................................ 675
Hard disk error. ....................................................................................................................................................................... 673
Hardware error. xxxxxxxx-xxxx (x represents a letter or number) .................................................................... 676
Ink insucient. ......................................................................................................................................................................... 667
Ink tank is empty. ................................................................................................................................................................... 668
Insert the maintenance cartridge. ................................................................................................................................... 672
Insucient paper for job .....................................................................................................................................................661
Leading edge detection error. ...........................................................................................................................................664
Mail box full. Delete unwanted data ............................................................................................................................... 673
Mail box full. Now printing without saving data. ........................................................................................................673
Mail box nearly full. ................................................................................................................................................................ 673
Maint. cart. The level is low ................................................................................................................................................ 672
Maintenance cartridge full. .................................................................................................................................................672
Maintenance cartridge problem. ......................................................................................................................................672
Maximum jobs stored. .......................................................................................................................................................... 673
MediaType Mismatch ............................................................................................................................................................ 658
Multi-sensor error .................................................................................................................................................................. 677
No ink left. ................................................................................................................................................................................. 667
No Maintenance Cartridge capacity. ..............................................................................................................................672
Not much ink is left. .............................................................................................................................................................. 668
Paper cutting failed. .............................................................................................................................................................. 664
Paper is crooked. .................................................................................................................................................................... 663
Paper jam ................................................................................................................................................................................... 663
Paper mismatch ...................................................................................................................................................................... 658
Paper not aligned with right guide. ................................................................................................................................. 664
Paper position not suitable for borderless printing. ............................................................................................... 666
Paper size not detected. ......................................................................................................................................................660
PaprWidth Mismatch .............................................................................................................................................................660
iPF785
User's Guide
Error Message Error Messages
656
Parts replacement time has passed. .............................................................................................................................. 677
Prepare for parts replacement. ........................................................................................................................................677
Printhead error ........................................................................................................................................................................ 670
Regular printing is selected, but a roll is loaded. ......................................................................................................662
Rel lever is in wrong position. ........................................................................................................................................... 665
Remaining level of the ink cannot be correctly detected. Check ink tank. ................................................... 667
Roll paper is not securely in contact with roll holder. ............................................................................................. 666
Roll printing is selected, but sheets are loaded. ....................................................................................................... 662
Roll printing is selected. .......................................................................................................................................................661
Sheet printing is selected. .................................................................................................................................................. 662
The following ink tanks cannot be recognized. ......................................................................................................... 668
The mail box is full. ................................................................................................................................................................ 673
The paper is too small. ......................................................................................................................................................... 659
The paper is too small. ......................................................................................................................................................... 659
The roll is empty. .................................................................................................................................................................... 662
This paper cannot be used. ............................................................................................................................................... 661
This type of paper is not compatible with HP-GL/2. ...............................................................................................675
Top cover is open. .................................................................................................................................................................. 677
Unknown le. ............................................................................................................................................................................ 677
Wrong ink tank. ....................................................................................................................................................................... 668
Wrong maintenance cartridge. ......................................................................................................................................... 672
Wrong printhead. .................................................................................................................................................................... 670
iPF785
User's Guide
Error Message Error Messages
657
Messages regarding paper
Messages regarding paper
Paper mismatch ...................................................................................................................................................................... 658
MediaType Mismatch ............................................................................................................................................................ 658
The paper is too small. ......................................................................................................................................................... 659
The paper is too small. ......................................................................................................................................................... 659
PaprWidth Mismatch .............................................................................................................................................................660
Paper size not detected. ......................................................................................................................................................660
Insucient paper for job .....................................................................................................................................................661
This paper cannot be used. ............................................................................................................................................... 661
Roll printing is selected. .......................................................................................................................................................661
Roll printing is selected, but sheets are loaded. ....................................................................................................... 662
The roll is empty. .................................................................................................................................................................... 662
Sheet printing is selected. .................................................................................................................................................. 662
Regular printing is selected, but a roll is loaded. ......................................................................................................662
Paper jam ................................................................................................................................................................................... 663
Paper is crooked. .................................................................................................................................................................... 663
Paper not aligned with right guide. ................................................................................................................................. 664
Cannot detect papr ............................................................................................................................................................... 664
Leading edge detection error. ...........................................................................................................................................664
Paper cutting failed. .............................................................................................................................................................. 664
End of paper feed. ................................................................................................................................................................. 665
Rel lever is in wrong position. ........................................................................................................................................... 665
Borderless printng not possible. ...................................................................................................................................... 665
Paper position not suitable for borderless printing. ............................................................................................... 666
Roll paper is not securely in contact with roll holder. ............................................................................................. 666
Paper mismatch
Paper mismatch
Cause Corrective Action
You tried to print a test pattern for printer adjust-
ment on several sheets, but sheets of different
types or sizes of paper were used.
When printing a test pattern for adjustment, use sheets of the same size and type
of paper, in the required quantity.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Change Paper, press the OK button, and replace the pa-
per.
(See "Loading and Printing on Sheets.") ➔P.21
The printer now starts printing the test pattern.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Stop Printing, and then press the OK button.
MediaType Mismatch
MediaType Mismatch
Cause Corrective Action
When Detect Mismatch in the Control Panel
menu is set to Pause, the type of paper loaded
does not match the type specified in the printer
driver.
Follow these steps to ensure the paper type matches on the printer and in the print-
er driver.
1.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Stop Printing, and then press the OK button.
2.
Change the paper type setting in the printer driver to the type loaded in the print-
er and try printing again.
Follow these steps to ensure the paper type matches on the printer and in the print-
er driver.
1.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Change Paper, and then press the OK button.
Paper mismatch
iPF785
User's Guide
Error Message Messages regarding paper
658
Cause Corrective Action
When Detect Mismatch in the Control Panel
menu is set to Pause, the type of paper loaded
does not match the type specified in the printer
driver.
2.
Replace the loaded paper with paper of the type and size you have specified in
the printer driver.
(See "Loading and Printing on Rolls.") ➔P.19
(See "Loading and Printing on Sheets.") ➔P.21
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Print, and then press the OK button to resume printing.
However, note that this error may cause paper jams and affect the printing quality.
When Detect Mismatch in the Control Panel
menu is set to Warning, the type of paper loaded
does not match the type specified in the printer
driver.
You can continue to print, but note that this error may cause paper jams or problems
in the printing results.
The paper is too small.
The paper is too small.
Cause Corrective Action
When Detect Mismatch in the Control Panel
menu is set to Pause, paper smaller than the
size specified in the printer driver is loaded.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Print, and then press the OK button to resume printing.
However, note that this error may cause paper jams and affect the printing quality.
Adjust the paper size setting in the printer driver to match the size loaded in the printer
as follows.
1.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Stop Printing, and then press the OK button.
2.
Change the paper size setting in the printer driver to the size loaded in the printer
and try printing again.
Replace the loaded paper with paper of a size that matches the size setting in the
printer driver as follows.
1.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Change Paper, and then press the OK button to stop
printing.
2.
Replace the loaded paper to match the settings in the printer driver and try printing
again.
(See "Loading and Printing on Rolls.") ➔P.19
(See "Loading and Printing on Sheets.") ➔P.21
When Detect Mismatch in the Control Panel
menu is set to Warning, paper smaller than the
size specified in the printer driver is loaded.
You can continue to print, but note that this error may cause problems in the printing
results.
The paper is too small.
The paper is too small.
"Replace paper with A4/LTR (vertical) or larger"
Cause Corrective Action
The loaded paper is too small. Replace the paper with paper of A4/Letter (vertical) size or larger as follows.
1.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Change Paper, press the OK button, and remove the paper.
(See "Removing Sheets.") ➔P.399
2.
Switch to paper A4/Letter (vertical) or larger.
(See "Loading and Printing on Sheets.") ➔P.21
The printer will resume printing.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Stop Printing, and then press the OK button.
"Replace roll with 10 in. wide or larger roll."
Cause Corrective Action
The loaded paper is too small. Replace the roll with a roll 10 inches in width or larger as follows.
1.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Change Paper, and then press the OK button.
iPF785
The paper is too small.
User's Guide
Error Message Messages regarding paper
659
Cause Corrective Action
The loaded paper is too small. (See "Removing the Roll from the Printer.") ➔P.380
(See "Removing the Roll Holder from Rolls.") ➔P.383
2.
Replace the roll with a roll 10 inches wide or larger.
(See "Attaching the Roll Holder to Rolls.") ➔P.372
(See "Loading Rolls in the Printer.") ➔P.375
The printer will resume printing.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Stop Printing, and then press the OK button.
"Remove paper and check pap. size"
Cause Corrective Action
A sheet has come out of the printer during printing.
1.
Press the Release Lever back and remove the paper.
2.
Reload the sheet, aligning it with the guide on the right.
3.
Pull the Release Lever forward.
4.
If "Not finished printing. Finish printing remaining jobs?" is shown on the
Display Screen, press the OK button.
Printing will resume, starting from the page on which the error occurred.
(See "Loading Sheets in the Printer.") ➔P.394
PaprWidth Mismatch
PaprWidth Mismatch
Cause Corrective Action
When Detect Mismatch in the Control Panel menu is set
to Pause or Hold Job, the width of the loaded roll does
not match the width specified in Fit Roll Paper Width in
the printer driver.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Print, and then press the OK button to resume print-
ing.
However, note that this error may cause paper jams and affect the printing
quality.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Stop Printing, and then press the OK button.
Follow these steps to replace the roll to match the width specified in the print-
er driver.
1.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Change Paper, and then press the OK button.
(See "Removing the Roll from the Printer.") ➔P.380
(See "Removing the Roll Holder from Rolls.") ➔P.383
2.
Replace with paper of the width configured in the printer driver.
(See "Attaching the Roll Holder to Rolls.") ➔P.372
(See "Loading Rolls in the Printer.") ➔P.375
The printer now starts printing the print job.
Make sure the roll width selected in the dialog box displayed when you select
Fit Roll Paper Width in the printer driver matches the width of the roll loaded
in the printer, and then try printing again.
Paper size not detected.
Paper size not detected.
Cause Corrective Action
Paper has been loaded
askew, or warped paper
has been loaded.
Follow these steps to reload the roll.
1.
Press the OK button and reload the paper.
(See "Loading Rolls in the Printer.") ➔P.375
2.
Pull the Release Lever forward.
PaprWidth Mismatch
iPF785
User's Guide
Error Message Messages regarding paper
660
Cause Corrective Action
Paper has been loaded
askew, or warped paper
has been loaded.
3.
If "Not finished printing. Finish printing remaining jobs?" is shown on the Display Screen, press the
OK button.
Printing will resume, starting from the page on which the error occurred.
If this error recurs after you reload the roll, remove the Roll Holder from the printer, push the roll firmly in until
it touches the Roll Holder flange, and reload the Roll Holder in the printer.
(See "Attaching the Roll Holder to Rolls.") ➔P.372
Follow these step to reload a sheet.
1.
Push the Release Lever back.
2.
Load the sheet, aligning it with the guide on the right.
(See "Loading Sheets in the Printer.") ➔P.394
3.
Pull the Release Lever forward.
4.
If "Not finished printing. Finish printing remaining jobs?" is shown on the Display Screen, press the
OK button.
Printing will resume, starting from the page on which the error occurred.
Insufficient paper for job
Insufficient paper for job
Cause Corrective Action
The printer has received a print job longer than the amount of roll paper left when
ManageRemainRoll in the Control Panel menu is On.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Print, and then press the
OK button to resume printing.
However, the roll paper may run out during the
print job and you may not be able to print all of the
document.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Change Paper, and then
press the OK button to stop printing.
Either change the printer driver Paper Source set-
ting or the GL2 Settings > Paper Source setting
in the printer menu or replace the roll with a roll
that has enough paper for the print job, and then
try printing again.
(See "Removing the Roll from the Print-
er.") ➔P.380
(See "Loading Rolls in the Printer.") ➔P.375
Press ▲ or ▼ and select Stop Printing or press
the Stop button to stop printing.
This paper cannot be used.
This paper cannot be used.
Cause Corrective Action
Paper smaller than the printer's minimum supported
size has been loaded.
Push the Release Lever back and load paper of the correct size.
(See "Paper Sizes.") ➔P.362
Paper has been loaded that is too small to print the test
pattern for printhead adjustment or nozzle checking.
Push the Release Lever back and load unused paper of A4 size or larger.
More than one sheet may be required depending on the adjustment.
Roll printing is selected.
Roll printing is selected.
Cause Corrective Action
You have attempted to print on a roll, but
no roll is loaded.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select "Load Roll Paper", and then press the OK button. Load the roll, and
then print.
(See "Attaching the Roll Holder to Rolls.") ➔P.372
(See "Loading Rolls in the Printer.") ➔P.375
Press ▲ or ▼ and select Stop Printing or press the Stop button to stop printing.
iPF785
Insucient paper for job
User's Guide
Error Message Messages regarding paper
661
Roll printing is selected, but sheets are loaded.
Roll printing is selected, but sheets are loaded.
Cause Corrective Action
A print job for rolls was received when a
sheet is loaded.
Follow these steps to load and print on a roll.
1.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Eject Cut Sheet, press the OK button, and remove the sheet.
(See "Removing Sheets.") ➔P.399
2.
Load a new roll.
(See "Loading Rolls in the Printer.") ➔P.375
The printer now starts printing the print job.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Stop Printing, and then press the OK button.
The roll is empty.
The roll is empty.
Cause Corrective Action
The roll is empty. Follow these steps to replace the used roll with a new roll of the same type and size.
1.
Press the Release Lever back and remove the roll.
(See "Removing the Roll from the Printer.") ➔P.380
(See "Removing the Roll Holder from Rolls.") ➔P.383
2.
Load the new roll.
(See "Attaching the Roll Holder to Rolls.") ➔P.372
(See "Loading Rolls in the Printer.") ➔P.375
3.
If no barcode was printed on the roll, specify the type of paper.
(See "Changing the Type of Paper.") ➔P.378
4.
When you have selected ManageRemainRoll > On in the control panel menu and a barcode is not printed on
the roll, also specify the paper length.
(See "Specifying the Paper Length.") ➔P.380
5.
If "Not finished printing. Finish printing remaining jobs?" is shown on the Display Screen, press the OK
button.
Printing will resume, starting from the page on which the error occurred.
If no message appears, printing will continue from the next page.
There is remaining
roll paper, but be-
cause it could not
be advanced, it
could not be detec-
ted.
The unused portion of the roll is heavy, and this is placing a burden on the printer. It may be helpful to change the
printing mode, which will change the paper feed timing.
Choose a higher level of Print Quality in the Advanced Settings of the printer driver.
(See "Giving Priority to Particular Graphic Elements and Colors for Printing.") ➔P.58
Sheet printing is selected.
Sheet printing is selected.
Cause Corrective Action
You have attempted to print on a sheet, but
no sheet is loaded.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Load Paper, and then press the OK button. Load a sheet, and
then print.
(See "Loading and Printing on Sheets.") ➔P.21
Press ▲ or ▼ and select Stop Printing or press the Stop button to stop printing.
Regular printing is selected, but a roll is loaded.
Regular printing is selected, but a roll is loaded.
Cause Corrective Action
A print job for printing on sheets
was sent when a roll is loaded.
1.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Remove Roll Paper, and then press the OK button to stop printing.
2.
After removing the roll, load and print on a sheet of the type and size of paper you have specified
in the printer driver.
(See "Removing the Roll from the Printer.") ➔P.380
(See "Loading and Printing on Sheets.") ➔P.21
Roll printing is selected, but sheets are loaded.
iPF785
User's Guide
Error Message Messages regarding paper
662
Cause Corrective Action
A print job for printing on sheets
was sent when a roll is loaded. Press ▲ or ▼ to select Stop Printing, and then press the OK button to stop printing.
Paper jam
Paper jam
Cause Corrective Action
A paper jam oc-
curred in the
printer during
printing.
For roll paper, cut the paper on the upper side of the {Paper Feed Slot.
1.
Push the Release Lever back and remove the jammed paper.
(See "Clearing Jammed Roll Paper.") ➔P.627
(See "Clearing a Jammed Sheet.") ➔P.630
2.
Load the paper.
(See "Loading Rolls in the Printer.") ➔P.375
(See "Loading Sheets in the Printer.") ➔P.394
3.
Pull the Release Lever forward.
4.
If "Not finished printing. Finish printing remaining jobs?" is shown on the Display Screen, press the OK but-
ton.
Printing will resume, starting from the page on which the error occurred.
Paper is crooked.
Paper is crooked.
Cause Corrective Action
Paper loaded crooked was detected when the paper was advanced. Follow these steps to reload the roll.
1.
Push the Release Lever back.
2.
Adjust the right edge of the roll to make it parallel to the orange
Paper Alignment Line.
3.
Pull the Release Lever forward.
(See "Loading Rolls in the Printer.") ➔P.375
If this error recurs after you reload the roll, remove the Roll Holder
from the printer, push the roll firmly in until it touches the Roll
Holder flange, and reload the Roll Holder in the printer.
(See "Attaching the Roll Holder to Rolls.") ➔P.372
Follow these step to reload a sheet.
1.
Push the Release Lever back.
2.
Pull out the sheet.
3.
Pull the Release Lever forward.
4.
Reload the sheet, aligning it with the guide on the right.
(See "Loading Sheets in the Printer.") ➔P.394
Important
•To disable this message (if it is displayed repeatedly despite reloading paper, for example), choose Off or Loose in
the Skew Check Lv. setting of the printer menu. However, this may cause jams and printing problems because paper
may be askew when printed. Also, the Platen may become soiled, which may soil the back of the next document
when it is printed.
iPF785
Paper jam
User's Guide
Error Message Messages regarding paper
663
Paper not aligned with right guide.
Paper not aligned with right guide.
Cause Corrective Action
When paper was loaded, it was not aligned with the guide on the right side. Follow these step to reload a sheet.
1.
Push the Release Lever back.
2.
Pull out the sheet.
3.
Pull the Release Lever forward.
4.
Reload the sheet, aligning it with the guide on the right.
Cannot detect papr
Cannot detect papr
Cause Corrective Action
The printer could not detect the paper. Reload the paper as follows.
1.
Remove the paper and press the OK button.
2.
Reload the paper.
(See "Loading Sheets in the Printer.") ➔P.394
(See "Loading Rolls in the Printer.") ➔P.375
Leading edge detection error.
Leading edge detection error.
Cause Corrective Action
The leading edge of the paper cannot be detected. Follow these step to reload a sheet.
1.
Push the Release Lever back.
2.
Reload the sheet straight, in the correct position.
(See "Loading Sheets in the Printer.") ➔P.394
Paper cutting failed.
Paper cutting failed.
Cause Corrective Action
There are sheets left on the
Ejection Guide.
1.
Push the Release Lever back and remove the paper.
2.
Load the paper.
3.
Pull the Release Lever forward.
4.
If "Not finished printing. Finish printing remaining jobs?" is shown on the Display Screen, press
the OK button.
Printing will resume, starting from the page on which the error occurred.
(See "Loading Rolls in the Printer.") ➔P.375
There is a foreign object by
the Output Tray, obstructing
the Cutter Unit.
1.
Lift the Top Cover and remove the foreign object.
2.
If "Not finished printing. Finish printing remaining jobs?" is shown on the Display Screen, press
the OK button.
Printing will resume, starting from the page on which the error occurred.
You are not using the printer
under the recommended en-
vironmental conditions for
the paper.
Use the printer only where the recommended environmental conditions for the paper are met. Note that
various environmental conditions are recommended for various types of paper. For details on the recom-
mended environmental conditions for paper, see Paper Reference Guide."
(See "Displaying the Paper Reference Guide.") ➔P.366
You are using paper that is
not compatible with automat-
ic cutting.
1.
Specify Manual as the cutting method and use scissors or a cutting tool to cut the roll.
(See "Specifying the Cutting Method for Rolls.") ➔P.388
For information about paper that is compatible with automatic cutting, see the Paper Reference
Guide.
(See "Displaying the Paper Reference Guide.") ➔P.366
2.
Push the Release Lever back and remove the paper.
Paper not aligned with right guide.
iPF785
User's Guide
Error Message Messages regarding paper
664
Cause Corrective Action
In other cases, the Cutter
Unit may be damaged.
Contact your Canon dealer for assistance.
End of paper feed.
End of paper feed.
Cause Corrective Action
Although an attempt was made to advance the paper manually, it reached the limit posi-
tion that can be advanced.
Canceling manual advancing.
(See "Feeding Roll Paper Manually.") ➔P.384
Rel lever is in wrong position.
Rel lever is in wrong position.
Cause Corrective Action
The Release Lever is pushed back. Pull the Release Lever forward.
Turn off the printer and wait a while before restoring power.
Borderless printng not possible.
Borderless printng not possible.
Cause Corrective Action
The print job received specifies a
type or width of paper that is not
compatible with borderless printing.
Follow these steps to change the settings of the print job to enable borderless printing.
1.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Stop Printing, and then press the OK button.
2.
Make sure the correct printer driver for the printer is selected and try printing again.
For information on types of paper compatible with borderless printing, refer to the Paper Ref-
erence Guide.
(See "Displaying the Paper Reference Guide.") ➔P.366
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Print With Border, and then press the OK button to continue printing.
The document will be printed with a border.
The loaded paper is a size not com-
patible with borderless printing.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Stop Printing, and then press the OK button.
Replace the paper with paper compatible for borderless printing as follows.
1.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Change Paper, and then press the OK button.
(See "Removing the Roll from the Printer.") ➔P.380
(See "Removing the Roll Holder from Rolls.") ➔P.383
2.
Replace the paper with paper compatible for borderless printing.
(See "Attaching the Roll Holder to Rolls.") ➔P.372
(See "Loading Rolls in the Printer.") ➔P.375
The printer now starts printing the print job.
For information on types of paper compatible with borderless printing, refer to the Paper Ref-
erence Guide.
(See "Displaying the Paper Reference Guide.") ➔P.366
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Print With Border, and then press the OK button to continue printing.
The document will be printed with a border.
Because paper expands or con-
tracts depending on the environ-
ment of use, it may become narrow-
er or wider than the supported width
for borderless printing.
Use each type of paper only where the recommended environmental conditions are met. For de-
tails on environmental conditions for various paper, see the Paper Reference Guide.
(See "Displaying the Paper Reference Guide.") ➔P.366
iPF785
End of paper feed.
User's Guide
Error Message Messages regarding paper
665
Paper position not suitable for borderless printing.
Paper position not suitable for borderless printing.
Cause Corrective Action
Because paper expands or con-
tracts depending on the environ-
ment of use, it may become nar-
rower or wider than the suppor-
ted width for borderless printing.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Stop Printing, and then press the OK button.
Use each type of paper only where the recommended environmental conditions are met. For details
on environmental conditions for various paper, see the Paper Reference Guide.
(See "Displaying the Paper Reference Guide.") ➔P.366
The paper is loaded askew. Press ▲ or ▼ to select Fix Paper Position and straighten the paper so that the edges are between
the ink grooves for borderless printing.
Insert the roll firmly until it touches the flange of the Roll Holder.
(See "Attaching the Roll Holder to Rolls.") ➔P.372
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Print With Border, and then press the OK button to continue printing. The
document will be printed with a border.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Stop Printing, and then press the OK button.
Roll paper is not securely in contact with roll holder.
Roll paper is not securely in contact with roll holder.
Cause Corrective Action
When the roll was loaded, the roll was not inserted firmly all the
way on the Roll Holder.
Follow these steps to reload the roll.
1.
Press the OK button and remove the roll holder from the printer.
2.
Insert the roll firmly on the Roll Holder until it touches the flange.
(See "Attaching the Roll Holder to Rolls.") ➔P.372
3.
Load the Roll Holder in the printer.
Paper position not suitable for borderless printing.
iPF785
User's Guide
Error Message Messages regarding paper
666
Messages regarding ink
Messages regarding ink
Ink insucient. ......................................................................................................................................................................... 667
No ink left. ................................................................................................................................................................................. 667
Remaining level of the ink cannot be correctly detected. Check ink tank. ................................................... 667
Cannot detect ink level correctly. Close tank cover. ............................................................................................... 667
Close Ink Tank Cover ............................................................................................................................................................ 668
Ink tank is empty. ................................................................................................................................................................... 668
Not much ink is left. .............................................................................................................................................................. 668
Check if ink tank is set, and its color and direction. ............................................................................................... 668
The following ink tanks cannot be recognized. ......................................................................................................... 668
Wrong ink tank. ....................................................................................................................................................................... 668
Do not pull out ink tank. ...................................................................................................................................................... 668
Ink insufficient.
Ink insufficient.
Cause Corrective Action
The ink level is low, so you cannot print, clean the Printhead, or do
other operations that require ink.
There is not enough ink of the color with × displayed above the re-
maining ink indicator.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Rep. Ink Tank, and then press the OK
button. Replace the Ink Tank that is low with a new Ink Tank.
(See "Replacing Ink Tanks.") ➔P.588
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Continue to print, and then press the
OK button to resume printing. However, note that this error may
affect the printing quality.
Press the OK button, open the Ink Tank Cover, and replace the
Ink Tank for the color that does not have enough ink.
(See "Replacing Ink Tanks.") ➔P.588
No ink left.
No ink left.
Cause Corrective Action
There is no ink left.
There are no ink colors with × displayed above the
remaining ink indicator.
Press the OK button, open the Ink Tank Cover, and replace the Ink Tank for the
color that is out of ink.
(See "Replacing Ink Tanks.") ➔P.588
Remaining level of the ink cannot be correctly detected. Check ink tank.
Remaining level of the ink cannot be correctly detected. Check ink tank.
Cause Corrective Action
Ink level detection cannot work correctly if
you use refill ink tanks.
The refill ink tank can no longer be used. See the section Ink level detection and take the
appropriate action. (See "Ink Level Detection.") ➔P.652
Cannot detect ink level correctly. Close tank cover.
Cannot detect ink level correctly. Close tank cover.
Cause Corrective Action
The remaining ink level could not be correctly detected. Close the Ink Tank Cover.
The buzzer stops sounding.
Next, "No ink left." is displayed and see "No ink left.." ➔P.667
iPF785
Ink insucient.
User's Guide
Error Message Messages regarding ink
667
Close Ink Tank Cover
Close Ink Tank Cover
Cause Corrective Action
The Ink Tank Cover is open. Close the Ink Tank Cover.
Ink tank is empty.
Ink tank is empty.
Cause Corrective Action
There is no ink left in an ink tank.
There are no ink colors with × displayed above the remaining ink indica-
tor in the Ink tab top screen.
(See "Checking Ink Tank Levels.") ➔P.594
Open the Ink Tank Cover, and replace the Ink Tank for the
color that is out of ink.
(See "Replacing Ink Tanks.") ➔P.588
Not much ink is left.
Not much ink is left.
Cause Corrective Action
Not much ink is left. Prepare a new Ink Tank.
We recommend replacing the Ink Tank with a new Ink Tank at this point if you plan to print large-format or high-
quantity jobs.
Check if ink tank is set, and its color and direction.
Check if ink tank is set, and its color and direction.
Cause Corrective Action
There is no Ink Tank of the indicated color in the printer. Load the Ink Tank.
(See "Replacing Ink Tanks.") ➔P.588
There is a problem with the Ink Tank. Replace it with a new Ink Tank.
(See "Replacing Ink Tanks.") ➔P.588
The following ink tanks cannot be recognized.
The following ink tanks cannot be recognized.
Cause Corrective Action
An Ink Tank that is incompatible with the printer is loaded. Load an Ink Tank that is compatible with the printer.
(See "Replacing Ink Tanks.") ➔P.588
Wrong ink tank.
Wrong ink tank.
Cause Corrective Action
The Ink Tank in the printer is incompatible. Load an Ink Tank specified for use with the printer.
(See "Replacing Ink Tanks.") ➔P.588
Do not pull out ink tank.
Do not pull out ink tank.
Cause Corrective Action
The Ink Tank was removed using an incor-
rect procedure.
Install the Ink Tank that was removed.
The buzzer stops sounding.
Next, replace the Ink Tank using the procedure on the Display Screen in the Control Panel.
Close Ink Tank Cover
iPF785
User's Guide
Error Message Messages regarding ink
668
Messages regarding printing or adjustment
Messages regarding printing or adjustment
Cannot adjust printhead. .....................................................................................................................................................670
Borderless printng not possible. ...................................................................................................................................... 665
Cannot adjust paper feed. ..................................................................................................................................................669
Check printed document. ................................................................................................................................................... 669
Cannot adjust paper feed.
Cannot adjust paper feed.
Cause Corrective Action
The Printhead nozzles are clogged. Execute Adj. Quality again, as follows.
1.
Press the OK button to clear the error.
2.
Print a test pattern to check the nozzles.
(See "Checking for Nozzle Clogging.") ➔P.597
3.
Clean the Printhead if the nozzles are clogged.
(See "Cleaning the Printhead.") ➔P.598
4.
Execute Adj. Quality again.
(See "Automatic Banding Adjustment.") ➔P.580
Highly transparent film is loaded that cannot be used
for automatic feed amount adjustment.
Press the OK button to clear the error, and then adjust the feed amount manually.
(See "Manual Banding Adjustment.") ➔P.582
Check printed document.
Check printed document.
Cause Corrective Action
The Printhead nozzles are becoming clogged. If printing is faint, clean the Printhead.
(See "Cleaning the Printhead.") ➔P.598
iPF785
Cannot adjust paper feed.
User's Guide
Error Message Messages regarding printing or adjustment
669
Messages regarding printheads
Messages regarding printheads
Cannot adjust printhead. .....................................................................................................................................................670
Wrong printhead. .................................................................................................................................................................... 670
Printhead error ........................................................................................................................................................................ 670
Cannot recognize print head. ............................................................................................................................................ 670
Execute printhead cleaning. ............................................................................................................................................... 671
Cannot adjust printhead.
Cannot adjust printhead.
Cause Corrective Action
The Printhead nozzles are clogged. Execute Head Posi. Adj. again, as follows.
1.
Press the OK button to clear the error.
2.
Print a test pattern to check the nozzles.
(See "Checking for Nozzle Clogging.") ➔P.597
3.
Clean the Printhead if the nozzles are clogged.
(See "Cleaning the Printhead.") ➔P.598
4.
Execute Head Posi. Adj. again.
(See "Automatic Adjustment to Straighten Lines and Colors.") ➔P.572
The Printhead cannot be aligned;
highly transparent film is loaded.
Press the OK button to clear the error.
We recommend using a type of paper that you often use, other than film, for Printhead adjustment.
(See "Automatic Adjustment to Straighten Lines and Colors.") ➔P.572
The Printhead is installed crooked. Straighten the Printhead as follows, and then execute Head Posi. Adj. again.
1.
Press the OK button to clear the error.
2.
Use Head Inc. Adj. to adjust the angle of inclination of the Printhead.
(See "Adjusting Line Misalignment.") ➔P.575
3.
Execute Head Posi. Adj. again.
(See "Automatic Adjustment to Straighten Lines and Colors.") ➔P.572
Wrong printhead.
Wrong printhead.
Cause Corrective Action
An incompatible Printhead has been installed. Open the Top Cover and replace the Printhead with a new one.
(See "Replacing the Printhead.") ➔P.599
Printhead error
Printhead error
Cause Corrective Action
There is a problem with the Printhead. Open the Top Cover and replace the Printhead with a new one.
(See "Replacing the Printhead.") ➔P.599
Cannot recognize print head.
Cannot recognize print head.
Cause Corrective Action
No Printhead is installed. Follow these steps to install the Printhead.
1.
Open the Top Cover.
2.
Install the Printhead.
(See "Replacing the Printhead.") ➔P.599
The Printhead cannot be recognized because it is not installed correctly. Follow these steps to reinstall the Printhead.
Cannot adjust printhead.
iPF785
User's Guide
Error Message Messages regarding printheads
670
Cause Corrective Action
The Printhead cannot be recognized because it is not installed correctly.
1.
Open the Top Cover.
2.
Reinstall the Printhead.
(See "Replacing the Printhead.") ➔P.599
Execute printhead cleaning.
Execute printhead cleaning.
Cause Corrective Action
The Printhead noz-
zles are clogged.
Follow these steps to clean the Printhead.
1.
Stop printing by pressing ▲ or ▼ to select Stop Printing.
2.
Clean the Printhead.
(See "Cleaning the Printhead.") ➔P.598
If the message is still displayed when printing, replace the Printhead.
(See "Replacing the Printhead.") ➔P.599
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Print, and then press the OK button to resume printing. However, note that this error may
affect the printing quality.
iPF785
Execute printhead cleaning.
User's Guide
Error Message Messages regarding printheads
671
Messages regarding the maintenance cartridge
Messages regarding the maintenance cartridge
Insert the maintenance cartridge. ................................................................................................................................... 672
Wrong maintenance cartridge. ......................................................................................................................................... 672
Maint. cart. The level is low ................................................................................................................................................ 672
No Maintenance Cartridge capacity. ..............................................................................................................................672
Maintenance cartridge full. .................................................................................................................................................672
Maintenance cartridge problem. ......................................................................................................................................672
Insert the maintenance cartridge.
Insert the maintenance cartridge.
Cause Corrective Action
The Maintenance Cartridge is not installed. Install the Maintenance Cartridge.
(See "Replacing the Maintenance Cartridge.") ➔P.606
Wrong maintenance cartridge.
Wrong maintenance cartridge.
Cause Corrective Action
A Maintenance Cartridge for a different model of printer is instal-
led.
Replace it with the Maintenance Cartridge for your particular model.
(See "Maintenance Cartridge.") ➔P.606
Maint. cart. The level is low
Maint. cart. The level is low
Cause Corrective Action
The Maintenance Cartridge is al-
most full.
You can continue to print, but prepare a new Maintenance Cartridge to use when the message for
replacement is displayed.
No Maintenance Cartridge capacity.
No Maintenance Cartridge capacity.
Cause Corrective Action
The Maintenance Cartridge cannot absorb
enough ink for Printhead cleaning or other opera-
tion.
After confirming that the printer has stopped operating, replace the Maintenance
Cartridge.
(See "Replacing the Maintenance Cartridge.") ➔P.606
Maintenance cartridge full.
Maintenance cartridge full.
Cause Corrective Action
The Maintenance Cartridge is full. After confirming that the printer has stopped operating, replace the Maintenance Cartridge.
(See "Replacing the Maintenance Cartridge.") ➔P.606
Maintenance cartridge problem.
Maintenance cartridge problem.
Cause Corrective Action
An incompatible or used Maintenance Cartridge has been in-
stalled.
Install an unused Maintenance Cartridge specified for use with the printer.
(See "Replacing the Maintenance Cartridge.") ➔P.606
Insert the maintenance cartridge.
iPF785
User's Guide
Error Message Messages regarding the maintenance cartridge
672
Messages regarding the hard disk
Messages regarding the hard disk
Hard disk error. ....................................................................................................................................................................... 673
File read error. ..........................................................................................................................................................................673
The mail box is full. ................................................................................................................................................................ 673
Mail box full. Now printing without saving data. ........................................................................................................673
Mail box nearly full. ................................................................................................................................................................ 673
Maximum jobs stored. .......................................................................................................................................................... 673
Mail box full. Delete unwanted data ............................................................................................................................... 673
Hard disk error.
Hard disk error.
Cause Corrective Action
The format of the printer's hard
disk is invalid.
Press the OK button to start reformatting the hard disk. When formatting is finished, data on the print-
er hard disk is erased and the printer automatically restarts.
File read error.
File read error.
Cause Corrective Action
Files on the printer's hard disk have become cor-
rupted.
Restart the printer. Only the corrupted files will be deleted, and the printer will restart.
The mail box is full.
The mail box is full.
Cause Corrective Action
There is no more space on the printer's hard disk. Press the Stop button and stop printing.
Delete print jobs from the queue.
(See "Managing the Job Queue (Deleting or Preempting Other Jobs).") ➔P.534
Delete unneeded jobs stored in personal boxes.
(See "Deleting Saved Jobs.") ➔P.542
Mail box full. Now printing without saving data.
Mail box full. Now printing without saving data.
Cause Corrective Action
No more space is available on the printer's hard disk, so jobs are now printed without
saving them. (Print jobs can no longer be saved on the hard disk.)
After printing, this message is cleared.
Delete unneeded jobs stored in personal boxes.
(See "Deleting Saved Jobs.") ➔P.542
Mail box nearly full.
Mail box nearly full.
Cause Corrective Action
The free hard disk space left for Personal Boxes in the printer's hard disk does not
have more than 1 GB, combined.
Delete unneeded jobs stored in Personal Boxes.
(See "Deleting Saved Jobs.") ➔P.542
Maximum jobs stored.
Maximum jobs stored.
Cause Corrective Action
100 jobs are stored in the personal box. Delete unneeded jobs stored in personal boxes.
(See "Deleting Saved Jobs.") ➔P.542
Mail box full. Delete unwanted data
Mail box full. Delete unwanted data
Cause Corrective Action
100 jobs are stored in the Personal Box. Press the Stop button and stop printing.
iPF785
Hard disk error.
User's Guide
Error Message Messages regarding the hard disk
673
Cause Corrective Action
100 jobs are stored in the Personal Box. Delete print jobs from the queue.
(See "Managing the Job Queue (Deleting or Preempting Other Jobs).") ➔P.534
Delete unneeded jobs stored in personal boxes.
(See "Deleting Saved Jobs.") ➔P.542
Mail box full. Delete unwanted data
iPF785
User's Guide
Error Message Messages regarding the hard disk
674
Messages regarding HP-GL/2
Messages regarding HP-GL/2
This type of paper is not compatible with HP-GL/2. ...............................................................................................675
GL2: Wxxxx The memory is full. (xxxx is 0501, 0903, or 0904) ........................................................................ 675
GL2: W0502 The parameter is out of range. ............................................................................................................. 675
GL2: W0504 This command is not supported. ..........................................................................................................675
This type of paper is not compatible with HP-GL/2.
This type of paper is not compatible with HP-GL/2.
Cause Corrective Action
The printer has received a HP-GL/2
print job that cannot be printed on the
paper that has been advanced.
Follow these steps to replace the type of paper in the printer.
1.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Stop Printing, and then press the OK button.
2.
Replace the paper with a type compatible with HP-GL/2. For details on paper compatible
with HP-GL/2, refer to the Paper Reference Guide.
(See "Displaying the Paper Reference Guide.") ➔P.366
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Print, and then press the OK button to resume printing. However, note
that this error may cause paper jams and affect the printing quality.
GL2: Wxxxx The memory is full. (xxxx is 0501, 0903, or 0904)
GL2: Wxxxx The memory is full. (xxxx is 0501, 0903, or 0904)
Cause Corrective Action
The printer memory is
full.
Because the entire print job could not be received, the printer may not be able to print the entire original.
Check the printing results.
In the Control Panel menu, setting On-the-Fly to On may enable printing. However, check the printing results
because the image may be incomplete in some cases.
GL2: W0502 The parameter is out of range.
GL2: W0502 The parameter is out of range.
Cause Corrective Action
A parameter specified in a HP-GL/2 command is out of the supported
range.
Check the print job.
If you have specified ProcessingOption > Warning > On in
the Control Panel menu, set it to Off instead.
GL2: W0504 This command is not supported.
GL2: W0504 This command is not supported.
Cause Corrective Action
The printer has received an unsupported HP-GL/2 command. Check the print job.
If you have specified ProcessingOption > Warning > On in the Control
Panel menu, set it to Off instead.
iPF785
This type of paper is not compatible with HP-GL/2.
User's Guide
Error Message Messages regarding HP-GL/2
675
Other Messages
Other Messages
GARO Wxxxx (x represents a number) ......................................................................................................................... 676
ERROR Exxx-xxxx (x represents a letter or number) .............................................................................................. 676
Hardware error. xxxxxxxx-xxxx (x represents a letter or number) .................................................................... 676
Top cover is open. .................................................................................................................................................................. 677
Prepare for parts replacement. ........................................................................................................................................677
Parts replacement time has passed. .............................................................................................................................. 677
Unknown le. ............................................................................................................................................................................ 677
Multi-sensor error .................................................................................................................................................................. 677
Error in cutter position. ........................................................................................................................................................677
GARO Wxxxx (x represents a number)
GARO Wxxxx (x represents a number)
Cause Corrective Action
There is a problem with the print job. Try printing again, using the correct printer driver.
It is also possible to continue printing in this state.
However, you may not be able to obtain the desired printing results.
ERROR Exxx-xxxx (x represents a letter or number)
ERROR Exxx-xxxx (x represents a letter or number)
Cause Corrective Action
An error requiring service may have occurred. Write down the error code and message, turn off the printer, and contact your Canon
dealer for assistance.
Hardware error. xxxxxxxx-xxxx (x represents a letter or number)
Hardware error. xxxxxxxx-xxxx (x represents a letter or number)
Cause Corrective Action
The last portion of roll paper was used during a print job. The paper
was not advanced because the trailing edge is taped to the roll.
Turn off the printer and remove the roll from the printer before re-
storing power.
Fastening tape or the Belt Stopper has not been removed inside the
Top Cover.
Turn off the printer, open the Top Cover and remove the tape or
the Belt Stopper before restoring power.
An error requiring service may have occurred. Turn off the printer and wait at least three seconds before restor-
ing the power.
If the message is displayed again, write down the error code and
message, turn off the printer, and contact your Canon dealer for
assistance.
GARO Wxxxx (x represents a number)
iPF785
User's Guide
Error Message Other Messages
676
Hardware error. 03130031-2F7x (x is 0, 1, or 2)
Cause Corrective Action
The ink tank is not
installed correctly.
Turn off the power, remove and then reinstall all of the ink tanks, and then turn on the power.
If the same message is displayed again, write down the error code and message, turn off the printer, and contact
your Canon dealer for assistance. (See "Replacing Ink Tanks.") ➔P.588
Top cover is open.
Top cover is open.
Cause Corrective Action
The printer has detected that the Top Cover is
open.
Open the Top Cover fully, remove any foreign objects, and close the Top Cover
again.
If the error occurs again, close the Top Cover, turn off the printer, and wait a while
before restoring power.
Prepare for parts replacement.
Prepare for parts replacement.
Cause Corrective Action
It is almost time to replace consumables for
which service is required.
If "Parts replacement time has passed." is displayed, you can continue to use the print-
er for some time.
Contact your Canon dealer for assistance.
Parts replacement time has passed.
Parts replacement time has passed.
Cause Corrective Action
It is past the recommended time to replace consumables for which service is required. Contact your Canon dealer for assistance.
Unknown file.
Unknown file.
Cause Corrective Action
Data sent to keep the printer up to date (such as paper
information) is in the wrong format.
Check the data. Turn off the printer and wait a while before restoring power,
and then resend the data.
You have uploaded firmware for a different model. Check the firmware version. Turn off the printer and wait a while before restor-
ing power, and then resend the firmware.
If the message is displayed again, contact your Canon dealer for assistance.
Multi-sensor error
Multi-sensor error
Cause Corrective Action
Direct sunlight or strong lighting may be shining on the
printer and causing the sensor to malfunction.
Take steps to ensure the printer is not used when exposed to direct sunlight or
strong lighting.
The performance of a sensor inside the printer may be
impaired.
Turn off the printer and wait at least three seconds before restoring the power.
If the message is displayed again, contact your Canon dealer for assistance.
Error in cutter position.
Error in cutter position.
Cause Corrective Action
The Cutter Unit stops in the middle of cutting.
1.
Push the Release Lever back and remove the paper.
2.
Pull the Release Lever forward.
iPF785
Top cover is open.
User's Guide
Error Message Other Messages
677
iPF785
User's Guide
Basic Printing Workow 15
Enhanced Printing Options 31
Windows Software 157
Mac OS Software 277
Handling and Use of Paper 361
Control Panel 435
Printer Parts 475
Network Setting 489
Print Job Management 509
Adjustments for Better Print Quality 571
Maintenance and Consumables 587
Troubleshooting 625
Error Message 655
Specifications
Printer Specifications ............................................................................... 680
Appendix 683
imagePROGRAF
Specications
679
Printer Specifications
Printer Specifications
Specications ........................................................................................................................................................................... 680
Print Area ................................................................................................................................................................................... 681
Specifications
Specifications
Important
•The following values may vary depending on the operating environment.
Printer
Power supply 100–240 V AC (50/60 Hz)
Power consumption During operation 140 W max.
Sleep mode 5 W max.
Off 0.5 W max. (*1)
Operating noise (*2) Sound pressure level During operation Approx. 48 dB (A)
Standby 35 dB (A) max.
Audio power level (during operation) Approx. 6.5 bels
Operating environment Temperature 15–30°C (59–86°F)
Humidity 10–80%, non-condensing
Dimensions (W × D × H) Printer and Stand (When the
Output Stacker is used)
Extended position A 1,304×887×1,062 mm
(51.3×34.9×41.8 in)
Extended position B 1,304×1,100×1,062 mm
(51.3×43.3×41.8 in)
Weight Main unit and Stand(including
Roll Holder. Does not include
Printhead and Ink Tank.)
Approx. 68.1 kg (150.1 lb)
Space for installation (W × D ×
H)
Printer and Stand 1,704×1,700×1,362 mm (67.1×66.9×53.6 in)
Related standards International Energy Star Program, Law on Promoting Green Purchasing/GPN (Japan), Eco Mark
(Japan), RoHS
*1: The printer uses a trace amount of power even when turned off. To stop all power consumption, turn off the printer and unplug
the power cord.
*2: Calculation based on ISO 7779. Operating conditions: On the Main sheet of the printer driver, Media Type > Plain Paper,
Advanced Settings > Print Priority > Line Drawing/Text, and Print Quality > Standard.
Printing performance
Print method Bubblejet
Maximum resolution 2400 dpi horizontally (*1) × 1200 dpi vertically
Printhead PF-04
Number of nozzles MBK: 5120; Others: 2560 each color
*1: Prints with a minimum 1/2400 inch dot pitch between ink droplets.
Memory and hard disk
Memory 32 GB (256 MB physical memory)
Specications
iPF785
User's Guide
Specications Printer Specications
680
Hard disk capacity 320 GB
Personal mail boxes (Permanent storage
area)
180 GB
Print job storage capacity Common Box 100 jobs
Personal Boxes 100 jobs
Interface
USB Format Internal port
Mode Full-speed (12 Mbps), high-speed (480 Mbps), bulk transfer
Connector Series B (4-pin)
Ethernet Format Internal port
Specification IEEE 802.3 10Base-T,
IEEE 802.3u 100Base-TX/Auto-Negotiation,
IEEE 802.3ab 1000Base-T/Auto-Negotiation,
IEEE 802.3x Full Duplex
IEEE 802.3az EEE
Protocols SNMP (supports Canon-MIB), HTTP, TCP/IP (IPv4/IPv6)
Ink
For information on the ink the printer supports, see "Ink Tanks." ➔P.588
Paper
For information on the types of paper the printer supports, refer to the Paper Reference Guide. (See "Displaying the
Paper Reference Guide.") ➔P.366
Paper width For information on the paper widths the printer supports, see "Paper Sizes." ➔P.362
Minimum paper length Rolls 203.2 mm (8.0 in)
Sheets 279.4 mm (11.0 in)
Maximum printable length (*1) Rolls 18 m (19.7 yd)
Sheets 1,600 mm (63.0 in)
Thickness Rolls 0.07–0.8 mm (0.0028–0.031 in)
Sheets 0.07–0.8 mm (0.0028–0.031 in)
Roll maximum outer diameter 150 mm (6 in) or shorter
Supported paper core inner diameter 2 inches / 3 inches
Print area For details, see "Print Area." ➔P.681
*1: Varies depending on the operating system or application.
Roll Holder Set Roll Holder Set RH2-33
Print Area
Print Area
A margin required by the printer is added with respect to the size of paper loaded in the printer. Except in borderless
printing, the actual printing area corresponds to the paper size minus the space for this margin.
iPF785
Print Area
User's Guide
Specications Printer Specications
681
Note
•Printable Area: The area that can be printed.
•There is no margin (that is, a margin of 0 mm) during borderless printing on rolls.
•Recommended Print Area: We recommend printing within this area.
•To print so that your original matches the print area exactly, use an oversized paper size that includes the required
margin. (See "Printing on Oversize Paper.") ➔P.76
Margins of Printable Area Margins of Recommended Print Area
Top Edge Bottom Edge Sides Top Edge Bottom Edge Sides
Sheets 3 mm (0.12 in) 23 mm (0.91 in) 3 mm (0.12 in) 20 mm (0.79 in) 23 mm (0.91 in) 5 mm (0.20 in)
Rolls 0/3 mm (0/0.12 in) 0/3 mm (0/0.12 in) 0/3 mm (0/0.12 in) 20 mm (0.79 in) 5 mm (0.20 in) 5 mm (0.20 in)
Sheets
•
Printable Area
a margin of 3 mm (0.12 in) on top, 23 mm (0.91 in) on bottom, and 3 mm (0.12 in) on left and right sides is re-
quired.
•
Recommended Print Area
A margin of 20 mm (0.79 in) on top, 23 mm (0.91 in) on bottom, and 5 mm (0.20 in) on left and right sides is re-
quired.
Rolls
•
Printable Area
A margin of 3 mm (0.12 in) on all sides is required. During borderless printing, the margin on all sides is 0 mm. For
information on paper compatible with borderless printing, see the Paper Reference Guide. (See "Types of Pa-
per.") ➔P.362
•
Recommended Print Area
A margin of 20 mm (0.79 in) on top, 5 mm (0.20 in) on bottom, and 5 mm (0.20 in) on left and right sides is re-
quired.
Print Area
iPF785
User's Guide
Specications Printer Specications
682
iPF785
User's Guide
Basic Printing Workow 15
Enhanced Printing Options 31
Windows Software 157
Mac OS Software 277
Handling and Use of Paper 361
Control Panel 435
Printer Parts 475
Network Setting 489
Print Job Management 509
Adjustments for Better Print Quality 571
Maintenance and Consumables 587
Troubleshooting 625
Error Message 655
Specications 679
Appendix
Safety Precautions ............................................................................... 684
Manuals for this printer ............................................................................ 688
Disposal of the product ............................................................................ 690
imagePROGRAF
Appendix
683
Safety Precautions
Safety Precautions
Safety Precautions .................................................................................................................................................................684
Legal Notices ............................................................................................................................................................................ 686
Safety Precautions
Safety Precautions
Follow the warnings and precautions below to use the printer safely. Do not perform any operations or procedures oth-
er than as described in this manual. Doing so may result in unexpected accidents and can cause a fire or electrical
shocks.
Printer location
Warning
•Do not set up the printer in any location exposed to alcohol, thinner, or other volatile liquids. If these substances come
into contact with electrical components inside the printer, there is a risk of fire or electrical shock.
Caution
•Never install the printer on an unstable or vibrating surface. If it falls over, this could cause personal injury.
•Never set up the printer in a location that is exposed to high humidity or large amounts of dust, or exposed to direct
sunlight, high temperature, or open flame. This could cause a fire or electrical shock. Use the printer location in an
environment where temperature and humidity are within the ranges of 15 °C to 30 °C (59 °F to 86 °F) and 10 to 80%
RH (with no condensation).
•Never place the printer on a heavy wool or shag carpet. The fibers may enter the printer and cause a fire.
•Keep the area around the power outlet clear of items so that you can disconnect the power cable immediately if the
printer starts operating abnormally. In the event of a printer malfunction, remove the power cable from the outlet as
soon as possible to prevent fire and electrical shocks.
•Do not install the printer near sources of strong electromagnetic fields, whether equipment that generates such fields
or places where such fields occur. This could damage the printer or cause malfunction.
Power Supply
Warning
•Never handle the power cable with wet hands. Doing so may cause electrical shock.
•Insert the power cable securely and completely into the power source. If the power cable is not inserted completely,
this could cause a fire or electrical shock.
•Do not use any power cable other than the one provided. This could cause a fire or electrical shock. Never use the
power cable with any other electrical device.
•Never cut the power cable or attempt to modify it, and never stretch it or bend it forcefully. Never place a heavy object
on the power cable. Damaged sections of the power cable could cause a short circuit and may cause a fire or electrical
shock.
•Never connect the power cable to a power strip or any power source shared by other electrical devices. This could
cause a fire or electrical shock.
•Never knot the power cable or wrap it around itself. This could cause a fire or electrical shock.
•Periodically disconnect the power cable and use a dry cloth to wipe away dust that has collected on the plug and the
area around the power outlet. Leaving the power cable plugged in and not cleaned for a long period, especially in an
area subject to dust, oil, and humidity, could cause the insulation material to deteriorate and lead to a fire.
Safety Precautions
iPF785
User's Guide
Appendix Safety Precautions
684
Caution
•Always grip the plug to remove the power cable from the power outlet. Pulling on the power cable could damage the
cable and lead to a fire or electrical shock.
•Never use an extension cord. This could cause a fire or electrical shock.
•Never use any power source other than 100–120 / 220–240 V AC. This could cause a fire or electrical shock. The
printer operating conditions are described below. Use the printer under the following conditions.
Power supply voltage: 100–120 / 220–240 V AC
Power supply frequency: 50/60 Hz
In an Emergency
Warning
•If the printer emits smoke or strange odors, continuing to use the printer may cause a fire or electrical shock. Switch
the printer off immediately and remove the power plug from the power outlet. Contact your Canon dealer or support
center.
Cleaning the Printer
Warning
•For cleaning, use a cloth dampened in water. Never use flammable solvents such as alcohol, benzene, or thinner. If
these substances come into contact with electrical components inside the printer, there is a risk of fire or electrical
shock.
Caution
•Always disconnect the power cable from the outlet before cleaning the printer. If the printer is switched on accidentally,
moving parts inside the printer may cause personal injuries.
Pacemakers
Warning
•This printer generates a low-level magnetic field. Anyone wearing a pacemaker who experiences discomfort while
working around the printer should leave the area. Consult a physician before continuing to work around the printer.
Moving the Printer
Caution
•Moving the printer requires at least three people, holding it on both sides and from behind. Be careful to avoid back
strain and other injuries.
•When moving the printer, firmly grasp the Carrying Handles under each side and in back. The printer may be unsteady
if you hold it at other positions, which poses a risk of injury from dropping the printer.
Printhead, Ink Tanks, and Maintenance Cartridge
Caution
•Always store consumables in a safe location out of the reach of small children. If a child licks or ingests ink accidental-
ly, seek medical assistance immediately.
•If ink accidentally gets in your eyes, immediately rinse with water.
If ink gets on your skin, immediately clean it off with soap and water.
If irritation persists in your eyes or on your skin, contact a physician immediately.
•Avoid dropping or shaking printheads, ink tanks, and maintenance cartridges. Spilled ink can stain clothing and the
work area.
•Never touch the electrical contacts of the Printhead after printing. The contacts become extremely hot and can cause
minor burns.
iPF785
Safety Precautions
User's Guide
Appendix Safety Precautions
685
Other
Warning
•Never disassemble the printer or attempt repairs. There are high voltage parts inside the printer that can cause a fire
or electrical shock.
•Never use flammable sprays around the printer. The gas of flammable sprays can cause a fire or electrical shock, if it
contacts high voltage points inside the printer.
•Never touch the cutting edge of Cutter Unit (a). This could cause personal injury.
Caution
•Never insert your hand into the printer while it is printing. Moving parts inside the printer can cause injuries.
•Never place anything on the printer such as small metal objects (paper clips, staples), liquids, any type of liquid con-
tainer that contains flammable liquids (alcohol, benzene, etc.). If such objects fall into the printer, this could cause a fire
or electrical shock.
•To prevent a fire hazard or dangerous electric shock, if a foreign object falls into or a liquid spills into the printer, press
the Power button immediately to switch the printer off, unplug the printer power cable from the outlet, and then contact
your Canon dealer or support center. If you continue to use the printer, this could cause a fire or electrical shock.
Important
•Connect the interface cable correctly. To avoid damage, before connection make sure that the shape of the cable
connector matches the connection point on the printer.
•During printing, turn on the ventilation system in the room.
•We recommend ensuring ample space for installation.
Legal Notices
Legal Notices
FCC Regulations (U.S.A)
Canon Large Format Printer iPF785
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This de-
vice may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interfer-
ence that may cause undesired operation.
Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15
of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residen-
tial installation.
This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance
with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.However, there is no guarantee that in-
terference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or televi-
sion reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct
the interference by one or more of the following measures:
•
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
•
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
Legal Notices
iPF785
User's Guide
Appendix Safety Precautions
686
•
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
•
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
Use of shielded cable is required to comply with Class B limits in Subpart B of Part 15 of FCC Rules.
Do not make any changes or modifications to the equipment unless otherwise specified in the manual.
If such changes or modifications should be made, you could be required to stop operation of the equipment.
Canon U.S.A. Inc.
One Canon Park Melville, NY 11747 , U.S.A.
Tel No. 1-800-652-2666
For CA, USA Only
Included battery contains Perchlorate Material - special handling may apply.
See http://www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/ for detail.
Trademarks
•
Canon, the Canon logo, and imagePROGRAF are trademarks or registered trademarks of CANON INC.
•
Microsoft is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation.
•
Windows is a trademark or registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S. and/or other countries.
•
Windows Vista is a trademark or registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S. and/or other countries.
•
Excel, Internet Explorer and PowerPoint are registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
U.S. and/or other countries.
•
Mac, Mac OS, Bonjour, Safari and OS X are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
•
Adobe RGB, a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated, is color space proposed by Adobe Systems Incorpora-
ted.
Copyright
•
Unauthorized reproduction of this user manual in whole or part is prohibited.
Legal Notice
•
It is illegal to reproduce currency, bills, negotiable securities and other documents prohibited by law. Reproduction
of such items may be subject to criminal prosecution.
•
It is illegal to reproduce legal certificates, licenses, travel tickets, and certain public and private documents prohibi-
ted from reproduction by law. Reproduction of such items may be subject to criminal prosecution.
•
Please note that intellectual property protected by copyright may not be reproduced without the express permis-
sion of the copyright holder except for personal or household use under limited circumstances.
iPF785
Legal Notices
User's Guide
Appendix Safety Precautions
687
Manuals for this printer
Manuals for this printer
Manuals for this printer ....................................................................................................................................................... 688
About This User Manual ...................................................................................................................................................... 688
Manuals for this printer
Manuals for this printer
This printer has the following manuals.
Name Contents Medium
Setup Guide Instructions for unpacking and setting up the printer, and for in-
stalling the software and electronic manuals.
Printed Manuals
Quick Guide Contains information such as a guide to exchanging paper, Ink
Tank, and Printhead, and cautions for using the product safely.
Basic Guide Descriptions of basic printer operations. Electronic manuals
User's Guide Detailed instructions for using the printer.
Paper Reference Guide This guide describes about the types and specifications of the
available media on the printer.
Setup Guide Quick Guide Basic Guide User's Guide Paper Reference Guide
About This User Manual
About This User Manual
•
Symbols
The following symbols are used in this user manual to indicate safety information and explanations on restrictions
or precautions in use.
Warning Indicates warning items for which operating error poses a risk of death or serious injury. To ensure safe use,
always follow these warnings.
Caution Indicates caution items for which operating error poses a risk of injury. To ensure safe use, always follow these
cautions.
Important Indicates important information and restrictions that definitely are to be followed during operation. Be sure to
read this information to prevent troubles, malfunctions, or damage to equipment or property by operating errors.
Note Indicates helpful reference information and supplemental information on particular topics.
•
Button names and user interface elements
Key and button names on the control panel and user interface elements in software (such as menus and buttons)
are indicated as follows in this user manual.
Control panel buttons Example: Press the OK button.
Control panel messages Example: Head Cleaning is displayed.
Software interface items Example: Click OK.
Manuals for this printer
iPF785
User's Guide
Appendix Manuals for this printer
688
(menus and buttons) Example: Click OK.
Keyboard keys Example: Press the Tab key.
•
Cross-reference
Other pages or manuals that provide related information are indicated as follows in this user manual.
Cross-reference in the same user manual Example: see "Menu Structure." ➔P.450
Click the link to jump to the corresponding page.
Cross-reference in related manuals Example: Refer to the Paper Reference Guide.
Other cross-reference Example: See the printer driver help.
•
Figures and software screens
•
Figures in this user manual may be different from the actual appearance of the printer in some cases.
•
Screens depicted in this user manual for the printer driver or other software may be different from the actual
screens because of subsequent updates.
•
May we request
•
The information in this user manual is subject to change without notice.
•
We strive to ensure accuracy of information in this user manual, but if you notice errors or omissions, contact
support center.
iPF785
About This User Manual
User's Guide
Appendix Manuals for this printer
689
Disposal of the product
Disposal of the product
WEEE Directive
WEEE Directive
Only for European Union and EEA (Norway, Iceland and Liechtenstein)
These symbols indicate that this product is not to be disposed of with your household waste, according to the WEEE
Directive (2012/19/EU), the Battery Directive (2006/66/EC) and/or national legislation implementing those Directives.
If a chemical symbol is printed beneath the symbol shown above, in accordance with the Battery Directive, this indi-
cates that a heavy metal (Hg = Mercury, Cd = Cadmium, Pb = Lead) is present in this battery or accumulator at a con-
centration above an applicable threshold specified in the Battery Directive.
This product should be handed over to a designated collection point, e.g., on an authorized one-for-one basis when
you buy a new similar product or to an authorized collection site for recycling waste electrical and electronic equipment
(EEE) and batteries and accumulators. Improper handling of this type of waste could have a possible impact on the
environment and human health due to potentially hazardous substances that are generally associated with EEE. Your
cooperation in the correct disposal of this product will contribute to the effective usage of natural resources.
For more information about the recycling of this product, please contact your local city office, waste authority, approved
scheme or your household waste disposal service or visit ➔ www.canon-europe.com/weee , or
➔ www.canon-europe.com/battery .
Nur für Europäische Union und EWR (Norwegen, Island und Liechtenstein)
Diese Symbole weisen darauf hin, dass dieses Produkt gemäß WEEE-Richtlinie (2012/19/EU; Richtlinie über Elektro-
und Elektronik-Altgeräte), Batterien-Richtlinie (2006/66/EG) und nationalen Gesetzen zur Umsetzung dieser Richtlinien
nicht über den Hausmüll entsorgt werden darf.
Falls sich unter dem oben abgebildeten Symbol ein chemisches Symbol befindet, bedeutet dies gemäß der Batterien-
Richtlinie, dass in dieser Batterie oder diesem Akkumulator ein Schwermetall (Hg = Quecksilber, Cd = Cadmium, Pb =
Blei) in einer Konzentration vorhanden ist, die über einem in der Batterien-Richtlinie angegebenen Grenzwert liegt.
Dieses Produkt muss bei einer dafür vorgesehenen Sammelstelle abgegeben werden. Dies kann z. B. durch Rückgabe
beim Kauf eines neuen ähnlichen Produkts oder durch Abgabe bei einer autorisierten Sammelstelle für die Wiederauf-
bereitung von Elektro- und Elektronik-Altgeräten sowie Batterien und Akkumulatoren geschehen. Der unsachgemäße
Umgang mit Altgeräten kann aufgrund potenziell gefährlicher Stoffe, die generell mit Elektro- und Elektronik-Altgeräten
in Verbindung stehen, negative Auswirkungen auf die Umwelt und die menschliche Gesundheit haben.
Durch Ihre Mitarbeit bei der umweltgerechten Entsorgung dieses Produkts tragen Sie zu einer effektiven Nutzung na-
türlicher Ressourcen bei.
Um weitere Informationen über die Wiederverwertung dieses Produkts zu erhalten, wenden Sie sich an Ihre Stadtver-
waltung, den öffentlich-rechtlichen Entsorgungsträger, eine autorisierte Stelle für die Entsorgung von Elektro- und Elek-
tronik-Altgeräten oder Ihr örtliches Entsorgungsunternehmen oder besuchen Sie ➔ www.canon-europe.com/weee ,
oder ➔ www.canon-europe.com/battery .
Union Européenne, Norvège, Islande et Liechtenstein uniquement.
Ces symboles indiquent que ce produit ne doit pas être mis au rebut avec les ordures ménagères, comme le spécifient
la Directive européenne DEEE (2012/19/UE), la Directive européenne relative à l'élimination des piles et des accumu-
lateurs usagés (2006/66/CE) et les lois en vigueur dans votre pays appliquant ces directives.
Si un symbole de toxicité chimique est imprimé sous le symbole illustré ci-dessus conformément à la Directive relative
aux piles et aux accumulateurs, il indique la présence d'un métal lourd (Hg = mercure, Cd = cadmium, Pb = plomb)
dans la pile ou l'accumulateur à une concentration supérieure au seuil applicable spécifié par la Directive.
WEEE Directive
iPF785
User's Guide
Appendix Disposal of the product
690
Ce produit doit être confié au distributeur à chaque fois que vous achetez un produit neuf similaire, ou à un point de
collecte mis en place par les collectivités locales pour le recyclage des Déchets des Équipements Électriques et Élec-
troniques (DEEE). Le traitement inapproprié de ce type de déchet risque d'avoir des répercussions sur l'environnement
et la santé humaine, du fait de la présence de substances potentiellement dangereuses généralement associées aux
équipements électriques et électroniques.
Votre entière coopération dans le cadre de la mise au rebut correcte de ce produit favorisera une meilleure utilisation
des ressources naturelles.
Pour plus d'informations sur le recyclage de ce produit, contactez vos services municipaux, votre éco-organisme ou les
autorités locales compétentes, ou consultez le site ➔ www.canon-europe.com/weee , ou
➔ www.canon-europe.com/battery .
Uitsluitend bestemd voor de Europese Unie en EER (Noorwegen, IJsland en Liechtenstein)
Met deze symbolen wordt aangegeven dat dit product in overeenstemming met de AEEA-richtlijn (2012/19/EU), de
richtlijn 2006/66/EG betreffende batterijen en accu's en/of de plaatselijk geldende wetgeving waarin deze richtlijnen zijn
geïmplementeerd, niet bij het normale huisvuil mag worden weggegooid.
Indien onder het hierboven getoonde symbool een chemisch symbool gedrukt staat, geeft dit in overeenstemming met
de richtlijn betreffende batterijen en accu's aan dat deze batterij of accu een zwaar metaal bevat (Hg = kwik, Cd = cad-
mium, Pb = lood) waarvan de concentratie de toepasselijke drempelwaarde in overeenstemming met de genoemde
richtlijn overschrijdt.
Dit product dient te worden ingeleverd bij een hiervoor aangewezen inzamelpunt, bijv. door dit in te leveren bij een hier-
toe erkend verkooppunt bij aankoop van een gelijksoortig product, of bij een officiële inzameldienst voor de recycling
van elektrische en elektronische apparatuur (EEA) en batterijen en accu's. Door de potentieel gevaarlijke stoffen die
gewoonlijk gepaard gaan met EEA, kan onjuiste verwerking van dit type afval mogelijk nadelige gevolgen hebben voor
het milieu en de menselijke gezondheid. Uw medewerking bij het op juiste wijze weggooien van dit product draagt bij
tot effectief gebruik van natuurlijke hulpbronnen.
Voor verdere informatie over recycling van dit product kunt u contact opnemen met uw plaatselijke gemeente, afval-
dienst, officiële dienst voor klein chemisch afval of afvalstortplaats, of kunt u terecht op
➔ www.canon-europe.com/weee , of ➔ www.canon-europe.com/battery .
Sólo para la Unión Europea y el Área Económica Europea (Noruega, Islandia y Liechtenstein)
Estos iconos indican que este producto no debe desecharse con los residuos domésticos de acuerdo con la Directiva
sobre RAEE (2012/19/UE) y la Directiva sobre Pilas y Acumuladores (2006/66/CE) y/o la legislación nacional.
Si aparece un símbolo químico bajo este icono, de acuerdo con la Directiva sobre Pilas y Acumuladores, significa que
la pila o el acumulador contiene metales pesados (Hg = Mercurio, Cd = Cadmio, Pb = Plomo) en una concentración
superior al límite especificado en dicha directiva.
Este producto deberá entregarse en un punto de recogida designado, por ejemplo, entregándolo en el lugar de venta
al adquirir un producto nuevo similar o en un centro autorizado para la recogida de residuos de aparatos eléctricos y
electrónicos (RAEE), baterías y acumuladores. La gestión incorrecta de este tipo de residuos puede afectar al medio
ambiente y a la salud humana debido a las sustancias potencialmente nocivas que suelen contener estos aparatos.
Su cooperación en la correcta eliminación de este producto contribuirá al correcto aprovechamiento de los recursos
naturales.
Los usuarios tienen derecho a devolver pilas, acumuladores o baterías usados sin coste alguno. El precio de venta de
pilas, acumuladores y baterías incluye el coste de la gestión medioambiental de su desecho, y no es necesario mos-
trar la cuantía de dicho coste en la información y la factura suministradas a los usuarios finales.
Si desea más información sobre el reciclado de este producto, póngase en contacto con su municipio, el servicio o el
organismo encargado de la gestión de residuos domésticos o visite ➔ www.canon-europe.com/weee , o
➔ www.canon-europe.com/battery .
Solo per Unione Europea e SEE (Norvegia, Islanda e Liechtenstein)
Questi simboli indicano che il prodotto non può essere smaltito con i rifiuti domestici, ai sensi della Direttiva RAEE
(2012/19/UE), della Direttiva sulle Batterie (2006/66/CE) e/o delle leggi nazionali che attuano tali Direttive.
Se sotto il simbolo indicato sopra è riportato un simbolo chimico, in osservanza della Direttiva sulle batterie, tale simbo-
lo indica la presenza di un metallo pesante (Hg = Mercurio, Cd = Cadmio, Pb = Piombo) nella batteria o nell'accumula-
tore con un livello di concentrazione superiore a una soglia applicabile specificata nella Direttiva sulle batterie.
iPF785
WEEE Directive
User's Guide
Appendix Disposal of the product
691
Il prodotto deve essere conferito a un punto di raccolta designato, ad esempio il rivenditore in caso di acquisto di un
nuovo prodotto simile oppure un centro di raccolta autorizzato per il riciclaggio di rifiuti di apparecchiature elettriche ed
elettroniche (RAEE) nonché di batterie e accumulatori. Un trattamento improprio di questo tipo di rifiuti può avere con-
seguenze negative sull'ambiente e sulla salute umana a causa delle sostanze potenzialmente nocive solitamente con-
tenute in tali rifiuti.
La collaborazione dell'utente per il corretto smaltimento di questo prodotto contribuirà a un utilizzo efficace delle risorse
naturali ed eviterà di incorrere in sanzioni amministrative ai sensi dell'art. 255 e successivi del Decreto Legislativo n.
152/06.
Per ulteriori informazioni sul riciclaggio di questo prodotto, contattare le autorità locali, l'ente responsabile della raccolta
dei rifiuti, un rivenditore autorizzato o il servizio di raccolta dei rifiuti domestici, oppure visitare il sito
➔ www.canon-europe.com/weee , o ➔ www.canon-europe.com/battery .
Apenas para a União Europeia e AEE (Noruega, Islândia e Liechtenstein)
Estes símbolos indicam que este produto não deve ser eliminado juntamente com o seu lixo doméstico, segundo a
Diretiva REEE de 2012/19/UE, a Diretiva de Baterias (2006/66/CE) e/ou a sua legislação nacional que transponha es-
tas Diretivas.
Se houver um símbolo químico impresso como mostrado abaixo, de acordo com a Diretiva de Baterias, isto indica que
um metal pesado (Hg = Mercúrio, Cd = Cádmio, Pb = Chumbo) está presente nesta pilha ou acumulador, numa con-
centração acima de um limite aplicável especificado na Diretiva.
Este produto deve ser entregue num ponto de recolha designado, por exemplo num local autorizado de troca quando
compra um equipamento novo idêntico, ou num local de recolha autorizado para reciclar equipamento elétrico e eletró-
nico (EEE) em fim de vida, bem como pilhas e baterias. O tratamento inadequado deste tipo de resíduos pode ter um
impacto negativo no ambiente e na saúde humana, devido a substâncias potencialmente perigosas que estão asso-
ciadas com equipamentos do tipo EEE.
A sua cooperação no tratamento correto deste produto irá contribuir para a utilização mais eficaz dos recursos natur-
ais.
Para obter mais informações acerca de como reciclar este produto, por favor contacte as suas autoridades locais re-
sponsáveis pela matéria, serviço de recolha aprovado para pilhas e baterias ou serviço de recolha de resíduos sólidos
domésticos da sua municipalidade, ou visite ➔ www.canon-europe.com/weee , ou ➔ www.canon-europe.com/battery .
Gælder kun i Europæiske Union og EØS (Norge, Island og Liechtenstein)
Disse symboler betyder, at produktet ikke må bortskaffes sammen med dagrenovation i henhold til WEEE-direktivet
(2012/19/EU), batteridirektivet (2006/66/EF) og/eller den lokale lovgivning, som disse direktiver er gennemført i.
Hvis der i overensstemmelse med batteridirektivet er trykt et kemisk symbol under det symbol, der er vist ovenfor, be-
tyder det, at batteriet eller akkumulatoren indeholder tungmetaller (Hg = kviksølv, Cd = cadmium, Pb = bly) i en kon-
centration, som ligger over de grænseværdier, der er beskrevet i batteridirektivet.
Produktet skal afleveres på et godkendt indsamlingssted, f.eks. i overensstemmelse med en godkendt én-til-én-proce-
dure, når du indkøber et nyt tilsvarende produkt, eller på et godkendt indsamlingssted for elektronikaffald samt for bat-
terier og akkumulatorer. Forkert håndtering af denne type affald kan medføre negative konsekvenser for miljøet og
menneskers helbred på grund af de potentielt sundhedsskadelige stoffer, der generelt kan forefindes i elektrisk og elek-
tronisk udstyr.
Når du foretager korrekt bortskaffelse af produktet, bidrager du til effektiv brug af naturressourcerne. Kontakt din kom-
mune, den lokale affaldsmyndighed, det lokale affaldsanlæg, eller besøg ➔ www.canon-europe.com/weee , eller
➔ www.canon-europe.com/battery for at få flere oplysninger om genbrug af dette produkt.
Μόνο για την Ευρωπαϊκή Ένωση και τον ΕΟΧ (Νορβηγία, Ισλανδία και Λιχτενστάιν)
Αυτά τα σύμβολα υποδεικνύουν ότι αυτό το προϊόν δεν πρέπει να απορρίπτεται μαζί με τα οικιακά απορρίμματα,
σύμφωνα με την Οδηγία για τα Απόβλητα Ηλεκτρικού και Ηλεκτρονικού Εξοπλισμού (ΑΗΗΕ) (2012/19/ΕΕ), την Οδηγία
για τις Ηλεκτρικές Στήλες (2006/66/ΕΚ) ή/και την εθνική νομοθεσία που εφαρμόζει τις Οδηγίες εκείνες.
Εάν κάποιο χημικό σύμβολο είναι τυπωμένο κάτω από το σύμβολο που φαίνεται παραπάνω, σύμφωνα με την Οδηγία
για τις Ηλεκτρικές Στήλες, υποδηλώνει ότι κάποιο βαρύ μέταλλο (Hg = Υδράργυρος, Cd = Κάδμιο, Pb = Μόλυβδος)
υπάρχει στην μπαταρία ή τον συσσωρευτή σε συγκέντρωση μεγαλύτερη από το ισχύον επίπεδο που καθορίζεται στην
Οδηγία για τις Ηλεκτρικές Στήλες.
WEEE Directive
iPF785
User's Guide
Appendix Disposal of the product
692
Αυτό το προϊόν πρέπει να παραδίδεται σε καθορισμένο σημείο συλλογής, π.χ. σε μια εξουσιοδοτημένη βάση
ανταλλαγής όταν αγοράζετε ένα νέο παρόμοιο προϊόν ή σε μια εξουσιοδοτημένη θέση συλλογής για την ανακύκλωση
των αποβλήτων ηλεκτρικού και ηλεκτρονικού εξοπλισμού (ΗΗE) και των ηλεκτρικών στηλών και συσσωρευτών. Ο
ακατάλληλος χειρισμός αυτού του τύπου αποβλήτων μπορεί να έχει αρνητικό αντίκτυπο στο περιβάλλον και την υγεία
του ανθρώπου, λόγω δυνητικά επικίνδυνων ουσιών που γενικά συνδέονται με τον ΗΗΕ.
Η συνεργασία σας για τη σωστή απόρριψη αυτού του προϊόντος θα συμβάλει στην αποτελεσματική χρήση των
φυσικών πόρων.
Για περισσότερες πληροφορίες σχετικά με ανακύκλωση αυτού του προϊόντος, επικοινωνήστε με το τοπικό γραφείο της
πόλης σας, την υπηρεσία απορριμμάτων, το εγκεκριμένο σχήμα ή την υπηρεσία απόρριψης οικιακών αποβλήτων ή
επισκεφθείτε τη διεύθυνση ➔ www.canon-europe.com/weee ή ➔ www.canon-europe.com/battery .
Gjelder kun den europeiske union og EØS (Norge, Island og Liechtenstein)
Disse symbolene indikerer at dette produktet ikke skal kastes sammen med husholdningsavfall, i henhold til WEEE-
direktivet (2012/19/EU), batteridirektivet (2006/66/EF) og/eller nasjonal lov som har implementert disse direktivene.
Hvis et kjemisk symbol vises under symbolet vist ovenfor, i samsvar med batteridirektivet, indikerer dette at et tungme-
tall (Hg = kvikksølv, Cd = kadmium, Pb = bly) finnes i batteriet eller akkumulatoren i en konsentrasjon over en gjel-
dende øvre grense som er spesifisert i batteridirektivet.
Produktet må leveres til et dertil egnet innsamlingspunkt, det vil si på en autorisert en-til-en-basis når en kjøper et nytt
lignende produkt, eller til et autorisert innsamlingssted for resirkulering av avfall fra elektrisk og elektronisk utstyr
(EE-utstyr) og batterier og akkumulatorer. Feil håndtering av denne typen avfall kan være miljø- og helseskadelig på
grunn av potensielt skadelige stoffer som ofte brukes i EE-utstyr.
Din innsats for korrekt avhending av produktet vil bidra til effektiv bruk av naturressurser.
Du kan få mer informasjon om resirkulering av dette produktet ved å kontakte lokale myndigheter, avfallsadministrasjo-
nen, et godkjent program eller husholdningens renovasjonsselskap, eller gå til ➔ www.canon-europe.com/weee , eller
➔ www.canon-europe.com/battery .
Vain Euroopan unionin sekä ETA:n (Norja, Islanti ja Liechtenstein) alueelle.
Nämä tunnukset osoittavat, että sähkö- ja elektroniikkalaiteromua koskeva direktiivi (SER-direktiivi, 2012/19/EU), paris-
toista ja akuista annettu direktiivi (2006/66/EY) sekä kansallinen lainsäädäntö kieltävät tuotteen hävittämisen talousjät-
teen mukana.
Jos yllä olevan symbolin alapuolelle on paristodirektiivin mukaisesti painettu kemiallisen aineen tunnus, kyseinen paris-
to tai akku sisältää raskasmetalleja (Hg = elohopea, Cd = kadmium, Pb = lyijy) enemmän kuin paristodirektiivin salli-
man määrän.
Tuote on vietävä asianmukaiseen keräyspisteeseen, esimerkiksi kodinkoneliikkeeseen uutta vastaavaa tuotetta ostet-
taessa tai viralliseen sähkö- ja elektroniikkalaiteromun tai paristojen ja akkujen keräyspisteeseen. Sähkö- ja elektroniik-
kalaiteromun virheellinen käsittely voi vahingoittaa ympäristöä ja ihmisten terveyttä, koska laitteet saattavat sisältää
ympäristölle ja terveydelle haitallisia aineita. Tuotteen asianmukainen hävittäminen säästää myös luonnonvaroja.
Jos haluat lisätietoja tämän tuotteen kierrätyksestä, ota yhteys kunnan jätehuoltoviranomaisiin tai käyttämääsi jätehuol-
toyhtiöön tai käy osoitteessa ➔ www.canon-europe.com/weee , tai ➔ www.canon-europe.com/battery .
Endast för Europeiska unionen och EES (Norge, Island och Liechtenstein)
De här symbolerna visar att produkten inte får sorteras och slängas som hushållsavfall enligt WEEE-direktivet
(2012/19/EU), batteridirektivet (2006/66/EG) och/eller nationell lagstiftning som implementerar dessa direktiv.
Om en kemisk symbol förekommer under ovanstående symbol innebär detta enligt Batteridirektivet att en tungmetall
(Hg = Kvicksilver, Cd = Kadmium, Pb = Bly) förekommer i batteriet eller ackumulatorn med en koncentration som över-
stiger tillämplig gräns som anges i Batteridirektivet.
Produkten ska lämnas in på en avsedd insamlingsplats, t.ex. på en återvinningsstation auktoriserad att hantera elek-
trisk och elektronisk utrustning (EE-utrustning) samt batterier och ackumulatorer eller hos handlare som är auktoriser-
ade att byta in varor då nya, motsvarande köps (en mot en). Olämplig hantering av avfall av den här typen kan ha
negativ inverkan på miljön och människors hälsa på grund av de potentiellt farliga ämnen som kan återfinnas i elektrisk
och elektronisk utrustning.
Din medverkan till en korrekt avfallshantering av produkten bidrar till effektiv användning av naturresurserna.
Om du vill ha mer information om var du kan lämna in den här produkten, kontakta ditt lokala kommunkontor, berörd
myndighet eller företag för avfallshantering eller se ➔ www.canon-europe.com/weee , eller
➔ www.canon-europe.com/battery .
iPF785
WEEE Directive
User's Guide
Appendix Disposal of the product
693
Pouze Evropská unie a EHP (Norsko, Island a Lichtenštejnsko)
Tento symbol znamená, že podle směrnice OEEZ (2012/19/EU), směrnice o bateriích (2006/66/ES) a/nebo podle vni-
trostátních právních prováděcích předpisů k těmto směrnicím nemá být tento výrobek likvidován s odpadem z domác-
ností.
Je-li v souladu s požadavky směrnice o bateriích vytištěna pod výše uvedeným symbolem chemická značka, udává, že
tato baterie nebo akumulátor obsahuje těžké kovy (Hg = rtuť, Cd = kadmium, Pb = olovo) v koncentraci vyšší, než je
příslušná hodnota předepsaná směrnicí.
Tento výrobek má být vrácen do určeného sběrného místa, např. v rámci autorizovaného systému odběru jednoho výr-
obku za jeden nově prodaný podobný výrobek, nebo do autorizovaného sběrného místa pro recyklaci odpadních elek-
trických a elektronických zařízení (OEEZ), baterií a akumulátorů. Nevhodné nakládání s tímto druhem odpadu by moh-
lo mít negativní dopad na životní prostředí a lidské zdraví, protože elektrická a elektronická zařízení zpravidla obsahují
potenciálně nebezpečné látky. Vaše spolupráce na správné likvidaci tohoto výrobku napomůže efektivnímu využívání
přírodních zdrojů.
Chcete-li získat podrobné informace týkající se recyklace tohoto výrobku, obraťte se prosím na místní úřad, orgán pro
nakládání s odpady, schválený systém nakládání s odpady či společnost zajišťující likvidaci domovního odpadu, nebo
navštivte webové stránky ➔ www.canon-europe.com/weee nebo ➔ www.canon-europe.com/battery .
Csak az Európai Unió és az EGT (Norvégia, Izland és Liechtenstein) országaiban
Ezek a szimbólumok azt jelzik, hogy a termék hulladékkezelése a háztartási hulladéktól különválasztva, az elektromos
és elektronikus berendezések hulladékairól (WEEE) szóló (2012/19/EU) irányelvnek és az elemekről és akkumulátor-
okról, valamint a hulladék elemekről és akkumulátorokról szóló (2006/66/EK) irányelvnek megfelelően és/vagy ezen
irányelveknek megfelelő helyi előírások szerint történik.
Amennyiben a fent feltüntetett szimbólum alatt egy vegyjel is szerepel, az elemekről és akkumulátorokról szóló irá-
nyelvben foglaltak értelmében ez azt jelzi, hogy az elem vagy az akkumulátor az irányelvben meghatározott határérté-
knél nagyobb mennyiségben tartalmaz nehézfémet (Hg = higany, Cd = kadmium, Pb = ólom).
E terméket az arra kijelölt gyűjtőhelyre kell juttatni – pl. hasonló termék vásárlásakor a régi becserélésére vonatkozó
hivatalos program keretében, vagy az elektromos és elektronikus berendezések (EEE) hulladékainak gyűjtésére, vala-
mint a hulladék elemek és hulladék akkumulátorok gyűjtésére kijelölt hivatalos gyűjtőhelyre. Az ilyen jellegű hulladékok
nem előírásszerű kezelése az elektromos és elektronikus berendezésekhez (EEE) általánosan kapcsolható potenciáli-
san veszélyes anyagok révén hatással lehet a környezetre és az egészségre.
E termék megfelelő leselejtezésével Ön is hozzájárul a természeti források hatékony használatához.
A termék újrahasznosítását illetően informálódjon a helyi polgármesteri hivatalnál, a helyi közterület-fenntartó vállalat-
nál, a hivatalos hulladéklerakó telephelyen vagy a háztartási hulladék begyűjtését végző szolgáltatónál, illetve látogas-
son el a ➔ www.canon-europe.com/weee , vagy ➔ www.canon-europe.com/battery internetes oldalra.
Tylko dla krajów Unii Europejskiej oraz EOG (Norwegia, Islandia i Liechtenstein)
Te symbole oznaczają, że produktu nie należy wyrzucać razem z odpadami gospodarstwa domowego, zgodnie z dyr-
ektywą WEEE w sprawie zużytego sprzętu elektrycznego i elektronicznego (2012/19/UE) lub dyrektywą w sprawie ba-
terii (2006/66/WE) bądź przepisami krajowymi wdrażającymi te dyrektywy.
Jeśli pod powyższym symbolem znajduje się symbol chemiczny, zgodnie z dyrektywą w sprawie baterii oznacza to, że
bateria lub akumulator zawiera metal ciężki (Hg = rtęć, Cd = kadm, Pb = ołów) w stężeniu przekraczającym odpowiedni
poziom określony w dyrektywie w sprawie baterii.
Użytkownicy baterii i akumulatorów mają obowiązek korzystać z dostępnego programu zwrotu, recyklingu i utylizacji
baterii oraz akumulatorów.
Niewłaściwe postępowanie z tego typu odpadami może mieć wpływ na środowisko i zdrowie ludzi ze względu na sub-
stancje potencjalnie niebezpieczne, związane ze zużytym sprzętem elektrycznym i elektronicznym.
Państwa współpraca w zakresie właściwej utylizacji tego produktu przyczyni się do efektywnego wykorzystania zaso-
bów naturalnych.
W celu uzyskania informacji o sposobie recyklingu tego produktu prosimy o kontakt z właściwym urzędem miejskim lub
zakładem gospodarki komunalnej bądź zapraszamy na stronę ➔ www.canon-europe.com/weee , lub
➔ www.canon-europe.com/battery .
WEEE Directive
iPF785
User's Guide
Appendix Disposal of the product
694
Platí len pre štáty Európskej únie a EHP (Nórsko, Island a Lichtenštajnsko)
Tieto symboly označujú, že podľa Smernice o odpade z elektrických a elektronických zariadení (OEEZ) 2012/19/EÚ,
Smernice o batériách (2006/66/ES) a podľa platnej legislatívy Slovenskej republiky sa tento produkt nesmie likvidovať
spolu s komunálnym odpadom.
Ak je chemická značka vytlačená pod vyššie uvedeným symbolom, znamená to, že táto batéria alebo akumulátor ob-
sahuje ťažký kov (Hg = ortuť, Cd = kadmium, Pb = olovo) v koncentrácii vyššej, ako je príslušná povolená hodnota
stanovená v Smernici o batériách.
Produkt je potrebné odovzdať do určenej zberne, napr. prostredníctvom výmeny za kúpu nového podobného produktu,
alebo na autorizované zberné miesto, ktoré spracúva odpad z elektrických a elektronických zariadení (EEZ), batérií a
akumulátorov. Nesprávna manipulácia s takýmto typom odpadu môže mať negatívny vplyv na životné prostredie a
ľudské zdravie, pretože elektrické a elektronické zariadenia obsahujú potenciálne nebezpečné látky.
Spoluprácou na správnej likvidácii tohto produktu prispejete k účinnému využívaniu prírodných zdrojov.
Ďalšie informácie o recyklácii tohto produktu získate od miestneho úradu, úradu životného prostredia, zo schváleného
plánu OEEZ alebo od spoločnosti, ktorá zaisťuje likvidáciu komunálneho odpadu. Viac informácií nájdete aj na webovej
stránke: ➔ www.canon-europe.com/weee , alebo ➔ www.canon-europe.com/battery .
Üksnes Euroopa Liit ja EMP (Norra, Island ja Liechtenstein)
Antud sümbolid viitavad sellele, et vastavalt elektri- ja elektroonikaseadmete jäätmeid käsitlevale direktiivile (2012/19/
EL), patareisid ja akusid ning patarei- ja akujäätmeid käsitlevale direktiivile (2006/66/EÜ) ja/või nimetatud direktiive ra-
kendavatele riiklikele õigusaktidele ei või seda toodet koos olmejäätmetega ära visata.
Kui keemiline sümbol on trükitud eespool toodud sümboli alla, siis tähendab see, et antud patareis või akus leiduva
raskemetalli (Hg = elavhõbe, Cd = kaadmium, Pb = plii) kontsentratsioonitase on kõrgem kui patareisid ja akusid ning
patarei- ja akujäätmeid käsitlevas direktiivis sätestatud piirmäär.
Antud tootest tekkinud jäätmed tuleb anda vastavasse kogumispunkti, nt müügipunkti, mis on volitatud üks ühe vastu
vahetama, kui ostate uue sarnase toote, või vastavasse elektri- ja lektroonikaseadmete jäätmete ning patareide ja
akude ümbertöötlemiseks mõeldud kogumispunkti. Antud liiki jäätmete vale käitlemine võib kahjustada keskkonda ja
inimeste tervist elektri- ja elektroonikajäätmetes tavaliselt leiduvate potentsiaalselt ohtlike ainete tõttu. Antud tootest
tekkinud jäätmete nõuetekohase kõrvaldamisega aitate kasutada loodusvarasid efektiivselt.
Täiendava teabe saamiseks elektri- ja elektroonikaseadmetest tekkinud jäätmete ning patarei- ja akujäätmete tagasta-
mise ja ümbertöötlemise kohta võtke ühendust kohaliku omavalitsusega, asjakohase valitsusasutusega, asjakohase
tootjavastutusorganisatsiooniga või olmejäätmete käitlejaga. Lisateavet leitate ka Interneti-leheküljelt
➔ www.canon-europe.com/weee või ➔ www.canon-europe.com/battery .
Tikai Eiropas Savienībai un EEZ (Norvēģijai, Islandei un Lihtenšteinai)
Šie simboli norāda, ka atbilstoši ES Direktīvai (2012/19/ES) par elektrisko un elektronisko iekārtu atkritumiem (EEIA),
Direktīvai (2006/66/EK) par baterijām un akumulatoriem, un akumulatoru atkritumiem, ar ko atceļ Direktīvu 91/157/
EEK, un vietējiem tiesību aktiem šo izstrādājumu nedrīkst izmest kopā ar sadzīves atkritumiem.
Ja zem iepriekš norādītā simbola ir uzdrukāts ķīmiskais simbols, saskaņā ar direktīvu par baterijām un akumulatoriem
tas nozīmē, ka šīs baterijas vai akumulatori satur smagos metālus (Hg = dzīvsudrabs, Cd = kadmijs, Pb = svins) un to
koncentrācijas līmenis pārsniedz direktīvā par baterijām un akumulatoriem minēto piemērojamo slieksni.
Šis izstrādājums ir jānodod piemērotā savākšanas vietā, piemēram, apstiprinātā veikalā, kur iegādājaties līdzīgu jaunu
produktu un atstājat veco, vai apstiprinātā vietā izlietotu elektrisko un elektronisko iekārtu un bateriju un akumulatoru
pārstrādei. Nepareiza šāda veida atkritumu apsaimniekošana var apdraudēt vidi un cilvēka veselību tādu iespējami
bīstamu vielu dēļ, kas parasti ir elektriskajās un elektroniskajās iekārtās.
Jūsu atbalsts pareizā šāda veida atkritumu apsaimniekošanā sekmēs efektīvu dabas resursu izmantošanu.
Lai saņemtu pilnīgāku informāciju par šāda veida izstrādājumu nodošanu otrreizējai pārstrādei, sazinieties ar vietējo
pašvaldību, atkritumu savākšanas atbildīgo dienestu, pilnvaroto organizāciju vai iestādi, kas veic sadzīves atkritumu
apsaimniekošanu, vai apmeklējiet tīmekļa vietni ➔ www.canon-europe.com/weee , vai
➔ www.canon-europe.com/battery .
Tik Europos Sąjungai ir EEE (Norvegijai, Islandijai ir Lichtenšteinui)
Šie simboliai reiškia, kad šio gaminio negalima išmesti į buitines atliekas, kaip reikalaujama WEEE Direktyvoje
(2012/19/ES) ir Baterijų direktyvoje (2006/66/EB) ir (ar) jūsų šalies nacionaliniuose įstatymuose, kuriais šios Direktyvos
yra įgyvendinamos.
iPF785
WEEE Directive
User's Guide
Appendix Disposal of the product
695
Jeigu cheminio ženklo simbolis yra nurodytas žemiau šio ženklo, tai reiškia, kad vadovaujantis Baterijų direktyvą, ba-
terijų ar akumuliatorių sudėtyje yra sunkiųjų metalų (Hg = gyvsidabrio, Cd = kadmio, Pb = švino), kurių koncentracija
viršija Baterijų direktyvoje nurodytas leistinas ribas.
Šį gaminį reikia pristatyti į specialųjį surinkimo punktą, pavyzdžiui, mainais, kai jūs perkate naują panašų gaminį, arba į
specialiąją surinkimo vietą, kurioje perdirbamos elektrinės ir elektroninės įrangos atliekos bei naudotos baterijos ir aku-
muliatoriai. Dėl netinkamo šio tipo atliekų tvarkymo gali nukentėti aplinka ir iškilti grėsmė žmogaus sveikatai dėl galimai
kenksmingų medžiagų, iš esmės susijusių su elektrine ir elektronine įranga.
Bendradarbiaudami ir teisingai utilizuodami šiuos gaminius, jūs padėsite efektyviai naudoti gamtinius išteklius.
Daugiau informacijos apie gaminio perdirbimą jums gali suteikti vietinis biuras, atliekų tvarkymo bendrovė, sertifikuoti
organai ar buitinių atliekų surinkimo įmonės. Taip pat siūloma apsilankyti interneto svetainėje
➔ www.canon-europe.com/weee , arba ➔ www.canon-europe.com/battery .
Samo za Evropsko unijo in EGP (Norveška, Islandija in Lihtenštajn)
Ti simboli pomenijo, da tega izdelka skladno z Direktivo OEEO (2012/19/EU), Direktivo 2006/66/ES in/ali nacionalno
zakonodajo, ki uvaja ti direktivi, ne smete odlagati z nesortiranimi gospodinjskimi odpadki.
Če je pod zgoraj prikazanim simbolom natisnjen kemijski simbol, to v skladu z Direktivo pomeni, da je v tej bateriji ali
akumulatorju prisotna težka kovina (Hg = živo srebro, Cd = kadmij, Pb = svinec), in sicer v koncentraciji, ki je nad rele-
vantno mejno vrednostjo, določeno v Direktivi.
Ta izdelek je potrebno odnesti na izbrano zbirno mesto, t. j. pooblaščeno trgovino, kjer ob nakupu novega (podobnega)
izdelka vrnete starega, ali na pooblaščeno zbirno mesto za ponovno uporabo odpadne električne in elektronske op-
reme (EEO) ter baterij in akumulatorjev. Neustrezno ravnanje s to vrsto odpadkov lahko negativno vpliva na okolje in
človeško zdravje zaradi potencialno nevarnih snovi, ki so pogosto povezane z EEO.
Vaše sodelovanje pri pravilnem odlaganju tega izdelka predstavlja pomemben prispevek k smotrni izrabi naravnih vi-
rov.
Za več informacij o ponovni uporabi tega izdelka se obrnite na lokalen mestni urad, pristojno službo za odpadke, pre-
dstavnika pooblaščenega programa za obdelavo odpadkov ali na lokalno komunalo. Lahko pa tudi obiščete našo splet-
no stran ➔ www.canon-europe.com/weee , ali ➔ www.canon-europe.com/battery .
Само за Европейския съюз и ЕИП (Норвегия, Исландия и Лихтенщайн)
Тези символи показват, че този продукт не трябва да се изхвърля заедно с битовите отпадъци съгласно
Директивата за ИУЕЕО (2012/19/ЕC), Директивата за батерии (2006/66/ЕО) и/или Вашето национално
законодателство, прилагащо тези Директиви.
Ако под показания горе символ е отпечатан символ за химически елемент, съгласно разпоредбите на
Директивата за батерии, този втори символ означава наличието на тежък метал (Hg = живак, Cd = кадмий, Pb =
олово) в батерията или акумулатора в концентрация над указаната граница за съответния елемент в
Директивата.
Този продукт трябва да бъде предаден в предназначен за целта пункт за събиране, например на база размяна,
когато купувате нов подобен продукт, или в одобрен събирателен пункт за рециклиране на излязло от употреба
електрическо и електронно оборудване (ИУЕЕО), батерии и акумулатори. Неправилното третиране на този тип
отпадъци може да доведе до евентуални отрицателни последствия за околната среда и човешкото здраве
поради потенциално опасните вещества, които обикновено са свързани с ЕЕО.
В същото време Вашето съдействие за правилното изхвърляне на този продукт ще допринесе за ефективното
използване на природните ресурси.
За повече информация относно това къде можете да предадете за рециклиране на този продукт, моля свържете
се с Вашите местни власти, с органа, отговорен за отпадъците, с одобрената система за ИУЕЕО или с Вашата
местна служба за битови отпадъци, или посетете ➔ www.canon-europe.com/weee , или
➔ www.canon-europe.com/battery .
Doar pentru Uniunea Europeană şi EEA (Norvegia, Islanda şi Liechtenstein)
Aceste simboluri indică faptul că acest produs nu trebuie aruncat împreună cu deşeurile menajere, în conformitate cu
Directiva DEEE (2012/19/UE), Directiva referitoare la baterii (2006/66/CE) şi/sau legile dvs. naţionale ce implemen-
tează aceste Directive.
Dacă un simbol chimic este imprimat sub simbolul de mai sus, în conformitate cu Directiva referitoare la baterii, acest
simbol indică prezenţa în baterie sau acumulator a unui metal greu (Hg = Mercur, Cd = Cadmiu, Pb = Plumb) într-o
concentraţie mai mare decât pragul admis specificat în Directiva referitoare la baterii.
WEEE Directive
iPF785
User's Guide
Appendix Disposal of the product
696
Acest produs trebuie înmânat punctului de colectare adecvat, ex: printr-un schimb autorizat unu la unu atunci când
cumpăraţi un produs nou similar sau la un loc de colectare autorizat pentru reciclarea reziduurilor de echipament elec-
tric şi electronic (EEE) şi baterii şi acumulatori. Administrarea neadecvată a acestui tip de deşeuri, ar putea avea un
impact asupra mediului şi asupra sănătăţii umane datorită substanţelor cu potenţial de risc care sunt în general asoci-
ate cu EEE.
Cooperarea dvs. în direcţia reciclării corecte a acestui produs va contribui la o utilizare eficientă a resurselor naturale.
Pentru mai multe informaţii despre reciclarea acestui produs, vă rugăm să contactaţi biroul dvs. local, autorităţile re-
sponsabile cu deşeurile, schema aprobată sau serviciul dvs. responsabil cu deşeurile menajere sau vizitaţi-ne la
➔ www.canon-europe.com/weee , sau ➔ www.canon-europe.com/battery .
Samo za Europsku uniju i EEA (Norveška, Island i Lihtenštajn)
Oznaka pokazuje da se ovaj proizvod ne smije odlagati s komunalnim i ostalim vrstama otpada, u skladu s direktivom
WEEE (2012/19/EC), Direktivom o baterijama (2006/66/EC) i Pravilnikom o gospodarenju otpadnim baterijama i aku-
mulatorima te Pravilnikom o gospodarenju otpadnim električnim i elektroničkim uređajima i opremom.
Ako je ispod prethodno prikazane oznake otisnut kemijski simbol, u skladu s Direktivom o baterijama, to znači da se u
ovoj bateriji ili akumulatoru nalazi teški metal (Hg = živa, Cd = kadmij, Pb = olovo) i da je njegova koncentracija iznad
razine propisane u Direktivi o baterijama.
Ovaj bi proizvod trebalo predati ovlašenom skupljaču EE otpada ili prodavatelju koji je dužan preuzeti otpadni proizvod
po sistemu jedan za jedan, ukoliko isti odgovara vrsti te je obavljao primarne funkcije kao i isporučena EE oprema.
Otpadne baterije i akumulatori predaju se ovlaštenom skupljaču otpadnih baterija ili akumulatora ili prodavatelju bez
naknade i obveze kupnje za krajnjeg korisnika. Neodgovarajuće rukovanje ovom vrstom otpada može utjecati na okoliš
i ljudsko zdravlje zbog potencijalno opasnih supstanci koje se najčešće nalaze na takvim mjestima.
Vaša suradnja u pravilnom zbrinjavanju ovog proizvoda pridonijet će djelotvornom iskorištavanju prirodnih resursa. Do-
datne informacije o recikliranju ovog proizvoda zatražite od svog lokalnog gradskog ureda, službe za zbrinjavanje otpa-
da, odobrenog programa ili komunalne službe za uklanjanje otpada ili pak na stranicama
➔ www.canon-europe.com/weee ili ➔ www.canon-europe.com/battery .
Només per a la Unió Europea i a l’Espai Econòmic Europeu (Noruega, Islàndia i Liechtenstein)
Aquests símbols indican que aquest producte no s’ha de llençar amb les escombraries de la llar, d’acord amb la RAEE
(2012/19/UE), la Directiva relativa a piles i acumuladors (2006/66/CE) i la legislació nacional que implementi aquestes
directives.
Si al costat d’aquest símbol hi apareix imprès un símbol químic, segons especifica la Directiva relativa a piles i acumu-
ladors, significa que la bateria o l’acumulador conté un metall pesant (Hg = mercuri, Cd = cadmi, Pb = plom) en una
concentració superior al límit aplicable especificat en la Directiva.
Aquest producte s’hauria de lliurar en un dels punts de recollida designats, com per exemple, intercanviant un per un
en comprar un producte similar o lliurant-lo en un lloc de recollida autoritzat per al reciclatge de residus d’aparells elèc-
trics i electrònics (RAEE) i piles i acumuladors. La manipulació inadequada d’aquest tipus de residus podria tenir un
impacte negatiu en l’entorn i en la salut humana, a causa de les substàncies potencialment perilloses que normalment
estan associades a l'RAEE.
La vostra cooperació a l’hora de rebutjar correctament aquest producte contribuirà a la utilització efectiva dels recursos
naturals.
Els usuaris tenen dret a retornar les bateries o els acumuladors usats sense cap càrrec. El preu de venda de les bater-
ies i els acumuladors inclou el cost de la gestió ambiental dels residus i no es necessari mostrar l’import d’aquest cost
en aquest fullet o en la factura que es lliuri a l’usuari final.
Per a més informació sobre el reciclatge d’aquest producte, contacteu amb l’oficina municipal, les autoritats encarre-
gades dels residus, el pla de residus homologat o el servei de recollida d’escombraries domèstiques de la vostra locali-
tat o visiteu ➔ www.canon-europe.com/weee , o ➔ www.canon-europe.com/battery .
Korisnici u Srbiji
Ovaj simbol označava da ovaj proizvod ne sme da se odlaže sa ostalim kućnim otpadom, u skladu sa WEEE Direkti-
vom (2012/19/EU), Direktivom o baterijama (2006/66/EC) i nacionalnim zakonima.
Ukoliko je ispod gore navedenog simbola odštampan hemijski simbol, u skladu sa Direktivom o baterijama, ovaj simbol
označava da su u ovoj bateriji ili akumulatoru prisutni teški metali (Hg – živa, Cd – kadmijum, Pb - olovo) u koncentraci-
jama koje premašuju prihvatljivi prag naveden u Direktivi o baterijama.
iPF785
WEEE Directive
User's Guide
Appendix Disposal of the product
697
Ovaj proizvod treba predati određenom centru za prikupljanje, npr. po principu „jedan-za-jedan“ kada kupujete sličan
novi proizvod, ili ovlašćenom centru za prikupljanje za reciklažu istrošene električne i elektronske opreme (EEE), bater-
ija i akumulatora. Nepravilno rukovanje ovom vrstom otpada može imati negativne posledice po životnu sredinu i ljud-
sko zdravlje usled potencijalno opasnih materijala koji se uglavnom vezuju za EEE.
Vaša saradnja na ispravnom odlaganju ovog proizvoda će doprineti efikasnom korišćenju prirodnih resursa.
Više informacija o tome kako možete da reciklirate ovaj proizvod potražite od lokalnih gradskih vlasti, komunalne
službe, odobrenog plana reciklaže ili servisa za odlaganje kućnog otpada, ili posetite stranicu
➔ www.canon-europe.com/weee , ili ➔ www.canon-europe.com/battery .
WEEE Directive
iPF785
User's Guide
Appendix Disposal of the product
698
Index
A
Accounting
................................................... 515, 516, 520, 524
Additional Settings Pane
..................................................... 295
Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver
........................... 51
Adjusting the Vacuum Strength
........................................ 585
B
Bonjour Network
................................................................... 502
C
CAD
....................................................................... 43, 47, 48, 49
Checking Ink Tank Levels
.................................................... 594
Cleaning
......................................................................... 598, 612
Clearing a Jammed Sheet
................................................... 630
Color Adjustment
....................................... 172, 176, 307, 328
Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy
...............................
225, 226, 344, 345
Conguring the IP Address
............................... 494, 495, 506
D
Deleting Saved Jobs
............................................................ 542
Device Settings Sheet
......................................................... 189
Device Setup Utility
.............................................................. 506
Drying Time
........................................................................... 385
F
Favorites Sheet
..................................................................... 186
Free Layout
......................................... 202, 203, 204, 319, 321
G
GARO Wxxxx (x represents a number)
............................ 676
H
Hardware error
..................................................................... 676
I
Interface
................................................................................. 471
L
Large-Format Printing
........................................................... 97
Layout Sheet
......................................................................... 182
Loading and Printing on Sheets
.......................................... 21
M
Main Pane
.............................................................................. 283
Main Sheet
............................................................................. 167
Maintenance Cartridge
.............................. 606, 610, 611, 672
Menu Operations
......................................................... 446, 447
Menu Structure
..................................................................... 450
N
Navigate
................................................................................. 443
Nozzle
..................................................................................... 597
O
Orientation
................................................... 148, 149, 254, 266
Output Method
..................................................................... 180
Oversize
.................................................................................... 76
P
Page Setup Pane
.................................................................. 294
Page Setup Sheet
................................................................. 178
Paper Feed Slot
............................................................ 633, 635
Personal Box
................................................................. 553, 556
PosterArtist
............................................................................. 41
Power
.................................. 255, 257, 259, 262, 263, 264, 266
Preparing to Transfer the Printer
...................................... 616
Print Job Log
......................................................................... 525
Printer Driver Settings
................................................ 158, 278
Printer Hard Disk Operations
............................................. 483
Printhead
..................................... 572, 597, 598, 599, 639, 670
Printing Posters in Sections
............................................... 123
Printing Saved Jobs
............................................................. 538
Printing Vertical or Horizontal Banners
............... 97, 98, 101
Printing at Actual Size
.............................................. 80, 81, 83
Printing on Rolls
...................................................................... 19
R
Removing the Roll
........................................................ 380, 383
Replacing Ink Tanks
............................................................. 588
Roll Holder
..................................................................... 372, 487
S
Saving Print Jobs
......................................................... 531, 551
Size Options
........................................................................... 181
Special Settings
............................................................ 185, 275
Specications
........................................................................ 680
Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver
.............. 32, 160, 279
Status Print
............................................................................ 468
Strange Sound
...................................................................... 652
Support Sheet
....................................................................... 188
U
Using the Output Stacker
................................................... 400
Utility Sheet
........................................................................... 187
W
Watermark
.................................................................... 145, 146
When to Replace Ink Tanks
................................................ 594
699
iPF785 User's Guide
ENG
© CANON INC. 2014